Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
2015-11-24 - AGENDA REPORTS - PURCHASE OF COMMUTER COACHES (2)
Agenda Item: 10 CITY OF SANTA CLARITA Q) AGENDA REPORT CONSENT CALENDAR i, CITY MANAGER APPROVAL: 1 j=� DATE: November 24, 2015 SUBJECT: PURCHASE AND DELIVERY OF FIVE 45 -FOOT COMPRESSED NATURAL GAS POWERED COMMUTER COACHES FROM MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES DEPARTMENT: Administrative Services PRESENTER: Adrian Aguilar RECOMMENDED ACTION City Council: 1. Authorize the City Manager or designee to execute the purchase of five 45 -foot CNG - powered buses from Motor Coach Industries, in an amount not to exceed $3,845,000. 2. Authorize the City Manager or designee to execute all documents subject to City Attorney approval. BACKGROUND Santa Clarita Transit has a fleet replacement program that meets the Federal Transit Administration's 12 -year life cycle for transit vehicles. Five of the City's commuter buses have reached their useful life and are scheduled to be replaced over the next 18 months. With approval of this action by Council, the City will be able to replace a number of aging buses that have reached the end of their useful life and take advantage of recent developments in engine technology to begin the process of replacing older, less -efficient diesel -powered commuter buses with clean -burning CNG vehicles. In January 2015, the City Council approved a contract to procure the City's initial five CNG -powered commuter buses, which are scheduled for delivery by December 2015. If approved, the total number of CNG -powered commuter buses would rise to ten. The five new commuter buses would be delivered in 12-18 months. The City's local transit fleet is composed of all CNG buses, and this award would allow the City to continue its diesel -replacement efforts. The requested buses would allow the City to further Page 1 PacketPg. 53 reduce emissions and improve fuel economy. The recommended action would also bring the City more in line with the desired capital replacement schedule, in which approximately 1/12 of the transit fleet is scheduled for replacement every fiscal year. In late 2013, the City partnered with Victor Valley Transit Authority, Antelope Valley Transit Authority, Monterey -Salinas Transit, and Ventura County Transportation Commission to issue a Request for Proposal for the manufacture and delivery of commuter buses. Under this joint agency procurement, all five partners collaborated to establish design specifications and listed quantities of the vehicles needed over the next five years. Bidders were asked to submit fixed -unit pricing for each vehicle and provide line -item pricing for optional features such as bicycle racks, onboard camera systems, and fareboxes. An evaluation panel consisting of one representative from each participating agency reviewed and ranked the proposals submitted. Based on the recommendation of the evaluation panel, Victor Valley Transit Authority, acting as the lead agency, negotiated and awarded a five-year contract to Motor Coach Industries for the manufacture and delivery of commuter buses. Based on the City of Santa Clarita specifications and adjustments reflecting changes to the Producer Price Index, the total cost per bus is $760,468.14. By partnering with other transit agencies, the City was able to share the costs associated with this extensive process with multiple agencies. It also allows the partner agencies to negotiate pricing based on a much larger procurement, further reducing costs. As an added measure, staff conducted a price analysis that confirmed the proposed pricing is within industry standards and the most advantageous to the City. The joint procurement approach to acquisition is prevalent within the transit industry and accepted by the Federal Transit Administration. ALTERNATIVE ACTION 1. Direct staff to reissue a Request for Proposal for the procurement of five 45 -foot CNG -powered commuter buses. 2. Other action as determined by the City Council. FISCAL IMPACT There is no fiscal impact to the General Fund with this procurement. The City has programmed Federal transit grant funds to cover 80% of the total contractual cost of the buses, and the remaining 20% required local match will come from Prop C Municipal Operator Service Improvement Program (MOSIP) funds. Adequate funds are available in the Transit Automotive Equipment Account 12400-5201.003. ATTACHMENTS Victor Valley -Santa Clarita RFP 2013-04 (available in the City Clerk's Reading File) RFP 2013-04 Technical Proposal for Commuter Coaches - Motor Coach Industries, Inc. (available in the City Clerk's Reading File) November 2015 MCI Pricing (available in the City Clerk's Reading File) Page 2 Packet Pg. 54 VICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY o a, 9wWel 91tell 1 JOINT AGENCY PROCUREMENT FOR OVER THE ROAD COMMUTER COACHES IEll :l4:•10K•1►11A►1161 SECTION 1 - REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS SECTION 2 - GENERAL CONTRACTURAL PROVISIONS SECTION 3 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS SECTION 4 - WARRANTY PROVISIONS SECTION 5 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 1 — Page 2 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Table of Contents 1.0 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS.......................................................................................................................................16 1.1 SOLICITATION DATA....................................................................................................................................................16 1.1.1.1 PROCURING AGENCY AND CONTRACTING OFFICER......................................................................................16 1.1.1.2 SCOPE.............................................................................................................................................................16 1.1.1.3 SOLICITATION SCHEDULE............................................................................................................................... 16 1.1.2 PRE-PROPOSAL........................................................................................................................................................17 1.1.2.1 PRE -PROPOSAL CONFERENCE........................................................................................................................17 1.1.2.2 PROPOSER COMMUNICATIONS AND REQUESTS...........................................................................................17 1.1.2.3 ADDENDUM TO RFP....................................................................................................................................... 18 1.1.3 INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS............................................................................................................................... 18 1.1.3.1 DUE DATE....................................................................................................................................................... 18 1.1.3.2 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL & PRODUCT EVALUATION......................................................................................... 18 1.1.3.3 PROPOSER QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT.....................................................................................................20 1.1.3.4 DELIVERY........................................................................................................................................................21 1.1.3.5 PRICE PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................21 1.1.3.6 PROPOSAL PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................22 1.1.3.7 DBE CERTIFICATION........................................................................................................................................23 1.1.3.8 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS....................................................................................... 24 1.1.4 PROPOSAL EVALUATION, NEGOTIATION AND SELECTION..................................................................................... 24 1.1.4.1 OPENING OF PROPOSALS............................................................................................................................... 24 1.1.4.2 EVALUATION TEAM........................................................................................................................................24 1.1.4.3 PROPOSAL SELECTION PROCESS....................................................................................................................24 1.1.4.3.1 QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS..............................................................................................................25 1.1.4.3.2 PROPOSAL EVALUATION CRITERIA AND SCORING................................................................................... 26 1.1.4.3.3 EVALUATION PROCEDURES......................................................................................................................27 1.1.4.3.4 EVALUATIONS OF COMPETITIVE PROPOSALS........................................................................................... 28 1.1.4.3.4.1 QUALIFICATION OF RESPONSIBLE PROPOSERS................................................................................. 28 1.1.4.3.4.2 DETAILED EVALUATION OF PROPOSALS AND DETERMINATION OF COMPETITIVE RANGE .............. 28 1.1.4.3.4.3 PROPOSALS NOT WITHIN THE COMPETITIVE RANGE........................................................................ 29 1.1.4.3.4.4 DISCUSSIONS WITH PROPOSERS IN THE COMPETITIVE RANGE ........................................................ 29 1.1.4.4 CONFIDENTIALITY OF PROPOSALS .................................................................................................................30 1.1.5 RESPONSE TO PROPOSAL........................................................................................................................................30 1.1.5.1 ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION OF PROPOSALS......................................................................................................30 1.1.5.2 SINGLE PROPOSAL RESPONSE........................................................................................................................31 1.1.5.3 CANCELLATION OF PROCUREMENT...............................................................................................................31 1.1.5.4 AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS.................................................................................................................................31 1.1.5.5 PROTESTS.......................................................................................................................................................32 1.1.5.5.1 SCOPE OF PROTEST PROCEDURE..............................................................................................................32 1.1.5.5.2 EFFECT OF PROTEST ON CONTRACT AWARD OR PROPOSAL OPENING....................................................32 1.1.5.5.3 RELEASE OF PROTEST INFORMATION.......................................................................................................32 1.1.5.5.4 MAINTENANCE OF PROTEST RECORDS.....................................................................................................32 1.1.5.5.5 INCLUSION OF PROTEST PROCEDURES IN SOLICITATIONS.......................................................................32 1.1.5.5.6 WHO MAY FILE A PROTEST.......................................................................................................................33 1.1.5.5.7 TIME FOR FILING A PROTEST.................................................................................................................... 33 Section 1 — Page 3 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.5.8 FORM FOR FILING A PROTEST...................................................................................................................33 1.1.5.5.13 BOARD OF DIRECTORS' DECISION...........................................................................................................35 1.1.5.5.9 VVTA'S PRELIMINARY RESPONSE TOA PROTEST......................................................................................33 35 1.1.5.5.10 FURTHER INVESTIGATION OF THE PROTEST...........................................................................................34 1.1.5.10 REQUIRED FORMS..........................................................................................................................................37 1.1.5.5.11 VVTA EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR OR DESIGNEE'S RECOMMENDATION........................................................34 50 1.1.5.5.12 SUBMITTAL OF PROTEST TO THE BOARD............................................................................................... 34 1.1.5.5.13 BOARD OF DIRECTORS' DECISION...........................................................................................................35 1.1.5.15 1.1.5.5.14 FTA PROTEST APPEAL PROCEDURE......................................................................................................... 35 1.1.5.5.15 WAIVER OF CHANGES.............................................................................................................................35 REQUEST FOR PRE -OFFER CHANGE OR APPROVED EQUALS......................................................................... 1.1.5.10 REQUIRED FORMS..........................................................................................................................................37 1.1.5.17 1.1.5.11 DEBARRED PROPOSERS CERTIFICATION........................................................................................................38 50 1.1.5.12 FTA CERTIFICATION OF RESTRICTIONS ON LOBBYING...................................................................................40 WARRANTY FORM..........................................................................................................................................51 1.1.5.13 DBE APPROVAL CERTIFICATION.....................................................................................................................41 1.1.5.23 1.1.5.14 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH COACHES TESTING REQUIREMENT.....................................................42 2.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, MODIFIC4TIONSAND DISPUTES........................................................................................ 1.1.5.15 FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS............................................................................................43 14 1.1.5.16 REQUEST FOR PRE -OFFER CHANGE OR APPROVED EQUALS......................................................................... 44 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION.................................................................................................................45 50 1.1.5.18 PROPOSER SERVICE AND PARTS SUPPORT DATA...........................................................................................46 2.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, MODIFIC4TIONSAND DISPUTES........................................................................................ 1.1.5.19 BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATION—COACHES....................................................................................................47 14 1.1.5.20 BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATION — SPAREPARTS..............................................................................................48 2.2.1.2 MATHEMATICAL ERRORS............................................................................................................................... 1.1.5.21 INTEREST AND GRATUITIES FORM................................................................................................................. 50 1.1.5.22 WARRANTY FORM..........................................................................................................................................51 2.2.2.1 CALIFORNIA ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................15 1.1.5.23 REFERENCE FORM..........................................................................................................................................52 1.1.5.24 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDUM ..........................................................................................................53 2.2.3.1 CONTRACTCHANGES.....................................................................................................................................16 1.1.5.25 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL...................................................................................................................................54 16 1.1.5.26 PRICE PROPOSAL............................................................................................................................................55 2.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, MODIFIC4TIONSAND DISPUTES........................................................................................ 1.1.5.27 OFFER COVER SHEET......................................................................................................................................56 14 1.1.5.28 PERFORMANCE BOND (ATTACHMENT NO. 1)................................................................................................57 2.2.1.2 MATHEMATICAL ERRORS............................................................................................................................... 1.1.5.29 COACH PROPOSAL PRICE SHEET (EXHIBIT NO. 1).......................................................................................58 15 1.1.5.30 COACH PROPOSAL VEHICLE OPTION ITEMS PRICE SHEET (EXHIBIT NO. 2) ....................................................59 2.2.2.1 CALIFORNIA ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................15 2.0 DRAFT CONTRACT .................................................................................. 5 2.1 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................13 2.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, MODIFIC4TIONSAND DISPUTES........................................................................................ 14 2.2.1 CONTRACT AWARD................................................................................................................................................. 14 2.2.1.1 NONCOLLUSION............................................................................................................................................. 14 2.2.1.2 MATHEMATICAL ERRORS............................................................................................................................... 15 2.2.1.3 ACCCEPTANCE OF A PROPOSAL..................................................................................................................... 15 2.2.2 ACCESSIBLE REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................................15 2.2.2.1 CALIFORNIA ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................15 2.2.2.2 ACCESSIBLE EQUIPMENT COST INFORMATION.............................................................................................15 2.2.3 MODIFICATIONS TO CONTRACT.............................................................................................................................. 16 2.2.3.1 CONTRACTCHANGES.....................................................................................................................................16 2.2.3.2 WRITTEN CHANGE ORDERS............................................................................................................................ 16 2.2.3.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE......................................................................................................................... 16 2.2.3.4 PRICE ADJUSTMENT FOR REGULATORY CHANGES........................................................................................ 16 2.2.4 PARTIES AND CHANGES IN PARTIES........................................................................................................................ 17 Section 1 — Page 4 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.2.4.1 PARTIES AND AUTHORITY..............................................................................................................................17 2.2.4.2 SUCCESSION................................................................................................................................................... 17 2.2.4.3 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING..........................................................................................................17 2.2.4.4 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS...............................................................................................................17 2.2.5 CONTENT OF SPECIFICATION AND OFFER...............................................................................................................18 2.2.5.1 OMISSIONS..................................................................................................................................................... 18 2.2.5.2 DEVIATIONS....................................................................................................................................................18 2.2.5.3 PROBLEMS, FAULTS, DEFECTS AND NONCONFORMITY................................................................................. 18 2.2.6 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT................................................................................................................................. 18 2.2.6.1 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE................................................................................................................18 2.2.6.2 TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT.........................................................................................................................22 2.2.6.3 STOP WORK ORDER........................................................................................................................................ 24 2.2.6.4 COSTS OF STOP WORK ORDER....................................................................................................................... 25 2.2.7 DISPUTES.................................................................................................................................................................25 2.2.8 LITIGATION..............................................................................................................................................................27 2.2.8.1 REQUIREMENT FOR OUT-OF-STATE CONTRACTORS...................................................................................... 27 2.2.9 NONWAIVER...........................................................................................................................................................27 2.2.10 NONEXCLUSIVE RIGHTS AND REMEDIES............................................................................................................27 2.2.11 GRATUITIES, CONTINGENT FEES AND CONFLICTS OF INTERESTS.......................................................................28 2.2.11.1 COVENANT AGAINST GRATUITIES..................................................................................................................28 2.2.11.2 COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES.......................................................................................................28 2.2.11.3 CONFLICT OF INTEREST..................................................................................................................................29 2.3 DELIVERYAND TITLE ....................................................................................................................................................30 2.3.1 DELIVERIES..............................................................................................................................................................30 2.3.1.1 COACH DELIVERY LOCATION..........................................................................................................................30 2.3.1.2 DELIVERY SCHEDULE......................................................................................................................................31 2.3.1.3 PRE -DELIVERY TESTS AND INSPECTIONS........................................................................................................31 2.3.1.4 ACCEPTANCE OF COACH................................................................................................................................ 31 2.3.2 REPAIRS AFTER NONACCEPTANCE..........................................................................................................................31 2.3.2.1 REPAIRS BY CONTRACTOR..............................................................................................................................32 2.3.2.2 REPAIRS BY PROCURING AGENCY..................................................................................................................32 2.3.3 UNAVOIDABLE DELAYS............................................................................................................................................32 2.3.3.1 CONTRACTOR'S DELAY...................................................................................................................................32 2.3.3.2 NOTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR DELAY........................................................................................................33 2.3.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES...........................................................................................................................................34 2.3.5 TITLE........................................................................................................................................................................34 2.4 PAYMENT.....................................................................................................................................................................35 2.5 SER VI CES AND PARTS..................................................................................................................................................35 2.5.1 TRAINING................................................................................................................................................................35 2.5.2 ENGINEER/SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES..................................................................................................................35 2.5.3 DOCUMENTS...........................................................................................................................................................36 2.5.4 PARTS AVAILABILITY GUARANTEE...........................................................................................................................36 2.5.5 INTERCHANGEABILITY............................................................................................................................................. 37 2.6 AUDITAND INSPECTION OFRECORDS ........................................................................................................................37 Section 1 — Page 5 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.7 RISK..............................................................................................................................................................................38 2.7.1 RISK OF LOSS...........................................................................................................................................................38 2.7.2 INSURANCE............................................................................................................................................................. 39 2.7.3 PERFORMANCE BOND.............................................................................................................................................40 2.7.4 PRODUCTION OF DOCUMENTS...............................................................................................................................41 2.7.5 INDEMNIFICATION.................................................................................................................................................. 42 2.7.6 MATERIAL/ACCESSORIES RESPONSIBILITY..............................................................................................................42 2.7.7 SURVIVABILITY........................................................................................................................................................43 2.8 FTA POLICIES FOR ALL TIERS........................................................................................................................................43 2.8.1 NO OBLIGATION BY THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT..................................................................................................43 2.8.2 PROGRAM FRAUD AND FALSE OR FRAUDULENT STATEMENTS AND RELATED ACTIONS: ...................................... 43 2.8.3 INCORPORATION OF FTA TERMS............................................................................................................................44 2.8.4 CHANGES IN FEDERAL LAWS AND REGULATIONS...................................................................................................44 2.8.5 CARGO PREFERENCE...............................................................................................................................................44 2.8.6 ENERGY CONSERVATION........................................................................................................................................44 2.8.7 RECYCLED PRODUCTS.............................................................................................................................................44 2.8.8 CIVIL RIGHTS...........................................................................................................................................................45 2.8.8.1 NONDISCRIMINATION....................................................................................................................................45 2.8.8.2 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY............................................................................................................45 2.8.8.3 DISCRIMINATORY SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................46 2.8.9 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE...............................................................................................................46 2.8.9.1 POLICY............................................................................................................................................................46 2.8.9.2 DBE OBLIGATION............................................................................................................................................46 2.8.9.3 REMEDY..........................................................................................................................................................46 2.8.10 PATENT INFRINGEMENT.....................................................................................................................................46 2.8.11 PROPRIETARY RIGHTS/RIGHTS IN DATA.............................................................................................................47 2.8.12 INTEREST OF MEMBERS OF, OR DELEGATES TO, CONGRESS............................................................................. 47 2.8.13 PROHIBITED INTEREST........................................................................................................................................47 2.8.14 ACCESS REQUIREMENTS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES...............................................................................47 2.8.15 FLYAMERICA......................................................................................................................................................48 2.9 FTA POLICIES FOR SELECTED CONTRACTS................................................................................................................... 48 2.9.1 CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT......................................................................................48 2.9.2 CLEAN AIR...............................................................................................................................................................49 2.9.3 CLEAN WATER.........................................................................................................................................................50 2.9.4 COMPLIANCE WITH ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS..............................................................................................50 2.9.5 LOBBYING CERTIFICATION AND DISCLOSURE STATEMENTS...................................................................................50 2.10 FTA POLICIES FOR PRIME CONTRACTOR..................................................................................................................... 50 2.10.1 BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................................................50 2.10.2 PRE -AWARD REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................................51 2.10.3 POST -DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................52 2.10.4 COACH TESTING..................................................................................................................................................53 2.11 STATE GRANT CONTRACT PROVISIONS....................................................................................................................... 54 2.11.1 ACCOUNTING RECORDS.....................................................................................................................................54 2.11.2 ALLOWABLE COSTS.............................................................................................................................................54 2.11.3 FAIR EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES (NONDISCRIMINATION)...................................................................................54 Section 1 — Page 6 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.11.4 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE RECORDS...........................................................................................55 3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISION5............................................................................................................................1 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S IN -PLANT QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS...............................................................................4 3.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION.....................................................................................................................4 3.1.1.1 ORGANIZATION ESTABLISHMENT....................................................................................................................4 3.1.1.2 CONTROL..........................................................................................................................................................4 3.1.1.3 AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILTY.....................................................................................................................4 3.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................4 3.1.2.1 MINIMUM FUNCTIONS....................................................................................................................................4 3.1.2.2 WORK INSTRUCTIONS......................................................................................................................................4 3.1.2.3 RECORDS MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................................4 3.1.2.4 CORRECTIVE ACTION........................................................................................................................................4 3.1.3 STANDARDS AND FACILITIES.....................................................................................................................................5 3.1.3.1 BASIC STANDARDS AND FACILITIES..................................................................................................................5 3.1.3.2 CONFIGURATION CONTROL.............................................................................................................................5 3.1.3.3 MEASURING AND TESTING FACILITIES.............................................................................................................5 3.1.3.4 PRODUCTION TOOLING AS MEDIAOF INSPECTION.........................................................................................5 3.1.3.5 EQUIPMENT USE BY RESIDENT INSPECTORS....................................................................................................5 3.1.4 CONTROL OF PURCHASES.........................................................................................................................................5 3.1.4.1 MAINTENANCE OF CONTROL...........................................................................................................................5 3.1.4.2 SUPPLIER CONTROL..........................................................................................................................................5 3.1.4.3 PURCHASING DATA..........................................................................................................................................6 3.1.5 MANUFACTURING CONTROL....................................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.1 CONTROLLED CONDITIONS..............................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.2 COMPLETED ITEMS..........................................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.3 NONCONFORMING MATERIALS.......................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.4 STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES................................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.4.1 INSPECTION STATUS...................................................................................................................................6 3.1.6 INSPECTION SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................6 3.1.6.1 INSPECTION SYSTEM SCOPE.............................................................................................................................6 3.1.6.2 INSPECTION PERSONNEL..................................................................................................................................6 3.1.6.3 INSPECTION RECORDS......................................................................................................................................7 3.1.6.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AUDITS..........................................................................................................................7 3.2 SUPPLIERSAND SUBCONTRACTORS ..............................................................................................................................7 3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTS.......................................................................................................................................................9 3.4.1 RESPONSIBILITY.........................................................................................................................................................9 3.4.2 PRE -DELIVERY TESTS.................................................................................................................................................9 Section 1 — Page 7 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3.4.2.1 INSPECTION —VISUAL AND MEASURED......................................................................................................... 10 3.4.2.2 TOTAL COACH OPERATION............................................................................................................................ 10 3.5 POST -DELIVERY TESTS.................................................................................................................................................10 3.5.1 VISUAL INSPECTION................................................................................................................................................ 10 3.5.2 COACH OPERATION................................................................................................................................................. 10 4.0 WARRANTY PROVISIONS...........................................................................................................................................1 4.3 DISPUTES.......................................................................................................................................................................7 4.4 WARRANTYAFTER REPLACEMENT REPAIRS.................................................................................................................. 7 5.0 TECHNICAL AND PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................1 TS -1 SCOPE..........................................................................................................................................................................10 TS -2 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................10 TS -3 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS....................................................................................................................................... 16 TS -4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................................ 16 Section 1 — Page 8 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -5 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................................... 17 TS -5.1 WEIGHT..............................................................................................................................................................17 TS -5.2 CAPACITY............................................................................................................................................................17 TS -5.3 SERVICE LIFE....................................................................................................................................................... 17 TS -5.4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION....................................................................................................................... 17 TS -5.5 INTERCHANGEABILITY........................................................................................................................................ 18 TS -5.6 TRAINING............................................................................................................................................................18 TS -5.6.1 TECHNICAL/SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES........................................................................................................ 18 TS -5.7 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT............................................................................................................................... 19 TS -5.8 NOISE..................................................................................................................................................................19 TS -5.8.1 INTERIOR NOISE............................................................................................................................................. 19 TS -5.8.2 EXTERIOR NOISE............................................................................................................................................. 19 TS -5.9 FIRE SAFETY........................................................................................................................................................19 TS -5.9.1 MATERIALS.....................................................................................................................................................19 TS -5.10 FIRE SUPPRESSION.............................................................................................................................................. 20 TS -5.11 RESPECT FOR THE ENVIRONMENT.....................................................................................................................20 TS -6 PHYSICAL SIZE.............................................................................................................................................................. 20 TS -6.1 COACH LENGTH.................................................................................................................................................. 21 TS -6.2 COACH WIDTH....................................................................................................................................................21 TS -6.3 COACH HEIGHT................................................................................................................................................... 21 TS -6.4.1 STEP HEIGHT...................................................................................................................................................21 TS -6.5 UNDERBODY CLEARANCE...................................................................................................................................21 TS -6.6 RAMP CLEARANCES............................................................................................................................................21 TS -6.7 GROUND CLEARANCE.........................................................................................................................................22 TS -6.8 FLOOR HEIGHT.................................................................................................................................................... 23 TS -6.9 INTERIOR HEADROOM........................................................................................................................................ 23 TS -7 POWER REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................................................23 TS7.1 TOP SPEED.......................................................................................................................................................... 23 TS 7.2 GRADABILITY.......................................................................................................................................................24 TS 7.2.1 ACCELERATION...............................................................................................................................................24 TS7.2.2 NON-HYBRID..................................................................................................................................................24 TS 7.3 OPERATING RANGE............................................................................................................................................ 24 TS7.3.2 CNG................................................................................................................................................................25 TS -8 FUEL ECONOMY (DESIGN OPERATING PROFILE) .........................................................................................................25 TS -9 ENGINE........................................................................................................................................................................25 TS9.1 ENGINE (CNG) .....................................................................................................................................................26 TS -10 COOLINGSYSTEMS..................................................................................................................................................26 TS 10.1 ENGINE COOLING............................................................................................................................................... 26 TS10.1.1 COOLANT........................................................................................................................................................ 26 TS 10.1.2 DRIVE DESIGN................................................................................................................................................. 27 TS10. 1.3 MOUNTING.................................................................................................................................................... 27 TS 10.2 TRANSMISSION COOLING...................................................................................................................................27 TS -11 TRANSMISSION (CONVENTIONAL POWERTRAIN)................................................................................................... 27 TS -12 RETARDER (CNG)..................................................................................................................................................... 28 Section 1 — Page 9 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -13 ENGINE BRAKE (DIESEL) ..........................................................................................................................................28 TS -14 MOUNTING.............................................................................................................................................................28 TS14.1 SERVICE............................................................................................................................................................... 28 TS -15 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS..............................................................................................................................................29 TS15.1 FLUID LINES.........................................................................................................................................................29 TS 15.2 FITTINGS AND CLAMPS....................................................................................................................................... 29 TS 15.3 CHARGE AIR PIPING............................................................................................................................................30 TS -16 RADIATOR............................................................................................................................................................... 30 TS -17 OIL AND HYDRAULICLINES.....................................................................................................................................30 TS -18 FUEL........................................................................................................................................................................ 30 TS18.1 FUEL LINES..........................................................................................................................................................30 TS 18.1.1 FUEL LINES, DIESEL.........................................................................................................................................31 TS 18.1.2 FUEL LINES, CNG.............................................................................................................................................31 TS 18.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION.............................................................................................................................32 TS 18.2.1 DIESEL FUEL TANK(S)......................................................................................................................................32 TS 18.2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION, CNG............................................................................................................... 32 TS -19 EMISSIONS AND EXHAUST......................................................................................................................................34 TS 19.1 EXHAUST EMISSIONS..........................................................................................................................................34 TS 19.2 EXHAUST SYSTEM............................................................................................................................................... 35 TS 19.3 EXHAUST AFTER -TREATMENT ............................................................................................................................35 TS 19.4 PARTICULATE AFTER -TREATMENT (DIESEL)........................................................................................................35 TS -20 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................. 35 TS20.1 DESIGN................................................................................................................................................................35 TS -21 ALTOONA TESTING ..................................................................................................................................................35 TS 21.1 STRUCTURAL VALIDATION..................................................................................................................................36 TS -22 DISTORTION............................................................................................................................................................36 TS -23 RESONANCEAND VIBRATION.................................................................................................................................36 TS 23.1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT BULKHEADS................................................................................................................36 TS 23.2 CRASHWORTHINESS...........................................................................................................................................36 TS -24 CORROSION.............................................................................................................................................................37 TS -25 TOWING..................................................................................................................................................................37 TS -26 JACKING...................................................................................................................................................................37 TS -27 HOISTING................................................................................................................................................................38 TS -28 FLOOR..................................................................................................................................................................... 38 TS28.1 DESIGN................................................................................................................................................................38 TS 28.2 CONSTRUCTION..................................................................................................................................................38 TS -29 PLATFORMS.............................................................................................................................................................39 TS 29.1 DRIVER'S AREA....................................................................................................................................................39 TS29.2 FAREBOX............................................................................................................................................................. 39 Section 1 — Page 10 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -30 WHEEL HOUSING....................................................................................................................................................39 TS 30.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION.............................................................................................................................39 TS -31 SUSPENSION............................................................................................................................................................39 TS 31.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................................39 TS31.2 ALIGNMENT........................................................................................................................................................39 TS 31.3 SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS......................................................................................................................40 TS 31.3.1 SUSPENSION TRAVEL......................................................................................................................................40 TS31.3.2 DAMPING.......................................................................................................................................................40 TS 31.3.3 LUBRICATION.................................................................................................................................................40 TS31.3.4 KNEELING.......................................................................................................................................................40 TS -32 WHEELS AND TIRES.................................................................................................................................................41 TS32.1 WHEELS...............................................................................................................................................................41 TS32.2 TIRES...................................................................................................................................................................41 TS -33 STEERING................................................................................................................................................................41 TS 33.1 STEERING AND TAG AXLES..................................................................................................................................41 TS 33.2 STEERING WHEEL................................................................................................................................................42 TS 33.2.1 TURNING EFFORT...........................................................................................................................................42 TS 33.2.2 STEERING WHEEL, GENERAL ..........................................................................................................................42 TS 33.2.3 STEERING COLUMN TILT................................................................................................................................42 TS 33.2.4 STEERING WHEEL TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................42 TS -34 DRIVEAXLE..............................................................................................................................................................43 TS 34.1 NON -DRIVE AXLE................................................................................................................................................ 43 TS -35 TAGAXLES (COMMUTER COACH) ...........................................................................................................................43 TS -36 TURNINGRADIUS....................................................................................................................................................44 TS -37 BRAKES....................................................................................................................................................................45 TS 37.1 SERVICE BRAKE...................................................................................................................................................45 TS37.2 ACTUATION......................................................................................................................................................... 45 TS 37.3 FRICTION MATERIAL...........................................................................................................................................45 TS 37.4 HUBS AND DISCS.................................................................................................................................................45 TS 37.5 PARKING/EMERGENCY BRAKE............................................................................................................................45 TS -38 PNEUMATICSYSTEM...............................................................................................................................................46 TS38.1 GENERAL.............................................................................................................................................................46 TS 38.2 AIR COMPRESSOR...............................................................................................................................................46 TS 38.3 AIR LINES AND FITTINGS.....................................................................................................................................46 TS 38.4 AIR RESERVOIRS..................................................................................................................................................47 TS 38.5 AIR SYSTEM DRYER.............................................................................................................................................47 TS -39 OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................................................................47 TS 39.1 MODULAR DESIGN..............................................................................................................................................48 TS -40 ENVIRONMENTAL AND MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................48 TS 40.1 HARDWARE MOUNTING.....................................................................................................................................49 TS -41 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................... 49 TS41.1 BATTERIES...........................................................................................................................................................49 Section 1 — Page 11 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 41. 1.1 LOW -VOLTAGE BATTERIES (24 V)...................................................................................................................49 TS 41.1.2 BATTERY CABLES............................................................................................................................................ 50 TS 41.1.3 JUMP START................................................................................................................................................... 50 TS 41.1.4 BATTERY COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................................................50 TS 41.1.5 AUXILIARY ELECTRONIC POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................................52 TS 41.1.6 MASTER BATTERY SWITCH.............................................................................................................................53 TS 41.1.7 LOW -VOLTAGE GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION.........................................................................................53 TS 41.1.8 CIRCUIT PROTECTION.....................................................................................................................................53 TS41.2 GROUNDS...........................................................................................................................................................54 TS 41.3 LOW VOLTAGE/LOW CURRENT WIRING AND TERMINALS.................................................................................54 TS 41.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.................................................................................................................................55 TS 41.5 ELECTRICAL COMPARTMENTS............................................................................................................................55 TS -42 GENERAL ELECTRONIC REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................56 TS 42.1 WIRING AND TERMINALS...................................................................................................................................56 TS 42. 1.1 DISCRETE 1/0 (INPUTS/OUTPUTS)..................................................................................................................56 TS 42.1.2 SHIELDING......................................................................................................................................................56 TS 42.1.3 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................................................................56 TS 42.1.4 RADIO FREQUENCY(RF).................................................................................................................................57 TS42.1.5 AUDIO.............................................................................................................................................................57 TS -43 MULTIPLEXING........................................................................................................................................................57 TS43.1 GENERAL.............................................................................................................................................................57 TS 43.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION..................................................................................................................................57 43.2.1 1/0 SIGNALS ........................................................................................................................................................ 57 TS -44 DATA COMMUNICATIONS....................................................................................................................................... 58 TS44.1 GENERAL.............................................................................................................................................................58 TS 44.2 DRIVETRAIN LEVEL..............................................................................................................................................58 TS 44.2.1 DIAGNOSTICS, FAULT DETECTION AND DATA ACCESS...................................................................................58 TS 44.2.2 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE) ..................................................................................................................58 TS 44.3 MULTIPLEX LEVEL...............................................................................................................................................59 TS 44.3.1 DATA ACCESS.................................................................................................................................................. 59 TS 44.3.2 DIAGNOSTICS AND FAULT DETECTION...........................................................................................................59 TS 44.3.3 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE) ..................................................................................................................59 TS 44.4 ELECTRONIC NOISE CONTROL............................................................................................................................ 60 TS -45 DRIVER'SAREACONTROLS......................................................................................................................................60 TS45.1 GENERAL.............................................................................................................................................................60 TS45.2 GLARE................................................................................................................................................................. 60 TS 45.3 VISORS/SUNSHADES..........................................................................................................................................60 TS 45.4 DRIVER'S CONTROLS...........................................................................................................................................61 TS 45.5 NORMAL COACH OPERATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS.................................................................61 TS 45.6 DRIVER FOOT CONTROLS....................................................................................................................................69 TS 45.6.1 PEDAL ANGLE................................................................................................................................................. 69 TS 45.6.2 PEDAL DIMENSIONS AND POSITION..............................................................................................................70 TS 45.7 DRIVER FOOT SWITCHES.....................................................................................................................................70 TS -46 DRIVER'S AMENITIES...............................................................................................................................................70 Section 1 — Page 12 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 46.1 COATHANGER....................................................................................................................................................70 TS 46.2 STORAGE BOX.....................................................................................................................................................71 TS -47 WINDSHIELD WIPERSAND WASHERS.....................................................................................................................71 TS 47.1 WINDSHIELD WIPERS..........................................................................................................................................71 TS 47.2 WINDSHIELD WASHERS......................................................................................................................................71 TS -48 DRIVER'SSEAT.........................................................................................................................................................72 TS 48.1 DIMENSIONS.......................................................................................................................................................72 TS48.2 SEAT BELT........................................................................................................................................................... 72 TS 48.3 SEAT CONTROL LOCATIONS................................................................................................................................ 73 TS 48.4 SEAT STRUCTURE AND MATERIALS....................................................................................................................73 TS48.5 PEDESTAL............................................................................................................................................................ 73 TS 48.6 SEAT OPTIONS.................................................................................................................................................... 73 TS48.7 MIRRORS.............................................................................................................................................................73 TS 48.7.1 EXTERIOR MIRRORS........................................................................................................................................73 TS 48.7.2 INTERIOR MIRRORS........................................................................................................................................ 74 TS -49 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................. 74 TS -50 WINDSHIELD...........................................................................................................................................................74 TS50.1 GLAZING..............................................................................................................................................................74 TS -51 DRIVER'S SIDE WINDOW.........................................................................................................................................75 TS -52 SIDE WINDOWS.......................................................................................................................................................75 TS 52.1 CONFIGURATION................................................................................................................................................75 TS 52.2 EMERGENCY EXIT (EGRESS) CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................76 TS52.3 MATERIALS.........................................................................................................................................................76 TS -53 CAPACITYAND PERFORMANCE............................................................................................................................... 76 TS -54 CONTROLS AND TEMPERATURE UNIFORMITY........................................................................................................ 77 TS 54.1 AUXILIARY HEATER.............................................................................................................................................78 TS -55 AIR FLOW................................................................................................................................................................ 78 TS 55.1 PASSENGER AREA...............................................................................................................................................78 TS 55.2 DRIVER'S AREA....................................................................................................................................................78 TS 55.3 CONTROLS FOR THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (CCS)..................................................................................... 79 TS 55.4 DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................79 TS 55.5 DRIVER'S COOLING.............................................................................................................................................79 TS -56 AIR FILTRATION....................................................................................................................................................... 80 TS -57 ROOF VENTILATORS................................................................................................................................................80 TS -58 MAINTAINABILITY...................................................................................................................................................80 TS -59 ENTRANCE/EXIT AREA HEATING.............................................................................................................................80 TS -60 FLOOR -LEVEL HEATING........................................................................................................................................... 80 TS -61 DESIGN....................................................................................................................................................................81 TS61.1 MATERIALS.........................................................................................................................................................81 TS -62 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY................................................................................................................................................ 81 Section 1 — Page 13 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -63 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT.................................................................................................................................... 81 TS 63.1 SIDE BODY PANELS............................................................................................................................................. 81 TS -64 RAIN GUTTERS.........................................................................................................................................................82 TS -65 LICENSE PLATE PROVISIONS.................................................................................................................................... 82 TS -66 FENDER SKIRTS........................................................................................................................................................82 TS 66.1 SPLASH APRONS................................................................................................................................................. 82 TS -67 SERVICE COMPARTMENTS AND ACCESS DOORS..................................................................................................... 83 TS 67.1 ACCESS DOORS................................................................................................................................................... 83 TS 67.2 ACCESS DOOR LATCH/LOCKS.............................................................................................................................. 83 TS -68 BUMPERS................................................................................................................................................................83 TS68.1 LOCATION........................................................................................................................................................... 83 TS 68.2 FRONT BUMPER..................................................................................................................................................83 TS 68.3 REAR BUMPER....................................................................................................................................................84 TS 68.4 BUMPER MATERIAL............................................................................................................................................84 TS -69 FINISH AND COLOR.................................................................................................................................................84 TS 69.1 APPEARANCE......................................................................................................................................................84 TS -70 DECALS, NUMBERING AND SIGNING......................................................................................................................85 TS 70.1 PASSENGER INFORMATION................................................................................................................................85 TS -71 EXTERIOR LIGHTING................................................................................................................................................ 86 TS 71.1 BACKUP LIGHT/ALARM.......................................................................................................................................86 TS 71.2 DOORWAY LIGHTING..........................................................................................................................................86 TS 71.3 TURN SIGNALS....................................................................................................................................................86 TS 71.4 HEADLIGHTS.......................................................................................................................................................86 TS 71.5 BRAKE LIGHTS.....................................................................................................................................................87 TS 71.6 SERVICE AREA LIGHTING (INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR).........................................................................................87 TS -72 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................................................................... 87 TS -73 INTERIOR PANELS.................................................................................................................................................... 88 TS -73.1 DRIVER'S BARRIER...................................................................................................................................................88 TS 73.2 MODESTY PANELS...............................................................................................................................................88 TS73.3 FRONT END.........................................................................................................................................................88 TS 73.4 REAR BULKHEAD.................................................................................................................................................89 TS 73.5 HEADLINING.......................................................................................................................................................89 TS73.6 FASTENING.........................................................................................................................................................89 TS73.7 INSULATION........................................................................................................................................................ 89 TS 73.8 FLOOR COVERING...............................................................................................................................................90 TS 73.9 INTERIOR LIGHTING............................................................................................................................................90 TS 73.10 PASSENGER.................................................................................................................................................... 90 TS 73.11 DRIVER'S AREA...............................................................................................................................................91 TS 73.12 SEATING AREAS..............................................................................................................................................91 TS 73.13 VESTIBULES/DOORS.......................................................................................................................................91 TS 73.14 STEP LIGHTING...............................................................................................................................................91 TS 73.15 FAREBOX LIGHTING ........................................................................................................................................92 Section 1 - Page 14 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -74 FARE COLLECTION................................................................................................................................................... 92 TS -75 INTERIOR ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS.................................................................................................................. 92 TS 75.1 FLOOR PANELS....................................................................................................................................................92 TS -76 PASSENGER SEATING..............................................................................................................................................93 TS 76.1 ARRANGEMENTS AND SEAT STYLE.....................................................................................................................93 TS 76.2 HIP -TO -KNEE ROOM...........................................................................................................................................93 TS76.3 FOOT ROOM....................................................................................................................................................... 93 TS76.4 AISLES................................................................................................................................................................. 93 TS 76.5 STRUCTURE AND DESIGN...................................................................................................................................93 TS 76.6 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS...................................................................................................................... 94 TS 76.7.1 FRONT DOOR..................................................................................................................................................94 TS 76.8 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION.....................................................................................................................94 TS 76.9 DOOR GLAZING...................................................................................................................................................94 TS76.9.1 ACTUATOR...................................................................................................................................................... 95 TS 76.10 EMERGENCY OPERATION...............................................................................................................................95 TS 76.11 DOOR CONTROL.............................................................................................................................................95 TS 76.12 DOOR CONTROLLER....................................................................................................................................... 95 TS -77 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS.................................................................................................................................................. 95 TS -77.1 LIFT.....................................................................................................................................................................95 TS -77.2 LIFT DOOR...........................................................................................................................................................96 TS77.3 LIFTWIDTH.........................................................................................................................................................97 TS -77.4 LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................................97 TS -77.5 SECUREMENT SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................97 TS -77.6 ROOF VENTILATION/ESCAPE HATCHES..............................................................................................................98 TS -78 DESTINATION SIGNS................................................................................................................................................98 TS -78.2 SIGNAL CHIME COMMUTER COACH...................................................................................................................98 TS -79 COMMUNICATIONS................................................................................................................................................98 TS -79.1 CAMERA SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM.......................................................................................................................98 TS -79.2 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM...................................................................................................................................99 TS -79.3 SPEAKERS............................................................................................................................................................99 TS -79.4 AUTOMATIC PASSENGER COUNTER (APC)......................................................................................................... 99 TS -79.5 RADIO HANDSET AND CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................................... 99 TS -79.6 DRIVER'S SPEAKER..............................................................................................................................................99 TS -79.7 HANDSET............................................................................................................................................................99 TS -79.8 DRIVER DISPLAY UNIT(DDU)..............................................................................................................................99 TS -79.9 EMERGENCY ALARM...........................................................................................................................................99 Section 1 — Page 15 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.0 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS 1.1 SOLICITATION DATA 1.1.1.1 PROCURING AGENCY AND CONTRACTING OFFICER Request For Proposals (RFP) No VVTA-2013-04. Date of RFP: August 29, 2013 Lead Procuring Agency: VICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY Address of Lead Procuring Agency: 17150 SMOKETREE ST., HESPERIA, CA 92345-8305 Contracting Officer: Kevin Kane, Executive Director Telephone No: (760) 948-4021, Ext 118 FAX No: (760) 948-1380 Email Address: c/o RZIRGES@WTA.org 1.1.1.2 SCOPE Lead Procuring Agency VICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY requests proposals for the manufacture and delivery of the five year rolling stock material requirements, for itself and those of Antelope Valley Transit Authority, Santa Clarita Transit, Monterey -Salinas Transit and Ventura County Transportation Commission, as a Joint Agency Procurement. Proposals are being sought for the following requirements: (1) Ten, (10) 45 -foot CNG powered Commuter Coaches, and Options for up to (18) CNG commuter coaches along with the standard maintenance information manuals & supporting data. (2) Fifteen (15) Low Emission Diesel commuter coaches, as well as options for up to (35) additional 45 -foot Low Emission Diesel commuter coaches along with the standard maintenance information manuals & supporting data. (3) Initial and recurrent training sessions for Coach Operators and Maintainers consistent with base and options orders. (4) Procurement of these commuter coach vehicles shall be conducted pursuant to the terms and conditions set forth in the following text of the solicitation. (5) The engagement shall be a Firm -Fixed Price Contract that is to be awarded pursuant to the guidelines set forth in FTA Circular 4220.1 E, and in accordance with the provisions of Section 20216 and 20217 of the California Public Contract Code. 1.1.1.3 SOLICITATION SCHEDULE The following is the solicitation schedule for Proposers: Section 1 — Page 16 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Pre -proposal Conference There will be none Proposer Communications, Approved Equals, 2:00 p.m. PST, Monday, Sept 23, 2013 Deviations, and Requests Due Responds to Proposer Communications, Approved 2:00 p.m. PST, Monday, October 7, 2013 Equals, Deviations, and Requests Proposals Due Date 2:00 p.m. PST. Monday, November 4, 2013 Anticipated Award Date 2:00 p.m. PST. Monday, November 25, 2013 1.1.2.1 PRE -PROPOSAL CONFERENCE There shall be no Pre -Proposal Conference for this solicitation. Proposers' questions and/or comments shall be addressed under Section 1.1.2.2., Proposer Communications and Requests. Prospective Proposers are reminded that valid changes to the RFP shall be by written addendum only. 1.1.2.2 PROPOSER COMMUNICATIONS AND REQUESTS All correspondence, communication and/or contact in regard to any aspect of this solicitation is authorized only with the designated Contracting Officer identified in "Lead Procuring Agency and Contracting Officer' (Section 1.1.1.1) above, or their designated representative. Proposers and their representatives shall not make any contact with or communicate with any employees of the Lead Procuring Agency, or its directors and consultants, other than the Contracting Officer in regard to any aspect of this solicitation or offers. Ex parte' communications with members of VVTA's Board of Directors or any person responsible for awarding a contract, including the Contracting Officer is prohibited under California Public Contract Code Section 20216. All communications shall be in writing and will be made public. At any time during this procurement up to the time specified in "Solicitation Schedule" (Section 1.1.1.3). Proposers may request, in writing, a clarification or interpretation of any aspect, or a change to any requirement of the RFP or any addendum to the RFP. Requests may include suggested substitutes for specified items and for any brand names. Whenever a brand name is used in this solicitation it shall mean the brand name or approved equal. Such written requests shall be made to the Contracting Officer and may be transmitted by facsimile. The Proposer making the request shall be responsible for its proper delivery to the Lead Procuring Agency per "Lead Procuring Agency and Contracting Officer" (Section 1.1.1.1) on the form provided in "Request for Pre -Offer Change or Approved Equal." The Lead Procuring Agency will not respond to oral requests. Any request for a change to any requirement of the Contract Documents must be fully supported with technical data, test results, or other pertinent information evidencing that the exception will result in a condition equal to or better than that required by the RFP, without substantial increase in cost or time requirements. Any responses to such written request shall be provided by the Lead Procuring Agency in the form of addendum only. Only written responses provided as addendum shall be official and all other forms of communication with any officer, employee or agent of the Lead Procuring Agency shall not be binding on the Lead Procuring Agency. Section 1 — Page 17 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 If it should appear to a prospective Proposer that the performance of the Work under the contract, or any of the matters relating thereto, is not sufficiently described or explained in the RFP or Contract Documents, or that any conflict or discrepancy exists between different parts thereof or with any federal, state, local or Lead Procuring Agency law, ordinance, rule, regulation, or other standard or requirement, then the Proposer shall submit a written request for clarification to the Lead Procuring Agency within the time period specified above. 1.1.2.3 ADDENDUM TO RFP The Lead Procuring Agency (Victor Valley Transit Authority (VVTA)), reserves the right to amend the RFP at any time. Any amendments to or interpretations of the RFP shall be described in written addendum. The Lead Procuring Agency shall provide copies of Addendum to all prospective Proposers officially known to have received the RFP. Prospective Proposers, or their agents, shall be responsible to collect the addendum at the address provided in "Lead Procuring Agency and Contracting Officer" (Section 1.1.1.1 above) or receive same otherwise. Notification of the addendum will also be mailed or delivered to all such prospective Proposer officially known to have received the RFP and to the address provided by each prospective Proposer. Failure of any prospective Proposer to receive the notification or addendum shall not relieve the Proposer from any obligation under its proposal as submitted or under the RFP, as clarified, interpreted or modified. All addendum issued shall become part of the RFP. Prospective Proposers shall acknowledge the receipt of each individual addendum and all prior addenda in their proposals. Failure to acknowledge in their proposals receipt of addendum may, at the Lead Procuring Agency's sole option, disqualify the proposal. If the Lead Procuring Agency determines that the addendum may require significant changes in the preparation of proposals, the deadline for submitting the proposals may be postponed by the number of days that the Lead Procuring Agency determines will allow Proposer sufficient time to revise their proposals. Any new Due Date shall be included in the addendum. 1.1.3 INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS 1.1.3.1 DUE DATE Sealed original proposals plus 3 proposal paper copies, and 6 electronic copies in MS Word (CD/ROM) must be received at the address shown in "Lead Procuring Agency and Contracting Officer" (Section 1.1.1.1) until 2:00 PM West Coast Time on Monday, November 4, 2013 for the provision of ten (10) CNG commuter coaches; (15) Low Emission Diesel commuter coaches; with component and training options, and order options for up to (18) additional GNC commuter coaches, and up to (35) Low Emission Diesel commuter coaches with component and training options. All labor, equipment, materials, and training shall be furnished in strict accordance with the delivery schedule and the Contract terms and conditions. All Proposals shall be valid for a period of 120 days. 1.1.3.2 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL & PRODUCT EVALUATION The following performance and design factors have been determined to be critical to VVTA in terms of reducing operating costs, passenger comfort and overall vehicle reliability. Section 1 — Page 18 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Proposers shall submit technical data, drawings, diagrams, and any other types of data deemed appropriate, which will aid VVTA in evaluating the proposed products technical merit, product design and overall compliance with VVTA'S specifications, as specified below: A. Vehicle Construction: Drawing or pictures showing the exterior of the vehicle, with all body panels including doors, identified as to the material used. B. Drawings or pictures showing the understructure, body framing with identification of all materials used. C. A description of the methods used to assure corrosion resistance and structural integrity over the life of the vehicle. D. Pictures or drawings which depict all exterior and interior maintenance access doors, skirt panels and openings and the method used to hold the access covers in the open and closed position. E. Drawings with dimensions showing passenger seating layout, entry and exit door areas, step heights, riser heights, floor height and accessibility areas and clearances for disabled passengers. F. Information detailing gross vehicle weight and front and rear axle load rates. G. A description of the window configuration proposed including glazing material, sash design, and procedures for replacing damaged glazing material. H. A full description including model number, load ratings and application approval certifications for both drive and steering axles. I. A full description of the braking system including piping diagrams, make/model of all the various components, number and size of brake blocks, and brake area. J. Information on the make and model of the engine and transmission proposed and the performance specifications for each unit. K. A full description of all ADA related equipment (wheelchair lifts, tie -downs, operations). L. A diagram of the proposed seating. M. A full description of type of suspension system proposed, including the number and type of air springs, shock absorbers, sway braces and other system components. N. A complete description and drawings of the fuel storage system including total fuel capacity, operating range of the vehicle, safety features, piping diagrams, type of tanks and working pressures in the system. O. A full description of other Coaches components included in contractor's proposal (e.g., fire suppression system, AC system, destination signs, seating etc.). P. Air Pollution Emission Certification and data for the engine proposed to be supplied as part of the Coaches. The engine proposed must meet all Federal, State and Local emission standards. Section 1 — Page 19 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.3.3 PROPOSER QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT Listed below are the factors which VVTA, (the Lead Procuring Agency), has determined to be critical in evaluating the manufacturer's overall qualifications and capability to perform and complete a contract in a satisfactory manner. Proposers shall submit support documentation which will aid VVTA in accessing the manufacturer's capabilities in the various areas shown below. A. Sufficient financial strength, resources and capability to finance the work to be performed and complete the contract in a satisfactory manner as evidenced by: B. Ability to submit all contract bonds required, as evidenced by a letter from a Surety confirming that the Proposer can issue each bond for the required amount. C. Ability to obtain required insurance with coverage values that meet minimum requirements as evidenced by a letter from a Surety confirming that the Proposer can obtain insurance for the required amount and types of coverage. D. Willingness of any parent company to provide the required financial guaranty evidenced by a letter of commitment signed by an officer of the parent company having the authority to execute the parent company guaranty. E. Evidence that the human and physical resources are sufficient to perform the Contract as specified and assures delivery of all equipment and spare parts shall be delivered in accordance with the Agency approved production schedule as specified in the Contract by submission of company documents or a letter certifying that Proposer has: F. Engineering management and service organizations with sufficient personnel and requisite disciplines, licenses, skills, experience, and equipment to complete the Contract as required. G. Adequate manufacturing facilities sufficient to produce and factory -test equipment pursuant to the contract delivery schedules requirements. H. A spare parts procurement and distribution system sufficient to support equipment maintenance without delays and a service organization with skills, experience and equipment sufficient to perform all warranty and on-site work. I. Evidence that Proposer is qualified in accordance with Part 3: Quality Assurance Provisions J. Evidence that the Proposer has sufficient technical publications to aid VVTA and the other procuring agencies as evidence by submittal of samples of the following: 1. Parts Books- Illustrated Parts Catalogs 2. Training Manuals for vehicle operators 3. Repair Manuals for vehicle maintainers Section 1 — Page 20 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 K. Proposer shall provide evidence of satisfactory Past Performance and integrity on contracts in making deliveries on time, and on budget, meeting specifications and warranty provisions, parts availabilities and steps Proposer took to resolve any judgments, liens, fleet defects history and warranty claims. Proposer shall provide point of contact information for client references for all public agency contracts entered into between January 02, 2008 and February 02, 2013. L. Proposer shall provide the names, addresses and phone numbers of the companies that either provide technical service and/or sell parts for the Coach models proposed by the Proposer. Those companies that can in a most timely and efficient manner, supply the participating procuring agencies, a complete inventory of parts and components for the repair and maintenance of the Coach model proposed by the Proposer shall also be identified. 1.1.3.4 DELIVERY Due to the need to replace aging equipment and/or the restrictions on timely use of the funding to be received by VVTA to fund this procurement, delivery of the Coaches as soon as possible is of extreme importance. Delivery of the last Coaches in the initial order, (base order plus any option vehicles ordered at time of contract award) shall be completed no later than the time specified in the proposal documents. The maximum points in this category will be awarded to the Proposer which quotes the shortest delivery time for the Base Order. Other competitive proposals will be scored on a proportional basis. 1.1.3.5 PRICE PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS Commuter Coach Receiving Dates Procuring Agencies TABLE 1 - (ORDER POINTS) Total 0-12 mos. 13-24 mos. 25-36 mos. 37-48 mos. 49-60 mos. Victor Valley Transit Authority (CNG) 5 1 2 2 10 Antelope Valley Transit Authority (LED) 3 9 8 20 Santa Clarita Transit (CNG) 5 5 4 4 18 Monterey -Salinas Transit (LED) 2 2 2 4 10 Ventura County Transportation Commission (LED) 10 2 4 4 20 Totals 25 10 21 22 78 Section 1 — Page 21 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Proposer shall submit the Pricing Schedules (Forms 1.1.6.26 and 1.1.6.27) with the proposal. Prices are to be quoted exclusive of California State and Local Sales Tax. Proposer shall pay all taxes which are legally enacted at the time bid is submitted, and shall secure and pay for all permits and government fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Contract. All option quantity pricing (the Procuring Agencies: VVTA, Antelope Valley Transit Authority, Santa Clarita Transit, Monterey -Salinas Transit and Ventura County Transportation Commission,) will be considered as a factor in determining the number of points awarded in the price category. Proposer shall quote in the space provided on the price sheet a fixed firm price for optional vehicles that may be purchased by the Procuring Agencies at the specified points in time listed in Table 1. The delivery timeline above relates to the Initial Commuter Coach Order - Notice to Proceed. 'VVTA reserves the right to accelerate receiving dates, in which case the pricing for the applicable time period shall be applied. "Any of these agencies may release their assignment options(s) in order for VVTA to assign such options to other transit agencies. Such release shall be submitted on letterhead and signed by an authorized representative from that Transportation Agency. Vehicle procurements are broken down into two categories: Coaches and Component Options. VVTA may or may not exercise its options for vehicles listed in Coaches and if exercised, may not purchase the total quantity of vehicles listed. VVTA reserves the right to accelerate the delivery of the Coaches to an earlier time period, subject to mutual agreement with definitive prices for the revised time period shall apply. Use of the total coach quantity pricing as a factor in evaluating the price category will not obligate VVTA, or any other transit agency, to purchase any of the option quantities listed. VVTA reserves the right to exercise its options for all or less than all of the quantities listed at any time up to 60 months from date of the initial Notice to Proceed. VVTA, Antelope Valley Transit Authority, Santa Clarita Transit, Monterey -Salinas Transit, Ventura County Transportation Commission, may exercise their respective, (Five Year Material Requirements), options for either of the vehicle types identified, either at the time of VVTA contract award or within the 60 month timeframe for the acquisition of agency material requirements from the date of VVTA's Base Order contract award. The assignment of such options will be implemented in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.2.4.3. 1.1.3.6 PROPOSAL PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS Proposals including all submittal documents and including price elements shall be submitted by the due date specified, in two sealed packages identified as "PROPOSAL FOR COMMUTER COACHES." PACKAGE NO. 1 - TECHNICAL PROPOSAL Section 1 — Page 22 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1. "RFP 2013-04 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL FOR COMMUTER COACHES', (CLEARLY LABELED ON THE OUTSIDE OF THE PACKAGE) 2. Letter of Transmittal 3. Technical Proposal 4. References and Non -Priced Information 5. Forms, excluding Pricing & Warranty Information 6. Any Supporting Data 7. Submitted B (Proposer's Name and Address No cost, price or financial information of any kind shall be included in Package No. 1 or in any of the proposal documents that will be included in this package. PACKAGE NO. 2 - PRICING, DELIVERY DAYS, WARRANTY 1. "RFP 2013-04 PRICE PROPOSAL FOR COMMUTER COACHES' (CLEARLY LABELED ON THE OUTSIDE OF THE PACKAGE) 2. Price Proposal for Coaches (use Exhibit 1 -Price Sheet provided), including delivery days 3. Price Proposal for Component Options (use Exhibit 2 -Price Sheet provided) 4. Warranty Information 5. Submitted B Proposer's Name and Address Proposal packages shall be addressed and delivered to the address specified in "Lead Procuring Agency and Contracting Officer" (Section 1.1.1.1) 1.1.3.7 DBE CERTIFICATION Pursuant to Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 26, a Proposer, as a condition of being authorized to respond to this solicitation, must certify by completing "DBE APPROVAL CERTIFICATION" (Section 1.1.6.9), that it has on file with the Federal Transportation Administration (FTA) an approved or not disapproved annual Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) subcontracting participation goal. Section 1 — Page 23 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.3.8 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS A modification of a proposal already received will be accepted by the Lead Procuring Agency only if the modification is received prior to the Proposal Due Date, or is specifically requested by the Lead Procuring Agency. All modifications shall be made in writing and executed and submitted in the same form and manner as the original proposal. A Proposer may withdraw a proposal already received prior to the Proposal Due Date by submitting, in the same manner as the original proposal, to the Lead Procuring Agency a written request for withdrawal executed by the Proposer's authorized representative. After the proposal Due Date, a proposal may be withdrawn only if the Lead Procuring Agency fails to award the contract within the proposal validity period prescribed in "Due Date" (Section 1.13.1) or any agreed upon extension thereof. The withdrawal of a proposal does not prejudice the right of a Proposer to submit another proposal within the time set for receipt of proposals. This provision for modification and withdrawal of proposals may not be used by a Proposer as a means to submit a late proposal and, as such, will not alter the Lead Procuring Agency's right to reject a proposal. 1.1.4 PROPOSAL EVALUATION, NEGOTIATION AND SELECTION 1.1.4.1 OPENING OF PROPOSALS Proposal will be reviewed and evaluated in accordance with the criteria and procedures described in this document. Proposers determined to be within a competitive range and that have a reasonable chance of receiving a contract may be contacted to schedule a meeting with VVTA to carry out further negotiations and discussions. VVTA reserves the right to award to a proposer without further discussions, negotiations, or it may determine that no proposer meets the needs of the Lead Procuring Agency. 1.1.4.2 EVALUATION TEAM An evaluation team will be assembled by the VVTA Executive Director or designee. The team will be made up of senior staff of VVTA, its RFP consultant, and representatives of other transit properties affected by this procurement. 1.1.4.3 PROPOSAL SELECTION PROCESS The following describes the process by which proposals will be evaluated and a selection made for a potential award. Upon receipt of the proposals, copies will be distributed to the evaluation team members, together with scoring sheets, which include the evaluation criteria, and the points assigned to each category. Section 1 — Page 24 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Each team member will review the manufacturers' submittals as required by Sections 1.1.3.2 Technical Proposals, 1.1.3.3 Manufacturers Qualifications, 1.1.3.4 Delivery and 1.1.3.5 Pricing, and in conjunction with the criteria contained in Section 1.1.4.4. All Proposals shall be evaluated and ranked for the purpose of determining the competitive range and to select a proposal determined to be the most advantageous to the procuring agency. Proposals that do not comply with the instructions contained in these Request for Proposal documents and do not include the required information shall be rejected as non-responsive and shall not be considered for the competitive range. VVTA reserves the right to waive technical defects, discrepancies and minor irregularities in an RFP and/or submitted proposal(s). VVTA reserves the right to re -seal any submitted proposal that was opened prematurely. VVTA shall determined if this event is a minor irregularity. The Contracting Officer shall be notified and shall log the event and place it in the procurement file. VVTA reserves the right to award any alternatives set forth in the solicitation documents in its sole discretion. Submitted proposals may be rejected if there is any alteration of the RFP forms, additions not called for, conditional proposals, incomplete proposals, or irregularities of any kind. VVTA reserves the right to reject any proposal not in compliance with the solicitation documents, or prescribed public contracting procedures and requirements. Written notice of rejection of all submitted proposals shall be sent to all Proposers. ALL UNSIGNED PROPOSALS SHALL BE REJECTED. Submittal of a proposal shall mean that the Proposer has accepted the VVTA Contract Documents in their entirety without exception. When the individual members of the evaluation teams have completed their evaluations, the entire team will meet to discuss and review the proposals. Once the discussions have been completed, members will have an opportunity to revise their scores independently. A final consensus meeting shall be held to confirm the most technically qualified and best value proposal submitted for award. The VVTA Contracting Officer shall serve as Chairman of the Evaluation Committee. Proposals that have been determined not to be in the competitive range and cannot be reasonably made to be within the competitive range, will be notified in writing, that they are no longer under consideration. 1.1.4.3.1 QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS The Proposers, whose proposals have been determined by the evaluation process to be in the competitive range, will be notified and scheduled to meet with VVTA for further discussions, clarifications and negotiations. Any Proposal deviations submitted by the Proposer will be discussed as part of the negotiations process. However, VVTA at its discretion may in its best interest, reject any and all such conditions, exceptions and deviations. Any proposal which fails to comply with the VVTA instructions and requirements listed in the solicitation documents shall be deemed non-responsive and their proposal shall be rejected. As part of the negotiation process, VVTA reserves the right to conduct factory visits to inspect the Proposer's facilities. VVTA shall also have the right to contact other transit properties with whom the Proposer has previously supplied buses and Coaches, and other relevant references which the Proposer has listed. At the conclusion of the discussion and negotiation processes, each of the Proposers still determined by VVTA to be within the competitive range will be afforded the opportunity to submit a revised proposal with Section 1 — Page 25 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 a clear understanding that VVTA will then choose that proposal, which it finds to be most advantageous to its five (5) year material transit requirements, based upon the evaluation criteria and final scoring. The results of the evaluations and the selection of a proposal for any award will be documented in a report to the final acquisition approval authority within VVTA. 1.1.4.3.2 PROPOSAL EVALUATION CRITERIA AND SCORING Listed below is the point scale system by which proposals from responsible Proposers will be evaluated and ranked for the purpose of determining any competitive range and to make any selection of a proposal for a potential award. Evaluation Criteria (Table No. 2) Maximum Points 20 1. Responsiveness: Proposal compliance with Technical Specifications; Technical Product and Offeror's Expressed Understanding of Vehicle requirements, for the operational environments of the four (4) client transit agencies. 2. Manufacturing Capacity: Proposer's past performance in the manufacturing of 20 high quality 45 -foot Commuter Coaches with an on-time and on- budget record of delivery for Public Transit Properties in the United States. Reliability: Schedule compliance for buses and coaches built and delivered by 20 Proposer since January 2, 2008; (Number of coach vehicles built, delivered and accepted by client Transit Properties per year). Service after acceptance and compliance with Warranty Provision of the contract. Consideration of other Risks and Benefits: Direct discussions with Transit 15 Property References provided by Proposers. A review of disputes and litigation from Public Transit Properties against the Proposer regarding untimely delivery, workmanship and reliability. 3. Price per vehicle 25 TOTAL POSSIBLE POINTS 100 The cost factor will be made up of two components, Technical scores up to seventy-five (75) base Technical points; and Price per vehicle up to twenty-five (25) Base Price points. The maximum 100 base points available will be awarded to the Proposer with the highest Technical score and the lowest Price. Price points will be calculated by dividing the lowest price offered by the proposal price being scored and multiplying the quotient of the calculation by (25); (Low offer divided by next highest offer) times 25 points. The Proposer quoting the least number of calendar days for the complete delivery of all revenue ready vehicles in the VVTA Solicitation's Base Order requirements for all procuring agencies and any option vehicles ordered with the Base Order, will be awarded the maximum ten (10) points available. Points awarded for successively longer delivery times will be calculated by using the same formula used to Section 1 — Page 26 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 determine the point scale for the lowest offer. (Least number of calendar days until delivery is complete divided by delivery calendar days quoted by other Proposer's) time 10 points. The balance of the evaluation criteria will be scored on the evaluator's assessment in the areas described in Table 2 above, based on the following system: Exceptional: Fully compliant with the solicitation requirements and with desirable strengths or betterments; no errors, omissions, discrepancies, weakness or potential risks. Proposals judged to fall within these parameters will receive 90 to 100% of the points available for the category. Good to Superior: Compliant with requirements of the solicitation; some minor errors, omissions, discrepancies, weakness or risks. Proposals in this range will receive 80 to 89% of the points available for the category. Adequate: Minimally compliant with solicitation requirement; with errors, omissions, discrepancies, weakness or risks; which may be possible to correct and make acceptable. Proposals in this range will receive 70 to 79% of the points available for the category. Poor to Deficient: Non-compliant with solicitation requirements; contains errors, omissions, discrepancies, weaknesses or risks which would be difficult to correct or make acceptable. Proposals in this range will receive 60 to 69% of the points available for the category. Unacceptable: Totally deficient and non-compliant with requirements; contains major non -correctable errors, omissions, discrepancies, weaknesses or risks. Proposals in this range will receive 0 to 59% of the points available for the category. 1.1.4.3.3 EVALUATION PROCEDURES All aspects of the evaluations of the proposals and any discussions/negotiations, including documentation, correspondence and meetings, will be kept confidential during the evaluation and negotiation process. Proposals will be analyzed for conformance with the instructions and requirements of the RFP and Contract documents. Any proposal which fails to comply with the VVTA instructions and requirements listed in the solicitation documents shall be deemed non-responsive and their proposal shall be rejected. Proposers are advised that the detailed evaluation forms and procedures will follow the same proposal format and organization specified in "Instructions to Proposers" (Section 1.1.3). Therefore, Proposer shall pay close attention to and strictly follow all instructions and requirements. Submittal of a proposal means that the Proposer has accepted all of the Contract documents, except such conditions, exceptions, reservations or understandings explicitly, fully and separately stated on the forms and according to the instructions of "Form for Proposal Deviation" (Section 1.1.5.17). Any such conditions, exceptions, reservations or understanding which do not result in the rejection of the proposal are subject to evaluation under the criteria of "Proposal Evaluation Criteria" (Section 1.1.4.3.2) Evaluations will be made in strict accordance with all of the evaluation criteria and procedures specified in "Proposal Selection Process" (Section 1.1.4.3) above. The Lead Procuring Agency (VVTA) shall select for any award the highest ranked proposal from a responsible Proposer, qualified under "Qualification Requirements" (Section 1.1.4.3.1) which does not render this procurement financially Section 1 — Page 27 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 infeasible and is judged to be most advantageous to the Lead Procuring Agency based on consideration of the evaluation "Proposal Evaluation Criteria" (Section 1.1.4.3.2). 1.1.4.3.4 EVALUATIONS OF COMPETITIVE PROPOSALS 1.1.4.3.4.1 QUALIFICATION OF RESPONSIBLE PROPOSERS Proposals will be evaluated in accordance with requirements of "Qualification Requirements" (Section 1.1.4.3.1) to determine the responsibility of Proposers. Any proposals from Proposers whom the Lead Procuring Agency finds not to be responsible and finds cannot be made to be responsible may not be considered for the competitive range. Final determination of a Proposer's responsibility will be made upon the basis of initial information submitted in the proposal, any information submitted upon request by the Lead Procuring Agency, and information resulting from Lead Procuring Agency inquiry of Proposer's references, and its own knowledge of the Proposer. 1.1.4.3.4.2 DETAILED EVALUATION OF PROPOSALS AND DETERMINATION OF COMPETITIVE RANGE Each proposal will be evaluated in accordance with the requirements and criteria specified in "Proposal Selection process" (Section 1.1.4.3) The following are the minimum requirements that must be met for a proposal to be considered responsive for inclusion in the competitive range. All of these requirements must be met; therefore, they are not listed in any particular order of importance. Any proposal that the Lead Procuring Agency finds not to meet these requirements and that cannot be remedied as part of the negotiation process will be determined to be non-responsive and will not be included in the competitive range. The minimum requirements are as follows: A. Proposer is initially evaluated as responsible in accordance with the requirements of "Qualification Requirements" (Section 1.1.4.3.1. Final determination of responsibility will be made through the evaluation process. B. Proposer has demonstrated its responsiveness by following the instructions of the RFP and included sufficient detail information, such that the proposal can be evaluated. Any informalities in this regard shall be determined by the Lead Procuring Agency to be either a defect and non- responsive or an informality that the Lead Procuring Agency will waive in accordance with "Acceptance/Rejection of Proposals" (Section 1.1.5.1). C. Proposal price would not render this procurement financially infeasible, or it is reasonable that such proposal price might be reduced to render the procurement financially feasible. The Lead Procuring Agency will document its evaluations in accordance with the criteria and procedures of "Proposal Selection Process" (Section 1.1.4.3). Any proposal deficiencies which may render a proposal non -responsible and non-responsive will be documented. The Lead Procuring Agency will make specific note of questions, issues, concerns and areas requiring clarification by Proposers and to be discussed through any contact with Proposers, which the Lead Procuring Agency finds to be within the competitive range. Section 1 — Page 28 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Rankings and spreads of the proposals against the evaluation criteria will then be made by the Lead Procuring Agency as a means of judging the overall relative spread between proposals and of determining which proposals are within the competitive range, or may be reasonably made to be within the competitive range. 1.1.4.3.4.3 PROPOSALS NOT WITHIN THE COMPETITIVE RANGE. Proposers of any proposals that have been determined by the Lead Procuring Agency as not in the competitive range will be notified in writing, including the shortcomings of their proposals. 1.1.4.3.4.4 DISCUSSIONS WITH PROPOSERS IN THE COMPETITIVE RANGE. The Proposers, whose proposals are found by the Lead Procuring Agency to be within the competitive range, will be notified and any questions and/or requests for clarifications provided to them in writing. Each such Proposer may be contacted with the Lead Procuring Agency to discuss answers to written or oral questions, clarifications, and any facet of its proposal. In the event that a proposal, which has been included in the competitive range, contains conditions, exceptions, reservations or understandings to any Contract requirements as provided in "Form for Proposal Deviation" (Section 1.1.5.1.6), said conditions, exceptions, reservations or understandings may be negotiated during contract negotiations. However, the Lead Procuring Agency shall have the right to reject any and all such conditions and/or exceptions, which fail to comply with the VVTA instructions and requirements listed in the solicitation documents may be deemed non-responsive and their proposal to be outside the competitive range and rejected. No information, financial or otherwise, will be provided to any Proposer about any of the proposals from other Proposers. Proposers will not be given a specific price or specific financial requirements they must meet to gain further consideration, except that proposed prices may be considered to be too high with respect to the marketplace or unacceptable. Proposers will not be told of their rankings among the other Proposers. Factory and Site Visits. At its sole discretion, the Lead Procuring Agency with its participating Procuring Agencies, reserve the right to conduct factory visits to inspect the Proposer's facilities and/or other transit systems which the Proposer has supplied, including representative examples of over the road buses or coaches. For evaluation purposes, the vehicle inspections may be arranged to take place at the VVTA facility in Hesperia, CA. Best Offers. The Lead Procuring Agency expects that all responsible and responsive Proposers shall submit their Best Offer upon initial submission in response to this solicitation. The Lead Procuring Agency (VVTA) reserves the right to make an award to a Proposer whose proposal it fudges to be most advantageous to the Lead Procuring Agency based upon the evaluation criteria, without conducting any written or oral discussions with any Proposers or solicitation of any BAFOs. Section 1 — Page 29 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.4.4 CONFIDENTIALITY OF PROPOSALS Access to government records is governed by the State of California Public Records Act. (Government Code Section 6250 et. seq.) Except as otherwise required by state law, the Lead Procuring Agency will exempt from disclosure proprietary information, trade secrets and confidential commercial and financial information submitted in the proposal. Any such proprietary information, trade secrets of confidential commercial and financial information, which a Proposer believes should be exempted from disclosure, shall be specifically identified and marked as such. Blanket -type identification by designating whole pages or sections as containing proprietary information, trade secrets or confidential commercial and financial information will not assure confidentiality. The specific proprietary information, trade secrets or confidential commercial and financial information must be clearly identified as such. The Proposer may submit proprietary information, trade secrets or confidential commercial and financial information, which a Proposer believes should be exempted from disclosure, in a separate volume specifically identified and marked as such as an appendix to the proposal. Upon a request for records from a third party regarding this proposal the Lead Procuring Agency will notify in writing the party involved. The party involved must respond within twenty (20) calendar days with the identification of any and all "proprietary, trade secret, or confidential commercial or financial' information and the party involved shall agree to indemnify the Lead Procuring Agency for its defense costs, (Including reasonable attorney fees) associated with its refusal to produce such identified information; otherwise, the requested information may be released and the Lead Procuring Agency shall not be held liable for complying with the records request. The Lead Procuring Agency shall employ sound business practices no less diligent than those used for the Lead Procuring Agency's own confidential information to protect the confidence of all licensed technology, software, documentation, drawings, schematics, manuals, data and other information and material provided by Proposers and the Contractor pursuant to the Contract which contain confidential commercial or financial information, trade secrets or proprietary information as defined in or pursuant to the state law against disclosure of such information and material to third parties except as permitted by the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that confidential commercial or financial information, trade secrets or proprietary information, with such determinations to be made by the Lead Procuring Agency in its sole discretion, bears appropriate notices relating to its confidential character. 1.1.5 RESPONSE TO PROPOSAL 1.1.5.1 ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION OF PROPOSALS The Lead Procuring Agency reserves the right to reject any or all proposals for sound business reasons, to undertake contract negotiations with one or more Proposers, and to accept that proposal, which in its judgment, will be most advantageous to the Lead Procuring Agency, price and other evaluation criteria considered. The Lead Procuring Agency reserves the right to consider any specific proposal, which is conditional or not prepared in accordance with the instructions and requirements of this RFP to be non- responsive. The Lead Procuring Agency reserves the right to waive any defects, or minor informalities or irregularities in any proposal which do not materially affect the proposal or prejudice other Proposers. Section 1 — Page 30 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 If there is any evidence indicating that two or more Proposers are in collusion to restrict competition or otherwise engaged in anti-competitive practices, the proposals of all such Proposers shall be rejected and such evidence may be a cause for disqualification of the participants in any future solicitations undertaken by the Lead Procuring Agency. The Lead Procuring Agency reserves the right to reject a proposal that includes unacceptable conditions, exceptions and deviations. 1.1.5.2 SINGLE PROPOSAL RESPONSE If only one proposal is received in response to this RFP and it is found by the Lead Procuring Agency to be acceptable, a detailed price/cost proposal may be requested of the single Proposer. A price or cost analysis, or both, possibly including an audit, may be performed by or for the Lead Procuring Agency of the detailed price/cost proposal in order to determine if the price is fair and reasonable. The Proposer has agreed to such analysis by submitting a proposal in response to this RFP. A price analysis is an evaluation of a proposed price that does not involve an in-depth evaluation of all the separate cost elements and the profit factors that comprise a Proposer's price proposal. It should be recognized that a price analysis through comparison to other similar procurements must be based on an established or competitive price of the elements used in the comparison. The comparison must be made to a purchase of similar quantity, involving similar specifications and in a similar time frame. Where a difference exists, a detailed analysis must be made of this difference and costs attached thereto. Where it is impossible to obtain a valid price analysis, it may be necessary to conduct a cost analysis of the proposed price. A cost analysis is a more detailed evaluation of the cost elements in the Proposer's Offer to perform. It is conducted to form an opinion as to the degree to which the proposed costs represent what the Proposer's performance should cost. A cost analysis is generally conducted to determine whether the Proposer is applying sound management in proposing the application of resources to the contracted effort and whether costs are allowable, allocable and reasonable. Any such analyses and the results therefrom shall not obligate the Lead Procuring Agency to accept such a single proposal; and the Lead Procuring Agency may reject such proposal at its sole discretion. 1.1.5.3 CANCELLATION OF PROCUREMENT The Lead Procuring Agency reserves the right to cancel the procurement, for any reason, at any time before the Contract is fully executed and approved on behalf of the Lead Procuring Agency. 1.1.5.4 AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS This procurement is subject to the availability of funding. The Lead Procuring Agency's obligation hereunder is contingent upon the availability of appropriated funds from which payment for the contract purposes can be made. No legal liability on the part of the Lead Procuring Agency for any payment shall arise until funds are made available to the Contracting Officer for this contract and until the Contracting Officer receives notice of such availability, by issuance of a written Notice to Proceed by the Contracting Officer. Any award of Contract hereunder is conditioned upon said availability of funds for the Contract. Section 1 — Page 31 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.5 PROTESTS 1.1.5.5.1 SCOPE OF PROTEST PROCEDURE This Article specifies procedures for interested parties to protest to the Board the following WTA staff actions: A. A written notice denying a Proposer's request for a change in a specification requirement; and B. A written recommendation to the Board to disqualify a proposer or subcontractor; and C. A written recommendation to the Board to award a contract to a particular proposer. Nothing in this policy shall preclude or otherwise restrict the protest procedure specified in FTA's regulations on disadvantaged business enterprise. 1.1.5.5.2 EFFECT OF PROTEST ON CONTRACT AWARD OR PROPOSAL OPENING When a protest has been properly filed prior to contract award, the Board or WTA Executive Director will not award the contract prior to issuance of a final decision on the protest. When a protest has been properly filed before the opening of proposals, proposals will not be opened prior to the Board's decision on the protest. 1.1.5.5.3 RELEASE OF PROTEST INFORMATION Material submitted as a part of the protest resolution process will be available to the public except to the extent that: A. The withholding of information is permitted or required by law or regulation; and B. The information is designated proprietary by the person submitting the information to WTA. If the person submitting material to WTA indicates that the material contains proprietary material which should be withheld, a statement advising of this fact shall be affixed to the front page of the material submitted and the alleged proprietary information must be specifically identified in the body of the materials wherever it appears. 1.1.5.5.4 MAINTENANCE OF PROTEST RECORDS The WTA Executive Director or designee will maintain a written record of each step taken in every proposal protest. The record will list dates of each event and photocopies of all correspondence sent and/or received by WTA pertaining to the protest. These records will be retained for at least three (3) years from the date each protest is resolved. 1.1.5.5.5 INCLUSION OF PROTEST PROCEDURES IN SOLICITATIONS A copy of this Proposal Protest Procedure will either be included in every Coach or coach RFP issued by WTA, or be referenced in every Coach or coach RFP issued by WTA with a statement that a copy of this Proposal Protest Procedure will be provided immediately to all persons upon request. Section 1 — Page 32 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.5.6 WHO MAY FILE A PROTEST Protests may be filed only by parties with STATUS. Parties with STATUS are defined as actual Proposers to this WTA Solicitation. Named subcontractors or suppliers at any tier whose direct economic interest would be affected by an award or failure to amend a contract, a provision of the specifications, or proposal submitted to WTA by a prime contractor, or by the interpretation of the provisions of such documents. Submission of a proposal or sub -proposal protest will be deemed a waiver of any protest to any Sub -proposer only to protest any subsequent recommendations/decisions of WTA staff or the Board to disqualify the proposer, reject its proposal, or award the contract. 1.1.5.5.7 TIME FOR FILING A PROTEST Protest to any particular provision of the specification or to the Staff recommendation for award shall be filed with the Lead Procuring Agency within the numbering calendar days specified in California Public Contract Code, Section 20217. 1.1.5.5.8 FORM FOR FILING A PROTEST Protests must be addressed to the WTA Executive Director or designee. Protests must be in writing and contain a statement of the ground(s) for protest. At least fifteen (15) copies of the protest must be submitted by the protestor in the time and manner specified in this Part. The WTA Executive Director or designee will provide notice, by telephone or by letter, to all bidders known to WTA for the contract which is the subject of the protest. Such notice will state that a protest has been filed with WTA and identify the name of the protestor. The notice shall be given not more than 5 working days after receipt of a properly filed protest. The notice will state that interested parties will receive further information relative to the protest only if they submit a written request to the WTA Executive Director or designee. 1.1.5.5.9 WTA'S PRELIMINARY RESPONSE TO A PROTEST All WTA responses to a protest will be issued in writing. The WTA Executive Director or designee, will designate a WTA staff person who, not more than 10 working days after receipt of a properly filed protest, will prepare and mail the following information to the protestor and all interested parties requesting such information; A. A preliminary staff response to the protest including a brief explanation of the rationale supporting the response; and B. The proposed time, date and place of the meeting at which the protestor and WTA staff will attempt to resolve the protest, if such a meeting is appropriate in the judgment of the WTA Executive Director or designee. Within 5 working days after the meeting, the protestor shall give the WTA Executive Director or designee, written notice that the protest is withdrawn or, alternatively, that the protestor requests further consideration of the protest. If the protestor fails to deliver such a notice to the office of the WTA Executive Director or designee, within 5 working days after the meeting, the protest shall be deemed withdrawn. Section 1 — Page 33 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.5.10 FURTHER INVESTIGATION OF THE PROTEST If a protest is not withdrawn pursuant to Section 1.1.5.5.9, the VVTA Executive Director or designee, will further investigate the protest. The VVTA Executive Director or designee, may contract for third -party consulting services to investigate a protest, when necessary. The VVTA Executive Director or designee, may negotiate with the protestor and other interested parties to share the cost of such consulting services. As part of the investigation, the VVTA Executive Director or designee will establish reasonable times when VVTA, the protestor, and other interested parties will exchange all documents and arguments relevant to the protest. Upon written request of the protestor, the VVTA Executive Director or designee, may forward the protest and VVTA staff response to the Board for decision without further investigation of the protest by the VVTA Executive Director or designee. If the VVTA Executive Director or designee, elect to proceed without further investigation of the protest, the prior VVTA staff response shall be recommendation of the VVTA Executive Director or designee, and the VVTA Executive Director or designee, will proceed as set out in Section 1.1.5.5.11. 1.1.5.5.11 VVTA EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR OR DESIGNEE'S RECOMMENDATION Following investigation, the VVTA Executive Director or designee, will distribute to the protestor and all interested parties requesting such information, a written recommendation that the VVTA Executive Director or designee, will submit to the Board to resolve the protest. Within 5 working days after the date of the letter transmitting the VVTA Executive Director or designee's recommendation on the protest, the protestor must notify the VVTA Executive Director or designee, in writing whether that the protest is withdrawn, or that the protestor requests the protest continue to the Board for decision. If the protestor fails to submit such a notice, the protest shall be deemed to be withdrawn and all proceedings shall cease. 1.1.5.5.12 SUBMITTAL OF PROTEST TO THE BOARD If the protest is continued to the Board for resolution, the protestor, and all interested parties requesting such information, will be notified of the date, time and place of the Board's hearing at which the protest will be considered; and the date that the protestor and other interested parties must submit written comments with respect to the recommendation. The date established by the VVTA Executive Director or designee, for submittal of comments by the protestor and other persons will allow a reasonable period for rebuttal and may vary according to the complexity of the particular protest. A copy of the agenda package sent to Board members prior to a protest hearing will be sent to the protestor and made available to any interested person at least 5 working days before the hearing and will include the VVTA Executive Director's, or designee's, recommendation and all written comments received from the protestor and other persons within the submittal period. If the VVTA Executive Director or designee, has revised the recommendation since its distribution, a written description of the new intended decision and the reason(s) for revision will be sent to the protestor and sent or otherwise made available to any interested person. Section 1 — Page 34 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.5.13 BOARD OF DIRECTORS' DECISION At the Board meeting scheduled for the protest hearing, the Board, in its discretion, may conduct the hearing and/or continue the hearing to a subsequent Board meeting, or hire an impartial hearing officer to conduct a hearing and prepare a written recommended decision including findings of fact. At the hearing, the Board Chair or hearing officer may announce procedural rules, including those that are reasonably necessary to preclude repetitious or irrelevant testimony. VVTA staff, the protestor, and any interested person may present evidence relating to the protest. If either party arranges for the use of a court reporter to transcribe the hearing, the other party shall share the cost of transcribing the hearing if it requests a copy of the transcript. If an impartial hearing officer conducts the hearing, the VVTA Executive Director or designee, will provide written notice to the protestor, and all interested parties requesting such information, of the date, time and place of the VVTA Board meeting at which time the hearing officer's recommendation will be considered for adoption, and the date the protestor must provide written comments for submittal to the Board. A copy of the documents pertaining to the protest that is provided to the Board with its meeting agenda will be sent to the protestor at least 5 days before the meeting. In rendering its decision on the protest, the Board, in its discretion may adopt the decision recommended by the VVTA Executive Director or designee; adopt the written recommendation and findings of fact prepared by a hearing officer; or adopt a separate decision. The protestor and all interested parties will be notified in writing of the final decision of the Board within thirty (30) calendar days from the date of the Board meeting. Failure of the Board to reach a final decision or failure to send the written notification of the Board's decision within the prescribed time frame are grounds for any interested party to appeal to a court of competent jurisdiction, if such forum exists, or to file the protest directly with FTA for Federally - funded projects. 1.1.5.5.14 FTA PROTEST APPEAL PROCEDURE A protester must file a protest with VVTA in accordance with this Article and the Board must deny that protest before a bidder or proposer may seek review by the Federal Transit Administration (FTA), unless otherwise permitted under the FTA Third Party Contracting Circular (4220.IE, Chapter V, or any successor thereto), and/or by a court of competent jurisdiction. All Board decisions, including a decision on a protest, are final and therefore appealable to FTA or a court of competent jurisdiction if such exists. 1.1.5.5.15 WAIVER OF CHANGES By submitting a proposal or sub -proposal, each proposer and sub -proposer agrees that in the event that it submits any protest to the terms of the specifications or to any subsequent decision of VVTA staff, VVTA Executive Director or designee, or Board, VVTA retains the discretion to reject all proposals or to make no decision whatsoever. If the VVTA Executive Director or designee, or Board rejects all proposals for any reason, or overrules any protest and awards the contract, the protesting entity waives all claims, rights and causes of action for loss of anticipated profits from the contract or any subcontract, regardless of whether VVTA's decision is subsequently invalidated by a court of law. VVTA shall be deemed to have relied to its detriment on such a waiver in deciding either to reject all proposals or to award the Section 1 — Page 35 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 contract. Any attempted reservation of rights waived herein shall be grounds to reject a proposal as nonresponsive. Section 1 — Page 36 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.10 REQUIRED FORMS 1.1.5.11 DEBARRED BIDDERS CERTIFICATION 1.1.5.12 FTA CERTIFICATION OF RESTRICTIONS ON LOBBYING 1.1.5.13 DBE APPROVAL CERTIFICATION 1.1.5.14 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH COACH TESTING REQUIREMENT 1.1.5.15 FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS 1.1.5.16 REQUEST FOR PRE -OFFER CHANGE OR APPROVED EQUAL 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION 1.1.5.18 PROPOSER SERVICE AND PARTS SUPPORT DATA 1.1.5.19 BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATION -COACHES 1.1.5.20 BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATION -SPARE PARTS 1.1.5.21 INTEREST AND GRATUITIES FORM 1.1.5.22 WARRANTY FORM 1.1.5.23 REFERENCE FORM 1.1.5.24 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDUM Section 1 — Page 37 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.11 DEBARRED PROPOSERS CERTIFICATION Cd4:irfycd_ 1fflfeXTA /:�:7y3i�llr��Id FTA CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION For Contracts and Subcontracts in Excess of $100,000 Instruction for Certification 1. By signing and submitting its bid or proposal, the prospective lower tier participant is providing the signed certification set out below. 2. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was entered into; If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, VVTA may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. 3. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to VVTA if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. 4. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," 'lower tier covered transaction," "participant," "persons," "principal," "proposal," and 'voluntary excluded," as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549 [49 C.F.R. Part 29]. You may contact VVTA for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations. 5. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting its bid or proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized in writing by VVTA. 6. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting its bid or proposal that it will include the clause, set out below, titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion — Lower Tier Covered Transaction," without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions. 7. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that it is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntary excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the eligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the Non -procurement List issued by U.S. General Service Administration. Section 1 — Page 38 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 8. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. 9. Except for transactions authorized under Paragraph 5 of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to all remedies available to the Federal Government, VVTA and the other named procuring agencies may pursue available remedies including suspension and/or debarment. "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion — Lower Tier covered Transaction" 1. The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of its bid or proposal, that neither it nor it's "principals" [as defined at 49 C.F.R. §29.105(p) is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by any Federal department or agency. 2. When the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to the statement in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to its bid or proposal. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 39 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.12 FTA CERTIFICATION OF RESTRICTIONS ON LOBBYING (For Proposals over $100,000) Cdri11y[dsrrc•�,��,�r.���:Z•]LZ��_1���6�9�f/:�:7yi'd�l�(r��Id I. Name) that: hereby certify on behalf of (Company 1. No Federal or State appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any State or Federal agency, a Member of the State Legislature or the United States Congress, an officer or employee of the Legislature or Congress, or an employee of a Member of the Legislature or the Congress, in connection with the awarding of any State of Federal contract, the making of any State or Federal grant, the making of any State or Federal loan, the entering into of any State or Federal cooperative agreement and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment or modification of any State or Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. 2. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, or an officer or employee of Congress, in connection with this contract, grant, loan or cooperative agreement, which is funded in whole or in part by Federal funds, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying," Approved pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 1352 0348-0046, in accordance with its instructions. 3. The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for any subcontractor at any tier performing work under this Federal -Aid funded Contract and that all subcontractors of any tier shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance is placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by § 13 52, Title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure. Executed this day of Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 40 2013. VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.13 DBE APPROVAL CERTIFICATION Cdri11y[dsrrc•�,��,�r.���:z•]LZ��_t'�,�c•��i�rr_e:7yi'�i�SK��Id I hereby certify that the Proposer has complied with the requirements of 49 C.F.R. Part 26, Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in DOT Programs by submitting an annual DBE goal to the Federal Transit Administration, and that its goals have either been approved or have not been disapproved by the Federal Transit Administration. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 41 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.14 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH COACHES TESTING REQUIREMENT CERTIFICATION No. 4 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The undersigned certifies that the vehicle offered in this procurement complies and will, when delivered, comply with 49 U.S.C. § 5323 © and FTA's implementing regulation at 49 C.F.R. Part 665 according to the indicated one of the following three alternatives. (Mark one and only one of the three blank spaces with an N") ❑ The Coaches offered herewith have been tested in accordance with 49 C.F.R. Part 665 on the vehicles being sold should have the identical configuration and major components as the vehicle in the test report, which must be submitted with this Offer. If the configuration or components are not identical, the manufacturer shall provide with its Offer a description of the change and the manufacturer's basis for concluding that it is not a major change requiring additional testing. ❑ The manufacturer represents that the vehicle is "grandfathered" (has been used in mass transit service in the United States before October 1, 1988, and is currently being produced without a major change in configuration or components), and submits with this Offer the name and address of the recipient of such a vehicle and the details of that vehicle's configuration and major components. ❑ The vehicle is a new model and will be tested and the results will be submitted to Lead Procuring Agency prior to acceptance of the first Coaches. The undersigned understands that misrepresenting the testing status of a vehicle acquired with Federal financial assistance may subject the undersigned to civil penalties as outlined in the Department of Transportation's regulation on Program Fraud Civil Remedies, 49 C.F.R. Part 31. In addition, the undersigned understands that FTA may suspend or debar a manufacturer under the procedures in 49 C.F.R. Part 29. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 42 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.15 FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS Cdri11y[dsrrc•�,��,�r.�.��:z•]LZ��_t'�,�6��i�rr_e:7yi',i�l�Ir��Id The Proposer hereby certifies that the following statement is true and correct (select one option): ❑ The vehicle(s) to be supplied is in compliance with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in 49 C.F.R. Part 571. ❑ The vehicle(s) to be supplied is not subject to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in 49 C.F.R. Part 571. ❑ The vehicle(s) to be supplied is subject to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in 49 C.F.R. Part 571 but no FMVSS certification is available at this time because the vehicle is a new model (Federal Register Vol. 56, No. 185, page 48391, September 24, 1991). Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 43 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.16 REQUEST FOR PRE -OFFER CHANGE OR APPROVED EQUALS Cdri11y[dsrrc•�,��,�r.���:z•�1•��_f�,�r.����rr_e:7yi'd�l�(r��Id This form must be used for requested clarifications, changes, substitutes or approval of items equal to items specified with a brand name, and must be submitted as far in advance of the Due Date as specified in "Proposer Communications and Requests" (Section 1.1.2.2). This form should be emailed to: rzirges@VVTA.org with "Questions, Clarifications, Approved Equals' on the subject line. Request Number: Proposer: Email Address: Phone Number: Page Number: Section: Questions/Clarifications or Approved Equal: VVTA Response: Section 1 — Page 44 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION [1014 :4111107! _f�,�C.>l�i�rr_e:7yid�l(r��Id The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: Proposer: Email Address: Phone Number: Page Number: Section: Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: Rationale (Pros and Cons): Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.18 PROPOSER SERVICE AND PARTS SUPPORT DATA CERTIFICATION No. 8 -PROPOSAL No. VVTA- RFP 2013-04 Location of most Responsive Technical Service Representative to Lead Procuring Agency Name Address Telephone Proposer to describe technical services readily available from said representative. Location of most Responsive Parts Distribution Center to Lead Procuring Agency Name Address Telephone Proposer shall describe the extent of parts available at said center. Policy for Delivery of Parts and Components to be Purchased for Service and Maintenance Regular Method of Timely Shipment Cost to Lead Procuring Agency Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 46 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.19 BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATION - COACHES Cdri11y[dsrrc•�,��,�r.�n�:z•]LZ�9_��,�C.>l�i�rr_e:7yi',i�l�(r��Id Rolling Stock Note: Complete either Alternative A or B ALTERNATIVE A CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH 49 U.S.C. &5323(i)(2)(C) [Former Section 165(b)(3)] The Proposer hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. §53230)(2)(C) and the applicable regulations in 49 C.F.R. § 661.11. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date ALTERNATIVE B CERTIFICATE OF NON-COMPLIANCE WITH 49 U.S.C. &5323(i)(2)(c) [Former Section 165(b)(3)] The Proposer hereby certifies that it will not comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. §53230)(2)(C), but it may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. §53230)(2)(6), or (D) and regulations in 49 C.F.R. § 661.7. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 47 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.20 BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATION - SPARE PARTS Cdri11y[dsrrc•�,��,�r.�r�n�:z•]LZ��_f�,�C.>l9�rr_e:7yi'�i�l�K��Id Steel, Iron and Manufactured Products Note: Complete either Alternative A or B ALTERNATIVE A CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH 49 U.S.C. &5323(1)(1) [Former Section 165 (a)] The Proposer hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. §53230)(1) and the applicable regulations in 49 C.F.R. part 661. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date ALTERNATIVE B CERTIFICATE OF NON-COMPLIANCE WITH 49 U.S.C. &5323(1)(1) [Former Section 165(a) The Proposer hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. §53230)(1), but it may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. §53230)(2)(6), or (D) and regulations in 49 C.F.R. §661.7. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 48 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 BUY AMERICA LAW 49 U.S.C.§53230) BUY AMERICA STIPULATIONS: "(1) The Secretary of Transportation may obligate an amount that may be appropriated to carry out this chapter for a project only if steel, iron, and manufactured goods used in the project are produced in the United States. "(2) The Secretary of Transportation may waive paragraph (1) of this subsection if the Secretary finds that — "(A) applying paragraph (1) would be inconsistent with the public interest; "(B) the steel, iron, and goods produced in the United States are not produced in sufficient and reasonably available amount or are not of a satisfactory quality; "(C) when procuring rolling stock (including train control, communication and traction power equipment) under this chapter — "(i) the cost of components and subcomponents produced in the United States is more than 60 percent of the cost of all components of the rolling stock; and "(ii) final assembly of the rolling stock has occurred in the United States; or "(D) including domestic material will increase the cost of the overall project by more than 25 percent. "(3) In this subsection, labor costs involved in the final assembly are not included in calculating the cost of components" Section 1 — Page 49 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.21 INTEREST AND GRATUITIES FORM Cdri11y[dsrrc•�,��,�r.�`e�:z•]LZ��_t'�,�C.>l9�rr_e:7yi'd�l�(r��Id Proposer by its signature below, certifies that except as disclosed below, Proposer, its officers, employees and their immediate families have not offered or given a gratuity in any form including, without limitations, entertainment, favors, loans, gifts or anything of greater than nominal value for any reason including personal, non -business related reasons to any WTA officer or employee or their immediate families within the preceding twelve (12) months. For the purpose of this section, nominal value means anything: (1) having an aggregate value of $35.00 (thirty-five dollars), or less per year; or (2), any perishable item (flowers or food) of any value, except that prepared meals are subject to the $35.00 limit. A campaign contribution is not a gratuity and is not the subject of this Certification. Proposer further certifies that except as disclosed below, Proposer, its officers, employees and their immediate families presently have no interest nor within the preceding twelve (12) months had any interest including, without limitation, any business or personal relationship that would appear to conflict with the performance of services required to be performed under this Contract. Disclosable interests and relationships are those that may reasonably be viewed as creating a potential or actual conflict of interest. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 50 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.22 WARRANTY FORM Cdri11y[dsrrc•�,��,�r.�`.n�:z•]LZ�9_��,�C.>l�i�rr_e:7yi',i�l�(r��Id Proposer, by its signature below, certifies that the following warranties shall apply to the coach and components: Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 51 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.23 REFERENCE FORM Cdri11y[dsrrc•�,��,�r.����:z•]LZ��_��,�C.>l9�rr_e:7yi'd�l�Ir��Id Proposer by its signature below certifies that the following references for 45 -foot commuter coaches were sold to other clients over the last seven (7) years (use additional pages as necessary): Agency Name Contact Name/Phone Qty of New 45 -foot Coaches bought Year V, 3. Ell 5. Q 7 Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 52 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.24 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDUM Cdri11y[dsrrc•7,�1,�6�[ls�:z•]LZ�9_��,�C.>l�i�rr_e:7yi',i�l�(r��Id The following form shall be completed and included in the price proposal. Failure to acknowledge receipt of all addenda may cause the proposal to be considered non-responsive to the solicitation. Acknowledged receipt of each addendum must be clearly established and included with the Offer. The undersigned Proposer acknowledges receipt of the following addendum to the documents: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 53 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.25 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL Proposer shall complete the following form and include same in the Technical proposal. By execution below Proposer hereby agrees to furnish the Commuter Coaches, related equipment and services as specified in Victor Valley Transit Authority's Request for Proposals No. 2013-04, submitted in response to the technical portion of the solicitation. VVTA - RFP 2013-04 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL STREET ADDRESS: CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE: AUTHORIZED OFFICER: COMPANY OFFICER TITLE: SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED OFFICER: CONTACT INFORMATION: OFFICE PHONE NUMBER: EMAIL ADDRESS: Section 1 — Page 54 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.26 PRICE PROPOSAL Proposer shall complete the following form and include same in the Price Proposal package separate from the Technical Proposal submitted in response to this solicitation. By execution below Proposer hereby agrees to furnish the Commuter Coaches, related equipment, and services as specified in Victor Valley Transit Authority's Request for Proposals No. 2013-04 at the prices submitted in response to this solicitation. VVTA - RFP 2013-04 PRICE PROPOSAL PROPOSER COMPANY NAME: STREET ADDRESS: CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE: AUTHORIZED OFFICER: COMPANY OFFICER TITLE: SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED OFFICER: CONTACT INFORMATION: OFFICE PHONE NUMBER: EMAIL ADDRESS: Section 1 — Page 55 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.27 OFFER COVER SHEET Proposer shall complete the following form and include same in BOTH the technical and price proposals. By execution below Proposer hereby offers to furnish equipment and services as specified in Victor Valley Transit Authority's Request for Proposals No. RFP 2013-04 at the prices set out in the pricing schedule. Proposer Company Name: Street Address: City, State, Zip: Signature of Authorized Signer: Title: Phone: Section 1 — Page 56 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.28 PERFORMANCE BOND (ATTACHMENT NO. 1) (To be submitted when contract is executed) WHEREAS, Victor Valley Transit Authority (hereinafter VVTA), and (hereinafter "Principal') have entered into an agreement whereby Principal agrees to manufacture and deliver certain Coaches, Operator and Maintainer training, and spare parts, which agreement for dated 2013, and identified as Project Number VVTA-2013-04, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof; and WHEREAS, Principal is required under the terms of the agreement to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of the agreement. NOW, THEREFORE, we, Principal and the undersigned corporate surety (hereinafter "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto VVTA in the penal sum of $ lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, successors and assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and provisions in the said agreement and any alteration thereof made as therein provided, on his or their part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and shall indemnify and save harmless VVTA, its officers, agents and employees, as therein stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. As a part of the obligation secured hereby and in addition to the face amount specified therefore, there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorney's fees, incurred by VVTA in successfully enforcing such obligation, all to be taxed at cost and included in any judgment rendered. Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the agreement or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond. And it does hereby waive notice of any such changes, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the agreement or to the work or to the specifications. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by Principal and Surety above name, on 200 (Seal) By PRINCIPAL (Seal) Bond No. SURETY 0 Section 1 — Page 57 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.29 COACH PROPOSAL PRICE SHEET (EXHIBIT NO. 1) VICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY — JOINT AGENCY — COACH PROCUREMENT PROJECT — PRICE PROPOSAL SHEET BASE 1St 2 nd 3 rd 4 th TOTAL Prices shall be valid for 120 Days YEAR Option Option Option Option PROPOSED from the RFP Submittal Due ORDER Year Year Year Year PRICES Date. VEHICLE MODEUTYPE 45 ft. $ $ CNG PROPULSION SYSTEM (Base Order Qty: 10 ) VEHICLE MODEUTYPE 45 ft. $ $ CNG PROPULSION SYSTEM (Maximum Option Qty: 18) VEHICLE MODEUTYPE 45 ft. $ $ DIESEL PROPULSION SYSTEM (Base Order Qty: 15 ) VEHICLE MODEUTYPE 45 ft $ $ $ $ $ DIESEL PROPULSION SYSTEM (Maximum Option Qty: 35) ALL REQUIRED VEHICLE $ $ OPERATIONS, & MAINTENANCE MANUALS, & OTHER DATA INITIAL OPERATOR and $ $ MAINTAINER TRAINING RECURRENT OPERATOR and $ $ $ $ $ MAINTAINER TRAINING (Two Sessions per Option Order OPTIONAL VEHICLE COMPONENTS OPTIONAL VEHICLE SERVICES SUB TOTALS PER COLUMN $ $ $ $ $ $ TOTAL PRICE PROPOSED FOR ALL ITEMS Economic Price Adjustment for Option Orders: The Coach Option Order Prices shall be the Base Order Price adjusted by the Annual COACH (PPI) for the year in which the order is placed. Final price determination shall be made by the Lead Procuring Agency at time order is placed. The Lead Procuring Agency or its Assignee Procuring Agencies may procure either of the two vehicle types identified as required by their 5 year material needs. Placement of any Coach or Coach Related Option Item Orders is subject to available program year funding. Section 1 — Page 58 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 RFP 2013-04 1.1.5.30 COACH PROPOSAL VEHICLE OPTION ITEMS PRICE SHEET (EXHIBIT NO. 2) VICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY — JOINT AGENCY — COACH PROCUREMENT PROJECT 2013 COACH PROCUREMENT OPTION ITEMS LIST ITEM Item Qty per Coach Item Price per Coach Total Price per Coach 1 Altro Style rubber flooring 2 RCA Style rubber flooring 3 Wi-Fi Connectivity 4 110 Volt Outlets 5 Available Window Tints 6 Different Fuel Tank Configuration and Capacity Options 7 Restroom 8 Bike Racks 9 Electronic Fare Boxes and/or Prewire 10 ITS Prewire Options 11 Video Surveillance System Options for System or Prewire 12 CNG Fueling Valves and Defueling Ports if Options 13 Destination Sign Options 14 Lighting Options LED vs Fluorescent vs Standard, Additions, Deletions, etc. 15 Driver and Passenger Seat Options 16 Transit Agency Paint Schemes 17 Fire Suppression System 18 Wheel Chair Lift Options if Price Differential 19 Power Assist Sliding Door if Available 20 Mirror Options 21 Any other options that are available which, if added, could cause a cardinal change to the proposal. Section 1 — Page 59 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.0 GENERAL CONTRACTUAL PROVISIONS Section 2 — Page 1 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 GENERAL CONTRACTURAL PROVISIONS Table of Contents 2.0 DRAFT CONTRACT......................................................................................................................................................5 2.1 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................13 2.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, MODIFICATIONS AND DISPUTES........................................................................................14 2.2.1 CONTRACTAWARD.................................................................................................................................................14 2.2.1.1 NONCOLLUSION.............................................................................................................................................14 2.2.1.2 MATHEMATICAL ERRORS...............................................................................................................................15 2.2.1.3 ACCCEPTANCE OF A PROPOSAL......................................................................................................................15 2.2.2 ACCESSIBLE REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................................................................15 2.2.2.1 CALIFORNIA ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................15 2.2.2.2 ACCESSIBLE EQUIPMENT COST INFORMATION..............................................................................................15 2.2.3 MODIFICATIONS TO CONTRACT..............................................................................................................................16 2.2.3.1 CONTRACTCHANGES.....................................................................................................................................16 2.2.3.2 WRITTEN CHANGE ORDERS............................................................................................................................16 2.2.3.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE.........................................................................................................................16 2.2.3.4 PRICE ADJUSTMENT FOR REGULATORY CHANGES.........................................................................................16 2.2.4 PARTIES AND CHANGES IN PARTIES........................................................................................................................17 2.2.4.1 PARTIES AND AUTHORITY...............................................................................................................................17 2.2.4.2 SUCCESSION...................................................................................................................................................17 2.2.4.3 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING...........................................................................................................17 2.2.4.4 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS...............................................................................................................17 2.2.5 CONTENT OF SPECIFICATION AND OFFER...............................................................................................................18 2.2.5.1 OMISSIONS.....................................................................................................................................................18 2.2.5.2 DEVIATIONS....................................................................................................................................................18 2.2.5.3 PROBLEMS, FAULTS, DEFECTS AND NONCONFORMITY.................................................................................18 2.2.6 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT.................................................................................................................................18 2.2.6.1 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE................................................................................................................18 2.2.6.2 TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT.........................................................................................................................22 2.2.6.3 STOP WORK ORDER........................................................................................................................................24 2.2.6.4 COSTS OF STOP WORK ORDER.......................................................................................................................25 2.2.7 DISPUTES.................................................................................................................................................................25 2.2.8 LITIGATION..............................................................................................................................................................27 2.2.8.1 REQUIREMENT FOR OUT-OF-STATE CONTRACTORS......................................................................................27 2.2.9 NONWAIVER............................................................................................................................................................27 2.2.10 NONEXCLUSIVE RIGHTS AND REMEDIES.............................................................................................................27 2.2.11 GRATUITIES, CONTINGENT FEES AND CONFLICTS OF INTERESTS.......................................................................28 2.2.11.1 COVENANT AGAINST GRATUITIES..................................................................................................................28 2.2.11.2 COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES.......................................................................................................28 2.2.11.3 CONFLICT OF INTEREST..................................................................................................................................29 2.3 DELIVERYAND TITLE ....................................................................................................................................................30 2.3.1 DELIVERIES..............................................................................................................................................................30 Section 2 — Page 2 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.3.1.1 COACH DELIVERY LOCATION..........................................................................................................................30 2.3.1.2 DELIVERY SCHEDULE.......................................................................................................................................31 2.3.1.3 PRE -DELIVERY TESTS AND INSPECTIONS........................................................................................................31 2.3.1.4 ACCEPTANCE OF COACH.................................................................................................................................31 2.3.2 REPAIRS AFTER NONACCEPTANCE..........................................................................................................................31 2.3.2.1 REPAIRS BY CONTRACTOR..............................................................................................................................32 2.3.2.2 REPAIRS BY PROCURING AGENCY...................................................................................................................32 2.3.3 UNAVOIDABLE DELAYS............................................................................................................................................32 2.3.3.1 CONTRACTOR'S DELAY...................................................................................................................................32 2.3.3.2 NOTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR DELAY........................................................................................................33 2.3.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES...........................................................................................................................................34 2.3.5 TITLE........................................................................................................................................................................34 2.4 PAYMENT.....................................................................................................................................................................35 2.5 SER VI CES AND PARTS...................................................................................................................................................35 2.5.1 TRAINING.................................................................................................................................................................35 2.5.2 ENGINEER/SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES...................................................................................................................35 2.5.3 DOCUMENTS...........................................................................................................................................................36 2.5.4 PARTS AVAILABILITY GUARANTEE...........................................................................................................................36 2.5.5 INTERCHANGEABILITY............................................................................................................................................. 37 2.6 AUDITAND INSPECTION OFRECORDS .........................................................................................................................37 2.7 RISK..............................................................................................................................................................................38 2.7.1 RISK OF LOSS...........................................................................................................................................................38 2.7.2 INSURANCE .............................................................................................................................................................. 39 2.7.3 PERFORMANCE BOND.............................................................................................................................................40 2.7.4 PRODUCTION OF DOCUMENTS...............................................................................................................................41 2.7.5 INDEMNIFICATION..................................................................................................................................................42 2.7.6 MATERIAL/ACCESSORIES RESPONSIBILITY..............................................................................................................42 2.7.7 SURVIVABILITY.........................................................................................................................................................43 2.8 FTA POLICIES FOR ALL TIERS........................................................................................................................................43 2.8.1 NO OBLIGATION BY THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT..................................................................................................43 2.8.2 PROGRAM FRAUD AND FALSE OR FRAUDULENT STATEMENTS AND RELATED ACTIONS: ...................................... 43 2.8.3 INCORPORATION OF FTA TERMS............................................................................................................................44 2.8.4 CHANGES IN FEDERAL LAWS AND REGULATIONS...................................................................................................44 2.8.5 CARGO PREFERENCE...............................................................................................................................................44 2.8.6 ENERGY CONSERVATION.........................................................................................................................................44 2.8.7 RECYCLED PRODUCTS..............................................................................................................................................44 2.8.8 CIVIL RIGHTS............................................................................................................................................................45 2.8.8.1 NONDISCRIMINATION....................................................................................................................................45 2.8.8.2 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY............................................................................................................45 2.8.8.3 DISCRIMINATORY SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................46 2.8.9 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE...............................................................................................................46 2.8.9.1 POLICY............................................................................................................................................................46 2.8.9.2 DBE OBLIGATION............................................................................................................................................46 2.8.9.3 REMEDY..........................................................................................................................................................46 Section 2 — Page 3 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.8.10 PATENT INFRINGEMENT.....................................................................................................................................46 2.8.11 PROPRIETARY RIGHTS/RIGHTS IN DATA.............................................................................................................47 2.8.12 INTEREST OF MEMBERS OF, OR DELEGATES TO, CONGRESS..............................................................................47 2.8.13 PROHIBITED INTEREST........................................................................................................................................47 2.8.14 ACCESS REQUIREMENTS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES...............................................................................47 2.8.15 FLYAMERICA.......................................................................................................................................................48 2.9 FTA POLICIES FOR SELECTED CONTRACTS...................................................................................................................48 2.9.1 CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT......................................................................................48 2.9.2 CLEAN AIR................................................................................................................................................................49 2.9.3 CLEAN WATER.........................................................................................................................................................50 2.9.4 COMPLIANCE WITH ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS...............................................................................................50 2.9.5 LOBBYING CERTIFICATION AND DISCLOSURE STATEMENTS...................................................................................50 2.10 FTA POLICIES FOR PRIME CONTRACTOR......................................................................................................................50 2.10.1 BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................................................................50 2.10.2 PRE -AWARD REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................................51 2.10.3 POST -DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................52 2.10.4 COACH TESTING..................................................................................................................................................53 2.11 STATE GRANT CONTRACT PROVISIONS.......................................................................................................................54 2.11.1 ACCOUNTING RECORDS......................................................................................................................................54 2.11.2 ALLOWABLE COSTS.............................................................................................................................................54 2.11.3 FAIR EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES (NONDISCRIMINATION)...................................................................................54 2.11.4 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE RECORDS...........................................................................................55 Section 2 — Page 4 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.0 DRAFT CONTRACT AGREEMENT No. VVTA 2013-04 (Acquisition for Purchase of 45 -Foot Compressed Natural Gas (CNG), and Low Emission Diesel (LED) Commuter Coaches) THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into this day of November 2013, by and between the VICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY, a Joint Powers authority, created pursuant to the laws of the State of California ("VVTA' OR "Lead Procuring Agency") and ("CONTRACTOR"). RECITALS WHEREAS, VVTA circulated and distributed a request for proposals ("RFP") for purchase in various quantities of 45 -foot Compressed Natural Gas, and Low Emission Diesel type Commuter Coaches, a copy which is attached herein as Exhibit 1; and WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR submitted a proposal to supply 45 -foot Compressed Natural Gas and Low Emission Diesel Commuter Coaches, a copy which is attached herein as Exhibit 6: and WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has represented and warrants to VVTA that it has the necessary training, experience, expertise, physical manufacturing capacity and staff competency to provide the services, goods and materials that are described in this Agreement, at a cost to VVTA as herein specified and that it will be able to perform the herein described services to VVTA by virtue of its current resources and specialized knowledge of relevant data, issues, and conditions: and WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR represents and warrants that neither CONTRACTOR, nor any of its officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, volunteers, or five percent owners, is excluded or debarred from participating in or being paid for participation in any Federal or State program; and WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR further represents and warrants that no conditions or events now exist which give rise to CONTRACTOR, or any of its officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, volunteers or five percent owners being excluded or debarred from any Federal or State program; and WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has furnished the required Bonds to VVTA in the form required by the RFP, copies of which are included in Exhibit 5, which is attached herein: and WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR understands that VVTA is relying upon these representations in entering into this Agreement. NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual promises and conditions herein contained, VVTA and CONTRACTOR hereby agree as follows: Section 2 — Page 5 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 F-11:i1Nl4:11111111111111110"161W*.3&rWO]S21 Subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, CONTRACTOR shall supply VVTA with the Commuter Coach vehicles pursuant to Section 5, Technical Performance Specifications and fit for the dynamic operational envelope of the procuring transit agencies who are parties to this contract as well as all current relevant manuals, and operator and maintainer training and all other ("Work") as set forth in Contract Documents in a manner satisfactory to VVTA's Executive Director or designee (collectively "VVTA's Executive Director"). CONTRACTOR shall not commence work under this Contract until a written Notice to Proceed is issued by VVTA. ARTICLE 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The complete Contract between the parties shall consist of the following component parts This Agreement; 1. Exhibit 1 — RFP NUMBER 2013-04, RFP TITLE: JOINT AGENCY PROCUREMENT FOR OVER THE ROAD COMMUTER COACHES 2. CERTIFICATE NO. 6; Section 1.1.5.15 — VVTA Response to CONTRACTOR's Request for Approved Equals dated ; 3. CERTIFICATE NO. 14; Section 1.1.5.23 — Addenda(s) No. to VVTA's Request for Proposals for various quantities of CNG and Low Emission Diesel Commuter Coaches dated 4. Table 1; Section 1.1.3.5 — VVTA Request for Proposals and Technical Specifications for various quantities of Compressed Natural Gas and Low Emission Diesel Commuter Coaches dated 5. Attachment No. 1; Section 1.1.5.27 CONTRACTOR's Offer; dated 6. Section 1.1.5.28 Performance Bond and Insurance Certificate, dated 7. Exhibit No. 1; Section 1.1.5.29, & Exhibit No. 2; Section 1.1.5.30 — CONTRACTOR's Price Proposal Sheets dated All of the Exhibits mentioned in this Article 2 are attached and are herein incorporated. This Agreement and the other Exhibits mentioned in this Article 2 constitute the entire Contractual Agreement between the parties. In the event of any conflict between any of the provisions of this Agreement and Exhibits, the provision that requires the highest level of performance from CONTRACTOR for VVTA's benefit shall prevail. Proposer shall execute and submit Certifications in Sections 1.1.5.11 through Section 1.1.5.24 with their Technical Proposals. Exhibit No. 1 (Section 1.1.5.29) and Exhibit No. 2 (Section 1.1.5.30) shall be submitted separately in each Proposer's Price Proposal. Section 2 — Page 6 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 ARTICLE 3. TERM OF CONTRACT Contractor shall perform the services under this Contract for a term of one year, with 4 one year options beginning on December , 2013 and ending on November , 2018, unless sooner terminated as hereinafter provided. ARTICLE 4. TOTAL CONSIDERATION A. The total consideration payable to CONTRACTOR under this Contract by VVTA for the Base Order of: 1. Ten (10) CNG Commuter Coaches; (5 for VVTA), and (5 for SCT) 2. Fifteen (15) Diesel Commuter Coaches; (3 for AVIA), (2 for MST), (10 for VCTC) 3. Vehicle deliveries shall be to the respective joint procuring agencies 4. Provision of all requisite manuals, and all operator / maintainer training for each vehicle ordered placed by VVTA and participating procuring transit agencies. Consideration shall not exceed the sum of $ and the applicable California state and local sales taxes. OPTION ORDERS: B. The total consideration payable to CONTRACTOR under this Contract by Victor Valley Transit Authority (hereinafter referred to as "VVTA"), for the potential VVTA Option Order of (5) CNG Commuter Coaches, delivery, manuals and training shall not exceed the sum of ($ ), plus applicable California state and local sales taxes. C. The total consideration payable to CONTRACTOR under this Contract by VVTA's assignee, Antelope Valley Transit Authority (hereinafter referred to as "AVTK) for the potential AVTA's Option Order of (17) Low Emission Diesel Commuter Coaches, delivery manuals and all training shall not exceed the sum of ($ ), plus applicable California state and local sales taxes. D. The total consideration payable to CONTRACTOR under this Contract by VVTA's assignee, Santa Clarita Transit (hereinafter referred to as "SCT"), for the potential SCT's Option Order Of (18) CNG Commuter Coaches, delivery, spare parts, manuals and all training shall not exceed the sum of ($ ), plus applicable California state and local sales taxes. E. The total consideration payable to CONTRACTOR under this Contract by VVTA's assignee, Monterey—Salinas Transit, (hereinafter referred to as "MST"), for the potential MST Option Order of (10) Low Emission Diesel Commuter Coaches, delivery, manuals and all training shall not exceed the sum of ($ ), plus applicable California state and local sales taxes. F. The total consideration payable to CONTRACTOR under this Contract by VVTA's assignee, Ventura County Transportation Commission, (hereinafter referred to as "VCTC"), for the potential VCTC Option Order of (10) Low Emission Diesel Commuter Coaches, delivery, manuals and all Section 2 — Page 7 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 training shall not exceed the sum of sales taxes plus applicable California state and local G. Subject to available funding, the total consideration VVTA and the other Procuring Agencies shall pay to CONTRACTOR for delivery of the total Joint Agency Option Order Commuter Coaches under this Contract, delivery of manuals and operator and maintainer training sessions shall not exceed the sum of ($ ), plus applicable California state and local sales taxes. H. The total Contract Consideration for all Coaches, delivery, options, manuals and operator and maintainer training sessions payable to CONTRACTOR under this Contract shall not exceed ($ ), plus applicable California state and local sales taxes. ARTICLE 5. METHOD OF PAYMENT A. In accordance with the terms and conditions of this Contract, VVTA or its assignee(s) shall pay CONTRACTOR for the Commuter Coaches, delivery and acceptance by VVTA or its assignee(s), respectively in accordance with the unit prices set out in the Pricing Schedule (Exhibit 1) and subject to the limitation of the total Contract Consideration payable to CONTRACTOR for VVTA and its assignee(s)' orders as set out in Article 4. Such payment shall be the full compensation for all costs and expenses of completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including but not limited to, manuals, training and all labor and materials required, overhead, expenses, storage and shipping, risks and obligations, fees and profit, and any unforeseen costs. B. All payments will be made as provided herein, less withholding of five percent (5%) plus any additional monies withheld as provided below, and less any amounts for liquidated damages in accordance with the Section 2.3.4 of Exhibit 1, the "Liquidated Damages" section. VVTA and its assignee(s) will make payments for their respective Base Order and Option Order Commuter Coaches, delivery, at the unit prices itemized in CONTRACTOR's Pricing Schedule (Exhibit 1) within thirty (30) calendar days after the delivery and acceptance of each Coach and receipt of a proper invoice, whichever date is later, subject to the following. If VVTA and/or its assignee(s) determine that CONTRACTOR has improperly invoiced an item, including, without limitation, invoicing an item that has not been accepted or with an incorrect amount, VVTA and/or its assignee(s) may deduct that disputed item from the payment, but shall not delay payment for the undisputed portions. The amounts and reasons for such deductions shall be documented and sent to CONTRACTOR within thirty (30) days after receipt of an invoice by VVTA and/or its assignee(s) and a sequential reference number shall be assigned to each deduction. In addition, VVTA and/or its assignee(s) may withhold payment, in whole or in part, to such extent as may be reasonably necessary in VVTA's and/or its assignee(s)' opinion to protect against losses because VVTA and/or its assignee(s) determines that one or more of the following conditions exist: 1. Defective Work is not remedied; 2. Third party claims are filed against VVTA and/or its assignee(s) or there is reasonable evidence indicating the probability of filing such claims; 3. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments properly to Subcontractors or Suppliers; Section 2 — Page 8 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 4. CONTRACTOR has caused damage to VVTA, its assignee(s), or to another contractor's person or property; 5. Liquidated damages are assessed by VVTA and/or its assignee(s); or 6. Persistent failure by CONTRACTOR to carry out the Work In accordance with the Contract Documents. D. If a Coach does not meet all of the requirements under the Contract for acceptance, VVTA, at its sole discretion, may "conditionally accept" the Coach and place it into revenue service pending receipt of CONTRACTOR furnished materials and/ or labor necessary to correct the problem to permit acceptance of the Coach. For any conditionally accepted Coach, the payment owed will be reduced by an amount to be withheld equal to twice the estimated cost for parts and labor for corrective action as determined by VVTA. The amount withheld will be paid within thirty (30) days after completion of the corrective action by the CONTRACTOR and receipt of a proper invoice, whichever date is later. E. VVTA and /or its assignee(s) will make final payment for the amount of withholding for all Coaches and/or spare parts within thirty (30) calendar days after acceptance of all Coaches and spare parts and receipt of a final proper invoice, subject to the following conditions: 1. Delivery and acceptance of all Contract deliverables, including manuals and other documentation required by the Contract and completion of all required training has occurred; and 2. Withholding due to any of the reasons set out in paragraphs C and/or D, above, have been remedied to VVTA's and/or its assignee(s)' satisfaction. F. Unless otherwise agreed, payment against invoice shall be delivered by first class mail through the facilities of the US Postal Service, postage prepaid, addressed to the applicable party in the manner set forth in Article 7. Payment against invoice shall be deemed to be made in California, whether or not payment is addressed to a different location or delivered in another manner. ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the Work performed under the terms of this Contract to the extent provided by law. The CONTRACTOR agrees not to disclose information identified by VVTA as proprietary to third parties, unless approved in advance by VVTA or required by law. B. VVTA shall not be held liable or responsible for the maintenance and/or safety of the CONTRACTOR's equipment or supplies placed upon VVTA's property in accordance with this Contract. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that it assumes full responsibility for any loss or damage to its equipment and supplies. C. Any materials, equipment or work found to be damaged or defective during the period CONTRACTOR is performing the maintenance for the facility pursuant to this Agreement shall be Section 2 — Page 9 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 repaired, replaced or corrected by the CONTRACTOR hereunder without additional cost to VVTA, unless such damage is the result of VVTA's gross negligence or willful misconduct. D. CONTRACTOR shall pay for all taxes, except for sales, use, transaction and excise taxes that were legally enacted at the time CONTRACTOR's offer submitted. CONTRACTOR shall secure and pay for all permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of this Contract. ARTICLE 7. COMMUNICATIONS All Notices and other communications under this Contract shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly given: (i) on the date of delivery, if delivered personally to the party to whom notice is given, or (ii) at the earlier of actual receipt or the second BUSINESS day following deposit in the United States mail, postage prepaid. Notices and other communications shall be directed to the parties at the addresses shown below. A party may change its person designated to receive notice, or its address from time to time by giving written notice to the other party of such change at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the effective date of the change. VVTA: Victor Valley Transit Authority 17150 Smoketree Street Hesperia, California 92345 Attention: Ron Zirges (COTR) Telephone: (760) 948-4021 Ext: 118 CONTRACTOR: The parties have each carefully reviewed this Contract and have agreed to each term of this Contract. No ambiguity shall be presumed to be construed against either party. ARTICLE 8. WAIVER Waiver of any breach or default hereunder shall not constitute a continuing waiver or a waiver of any subsequent breach either of the same or of another provision of this Contract. ARTICLE 9. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING The provisions of Sections 2.2.4.3 and 2.2.4.4 of the RFP (Exhibit 1) shall apply. ARTICLE 10. SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Subject to any provision under this Contract restricting assignment or subcontracting by CONTRACTOR, the provisions of this Contract shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the respective successors, assigns, heirs, and personal representatives of the parties to this Contract. Section 2 — Page 10 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 ARTICLE 11. STATUS OF CONTRACTOR A. It is understood and agreed by all the parties hereto that Contractor is an independent contractor and that no relationship of employer-employee exists between VVTA and CONTRACTOR. Neither CONTRACTOR nor CONTRACTOR'S assigned personnel shall be entitled to any benefits payable to employees of VVTA. CONTRACTOR hereby indemnifies and holds VVTA harmless from any and all claims that may be made against VVTA, based upon any contention by any third party that an employer-employee relationship exists by reason of this Contract or any services provided pursuant to this Contract. B. It is further understood and agreed by all the parties hereto that neither CONTRACTOR nor CONTRACTOR'S assigned personnel shall have any right to act on behalf of VVTA in any capacity whatsoever as an agent or to bind VVTA to any obligation whatsoever. C. It is further understood and agreed by all the parties hereto that CONTRACTOR must issue any and all forms required by Federal and State laws for income and employment tax purposes, including, but not limited to W-2 and 941 forms, for all of CONTRACTOR'S assigned personnel. ARTICLE 12. GOVERNING LAW This Contract shall be deemed to be executed within the State of California and construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California. Any action or proceeding arising out of this Contract shall be filed and resolved in the Superior Court of the County San Bernardino. ARTICLE 13. TIME OF THE ESSENCE Time is of the essence in the performance of every term, covenant, condition, and provision of this Contract. ARTICLE 14. PUBLIC RECORDS ACT Upon its execution, this Contract (including all Exhibits) shall be subject to disclosure pursuant to the California Public Records Act. ARTICLE 15. TERMINATION OF CONTRACT, DISPUTES, AND LITIGATION The provisions of Section 2.2.6, 2.2.7, and 2.2.8 of the RFP (Exhibit 1) shall apply to this Contract. ARTICLE 16. GRATUITIES, CONTINGENT FEES AND CONFLICTS OF INTERESTS The provisions of Section 2.2.11 of the RFP (Exhibit 1) shall apply to this Contract. ARTICLE 17. DELIVERYAND TITLE The provisions of Section 2.3 of the RFP (Exhibit 1) shall apply to this Contract. ARTICLE 18. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The provisions of Section 2.3.4 of the RFP (Exhibit 1) shall apply to this Contract. Section 2 — Page 11 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 ARTICLE 19. SERVICE, TRAINING, AND PARTS The provisions of Section 2.5 of the RFP (Exhibit 1) shall apply to this Contract. ARTICLE 20. AUDIT AND INSPECTION OF RECORDS The provisions of Section 2.6 of the RFP (Exhibit 1) shall apply to this Contract. ARTICLE 21. RISK The provisions of Section 2.7 of the RFP (Exhibit 1), including but not limited to, the insurance, performance bond, indemnification, and survivability provisions, shall apply to this Contract. ARTICLE 22. FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS The provisions of Section 2.8, 2.9, and 2.10 of the RFP (Exhibit 1) shall apply to this Contract. ARTICLE 23. STATE REQUIREMENTS The provisions of Section 2.11 of the RFP (Exhibit 1) shall apply to this Contract. ARTICLE 24. SEVERABILITY If any provision of this Contract is adjudicated by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of the Contract shall continue in full force and effect. ARTICLE 25. AMENDMENT This Contract may only be amended in writing signed by both VVTA and CONTRACTOR, and any other purported amendment shall be of no force or effect. ARTICLE 26. WARRANTY OF AUTHORITY The person executing this Contract on behalf of Contractor affirmatively represents that she/he has the requisite legal authority to enter into this Contract on behalf of Contractor and to bind Contractor to the terms, covenants and conditions of this Contract. Both the person executing this Contract on behalf of Contractor and CONTRACTOR understand that VVTA is relying on this representation in entering into this Contract. ARTICLE 27. ENTIRE AGREEMENT This Contract, including any and all Exhibits, constitutes the entire agreement between VVTA and CONTRACTOR and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. In the event of a dispute between the parties as to the language of this Contract or the construction or meaning of any term hereof, this Contract shall be deemed to have been drafted by the parties in equal parts so that no presumptions or inferences concerning its terms or interpretation may be construed against any party to this Contract. Section 2 — Page 12 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Contract on the day and year set forth above. VICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY M Kevin Kane. VVTA Executive Director APPROVED AS TO FORM By: VVTA Legal Counsel CONTRACTOR 0 Name: as Title: Name: Title: 2.1 DEFINITIONS The following are definitions of special terms used in this document: Authorized Signer. The person who is executing this Contract on behalf of the Proposer/Contractor and who is authorized to bind the Proposer/Contractor. Final Offer. The last Offer made by a Proposer. If a Final Offer is not specifically requested by the Lead Procuring Agency, or if the Proposer does not timely respond to a request for a Final Offer, the most recent, current Offer shall be considered the Proposer's Final Offer. Lead Procuring Agency. Victor Valley Transit Authority, (VVTA) and its public agency assignees. Contract. The Offer and its acceptance by the Lead Procuring Agency as set out in the Contract executed by Proposer and the Lead Procuring Agency. Contracting Officer. The person who is executing this Contract on behalf of the Lead Procuring Agency and who has complete and final authority, except as limited herein. Contractor. The successful Proposer who is awarded the Contract for providing all Coaches, spare parts and training as described in the Contract Documents. Due Date. The date and time by which Offers must be received by the Lead Procuring Agency as specified in "Instructions to Proposers" (Section 1.1.3 of Lead Procuring Agency's solicitation). Section 2 — Page 13 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Joint Procuring Agencies. (Lead Procuring Agency is Victor Valley Transit Authority; Procuring agencies include, Antelope Valley Transit Authority (AVIA), Santa Clarita Transit (SCT), Monterey -Salinas Transit (MST) and Ventura County Transportation Commission (VCTC). Proposal. A promise, if accepted, to deliver the Supplies and Services according to the Solicitation using the prescribed forms, including the Proposal and negotiated terms and conditions.. Proposer. A legal entity that makes a Proposal in response to the RFP. Services. All of the labor and materials required to comply with the obligations specified in the Contract. Solicitation. Lead Procuring Agency's Request for Proposal. Supplier or Subcontractor. Any manufacturer, company, or agency providing units, components, or subassemblies for inclusion in the Coach or equipment. Supply or Supplies. All of the Coaches, parts, components, manuals and other equipment or items to be procured under the Contract. Work. Any and all labor, supervision, services, operator and maintainer training, materials, machinery, equipment, tools, supplies, and facilities called for by the Contract and necessary to the completion thereof by the Contractor. 2.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, MODIFICATIONS AND DISPUTES 2.2.1 CONTRACT AWARD 2.2.1.1 NONCOLLUSION No Proposer shall be interested in more than one Offer in response to this Request for Proposal as specified below: A. Unit prices that have not been arrived at independently without consultation, communication, or agreement with any other Proposer for the purpose of restricting competition as to any matter relating to the prices offered; B. Knowingly disclose any price offered to any other Proposer prior to the Due Date, unless otherwise required by law; C. Make any attempt to induce any other person, firm or other entity or association to submit a Proposal or not to submit a Proposal for the purpose of restricting competition; or D. Knowingly be interested in more than one Proposer as the principal Proposer, provided, however, a subcontract proposed to the principal Proposer is excluded from this paragraph D. In the case of joint venture Proposals, the joint venture itself and each and every member of the joint venture shall, for the purpose of the foregoing paragraphs, be construed to be the Proposer submitting the Proposal. Section 2 — Page 14 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Any Proposal received or contract awarded where there was a violation of this Section shall be null and void and the Proposer shall forfeit its bid bond and may be subject to disbarment for award of future Lead Procuring Agency contracts. 2.2.1.2 MATHEMATICAL ERRORS In determining the amount of each Proposal, the Lead Procuring Agency may disregard or correct computations which contain obvious mathematical errors in addition, subtraction, multiplication and division that appear on the face of the Pricing Schedule to determine which Proposer submitted the lowest total price. When the unit price and the total extended price for the item do not agree with a figure which is derived by multiplying the unit price by the quantity for that item; the unit price will prevail over the total extended price for that item and the total price to be paid for that item shall be based on the unit price and not the total extended price. If an Offer contains only a total extended price and not a unit price for an item, the unit price will be determined by dividing the total extended price by the quantity for that item. 2.2.1.3ACCCEPTANCE OF A PROPOSAL The acceptance of a Proposal for award, if made, shall be evidenced by a Notice of Award of Contract issued by the Contracting Officer in writing and delivered in person or by mail to the Proposer whose Proposal is accepted. No other act by the Contracting Officer shall evidence acceptance of a Proposal. The Contract shall be signed by a person or persons authorized to bind the Proposer. If the Proposer is a corporation, the Contract must be signed by two (2) authorized officers as set out under California Corporations Code Section 313. If the Proposer is not a corporation, the Lead Procuring Agency may require written evidence of the contracting authority of the person(s) signing the Contract. 2.2.2 ACCESSIBLE REQUIREMENTS 2.2.2.1 CALIFORNIA ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS Each Coach shall be designed and constructed to comply with the accessibility requirements set out under California Government Code Section 4500; California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, in addition to the federal accessibility requirements set out in Section 2.8.14. Contractor shall comply with any other applicable federal and state law and regulation pertaining to vehicle accessibility requirements. 2.2.2.2 ACCESSIBLE EQUIPMENT COST INFORMATION California state law provides for a sales tax exemption for the cost of equipment which was installed or was modified to provide accessible service for persons with physical disabilities. Proposers shall indicate in the space provided on the Pricing Schedule, the cost per Coach of the equipment that is to be included in the Coaches to be supplied under the Contract that is required to accommodate persons with disabilities. Examples of such equipment include wheelchair lift and controls, wheelchair securement devices, straps and seat belts, fold -up seats or modifications made to seats, stanchions, aisles and/or doorways to accommodate wheelchairs. Proposers shall be liable for and shall indemnify the Lead Section 2 — Page 15 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Procuring Agency for any fines and penalties imposed by any state or federal agency arising from or related to Proposer's inaccurate assessment of the cost of the equipment installed or modified related to Proposer's inaccurate assessment of the cost of the equipment installed or modified to provide accessible service for persons with disabilities. 2.2.3 MODIFICATIONS TO CONTRACT 2.2.3.1 CONTRACT CHANGES Any proposed change in this Request for Proposal shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for consideration by the Lead Procuring Agency at least ten (10) days prior to the Due Date. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Lead Procuring Agency reserves the right to negotiate all of the terms and conditions set out in this Request for Proposal with the successful Proposer prior to Contract award. 2.2.3.2 WRITTEN CHANGE ORDERS Oral change orders are not permitted. No change in the Contract shall be made unless the Contracting Officer gives prior written approval therefor and the change is set out as an amendment to the Contract that is executed by the parties. The Contractor shall be liable for all costs resulting from, and/or for satisfactorily correcting, any specification change not included in an executed amendment to the Contract. 2.2.3.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE As soon as reasonable possible but no later than thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of the written change order request by the Lead Procuring Agency to modify the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer a detailed price and schedule proposal for the work to be performed and/or deleted. This proposal may be modified by negotiations between the Contractor and the Contracting Officer. The modification shall be prepared as a written amendment to the Contract to be signed by both parties. Disagreements that cannot be resolved by negotiations shall be resolved in accordance with the Contract Disputes Section 2.2.7. 2.2.3.4 PRICE ADJUSTMENT FOR REGULATORY CHANGES Any supplies, equipment or materials costs incurred by Contractor for compliance with federal and state hazardous, tonics, safety and environmental laws and regulations applicable at the time the Offer is submitted as of the Due Date shall be deemed part of the unit price, even though such equipment and/or materials may not be listed in the Technical Specification. Any price adjustment, either upward or downward, for changes that are mandatory as a result of legislation or regulations that are promulgated and become effective after the Due Date and before Contract award shall be negotiated between the Contracting Officer and the Contractor and subject to audit. Any additional costs for changes that are mandatory as a result of legislation or regulations that are promulgated and become effective after the date of Contract award shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Section 2 — Page 16 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.2.4 PARTIES AND CHANGES IN PARTIES 2.2.4.1 PARTIES AND AUTHORITY The parties to the Contract are the Lead Procuring Agency and the Proposer as set out in the Contract. Each of the signatories to the Contract represent that he/she is authorized to sign the Contract on behalf of such party and that all approvals, resolutions and consents which must be obtained to bind such party have been obtained that no further approvals, acts or consents are required to bind such party to this Contract. 2.2.4.2 SUCCESSION The Contract will be binding on the parties and their successors. 2.2.4.3 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor may not assign or subcontract its rights or obligations under the Contract without prior written permission of the Lead Procuring Agency, and no such assignment or subcontract will be effective until approved in writing by the Lead Procuring Agency. The Lead Procuring Agency may assign its rights under the Contract to any public transportation agency at any time by providing written notice of the assignment to Contractor using the form set out in Appendix 1 to this Part 2, General Contract Provisions. The Proposer must include with its Pricing Schedule the unit costs for the Lead Procuring Agency's base order and options, as well as the unit costs for the options based on their modifications to the Lead Procuring Agency's Technical Performance Specification (Part 5). If the Lead Procuring Agency makes an assignment to another public agency, then with respect to that assignment, that public agency, as applicable, shall be obligated to perform all of the Lead Procuring Agency's obligations under the Contract related to that assignment and Contractor releases Lead Procuring Agency from any responsibility for the performance of those obligations. 2.2.4.4 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for the products and actions or failure to act, of all Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor shall be solely liable to Subcontractors and Suppliers with whom it enters into contracts to effectuate the purposes of the Contract. Contractor must pay directly such Subcontractors and Suppliers for all amounts due under said contracts and will indemnify and hold the Lead Procuring Agency harmless from any and all claims and liabilities arising from said contracts. The Contractor shall exert its best efforts to prevent any loss to the Lead Procuring Agency from the failure of proper performance of a Subcontractor or Supplier. The Lead Procuring Agency's only obligation with respect to Subcontractors and Suppliers will be limited to reimbursement to Contractor for those expenses for which the Lead Procuring Agency is obligated to reimburse by virtue of the terms of this Contract. B. All provisions of this Contract which are required to be included in the Contractor's subcontracts or purchase orders shall be made a part of such subcontracts or orders by the Contractor. Section 2 — Page 17 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Contractor shall make a written request to the Lead Procuring Agency and obtain the Lead Procuring Agency's prior approval before making any substitutions of Subcontractors or Suppliers. The Lead Procuring Agency's approval of any such requests must be in writing and signed by the Contracting Officer in order to be valid. C. Contractor or its subcontractor shall make payments to any Subcontractor or Supplier in accordance with the provisions of California Busines and Professions Code Section 7108.5, notwithstanding that this Contract may not otherwise be subject to said Section. 2.2.5 CONTENT OF SPECIFICATION AND OFFER 2.2.5.1 OMISSIONS Notwithstanding the provision of drawings, technical specifications, or other data provided by the Lead Procuring Agency, the Contractor shall have the responsibility for supplying all parts and details required to make the Coach complete and ready for service even though such details may not be specifically mentioned in the drawings and specifications. Fare collection equipment, communication equipment, and other items that are installed by the Lead Procuring Agency shall not be the responsibility of the Contractor unless they are included in this Contract. 2.2.5.2 DEVIATIONS Any Contractor requests, conditions, exceptions, reservations, understandings or other deviations that are not separately stated as required by "Instructions to Proposer" (Section 1.1.3) by completing the specified forms) prior to submittal of the Proposal by the Due Date, or which were not approved by the Lead Procuring Agency prior to Contract award, shall be invalid and shall not be binding on the Lead Procuring Agency. 2.2.5.3 PROBLEMS, FAULTS, DEFECTS AND NONCONFORMITY If at any time during the performance of this Contract, Contractor becomes aware of: (1) actual or potential problems, fault or defect in the Coaches or spare parts; (2) any nonconformity with the Contract, federal, state or local law, rule or regulation; or (3) has objections to any decision or order made by the Lead Procuring Agency; Contractor shall give prompt written notice thereof to the Contracting Officer. Any delay or failure on the part of the Lead Procuring Agency to provide a written response to Contractor shall neither constitute agreement with nor acquiescence to Contractor's statement or claim, nor constitute a waiver of any of Lead Procuring Agency's rights. 2.2.6 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT 2.2.6.1 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE A. The performance of Work under this Contract may be terminated in whole, or from time to time in part, by the Contracting Officer for the convenience of the Lead Procuring Agency whenever the Contracting Officer determines that such termination is in the best interest of the Lead Procuring Agency and the other procuring agencies. Any such termination shall be effected by delivery to the Contractor of a written Notice of Termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes Section 2 — Page 18 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 effective. After receipt of a Notice of Termination, and except as otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor must: 1. Stop the Work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified in the Notice of Termination; 2. Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services, or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work under the Contract as is not terminated; 3. Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work terminated as set out in the Notice of Termination; 4. Assign to the Lead Procuring Agency in the manner, at the times, and to the extent directed by the Contracting Officer, all of the right, title, and interest of the Contractor under the orders and subcontracts so terminated, in which case the Lead Procuring Agency shall have the right, in its discretion, to settle or pay and or all claims arising out of the termination of such orders and subcontracts; 5. Settle all outstanding liabilities and all claims arising out of such termination of orders and subcontracts, with the approval or ratification of the Contracting Officer, to the extent he/she may require, which approval or ratification shall be final for all the purposes of this Section; 6. Transfer title to the Lead Procuring Agency and deliver in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if any, directed by Contracting Officer the fabricated or un -fabricated parts, work in process, completed work, supplies, and other material produced as part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the Work terminated, and the completed or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other property which, if the Contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the Lead Procuring Agency; 7. Use its best efforts to sell, in the manner, at the times, to the extent, and at the price(s) directed or authorized by the Contracting Officer, and property of the types referred to above, provided, however, that the Contractor shall not be required to extend credit to any purchaser, and may acquire an such property under the conditions prescribed by and at a price(s) approved by the Contracting Officer, and provided further, that the proceeds of any such transfer or disposition shall be applied in reduction of any payments to be made by the Lead Procuring Agency to the Contractor under this Contract or shall otherwise be credited to the price, or cost of the Work covered by this Contract or paid in such other manner as the Contracting Officer may direct; 8. Complete performance of such part of the Work as shall not have been terminated by the Notice of Termination; and 9. Take such action as may be necessary, or as the Contracting Officer may direct, for the protection or preservation of the property related to this Contract which is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the Lead Procuring Agency has or may acquire an interest. Section 2 — Page 19 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 B. After receipt of a Notice of Termination, the Contractor shall submit to the Lead Procuring Agency its termination claim, in the form and with certification prescribed by the Lead Procuring Agency. Such claim shall be submitted promptly but in no event later than six months from the effective date of termination, unless one or more extensions in writing are granted by the Lead Procuring Agency, upon request of the Contractor made in writing within such six months period or authorized extension thereof. However, if the Lead Procuring Agency determines that the facts justify such action, it may receive and act upon any such termination claim at any time after such six months period or any extension thereof. Upon failure of the Contractor to submit its termination claim within the time allowed, the Lead Procuring Agency may determine, on the basis of information available, the amount, if any, due the Contractor by reason of the termination and will thereupon pay the Contractor the amount so determined. C. Subject to the provisions of subsection B above, the Contractor and the Lead Procuring Agency may agree upon the whole or any part of the amount or amounts to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the total or partial termination or work pursuant to this Section, which amount or amounts may include an allowance for profit on work done; provided that such agreed amount or amounts exclusive of settlement costs, shall not exceed the total Contract Consideration as reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further reduced by the Contract price of work not terminated. The Contract will be amended accordingly, and the Contractor will be paid the agreed amount. D. In the event of failure of the Contractor and the Lead Procuring Agency to agree, as provided in subsection C, upon the amount to be paid the Contractor by reason of the termination of Work pursuant to this Section, the Lead Procuring Agency will pay the Contractor the amounts determined by the Lead Procuring Agency as follows, but without duplication of any amounts agreed in accordance with subsection: With respect to Contract Work performed prior to the effective date of the Notice of Termination, the total (without duplication of any items) of: 1. The costs of such Work; 2. The cost of settling and paying claims arising out of the termination of Work under subcontracts or orders as provided in subsection A (5) above, exclusive of the amounts paid or payable on account of supplies or material delivered or services furnished by the subcontractor prior to the effective date of the Notice of Termination of Work under this Contract, which amounts shall be included in the costs on account of which payment is made under B (1) above; 3. A sum, as profit on D(1) above, determined by the Lead Procuring Agency to be fair and reasonable; provided, however, that if it appears that the Contractor would have sustained a loss on the entire Contract had it been completed, no profit shall be included or allowed under this subsection D(3) and an appropriate adjustment shall be made by reducing the amount of the settlement to reflect the indicated rate of loss; and Section 2 — Page 20 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 4. The reasonable cost of preservation and protection of property incurred pursuant to subsection A (9) and any other reasonable cost incidental to termination of work under this Contract, including expense incidental to the determination of the amount due to the Contractor as the result of the termination of Work under this Contract. E. The total sum to be paid to the Contractor under subsection D will not exceed the total Contract Consideration as reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further reduced by the Contract price of Work not terminated. Except for normal spoilage, and except to the extent that the Lead Procuring Agency will have otherwise expressly assumed the risk of loss, there will be excluded from the amounts payable to the Contractor under subsection D the fair value, as determined by the Lead Procuring Agency, of property which is destroyed, lost, stolen, or damaged so as to become undeliverable to the Lead Procuring Agency, or to a purchaser pursuant to subsection A (7) of this Section. F. In arriving at the amount due the Contractor under this Section, there will be deducted: 1. The amount of any claim which the Lead Procuring Agency has against the Contractor in connection with the Contract; and 2. The agreed price for, or the proceeds of sale of materials, supplies, or other items acquired by the Contractor or sold, pursuant to the provision of this Section, and not otherwise recovered by or credited to the Lead Procuring Agency. G. If the termination hereunder is partial, prior to the settlement of the terminated portion of the Contract, the Contractor may file with the Lead Procuring Agency a written request for an adjustment of the price or prices specified in the Contract relating to the continued portion of the Contract (the portion not terminated by the Notice of Termination), and such adjustment as may be agreed will be made in the price or prices. H. The Lead Procuring Agency may from time to time, at its sole discretion and under terms and conditions it may prescribe, make partial payments and payments on account against cost incurred by the Contractor in connection with the terminated portion of the Contract whenever, in the opinion of the Lead Procuring Agency, the aggregate of payments does not exceed the amount to which the Contractor will be entitled hereunder. If the total of the payments is in excess of the amount finally agreed or determined to be due under this Section, the excess shall be paid by the Contractor to the Lead Procuring Agency upon demand, together with interest at the rate of 10 percent per annum or the maximum rate permitted by applicable law, whichever is less, for the period from the date the excess payment is received by the Contractor to the date on which the excess payment is repaid to the Lead Procuring Agency. I. Unless otherwise provided for in this Contract, or by applicable statute, the Contractor, from the effective date of termination and for a period of three years after final settlement under this Contract, shall preserve and make available to the Lead Procuring Agency at all reasonable times at the office of the Contractor but without direct charge to the Lead Procuring Agency, all its books, records, documents, and other evidence bearing on the costs and expenses of the Contractor under this Contract and relating to the Work terminated hereunder, or to the extent Section 2 — Page 21 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 approved by the Lead Procuring Agency, photographs, microphotographs, or other authentic reproductions thereof. J. The Contractor shall insert in all subcontracts that the Subcontractor or Supplier shall stop work on the date of and to the extent specified in a Notice of Termination from the Lead Procuring Agency and shall require that any tier subcontractor to insert the same provision in any tier subcontract. K. The Contractor shall communicate immediately upon receipt thereof, any Notice of Termination issued by the Lead Procuring Agency to the affected Subcontractors and Suppliers of any tier. L. Under no circumstances is the Contractor entitled to anticipatory, unearned profits or consequential damages as a result of a termination or partial termination under this Section. The payment to the Contractor determined in accordance with this Section constitutes exclusive remedy for a termination hereunder. M. Anything contained in the Contract to the contrary notwithstanding, a termination under this Section shall not waive any right or claim to damages which the Lead Procuring Agency may have and the Lead Procuring Agency may pursue any course of action it may have under the Contract. 2.2.6.2 TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT A. By written Notice of Termination to the Contractor, the Lead Procuring Agency and the other procuring agencies may cancel the whole or any part of the Contract in any one of the following circumstances: 1. If the Contractor fails to perform the Work within the time specified or any extension thereof; 2. If the Contractor fails to perform any of the provisions of the Contract, or so fails to make progress as to endanger performance of the Contract in accordance with its terms, and in either of these two later circumstances does not cure such failure within a period of the 10) calendar days (or such additional time as may be specified in the notice) after the Lead Procuring Agency gives notice to Contractor of the failure; 3. The Contractor or Subcontractor or Supplier has violated an authorized order or requirement of the Lead Procuring Agency; 4. Abandonment of the Contract; 5. Assignment of subcontracting of the Contract or any Work under the Contract without approval by the Lead Procuring Agency; 6. Bankruptcy or appointment of a receiver for the Contractor's property; 7. Performance by the Contractor in bad faith; 8. Contractor allowing any final judgment to stand (unsatisfied) for a period of 48 hours (excluding weekends and legal holiday(s); Section 2 — Page 22 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 9. Material failure to comply with the law, ordinance, rule, regulation or order of a legal authority applicable to the Contract, the Work, the Contractor or the goods; or 10. Failure to indemnify any party which the Contractor is obligated to indemnify under the Section 2.7.5, Indemnification, or elsewhere under the Contract. B. The Contractor shall be provided a period of ten (10) days to cure such failure (or such longer period as the Contracting Officer may authorize in writing) after receipt of notice from the Lead Procuring Agency specifying such failure. C. In the event the Contractor does not cure the breach to the satisfaction of the Lead Procuring Agency within the time period specified by the Contracting Officer, the Contracting Officer will send the Contractor a written notice of failure to cure the breach. Upon receipt of such written notice from the Lead Procuring Agency, Contractor shall: 1. Stop Work on the date of, and to the extent specified in, the Notice of Termination; 2. Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, equipment, services, or facilities, except that which is necessary to complete the portion of the Work which is expressly not cancelled under the Notice of Termination; 3. Cancel all orders or subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work cancelled under the Notice of Termination; and 4. Comply with all other requirements of the Lead Procuring Agency specified in the Notice of Termination. D. If the Contract is cancelled as provided in this Section, the Lead Procuring Agency may require Contractor to transfer title and deliver to the Lead Procuring Agency, as directed by the Lead Procuring Agency, the following: 1. Any completed supplies or equipment furnished by the Lead Procuring Agency; and 2. Such partially completed supplies and materials, installations, parts, tools, dies, jigs, fixtures, plans, drawings, information, and contract rights (hereinafter called "manufacturing materials") that the Contractor has specifically produced or acquired for the cancelled portion of this Contract. The Contractor shall also protect and preserve property in its possession in which the Lead Procuring Agency has an interest at the Contractor's sole expense. E. Upon the Lead Procuring Agency's Termination of the Contractor's right to proceed with the Work because of the Contractor's default under the Contract, the Lead Procuring Agency will have the right to complete the Work by whatever means and method it deems advisable. The Lead Procuring Agency will not be required to obtain the lowest prices for completing the Work but shall make such expenditures as, in the Lead Procuring Agency's sole judgment, best accomplish such completion. F. The expense of completing the Work, together with a reasonable charge for engineering, managerial and administrative services, as certified by the Lead Procuring Agency, will be Section 2 — Page 23 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 charged and will be deducted by the Lead Procuring Agency out of such monies as may be due or may at any time thereafter become due to the Contractor. In case such expense is in excess of the sum which otherwise would have been payable to the Contractor under the Contract, then the Contractor or its surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the Lead Procuring Agency upon notice of the excess so due. The Lead Procuring Agency may, in its sole discretion, withhold all or any part of any progress payments otherwise due the Contractor until completion and final settlement of the Work covered by the Notice of Termination of Contractor's right to proceed. G. Contractor shall insert in all subcontracts that the Subcontractor or Supplier will stop work on the date of or to the extent specified in a Notice of Termination from the Lead Procuring Agency and shall require the Subcontractors and Suppliers to insert the same provision in any of their subcontracts. H. The Contractor shall immediately upon receipt communicate any Notice of Termination issued by the Lead Procuring Agency to the affected Subcontractors and Suppliers at any tier. I. The Surety on the Contractor's Performance Bond provided for in this Contract shall not be entitled to take over the Contractor's performance of Work in case of termination under this Section, except with the prior written consent of the Lead Procuring Agency. J. The Contractor shall not be liable for any costs in excess of the total Contract Consideration if the failure to perform the Contract arises out of causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. If the failure to perform is caused by the default of a Subcontractor and/or Supplier and such default arises out of causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of either the Contractor or the Subcontractor and/or Supplier, and if the Supplies or Services to be furnished by the Subcontractor or Supplier were not obtainable from other sources in sufficient time to permit the Contractor to meet the required Delivery Schedule, the Contractor shall not be liable for any costs in excess of the total Contract Consideration to complete the Work. K. If, after issuance of the Notice of Termination of this Contract, it is determined for any reason that the Contractor was not in breach, or that the breach was excusable, the rights and obligations of the parties shall be the same as if the Notice of Termination had been issued pursuant to the Termination for Convenience Section, and the Contractor shall be reimbursed for costs incurred under the terms of that Section. 2.2.6.3 STOP WORK ORDER In addition to the right to terminate or cancel the Contract, the Lead Procuring Agency and other procuring agencies may at any time, by written order to Contractor, require Contractor to stop all, or any part, of the Work called for by this Contract for a period of up to 90 calendar days after the order is delivered to Contractor, and for any further period to which the parties may agree. Any such order shall be specifically identified as a "Stop Work Order" issued pursuant to this clause. As a minimum, any such Stop Work Order shall include the following, in writing: A. A clear description of the work to be suspended; Section 2 — Page 24 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 B. Guidance as to the actions to be taken on subcontracts; and/or C. Other suggestions to Contractor for minimizing costs. Upon receipt of such an Order, Contractor shall forthwith comply with its terms and take all reasonable steps to minimize the incurrence of cost allocable to the work covered by the Order during the period of work stoppage. Within the period of 90 calendar days or the lesser period specified after a Stop Work Order is delivered to Contractor, or within any extension of that period to which the parties shall have agreed, the Lead Procuring Agency and the other procuring agencies may: A. Terminate the Work covered by such Order as provided in 'Termination for Convenience: (Section 2.2.6.1) or "Termination for Default' (Section 2.2.6.2); or B. Cancel the Stop Work Order; or C. Allow the period of the Stop Work Order to expire. 2.2.6.4 COSTS OF STOP WORK ORDER If a Stop Work Order is cancelled or the period of the Order or any extension thereof expires, Contractor shall resume Work. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Work scope or Contract price, or both, and the Contract shall be modified in writing accordingly if: A. The Stop Work Order results in an increase in the time required for, or in Contractor's costs properly allocable to, the performance of any part of this Contract; and B. Contractor asserts a claim for such adjustment within 30 calendar days after the end of the period of work stoppage; provided that, if Lead Procuring Agency decides the facts justify such action, Lead Procuring Agency may receive and act upon any such claim asserted at any time prior to final payment under this Contract. Any cost due to Stop Work Order issued because of contract noncompliance will be borne by Contractor. PR*MQM011I*I A. Notice of Potential Claim With respect to disputes arising under this Contract, the Contractor shall have no right to additional compensation for any claim that may be based on any act, failure to act, event, thing, or occurrence for which no written notice of potential claim has been filed with the Lead Procuring Agency. The written notice of potential claim shall set forth the reasons for which the Contractor believes additional compensation will or may be due, the nature of the costs involved, and, insofar as possible, the amount of the potential claim. The notice must be received by the Lead Procuring Agency or the other participating procuring agencies within thirty (30) days after the Contractor knew, or should have known, of the happening of the act, failure to act, event, thing, or occurrence giving rise to the potential claim. Contractor shall have no right to additional Section 2 — Page 25 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 compensation for any claim that may be based on any such act, failure to act, event, thing, or occurrence for which no written notice of potential claim as herein required was filed. B. Negotiation The parties shall attempt in good faith to resolve any dispute arising out of or relating to this Contract promptly by negotiation. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claim notice, both parties shall meet at a mutually acceptable time and place in an attempt to resolve the dispute. C. Decision by Contracting Officer Any dispute concerning a question of fact arising during the performance of the Contract which is not disposed of by negotiation will be decided by the Contracting Officer who will reduce their decision to writing and mail or otherwise furnish a copy thereof to the Contractor. The decision of the Contracting Officer will be final and binding. Within thirty (30) days from the date of issuance of the Contracting Officer's final decision, the Contractor must notify the Lead Procuring Agency in writing of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the final decision. The Contractor will be obligated to perform in accordance with said decision notwithstanding the Contractor's rights to appeal. Should the decision be reversed on appeal, the contracting parties will be made whole to the extent possible. D. Arbitration 1. If the parties mutually agree to arbitration, any dispute or claim in law or equity between the Lead Procuring Agency, (VVTA) and CONTRACTOR arising out of this Contract, if not resolved by informal negotiation between the parties, shall be mediated by referring it to the Judicial Arbitration and Mediation Services, Inc. (JAMS) office nearest Hesperia, California for mediation. Each party shall provide the other with a list of four (4) mediators. The parties shall confer on the list and select a mutually agreeable mediator. Mediation shall consist of an informal, non-binding conference or conferences between the parties and the judge -mediator jointly, then in separate caucuses wherein the judge will seek to guide the parties to a resolution of the case. All conferences shall take place within fifty (50) miles of Hesperia, California. If the parties cannot agree to a mutually acceptable member from the JAMS panel of retired judges, a list and resumes of available mediators with substantial experience in mediating claims of the type at issue between the parties, numbering one more than there are parties, will be sent to the parties, each of whom will strike one name leaving the remaining name as the mediator. If more than one name remains, the JAMS arbitration administrator will choose a mediator from the remaining names. All mediation proceedings shall be without prejudice and the cost of the proceedings shall be shared equally by the parties. The mediation process shall continue until the case is resolved or until such time as the mediator makes a finding that there is no possibility of resolution, then the mediation will be terminated and each party may pursue all remedies available to it at law or in equity except as specifically limited elsewhere in this Contract. 2. If the parties mutually agree, any dispute or claim in law or equity between VVTA and Contractor arising out of this Contract which is not settled through mediation shall be decided Section 2 — Page 26 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 by neutral binding arbitration and not by court action, except as provided by California law for judicial review of arbitration proceedings. All arbitration sessions shall take place within fifty (50) miles of Hesperia, California. The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the rules of Judicial Arbitration Mediation Services, Inc. (JAMS). The parties to an arbitration may agree in writing to use different rules and/or arbitrators. E. The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract and the rights and remedies available hereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. No action or failure to act by VVTA or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach hereunder, except as may be mutually agreed in writing. F. The rights afforded to VVTA in Section 2.2.6 and 2.2.7 shall be in addition to any other rights provided by law or set forth in this Contract. VVTA may exercise any or all of such rights which individually or conjunctively will totally compensate VVTA for the damages suffered by VVTA resulting from the default of the Contractor. G. If VVTA elects to waive its remedies for any breach by the Contractor of any covenant, term or condition of this Contract, such waiver by VVTA shall not limit VVTA's remedies for any succeeding breach of that or of any other term, covenant, or condition of this Contract. 2.2.8 LITIGATION The interpretation and enforcement of the Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of California, the state in which the Contract will be signed. If any action is filed arising directly or indirectly from any dispute under this Contract or from any matter submitted to arbitration pursuant to this Contract, proper jurisdiction and venue for such action shall lie in the Superior Court of the County of San Bernardino for Victor Valley Transit Authority, and the respective counties where the other Procuring Agencies are situated. 2.2.8.1 REQUIREMENT FOR OUT-OF-STATE CONTRACTORS Within 20 days after the date of the Notice of Contract Award, the Contractor shall appoint a registered agent in California and notify the Lead Procuring Agency in writing of the name and address of said agent in California who is authorized to accept all correspondence and legal process on behalf of the Contractor. The Contractor shall not change said agent without prior notice to the Lead Procuring Agency. D*411R1• 01 [x] 01 [gTIMV14 N Waiver of any breach or default hereunder shall not constitute a continuing waiver or a waiver of any subsequent breach either of the same or of another provision of this Contract. Section 2 — Page 27 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 The rights and remedies of the Lead Procuring Agency provided in Section 2.2.6 and 2.2.7 shall not be exclusive and are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Contract. 2.2.11 GRATUITIES, CONTINGENT FEES AND CONFLICTS OF INTERESTS 2.2.11.1 COVENANT AGAINST GRATUITIES A. Prohibited Conduct 1. During the term of this Contract, Contractor, its officers and employees and their immediate families are prohibited from offering or giving a gratuity in any form including, without limitation, entertainment, favors, loans, gifts or anything of greater than nominal value for any reason including personal, non -business related reasons to any Lead Procuring Agency officer or employee or their immediate families. For the purpose of this section, nominal value means anything: (1) having an aggregate value of $35.00 (thirty-five dollars) or less per year; or (2) any perishable item (flowers or food) of any value except that prepared meals are subject to the $35.00 limit. A campaign contribution is not a gratuity and is not prohibited by this Section. 2. Violation of subparagraph A(1) of this provision is a material breach of this Contract, and Lead Procuring Agency shall have the right to debar Contractor from participating at any tier in any Lead Procuring Agency contract for a period of up to five (5) years. 3. Contractor shall include a copy of subparagraphs A(1) and A(2) of this provision in any agreement it makes with its subcontractors. Covenant Contractor covenants that prior to award of this Contract, Contractor has disclosed, (using the Interests and Gratuities Certification which is incorporated into the Contract by this reference) any gratuity, as described above, that it, its officers, employees or their immediate families have offered or given to any Lead Procuring Agency officer, employee or their immediate families for any reason including personal non -Business related reasons within the twelve (12) months prior to award of this Contract. Any gratuity offered or given after submission of the initial Certification shall be provided in an amended Certification with the executed Contract and shall be incorporated into the Contract by this reference. Violation of this covenant is a material breach of this Contract. 2.2.11.2 COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES Contractor covenants that no person or selling agency has been employed or retained to solicit or secure the Contract upon an agreement or understanding for a commission, percentage, brokerage, or contingent fee; excepting bona fide employees or bona fide established commercial or selling agencies maintained by Contractor for the purpose of securing business. For breach or violation of agencies maintained by Contractor for the purpose of securing business. For breach or violation of this covenant, Lead Procuring Agency shall have the right to cancel the Contract without liability for payment for any Section 2 — Page 28 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 services provided or, at its discretion, to deduct from the contract price or consideration, or otherwise recover, the full amount of such commission, percentage, brokerage or contingent fee. 2.2.11.3 CONFLICT OF INTEREST A. Prohibited Interests 1. During the term of this Contract, Contractor, its officers, employees and their immediate families shall not acquire any interest, direct or indirect, that would conflict with the performance of services required to be performed under this Contract. 2. Violation of subparagraph A. (1), is a material breach of this Contract, and Lead Procuring Agency shall have the right to debar Contractor from participating at any tier in any Lead Procuring Agency contract for a period of up to five (5) years. 3. Contractor shall include a copy of subparagraphs A. (1), and A. (2), of this provision in any agreement it makes with its subcontractors. B. Covenant 1. Contractor covenants that prior to award of this Contract, Contractor has disclosed (using the Interests and Gratuities Certification provided in Part 1) any present interest and any interest existing within twelve (12) months prior to award of this Contract including, without limitation, any business or personal relationship that creates an appearance of a conflict of interest. Disclosable interests and relationships are those that may reasonably be viewed as creating a potential or actual conflict of interest. Disclosable interests and relationships are those that may reasonably be viewed as creating a potential or actual conflict of interest. Any existing or prospective interest acquired or occurring after submission of the initial Certification shall be provided in an amended Certification with the executed Contract and shall be incorporated into the Contract by this reference. Violation of this covenant is a material breach of this Contract. 2. In addition, Contractor shall immediately disclose in writing to the Lead Procuring Agency and or to the other procuring agencies General Manager and Chief Legal Counsel any interest or relationship described in subparagraph B(1) acquired or occurring during the term of this Contract. 3. Violation of the above disclosure obligations is a material breach of this Contract. Section 2 — Page 29 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.3 DELIVERY AND TITLE 2.3.1 DELIVERIES 2.3.1.1 COACH DELIVERY LOCATION Delivery of the Lead Procuring Agency's Coaches shall be determined by signed receipt of the Lead Procuring Agency's Executive Director or designee. Hours of delivery shall be 9:00 AM through 5:00 PM, Monday through Friday. The following is the Lead Procuring Agency's delivery location: Ron Zirges Director of Maintenance & Facilities Victor Valley Transit Authority 17150 Smoketree Street Hesperia, CA 92345 (760) 948-4021; Ext: 118 rzirges@vvta.org The delivery location addresses and Points of Contact for each of the other Procuring Transit Agencies are as follows: Adrian Aguilar Santa Clarita Transit Transit Maintenance Facility (TMF) 28250 Constellation Road Santa Clarita, CA 91355 Mark Perry Maintenance Manager Antelope Valley Transit Authority 422106 th Street West Lancaster. CA 93534 Mike Hernandez Assistant General Manager/COO Monterey -Salinas Transit One Ryan Ranch Road Monterey, CA 93940 Vic Kamhi Director of Transit Programs Ventura County Transportation Commission 950 County Square Drive, Suite 207 Ventura. CA 93003 Section 2 — Page 30 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Delivery of the option Coaches to the option Coach Assignees shall be determined by signed receipt of that agency's designated Contracting Officer or designee at the point of delivery specified in the Technical Specification. 2.3.1.2 DELIVERY SCHEDULE The base order of the Lead Procuring Agency's Coaches must be delivered at a rate not to exceed three (3) Coaches per week. Delivery shall be completed no later than 42 weeks after issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Delivery of the Lead Procuring Agency's and its assignees option Coaches will be at the rate set out in the Contractor's Proposal. 2.3.1.3 PRE -DELIVERY TESTS AND INSPECTIONS The pre -delivery tests and inspections must be performed at or near the Contractor's plant in accordance with the procedures defined in Part 3: Quality Assurance Provisions and witnessed by the Lead Procuring Agency's Resident Inspector. Release of a Coach to be delivered to the location set forth in Section 2.3.1.1 will be subject to the successful completion of the pre -delivery test and inspections and written authorization by the Lead Procuring Agency's Resident Inspector. 2.3.1.4 ACCEPTANCE OF COACH Within fifteen (15) calendar days after arrival at the designated point of delivery as set out in Section 2.3.1.1, each Coach shall undergo the Lead Procuring Agency tests as defined in Section 4: Quality Assurance Provisions. If the Coach passes these tests, the Lead Procuring Agency will notify the Contractor in writing of the Lead Procuring Agency's acceptance of the Coach. If the Lead Procuring Agency places the Coach in revenue service, the Lead Procuring Agency will be deemed to have accepted the Coach, except as provided in the Contract for conditional acceptance of a Coach. If the Coach fails these tests, it shall not be accepted by the Lead Procuring Agency until the Coach has been repaired in accordance with the procedures defined in "Repairs After Non-acceptance" (Section 2.3.2), the Coach is retested and it passes such tests, and the Lead Procuring Agency provides written notice to Contractor of its acceptance of the Coach. In addition, a Coach will not be accepted prior to the Contractor providing to the Lead Procuring Agency all of the certifications as required by law, regulation and/or the Contract, and completion of applicable post -delivery audits as required under the Contract. 2.3.2 REPAIRS AFTER NONACCEPTANCE The Contractor, or its designated representative, shall perform the repairs after non-acceptance. If the Contractor fails or refuses to make the repairs within five (5) days, then the work may be done by the Lead Procuring Agency's personnel and the Contractor will be obligated to reimburse the Lead Procuring Agency for its actual and reasonable costs as set out in Section 2.3.2.1. Lead Procuring Agency may deduct the amount owed by Contractor from the next payment owed to Contractor. If the amount owed by the Contractor exceeds the amount remaining to be paid to the Contractor under the Contract, the Contractor must pay the Lead Procuring Agency's invoice within thirty (30) days after receipt. In such event, the Lead Procuring Agency will not be obligated to accept the Coach until after the Contractor has paid the Lead Procuring Agency for its costs of repair. Section 2 — Page 31 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.3.2.1 REPAIRS BY CONTRACTOR After non-acceptance of the Coach, the Contractor must begin work within five (5) working days after receiving notification from the Lead Procuring Agency of failure of acceptance tests. The Lead Procuring Agency shall make the Coach available to complete repairs timely within the Contractor's repair schedule. The Contractor shall provide, at its own expense, all spare parts, tools, and space required to complete the repairs. At the Lead Procuring Agency's option, the Contractor may be required to remove the Coach from the Lead Procuring Agency's property while repairs are being affected. If the Coach is removed from the Lead Procuring Agency's property, repair procedures must be diligently pursued by the Contractor's representatives, and the Contractor shall assume risk of loss while the Coach is under its control. 2.3.2.2 REPAIRS BY PROCURING AGENCY A. Parts Used. If the Lead Procuring Agency performs the repairs after non-acceptance of the Coach, it shall correct or repair the defect and any related defects using Contractor -specified parts available from Lead Procuring Agency's stock or those supplied by the Contractor specifically for this repair. Monthly, or at a period to be mutually agreed upon, reports of all repairs covered by this procedure shall be submitted by the Lead Procuring Agency to the Contractor for reimbursement or replacement of parts. The Contractor shall provide forms for these reports. B. Contractor Supplied Parts. If the Contractor supplies parts for repairs being performed by the Lead Procuring Agency after non-acceptance of the Coach, these parts shall be shipped prepaid to the Lead Procuring Agency from any source selected by the Contractor within ten (10) working days after receipt of the request for said parts. C. Return of Defective Components. The Contractor may request that parts covered by this provision be returned to the manufacturing plant. The total costs for this action shall be paid by the Contractor. D. Reimbursement for Labor. The Lead Procuring Agency shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for labor. The amount shall be $75 per hour for all man-hours actually required to correct the defect. E. Reimbursement for Parts. The Lead Procuring Agency shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for defective parts that must be replaced to correct the defect. The reimbursement shall include taxes where applicable and 15 percent handling costs. D*Ni1101le\1L61I DIM -11 No Q =I lill 2.3.3.1 CONTRACTOR'S DELAY A. If the Contractor is delayed at any time during the progress of the Work due solely by the acts or failure to act when under a duty to act by the Lead Procuring Agency, or by a cause described below, then the time for completion and/or affected delivery date(s) shall be extended by the Lead Procuring Agency if all of the following conditions are met as determined by the Lead Procuring Agency: Section 2 — Page 32 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1. The cause of the delay arises after the date of the Notice to Proceed and the cause of the delay could not have been anticipated by the Contractor by reasonable investigation before Contract award; 2. The Contractor demonstrates that the completion of the Work and/or affected delivery(s) will be actually and necessarily delayed; 3. The delay in completion of the Work and/or affected delivery cannot be avoided or mitigated by the exercise of all reasonable precautions, efforts and measures, whether before or after the occurrence of the cause of delay; and 4. The Contractor makes written request and provides other information to the Lead Procuring Agency as described in "Notification of Contractor Delay' (Section 2.3.3.2 below). B. The Contractor may not be excused from performing in accordance with its Delivery Schedule if the Contractor delays in submitting its request for a time extension or fails to provide all of the information required to support such request. The Contractor may not receive a time extension if an excusable delay runs concurrent with and inexcusable delay. Defaults of Subcontractors and Suppliers shall be conclusively presumed to be within the control of the Contractor unless caused entirely by an excusable delay. C. As used herein, the term "excusable delay" means one or more of the following: Acts of God or of the public enemy, acts of government in its sovereign or contractual capacity, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes or other labor disputes, freight embargoes, and unusually severe weather, but in every case the failure to perform must be beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the nonperforming party. D. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor will not be relieved of its liability for the payment of liquidated damages owing from its failure to complete the Work in accordance with the Delivery Schedule (Section 2.3.1.2) pursuant to "Liquidated Damages" (Section 2.3.4) for delays occurring prior to, or subsequent to, the occurrence of and excusable delay. E. The Lead Procuring Agency reserves the right to rescind or shorten any time extension previously granted, if the Lead Procuring Agency subsequently determines that any information provided by Contractor in support of a request for a time extension was erroneous. Notwithstanding the foregoing sentence, the Lead Procuring Agency will not rescind or shorten any time extension previously granted if the Lead Procuring Agency determines that Contractor acted in reliance upon the granting of such extension and such extension was based on information which, although later found to have been erroneous, was submitted in good faith by the Contractor. 2.3.3.2 NOTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR DELAY Notwithstanding "Contractor's Delay" (Section 2.3.3.1), no extension or adjustment of time shall be granted unless: (1) the Contractor provided written notice of a delay in completion of the Work or compliance with the Delivery Schedule to the Lead Procuring Agency no later than fourteen (14) days Section 2 — Page 33 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 from the date the Contractor knew or should have known of the circumstances causing such delay; and (2) a written application therefor, stating in reasonable detail the causes, the effect to -date, the portion or portions of the Work affected, and the probable future effect on the performance by the Contractor and the Delivery Schedule is filed by within thirty (30) calendar days after the date the initial notice under subparagraph (1) above was sent. The Lead Procuring Agency shall make its determination on the request within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of a complete application. A time extension, if granted, will not be deemed a waiver of the rights of either party under this Contract. 2.3.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is mutually understood and agreed by and between the parties to the Contract that time is of the essence with respect to the completion of the Work and that in case of any failure on the part of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time specified in "Delivery Schedule" (Section 2.3.1.2), except for any excusable delays as provided in "Unavoidable Delays" (Section 2.3.3), or any extension thereof, the Lead Procuring Agency will be damaged thereby. The amount of said damages, being difficult if not impossible of definite ascertainment and proof, it is hereby agreed that the amount of such damages due the Lead Procuring Agency shall be fixed at $200.00 per calendar day per Coach for each day that the Coach is not delivered to Lead Procuring Agency's Coach Delivery Location (Section 2.3.1.1) in accordance with Contractor's delivery schedule as set out in the Contract Documents in substantially as good condition as the Coach was when it was inspected by the Lead Procuring Agency's inspector at the time the Coach was released for shipment. The Contractor hereby agrees to pay the afore stated amounts as fixed, agreed and liquidated damages, and not by way of penalty, to the Lead Procuring Agency and further authorizes the Lead Procuring Agency to deduct the amount of the damages from money due the Contractor under the Contract, computed as aforesaid. If the monies due the Contractor are insufficient or no monies are due the Contractor, the Contractor shall pay the Lead Procuring Agency the difference or the entire amount, whichever may be the case, within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of a written demand by the Contracting Officer. The payment of aforesaid fixed, agreed and liquidated damages shall be in lieu of any damages for any loss of profit, loss of revenue, loss of use, or for any other direct, indirect, special or consequential losses or damages of any kind whatsoever that may be suffered by the Lead Procuring Agency arising at any time from the failure of the Contractor to fulfill the obligations referenced in this clause in a timely manner. In addition to the foregoing, the Lead Procuring Agency and other procuring agencies specifically reserve the right, without limitation of any other rights, to terminate the Contract in accordance with 'Termination of Contract' (Section 2.2.6) 2.3.5 TITLE Documents acceptable to the State of California Department of Motor Vehicles for registering each Coach shall be provided to the Lead Procuring Agency at least 20 days before each Coach is released to the common carrier. Upon acceptance of each Coach, the Contractor warrants that the title shall pass to the Lead Procuring Agency free and clear of all encumbrances. The Contractor is not Section 2 — Page 34 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 authorized to ship the Coaches or spare parts under a reservation and no tender of a bill of lading shall operate as tender of the Coaches or spare parts. 2.4 PAYMENT For the consideration hereinafter set forth, VVTA, and Contractor agree as follows: 1. VVTA shall review for compensation each of the Contractor's approved invoices until acceptance and transfer of title for each coach delivered pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Contract. 2. Upon receipt of written notification from VVTA certifying that the Contract is final and complete, and that Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the Contract, all fees due the Contractor, less charges for Liquidated Damages, shall be released. 2.5 SERVICES AND PARTS 2.5.1 TRAINING A. Contractor shall arrange, at Contractor's sole cost and expense, to have the Coach manufacturer provide a total of 40 hours of Coach Initial Familiarization Training for each of the five participating transit agencies as determined by Victor Valley Transit Authority in Hesperia, California, and at the designated locations of each of the other four transit agencies participating in the procurement action. In addition, a field service representative shall be made available for each of the five (5) Transit Agencies within 24 hours after a request has been made. B. Contractor shall arrange, at Contractor's sole cost and expense, to have the Coach manufacturer and any other component supplier which is required to provide training as set out above to furnish a complete set of all informational materials used to conduct the training. Such materials will include, at a minimum, lesson plans, course syllabus, handouts, audio visual aids, workbooks, overhead, transparencies, charts, DVDs, slides and instructor training notes. C. This set of training aids shall become the property of Victor Valley Transit Authority and the other four Procuring Agencies participating in this Coach procurement for further training of Transit Agency personnel. 2.5.2 ENGINEER/SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES The Contractor shall, at its own expense, have a competent Engineering Service Representative(s) available on request to assist the Lead Procuring Agency's staff in the solution of engineering or design problems within the scope of the specifications that may arise during the warranty period. This does not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities under Part 4: Warranty Provisions. The Contractor's Representative must be available to report to any of the four participating Transit Agencies within 36 hours after a request has been made for technical assistance. Section 2 — Page 35 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.5.3 DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall provide Fifteen (15) copies of current Coach Maintenance Manual(s), Fifteen (15) current Illustrated Parts Manual(s), Fifteen (15) sets of Laminated Electrical and Conduit Schematics, (3 copies shall be delivered to each of the five (5) Participating Transit Agencies), and 125 Standard Operator's Manual(s) after acceptance of the first Commuter Coach of the base order as part of this Contract. Additionally, Contractor shall provide Ten (10) DVD versions of all of the above listed service manuals at (2 DVD's per Procuring Transportation Agency); this delivery shall take place within fifteen (15) days of acceptance of the first Coach. Contractor shall retain the Coach Maintenance Manuals available for a period of fifteen (15) years after the date of acceptance of the CNG and Diesel Commuter Coaches procured under this Contract. The Contractor shall also exert its best efforts consistent with industry and regulatory standards, to keep Maintenance Manuals, Operator Manuals, Service Bulletins, and Illustrated Parts Manuals current and up-to-date for a period of fifteen (15) years. The supplied Maintenance and Operator's Manuals shall incorporate data critical to the safe operation of all vehicles and equipment ordered under this Contract. The Contractor shall also furnish to each of the Five (5) Procuring Transportation Agencies, Three 3 copies of a Final Vehicle Records which lists all parts and accessories on each vehicle which are not listed in Contractor's Illustrated Parts Manuals. 2.5.4 PARTS AVAILABILITY GUARANTEE The Contractor hereby guarantees to maintain and supply, within reasonable periods of time, the spare parts, software and all equipment necessary to maintain and repair the Coaches supplied under this Contract for a period of at least fifteen (15) years after the date of final acceptance of the last Coach procured under this Contract. Parts shall be interchangeable with the original equipment and manufactured in accordance with the quality assurance provisions of this Contract. Prices shall not exceed the Contractor's then current published catalog prices at the time of purchase. Where the parts ordered by the Lead Procuring Agency are not received within two working days of the agreed upon time/date and a coach procured under this Contract is out -of -service due to the lack of said ordered parts, then the Contractor shall provide the Lead Procuring Agency, within eight hours of the Lead Procuring Agency's verbal or written request, the original suppliers' and/or manufacturers' parts numbers, company names, addresses, telephone numbers and contact persons' names for all of the specific parts not received by the Lead Procuring Agency. Where the Contractor fails to honor this parts guaranty or parts ordered by the Lead Procuring Agency are not received within thirty (30) days of the agreed upon delivery date, then the Contractor shall provide to Lead Procuring Agency, within seven (7) days of the Lead Procuring Agency's verbal or written request, the design and manufacturing documentation for those parts manufactured by the Contractor and the original suppliers' and/or manufacturers' parts numbers, company names, addresses, telephone numbers and contact persons' names for all of the specific parts not received by the Lead Procuring Agency. Contractor's design and manufacturing documentation provided to the Lead Procuring Agency shall be for its sole use in regard to the Coaches procured under this Contract and for no other purpose. Lead Section 2 — Page 36 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Procuring Agency may release such design and manufacturing documentation to third parties if needed for the replacement parts if the Contractor, original suppliers and/or manufacturers are unable or unwilling to supply parts within a reasonable time and at their published catalog prices. Lead Procuring Agency will require such third parties to maintain the confidentiality of Contractor's proprietary information as identified Contractor's design and manufacturing documentation including, without limitation, Contractor's maintenance, parts and operators manuals. 2.5.5 INTERCHANGEABILITY Unless otherwise agreed, all units and components procured under this Contract, whether provided by suppliers or manufactured by the Contractor, shall be duplicates in design, manufacture, and installation to assure interchangeability among Coaches in this procurement. This interchangeability shall extend to the individual components as well as to their locations in the Coaches. WMAIIIIQIII Will 01oil 101Ma*01M01Eel0NxKe]N1161 In accordance with 49 C.F.R. § 18.36(i), 49 C.F.R. § 19.48(d), and 49 U.S.C. § 5325(a), provided the Lead Procuring Agency is the FTA Recipient or a sub -grantee of the FTA Recipient, the Contractor agrees to provide the Lead Procuring Agency, FTA, the Comptroller General of the United States, the Secretary of the U.S. Department of Transportation, or any of their duly authorized representatives access to any books documents, papers, and records of the Contractor which are directly pertinent to or relate to this Contract (1) for the purpose of making audits, examinations, excerpts, and transcriptions and (2) when conducting an audit and inspection. A. In the event of a sole source Contract, or single Offer, single responsive Offer, or competitive negotiated procurement, the Contractor shall maintain and the Contracting Officer, the U.S. Department of Transportation (if applicable), or the representatives thereof, shall have the right to examine all books, records, documents, and other cost and pricing data related to the Contract price, unless such pricing is based on adequate price competition, established catalog or market prices of commercial items sold in substantial quantities to the public, or prices set by law or regulation, or combinations thereof. Data related to the negotiation or performance of Contract shall be made available for the purpose of evaluating the accuracy, completeness, and currency of the cost or pricing data. The right of examination shall extend to all documents necessary for adequate evaluation of the cost or pricing data, along with the computations and projections used therein, including review of accounting principles and practices that reflect properly all direct and indirect costs anticipated for the performance of the Contract. B. For Contract Amendments, the Contracting Officer, the U.S. Department of Transportation (if applicable), or their representatives shall have the right to examine all books, records, documents, and other cost and pricing data related to a Contract Amendment, unless such pricing is based on adequate price competition, established catalog or market prices of commercial items sold in substantial quantities to the public, or prices set by law or regulation, or combinations thereof. Data related to the negotiation or performance of the Contract Amendment shall be made available for the purpose of evaluating the accuracy, completeness, and currency of the cost or pricing data. The right of examination shall extend to all documents necessary for adequate evaluation of the cost or pricing data, along with the computations and projections used therein, Section 2 — Page 37 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 either before or after execution of the Contract Amendment for the purpose of conducting a cost analysis. If an examination made after execution of the Contract Amendment reveals inaccurate, incomplete, or out-of-date data, the Contracting Officer may renegotiate the Contract Amendment and the Lead Procuring Agency shall be entitled to any reductions in the price that would result from the application of accurate, complete or up-to-date data. C. For any cost reimbursable work the Contractor shall maintain and the Contracting Officer, the U.S. Department of Transportation (if applicable), or their representatives, shall have the right to examine books, records, documents, and other evidence, including review of accounting principles and practices that reflect properly all direct and indirect costs incurred as related to said cost reimbursable work: 1. The materials described in Paragraphs A, B and C above shall be available at the Contractor's office at all reasonable times for inspection, audit, and making excerpts and transcriptions until three years from the date of final payment under the Contract except that the materials described in Paragraph A above shall also be available prior to any award and materials relating to "Service and Parts" (Section 2.5). For records relating to appeals under "Disputes" (Section 2.2.7), Litigation (Section 2.2.8), or the settlement of claims; records as specified in this Section 2.6 shall be kept available until final resolution of such appeals, litigation, or claims. 2. The Contracting Officer and their representative and any other parties authorized under this Contract shall employ sound Business practices to protect the confidence of the data specified under this clause, for which the Contractor provides access, against disclosure of such information and material to third parties except as permitted by the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that any confidential data bears appropriate notices relating to its confidential character. 3. The requirements of this Section 2.6 are in addition to other audit, inspection, and record- keeping provisions specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2.7 RISK 2.7.1 RISK OF LOSS Contractor will bear all costs and assume all risks and liability associated with delivery of the Coaches and spare parts. The spare parts must be shipped, unloaded, and stacked in such a manner as to avoid any damage, marring, twisting, or warping of the parts. The Contractor will bear the risk of loss or damage to the Coaches and spare parts from any casualty to such Coaches and spare parts, regardless of the cause thereof, until each Coach and spare part is accepted by the Lead Procuring Agency. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Lead Procuring Agency will bear the risk of loss to a Coach or spare part after delivery of same by Contractor to the address specified in Section 2.3.1.1 and before acceptance of same by the Lead Procuring Agency, if the loss is caused by or arises out of the sole misconduct or negligent act or omission of the Lead Procuring Agency. Section 2 — Page 38 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 If the Lead Procuring Agency rejects a Coach or spare part as non -conforming, Contractor shall bear the risk of loss to such Coach or spare part from any cause whatsoever from the date of the Lead Procuring Agency's rejection until the non -conformity is cured and the Coach or spare part is accepted by the Lead Procuring Agency. 2.7.2 INSURANCE Contractor, at Contractor's sole cost and expense and for the full term of this Contract or any renewal thereof, shall obtain and maintain at least all of the following minimum insurance requirements prior to commencing any work or receiving payments therefor under this Contract: A. Comprehensive General Liability A policy with a minimum limit of not less than $5,000,000 combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage, providing at least all of the following minimum coverage: Premises Operations 1. Owners' and Contractors' Protective 2. Blanket Contractual 3. Completed Operations 4. Products B. Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability A policy written in accordance with the laws of the State of California and providing coverage for any and all employees of Contractor performing work in California: 1. This policy shall provide coverage for Workers' Compensation (Coverage A). 2. This policy shall also provide coverage of $100,000 Employers' Liability (Coverage B). C. Endorsements The following endorsements 1 through 4 are required to be made a part of the Comprehensive General Liability policy, and Endorsement No.4 is required to be made part of the Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability policy: 1. "Victor Valley Transit Authority (herein referred to as VVTA), its employees, officers, agents and contractors are hereby added as additional insurers." 2. "This policy shall be considered primary insurance as respects any other valid and collectible insurance VVTA may possess, including any self-insured retention VVTA may have, and any other insurance VVTA does possess shall be considered excess insurance only." Section 2 — Page 39 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3. "This insurance shall act for each insured and additional insured as though a separate policy had been written for each. This, however, will not act to increase the limit of liability of the insuring company." Coverage specified herein shall apply to acquisition actions of all procuring agencies under this contract. 4. "Thirty (30) days' prior written notice of Termination shall be given to VVTA in the event of Termination." Such notice shall be sent to: Victor Valley Transit Authority 17150 Smoketree Street Hesperia, California 92345 Attn: Mr. Ron Zirges, (COTR) D. Proof of Coverage Copies of all the required Endorsements shall be attached to the CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE which shall be provided by the Contractor's insurance company as evidence of the stipulated coverage. This Proof of Insurance shall then be mailed to: Victor Valley Transit Authority 17150 Smoketree Street Hesperia, California 92345 Attn: Mr. Ron Zirges, (COTR) E. Special Provisions 1. The foregoing requirements as to the types and limits of insurance coverage to be maintained by Contractor and any approval of said insurance by the VVTA Board, VVTA staff or their insurance consultant(s), are not intended to and shall not in any manner limit or quality the liabilities and obligations otherwise assumed by Contractor pursuant to this Contract, including, but not limited to, the provisions concerning indemnification. 2. VVTA reserves the right to withhold payments to Contractor in the event of material noncompliance with the insurance requirements outlined above. 2.7.3 PERFORMANCE BOND Within twenty (20) calendar days after the Contract is sent to the successful Proposer for execution, the Proposer shall furnish to the Lead Procuring Agency a performance bond to guarantee the faithful performance of the Contract. The Lead Procuring Agency's approved performance bond form is provided in Part 1. The performance bond shall be equal to twenty-five percent (25%) of the Contract amount for the value of the Coaches being ordered, including options selected. Within twenty (20) calendar days after the date of any order of option Coaches, Contractor shall replace or supplement the original performance bond with another performance bond so that the principal amount of the bond(s) Section 2 — Page 40 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 equals twenty-five percent (25%) of: (i) the total Contract amount for the base order and related options, plus (ii) twenty-five percent (25%) of the aggregate Contract amount for option Coaches ordered. The above bond amount may be reduced by twenty-five percent (25%) of the aggregate Contract amount for accepted Coaches and options. The performance bond shall be issued by a corporate surety with a Best's rating of A++ or A+. Said surety shall be admitted to do Business in the State of California. If, during the term of the Contract: (1) the rating for said surety is below a Best's rating of A+ or is below the comparable rating provided by another nationally recognized rating provider if Best's ratings are discontinued, or (2) the surety becomes insolvent, its license is revoked or suspended, or federal approval of the surety, if applicable, is revoked or suspended; then Contractor shall immediately replace said performance bond with another that satisfies all of the above requirements upon Lead Procuring Agency's written request therefor. If the Contractor fails to do so, such failure shall be an event of default. All alterations, extensions of time, extra and additional work, and other changes authorized by these specifications or any part of the Contract may be made without securing the consent of the surety or sureties on the contract bonds. Contractor shall provide with the bond the following documents as required under California Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.660(a): A. The original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, bylaws or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so; B. A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer by the Insurance Commissioner, within ten (10) calendar days of the insurer's receipt of a request to submit a copy; and C. A certificate from the Clerk of the County in which the court or officer is located that the certificate of authority of the insurer has not been surrendered, revoked, cancelled, annulled, or suspended or, in the event that it has, that renewed authority has been granted, within ten (10) calendar days of the insurer's receipt of the certificate. Contractor agrees, in addition to any other remedies that Lead Procuring Agency may have at law or in equity, that Lead Procuring Agency may obtain a court order for specific performance of Contractor's obligations under this Section. 2.7.4 PRODUCTION OF DOCUMENTS After notification of award, Contractor agrees to execute the Contract and deliver said Contract to the Lead Procuring Agency, and furnish the performance bond and insurance certificates within twenty (20) calendar days after the Contract is sent to the Proposer. The Lead Procuring Agency reserves the right to rescind the contract award if the Proposer is unable or unwilling to properly sign and return the Contract and the required insurance certificate and bond within twenty (20) calendar days after the Contract is sent to the Proposer for signature. In that event, Proposer shall forfeit its bid bond. Section 2 — Page 41 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.7.6 INDEMNIFICATION A. The Contractor shall, to the extent permitted by law (1) protect, indemnify and save the Lead Procuring Agency and its officers, employees and agents, including consultants, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, damages, claims, demands, liens, encumbrances, judgments, awards, losses, costs, expenses, and suits or actions or proceedings, including reasonable expenses, costs and attorneys' fees incurred by the Lead Procuring Agency and its officers, employees and agents, including consultants, in the defense, settlement or satisfaction thereof, for any injury, death, loss or damage to persons or property of any kind whatsoever, arising out of, or resulting from, the negligent acts, errors or omissions of the Contractor, including negligent acts, errors or omissions of its officers, employees, servants, agents, subcontractors and suppliers; and (2) upon receipt of notice and if given authority, shall settle at its own expense or undertake at its own expense the defense of any such suit, action or proceeding, including appeals, against the Lead Procuring Agency and its officers, employees and agents, including consultants, relating to such injury, death, loss or damage. Each party shall promptly notify the other in writing of the notice or assertion of any claim, demand, lien, encumbrance, judgment, award, suit, action or other proceeding hereunder. B. If Contractor has retained legal counsel reasonably acceptable to Lead Procuring Agency, Contractor shall have the sole charge and direction of the defense of the suit, action or proceeding while it is assigned to such counsel. The Lead Procuring Agency shall at the request of the Contractor furnish to the Contractor all reasonable assistance that may be necessary for the purpose of defending such suit, action or proceeding, and shall be repaid all reasonable costs incurred in doing so. The Lead Procuring Agency shall have the right to be represented therein by advisory counsel of its own selection at its own expense. C. The obligations of the Contractor under the above paragraph shall not extend to circumstances where the injury, or death, or damages is caused solely by the negligent acts, errors or omissions of the Lead Procuring Agency, its officers, employees, agents or consultants, including negligence in (1) the preparation of the Contract Documents, or (2) the giving of directions or instructions with respect to the requirements of the Contract by written order. The obligations of the Contractor shall not extend to circumstances where the injury, or death, or damages is caused, in whole or in part, by the negligence of any third party operator, not including an assignee or subcontractor of the Contractor, subject to the right of contribution as provided in the next sentence below. In case of joint or concurrent negligence of the parties hereto giving rise to a claim or loss against either one or both, each shall have full rights of contribution from the other in accordance with the indemnity obligations set out above. 2.7.6 MATERIAL/ACCESSORIES RESPONSIBILITY The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials and workmanship in the construction of the Coach and all accessories used, whether the same are manufactured by the Contractor or purchased from a supplier. This provision excludes tires, fare boxes, radios, and any equipment leased or supplied by the Lead Procuring Agency, except insofar as such equipment is damaged by the failure of a part or component for which the Contractor is responsible, or except insofar as the damage to such equipment Section 2 — Page 42 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 is caused by the Contractor during the manufacture of the Coaches. Risk of damage to or loss of the Coaches is the subject of "Risk of Loss" (Section 2.7.1). 2.7.7 SURVIVABILITY Contractor's obligations arising under this Contract pertaining to the obligations set out in this Section 2.5, Service and Parts, Section 4 — Warranty, Section 2.7.2, Insurance, and Section 2.7.5, Indemnification will survive the expiration, termination or Termination of this Contract. 2.8 FTA POLICIES FOR ALL TIERS Contractor agrees to comply with the following sections and to include these requirements in all subcontracts of every tier. 2.8.1 NO OBLIGATION BY THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT The Lead Procuring Agency and the Contractor acknowledge and agree that, notwithstanding any concurrence by the Federal Government in or approval of the solicitation or award of the underlying Contract, absent the express written consent by the Federal Government, the Federal Government is not a party to this Contract and shall not be subject to any obligations or liabilities to the Lead Procuring Agency, Contractor, or any other party (whether or not a party to that Contract) pertaining to any matter resulting from the underlying Contract. 2.8.2 PROGRAM FRAUD AND FALSE OR FRAUDULENT STATEMENTS AND RELATED ACTIONS: A. The Contractor acknowledges that the provisions of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986, as amended, 31 U.S.C. §§3801 et seq. and U.S. DOT regulations, "Program Fraud Civil Remedies," 49 C.F.R. Part 31, apply to its actions pertaining to this Project. Accordingly, by signing the underlying Contract, the Contractor certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of any statement it has made, it makes, it may make, or causes to be made, pertaining to the underlying Contract or the Federal Transit Administration (FTA) assisted project for which this Contract work is being performed. In addition to other penalties that may be applicable, the Contractor also acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification, the Federal Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986 on the Contractor to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate. B. The Contractor also acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification to the Federal Government under a contract connected with a project that is financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance awarded by FTA under the authority of 49 U.S.C. § 5301 et seq., the Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of 18 U.S.C. § 1001 and 49 U.S.C. § 5301 et seq. on the Contractor, to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate. Section 2 — Page 43 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.8.3 INCORPORATION OF FTA TERMS "General Contract Provisions," (this Section 2), includes, in part, certain standard terms and conditions required by the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT), whether or not expressly set forth in the Contract Provisions. All contractual provisions required by DOT, as set forth in FTA Circular 4220.I1D, as amended, are hereby incorporated by reference. Anything to the contrary herein notwithstanding, all FTA mandated terms shall be deemed to control in the event of a conflict with other provisions contained in this Agreement. The Contractor shall not perform any act, fail to perform any act, or refuse to comply with any Lead Procuring Agency requests which would cause Lead Procuring Agency to be in violation of the FTA terms and conditions. I+ UXWe]:/9RNZ"IL,Iy=I Q=11 SIM 0W\gt&V9L, III N=1411Will IWL,1.1 Contractor shall at all times comply with all applicable FTA regulations, policies, procedures and directives, including without limitation those listed directly or by reference in the agreement between Lead Procuring Agency and FTA that funds any part of this Contract, as they may be amended or promulgated from time to time during the term of this Contract. Contractor's failure to so comply shall constitute a material breach of this Contract. 2.8.5 CARGO PREFERENCE The Contractor agrees: A. To utilize privately owned United States -flag commercial vessels to ship at least 50 (fifty) percent of the gross tonnage (computed separately for dry bulk carriers, dry cargo liners, and tankers) involved, whenever shipping any equipment, material, or commodities pursuant to this Contract, to the extent such vessels are available at fair and reasonable rates for United States -flag commercial vessels. B. To furnish within twenty (20) working days following the date of loading for shipments originating within the United States, or within thirty (30) working days following the date of loading for shipments originating outside the United States, a legible copy of a rated, "on -board" commercial ocean bill -of -lading in English for each shipment of cargo described in the preceding paragraph to the Division of National Cargo, Office of Market Development, Maritime Administration, Washington, DC 20590 and to the Lead Procuring Agency (through the Contractor in the case of a subcontractor's bill -of -lading.) 2.8.6 ENERGY CONSERVATION The Contractor agrees to comply with mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the State of California Energy Conservation Plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act. (42 U.S.C. 6321 et seq.) 2.8.7 RECYCLED PRODUCTS The Contractor agrees to comply with all the requirements of Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), as amended (42 U.S.0 6962), including but not limited to the Section 2 — Page 44 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 regulatory provisions of 40 C.F.R. Part 247, and Executive Order 12873, as they apply to the procurement of the items designated in Subpart B of 40 C.F.R. Part 247. 2.8.8 CIVIL RIGHTS 2.8.8.1 NONDISCRIMINATION In accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000d, Section 303 of the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 6102, Section 202 of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. § 12132, and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, national origin, sex, age, or disability. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with applicable Federal implementing regulations and other implementing requirements FTA may issue. 2.8.8.2 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY The following equal employment opportunity requirements apply to the underlying Contract: A. Race, Color, Creed, National Origin, Sex. In accordance with Title VII of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000e, and Federal transit laws at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable equal employment opportunity requirements of U.S. Department of Labor (U.S. DOL) regulations, "Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor," 41 C.F.R. Parts 60 et seq., (which implement Executive Order No. 11246, "Equal Employment Opportunity," as amended by Executive Order No. 11375, "Amending Executive Order 11246 Relating to Equal Employment Opportunity," 42 U.S.C. § 2000e note), and with any applicable Federal statutes, executive orders, regulations, and Federal policies that may in the future affect construction activities undertaken in the course of the Project. The Contractor agrees to take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, creed, national origin, sex, or age. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue; B. Age. In accordance with section 4 of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967, as amended, 29 U.S.C. §§ 623 and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to refrain from discrimination against present and prospective employees for reason of age. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. C. Disabilities. In accordance with Section 102 of the Americans with Disabilities Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 12112, the Contractor agrees that it will comply with the requirements of U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, 'Regulations to Implement the Equal Employment Provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act, " 29 C.F.R. Part 1630, pertaining to employment of persons with disabilities. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may Issue. Section 2 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.8.8.3 DISCRIMINATORY SPECIFICATIONS The Contractor agrees that it will comply with the provisions of 49 U.S.C. § 5323(h)(2) by refraining from including any exclusionary or discriminatory specifications in any solicitation or subcontract issued or executed by Contractor for work to be performed under this Contract. 2.8.9 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE 2.8.9.1 POLICY It is the policy of the Department of Transportation that Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBEs) as defined in 49 C.F.R. Part 26 shall have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of Contracts financed in whole or in part with Federal Funds under this agreement. Consequently the DBE requirements of 49 C.F.R. Part 26 apply to this agreement. 2.8.9.2 DBE OBLIGATION Contractor agrees to ensure that Disadvantaged Business Enterprises as defined in 49 C.F.R. Part 26 have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of Contracts and subcontracts financed in whole or in part with Federal funds provided under this agreement. In this regard, all recipients or contractors shall take all necessary and reasonable steps in accordance with 49 C.F.R. Part 26 to ensure that Disadvantaged Business Enterprises have the maximum opportunity to compete for and perform contracts. Recipients and their contractors shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the award and performance of DOT assisted contracts. 2.8.9.3 REMEDY Failure of the Contractor to comply with this Section 2.8.9 or to include it in any subcontract of any tier will constitute a breach of Contract and, after notification of DOT, may result in termination of the Contract by the Lead Procuring Agency or such remedy as the Lead Procuring Agency deems appropriate. The Lead Procuring Agency shall advise the Contractor of any impending patent suit related to this Contract against the Lead Procuring Agency and provide all information available. The Contractor shall defend any suit or proceeding brought against the Lead Procuring Agency based on a claim that any equipment, or any part thereof, furnished under this Contract constitutes an infringement of any patent, and the Contractor shall pay all damages and costs awarded therein against the Lead Procuring Agency. In case said equipment, or any part thereof, is in such suit held to constitute infringement and use of said equipment or parts is enjoined, the Contractor shall, at its own expense and at its option, either (1) procure for the Lead Procuring Agency the right to continue using said equipment or part; (2) replace same with non -infringing equipment, or (3) modify said equipment or part it so it becomes non - infringing. Contractor's obligations under this Section are discharged with respect to the equipment or part if it was specified by the Lead Procuring Agency and all requests for substitutes were rejected, and the Section 2 — Page 46 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Contractor advised the Lead Procuring Agency under" Proposer Communications and Requests" (Section 1.1.2.2) of a potential infringement. 2.8.11 PROPRIETARY RIGHTS/RIGHTS IN DATA The term "subject data' used in this clause means recorded information, whether or not copyrighted, that is delivered or specified to be delivered under the Contract. The term includes graphic or pictorial delineation in media such as drawings or photographs; text in specifications or related performance or design -type documents; machine forms such as punched cards, magnetic tape, or computer memory printouts; and information retained in computer memory. Examples include, but are not limited to: computer software, engineering drawings and associated lists, specifications, standards, process sheets, manuals, technical reports, catalog item identifications, and related information. The term "subject data" does not include financial reports, cost analyses, and similar information incidental to Contract administration. The Lead Procuring Agency or other participating Transit Agencies reserves a royalty -free, non- exclusive and irrevocable license to reproduce, publish, or otherwise use, and to authorize others to use, the following subject data for its purposes: A. Any subject data required to be developed and first produced in the performance of the Contract and specifically paid for as such under the Contract, whether or not a copyright has been obtained: and B. Any rights of copyright to which the Contractor, subcontractor or supplier purchases ownership for the purpose of performance of the Contract and specifically paid for as such under the Contract. The Contractor agrees to include the requirements of this clause, modified as necessary to identify the affected parties, in each subcontract and supply order placed under the Contract. 2.8.12 INTEREST OF MEMBERS OF, OR DELEGATES TO, CONGRESS No member of, or delegate to, the Congress of the United States shall be admitted to any share or part of this Contract or to any benefit arising therefrom. (41 U.S.C. § 22.) 2.8.13 PROHIBITED INTEREST No member, officer, or employee of the Lead Procuring Agency or of a local public body during their tenure or one year thereafter shall have any interest, direct or indirect, in this Contract or the proceeds thereof. 2.8.14ACCESS REQUIREMENTS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES The Contractor agrees to comply with the following requirements if applicable to the provision of goods and services under the Contract: A. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), 42 U.S.C. § 121 01, et seq.; B. Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, 29 U.S.C. § 794; Section 2 — Page 47 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 C. Section 16 of the Federal Transit Act, as amended, 49 U.S.C. § 5301 (d); D. U.S. DOT regulations, "Americans with Disabilities (ADA) Accessibility Specifications for Transportation Vehicles," 49 C.F.R. Part 38; E. U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC), 'Regulations to Implement the Equal Employment Provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act," 29 C.F.R. Part 1630; F. U.S. Federal Communications Commission regulations, 'Telecommunications Relay Services and Related Customer Premises Equipment for the Hearing and Speech Disabled, "47 C.F.R. Part 64, Subpart F. 2.8.15 FLY AMERICA Pursuant to the provisions set out in the International Air Transportation Fair Competitive Practices Act of 1974, as amended, 49 U.S.C. § 40118 and in accordance with U.S. GAO regulations, "Uniform Standards and Procedures for Transportation Transactions," 4 C.F.R. Part 52, and U.S. GAO Guidelines for Implementation of the "Fly America Act," B-138962, 1981 U.S. Camp. Gen. LEXIS 2166, March 31,1981; the costs of international air transportation of any persons involved in, or property acquired for, the Contract are not reimbursable unless the transportation is provided by a United States flag air carrier. to the extent that such a carrier is available. 2.9 FTA POLICIES FOR SELECTED CONTRACTS Contractor shall comply with the subsections of this Section 2.9 and to include these requirements, except "Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act' (Section 2.9.1), in all subcontracts exceeding $100,000 in value of every tier. Contractor will include "Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act' (Section 2.9.1) in all subcontracts exceeding $2,500 in value not including subcontracts for the purchase of supplies or materials or articles ordinarily available on the open market. MIS WK6101k I CLCet SgT161 N:11: [oil] *Iv9 011II&YM y A W&A 1/9 L,I1L1 N 116vi%I A. Overtime Requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the Contract Work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such Work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. B. Violation; Liability for Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in Paragraph A. of this Section 2.9.1, the Contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, the Contractor and any subcontractor shall be liable to the United States for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph A. of this Section 2.9.1, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted Section 2 — Page 48 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph A. of this Section 2.9.1. C. Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages. The Lead Procuring Agency shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld, from any monies payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or subcontractor under this Contract or any other Federal contract with Contractor, or any other federally assisted contract subject to the Act, which is held by Contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of Contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph B of this Section 2.9.1. D. Subcontracts. The Contractor and any subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in this Section 2.9.1 and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in this Section 2.9.1. E. Payrolls and Basic Records. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the Contractor during the course of the Work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work or, (under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section 1 (b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 C.F.R. 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1 (b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. 2.9.2 CLEAN AIR The Contractor shall comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. §§ 7401 et seq. The Contractor shall report each violation to the Lead Procuring Agency and understands and agrees that the Lead Procuring Agency will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to FTA and the appropriate EPA Regional Office. The Contractor agrees that the facilities or equipment acquired, constructed, or improved as a part of this Contract shall be designed and equipped to limit air pollution as provided in accordance with the Section 2 — Page 49 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 following EPA regulations: "Control of Air Pollution from Motor Vehicles and Motor Vehicle Engines and Motor Vehicle Engines," 40 C.F.R. Part 85; "Control of Air Pollution from New and In -Use Motor Vehicles and New and In -Use Motor Vehicle Engines; Certification and Test Procedures," 40 C.F.R. Part 85; and "Fuel Economy of Motor Vehicles," 40 C.F.R. Part 600. 2.9.3 CLEAN WATER The Contractor shall comply with the Clean Water Act, as amended, Sections 33 and 12 of U.S.C.; the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C. § 1251 et seq. and all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant thereto. The Contractor shall report each violation to the Lead Procuring Agency and understands and agrees that the Lead Procuring Agency will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to FTA and the appropriate EPA Regional Office. MIE,IK9161kil»/i101 to] NKT III 1:1=I01D/l:To]011khI=I01kIf1IIIIII&3If1011DIM N1161 A. Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 6901 et seq.; the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 9601 et seq.; and all applicable regulations, standards, orders or requirements issued pursuant to these Federal statutes. B. The Contractor agrees to report each violation to the Lead Procuring Agency and understands and agrees that the Lead Procuring Agency will in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to FTA and the appropriate EPA Regional Office. C. The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding $100,000 financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. 2.9.5 LOBBYING CERTIFICATION AND DISCLOSURE STATEMENTS In accordance with 31 U.S.C. § 1352 and U.S. DOT regulations, "New Restrictions on Lobbying," 49 C.F.R.C.F.R. Part 20, the Contractor must provide a certification to the Lead Procuring Agency that the Contractor has not and will not use Federal appropriated funds to pay any person or organization to influence or attempt to influence an officer or employee of any Federal department or agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining any Federal contract, grant or any other award covered by 31 U.S.C. § 1352. See "Lobbying Certification," in Section 1.1 of Lead Procuring Agency's solicitation. 2.10 FTA POLICIES FOR PRIME CONTRACTOR 2.10.1 BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS A. The Proposer's attention is directed to the Buy America requirement set forth in 49 U.S.C. § 5323G), FTA regulations a 49 C.F.R. Part 661, and any guidance issued by FTA. The Proposer and, if selected, Contractor agrees to comply with 49 U.S.C. § 5323U) and 49 C.F.R. Part 661, which provide that Federal funds may not be obligated unless steel, iron, and manufactured products used in FTA -funded projects are produced in the United States, unless a waiver has Section 2 — Page 50 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 been granted by FTA or the product is subject to a general waiver. Separate requirements for rolling stock are set out at § 5323U)(2)(C) and 49 C.F.R. § 661.11. Rolling stock not subject to a general waiver must have a 60 percent domestic content (components and subcomponents) and final assembly must occur in the United States. B. Two Buy America Certificates are as set out in Part 1. The Steel, Iron and Manufactured Products Certificate is applicable to the spare parts package and the Rolling Stock Certificate is applicable to the Coaches. Each certificate must be completed and submitted with the Offer. An Offer that does not include each certificate completed either under Alternative "A" or "B" is nonresponsive. If the Contractor does not comply with the Buy America requirements, the Lead Procuring Agency may terminate the Contract for Default. C. If the Proposer certifies compliance with Buy America, it shall submit documentation within 20 days from the date of the Lead Procuring Agency's written request which lists (1) component and subcomponent parts of the rolling stock to be purchased identified by manufacturer of the parts, their country of origin and costs; and (2) the location of the final assembly point for the rolling stock, including a description of the activities that will take place at the final assembly point and the cost of final assembly. D. Execution of the Alternative "B" portion of a certificate constitutes an application by the Proposer for a waiver from the Buy America requirement. The Proposer shall provide all documentation necessary to support the application for a waiver within ten (10) days from the Due Date for submission of Offers. If a Proposer includes the Alternative "B" certificate and a waiver is not granted by FTA, the Proposer's Offer will be deemed to be nonresponsive. The Lead Procuring Agency reserves the right to make a determination whether the Proposer's waiver request is eligible for approval by the FTA based on the applicable law and regulations, and to reject the Offer as non-responsive without first submitting the Proposer's waiver request to the FTA. E. Pursuant to 49 U.S.C. § 5323U)(5) and 49 C.F.R. § 661.18, any person determined by a Federal agency or court to have affixed a false "Made in America" label to foreign products or otherwise falsely represented that a product was produced in the United States shall be ineligible to receive contracts funded under the Intermodal Surface Transportation Efficiency Act of 1991. 2.10.2PRE-AWARD REQUIREMENTS For the procurement of rolling stock, the provisions of 49 U.S.C. § 5323(1) and implementing FTA regulations (49 C.F.R. Part 663) pertaining to Pre -award and Post -delivery audits of rolling stock shall apply. Such audits shall be performed for the purpose of verifying compliance by the Bidder with applicable Buy America requirements (49 U.S.C. § 53230) and 49 C.F.R. Part 661), relevant Federal Motor Vehicle Safety (FMVS) Standards, and for the purpose of verifying compliance with the Lead Procuring Agency's specification requirements. These audits shall be performed before the award of a contract is effective and again after delivery of the rolling stock, but before title transfer or revenue service begins, whichever occurs first. In addressing the pre -award requirements, Proposer's shall provide with its proposal all of the following: Section 2 — Page 51 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 A. FMVS Standards. If a vehicle is subject to the FMVS Standards, as required under 49 C.F.R. § 663.61, the Proposer shall provide a certification or statement pertaining to the vehicle's compliance with the FMVS Standards. If a new model vehicle is to be built and no FMVS certification is available, the Bidder shall provide a statement to that effect (see Federal Register Vol. 56, No. 185, September 24, 1991, Page 48391). And FMVS certification is not necessary for non -motorized rolling stock, such as rail cars; and B. Proposal Requirements/Responsibility. All documentation requested in the specifications and any other information reasonably necessary to enable the Lead Procuring Agency to complete an audit and certify compliance with the solicitation requirements and the manufacturer's responsibility as set forth in 49 C.F.R. § 663.27; and C. Buy America. If the Proposer indicates that it will comply with the Buy America requirements, the Proposer shall provide all documentation pertaining to the Buy America requirements as is reasonably required to allow the completion of an audit in sufficient detail to enable the Lead Procuring Agency to certify compliance in the manner set forth in 49 C.F.R. § 663.25. If the Proposer is willing to provide the necessary documentation only on a confidential basis to an independent contractor retained by the Lead Procuring Agency, Proposer shall include a signed declaration to that effect with its proposal submittal. Within ten (10) calendar days after written request by the Lead Procuring Agency, the Proposer shall provide to the Lead Procuring Agency's independent contractor all such information, records, and data as is reasonably required by the independent contractor to complete the Buy America audit in sufficient detail to enable the Lead Procuring Agency to certify compliance as required under 49 C.F.R. § 663.25. Information provided by the Proposer about the actual cost of components and subcomponents (other than costs expressed as a percentage of total vehicle cost) shall be kept confidential to the extent cost data is clearly marked as proprietary by Proposer and to the fullest extent permitted under applicable state or federal law. If a Proposer submitting the Alternative "A" certificate is unable to demonstrate, if applicable, compliance with the a Buy America pre -award audit to the satisfaction of the Lead Procuring Agency, the Proposer's Proposer will be deemed to be non-responsive. 2.10.3POST-DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS In addressing the post -delivery requirement, the Contractor shall provide all of the following: A. FMVS Standards. If a vehicle is subject to the FMVS Standards, as required under 49 C.F.R. § 663.41, a certification or statement pertaining to the vehicle's compliance with the FMVS Standards; and B. Proposal Requirements/Responsibility. Throughout the period of manufacture of the rolling stock, the Contractor shall provide access at the manufacturing site(s) to the Lead Procuring Agency's resident inspector(s) as is reasonably required so that the manufacturing process may be observed and reported upon in sufficient detail to enable the Lead Procuring Agency to certify compliance under 49 C.F.R. § 663.37; and Section 2 — Page 52 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 C. Buy America. Unless a Buy America waiver letter was granted by FTA, at time of vehicle delivery, all documentation pertaining to the Buy America requirements as are reasonably required to allow the completion of an audit in sufficient detail to enable the Lead Procuring Agency to certify compliance in the manner set forth in 49 C.F.R. § 663.3 5. If the Contractor is willing to provide the necessary documentation only on a confidential basis to an independent contractor retained by the Lead Procuring Agency, the Contractor shall, at time of vehicle delivery, provide to the Lead Procuring Agency's independent contractor all such information, records, and data as is reasonably required by the independent contractor to complete the Buy America audit in sufficient detail to enable the Lead Procuring Agency to certify compliance as required under 49 C.F.R. § 663.35. Information provided by the Contractor about the actual cost of components and subcomponents (other than costs expressed as a percentage of total vehicle cost) shall be kept confidential to the extent cost data is clearly marked as proprietary by the Contractor and to the fullest extent permitted under applicable state or federal law. D. Failure to Meet Requirements. If the Lead Procuring Agency cannot complete a post -delivery audit because the Lead Procuring Agency or its independent contractor cannot certify Buy America compliance, because the Coach(es) do not meet the Lead Procuring Agency's requirements as specified in the Contract, or because the Contractor is unable to provide the applicable FMVSS certification or statement; the Coach(es) may be rejected and final acceptance by the Lead Procuring Agency will not be required. In this event, the Lead Procuring Agency may exercise any legal rights it has under the contract or at law or in equity. 2.10.4COACH TESTING The Contractor agrees to comply with 49 C.F.R. § 5323©. And FTA's implementing regulation at 49 C.F.R. Part 665 and shall perform the following: A. A manufacturer of a new Coach model or a Coach produced with a major change in components or configuration shall provide a copy of the final test report to the Lead Procuring Agency prior to the recipient's final acceptance of the first Coach. B. A manufacturer who releases a report under Paragraph A above shall provide notice to the operator of the testing facility that the report is available to the public. C. If the manufacturer represents that the vehicle was previously tested, the vehicle being sold should have the identical configuration and major components as the vehicle in the test report, which must be provided to the Lead Procuring Agency prior to Lead Procuring Agency's final acceptance of the first vehicle. If the configuration or components are not identical, the manufacturer shall provide a description of the change and the manufacturer's basis for concluding that it is not a major change requiring additional testing. D. If the manufacturer represents that the vehicle is "grandfathered" (has been used in mass transit service in the United States before October 1, 1988, and is currently being produced without a major change in configuration or components), the manufacturer shall provide the name and address of the recipient of such a vehicle and the details of that vehicle's configuration and major components. Section 2 — Page 53 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 2.11 STATE GRANT CONTRACT PROVISIONS 2.11.1 ACCOUNTING RECORDS Contractor and its subcontractors shall maintain all books, documents, papers, accounting records and other evidence pertaining to the performance and costs of this Contract. Contractor's accounting systems shall conform to generally accepted accounting principles, and all records shall provide a breakdown of total costs charged to this Contract, including properly executed payrolls, time records, invoices and vouchers. Contractor shall establish and maintain an accounting system and records that properly accumulate and segregate incurred costs by project line item. Contractor's accounting system shall conform to generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), enable the determination of incurred costs at interim points of completion, and provide support for invoices. All accounting records and other supporting papers shall be maintained for a minimum of three years from the date of final payment, and shall be open to inspection and audit by representatives from Lead Procuring Agency, and State Auditor General of the State of California, Federal Highways Administration or any duly authorized representative of the state or federal government. Contractor shall make such records and materials available at its office at all reasonable times and copies thereof shall be furnished upon request. 2.11.2ALLOWABLE COSTS Contractor agrees to comply with federal procedures in accordance with the following Office of Management and Budget Circular A-87, Cost Principles for State and Local Governments, Office of Management and Budget Circular A-102, Uniform Administrative Requirements for Grants and Cooperative Agreements with State and Local Governments, and 49 C.F.R., Part 18, Uniform Administrative Requirements for Grants -in -Aid to State and Local Governments. Reimbursable costs for travel expenses shall not exceed rates authorized to be paid to State employees under the current State Department of Personnel Administration Rules. Any Contractor costs which are determined by the State to be unallowable pursuant to the above -referenced regulations shall be repaid to Lead Procuring Agency within thirty (30) calendar days from the date of the written demand. 2.11.3 FAIR EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES (NONDISCRIMINATION) Contractor and all subcontractors in the performance of work under this Contract agree that it will not unlawfully discriminate, harass or allow harassment against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, ancestry, national origin, religious creed, marital status, sex, age, medical condition, physical disability or mental disability, or family care leave. Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with the provisions of the Fair Employment and Housing Act (Government Code § 12940 et seq.) and the applicable regulations (California Code of Regulations Title 2, Section 7283.0 et seq.). The applicable regulations of the Fair Employment and Housing Commission implementing Government Code Section 12900 (a -f) set forth in Chapter 5 of Division 4 of Title 2 of the California Code of Regulations are incorporated into the Contract by reference and made a part hereof as if set forth in full. Contractor and all of its subcontractors shall be given written notice of their obligations under this Article to labor organizations with which they have a collective bargaining agreement or other agreement. Section 2 — Page 54 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Contractor and all subcontractors will permit access to their records of employment, employment advertisements, application forms, and other pertinent data and records by the State Fair Employment Practices and Housing Commission, or any other agency of the State of California for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this fair Employment Practices Article. Contractor agrees to include this clause in each subcontract under this Contract. 2.11.4 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE RECORDS Contractor and Contractor's subcontractors shall maintain all books, documents, papers, accounting records, and other evidence pertaining to the performance of contracts with Minority and/or Women Owned Business Enterprises including, but not limited to, the costs of administering the various contracts. Contractor and Contractor's subcontractors shall make such materials available at their respective offices at all reasonable times during the contract period and for three years from the date of final payment under such contract. Lead Procuring Agency, the State, the State Auditor General, the Federal Highway Administration, or any duly authorized representative of the Federal Government shall have access to any books, records, and documents that are pertinent to this Contract for audits, examinations, excerpts, and transactions, and copies thereof shall be furnished. Section 2 — Page 55 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 APPENDIX 1 TO PART 2 NOTICE OF ASSIGNMENT AND ASSIGNMENT Date: Victor Valley Transit Authority (VVTA) hereby notifies follows: (Contractor) as 1. VVTA assigns all of its rights and obligations under the Contract that pertain to this Assignment to (Assignee) effective as of the date last appearing below. 2. Assignee accepts this Assignment and all of the rights and obligations hereby assigned to Assignee. 3. Assignee and Contractor are entitled to enforce their respective rights under the Contract pertaining to this Assignment. 4. This Assignment pertains only to Proposal Item No. 2013-04 for_ Coaches and Proposal Item No. RFP 2013-04 for optional components and training under the Contract between VVTA and Contractor for the Purchase of 45 -Foot (10) CNG and (15) Low Emission Diesel Commuter Coaches dated 5. All communications with Assignee shall be addressed as follows: Name Title Public Transit Agency Address Phone Fax With Copy to: Victor Valley Transit Authority 17150 Smoketree Street Hesperia, California 92345 Telephone: (760) 948-4021 Facsimile: (760) 948-1380 Attn: Ron Zirges, (COTR) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this assignment is executed on the day and year last appearing below. ASSIGNEE: VICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY: Name and Title Name and Title Section 2 — Page 56 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Dated: Dated: Section 2 — Page 57 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS Section 3 — Page 1 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS Table of Contents 3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS ...........................................................................................................................1 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S IN -PLANT QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................4 3.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION....................................................................................................................4 3.1.1.1 ORGANIZATION ESTABLISHMENT...................................................................................................................4 3.1.1.2 CONTROL........................................................................................................................................................4 3.1.1.3 AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILTY...................................................................................................................4 3.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION FUNCTIONS................................................................................................4 3.1.2.1 MINIMUM FUNCTIONS...................................................................................................................................4 3.1.2.2 WORK INSTRUCTIONS....................................................................................................................................4 3.1.2.3 RECORDS MAINTENANCE...............................................................................................................................4 3.1.2.4 CORRECTIVE ACTION...................................................................................................................................... 4 3.1.3 STANDARDS AND FACILITIES...................................................................................................................................5 3.1.3.1 BASIC STANDARDS AND FACILITIES................................................................................................................5 3.1.3.2 CONFIGURATION CONTROL...........................................................................................................................5 3.1.3.3 MEASURING AND TESTING FACILITIES...........................................................................................................5 3.1.3.4 PRODUCTION TOOLING AS MEDIA OF INSPECTION....................................................................................... 5 3.1.3.5 EQUIPMENT USE BY RESIDENT INSPECTORS..................................................................................................5 3.1.4 CONTROL OF PURCHASES.......................................................................................................................................5 3.1.4.1 MAINTENANCE OF CONTROL.........................................................................................................................5 3.1.4.2 SUPPLIER CONTROL........................................................................................................................................5 3.1.4.3 PURCHASING DATA........................................................................................................................................6 3.1.5 MANUFACTURING CONTROL..................................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.1 CONTROLLED CONDITIONS............................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.2 COMPLETED ITEMS.........................................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.3 NONCONFORMING MATERIALS.....................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.4 STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES..............................................................................................................................6 3.1.5.4.1 INSPECTION STATUS..................................................................................................................................6 3.1.6 INSPECTION SYSTEM...............................................................................................................................................6 3.1.6.1 INSPECTION SYSTEM SCOPE...........................................................................................................................6 3.1.6.2 INSPECTION PERSONNEL................................................................................................................................6 3.1.6.3 INSPECTION RECORDS....................................................................................................................................7 3.1.6.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AUDITS........................................................................................................................7 3.2 SUPPLIERSAND SUBCONTRACTORS ............................................................................................................................7 Section 3 — Page 2 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTS..................................................................................................................................................... 9 3.4.1 RESPONSIBILITY.......................................................................................................................................................9 3.4.2 PRE -DELIVERY TESTS................................................................................................................................................9 3.4.2.1 INSPECTION —VISUAL AND MEASURED....................................................................................................... 10 3.4.2.2 TOTAL COACH OPERATION........................................................................................................................... 10 3.5 POST -DELIVERY TESTS................................................................................................................................................10 3.5.1 VISUAL INSPECTION.............................................................................................................................................. 10 3.5.2 COACH OPERATION............................................................................................................................................... 10 Section 3 — Page 3 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S IN -PLANT QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 3.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION 3.1.1.1 ORGANIZATION ESTABLISHMENT The Contractor shall establish and maintain an effective in -plant quality assurance organization. It shall be a specifically defined organization and should be directly responsible to the Contractor's top management. 3.1.1.2 CONTROL The quality assurance organizations shall exercise quality control over all phases of production from initiation of design through manufacture and preparation for delivery. The organization shall also control the quality of supplied articles. 3.1.1.3 AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILTY The quality assurance organization shall have the authority and responsibility for reliability, quality control, inspection planning, establishment of the quality control system, and acceptance/rejection of materials and manufactured article in the production of the transit Coaches. 3.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION FUNCTIONS 3.1.2.1 MINIMUM FUNCTIONS The quality assurance organization shall include the following minimum functions: 3.1.2.2 WORK INSTRUCTIONS The quality assurance organization shall verify inspection operation instructions to ascertain that the Work meets all prescribed requirement as set out in the Contract. 3.1.2.3 RECORDS MAINTENANCE The quality assurance organization shall maintain and use records and data essential to the effective operation of its program. These records and data shall be available for review by the Resident Inspectors. Inspection and test records for this Contract shall be available for a minimum of 3 years after inspection and tests are completed. 3.1.2.4 CORRECTIVE ACTION The quality assurance organization shall detect and promptly assure correction of any conditions that may result in the production of defective Supplies. These conditions may occur in designs, purchases, manufacture, tests or operations that culminate in defective Supplies, Services, facilities, technical data or standards. Section 3 — Page 4 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3.1.3 STANDARDS AND FACILITIES 3.1.3.1 BASIC STANDARDS AND FACILITIES The following standards and facilities shall be basic in the quality assurance process. 3.1.3.2 CONFIGURATION CONTROL The Contractor shall maintain drawings, assembly procedures, and other documentation that completely describe the Coaches that meet all of the requirements of the Contract. The quality assurance organization shall verify that each Coach is manufactured in accordance with the terms of the Contract. 3.1.3.3 MEASURING AND TESTING FACILITIES The Contractor shall provide and maintain the necessary gauges and other measuring and testing devices for use by its quality assurance inspectors to verify that the Coaches conform to all requirements of the contract. These devices shall be calibrated at established periods against certified measurement standards that have known valid relationships to national standards. 3.1.3.4 PRODUCTION TOOLING AS MEDIA OF INSPECTION When production jigs, fixtures, tooling masters, templates, patterns and other devices are used as media of inspection, they shall be proved for accuracy at formally established intervals and adjusted, replaced or repaired as required to maintain quality. 3.1.3.5 EQUIPMENT USE BY RESIDENT INSPECTORS The Contractor's gauges and other measuring and testing devices shall be made available for use by the Lead Procuring Agency's Resident Inspectors to verify that the Coaches conform to all requirements of the Contract. If necessary, the Contractor's personnel shall be made available to operate the devices and to verify their condition and accuracy. 3.1.4 CONTROL OF PURCHASES 3.1.4.1 MAINTENANCE OF CONTROL The Contractor shall maintain quality control of purchases. 3.1.4.2 SUPPLIER CONTROL The Contractor shall require that each Supplier maintains a quality control program for the services and supplies that it provides. The Contractor's quality assurance organization shall inspect and test materials provided by suppliers for conformance to requirements of the Contract. Materials that have been inspected, tested and approved shall be identified as acceptable to the point of use in the manufacturing or assembly process. Controls shall be established to prevent inadvertent use of non- conforming materials. Section 3 — Page 5 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3.1.4.3 PURCHASING DATA The Contractor shall verify that all applicable requirements of the contract are properly included or referenced in purchase orders of articles to be used on the Coaches. 3.1.5 MANUFACTURING CONTROL 3.1.5.1 CONTROLLED CONDITIONS The Contractor shall ensure that all basic production operations, as well as all other processing and fabricating, are performed under controlled conditions. Establishment of these controlled conditions shall be based on the documented work instructions, adequate production equipment and special working environments if necessary. 3.1.5.2 COMPLETED ITEMS A system for final inspection and test of completed Coaches shall be provided by the Contractor's quality assurance organization. It shall measure the overall quality of each completed Coach. 3.1.5.3 NONCONFORMING MATERIALS The quality assurance organization shall monitor the Contractor's system for controlling nonconforming materials. The system shall include procedures for identification, segregation and disposition. 3.1.5.4 STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES Statistical analysis, tests and other quality control procedures may be used when appropriate in the quality assurance processes. 3.1.5.4.1 INSPECTION STATUS A system shall be maintained by the Contractor's quality assurance organization for identifying the inspection status of components and completed transit Coaches. Identification may include cards, tags or other normal quality control devices. 3.1.6 INSPECTION SYSTEM 3.1.6.1 INSPECTION SYSTEM SCOPE Contractor's quality assurance organization shall establish, maintain and periodically audit a fully documented inspection system. The system shall prescribe inspection and test of materials, work in process and completed articles. As a minimum it shall include the controls specified in the following sections. 3.1.6.2 INSPECTION PERSONNEL Sufficiently trained inspectors shall be used to ensure that all materials, components and assemblies are inspected for conformance with the Coach design as set out in the Contract. Section 3 — Page 6 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3.1.6.3 INSPECTION RECORDS Acceptance, rework or rejection identification shall be attached to inspected articles. Articles that have been accepted as a result of approved materials review actions shall be identified. Articles that have been reworked to specify drawing configurations shall not require special identification. Articles rejected as unsuitable or scrap shall be plainly marked and controlled to prevent installation on the Coaches. Articles that become obsolete as a result of engineering changes or other actions shall be controlled to prevent unauthorized assembly or installation. Unusable articles shall be isolated and then scrapped. The inspection personnel shall enter discrepancies noted by the Contractor or Resident Inspectors during assembly on a record that accompanies the major component, subassembly, assembly or Coaches from start of assembly through final inspection. Actions shall be taken to correct discrepancies or deficiencies in the manufacturing processes, procedures or other conditions that cause articles to be in nonconformity with the requirements of the contract specifications. The inspection personnel shall verify the corrective actions and mark the discrepancy record. If discrepancies cannot be corrected by replacing the nonconforming materials, the Lead Procuring Agency shall approve the modification, repair or method of correction to the extent that the contract specifications are affected. 3.1.6.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AUDITS The quality assurance organization shall establish and maintain a quality control audit program. Records of this program shall be subject to review by the Lead Procuring Agency. 3.2 SUPPLIERS AND SUBCONTRACTORS The Contractor shall be responsible to insure that all of its Suppliers and Subcontractors maintain the same level of quality assurance as prescribed in Section 3.1. Kj161101M:Jl*01M01K HIM M10F1:Jlx01M011&1IFe1111IM01 M Inspection stations shall be at the best locations to provide for the work content and characteristics to be inspected. Stations shall provide the facilities and equipment to inspect structural, electrical, hydraulic and other components and assemblies for compliance with the design requirements. Stations shall also be at the best locations to inspect or test characteristics before they are concealed by subsequent fabrication or assembly operations. These locations shall minimally include underbody structure completion, body framing completion, body prior to paint preparation, water test before interior trim and insulation, engine installation completion, underbody dress -up and completion, Coaches prior to final paint touchup, Coaches prior to road test and Coaches final road test completion. 3.3.2 RESIDENT INSPECTOR 3.3.2.1 RESIDENT INSPECTOR ROLE If decided by the Procuring Agency, each Procuring Agency shall be represented at the Contractor's plant by the Resident Inspectors of the Procuring Agencies. They shall monitor, in the Contractor's Section 3 — Page 7 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 plant, the manufacture of Coaches in accordance with the Contract requirements. The presence of these Resident Inspectors in the plant shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to meet all of the requirements of the Contract. The Resident Inspectors' duties and responsibilities are delineated in "Pre -Production Meetings" (Section 3.3.2.2); "Authority" (Section 3.3.2.3): and "Pre -Delivery Tests" (Section 3.4.2). 3.3.2.2 PRE -PRODUCTION MEETINGS The Resident Inspectors should participate in design review and pre -production meetings between the Contractor and the Lead Procuring Agency. At these meetings the configuration of the Coaches and the manufacturing processes shall be finalized. No less than 30 (thirty) days prior to the beginning of manufacture of the first Coaches, the Resident Inspector shall meet with the Contractor's quality assurance manager and shall conduct a preproduction audit meeting. They shall review the inspection procedures and finalize inspection checklist. The Resident Inspectors may begin monitoring Coach manufacturing activities two weeks prior to the start of Coach fabrication. 3.3.2.3 AUTHORITY Records and data maintained by the Contractor's quality assurance organization shall be available for review by the Resident Inspectors. Inspection and test records for this Contract shall be available for a minimum of three years after inspections and tests are completed. The Contractor's gauges and other measuring and testing devices shall be made available for use by the Resident Inspectors to verify that the Coaches conform to all requirements of the Contract. If necessary, the Contractor's personnel shall be made available to operate the devices and to verify their condition and accuracy. The Contractor's inspection personnel shall enter discrepancies noted by the Resident Inspector during assembly on a record that accompanies the major component subassembly, assembly or Coach from start of assembly through final inspection. Actions shall be taken to correct discrepancies or deficiencies in the manufacturing processes, procedures or other conditions that cause articles to be in nonconformity with the requirements of the contract specifications. The inspection personnel shall verify the corrective actions and mark the discrepancy record. If discrepancies cannot be corrected by replacing the nonconforming materials, the Lead Procuring Agency shall approve the modification, repair or method of correction to the extent that the contract specifications are affected. The Resident Inspectors shall remain in the Contractor's plant for the duration of Coach Assembly work under this Contract. Only a Resident Inspector of the Procuring Agency shall be authorized to release their respective Coaches on order for delivery. The Resident Inspectors and Lead Procuring Agency shall be authorized to approve the pre -delivery acceptance tests. Upon request to the quality assurance supervisors, the Resident Inspectors shall have access to the Contractor's quality assurance files related to this procurement. These files shall include drawings, assembly procedures, material standards, parts lists, inspection processing and reports and records of defects. Section 3 — Page 8 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3.3.2.4 SUPPORT PROVISIONS The Contractor shall provide office space for the Resident Inspectors in close proximity to the final assembly area. This office space shall be equipped with desks, outside and interplant telephones, file cabinet, chairs and clothing lockers sufficient to accommodate the resident staff. 3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTS 3.4.1 RESPONSIBILITY Fully documented tests shall be conducted on each production Coach following manufacture to determine its acceptance to the Lead Procuring Agency. These acceptance tests shall include pre - delivery inspections and testing by the Contractor and inspections and testing by the Lead Procurement Agency after the Coaches have been delivered to the Procuring Transit Agencies receiving locations identified in this document. 8E WM:JNmeQ=II V1=IZYM1*Ik1_1 The Contractor shall conduct pre -delivery tests at its plant on each Coach following completion of manufacture and before delivery to the Lead Procuring Agency. These pre -delivery tests shall include visual and measured inspections as well as testing the total Coach operation. The tests shall be conducted and documented in accordance with written test plans approved by the Victor Valley Transit Authority, the Lead Procuring Agency. Additional tests may be conducted at the Contractor's discretion to ensure that the completed Coaches have attained the desired quality and have met the requirements in "Technical Specifications" (Part 5). The Lead Procuring Agency may, prior to commencement of production, demand that the Contractor demonstrate compliance with any requirement in "Technical Specifications" (Part 5), if there is evidence that prior tests have been invalidated by Contractor's change of Supplier, Subcontractor or change in manufacturing process. Such demonstration shall be by actual test or by supplying a report of a previously performed test on similar or like components and configuration. Any additional testing shall be recorded on appropriate test forms provided by the Contractor and shall be conducted before acceptance of the Coaches. The pre -deliver tests shall be scheduled and conducted with 30 (thirty) days' notice so that they may be witnessed by the Resident Inspectors, who may accept or reject the results of the tests. The results of pre -delivery tests and any other tests shall be filed with the assembly inspection records for each Coach. The underfloor equipment shall be available for inspection by the Resident Inspectors, using a pit or Coach hoist provided by the Contractor. A hoist, scaffold, or elevated platform shall be provided by the Contractor to easily and safely inspect Coach roofs. Delivery of each Coach shall require written authorization of a Resident Inspector. The Contractor shall provide authorization forms for the release of each Coach for delivery. An executed copy of the authorization shall accompany the delivery of each Coach. Section 3 — Page 9 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 3.4.2.1 INSPECTION — VISUAL AND MEASURED Visual and measured inspections shall be conducted with the Coach in a static condition. The purpose of the inspection testing is to verify overall dimensional and weight requirements. And to verify that required components are included and are ready for operation and to verify that the components and subsystems that are designed to operate with the Coach in a static condition do function as designed. 3.4.2.2 TOTAL COACH OPERATION Total Coach operation shall be evaluated during road tests. The purpose of the road tests is to observe and verify the operation of the Coach as a system and to verify the functional operation of the subsystems that can be operated only while the Coach is in motion. Each Coach shall be driven for a minimum of 15 (fifteen) miles during the road tests. Observed Defects shall be recorded on the test forms. The Coach shall be retested when defects are corrected and adjustments are made. This process shall continue until defects or required adjustments are no longer detected. Results shall be pass/fail for these Coach operation tests. 3.5 POST -DELIVERY TESTS The Lead Procuring Agency shall conduct acceptance tests on each delivered Coach. These tests shall be completed within thirty (30) days after Coach delivery and shall be conducted in accordance with written test plans. The purpose of these tests is to identify Defects that have become apparent between the time of the Coach release and delivery to the Lead Procuring Agency. The post -delivery tests shall include visual inspection and Coach operations. No post -delivery tests shall apply criteria that are different from the criteria applied in an analogous pre -delivery test (if any). Coaches that fail to pass the post -delivery tests are subject to non-acceptance. The Lead Procuring Agency shall record details of all Defects on the appropriate test forms and shall notify the Contractor of acceptance, conditional acceptance or non-acceptance of each Coach according to "Acceptance of Coaches' (Section 2.3.1.4) after completion of the tests. The defects detected during these tests shall be repaired according to procedures defined in "Contractual Provisions" (Part 2, 'Repairs After Non- acceptance" (Section 2.3.2) 3.5.1 VISUAL INSPECTION The post -delivery inspection is similar to the inspection at the Contractor's plant and shall be conducted with the Coaches in a static condition. Any visual delivery damage shall be identified and recorded during the visual inspection of each Coach. 3.5.2 COACH OPERATION Road tests will be used to assess total Coach operations similar to those conducted at the Contractor's plant. In addition, the Lead Procuring Agency may elect to perform Chassis Dynamometer tests. Operational deficiencies of each Coach shall be identified and recorded. Section 3 — Page 10 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 4.0 WARRANTY PROVISIONS Section 4 — Page 1 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev Dated WARRANTY PROVISIONS Table of Contents 4.0 WARRANTY PROVISIONS..........................................................................................................................................1 4.3 DISPUTES.....................................................................................................................................................................7 4.4 WARRANTYAFTER REPLACEMENT REPAIRS................................................................................................................ 7 Section 4 — Page 1 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Ki■_YT&I[y:21:Z611F1IQ01F1 4.1.1 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS 4.1.1.1 CONTRACTOR WARRANTY Warranties in this document are in addition to any statutory remedies or warranties imposed on the Contractor. Consistent with this requirement, the Contractor warrants and guarantees to the original Procuring Agencies each complete Coach and specific subsystems and components as follows: 4.1.1.2 COMPLETE COACH The complete Coach, propulsion system, components, major subsystems and body and chassis structure, are warranted to be free from Defects and Related Defects for one year or 50,000 miles, whichever comes first, beginning on the date of acceptance or conditional acceptance of each Coach under "Acceptance of Coaches" (2.3.1.4). The warranty is based on regular operation of the Coaches under the prevalent operating conditions in the local of each of the five Procuring Agency's. 4.1.1.3 BODY AND CHASSIS STRUCTURE Body, body structure and structural elements of the suspension are warranted to be free from defects, related defects and to maintain structural integrity for three years or 150,000 miles, whichever comes first. Primary load carrying members of the Coach structure, including structural elements of the suspension, are warranted against corrosion failure and/or fatigue failure sufficient to cause a Class 1 or Class 2 failure for a period of 12 (twelve) years or 500,000 miles, whichever comes first. 4.1.1.4 PROPULSION SYSTEM Propulsion system components, specifically the engine, transmission and drive and non -drive axles shall be warranted to be free from Defects for five years or 300,000 miles, whichever comes first. Propulsion System manufacturer's standard warranty, delineating items excluded from this warranty, submitted in accordance with "Proposer Communications and Requests" (Section 1.1.2.2. of Procuring Agency's solicitation), may be approved by the Lead Procuring Agency's Source Selection Committee during the "or Equals" review process. 4.1.1.5 MAJOR SUBSYSTEMS Major subsystems shall be warranted to be free from Defects for three years or 150,000 miles, whichever comes first. Major subsystem manufacturers standard warranty, delineating items excluded from this warranty, submitted in accordance within "Proposer Communications and Requests" (Section 1.1.2.2 of Lead Procuring Agency's solicitation) may be approved by the Lead Procuring Agency's Source Selection Committee during the "Or Equal's" review process. Items included as Major Subsystems are listed below: Brake system Destination signs Section 4 — Page 2 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 • Heating, Ventilating and Air conditioning system • Door system • Air Compressor and dryer • Wheelchairs lift and ramp system • Starter Alternator 4.1.1.6 EXTENSION OF WARRANTY If during the warranty period, repairs or modifications on any Coach, made necessary by a Defect are not completed due to lack of material or inability to provide the proper repair for 30 (thirty) calendar days, the applicable warranty period shall be extended by the number of days equal to the delay period. 4.1.1.7 DEFINITION OF DEFECT Patent or latent malfunction or failure in manufacture, installation or design of any component or subsystem. 4.1.2 VOIDING OF WARRANTY The warranties shall not apply to the failure of any part or component of the Coaches that directly results from misuse, negligence, accident, or repairs not conducted in accordance with the Contractor provided maintenance manuals and with workmanship performed by adequately trained Procurement Agency personnel in accordance with recognized standards of the industry. The warranty shall also be void if the Procuring Agency fails to conduct normal inspections and scheduled preventative maintenance procedures as recommended in the Contractor's maintenance manuals and that omission caused the defect. Procuring Agency and the other three participating Transit Agencies shall maintain documentation, auditable by the Contractor, verifying service activities in conformance with the Contractor's maintenance manuals. 4.1.3 EXCEPTIONS AND ADDITIONS TO WARRANTY The warranties shall not apply to the following items: scheduled maintenance items, normal wear -out items, and items furnished by the Procuring Agency, except insofar as such equipment may be damaged by the Defect of a part or component for which the Contractor is responsible. The warranties shall not apply to components and major subsystems specified by the Procuring Agency and required by the Procuring Agency to be installed on the Coaches by the Contractor, if the following conditions apply: The Procuring Agency has rejected the Contractor's Requests for Approved Equal under "Proposer Communications and Requests" (Section 1.1.2.2 of the Procuring Agency's Solicitation), the component or major subsystem supplier declines to participate in this warranty and the Contractor notifies the Procuring Agency in writing with, or before submitting the Contractor's original Section 4 — Page 3 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Offer. The Contractor shall pass on to the Procuring Agency any warranty offered by a component supplier, including a warranty that is superior to that required herein. 4.1.4 DETECTION OF DEFECTS If the Procuring Agency detects a Defect within the warranty periods defined in "Warranty Requirements" (Section 4.1.1), it shall within 20 (twenty) working days, notify the Contractor's representative. Within five working days after receipt of notification, the Contractor's representative shall either agree that the Defect is in fact covered by warranty, or reserve judgment until the subsystem or component is inspected by the Contractor's representative or is removed and examined at the respective Procuring Agency's property or at the Contractor's plant. Work shall commence to correct the Defect within 10 (ten) working days after receipt of notification and shall be conducted in accordance with "Repairs by Contractor" (Section 4.2.2). If the Contractor disagrees that the defect is covered by the warranty, Contractor shall proceed with the work in accordance with Section 4.3 Disputes. CKiIlIb1E*9161»O]>l9N:TA 0111 w7NMIJe11*1 When warranty repairs are required, the Procuring Agency (or any of the 5 Procuring Agencies), and the Contractor's representative shall agree within five working days after notification on the most appropriate course for the repairs and the exact scope of the repairs to be performed under the warranty. If no agreement is obtained within the five day period, the Procuring Agency reserves the right to commence the repairs in accordance with "Repairs by Procuring Agency" (Section 4.2.3) 4.1.6 FLEET DEFECTS 4.1.6.1 OCCURRENCE AND REMEDY A Fleet defect is defined as cumulative failures of any kind in the same components in the same or similar application where such items covered by the warranty and such failures occur in the warranty period in the specified proportion of the Coaches delivered under this Contract. For deliveries of over 50 Coaches, the proportion shall be 20 (twenty) percent. For aggregate contract deliveries quantities of 4 (four) to 49 (forty-nine) Coaches the proportion shall be 25 (twenty-five) percent. The Contractor shall correct a Fleet Defect under the warranty provisions defined in "Repair Procedures" (Section 4.2). After correcting the Defect, the Procuring Agency and the Contractor shall mutually agree to and the Contractor shall promptly undertake and complete a work program reasonably designed to prevent the reoccurrence of the same Defect in all other Coaches and spare parts acquired pursuant to this Contract. Where the specific Defect can be solely attributed to particular identified parts, the work program shall include redesign and/or replacement of only the defectively designed and/or manufactured parts. In all other cases, the work program shall include inspection and/or correction of all the Coaches in the fleet via a mutually agreed to arrangement. 4.1.6.2 EXCEPTIONS TO FLEET DEFECT PROVISIONS The Fleet Defect Warranty provisions shall not apply to Procuring Agency -supplied items. Section 4 — Page 4 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Fleet Defect Warranty provisions shall not apply to components and major subsystems specified by the Procuring Agency and required by the Procuring Agency to be installed on the Coaches by the Contractor, if the following conditions apply: The Procuring Agency has rejected the Contractor's requests for Approved Equal under "Proposer Communications and Requests" (Section 1.1.2.2 of Procuring Agency's solicitation), the component or major subsystem supplier declines to participate in this warranty; and the Contractor notifies the Lead Procuring Agency in writing with, or before submitting, Contractor's original Offer. The Contractor shall pass on to the Procuring Agency any Warranty offered by a component supplier, including a Warranty that is superior to that required herein. 4.2 REPAIR PROCEDURES 4.2.1 REPAIR PERFORMANCE The Contractor is responsible for all warranty -covered repair work. To the extent practicable, the Procuring Agency will allow the Contractor or its designated representative to perform such work. At its discretion, the Procuring Agency may perform such work if it determines it needs to do so based on transit service or other requirements. Such work shall be reimbursed by the Contractor, as set out in Section 4.2.3, "Repairs by Procuring Agencies." 4.2.2 REPAIRS BY CONTRACTOR The Contractor or its designated representative shall begin work on warranty -covered repairs within five calendar days after receiving notification of a Defect from the Procuring Agency. The Procuring Agency shall make the Coaches available to complete repairs timely with the Contractor repair schedule. The Contractor shall provide at its own expense all spare parts, tools and space required to complete repairs. At the Procuring Agency's option, the Contractor may be required to remove the Coaches from the Procuring Agency or other participating agency's property while repairs are being affected. Damages caused by Contractor's Warranty repairs at Procuring Agency's facility shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall be corrected at the Contractor's sole cost and expense. If the Coach is removed from the Procuring Agency's property, repair procedures must be diligently pursued by the Contractor's representative and the Contractor shall assume Risk of Loss during the period that the Coach was removed from the Procuring Agency's property until it is returned. 4.2.3 REPAIRS BY PROCURING AGENCY 4.2.3.1 PARTS USED If the Procuring Transit Agencies perform the warranty -covered repairs, it shall correct or repair the Defect utilizing parts supplied by the Contractor specifically for this repair. At its discretion, the Procuring Agency may use the Contractor -specified parts available from its own stock if deemed in its best interest. Monthly, or at a period to be mutually agreed upon; reports of all repairs covered by this warranty shall be submitted by the Procuring Agency to the Contractor for reimbursement or replacement parts. The Contractor shall be submitted by the Procuring Agency to the Contractor for reimbursement or replacement of parts. The Contractor shall provide forms for these reports. Section 4 — Page 5 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 4.2.3.2 CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED PARTS The Procuring Transit Agencies may require that the Contractor supply new parts for warranty -covered repairs being performed by the Procuring Agency. These parts shall be shipped prepaid to the Respective Procuring Transit Agencies from any source selected by the Contractor within 10 (ten) working days of receipt of the request for said parts. Parts supplied by the Contractor shall be Original Equipment Supplier (OEM) equivalent or superior to that used in the Coach original manufacture. 4.2.3.3 DEFECTIVE COMPONENTS RETURN The Contractor may request that parts covered by the warranty be returned to the manufacturing plant. The total cost for this action shall be paid by the Contractor. Materials should be returned in accordance with Contractor's instructions. 4.2.3.4 FAILURE ANALYSIS The Contractor shall, upon specific request of the Procuring Agencies, provide a failure analysis of fleet defect or safety-related parts, or major components, removed from Coaches under the terms of the warranty that could affect fleet operation. Such reports shall be delivered within 60 (sixty) days of the receipt of failed parts. 4.2.3.5 REIMBURSEMENT FOR LABOR The Procuring Agencies shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for labor. The amount shall be $85 per hour, including repair time, plus the cost of towing in the Coach if such action was necessary and if the Coach was in the normal service area. This rate shall be escalated at Three percent (3%) per year from the date of acceptance of the sixth (6`h) Base Order Coach. 4.2.3.6 REIMBURSEMENT FOR PARTS The Procuring Transit Agencies shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for defective parts and for parts that must be replaced to correct the defect. The reimbursement shall be at the current price at the time of repair and shall include taxes where applicable and fifteen percent (15%) handling costs. 4.2.3.7 REIMBURSEMENT REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall reimburse the Procuring Transit Agencies for Warranty labor and/or parts within 45 (forty-five) days of receipt of warranty claim. 4.2.3.8 TESTS The Contractor shall perform, at its sole cost and expense, those tests Procuring Transit Agencies may reasonably require to verify that warranty work complies with the requirements of this Contract. The security, control, shipping and disposition of Contractor -owned parts shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Procuring Transit Agencies may invoice Contractor for all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by the Procuring Agency and/or its Contractor to inspect Contractor's efforts to repair or replace a Defect. The Contractor shall reimburse the Procuring Agency for those costs and expenses within 30 (thirty) days after receipt of the Procuring Agency's invoice. Section 4 — Page 6 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 %lQ!; 01I*I If the Contractor believes the Procuring Agency's warranty claim is not covered under this warranty, Contractor shall notify the Procuring Agency in writing within 10 (ten) calendar days after the date the Procuring Agency made its warranty claim. Contractor's notification shall list each item in the Procuring Agency's warranty claim that it believes is not covered by this warranty and shall include a written analysis of its reason for denying the Procuring Agency's warranty claim. The Procuring Agency shall respond to Contractor's notice within 10 (ten) calendar days after receipt. If the Procuring Agency agrees that Contractor properly denied the Procuring Agency's warranty claim, Contractor must not perform that warranty work except as provided in a fully signed amendment to the Contract. When the Procuring Agency notifies Contractor that it improperly denied the Procuring Agency's warranty claim, Contractor must perform that warranty work but may file a claim as provided in the Contract. Contractor must commence and prosecute the disputed warranty work with due diligence within ten (ten) working days after the Procuring Agency's written notification to Contractor that the work is covered by this warranty or within such additional time period specified by the Procuring Agency in its notification to Contractor. If Contractor fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, each Procuring Agency may cause that defective Product to be repaired or replaced using the Procuring Agency's forces, and the Procuring Agency Contractors or both. Contractor shall reimburse the Procuring Agency for all costs and expenses incurred by the Procuring Agencies to repair or replace the defective Products on their Coaches. Contractor shall reimburse the Procuring Agency within 30 (thirty) days from the date the Procuring Agencies invoices Contractor for reasonable costs and expenses. 4.4 WARRANTY AFTER REPLACEMENT REPAIRS If any component, unit or subsystem is repaired, rebuilt or replaced by the Contractor or by the Procuring Agency with the concurrence of the Contractor, the component, unit or subsystem shall have the unexpired warranty period of the original. Repairs shall not be warranted if Contractor -provided or authorized parts are not used for the repair; unless the Contractor has failed to respond within five days, in accordance with "Scope of Warranty Repairs" (Section 4.1.5). The warranty on items determined to be fleet defects as defined in Section 4.1.6 shall be extended for the time and/or miles of the original warranty remaining at the time the fleet defect was identified. This extended warranty shall begin on the repair/replacement date for corrected items on each Coach. Section 4 — Page 7 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 5.0 TECHNICAL AND PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS TS- 01 THROUGH TS -79 Section 5 — Page 1 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 111x]:1►1ley-Al IF -Al ►111aAVIle] VdU_l01INWaxy19NLArto] ►69 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.0 TECHNICAL AND PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................................1 TS -1 SCOPE........................................................................................................................................................................10 TS -2 DEFINITIONS..............................................................................................................................................................10 TS -3 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS.....................................................................................................................................16 TS -4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................................................. 16 TS -5 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................................................... 17 TS -5.1 WEIGHT............................................................................................................................................................17 TS -5.2 CAPACITY..........................................................................................................................................................17 TS -5.3 SERVICE LIFE...................................................................................................................................................... 17 TS -5.4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION..................................................................................................................... 17 TS -5.5 INTERCHANGEABILITY....................................................................................................................................... 18 TS -5.6 TRAINING..........................................................................................................................................................18 TS -5.6.1 TECHNICAL/SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES......................................................................................................18 TS -5.7 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT............................................................................................................................. 19 TS -5.8 NOISE................................................................................................................................................................19 TS -5.8.1 INTERIOR NOISE............................................................................................................................................ 19 TS -5.8.2 EXTERIOR NOISE........................................................................................................................................... 19 TS -5.9 FIRE SAFETY....................................................................................................................................................... 19 TS -5.9.1 MATERIALS...................................................................................................................................................19 TS -5.10 FIRE SUPPRESSION............................................................................................................................................20 TS -5.11 RESPECT FOR THE ENVIRONMENT.................................................................................................................... 20 TS -6 PHYSICAL SIZE............................................................................................................................................................ 20 TS -6.1 COACH LENGTH................................................................................................................................................. 21 TS -6.2 COACH WIDTH..................................................................................................................................................21 TS -6.3 COACH HEIGHT.................................................................................................................................................21 TS -6.4.1 STEP HEIGHT.................................................................................................................................................21 TS -6.5 UNDERBODY CLEARANCE.................................................................................................................................21 TS -6.6 RAMP CLEARANCES.......................................................................................................................................... 21 TS -6.7 GROUND CLEARANCE.......................................................................................................................................22 TS -6.8 FLOOR HEIGHT.................................................................................................................................................. 23 TS -6.9 INTERIOR HEADROOM...................................................................................................................................... 23 TS -7 POWER REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................................ 23 TS7.1 TOP SPEED........................................................................................................................................................ 23 TS 7.2 GRADABILITY.....................................................................................................................................................24 TS 7.2.1 ACCELERATION............................................................................................................................................. 24 TS7.2.2 NON-HYBRID.................................................................................................................................................24 TS 7.3 OPERATING RANGE...........................................................................................................................................24 TS7.3.2 CNG............................................................................................................................................................... 25 Section 5 — Page 2 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -8 FUEL ECONOMY (DESIGN OPERATING PROFILE)....................................................................................................... 25 TS -9 ENGINE......................................................................................................................................................................25 TS9.1 ENGINE (CNG) ...................................................................................................................................................26 TS -10 COOLINGSYSTEMS................................................................................................................................................26 TS 10.1 ENGINE COOLING..............................................................................................................................................26 TS10.1.1 COOLANT...................................................................................................................................................... 26 TS 10.1.2 DRIVE DESIGN............................................................................................................................................... 27 TS10. 1.3 MOUNTING...................................................................................................................................................27 TS 10.2 TRANSMISSION COOLING................................................................................................................................. 27 TS -11 TRANSMISSION (CONVENTIONAL POWERTRAIN)................................................................................................. 27 TS -12 RETARDER (CNG)...................................................................................................................................................28 TS -13 ENGINE BRAKE (DIESEL)........................................................................................................................................ 28 TS -14 MOUNTING...........................................................................................................................................................28 TS14.1 SERVICE............................................................................................................................................................. 28 TS -15 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS.............................................................................................................................................29 TS 15.1 FLUID LINES.......................................................................................................................................................29 TS 15.2 FITTINGS AND CLAMPS.....................................................................................................................................29 TS 15.3 CHARGE AIR PIPING..........................................................................................................................................30 TS -16 RADIATOR..............................................................................................................................................................30 TS -17 OIL AND HYDRAULICLINES....................................................................................................................................30 TS -18 FUEL.......................................................................................................................................................................30 TS18.1 FUEL LINES........................................................................................................................................................30 TS 18. 1.1 FUEL LINES, DIESEL.......................................................................................................................................31 TS 18.1.2 FUEL LINES, CNG...........................................................................................................................................31 TS 18.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION...........................................................................................................................32 TS 18.2.1 DIESEL FUEL TANK(S)....................................................................................................................................32 TS 18.2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION, CNG.............................................................................................................32 TS -19 EMISSIONS AND EXHAUST.....................................................................................................................................34 TS 19.1 EXHAUST EMISSIONS........................................................................................................................................34 TS 19.2 EXHAUST SYSTEM............................................................................................................................................. 35 TS 19.3 EXHAUST AFTER-TREATMENT...........................................................................................................................35 TS 19.4 PARTICULATE AFTER -TREATMENT (DIESEL)......................................................................................................35 TS -20 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................35 TS20.1 DESIGN..............................................................................................................................................................35 TS -21 ALTOONA TESTING ................................................................................................................................................35 TS 21.1 STRUCTURAL VALIDATION................................................................................................................................36 TS -22 DISTORTION...........................................................................................................................................................36 TS -23 RESONANCEAND VIBRATION................................................................................................................................36 TS 23.1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT BULKHEADS..............................................................................................................36 Section 5 — Page 3 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 23.2 CRASHWORTHINESS.........................................................................................................................................36 TS -24 CORROSION...........................................................................................................................................................37 TS -25 TOWING................................................................................................................................................................37 TS -26 JACKING.................................................................................................................................................................37 TS -27 HOISTING...............................................................................................................................................................38 TS -28 FLOOR....................................................................................................................................................................38 TS28.1 DESIGN..............................................................................................................................................................38 TS 28.2 CONSTRUCTION................................................................................................................................................ 38 TS -29 PLATFORMS...........................................................................................................................................................39 TS 29.1 DRIVER'S AREA..................................................................................................................................................39 TS29.2 FAREBOX...........................................................................................................................................................39 TS -30 WHEEL HOUSING................................................................................................................................................... 39 TS 30.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION...........................................................................................................................39 TS -31 SUSPENSION..........................................................................................................................................................39 TS 31.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................39 TS31.2 ALIGNMENT......................................................................................................................................................39 TS 31.3 SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS....................................................................................................................40 TS 31.3.1 SUSPENSION TRAVEL....................................................................................................................................40 TS31.3.2 DAMPING......................................................................................................................................................40 TS 31.3.3 LUBRICATION................................................................................................................................................40 TS31.3.4 KNEELING......................................................................................................................................................40 TS -32 WHEELS AND TIRES...............................................................................................................................................41 TS32.1 WHEELS.............................................................................................................................................................41 TS32.2 TIRES.................................................................................................................................................................41 TS -33 STEERING...............................................................................................................................................................41 TS 33.1 STEERING AND TAG AXLES................................................................................................................................41 TS 33.2 STEERING WHEEL..............................................................................................................................................42 TS 33.2.1 TURNING EFFORT.........................................................................................................................................42 TS 33.2.2 STEERING WHEEL, GENERAL .........................................................................................................................42 TS 33.2.3 STEERING COLUMN TILT...............................................................................................................................42 TS 33.2.4 STEERING WHEEL TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................................42 TS -34 DRIVEAXLE............................................................................................................................................................43 TS 34.1 NON -DRIVE AXLE...............................................................................................................................................43 TS -35 TAG AXLES (COMMUTER COACH)......................................................................................................................... 43 TS -36 TURNINGRADIUS..................................................................................................................................................44 TS -37 BRAKES..................................................................................................................................................................45 TS 37.1 SERVICE BRAKE.................................................................................................................................................45 TS37.2 ACTUATION.......................................................................................................................................................45 TS 37.3 FRICTION MATERIAL.........................................................................................................................................45 TS 37.4 HUBS AND DISCS...............................................................................................................................................45 Section 5 — Page 4 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 37.5 PARKING/EMERGENCY BRAKE..........................................................................................................................45 TS -38 PNEUMATICSYSTEM.............................................................................................................................................46 TS38.1 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................................46 TS 38.2 AIR COMPRESSOR.............................................................................................................................................46 TS 38.3 AIR LINES AND FITTINGS...................................................................................................................................46 TS 38.4 AIR RESERVOIRS................................................................................................................................................47 TS 38.5 AIR SYSTEM DRYER........................................................................................................................................... 47 TS -39 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................................................................47 TS 39.1 MODULAR DESIGN............................................................................................................................................48 TS -40 ENVIRONMENTAL AND MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................................48 TS 40.1 HARDWARE MOUNTING...................................................................................................................................49 TS -41 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................. 49 TS41.1 BATTERIES.........................................................................................................................................................49 TS 41. 1.1 LOW -VOLTAGE BATTERIES (24 V).................................................................................................................49 TS 41.1.2 BATTERY CABLES........................................................................................................................................... 50 TS 41.1.3 JUMP START.................................................................................................................................................. 50 TS 41.1.4 BATTERY COMPARTMENT............................................................................................................................50 TS 41.1.5 AUXILIARY ELECTRONIC POWER SUPPLY......................................................................................................52 TS 41.1.6 MASTER BATTERY SWITCH...........................................................................................................................53 TS 41.1.7 LOW -VOLTAGE GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION.......................................................................................53 TS 41.1.8 CIRCUIT PROTECTION...................................................................................................................................53 TS41.2 GROUNDS..........................................................................................................................................................54 TS 41.3 LOW VOLTAGE/LOW CURRENT WIRING AND TERMINALS...............................................................................54 TS 41.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS...............................................................................................................................55 TS 41.5 ELECTRICAL COMPARTMENTS..........................................................................................................................55 TS -42 GENERAL ELECTRONIC REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................56 TS 42.1 WIRING AND TERMINALS..................................................................................................................................56 TS 42. 1.1 DISCRETE 1/0 (INPUTS/OUTPUTS)................................................................................................................56 TS 42.1.2 SHIELDING....................................................................................................................................................56 TS 42.1.3 COMMUNICATIONS......................................................................................................................................56 TS 42.1.4 RADIO FREQUENCY (RF)............................................................................................................................... 57 TS42.1.5 AUDIO...........................................................................................................................................................57 TS -43 MULTIPLEXING......................................................................................................................................................57 TS43.1 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................................57 TS 43.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.................................................................................................................................57 43.2.1 1/0 SIGNALS......................................................................................................................................................57 TS -44 DATA COMMUNICATIONS..................................................................................................................................... 58 TS44.1 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................................58 TS 44.2 DRIVETRAIN LEVEL............................................................................................................................................58 TS 44.2.1 DIAGNOSTICS, FAULT DETECTION AND DATA ACCESS.................................................................................58 TS 44.2.2 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE) ................................................................................................................58 TS 44.3 MULTIPLEX LEVEL..............................................................................................................................................59 TS 44.3.1 DATA ACCESS................................................................................................................................................ 59 Section 5 — Page 5 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 44.3.2 DIAGNOSTICS AND FAULT DETECTION.........................................................................................................59 TS 44.3.3 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE) ................................................................................................................59 TS 44.4 ELECTRONIC NOISE CONTROL................................................................................................................................60 TS -45 DRIVER'SAREACONTROLS....................................................................................................................................60 TS45.1 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................................60 TS45.2 GLARE................................................................................................................................................................60 TS 45.3 VISORS/SUNSHADES........................................................................................................................................60 TS 45.4 DRIVER'S CONTROLS.........................................................................................................................................61 TS 45.5 NORMAL COACH OPERATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS...............................................................61 TS 45.6 DRIVER FOOT CONTROLS..................................................................................................................................69 TS 45.6.1 PEDAL ANGLE................................................................................................................................................69 TS 45.6.2 PEDAL DIMENSIONS AND POSITION.............................................................................................................70 TS 45.7 DRIVER FOOT SWITCHES...................................................................................................................................70 TS -46 DRIVER'S AMENITIES.............................................................................................................................................70 TS 46.1 COATHANGER..................................................................................................................................................70 TS 46.2 STORAGE BOX...................................................................................................................................................71 TS -47 WINDSHIELD WIPERSAND WASHERS...................................................................................................................71 TS 47.1 WINDSHIELD WIPERS........................................................................................................................................71 TS 47.2 WINDSHIELD WASHERS....................................................................................................................................71 TS -48 DRIVER'SSEAT.......................................................................................................................................................72 TS 48.1 DIMENSIONS.....................................................................................................................................................72 TS48.2 SEAT BELT.......................................................................................................................................................... 72 TS 48.3 SEAT CONTROL LOCATIONS..............................................................................................................................73 TS 48.4 SEAT STRUCTURE AND MATERIALS...................................................................................................................73 TS48.5 PEDESTAL..........................................................................................................................................................73 TS 48.6 SEAT OPTIONS...................................................................................................................................................73 TS48.7 MIRRORS...........................................................................................................................................................73 TS 48.7.1 EXTERIOR MIRRORS......................................................................................................................................73 TS 48.7.2 INTERIOR MIRRORS......................................................................................................................................74 TS -49 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................74 TS -50 WINDSHIELD..........................................................................................................................................................74 TS50.1 GLAZING............................................................................................................................................................74 TS -51 DRIVER'S SIDE WINDOW.......................................................................................................................................75 TS -52 SIDE WINDOWS.....................................................................................................................................................75 TS 52.1 CONFIGURATION..............................................................................................................................................75 TS 52.2 EMERGENCY EXIT (EGRESS) CONFIGURATION..................................................................................................76 TS52.3 MATERIALS........................................................................................................................................................76 TS -53 CAPACITYAND PERFORMANCE............................................................................................................................. 76 TS -54 CONTROLS AND TEMPERATURE UNIFORMITY...................................................................................................... 77 TS 54.1 AUXILIARY HEATER............................................................................................................................................78 TS -55 AIR FLOW............................................................................................................................................................... 78 Section 5 — Page 6 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 55.1 PASSENGER AREA..............................................................................................................................................78 TS 55.2 DRIVER'S AREA..................................................................................................................................................78 TS 55.3 CONTROLS FOR THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (CCS)...................................................................................79 TS 55.4 DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................79 TS 55.5 DRIVER'S COOLING...........................................................................................................................................79 TS -56 AIR FILTRATION..................................................................................................................................................... 80 TS -57 ROOF VENTILATORS..............................................................................................................................................80 TS -58 MAINTAINABILITY..................................................................................................................................................80 TS -59 ENTRANCE/EXIT AREA HEATING...........................................................................................................................80 TS -60 FLOOR -LEVEL HEATING......................................................................................................................................... 80 TS 60.1 COMMUTER COACH..............................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. TS -61 DESIGN..................................................................................................................................................................81 TS61.1 MATERIALS........................................................................................................................................................81 TS -62 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY.............................................................................................................................................. 81 TS -63 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT..................................................................................................................................81 TS 63.1 SIDE BODY PANELS............................................................................................................................................ 81 TS -64 RAIN GUTTERS.......................................................................................................................................................82 TS -65 LICENSE PLATE PROVISIONS.................................................................................................................................. 82 TS -66 FENDER SKIRTS......................................................................................................................................................82 TS 66.1 SPLASH APRONS................................................................................................................................................ 82 TS -67 SERVICE COMPARTMENTS AND ACCESS DOORS................................................................................................... 83 TS 67.1 ACCESS DOORS.................................................................................................................................................. 83 TS 67.2 ACCESS DOOR LATCH/LOCKS............................................................................................................................ 83 TS -68 BUMPERS...............................................................................................................................................................83 TS68.1 LOCATION......................................................................................................................................................... 83 TS 68.2 FRONT BUMPER................................................................................................................................................83 TS 68.3 REAR BUMPER...................................................................................................................................................84 TS 68.4 BUMPER MATERIAL..........................................................................................................................................84 TS -69 FINISH AND COLOR................................................................................................................................................84 TS 69.1 APPEARANCE.................................................................................................................................................... 84 TS -70 DECALS, NUMBERING AND SIGNING.....................................................................................................................85 TS 70.1 PASSENGER INFORMATION..............................................................................................................................85 TS -71 EXTERIOR LIGHTING.............................................................................................................................................. 86 TS 71.1 BACKUP LIGHT/ALARM..................................................................................................................................... 86 TS 71.2 DOORWAY LIGHTING........................................................................................................................................86 TS 71.3 TURN SIGNALS..................................................................................................................................................86 TS 71.4 HEADLIGHTS......................................................................................................................................................86 TS 71.5 BRAKE LIGHTS...................................................................................................................................................87 TS 71.6 SERVICE AREA LIGHTING (INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR)....................................................................................... 87 Section 5 — Page 7 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -72 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................................... 87 TS -73 INTERIOR PANELS.................................................................................................................................................. 88 TS 73.2 MODESTY PANELS.............................................................................................................................................88 TS73.3 FRONTEND.......................................................................................................................................................88 TS 73.4 REAR BULKHEAD...............................................................................................................................................89 TS 73.5 HEADLINING......................................................................................................................................................89 TS73.6 FASTENING........................................................................................................................................................89 TS 73.7 INSULATION...................................................................................................................................................... 89 TS 73.8 FLOOR COVERING.............................................................................................................................................90 TS 73.9 INTERIOR LIGHTING..........................................................................................................................................90 TS 73.10 PASSENGER...................................................................................................................................................90 TS 73.11 DRIVER'S AREA............................................................................................................................................. 91 TS 73.12 SEATING AREAS............................................................................................................................................ 91 TS 73.13 VESTIBULES/DOORS......................................................................................................................................91 TS 73.14 STEP LIGHTING..............................................................................................................................................91 TS 73.15 FAREBOX LIGHTING ......................................................................................................................................92 TS -74 FARE COLLECTION.................................................................................................................................................92 TS -75 INTERIOR ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS (TRANSIT COACH)................................................................................... 92 TS 75.1 FLOOR PANELS..................................................................................................................................................92 TS -76 PASSENGER SEATING.............................................................................................................................................93 TS 76.1 ARRANGEMENTS AND SEAT STYLE (COMMUTER COACH)...............................................................................93 TS 76.2 HIP -TO -KNEE ROOM.........................................................................................................................................93 TS76.3 FOOT ROOM..................................................................................................................................................... 93 TS 76.4 AISLES (COMMUTER COACH)............................................................................................................................93 TS 76.5 STRUCTURE AND DESIGN (COMMUTER COACH)..............................................................................................93 TS 76.6 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS (COMMUTER COACH).................................................................................94 TS 76.7.1 FRONT DOOR................................................................................................................................................94 TS 76.8 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION....................................................................................................................94 TS 76.9 DOOR GLAZING.................................................................................................................................................94 TS 76.9.1 ACTUATOR (COMMUTER COACH)................................................................................................................95 TS 76.10 EMERGENCY OPERATION............................................................................................................................. 95 TS 76.11 DOOR CONTROL........................................................................................................................................... 95 TS 76.12 DOOR CONTROLLER......................................................................................................................................95 TS -77 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS (COMMUTER COACH)............................................................................................................ 95 TS -77.1 LIFT....................................................................................................................................................................95 TS -77.2 LIFT DOOR.........................................................................................................................................................96 TS77.3 LIFTWIDTH.......................................................................................................................................................97 TS -77.4 LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................97 TS -77.5 SECUREMENT SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................97 TS -77.6 ROOF VENTILATION/ESCAPE HATCHES.............................................................................................................98 TS -78 DESTINATION SIGNS..............................................................................................................................................98 TS -78.2 SIGNAL CHIME COMMUTER COACH.................................................................................................................98 TS -79 COMMUNICATIONS...............................................................................................................................................98 Section 5 - Page 8 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -79.1 CAMERA SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................98 TS -79.2 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM................................................................................................................................. 99 TS -79.3 SPEAKERS..........................................................................................................................................................99 TS -79.4 AUTOMATIC PASSENGER COUNTER (APC)........................................................................................................99 TS -79.5 RADIO HANDSET AND CONTROL SYSTEM.........................................................................................................99 TS -79.6 DRIVER'S SPEAKER............................................................................................................................................99 TS -79.7 HANDSET...........................................................................................................................................................99 TS -79.8 DRIVER DISPLAY UNIT (DDU)............................................................................................................................99 TS -79.9 EMERGENCY ALARM.........................................................................................................................................99 Section 5 — Page 9 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 W-11IIvaI:L101G1I/111IC1067:1IVill COMPRESSED NATURALGAS and LOW -EM ISS ION DIESEL COMMUTER COACHES IRFPNUMBER:VVTA SECTION 5: TECHNICAL PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS TS -1 SCOPE Technical Performance Specifications define requirements for heavy-duty commuter coaches, which, by the selection of specifically identified alternative configurations, may be used for over the road commuter trips to provide the most comfort possible for trips lasting from 1 to 2 hours. Coaches shall have a minimum expected life of twelve (12) years or 500,000 miles, whichever comes first, and are intended for the widest possible spectrum of passengers, including children, adults, the elderly and people with disabilities. TS -2 DEFINITIONS (1) Alternative: An alternative specification condition to the default coach configuration. The Agency may define alternatives to the default configuration to satisfy local operating requirements. Alternatives for the default configuration will be clearly identified. (2) Ambient Temperature: The temperature of the surrounding air. For testing purposes, ambient temperature must be between 16 °C (50 °F) and 38 °C (100 °F). (3) Analog Signals: A continuously variable signal that is solely dependent upon magnitude to express information content. (4) NOTE: Analog signals are used to represent the state of variable devices such as rheostats, potentiometers, temperature probes, etc. (5) Audible Discrete Frequency: An audible discrete frequency is determined to exist if the sound power level in any 1/3 -octave band exceeds the average of the sound power levels of the two adjacent 1/3 -octave bands by 4 decibels (dB) or more. (6) Battery Compartment: Low -voltage energy storage, i.e. 12/24 VDC batteries. (7) Battery Management System (BMS): Monitors energy, as well as temperature, cell or module voltages, and total pack voltage. The BMS adjusts the control strategy algorithms to maintain the batteries at uniform state of charge and optimal temperatures. (8) Braking Resistor: Device that converts electrical energy into heat, typically used as a retarder to supplement or replace the regenerative braking. Section 5 — Page 10 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 (9) Burst Pressure: The highest pressure reached in a container during a burst test. (10) Capacity (fuel container): The water volume of a container in gallons (liters). (11) Cells: Individual components (i.e., battery or capacitor cells). (12) Code: A legal requirement. (13) Combination Gas Relief Device: A relief device that is activated by a combination of high pressures or high temperatures, acting either independently or together. (14) Composite Container for CNG: A container fabricated of two or more materials that interact to facilitate the container design criteria. (15) Compressed Natural Gas (CNG): Mixtures of hydrocarbon gases and vapors consisting principally of methane in gaseous form that has been compressed for use as a vehicular fuel. (16) Container: A pressure vessel, cylinder or cylinders permanently manifolded together, used to store CNG. (17) Container Appurtenances: Devices connected to container openings for safety, control or operating purposes. (18) Container Valve: A valve connected directly to a container outlet. (19) Curb Weight: Weight of vehicle, including maximum fuel, oil and coolant; and all equipment required for operation and required by this Specification, but without passengers or driver. (20) dBA: Decibels with reference to 0.0002 microbar as measured on the "A" scale. (21) DC to DC Converter: A module that converts a source of direct current from one voltage level to another. (22) Default Configuration Coach: The coach described if no alternatives are selected. Signing, colors, the destination sign reading list and other information must be provided by the Agency. (23) Defueling: The process of removing fuel from a tank. (24) Defueling Port. Device that allows for vehicle defueling, or the point at which this occurs. (25) Destroyed: Physically made permanently unusable. (26) Discrete Signal: A signal that can take only pre -defined values, usually of a binary 0 or 1 nature, where 0 is battery ground potential and 1 is a defined battery positive potential. (27) DPF: Diesel particulate filter. Section 5 — Page 11 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 (28) Driver's Eye Range: The 95th -percentile ellipse defined in SAE Recommended Practice J941, except that the height of the ellipse shall be determined from the seat at its reference height. (29) Energy Density: The relationship between the weight of an energy storage device and its power output in units of watt-hours per kilogram (Wh/kg). (30) Energy Storage System (ESS): A component or system of components that stores energy and for which its supply of energy is rechargeable by the on -vehicle system (engine/regenerative braking/ generator) or an off -vehicle energy source. (31) Fill Pressure for CNG: The pressure attained at the actual time of filling. Fill pressure varies according to the gas temperatures in the container, which are dependent on the charging parameters and the ambient conditions. The maximum dispensed pressure shall not exceed 125 percent of service pressure. (32) Flow Capacity: For natural gas flow, this is the capacity in volume per unit time (normal cubic meters/minute or standard cubic feet per minute) discharged at the required flow rating pressure. (33) Fuel Line: The pipe, tubing or hose on a vehicle, including all related fittings, through which natural gas passes. (34) Fusible Material: A metal, alloy or other material capable of being melted by heat. (35) Fire Resistant: Materials that have a flame spread index less than 150 as measured in a radiant panel flame test per ASTM -E 162-90. (36) Fireproof: Materials that will not burn or melt at temperatures less than 2000 °F. (37) Free Floor Space: Floor area available to standees, excluding the area under seats, area occupied by feet of seated passengers, the vestibule area forward of the standee line, and any floor space indicated by manufacturer as non -standee areas, such as the floor space "swept" by passenger doors during operation. Floor area of 1.5 sq ft shall be allocated for the feet of each seated passenger protruding into the standee area. (38) Fuel Management System: Natural gas fuel system components that control or contribute to engine air fuel mixing and metering, and the ignition and combustion of a given air - fuel mixture. The fuel management system would include, but is not limited to, reducer/regulator valves, fuel metering equipment (e.g. carburetor, injectors), sensors (e.g., main throttle, wastegate). (39) GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rated): The maximum total weight as determined by the axle manufacturer, at which the axle can be safely and reliably operated for its intended purpose. (40) Gross Load: 150 lbs for every designed passenger seating position, for the driver, and for each 1.5 sq ft of free floor space. Section 5 — Page 12 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 (41) GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Curb weight plus gross load. (42) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rated): The maximum total weight as determined by the vehicle manufacturer, at which the vehicle can be safely and reliably operated for its intended purpose. (43) High Pressure: Those portions of the CNG fuel system that sees full container or cylinder pressure. (44) High Voltage (HV): Greater than 50 V (AC and DC). (45) Hose: Flexible line. (46) Hybrid: A vehicle that uses two or more distinct power sources to propel the vehicle. (47) Hybrid System Controller (HSC): Regulates energy flow throughout hybrid system components in order to provide motive performance and accessory loads, as applicable, while maintaining critical system parameters (voltages, currents, temperatures, etc.) within specified operating ranges. (48) Hybrid Drive System (HDS): The mechanical and/or electromechanical components, including the engine, traction motors and energy storage system, which comprise the traction drive portion of the hybrid propulsion system. (49) Intermediate Pressure: The portion of a CNG system after the first pressure regulator, but before the engine pressure regulator. Intermediate pressure on a CNG vehicle is generally from 3.5 to 0.5 MPa (510 to 70 psi). (50) Inverter: A module that converts DC to and from AC. (51) Labeled: Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol or other identifying mark of an organization, which is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, which maintains periodic inspection of production labeled equipment or materials, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner. (52) Leakage: Release of contents through a Defect or a crack. See Rupture. (53) Line: All tubes, flexible and hard, that carry fluids. (54) Liner: Inner gas-tight container or gas container to which the overwrap is applied. (55) Local Regulations: Regulations below the state level. (56) Low -Floor Coach: A coach that, between at least the front (entrance) and rear (exit) doors, has a floor sufficiently low and level so as to remove the need for steps in the aisle between the doors and in the vicinity of these doors. (57) Low Voltage (LV): 50 V or less (AC and DC). Section 5 — Page 13 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 (58) Lower Explosive Limit: The lowest concentration of gas where, given an ignition source, combustion is possible. (59) Maximum Service Temperature: The maximum temperature to which a container/cylinder will be subjected in normal service. (60) Metallic Hose: A hose whose strength depends primarily on the strength of its metallic parts; it can have metallic liners or covers, or both. (61) Metering Valve: A valve intended to control the rate of flow of natural gas. (62) Module: An assembly of individual components (63) Motor (Electric): A device that converts electrical energy into mechanical energy. (64) Motor (Traction): An electric motor used to power the driving wheels of the coach. (65) Operating Pressure: The varying pressure developed in a container during service. (66) Physical Layer: The first layer of the seven -layer International Standards Organization (ISO) Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) reference model. This provides the mechanical, electrical, functional and procedural characteristics required to gain access to the transmission medium (e.g., cable) and is responsible for transporting binary information between computerized systems. (67) Pipe: Nonflexible line. (68) Pressure Relief Device (PRD):A pressure and/or temperature activated device used to vent the container/cylinder contents and thereby prevent rupture of an NGV fuel container/cylinder, when subjected to a standard fire test as required by fuel container/cylinder standards. (69) NOTE: Since this is a pressure -activated device, it may not protect against rupture of the container when the application of heat weakens the container to the point where its rupture pressure is less than the rated burst pressure of the relief device, particularly if the container is partially full. (70) Power: Work or energy divided by time (71) Power Density: Power divided by mass, volume or area. (72) Propulsion System: System that provides propulsion for the vehicle proportional to operator commands. Includes, as applicable, engine, transmission, traction motors, the hybrid drive system, (HDS), energy storage system (ESS), and system controllers including all wiring and converter/inverter. (73) Real -Time Clock (RTC): Computer clock that keeps track of the current time. Section 5 — Page 14 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 (74) Regenerative Braking: Deceleration of the coach by switching motors to act as generators, which return vehicle kinetic energy to the energy storage system. (75) Rejectable Damage: In terms of NGV fuel containers/cylinders, this is damage as outlined in CGA C-6.4, "Methods for External Visual Inspection of Natural Gas Vehicle Fuel Containers and Their Installations," and in agreement with the manufacturer's recommendations. (76) Retarder: Device used to augment or replace some of the functions of primary friction based braking systems of the coach. (77) Rupture: Sudden and unstable damage propagation in the structural components of the container resulting in a loss of contents. See Leakage. (78) Seated Load: 150 lbs for every designed passenger seating position and for the driver. (79) SLW (Seated Load Weight): Curb weight plus seated load. (80) Serial Data Signals. A current loop based representation of ASCII or alphanumeric data used for transferring information between devices by transmitting a sequence of individual bits in a prearranged order of significance. (81) NOTE: An example is the communication that takes place between two or more electronic components with the ability to process and store information. (82) Service Pressure: The settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 21 °C (70 °F) and full gas content. It is the pressure for which the equipment has been constructed, under normal conditions. Also referred to as the nominal service pressure or working pressure. (83) Settled Pressure: The gas pressure when a given settled temperature, usually 21 °C (70 °F), is reached. (84) Settled Temperature: The uniform gas temperature after any change in temperature caused by filling has dissipated. (85) Solid State Alternator: A module that converts high-voltage DC to low -voltage DC (typically 12/24 V systems). (86) Sources of Ignition: Devices or equipment that because of their modes of use or operation, are capable of providing sufficient thermal energy to ignite flammable compressed natural gas -air mixtures when introduced into such a mixture, or when such a mixture comes into contact with them. (87) Special Tools: Tools not normally stocked by the Agency. (88) Specification: A particular or detailed statement, account or listing of the various elements, materials, dimensions, etc. involved in the manufacturing and construction of a product. (89) Standard: A firm guideline from a consensus group. Standards referenced in "Section 6: Technical Specifications" are the latest revisions unless otherwise stated. Section 5 — Page 15 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 (90) Standee Line: A line marked across the coach aisle to designate the forward area that passengers may not occupy when the coach is moving. (91) State of Charge (SOC): Quantity of electric energy remaining in the battery relative to the maximum rated amp -hour (Ah) capacity of the battery expressed in a percentage. This is a dynamic measurement used for the energy storage system. A full SOC indicates that the energy storage system cannot accept further charging from the engine -driven generator or the regenerative braking system. (92) Stress Loops: The "pigtails" commonly used to absorb flexing in piping. (93) Structure: The basic body, including floor deck material and installation, load-bearing external panels, structural components, axle mounting provisions and suspension beams and attachment points. (94) Thermally Activated Gas Relief Device: A relief device that is activated by high temperatures and generally contains a fusible material. (95) NOTE: Since this is a thermally activated device, it does not protect against over -pressure from improper charging practices. (96) Wheelchair: A mobility aid belonging to any class of three- or four -wheeled devices, usable indoors, designed for and used by individuals with mobility impairments, whether operated manually or powered. A "common wheelchair" is such a device that does not exceed 30 in. in width and 48 in. in length measured 2 in. above the ground, and does not weigh more than 600 lbs when occupied. TS -3 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS The documents or portions thereof referenced within this specification shall be considered part of the requirements of the specification. The edition indicated for each referenced document is the current edition, as of the date of the APTA issuance of this specification. TS -4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. These shall include but not be limited to ADA, as well as state and local accessibility, safety and security requirements. Local regulations are defined as those below the state level. Coaches shall meet all applicable FMVSS regulations and shall accommodate all applicable FMCSR regulations in effect at the location of the Agency and the date of manufacture. In the event of any conflict between the requirements of these specifications and any applicable legal requirement, the legal requirement shall prevail. Technical requirements that exceed the legal requirements are not considered to conflict. Section 5 — Page 16 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -5 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall ensure that the application and installation of major coach subcomponents and systems are compliant with all such subcomponent vendors' requirements and recommendations. Contractor and Agency shall identify subcomponent vendors that shall submit installation/application approval documents with the completion of the first CNG and Diesel coach. Components used in the vehicle shall be of heavy-duty design and proven in transit service. TS -5.1 WEIGHT It shall be a design goal to construct each coach as light in weight as possible without degradation of safety, appearance, comfort, traction or performance. Coaches at a capacity load shall not exceed the tire factor limits, brake test criteria or structural design criteria. TS -5.2 CAPACITY The vehicle shall be designed to carry the gross vehicle weight, which shall not exceed the coach GVWR. TS -5.3 SERVICE LIFE The minimum useful design life of the coach in transit service shall be at least twelve (12) years or 500,000 miles. It shall be capable of operating at least 40,000 miles per year, including the 12th year. TS -5.4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Scheduled maintenance tasks shall be related and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended preventative maintenance schedule (along with routine daily service performed during the fueling operations). Test ports, as required, shall be provided for commonly checked functions on the coach, such as air intake, exhaust, hydraulic, pneumatic, charge -air and engine cooling systems. The coach manufacturer shall give prime consideration to the routine problems of maintaining the vehicle. All coach components and systems, both mechanical and electrical, which will require periodic physical work or inspection processes shall be installed so that a minimum of time is consumed in gaining access to the critical repair areas. It shall not be necessary to disassemble portions of the coach structure and/or equipment such as seats and flooring under seats in order to gain access to these areas. Each coach shall be designed to facilitate the disassembly, reassembly, servicing or maintenance, using tools and equipment that are normally available as standard commercial items. Requirements for the use of unique specialized tools will be minimized. The body and structure of the coach shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair. Individual panels or other equipment that may be damaged in normal service shall be repairable or replaceable. Ease of repair shall be related to the vulnerability of the item to damage in service. Section 5 — Page 17 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 Contractor shall provide a list of all special tools and pricing required for maintaining this equipment. Said list shall be submitted as a supplement to the Pricing Schedule. NOTE: Tools such as compartment door keys, bellows gauges and other tools that are required for daily maintenance and inspections shall not be included in the special tool list and shall be furnished for each coach. TS -5.5 INTERCHANGEABILITY Unless otherwise agreed, all units and components procured under this Contract, whether provided by Suppliers or manufactured by the Contractor, shall be duplicates in design, manufacture and installation to ensure interchangeability among coaches in each order group in this procurement. This interchangeability shall extend to the individual components as well as to their locations in the coaches. These components shall include, but are not limited to, passenger window hardware, interior trim, lamps, lamp lenses and seat assemblies. Components with non -identical functions shall not be, or appear to be, interchangeable. Any one component or unit used in the construction of these coaches shall be an exact duplicate in design, manufacture and assembly for each coach in each order group in this Contract. Contractor shall identify and secure approval for any changes in components or unit construction provided within a Contract. In the event that the Contractor is unable to comply with the interchangeability requirement, the Contractor must notify the Agency and obtain the Agency's prior written approval, including any changes in pricing. Agency shall review proposed product changes on a case-by-case basis and shall have the right to require extended warranties to ensure that product changes perform at least as well as the originally supplied products. TS -5.6 TRAINING Shall be provided by the proposer at the rate of 40 hours of instruction for each transit agency. Each agency will specify their individual needs with regard to training topics or subjects. Trainers will be available to train at each agencies perspective site at mutually agreed upon dates and times. The specified training must be completed within the 12 month period following the delivery of the first unit at each agency and may be started up to 90 days prior to the first delivery upon mutual agreement. The Contractor also shall provide visual and other teaching aids (such as manuals, slide presentations and literature) for use by the Agency's own training staff, which becomes the property of the Agency. TS -5.6.1 TECHNICAL/SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES The Contractor shall, at its own expense, have one or more competent technical service representatives available on request to assist the Agency in the solution of engineering or design problems within the scope of the specifications that may arise during the warranty period. This does not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities under the provisions of "Section 7: Warranty Requirements." Section 5 — Page 18 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -5.7 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT The Coach shall achieve normal operation in ambient temperature ranges of 10 IF to 115 IF, at relative humidity between 5 percent and 100 percent, and at altitudes up to 3000 ft above sea level. Degradation of performance due to atmospheric conditions shall be minimized at temperatures below 10 °F, above 115 °F or at altitudes above 3000 ft. Altitude requirements above 3000 ft will need separate discussions with the engine manufacturer to ensure that performance requirements are not compromised. Speed, gradability and acceleration performance requirements shall be met at, or corrected to, 77 °F, 29.31 in. Hg, dry air per SAE J1995. TS -5.8 NOISE TS -5.8.1 INTERIOR NOISE The combination of inner and outer panels and any material used between them shall provide sufficient sound insulation so that a sound source with a level of 80 dBA measured at the outside skin of the coach shall have a sound level of 65 dBA or less at any point inside the coach. These conditions shall prevail with all openings, including doors and windows, closed and with the engine and accessories switched off. The coach -generated noise level experienced by a passenger at any seat location in the coach shall not exceed 80 dBA. The driver area shall not experience a noise level of more than 75 dBA. Measurements of interior noise levels shall be taken in accordance with ISO 3381. An exception shall be made for the turntable area, which shall be considered a separate environment. TS -5.8.2 EXTERIOR NOISE Airborne noise generated by the coach and measured from either side shall not exceed 80 dBA under full power acceleration when operated at 0 to 35 mph at curb weight. The maximum noise level generated by the coach pulling away from a stop at full power shall not exceed 83 dBA. The coach - generated noise at curb idle shall not exceed 65 dBA. If the noise contains an audible discrete frequency, a penalty of 5 dBA shall be added to the sound level measured. The Contractor shall comply with the exterior noise requirements defined in local laws and ordinances identified by the Agency and SAE J366. TS -5.9 FIRE SAFETY The coach shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with all applicable fire safety and smoke emission regulations. These provisions shall include the use of fire-retardant/low-smoke materials, fire detection systems, bulkheads and facilitation of passenger evacuation. TS -5.9.1 MATERIALS All materials used in the construction of the passenger compartment of the coach shall be in accordance with the Recommended Fire Safety Practices defined in FMVSS 302. Section 5 — Page 19 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -5.10 FIRE SUPPRESSION The coach shall have a fire suppression system installed per manufacturer's recommendations. TS -5.11 RESPECT FOR THE ENVIRONMENT In the design and manufacture of the coach, the Contractor shall make every effort to reduce the amount of potentially hazardous waste. In accordance with Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, the Contractor shall use, whenever possible and allowed by the specifications, recycled materials in the manufacture of the coach. TS -6 PHYSICAL SIZE With exceptions such as exterior mirrors, marker and signal lights, bumpers, fender skirts, washers, wipers, ad frames, cameras, object detection systems, bicycle racks, feelers and rub rails, the coach shall be close to the following overall dimensions as shown in Figure 1 at static conditions and design height. Contractor to provide drawings with dimensions of proposed coach. FIGURE 1 Transit Coach Exterior Dimensions OVERWM Section 5 — Page 20 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -6.1 COACH LENGTH For ease of use, the following tolerances will be allowable for each given coach length. Coach length is determined as the measurement from bumper to bumper. 45 R coach: 45 to 47 R TS -6.2 COACH WIDTH 102 in. Width Coach Body. Width shall be 102 in. (+0, -1 in.). TS -6.3 COACH HEIGHT Maximum Overall Height: Maximum overall height shall be 140 in., including all rigid, roof -mounted items such as A/C, exhaust, fuel system and cover, etc. TS -6.4.1 STEP HEIGHT The step height shall not exceed 16.5 in. at doorway without kneeling and shall not exceed 15.5 in. at the step. TS -6.5 UNDERBODY CLEARANCE The coach shall maintain the minimum clearance dimensions as defined and shown in Figure 2 of SAE Standard J689, regardless of load up to the gross vehicle weight rating. TS -6.6 RAMP CLEARANCES The approach angle is the angle measured between a line tangent to the front tire static loaded radius arc and the initial point of structural interference forward of the front tire to the ground. The departure angle is the angle measured between a line tangent to the rear tire static loaded radius arc and the initial point of structural interference rearward of the rear tire to the ground. Section 5— Page 21 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013 G Rev 4 Dated 2913 The breakover angle is the angle measured between two lines tangent to the front and rear tire static loaded radius and intersecting at a point on the underside of the vehicle that defines the largest ramp over which the vehicle can roll. TABLE 2 Default Breakover Angle Angle 45 ft Coach WHEEL WHEEL Approach 8.6 deg (min.) Front break over 8 deg (min.) P Departure 8.6 deg (min.) TS -6.7 GROUND CLEARANCE Ground clearance shall be no less than 9 in., (8 in. at jacking pad) except within the axle zone and wheel area. Axle zone clearance, which is the projected area between tires and wheels on the same axial centerline, shall be no less than 5.4 in. Wheel area clearance shall be no less than 8 in. for parts fixed to the coach body and 6 in. for parts that move vertically with the axles. — FIGURE 2 Transit Coach Minimum Road Clearance 18" Section 5 — Page 22 24" VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 WHEEL WHEEL AREA AREA P :AXLj/AXLE ZONE 4 45' 45' 45' 45' 18" Section 5 — Page 22 24" VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 REAR �-- i WHEEL BASE�I FRONT N DEPARTURE ANGLE TS -6.8 FLOOR HEIGHT BREAKOVERJ APPROACH ANGLE ANGLE Height of the step above the street shall be no more than 16 in. measured at the centerline of the doorway. All floor measurements shall be with the coach at the design running height and on a level surface and with the standard installed tires. TS -6.9 INTERIOR HEADROOM Headroom above the aisle and at the centerline of the aisle seats shall be no less than 78 in. in the forward half of the coach tapering to no less than 74 in. forward of the rear settee. At the centerline of the window seats, headroom shall be no lower than 65 in., except for parcel racks and reading lights, if specified. Headroom at the back of the rear bench seat may be reduced to a minimum of 56 in., but it shall increase to the ceiling height at the front of the seat cushion. In any area of the coach directly over the head of a seated passenger and positioned where a passenger entering or leaving the seat is prone to strike his or her head, padding shall be provided on the overhead paneling. VEHICLE PERFORMANCE TS -7 POWER REQUIREMENTS The propulsion system shall be sized to provide sufficient power to enable the coach to meet the defined acceleration, top speed and gradability requirements, and operate all propulsion -driven accessories using actual road test results and computerized vehicle performance data. Proposer to provide horse power and torques specifications along with transmission and axle gear ratios. TS 7.1 TOP SPEED The coach shall be capable of achieving a top speed of 70 mph on a straight, level road at GVWR with all accessories operating. The coach shall be capable of safely maintaining the vehicle speed according to the recommendations by the tire manufacturer. NOTE: Values are assumed to be sustained. Manufacturer shall supply Agency with data if there is a variance between peak performance and sustained vehicle performance. Section 5 — Page 23 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 7.2 GRADABILITY Gradability requirements shall be met on grades with a dry commercial asphalt or concrete pavement at GVWR with all accessories operating. The propulsion system shall enable the coach to achieve and maintain a speed of 40 mph on a 2% percent ascending grade and 15 mph on a 10 percent ascending grade continuous. NOTE: Values are assumed to be sustained. Manufacturer shall supply Agency with data if there is a variance between peak performance and sustained vehicle performance. TS 7.2.1 ACCELERATION TS 7.2.2 NON -HYBRID The acceleration shall meet the requirements in Table 3 below and shall be sufficiently gradual and smooth to prevent throwing standing passengers off-balance. Acceleration measurement shall commence when the accelerator is depressed. TABLE 3 Maximum Start Acceleration Times on a Level Surface' Speed (mph) Maximum time (seconds) 10 5 20 10 30 18 40 30 50 60 Top speed 1. Vehicle weight = GVWR The Contractor shall provide performance scans to the Agency based on the Agency's specific drivetrain configuration. TS 7.3 OPERATING RANGE The operating range of the coach shall be designed to meet the operating profile as stated in the "Design Operating Profile" section. The diesel coach shall have a minimum operating range of 400 miles on a full tank of fuel. Section 5 — Page 24 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 7.3.2 CNG The operating range of the CNG coach shall be at least 400 miles with an initial gas -settled pressure of 3600 psi at 70 °F. TS -8 FUEL ECONOMY (DESIGN OPERATING PROFILE) Test results from the FTA ABD Cycle economy tests or other applicable test procedures shall be provided to the Agency. Results shall include vehicle configuration and test environment information. Fuel economy data shall be provided for each design operating profile. The design operating profile is assumed to be defined by the FTA ABD Cycle. Fuel economy tests shall be run on these four duty cycles - Manhattan: 6.8 mph - Orange County: 12.7 mph - UDDS: 19 mph - Idle time POWERPLANT TS -9 ENGINE The engine shall comply with applicable local, state and/or federal emissions and useful life requirements. The engine shall have a design life of not less than 300,000 miles without replacement or major service. The lifetime estimate is based on the design operating profile. NOTE: For CNG engines a minimum rating horsepower of 320 and minimum torque rating of 1000 ft. - lbs. shall be installed and a higher horsepower and torque rating is preferred if available. For Diesel engines a minimum rating horsepower of 400 and minimum torque rating of 1400 ft.-Ibs. shall be installed. The engine shall be equipped with an electronically controlled management system, compatible with either 12 or 24 V power distribution. The engine control system shall be capable of transmitting and receiving electronic inputs and data from other drivetrain components and broadcasting that data to other vehicle systems. Communication between electronic drivetrain components and other vehicle systems shall be made using the communications networks. The engine's electronic management system shall monitor operating conditions and provide instantaneous adjustments to optimize both engine and coach performance. The system shall be programmable to allow optimization of programmable features. The engine starting system shall be protected by an interlock that prevents its engagement when the engine is running. Special equipment or procedures may be employed to start the coach when exposed Section 5 — Page 25 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 to temperatures less than 30 °F for a minimum of four hours without the engine in operation. All cold weather starting aids, engine heating devices and procedures shall be of the type recommended by the engine manufacturer and approved by the Agency. The integration of all systems on the vehicle relative to engine idle speed shall be the responsibility of the vehicle manufacturer to meet the requirements of the transit property. The engine control system shall protect the engine against progressive damage. The system shall monitor conditions critical for safe operation and automatically derate power and/or speed and initiate engine shutdown as needed. Automatic Engine Protection/Shutdown Override Feature: A control shall be available to the operator/driver that when constantly depressed and released will delay the engine shutdown or allow the coach to be moved. Override action shall be recorded. This data shall be retrievable by the Agency. TS 9.1 ENGINE (CNG) The engine shall meet all regulatory requirements when operating on fuel equal to CARB Specifications for Compressed Natural Gas #2292.5. The four predominant characteristics that must be met are methane, ethane, butane and propane. TS -10 COOLING SYSTEMS The cooling systems shall be of sufficient size to maintain all engine and transmission fluids and engine intake air at safe, continuous operating temperatures during the most severe operations possible and in accordance with engine and transmission manufacturers' cooling system requirements. The cooling system fan controls should sense the temperatures of the operating fluids and the intake air, and if either is above safe operating conditions, the cooling fan should be engaged. The fan control system shall be designed with a fail-safe mode of "fan on." The cooling system shall meet the requirements stated in the operating environment. TS 10.1 ENGINE COOLING A means of determining satisfactory engine coolant level shall be provided. A spring-loaded, push- button type valve or lever shall be provided to safely release pressure or vacuum in the cooling system with both it and the water filler no more than ±60 in. above the ground. Both shall be accessible through the same access door. The cooling fan shall be temperature controlled, allowing the engine to reach operating temperature quickly. TS 10.1.1 COOLANT The engine cooling system shall be equipped with a properly sized water filter with a spin -on element and an automatic system for releasing supplemental coolant additives as needed to replenish and maintain protection properties. When replacing the water filter, only the water in the filter will be lost. Section 5 — Page 26 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 10.1.2 DRIVE DESIGN The coach shall be equipped with an electric fan drive coach cooling system. A screen guard must be installed on electric motor fans per SAE J1308. TS 10.1.3 MOUNTING Mounting location of radiator and charge air cooler shall be the Contractor's standard design. TS 10.2 TRANSMISSION COOLING The transmission shall be cooled by a dedicated heat exchanger sized to maintain operating fluid within the transmission manufacturer's recommended parameters of flow, pressure and temperature. The transmission cooling system shall be matched to the retarder and engine cooling systems to ensure that all operating fluids remain within recommended temperature limits established by each component manufacturer. The engine cooling system should provide coolant bypass flow to the transmission cooling system with the engine thermostats closed. Unless otherwise noted, the transmission cooler is to be the first component to see cold water from the radiator outlet. In addition, all return water piping, aside from the thermostat bypass line, is to be plumbed in after the transmission cooler. TS -11 TRANSMISSION (CONVENTIONAL POWERTRAIN) The transmission shall be multiple speed, automatic shift with torque converter, retarder and electronic controls. Gross input power, gross input torque and rated input speed shall be compatible with the engine. The transmission shall be designed to operate for not less than 300,000 miles on the design operating profile without replacement or major service. The transmission should be easily removable without disturbing the engine and accessible for service. The electronic controls shall be capable of transmitting and receiving electronic inputs and data from other drivetrain components and of broadcasting that data to other vehicle systems. Communication between electronic drivetrain components and other vehicle systems shall be made using the communications networks. Electronic controls shall be compatible with either 12 or 24 V power distribution, provide consistent shift quality, and compensate for changing conditions, such as variations in vehicle weight and engine power. At a minimum, drivetrain components consisting of the engine, transmission, retarder, ASR, and anti-lock braking systems shall be powered by a dedicated and isolated ignition supply voltage to ensure data communication among components exists when the vehicle ignition is switched to the "on" position. A nominal brake pedal application of 15 to 20 psi shall be required by the driver to engage forward or reverse range from the neutral position to prevent sudden acceleration of the coach from a parked position. The electronically controlled transmission shall have on -board diagnostic capabilities, be able to monitor functions, store and time -stamp out -of -parameter conditions in memory, and communicate faults and vital conditions to service personnel. The transmission shall contain built-in protection software to guard Section 5 — Page 27 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 against severe damage. The on -board diagnostic system shall trigger a visual alarm to the driver when the electronic control unit detects a malfunction. An electronic transmission fluid level monitoring and protection system shall be provided TS -12 RETARDER (CNG) The powertrain shall be equipped with a retarder designed to extend brake lining service life. The application of the retarder shall cause a smooth blending of both retarder and service brake function and shall not activate the brake lights Actuation of ABS and/or automatic traction control (ATC) shall override the operation of the brake retarder. The retarder shall be adjustable within the limits of the powertrain and activated when the brake pedal is depressed. The Agency will work with the OEM/drive system manufacturer to determine retarder performance settings. The retarder disable switch shall be accessible to the seated driver TS -13 ENGINE BRAKE (DIESEL) The powertrain shall be equipped with an engine brake designed to extend brake lining service life. The application of the engine brake shall cause a smooth blending of both engine brake and service brake function and shall not activate the brake lights The retarder disable switch shall be accessible to the seated driver. TS -14 MOUNTING All powerplant mounting shall be mechanically isolated to minimize transfer of vibration to the body structure and provide a minimum clearance of 0.75 in. Mounts shall control the movement of the powerplant so as not to affect performance of belt -driven accessories or cause strain in piping and wiring connections to the powerplant. TS 14.1 SERVICE The propulsion system shall be arranged for ease of access and maintenance. The Contractor shall list all special tools, fixtures or facility requirements recommended for servicing. The muffler, exhaust system, air cleaner, air compressor, starter, alternator, radiator, all accessories and any other component requiring service or replacement shall be easily removable and independent of the engine and transmission removal. An engine oil pressure gauge and coolant temperature gauge shall be provided in the engine compartment. These gauges shall be easily read during service and mounted in an area where they shall not be damaged during minor or major repairs. An air cleaner with a dry filter element and a graduated air filter restriction indicator shall be provided. The location of the air intake system shall be designed to minimize the entry of dust and debris and to Section 5 — Page 28 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 maximize the life of the air filter. The engine air duct shall be designed to minimize the entry of water into the air intake system. Drainage provisions shall be included to allow any water/moisture to drain prior to entry into the air filter. All fluid fill locations shall be properly labeled to help ensure that correct fluid is added. All fillers shall be easily accessible with standard funnels, pour spouts and automatic dispensing equipment TS -15 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS Hydraulic system service tasks shall be minimized and scheduled no more frequently than those of other major coach systems. All elements of the hydraulic system shall be easily accessible for service or unit replacement. Critical points in the hydraulic system shall be fitted with service ports so that portable diagnostic equipment may be connected or sensors for an off -board diagnostic system permanently attached to monitor system operation when applicable. A tamper -proof priority system shall prevent the loss of power steering during operation of the coach if other devices are also powered by the hydraulic system. The hydraulic system shall operate within the allowable temperature range as specified by the lubricant manufacturer. TS 15.1 FLUID LINES All lines shall be rigidly supported to prevent chafing damage, Fatigue Failures, degradation and tension strain. Lines should be sufficiently flexible to minimize mechanical loads on the components. Lines passing through a panel, frame or bulkhead shall be protected by grommets (or similar devices) that fit snugly to both the line and the perimeter of the hole that the line passes through to prevent chafing and wear. Pipes and fluid hoses shall not be bundled with or used to support electrical wire harnesses. Lines shall be as short as practicable and shall be routed or shielded so that failure of a line shall not allow the contents to spray or drain onto any component operable above the auto -ignition temperature of the fluid. All hoses, pipes, lines and fittings shall be specified and installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. TS 15.2 FITTINGS AND CLAMPS All clamps shall maintain a constant tension at all times, expanding and contracting with the line in response to temperature changes and aging of the line material. The lines shall be designed for use in the environment where they are installed (for example, high-temperature resistant in the engine compartment, resistant to road salts near the road surface, and so on). Compression fittings shall be standardized to prevent the intermixing of components. Compression fitting components from more than one manufacturer shall not be mixed, even if the components are known to be interchangeable. Section 5 — Page 29 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 15.3 CHARGE AIR PIPING Charge air piping and fittings shall be designed to minimize air restrictions and leaks. Piping shall be as short as possible, and the number of bends shall be minimized. Bend radii shall be maximized to meet the pressure drop and temperature rise requirements of the engine manufacturer. The cross section of all charge air piping shall not be less than the cross section of the intake manifold inlet. Any changes in pipe diameter shall be gradual to ensure a smooth passage of air and to minimize restrictions. Piping shall be routed away from heat sources as practicable and shielded as required to meet the temperature rise requirements of the engine manufacturer. Charge air piping shall be constructed of stainless steel, aluminized steel, anodized aluminum or painted steel rated at minimum 1000 hours of salt spray according to ASTM B117, except between the air filter and turbocharger inlet, where piping may be constructed of flexible heat -resistant material. Connections between all charge air piping sections shall be sealed with a short section of reinforced hose and secured with stainless steel constant tension clamps that provide a complete 360 deg seal. TS -16 RADIATOR Radiator piping shall be stainless steel, brass tubing or painted steel rated at 1000 hours of salt spray according to ASTM B117 and where practicable, hoses shall be eliminated, including biodiesel. Necessary hoses shall be impervious to all coach fluids. All hoses shall be secured with stainless steel clamps that provide a complete 360 deg seal. The clamps shall maintain a constant tension at all times, expanding and contracting with the hose in response to temperature changes and aging of the hose material. TS -17 OIL AND HYDRAULIC LINES Oil and hydraulic lines shall be compatible with the substances they carry. The lines shall be designed and intended for use in the environment where they are installed (for example, high-temperature resistant in the engine compartment, resistant to road salts near the road surface and so on). Lines within the engine compartment shall be composed of steel tubing where practicable, except in locations where flexible lines are required. Hydraulic lines of the same size and with the same fittings as those on other piping systems of the coach, but not interchangeable, shall be tagged or marked for use on the hydraulic system only. TS -18 FUEL TS 18.1 FUEL LINES Fuel lines shall be securely mounted, braced and supported as designed by the coach manufacturer to minimize vibration and chafing and shall be protected against damage, corrosion or breakage due to strain or wear. Section 5 — Page 30 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 Manifolds connecting fuel containers shall be designed and fabricated to minimize vibration and shall be installed in protected locations to prevent line or manifold damage from unsecured objects or road debris. Fuel hose and hose connections, where permitted, shall be made from materials resistant to corrosion and fuel and protected from fretting and high heat. Fuel hoses shall be accessible for ease of serviceability. TS 18.1.1 FUEL LINES, DIESEL Fuel lines shall be capable of carrying the type of fuel the engine manufacturer recommends. TS 18.1.2 FUEL LINES, CNG Fuel lines shall comply with NFPA-52. All tubing shall be a minimum of seamless Type 304 stainless steel (ASTM A269 or equivalent). Fuel lines and fittings shall not be fabricated from cast iron, galvanized pipe, aluminum, plastic or copper alloy with content exceeding 70 percent copper. Pipe fittings and hoses shall be clear and free from cuttings, burrs or scale. Pipe thread joining material that is impervious to CNG shall be utilized as required. Fuel lines shall be identifiable as fuel lines only. High-pressure CNG lines shall be pressure tested to a minimum of 125 percent of system working pressure prior to fueling. CNG, nitrogen or clean, dry air shall be used to pressure -test the lines/assembly. The coach manufacturer shall have a documented procedure for testing the high- pressure line assembly. Fuel lines shall be securely mounted, braced and supported using "split -block" type or stainless steel P clamps; all mounting clamps shall be mounted to a rigid structure to minimize vibration and shall be protected against damage, corrosion or breakage due to strain, rubbing or wear. "Floating clamps" (not mounted to a rigid structure) shall not be permitted. Fuel lines shall not be used to secure other components (wires, air lines, etc.). Manifolds connecting fuel containers shall be designed and fabricated to minimize vibration and shall be installed in protected location(s) to prevent line or manifold damage from unsecured objects or road debris. Fuel hose connections, where permitted, shall be less than 48 in. in length, made from materials resistant to corrosion and action of natural gas, and protected from fretting and high heat and shall be supported approximately every 12 in. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Section 5 — Page 31 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 18.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TS 18.2.1 DIESEL FUEL TANK(S) The fuel tank(s) shall be securely mounted to the coach to prevent movement during coach maneuvers and be the standard design of the coach manufacturer. Contractor to supply specifics on proposed fuel tanks. The fuel tank(s) shall be equipped with an external, hex head, drain plug. It shall be at least a % in. size and shall be located at the lowest point of the tank(s). The fuel tank(s) shall have an inspection plate or easily removable filler neck to permit cleaning and inspection of the tank(s) without removal from the coach. The tank(s) shall be baffled internally to prevent fuel -sloshing regardless of fill level. The baffles or fuel pickup location shall assure continuous full power operation on a 6 percent upgrade for 15 minutes starting with no more than 25 gal of fuel over the unusable amount in the tank(s).The coach shall operate at idle on a 6 percent downgrade for 30 minutes starting with no more than 10 gal of fuel over the unusable amount in the tank(s). The materials used in mounting shall withstand the adverse effects of road salts, fuel oils and accumulation of ice and snow for the life of the coach. Labeling The capacity, date of manufacture, manufacturer name, location of manufacture, and certification of compliance to federal motor carrier safety regulations shall be permanently marked on the fuel tank(s).The markings shall be readily visible and shall not be covered with an undercoating material. Fuel Filler The fuel filler shall be located 7 to 32 ft behind the centerline of the front door on the curbside of the coach. The filler cap shall be retained to prevent loss and shall be recessed into the body so that spilled fuel will not run onto the outside surface of the coach. The fuel lines forward of the engine bulkhead shall be in conformance to SAE Standards. TS 18.2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION, CNG Fuel Containers/Cylinders CNG fuel containers/cylinders must be designed, constructed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the following: • NFPA 52 -Standard for Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Vehicular Fuel Systems • FMVSS 304 • Any local standard(s) specifically intended for CNG fuel containers The design and construction of the fuel system supplied by the OEM shall comply with federal, state, and local regulations. Section 5 — Page 32 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 Installation Fuel cylinders shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/IAS NGV2 - 1998, 'Basic Requirements for Compressed Natural Gas Vehicles (NGV) Fuel Containers" and NFPA 52, "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Vehicular Fuel Systems Code," 1998 edition, Section 303. Fuel cylinders, attached valves, pressure relief devices, and mounting brackets should be installed and protected so that their operation is not affected by coach washers and environmental agents such as rain, snow, ice or mud. These components should be protected from significant damage caused by road debris or collision. The roof and area above the engine mounted tanks shall be contained within a skeletal structure resembling a roll cage and contained within an enclosure. The enclosure shall incorporate a hinged clamshell type access. The access panels shall be designed to offer protection from weather and to be sacrificial as a means of providing an escape path to atmosphere upon rapid enclosure pressure rise. The latching method shall utilize quick -release captive hardware that can be demonstrated to last the life of the coach. Additional shielding shall be provided surrounding end fittings and valves as needed. Shields shall be attached to the coach structure hinged in a manner that permits one mechanic to unlatch and swing the shield open for routine inspections. As practical, electrical components shall not be located within the roof enclosure, and if unavoidable, they shall be intrinsically safe. CNG fueled coaches shall be equipped with an active automatic gas detection system, which shall annunciate unsafe levels of methane. The automatic gas detection system shall be integrated with an onboard fire suppression system. Labeling CNG fuel systems shall be labeled in accordance with NFPA 52, "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Vehicular Fuel Systems Code," 1998 edition and all current federal, state, and local regulations. Pressure Relief Devices (PRDs) PRDs must be designed, constructed, manufactured and tested in accordance with ANIS/IAS PRD1 1998, "Pressure Relief Devices for Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) Fuel Containers' and ANSI/IAS NGV2- 1998, 'Basic Requirements for Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) Fuel Containers." All natural gas fuel system piping, including the PRD vent line, shall be stainless steel. All PRDs must be vented to outside. Valves Valves must be installed in accordance with ANIS/IAS NGV2 - 1998, "Basic Requirements for Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) Fuel Containers" and NFPA 52, "Standard for Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Vehicular Fuel Systems." Fuel Filler Section 5 — Page 33 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 The fuel filler shall be located on the curb side 7 to 38 ft. to the rear of the passenger door opening. The filler cap shall be retained to prevent loss and shall be recessed into the body. The fill and vent receptacles shall be located within an enclosure on the right side of the coach. The access door shall be sized to allow full viewing of gauges, ease of hookups and maneuver of fuel nozzle. The fuel fill receptacle and vent receptacle attachment shall be robust and capable of routine fueling connects/disconnects without deflection or metal fatigue, and capable of withstanding mechanical loads induced by a fueling drive -away incident without attachment failure. Fueling System The CNG fueling port receptacle shall be an ANSI/AGA NGV1 or NGV2 certified receptacle as designated by the Agency. The coach shall be capable of being fueled by a nozzle determined by the Agency. The fueling port receptacle location shall be such that connection by fueling personnel can be performed without physical strain or interference. A dust cap shall be permanently "tethered" to the fueling port receptacle. The fueling port receptacle access door shall be equipped with an interlock sensor that disables the engine starting system and/or fuel system so when the access door is open the engine will not start or run, to prevent drive-aways. The interlock shall be of the type such that if the sensor fails. the coach will not start. Fueling site characteristics such as pressure, flow rate and temperature shall be provided by the Agency if requested. Defueling System The CNG defueling port shall be an NGV-3.1/CGA-12.3 certified receptacle. The CNG defueling port shall be located on the curbside of the coach, in a location that is compatible with the Agency's defueling station operation. The defueling system shall incorporate the following characteristics: • Dust cap permanently "tethered" to the defueling port. • Device(s) to prevent inadvertent defueling. Specifications to be provided by Agency. • Components compatible with Agency's defueling operation. • The piping and fittings onboard the coach shall be sized to allow the fueling station to meet the following operating parameters: TS -19 EMISSIONS AND EXHAUST TS 19.1 EXHAUST EMISSIONS The engine and related systems shall meet all applicable emission and engine design guidelines and standards. Section 5 — Page 34 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 19.2 EXHAUST SYSTEM The exhaust pipe shall be of sufficient height to prevent exhaust gases and waste heat from discoloring or causing heat deformation to the coach. The entire exhaust system shall be adequately shielded to prevent heat damage to any coach component, including the exhaust after -treatment compartment area. The exhaust outlet shall be designed to minimize rain, snow or water generated from high-pressure washing systems from entering into the exhaust pipe and causing damage to the after -treatment. Exhaust gases and waste heat shall be discharged from the roadside rear corner of the roof or rear bumper. TS 19.3 EXHAUST AFTER -TREATMENT An exhaust after -treatment system will be provided to ensure compliance to all applicable EPA regulations in effect if required. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Injection If required by the engine manufacturer to meet NOx level requirements specified by EPA, a DEF injection system will be provided. The DEF system will minimally include a tank, an injector, a pump, an ECM and a selective catalytic converter. The tanks shall be designed to store DEF in the operating environment described in the "Operating Environment' section. TS 19.4 PARTICULATE AFTER -TREATMENT (DIESEL) If required by the engine manufacturer to meet particulate level requirements specified by EPA, a particulate trap will be provided. The particulate trap shall regenerate itself automatically if it senses clogging. Regeneration cycles and conditions will be defined by the engine manufacturer. STRUCTURE TS -20 GENERAL TS 20.1 DESIGN The structure of the coach shall be designed to withstand the commuter road service conditions typical of an over the road coach duty cycle throughout its service life. The vehicle structural frame shall be designed to operate with minimal maintenance throughout the 12 -year design operating profile. The design operating profile specified by the Agency shall be considered for this purpose. TS -21 ALTOONA TESTING Prior to acceptance of first coach, the vehicle must have completed any FTA -required Altoona testing. Any items that required repeated repairs or replacement must undergo the corrective action with Section 5 — Page 35 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 supporting test and analysis. A report clearly describing and explaining the failures and corrective actions taken to ensure that any and all such failures will not occur shall be submitted to the Agency. If available, the Altoona Test Report shall be provided to the Agency with the Proposal submittal. If not available, then the report shall be provided prior to first acceptance of coach. TS 21.1 STRUCTURAL VALIDATION The structure of the coach shall have undergone appropriate structural testing and/or analysis. At minimum, appropriate structural testing and analysis shall include Altoona testing or finite element analysis (FEA). TS -22 DISTORTION The coach, loaded to GWVR and under static conditions, shall not exhibit deflection or deformation that impairs the operation of the steering mechanism, doors, windows, passenger escape mechanisms or service doors. Static conditions shall include the vehicle at rest with any one wheel or dual set of wheels on a 6 in. curb or in a 6 in. deep hole. r&VAGA0:91•1LlrilLl[ywilLl1.1TJ1:]: lA9Eel LlI All structure, body and panel -bending mode frequencies, including vertical, lateral and torsional modes, shall be sufficiently removed from all primary excitation frequencies to minimize audible, visible or sensible resonant vibrations during normal service. TS 23.1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT BULKHEADS The passenger and engine compartment shall be separated by fire-resistant bulkheads. The engine compartment shall include areas where the engine and exhaust system are housed. This bulkhead shall preclude or retard propagation of an engine compartment fire into the passenger compartment and shall be in accordance with the Recommended Fire Safety Practices defined in FTA Docket 90A, dated October 20, 1993. Only necessary openings shall be allowed in the bulkhead, and these shall be fire- resistant. Any passageways for the climate control system air shall be separated from the engine compartment by fire-resistant material. Piping through the bulkhead shall have fire-resistant fittings sealed at the bulkhead. Wiring may pass through the bulkhead only if connectors or other means are provided to prevent or retard fire propagation through the bulkhead. Engine access panels in the bulkhead shall be fabricated of fire-resistant material and secured with fire-resistant fasteners. These panels, their fasteners and the bulkhead shall be constructed and reinforced to minimize warping of the panels during a fire that will compromise the integrity of the bulkhead. TS 23.2 CRASHWORTHINESS The coach body and roof structure shall withstand a static load equal to 150 percent of the curb weight evenly distributed on the roof with no more than a 6 in. reduction in any interior dimension. Windows shall remain in place and shall not open under such a load. These requirements must be met without the roof -mounted equipment installed. Section 5 — Page 36 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 The coach shall withstand a 25 mph impact by a 4000 Ib automobile at any side, excluding doorways, along either side of the coach and the articulated joint, if applicable, with no more than 3 in. of permanent structural deformation at seated passenger hip height. This impact shall not result in sharp edges or protrusions in the coach interior. Exterior panels below 35 in. from ground level shall withstand a static load of 2000 lbs applied perpendicular to the coach by a pad no larger than 5 sq in. This load shall not result in deformation that prevents installation of new exterior panels to restore the original appearance of the coach. II &IPz MGM N:Z•1y Eel Ll The coach flooring, sides, roof, understructure and axle suspension components shall be designed to resist corrosion or deterioration from atmospheric conditions and de-icing materials for a period of 12 years or 500,000 miles, whichever comes first. It shall maintain structural integrity and nearly maintain original appearance throughout its service life, with the Agency's use of proper cleaning and neutralizing agents. All materials that are not inherently corrosion resistant shall be protected with corrosion -resistant coatings. All joints and connections of dissimilar metals shall be corrosion resistant and shall be protected from galvanic corrosion. Representative samples of all materials and connections shall withstand a two-week (336 -hour) salt spray test in accordance with ASTM Procedure B-117 with no structural detrimental effects to normally visible surfaces and no weight loss of over 1 percent. TS -25 TOWING Each towing device shall withstand, without permanent deformation, tension loads up to 1.2 times the curb weight of the coach within 20 deg of the longitudinal axis of the coach. If applicable, the rear towing device(s) shall not provide a toehold for unauthorized riders. The method of attaching the towing device shall not require the removal, or disconnection, of front suspension or steering components. Removal of the bike rack is permitted for attachment of towing devices. Shop air connectors shall be provided at the front and rear of the coach and shall be capable of supplying all pneumatic systems of the coach with externally sourced compressed air. The location of these shop air connectors shall facilitate towing operations. Two rear recovery devices/tie downs shall permit lifting and towing of the coach for a short distance, such as in cases of an emergency, to allow access to provisions for front towing of coach. The method of attaching the tow bar or adapter shall require the specific approval of the Agency. Any tow bar or adapter exceeding 50 lbs should have means to maneuver or allow for ease of use and application. Each towing device shall accommodate a crane hook with a 1 in. throat. TS -26 JACKING It shall be possible to safely jack up the coach, at curb weight, with a common 10 -ton floor jack with or without special adapter, when a tire or dual set is completely flat and the coach is on a level, hard surface, without crawling under any portion of the coach. Jacking from a single point shall permit raising Section 5 — Page 37 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 the coach sufficiently high to remove and reinstall a wheel and tire assembly. Jacking pads located on the axle or suspension near the wheels shall permit easy and safe jacking with the flat tire or dual set on a 6 in. high run-up block not wider than a single tire. The coach shall withstand such jacking at any one or any combination of wheel locations without permanent deformation or damage. Jacking pads shall be painted safety yellow and jacking points shall have decals applied identifying their location. TS -27 HOISTING The coach axles or jacking plates shall accommodate the lifting pads of a three -post hoist system. Jacking plates, if used as hoisting pads, shall be designed to prevent the coach from falling off the hoist. Other pads or the coach structure shall support the coach on jack stands independent of the hoist. The vehicle shall be capable of lifting by the wheels, and, as necessary to meet tire load requirements, the proper number for wheel lifts and/or adapters must be used. III &*Q:1a11010]V TS 28.1 DESIGN The floor shall be essentially a continuous plane, except at the wheel housings and platforms. Where the floor meets the walls of the coach, as well as other vertical surfaces such as platform risers, the surface edges shall be blended with a circular section of radius not less than Ya in. or installed in a fully sealed butt joint. Similarly, a molding or cover shall prevent debris accumulation between the floor and wheel housings. The vehicle floor in the area of the entrance and exit doors shall have a lateral slope not exceeding 2 deg to allow for drainage. The aisle of the coach shall be a sloped floor design and shall not exceed 5.5 deg off the horizontal or include one step not to exceed entrance door step heights. The floor shall be a continuous plane over the wheel housings. Where the floor meets the walls of the coach, as well as other vertical surfaces such as platform risers, the surface edges shall be blended with a circular section of radius not less than Ya in. or installed in a fully sealed butt joint. TS 28.2 CONSTRUCTION The floor shall consist of the subfloor and the floor covering that will last the life of the coach. The floor as assembled, including the sealer, attachments and covering, shall be waterproof, non -hygroscopic and resistant to mold growth. The subfloor shall be resistant to the effects of moisture, including decay (dry rot). It shall be impervious to wood -destroying insects such as termites. The floor deck may not be integral with the basic structure but shall be mounted on the structure securely to prevent chafing or horizontal movement. Sheet metal screws shall not be used to retain the floor. All floor fasteners shall be secured and protected from corrosion for the service life of the coach. The floor deck shall be reinforced as needed to support passenger loads. At GVWR, the floor shall have an elastic defection of no more than 0.375 in. (10 mm) from the normal plane. The floor shall withstand the application of 3.0 times gross load weight without permanent detrimental deformation. Section 5 — Page 38 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -29 PLATFORMS TS 29.1 DRIVER'S AREA The covering of platform surfaces and risers, except where otherwise indicated, shall be the same material as specified for floor covering. Trim shall be provided along top edges of platforms unless integral nosing is provided. Specific trim required to be specified by each individual Agency. TS 29.2 FAREBOX Farebox placement should minimize impact to passenger access and minimize interference with the driver's line of sight. If the driver's platform is higher than 12 in., then the farebox is to be mounted on a platform of suitable height to provide accessibility for the driver without compromising passengers' access. TS -30 WHEEL HOUSING TS 30.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Sufficient clearance and air circulation shall be provided around the tires, wheels and brakes to preclude overheating when the coach is operating on the design operating profile. Wheel housings shall be constructed of corrosion -resistant and fire-resistant material. Wheel housings, as installed and trimmed, shall withstand impacts of a 2 in. steel ball with at least 200 ft -lbs of energy without penetration. CHASSIS TS -31 SUSPENSION TS 31.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The front, rear and mid (if articulated) suspensions shall be pneumatic type. The basic suspension system shall last the service life of the coach without major overhaul or replacement. Adjustment points shall be minimized and shall not be subject to a loss of adjustment in service. Routine adjustments shall be easily accomplished by limiting the removal or disconnecting the components. TS 31.2 ALIGNMENT All axles should be properly aligned so the vehicle tracks accurately within the size and geometry of the vehicle. Section 5 — Page 39 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 31.3 SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS TS 31.3.1 SUSPENSION TRAVEL The suspension system shall permit a minimum wheel travel of 2.75 in. jounce -upward travel of a wheel when the coach hits a bump (higher than street surface), and 2.75 in. rebound -downward travel when the coach comes off a bump and the wheels fall relative to the body. Elastomeric bumpers shall be provided at the limit of jounce travel. Rebound travel may be limited by elastomeric bumpers or hydraulically within the shock absorbers. Suspensions shall incorporate appropriate devices for automatic height control so that regardless of load the coach height relative to the centerline of the wheels does not change more than % in. at any point from the height required. The safe operation of a coach cannot be impacted by ride height up to 1 in. from design normal ride height. TS 31.3.2 DAMPING Vertical damping of the suspension system shall be accomplished by hydraulic shock absorbers mounted to the suspension arms or axles and attached to an appropriate location on the chassis. Damping shall be sufficient to control coach motion to three cycles or less after hitting road perturbations. The shock absorber coaching shall be made of elastomeric material that will last the life of the shock absorber. The damper shall incorporate a secondary hydraulic rebound stop. TS 31.3.3 LUBRICATION All elements of steering, suspension and drive systems requiring scheduled lubrication shall be provided with grease fittings conforming to SAE Standard J534. These fittings shall be located for ease of inspection and shall be accessible with a standard grease gun from a pit or with the coach on a hoist. Each element requiring lubrication shall have its own grease fitting with a relief path. The lubricant specified shall be standard for all elements on the coach serviced by standard fittings and shall be required no less than every 6000 miles. TS 31.3.4 KNEELING A kneeling system shall lower the entrance(s) of the coach a minimum of 2 in. during loading or unloading operations regardless of load up to GVWR, measured at the longitudinal centerline of the entrance door(s) by the driver. The kneeling control shall provide the following functions: • Downward control must be held to allow downward kneeling movement. • Release of the control during downward movement must completely stop the lowering motion and hold the height of the coach at that position. • Upward control actuation must allow the coach to return to normal floor height without the driver having to hold the control. The brake and throttle interlock shall prevent movement when the coach is kneeled. The kneeling control shall be disabled when the coach is in motion. The coach shall kneel at a maximum rate of 1.25 in. per second at essentially a constant rate. After kneeling, the coach shall rise within 4 seconds to a Section 5 — Page 40 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 height permitting the coach to resume service and shall rise to the correct operating height within 7 seconds regardless of load up to GVWR. During the lowering and raising operation, the maximum vertical acceleration shall not exceed 0.2 g, and the jerk shall not exceed 0.3 g/second. An indicator visible to the driver shall be illuminated until the coach is raised to a height adequate for safe street travel. An audible warning alarm will sound simultaneously with the operation of the kneeler to alert passengers and bystanders. A warning light mounted near the curbside of the front door, a minimum 2.5 in. diameter amber lens, shall be provided that will blink when the kneel feature is activated. Kneeling shall not be operational while the wheelchair ramp is deployed or in operation. Ill &OSM&TIT]:I:1:1IyeU IIII 1I:1*9 TS 32.1 WHEELS All wheels shall be interchangeable and shall be removable without a puller. Wheels shall be compatible with tires in size and load -carrying capacity. Front wheels and tires shall be balanced as an assembly per SAE J1986. Wheels quoted shall be brushed aluminum and an option price quoted for agencies that require polished aluminum wheels. Tire -pressure monitoring systems should be quoted as an option. TS 32.2 TIRES Tires shall be suitable for the conditions of transit service and sustained operation at the maximum speed capability of the coach. Load on any tire at GVWR shall not exceed the tire supplier's rating. Sufficient space shall be provided to allow the Agency to carry a spare tire, if required. TS -33 STEERING Hydraulically assisted steering shall be provided. The steering gear shall be an integral type with the number and length of flexible lines minimized or eliminated. Engine -driven hydraulic pump shall be provided for power steering. TS 33.1 STEERING AND TAG AXLES The front and tag axles shall be solid beam, non -driving with a load rating sufficient for the coach loaded to GVWR and shall be equipped with unitized grease type wheel bearings and seals. All friction points on the front axle shall be equipped with replaceable bushings or inserts and, if needed, lubrication fittings easily accessible from a pit or hoist. The steering geometry of the outside (front lock) wheel shall be within 2 deg of true Ackerman up to 50 percent lock measured at the inside (back lock) wheel. The steering geometry shall be within 3 degrees of true Ackerman for the remaining 100 percent lock measured at the inside (back lock) wheel. Section 5 — Page 41 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 33.2 STEERING WHEEL TS 33.2.1 TURNING EFFORT Steering effort shall be measured with the coach at GVWR, stopped with the brakes released and the engine at normal idling speed on clean, dry, level, commercial asphalt pavement and the tires inflated to recommended pressure. Under these conditions, the torque required to turn the steering wheel 10 deg shall be no less than 5 ft - lbs and no more than 10 ft -lbs. Steering torque may increase to 70 ft -lbs when the wheels are approaching the steering stops, as the relief valve activates. Power steering failure shall not result in loss of steering control. With the coach in operation, the steering effort shall not exceed 55 lbs at the steering wheel rim, and perceived free play in the steering system shall not materially increase as a result of power assist failure. Gearing shall require no more than seven turns of the steering wheel lock -to -lock. Caster angle shall be selected to provide a tendency for the return of the front wheels to the straight position with minimal assistance from the driver. TS 33.2.2 STEERING WHEEL, GENERAL The steering wheel diameter shall be approximately 18 to 20 in.; the rim diameter shall be % to 1 ^/4 in. and shaped for firm grip with comfort for long periods of time. Steering wheel spokes and wheel thickness shall ensure visibility of the dashboard so that vital instrumentation is clearly visible at center neutral position (within the range of a 95th -percentile male, as described in SAE 1050a, Sections 4.2.2 and 4.2.3). Placement of steering column must be as far forward as possible, but either in line with or behind the instrument cluster. TS 33.2.3 STEERING COLUMN TILT The steering column shall have full tilt capability with an adjustment range of no less than 40 deg from the vertical and easily adjustable by the driver and shall be accessible by a 5th percentile female and 95th percentile male. TS 33.2.4 STEERING WHEEL TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT The steering wheel shall have full telescoping capability and have a minimum telescopic range of 2 in. and a minimum low-end adjustment of 29 in., measured from the top of the steering wheel rim in the horizontal position to the cab floor at the heel point. Section 5 — Page 42 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TABLE 4 Steering Wheel Height' Relative to Angle of Slope At Minimum Telescopic Height Adjustment — At Maximum Telescopic Height Adjustment (5 (29 in.) in.) Angle of Slope — Height — Angle of Slope Height 0 deg 29 in. 0 deg 34 in. 15 deg 26.2 in. 15 deg 31.2 in. 25 deg 24.6 in. 25 deg 29.6 in. 35 deg 22.5 in. 35 deg 27.5 in. — 1. Measured from bottom portion closest to driver. 11&SL0QNkTJ:Fe1:/4:4 The coach shall be driven by a heavy-duty axle with a load rating sufficient for the coach loaded to GVWR. The drive axle shall have a design life to operate for not less than 300,000 miles on the design operating profile without replacement or major repairs. The lubricant drain plug shall be magnetic type. If a planetary gear design is employed, the oil level in the planetary gears shall be easily checked through the plug or sight gauge. The axle and driveshaft components shall be rated for both propulsion and retardation modes with respect to duty cycle. NOTE: The retardation duty cycle can be more aggressive than propulsion. The drive shaft shall be guarded to prevent hitting any critical systems, including brake lines, coach floor or the ground, in the event of a tube or universal joint failure. TS 34.1 NON -DRIVE AXLE The non -drive axle is the drive axle without the drive gear with a load rating sufficient for the load to GVWR. TS -35 TAG AXLES (COMMUTER COACH) A tag axle shall be located behind the drive axle. The tag axle shall be a solid beam type with steering capability. The tag axle shall have single tires the same size as the tires on the front and drive axles. Tag axle weight shall not exceed 14,000 lbs. With full passenger seating capacity, load on any axle shall Section 5 — Page 43 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 not exceed 22,400 lbs. Combined load capacity weight on the drive and tag axles shall not exceed 36,500 lbs. A tag axle unloading feature will allow full or partial unloading, or dumping of air from the tag axle air spring bellows. This feature enables weight to shift to the drive axle for more traction. Manual unloading valves are located inside the RH rear curbside service door. TS -36 TURNING RADIUS TABLE 5 Maximum Turning Radius Coach Length Maximum Turning Radius Agency Requirement (approximate) (see Figure 3) 45 ft 49 ft (TRO) FIGURE 3 Turning Radius Section 5 — Page 44 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -37 BRAKES TS 37.1 SERVICE BRAKE Brakes shall be self-adjusting. Brake wear indicators (visible brake sensors) shall be provided on exposed push rods. Visible stroke indicators may be combined with electronic brake monitoring system and vehicle brake warning system to notify driver and maintenance of unsafe brake conditions. TS 37.2 ACTUATION Service brakes shall be controlled and actuated by a compressed air system. Force to activate the brake pedal control shall be an essentially linear function of the coach deceleration rate and shall not exceed 75 lbs at a point 7 in. above the heel point of the pedal to achieve maximum braking. The heel point is the location of the driver's heel when his or her foot is rested flat on the pedal and the heel is touching the floor or heel pad of the pedal. The ECU for the ABS system shall be protected, yet in an accessible location to allow for ease of service. The total braking effort shall be distributed among all wheels in such a ratio as to ensure equal friction material wear rate at all wheel locations. Manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance by providing a copy of a thermodynamic brake balance test upon request. TS 37.3 FRICTION MATERIAL The brake linings shall be made of non -asbestos material. In order to aid maintenance personnel in determining extent of wear, a provision such as a scribe line or a chamfer indicating the thickness at which replacement becomes necessary shall be provided on each brake lining. The complete brake lining wear indicator shall be clearly visible from the hoist or pit without removing backing plates. TS 37.4 HUBS AND DISCS Replaceable wheel bearing seals shall run on replaceable wear surfaces or be of an integral wear surface sealed design. Wheel bearing and hub seals and unitized hub assemblies shall not leak or weep lubricant when operating on the design operating profile for the duration of the initial manufacturer's warranty. The coach shall be equipped with disc brakes on all axles, and the brake discs shall allow machining of each side of the disc to obtain smooth surfaces per manufacturer's specifications. TS 37.5 PARKING/EMERGENCY BRAKE The parking brake shall be a spring -operated system, actuated by a valve that exhausts compressed air to apply the brakes. The parking brake may be manually enabled when the air pressure is at the operating level per FMVSS 121. Section 5 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -38 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM TS 38.1 GENERAL The coach air system shall operate the air -powered accessories and the braking system with reserve capacity. New coaches shall not leak down more than 5 psi over a 15 -minute period of time as indicated on the dash gauge. Provision shall be made to apply shop air to the coach air systems. A quick disconnect fitting shall be easily accessible and located in the engine compartment and near the front bumper area for towing. Retained caps shall be installed to protect fitting against dirt and moisture when not in use. Air for the compressor shall be filtered. The air system shall be protected per FMVSS 121. TS 38.2 AIR COMPRESSOR An engine -driven air compressor shall be sized to charge the air system from 40 psi to the governor cut- off pressure in less than 4 minutes while not exceeding the fast idle speed setting of the engine. An electrically driven air compressor shall be sized to charge the air system from 40 psi to the governor cut-off pressure in less than 4 minutes while not exceeding the fast idle speed setting of the engine. TS 38.3 AIR LINES AND FITTINGS Air lines, except necessary flexible lines, shall conform to the installation and material requirements of SAE Standard J1149 for copper tubing with standard, brass, flared or ball sleeve fittings, or SAE Standard J844 for nylon tubing if not subject to temperatures over 200 °F. The air on the delivery side of the compressor where it enters nylon housing shall not be above the maximum limits as stated in SAE J844. Nylon tubing shall be installed in accordance with the following color -coding standards: • Green: Indicates primary brakes and supply. • Red: Indicates secondary brakes. • Brown: Indicates parking brake. • Yellow: Indicates compressor governor signal. • Black: Indicates accessories. Line supports shall prevent movement, flexing, tension, strain and vibration. Copper lines shall be supported to prevent the lines from touching one another or any component of the coach. To the extent practicable and before installation, the lines shall be pre-bent on a fixture that prevents tube flattening or excessive local strain. Copper lines shall be bent only once at any point, including pre -bending and installation. Rigid lines shall be supported at no more than 5 ft intervals. Nylon lines may be grouped and shall be supported at 30 in. intervals or less. The compressor discharge line between powerplant and body -mounted equipment shall be flexible convoluted copper or stainless steel line, or may be flexible Teflon hose with a braided stainless steel Section 5 — Page 46 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 jacket. Other lines necessary to maintain system reliability shall be flexible Teflon hose with a braided stainless steel jacket. End fittings shall be standard SAE or JIC brass or steel, flanged, swivel -type fittings. Flexible hoses shall be as short as practicable and individually supported. They shall not touch one another or any part of the coach except for the supporting grommets. Flexible lines shall be supported at 2 ft intervals or less. Air lines shall be clean before installation and shall be installed to minimize air leaks. All air lines shall be routed to prevent water traps to the extent possible. Grommets or insulated clamps shall protect the air lines at all points where they pass through understructure components. TS 38.4 AIR RESERVOIRS All air reservoirs shall meet the requirements of FMVSS Standard 121 and SAE Standard J10 and shall be equipped with drain plugs and guarded or flush type drain valves. Major structural members shall protect these valves and any automatic moisture ejector valves from road hazards. Reservoirs shall be sloped toward the drain valve. All air reservoirs shall have drain valves that discharge below floor level with lines routed to eliminate the possibility of water traps and/or freezing in the drain line. TS 38.5 AIR SYSTEM DRYER An air dryer shall prevent accumulation of moisture and oil in the air system. The air dryer system shall include one or more replaceable desiccant cartridges. ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC AND DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS TS -39 OVERVIEW The electrical system will consist of vehicle battery systems and components that generate, distribute and store power throughout the vehicle. (e.g., generator, voltage regulator, wiring, relays and connectors). Electronic devices are individual systems and components that process and store data, integrate electronic information or perform other specific functions. The data communication system consists of the bi-directional communications networks that electronic devices use to share data with other electronic devices and systems. Communication networks are essential to integrating electronic functions, both on board the vehicle and off. Information level systems that require vehicle information for their operations or provide information shall adhere to J1939 data standard. Data communications systems are divided into three levels to reflect the use of multiple data networks: • Powertrain level: Components related to the powertrain, including the propulsion system components (engine, transmission and hybrid units) and anti-lock braking system (ABS), which may include traction control. At a minimum, powertrain components consisting of the engine, Section 5 — Page 47 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 transmission, retarder, ASR and anti-lock braking systems shall be powered by a dedicated and isolated ignition supply voltage to ensure data communication between components exists when the vehicle ignition is switched to the "on" position. • Information level: Components whose primary function is the collection, control or display of data that is not necessary to the safe drivability of the vehicle (i.e., the vehicle will continue to operate when those functions are inoperable). These components typically consist of those required for automatic vehicle location (AVL) systems, destination signs, fareboxes, passenger counters, radio systems, automated voice and signage systems, video surveillance and similar components. • Multiplex level: Electrical or electronic devices controlled through input/output signals such as discrete, analog and serial data information (i.e., on/off switch inputs, relay or relay control outputs). Multiplexing is used to control components not typically found on the drivetrain or information levels, such as lights; wheelchair lifts; doors; heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems (if applicable); and gateway devices. FIGURE 4 Data Communications Systems Levels FARE VEHICLE COLLECTION LOCATION HEADSIGN PASSENGER COUNTING . 1 Information naTau level ------------------r---------------------------------------------------- RADIO/VEH ------- - - - _ LOGIC NIT TURN SIGNAL SWITCH `-- Multiplex level -- naTAl//y/r ----=--=-----=--------- ------------ on" EM -------------------- BRAKE ------_-- PEDAL ---- nary LDI Drivetrain level TS 39.1 MODULAR DESIGN TRANSMISSION I ENGINE Design of the electrical, electronic and data communication systems shall be modular so that each electronic device, apparatus panel, or wiring bundle is easily separable from its interconnect by means of connectors. Powerplant wiring shall be an independent wiring harness. Replacement of the engine compartment wiring harness(es) shall not require pulling wires through any bulkhead or removing any terminals from the wires. TS -40 ENVIRONMENTAL AND MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS The electrical system and its electronic components shall be capable of operating in the area of the vehicle in which they will be installed, as recommended in SAE J1455. Section 5 — Page 48 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Electrical and electronic equipment shall not be located in an environment that will reduce the performance or shorten the life of the component or electrical system when operating within the design operating profile. As a recommendation, no vehicle component shall generate, or be affected by, electromagnetic interference or radio-frequency interference (EMI/RFI) that can disturb the performance of electrical/electronic equipment as defined in SAE J1113 and UNECE Council Directive 95/54 (R10). The Agency shall follow recommendations from coach manufacturers and subsystem suppliers regarding methods to prevent damage from voltage spikes generated from welding, jump starts, shorts, etc. TS 40.1 HARDWARE MOUNTING The mounting of the hardware shall not be used to provide the sole source ground, and all hardware shall be isolated from potential EMI/RFI, as referenced in SAE J1113. All electrical/electronic hardware mounted in the interior of the vehicle shall be inaccessible to passengers and hidden from view unless intended to be viewed. The hardware shall be mounted in such a manner as to protect it from splash or spray. All electrical/electronic hardware mounted on the exterior of the vehicle that is not designed to be installed in an exposed environment shall be mounted in a sealed enclosure. All electrical/electronic hardware and its mounting shall comply with the shock and vibration requirements of SAE J1455. TS -41 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS TS 41.1 BATTERIES TS 41.1.1 LOW -VOLTAGE BATTERIES (24 V) Manufacturers should quote their standard battery package insuring that the battery compartment must be well -ventilated to prevent hydrogen buildup while protecting the compartment from road spray, water intrusion and de-icing chemicals. Each agency shall have the option of the following: 1. Four Group 31 Series deep -cycling maintenance -free battery units shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 700 cold -cranking amps. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120days from the date of release for shipment to the Agency. 2. Two 8D battery units conforming to SAE Standard J537 shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 1150 cold cranking amps. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120 days from the date of release, and shall be fully maintained prior to shipment to the Agency. 3. Two 8D maintenance -free batteries. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120 days from date of release, and shall be fully maintained prior to shipment to the Agency. 4. Four Group 31 Series deep -cycling sealed non spillable maintenance free absorbed glass mat (AGM) batteries shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 1000 cold cranking Section 5 — Page 49 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 amps (CCA) at 0 °F. The batteries shall be designed and installed to withstand the operating environment. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than one year from the date of release for shipment to the Agency. TS 41.1.2 BATTERY CABLES The battery terminal ends and cable ends shall be color -coded with red for the primary positive, black for negative and another color for any intermediate voltage cables. Positive and negative battery cables shall not cross each other if at all possible, shall be flexible and shall be sufficiently long to reach the batteries with the tray in the extended position without stretching or pulling on any connection and shall not lie directly on top of the batteries. Except as interrupted by the master battery switch, battery and starter wiring shall be continuous cables with connections secured by bolted terminals and shall conform to specification requirements of SAE Standard J1127—Type SGR, SGT, SGX or GXL and SAE Recommended Practice J541, with 2100 strand 4/0 cable or greater recommended. TS 41.1.3 JUMP START A jump-start connector, red for 24 V shall be provided in the engine compartment, equipped with dust cap and adequately protected from moisture, dirt and debris. TS 41.1.4 BATTERY COMPARTMENT The battery compartment shall prevent accumulation of snow, ice and debris on top of the batteries and shall be vented and self -draining. It shall be accessible only from the outside of the vehicle. All components within the battery compartment, and the compartment itself, shall be protected from damage or corrosion from the electrolyte. The inside surface of the battery compartment's access door shall be electrically insulated, as required, to prevent the battery terminals from shorting on the door if the door is damaged in an accident or if a battery comes loose. The battery compartment temperature should not exceed manufacturer's specification. The vehicle shall be equipped with a 12 V DC and 24 V DC quick disconnect switch(es). The battery compartment door shall conveniently accommodate operation of the 12 V DC and 24 V DC quick disconnect switch(es). The battery quick disconnect access door shall be identified with a decal. The decal size shall not be less than 3.5 X 5 in. (8.89 X 12.7 cm). The battery hold-down bracket shall be constructed of a nonconductive and corrosion -resistant material (plastic or fiberglass). This access door shall not require any special locking devices to gain access to the switch, and it shall be accessible without removing or lifting the panel. The door shall be flush -fitting and incorporate a spring tensioner or equal to retain the door in a closed position when not in use. The batteries shall be securely mounted on a stainless steel or equivalent tray that can accommodate the size and weight of the batteries. The battery tray, if applicable, shall pull out easily and properly Section 5 — Page 50 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 support the batteries while they are being serviced. The tray shall allow each battery cell to be easily serviced. A locking device shall retain the battery tray to the stowed position. If not located in the engine compartment, the same fire-resistant properties must apply to the battery compartment. No sparking devices should be located within the battery box. TS Design of the electrical, electronic and data communication systems shall be modular so that each electronic device, apparatus panel, or wiring bundle is easily separable from its interconnect by means of connectors. Powerplant wiring shall be an independent wiring harness. Replacement of the engine compartment wiring harness(es) shall not require pulling wires through any bulkhead or removing any terminals from the wires The mounting of the hardware shall not be used to provide the sole source ground, and all hardware shall be isolated from potential EMI/RFI, as referenced in SAE J1113. All electrical/electronic hardware mounted in the interior of the vehicle shall be inaccessible to passengers and hidden from view unless intended to be viewed. The hardware shall be mounted in such a manner as to protect it from splash or spray. All electrical/electronic hardware mounted on the exterior of the vehicle that is not designed to be installed in an exposed environment shall be mounted in a sealed enclosure. All electrical/electronic hardware and its mounting shall comply with the shock and vibration requirements of Manufacturers should quote their standard battery package insuring that the battery compartment must be well -ventilated to prevent hydrogen buildup while protecting the compartment from road spray, water intrusion and de-icing chemicals. Each agency shall have the option of the following: 5. Four Group 31 Series deep -cycling maintenance -free battery units shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 700 cold -cranking amps. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120days from the date of release for shipment to the Agency. 6. Two 8D battery units conforming to SAE Standard J537 shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 1150 cold cranking amps. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120 days from the date of release, and shall be fully maintained prior to shipment to the Agency. 7. Two 8D maintenance -free batteries. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120 days from date of release, and shall be fully maintained prior to shipment to the Agency. 8. Four Group 31 Series deep -cycling sealed non -spillable maintenance free absorbed glass mat (AGM) batteries shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 1000 cold cranking amps (CCA) at 0 °F. The batteries shall be designed and installed to withstand the operating environment. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than one year from the date of release Section 5 — Page 51 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 The battery terminal ends and cable ends shall be color -coded with red for the primary positive, black for negative and another color for any intermediate voltage cables. Positive and negative battery cables shall not cross each other if at all possible, shall be flexible and shall be sufficiently long to reach the batteries with the tray in the extended position without stretching or pulling on any connection and shall not lie directly on top of the batteries. Except as interrupted by the master battery switch, battery and starter wiring shall be continuous cables with connections secured by bolted terminals and shall conform to specification requirements of SAE Standard J1127—Type SGR, SGT, SGX or GXL and SAE Recommended Practice A jump-start connector, red for 24 V shall be provided in the engine compartment, equipped with dust cap and TS 41.1.5 AUXILIARY ELECTRONIC POWER SUPPLY If required, gel -pack, or any form of sealed (non -venting) batteries used for auxiliary power are allowed to be mounted on the interior of the vehicle if they are contained in an enclosed, non -airtight compartment and accessible only to maintenance personnel. This compartment shall contain a warning label prohibiting the use of lead -acid batteries. The battery compartment shall prevent accumulation of snow, ice and debris on top of the batteries and shall be vented and self -draining. It shall be accessible only from the outside of the vehicle. All components within the battery compartment, and the compartment itself, shall be protected from damage or corrosion from the electrolyte. The inside surface of the battery compartment's access door shall be electrically insulated, as required, to prevent the battery terminals from shorting on the door if the door is damaged in an accident or if a battery comes loose. The battery compartment temperature should not exceed manufacturer's specification. The vehicle shall be equipped with a 12 V DC and 24 V DC quick disconnect switch(es). The battery compartment door shall conveniently accommodate operation of the 12 V DC and 24 V DC quick disconnect switch(es). The battery quick disconnect access door shall be identified with a decal. The decal size shall not be less than 3.5 X 5 in. (8.89 X 12.7 cm). The battery hold-down bracket shall be constructed of a nonconductive and corrosion -resistant material (plastic or fiberglass). This access door shall not require any special locking devices to gain access to the switch, and it shall be accessible without removing or lifting the panel. The door shall be flush -fitting and incorporate a spring tensioner or equal to retain the door in a closed position when not in use. The batteries shall be securely mounted on a stainless steel or equivalent tray that can accommodate the size and weight of the batteries. The battery tray, if applicable, shall pull out easily and properly support the batteries while they are being serviced. The tray shall allow each battery cell to be easily serviced. A locking device shall retain the battery tray to the stowed position. Section 5 — Page 52 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 If not located in the engine compartment, the same fire-resistant properties must apply to the battery compartment TS 41.1.6 MASTER BATTERY SWITCH The location of the master battery switch shall be clearly identified on the exterior access panel, be accessible in less than 10 seconds for deactivation and prevent corrosion from fumes and battery acid when the batteries are washed off or are in normal service. Turning the master switch off with the powerplant operating, during an emergency, shall shut off the engine and shall not damage any component of the electrical system. The master switch shall be capable of carrying and interrupting the total circuit load. TS 41.1.7 LOW -VOLTAGE GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION The low -voltage generating system shall maintain the charge on fully charged batteries, except when the vehicle is at standard idle with a total low -voltage generator load exceeding 70 percent of the low - voltage generator nameplate rating. Voltage monitoring and over -voltage output protection (recommended at 32 V) shall be provided. Dedicated power and ground shall be provided as specified by the component or system manufacturer. Cabling to the equipment must be sized to supply the current requirements with no greater than a 5 percent volt drop across the length of the cable. TS 41.1.8 CIRCUIT PROTECTION All branch circuits, except battery -to -starting motor and battery-to-generator/alternator circuits, shall be protected by current -limiting devices such as circuit breakers, fuses or solid-state devices sized to the requirements of the circuit. Electronic circuit protection for the cranking motor shall be provided to prevent engaging of the motor for more than 30 seconds at a time to prevent overheating. The circuit breakers or fuses shall be easily accessible for authorized personnel. Fuses shall be used only where it can be demonstrated that circuit breakers are not practicable. This requirement applies to in-line fuses supplied by either the Contractor or a supplier. Fuse holders shall be constructed to be rugged and waterproof. All manual reset circuit breakers critical to the operation of the coach shall be mounted in a location convenient to the Agency mechanic with visible indication of open circuits. The Agency shall consider the application of automatic reset circuit breakers on a case-by-case basis. The Contractor shall show all in-line fuses in the final harness drawings. Any manually resettable circuit breakers shall provide a visible indication of open circuits. Any manually resettable circuit breakers shall provide a visible indication of open circuits. Circuit breakers or fuses shall be sized to a minimum of 15 percent larger than the total circuit load. The current rating for the wire used for each circuit must exceed the size of the circuit protection being used. Section 5 — Page 53 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 41.2 GROUNDS The battery shall be grounded to the vehicle chassis/frame at one location only, as close to the batteries as possible. When using a chassis ground system, the chassis shall be grounded to the frame in multiple locations, evenly distributed throughout the vehicle to eliminate ground loops. No more than five ground ring/spade terminal connections shall be made per ground stud with spacing between studs ensuring contactivity and serviceability. Electronic equipment requiring an isolated ground to the battery (i.e., electronic ground) shall not be grounded through the chassis. TS 41.3 LOW VOLTAGE/LOW CURRENT WIRING AND TERMINALS All power and ground wiring shall conform to specification requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J1127, J1128 and J1292. Double insulation shall be maintained as close to the junction box, electrical compartment or terminals as possible. The requirement for double insulation shall be met by wrapping the harness with plastic electrical tape or by sheathing all wires and harnesses with non-conductive, rigid or flexible conduit. Wiring shall be grouped, numbered and/or color -coded. Wiring harnesses shall not contain wires of different voltage classes unless all wires within the harness are insulated for the highest voltage present in the harness. Kinking, grounding at multiple points, stretching, and exceeding minimum bend radius shall be prevented. Strain -relief fittings shall be provided at all points where wiring enters electrical compartments. Grommets or other protective material shall be installed at points where wiring penetrates metal structures outside of electrical enclosures. Wiring supports shall be protective and non-conductive at areas of wire contact and shall not be damaged by heat, water, solvents or chafing. To the extent practicable, wiring shall not be located in environmentally exposed locations under the vehicle. Wiring and electrical equipment necessarily located under the vehicle shall be insulated from water, heat, corrosion and mechanical damage. Where feasible, front -to -rear electrical harnesses should be installed above the window line of the vehicle. All wiring harnesses over 5 ft long and containing at least five wires shall include 10 percent (minimum one wire) excess wires for spares. This requirement for spare wires does not apply to datalinks and communication cables. Wiring harness length shall allow end terminals to be replaced twice without pulling, stretching or replacing the wire. Terminals shall be crimped to the wiring according to the connector manufacturer's recommendations for techniques and tools. All cable connectors shall be locking type, keyed and sealed, unless enclosed in watertight cabinets or vehicle interior. Pins shall be removable, crimp contact type, of the correct size and rating for the wire being terminated. Unused pin positions shall be sealed with sealing plugs. Adjacent connectors shall use either different inserts or different insert orientations to prevent incorrect connections. Terminals shall be crimped, corrosion -resistant and full ring type or interlocking lugs with insulating ferrules. When using pressure type screw terminal strips, only stranded wire shall be used. Insulation clearance shall ensure that wires have a minimum of 'visible clearance" and a maximum of two times the conduct or diameter or 1/16 in., whichever is less. When using shielded or coaxial cable, upon Section 5 — Page 54 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 stripping of the insulation, the metallic braid shall be free from frayed strands that can penetrate the insulation of the inner wires. Ultra -sonic and T -splices may be used with 8 AWG or smaller wire. When a T -splice is used, it shall meet these additional requirements: • It shall include a mechanical clamp in addition to solder on the splice. • The wire shall support no mechanical load in the area of the splice. • The wire shall be supported to prevent flexing. All splicing shall be staggered in the harness so that no two splices are positioned in the same location within the harness. Wiring located in the engine compartment shall be routed away from high -heat sources or shielded and/or insulated from temperatures exceeding the wiring and connector operating requirements. The instrument panel and wiring shall be easily accessible for service from the driver's seat or top of the panel. The instrument panel shall be separately removable and replaceable without damaging the instrument panel or gauges. Wiring shall have sufficient length and be routed to permit service without stretching or chafing the wires. TS 41.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS All electrical components, including switches, relays, flashers and circuit breakers, shall be heavy-duty designs with either a successful history of application in heavy-duty vehicles or design specifications for an equivalent environment. All electric motors shall be heavy-duty brushless type where practical, and have a continuous duty rating of no less than 40,000 hours (except cranking motors, washer pumps, auxiliary heater pumps, defroster and wiper motors). All electric motors shall be easily accessible for servicing. TS 41.5 ELECTRICAL COMPARTMENTS All relays, controllers, flashers, circuit breakers and other electrical components shall be mounted in easily accessible electrical compartments. All compartments exposed to the outside environment shall be corrosion -resistant and sealed. The components and their functions in each electrical compartment shall be identified and their location permanently recorded on a drawing attached to the inside of the access panel or door. The drawing shall be protected from oil, grease, fuel and abrasion. The front compartment shall be completely serviceable from the driver's seat, vestibule or from the outside. 'Rear start and run" controls shall be mounted in an accessible location in the engine compartment and shall be protected from the environment. Section 5 — Page 55 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -42 GENERAL ELECTRONIC REQUIREMENTS If an electronic component has an internal real-time clock, it shall provide its own battery backup to monitor time when battery power is disconnected, and/or it may be updated by a network component. If an electronic component has an hour meter, it shall record accumulated service time without relying on battery backup. All electronic component suppliers shall ensure that their equipment is self -protecting in the event of shorts in the cabling, and also in over -voltage (over 32 V DC on a 24 V DC nominal voltage rating with a maximum of 50 V DC) and reverse polarity conditions. If an electronic component is required to interface with other components, it shall not require external pull-up and/or pull-down resistors. Where this is not possible, the use of a pull-up or pull-down resistor shall be limited as much as possible and easily accessible and labeled. TS 42.1 WIRING AND TERMINALS Kinking, grounding at multiple points, stretching and reducing the bend radius below the manufacturer's recommended minimum shall not be permitted. TS 42.1.1 DISCRETE 1/0 (INPUTS/OUTPUTS) All wiring to 1/0 devices, either at the harness level or individual wires, shall be labeled, stamped or color -coded in a fashion that allows unique identification at a spacing not exceeding 4 in. Wiring for each 1/0 device shall be bundled together. If the 1/0 terminals are the same voltages, then jumpers may be used to connect the common nodes of each 1/0 terminal. TS 42.1.2 SHIELDING All wiring that requires shielding shall meet the following minimum requirements. A shield shall be generated by connecting to a ground, which is sourced from a power distribution coach bar or chassis. A shield shall be connected at one location only, typically at one end of the cable. However, certain standards or special requirements, such as SAE J1939 or RF applications, have separate shielding techniques that also shall be used as applicable. When using shielded or coaxial cable, upon stripping of the insulation, the metallic braid shall be free from frayed strands, which can penetrate the insulation of the inner wires. To prevent the introduction of noise, the shield shall not be connected to the common side of a logic circuit. TS 42.1.3 COMMUNICATIONS The data network cabling shall be selected and installed according to the selected protocol requirements. The physical layer of all network communication systems shall not be used for any purpose other than communication between the system components, unless provided for in the network specifications. Communications networks that use powerline carriers (e.g., data modulated on a 24 V powerline) shall meet the most stringent applicable wiring and terminal specifications. Section 5 — Page 56 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 42.1.4 RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) RF components, such as radios, video devices, cameras, global positioning systems (GPS), etc., shall use coaxial cable to carry the signal. All RF systems require special design consideration for losses along the cable. Connectors shall be minimized, since each connector and crimp has a loss that will attribute to attenuation of the signal. Cabling should allow for the removal of antennas or attached electronics without removing the installed cable between them. If this cannot be done, then a conduit of sufficient size shall be provided for ease of attachment of antenna and cable assembly. The corresponding component vendors shall be consulted for proper application of equipment, including installation of cables. TS 42.1.5 AUDIO Cabling used for microphone level and line level signals shall be 22 AWG minimum with shielded twisted pair. Cabling used for amplifier level signals shall be 18 AWG minimum. 11&M,ICA LVA 111J09lOWN 1Llcc] TS 43.1 GENERAL The primary purpose of the multiplexing system is control of components necessary to operate the vehicle. This is accomplished by processing information from input devices and controlling output devices through the use of an internal logic program. Versatility and future expansion shall be provided for by expandable system architecture. The multiplex system shall be capable of accepting new inputs and outputs through the addition of new modules and/or the utilization of existing spare inputs and outputs. All like components in the multiplex system shall be modular and interchangeable with self-diagnostic capabilities. The modules shall be easily accessible for troubleshooting electrical failures and performing system maintenance. Multiplex input/output modules shall use solid-state devices to provide extended service life and individual circuit protection. TS 43.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Multiplexing may either be distributed or centralized. A distributed system shall process information on multiple control modules within the network. A centralized system shall process the information on a single control module. Either system shall consist of several modules connected to form a control network. 43.2.1 1/0 SIGNALS The input/output for the multiplex system may contain four types of electrical signals: discrete, modulating, analog or serial data. Discrete signals shall reflect the on/off status of switches, levers, limit switches, lights, etc. Analog signals shall reflect numerical data as represented by a voltage signal (0-12 V, 10-24 V, etc.) or current signal (4-20 mA). Both types of analog signals shall represent the status of variable devices such as Section 5 — Page 57 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 rheostats, potentiometers, temperature probes, etc. Serial data signals shall reflect ASCII or alphanumeric data used in the communication between other on -board components. TS -44 DATA COMMUNICATIONS TS 44.1 GENERAL All data communication networks shall be either in accordance with a nationally recognized interface standard, such as those published by SAE, IEEE or ISO, or shall be published to the Agency with the following minimum information: • Protocol requirements for all timing issues (bit, byte, packet, inter -packet timing, idle line timing, etc.) packet sizes, error checking and transport (bulk transfer of data to/from the device). • Data definition requirements that ensure access to diagnostic information and performance characteristics. • The capability and procedures for uploading new application or configuration data. • Access to revision level of data, application software and firmware. • The capability and procedures for uploading new firmware or application software. • Evidence that applicable data shall be broadcast to the network in an efficient manner such that the overall network integrity is not compromised. Any electronic vehicle components used on a network shall be conformance tested to the corresponding network standard. TS 44.2 DRIVETRAIN LEVEL Drivetrain components, consisting of the engine, transmission, retarder, anti-lock braking system and all other related components, shall be integrated and communicate fully with respect to vehicle operation with data using SAE Recommended Communications Protocols such as J1939 and/or J1708/J1587 with forward and backward compatibilities or other open protocols. At a minimum, drivetrain components consisting of the engine, transmission, retarder ASR, and anti-lock braking systems shall be powered by a dedicated and isolated ignition supply voltage to ensure data communication among components exists when the vehicle ignition is switched to the "on" position. TS 44.2.1 DIAGNOSTICS, FAULT DETECTION AND DATA ACCESS Drivetrain performance, maintenance and diagnostic data, and other electronic messages shall be formatted and transmitted on the communications networks. The drivetrain level shall have the ability to record abnormal events in memory and provide diagnostic codes and other information to service personnel. At a minimum, this network level shall provide live/fail status, current hardware serial number, software/data revisions and uninterrupted timing functions. TS 44.2.2 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE) The drivetrain level components shall be programmable by the Agency with limitations as specified by the subsystem Supplier. Section 5 — Page 58 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 44.3 MULTIPLEX LEVEL TS 44.3.1 DATA ACCESS At a minimum, information shall be made available via a communication port on the multiplex system. The location of the communication port shall be easily accessible. A hardware gateway and/or wireless communications system are options if requested by the Agency. The communication port(s) shall be located as specified by the Agency. TS 44.3.2 DIAGNOSTICS AND FAULT DETECTION The multiplex system shall have a proven method of determining its status (system health and input/output status) and detecting either active (online) or inactive (offline) faults through the use of on- board visual/audible indicators. In addition to the indicators, the system shall employ an advanced diagnostic and fault detection system, which shall be accessible via either a personal computer or a handheld unit. Either unit shall have the ability to check logic function. The diagnostic data can be incorporated into the information level network or the central data access system. An option shall be made available to provide a mock-up board. A mock-up board, where key components of the multiplexing system are replicated on a functional model, shall be provided as a tool for diagnostic, design verification and training purposes, if required by an agency. The mock-up board should be priced separately in the Pricing Schedule. TS 44.3.3 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE) The multiplex system shall have security provisions to protect its software from unwanted changes. This shall be achieved through any or all of the following procedures: • Password protection • Limited distribution of the configuration software • Limited access to the programming tools required to change the software • Hardware protection that prevents undesired changes to the software Provisions for programming the multiplex system shall be possible through a PC or laptop. The multiplex system shall have proper revision control to ensure that the hardware and software are identical on each vehicle equipped with the system. Revision control shall be provided by all of the following: • Hardware component identification where labels are included on all multiplex hardware to identify components • Hardware series identification where all multiplex hardware displays the current hardware serial number and firmware revision employed by the module • Software revision identification where all copies of the software in service display the most recent revision number • A method of determining which version of the software is currently in use in the multiplex system Section 5 — Page 59 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 44.4 ELECTRONIC NOISE CONTROL Electrical and electronic subsystems and components on all coaches shall not emit electromagnetic radiation that will interfere with on -board systems, components or equipment, telephone service, radio or TV reception, or violate regulations of the Federal Communications Commission. Electrical and electronic subsystems on the coaches shall not be affected by external sources of RFI/EMI. This includes, but is not limited to, radio and TV transmission, portable electronic devices including computers in the vicinity of or onboard the coaches, AC or DC power lines and RFI/EMI emissions from other vehicles. DRIVER PROVISIONS, Controls and instrumentation 11 ME P11 Q N LTJ :I ZIRMI ZME10101 Ll Ill 9 :111111]1 W0.1 TS 45.1 GENERAL In general when designing the driver's area within the Coach, it is recommended that SAE J833, "Human Physical Dimensions," be used. Switches and controls shall be divided into basic groups and assigned to specific areas, in conformance with SAE Recommended Practice J680, Revised 1988, "Location and Operation of Instruments and Controls in Motor Truck Cabs," and be essentially within the hand reach envelope described in SAE Recommended Practice J287. "Driver Hand Control Reach." TS 45.2 GLARE The driver's work area shall be designed to minimize glare to the extent possible. Objects within and adjacent to this area shall be matte black or dark gray in color wherever possible to reduce the reflection of light onto the windshield. The use of polished metal and light-colored surfaces within and adjacent to the driver's area shall be avoided. TS 45.3 VISORS/SUN SHADES Adjustable sun visor(s) shall be provided for the driver's windshield and the driver's side window. Visors shall be shaped to minimize light leakage between the visor and windshield pillars. Visors shall store out of the way and shall not obstruct airflow from the climate control system or interfere with other equipment, such as the radio handset or the destination control. Deployment of the visors shall not restrict vision of the rearview mirrors. Visor adjustments shall be made easily by hand with positive locking and releasing devices and shall not be subject to damage by over -tightening. Sun visor construction and materials shall be strong enough to resist breakage during adjustments. Visors may be transparent but shall not allow a visible light transmittance in excess of 10 percent. Visors, when deployed, shall be effective in the driver's field of view at angles more than 5 deg above the horizontal. Section 5 — Page 60 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 45.4 DRIVER'S CONTROLS Frequently used controls must be in easily accessible locations. These include the door control, kneel control, windshield wiper/washer controls, ramp, and lift and run switch. Any switches and controls necessary for the safe operation of the coach shall be conveniently located and shall provide for ease of operation. They shall be identifiable by shape, touch and permanent markings. Controls also shall be located so that passengers may not easily tamper with control settings. All panel -mounted switches and controls shall be marked with easily read identifiers. Graphic symbols shall conform to SAE Recommended Practice J2402, 'Road Vehicles — Symbols For Controls, Indicators, and Tell Tales," where available and applicable. Color of switches and controls shall be dark with contrasting typography or symbols. Mechanical switches and controls shall be replaceable, and the wiring at these controls shall be serviceable from a convenient location. Switches, controls and instruments shall be dust- and water- resistant. TS 45.5 NORMAL COACH OPERATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS The following list identifies some common coach controls used to operate the coach. These controls are either frequently used or critical to the operation of the coach. They shall be located within easy reach of the operator. The operator shall not be required to stand or turn to view or actuate these controls unless specified otherwise. Systems or components monitored by onboard diagnostics system shall be displayed in clear view of the operator and provide visual and/or audible indicators. The intensity of indicators shall permit easy determination of on/off status in bright sunlight but shall not cause a distraction or visibility problem at night. All indicators shall be illuminated using backlighting. The indicator panel shall be located in Area 1 or Area 5, within easy view of the operator instrument panel. All indicators shall have a method of momentarily testing their operation. The audible alarm shall be tamper-resistant and shall have an outlet level between 80 and 83 dBA when measured at the location of the operator's ear. On -board displays visible to the operator shall be limited to indicating the status of those functions described herein that are necessary for the operation of the coach. All other indicators needed for diagnostics and their related interface hardware shall be concealed and protected from unauthorized access. Table 6 represents instruments and alarms. The intent of the overall physical layout of the indicators shall be in a logical grouping of systems and severity nature of the fault. Please provide drawings of dash and controls with locations. Consideration shall be provided for future additions of spare indicators as the capability of onboard diagnostic systems improves. Blank spaces shall contain LEDs. Section 5 — Page 61 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Master control for coach, Master run Rotary, four- Side console off, day run, night run and switch position detent clearance ID lights Engine start, Approved Activates engine starter Side console front momentary switch motor Engine start, Approved Engine Activates engine starter rear momentary switch compartment motor Permits running engine Engine run, Three -position Engine from rear start, normal Amber light rear toggle switch compartment front run position and off Provides selection of Touch panel Drive selector Side console propulsion: forward, Gear selection switch reverse and neutral Permits selection of passenger ventilation: off, Switch or switches HVAC Side console cool, heat, lowfan, high to control HVAC fan or full auto with on/off only Permits supplemental Driver's Rotary, three- Side console or ventilation: fan off, low or ventilation position detent dash left wing high Rotary, three- Side console or Permits defroster: fan off, Defroster fan position detent dash left wing low, medium or high Defroster Side console or Adjusts defroster water Variable position temperature dash left wing flow and temperature One -variable Variable speed control of Windshield rotary position Dash left wing left and right windshield wiper operating both wipers wipers Section 5 — Page 62 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Windshield Activates windshield Push button Dash left wing washer washers Provides adjustment for Dash panel Rotary rheostat or Side console or light intensity in night run lights stepping switch dash left wing position Selects mode of Three -position Interior lights Side console passenger compartment switch lighting: off, on, normal Two -position Selectshigh idle speed of Fast idle Side console switch engine Permits operation of ramp WC ramp/ Two -position Side console or and kneel operations at Amber light kneel enable switch' dash right wing each door remote panel Front door Front door Permits ramp and kneel Two -position ramp/kneel keyed switch remote or dash activation from front door Amber light enable right wing area, key required' Front door Three -position Right side of Permits deploy and stow Red light ramp momentary switch steering wheel of front ramp Permits kneeling Amber or red Three -position Front door activation and raise and dash indicator; Front kneel momentary switch remote normal at front door exterior alarm remote location and amber light Activates emergency Recessed push radio alarm at dispatch button, NO and and permits covert Silent alarm Side console NC contacts microphone and/or momentary enables destination sign emergency message Section 5 — Page 63 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Momentary on/off Triggers event equipment, Video system momentary switch Side console triggers event light on Amber light event switch with plastic guard dash Permits two -axis Left remote Four -position Side console adjustment of left exterior mirror toggle typa mirror Permits two -axis Right remote Four -position Side console adjustment of right mirror toggle a 99 type exterior mirror Switch or Permits heating of outside Mirror heater temperature Side console mirrors when required activated Five -position Permits open/close Passenger handle type detent Side console, control of front and rear Red light door control or two momentary forward passenger doors push buttons Two -position Allows driver to override Rear door Side console, switch in activation of rear door override forward approved location passenger tape switches Engine Momentary switch Permits driver to override shutdown with operation Side console auto engine shutdown override protection Hazard Two -position Side console or Activates emergency Two green lights flashers switch dash right wing flashers Red push button Permits driver to override Fire Dash left wing or with protective and manually discharge Red light suppression cover dash center fire suppression system Section 5 — Page 64 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Mobile data Facilitates driver LCD display with Mobile data terminal coach Above right interaction with visual status and terminal operator interface dash wing communication system panel and master log -on text messages Farebox coach Facilitates driver Farebox operator interface Near farebox interaction with farebox LCD display interface panel system Facilitates driver Destination Destination sign In approved interaction with LCD display sign interface interface panel location destination sign system, manual entry Momentary push button (two Two green lights Activates left and right Turn signals required) raised Left foot panel and optional turn signals from other audible indicator switches Permits driver to manually Momentary push In approved PA manual activate public address button location microphone Permits driver to make announcements with both Low -profile Low -profile Steering column hands on the wheel and microphone discrete mounting focusing on road conditions Permits driver to toggle Detented push In approved High beam between lowand high Blue light button location beam Side console or Permits driver to apply Parking brake Pneumatic PPV Red light dash left wing and release parking brake Section 5 — Page 65 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Vertical side of Park brake Permits driver to push and Pneumatic PPV the side console release hold to release brakes or dash center Two -position Applies brakes to prevent Hill holder Side console momentary switch coach from rolling Permits technician to raise Remote engine Engine Rotary rheostat and lower engine RPM speed compartment from engine compartment Permits driver override to Master door/ Multi -pole toggle, Out of operator's disable door and Red light interlock detented reach brake/throttle interlock Warning Illuminates to warn driver Dash panel interlocks Red indicator light that interlocks have been Red light deactivated center deactivated Within reach of Permits driver override to Retarder Multi -pole switch operator or disable brake Red light disable detented approved retardation/regeneration location Permits driver to Alarm Push button Approved acknowledge alarm acknowledge momentary location condition In sign Rear door Permits driver to override Multi -pole toggle, compartment or passenger detented driver's barrier rear door passenger sensor disable sensing system compartment Indicator/ Permits driver to activate Momentary switch Dash center All visuals and alarm test'test of sentry, indicators button or programmingpanel and audible alarms audibles Section 5 — Page 66 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible 110 V power Approved Property to specify what Auxiliary power receptacle location function to supply Speedometer, Visual indication of speed odometer, and and distance traveled, Dash center Speedometer diagnostic accumulated vehicle Visual panel capability, 5 -mile mileage, fault condition increments display Primary and Visual indication of Air pressure Dash center Red light and secondary, primary and secondary air gauge 5 psi increments panel systems buzzer Coach operator Property specific Indication of fire detection Buzzer and red Fire detection display or dash center activation by zone/location light Door Sensing of door Indication of rear door Red light and center obstruction obstructionDash sensitive edge activation buzzer Door not properly Property specific Indication of rear door not Buzzer or alarm Door ajar closed or dash center properly closed and red light Sensing low Low system air primary and Indication of low air Buzzer and red Dash center pressure secondary air tank system pressure light pressure Methane No start Detection of Property specific detection Detects system failure condition, amber system integrity or dash center function light Indication of 20% Methane Property specific Flashing red at LED emergency Detects levels of methane detection or dash center 20% LEL light (LEL) Methane Indication of 50% Property specific Solid red at 50% Detects levels of methane detection LEL or dash center LEL Section 5 — Page 67 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Low coolant indicator may be Engine coolant supplied as Within driver's Detects low coolant Amber light indicator audible alert and sight condition visual and/or text message Coolant temperature indicator may be Detects hot engine Hot engine Within driver's supplied as condition and initiates Red light indicator sight audible alert and time delay shutdown visual and/or text message Engine oil pressure indicator Detects low engine oil Low engine oil may be supplied Within driver's pressure condition and pressure as audible alert sight initiates time -delayed Red light indicator and visual and/or shutdown text message Detects system ABS indicator Dash center Displays system failure Amber light status HVAC Detects system Amber or red Dash center Displays system failure indicator status light Detects no charge Charging condition and optionally Red light system Detect charging detects battery high, low, flashing or solid Dash center indicator system status imbalance, no charge based on (12/24 V) condition, and initiates condition time -delayed shutdown Section 5 — Page 68 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Bike rack Indication of bike rack not Detects bike rack Amber or red deployed Dash center being in fully stowed position light indicator position Analog gauge, Indication fuel tank Fuel tank level graduated based Dash center level/pressure re on fuel type Displays level of DEF tank DEF gauge Level Indicator Center dash and indicates with warning Red light light when low Active Indication of electric Amber or red Detects status Dash center regeneration regeneration light Audible and Warning indication for amber warning Turntable Detects status Dash center hinge locking and red light if locked Momentarily release Interlock Turntable Side console interlock brakes due to momentary switch overangled condition TS 45.6 DRIVER FOOT CONTROLS Accelerator and brake pedals shall be designed for ankle motion. Foot surfaces of the pedals shall be faced with wear -resistant, nonskid, replaceable material. TS 45.6.1 PEDAL ANGLE The vertical angle of the accelerator and brake pedals shall be determined from a horizontal plane regardless of the slope of the cab floor. The accelerator and brake pedals shall be positioned at an angle of 37 to 50 deg at the point of initiation of contact and extend downward to an angle of 10 to 18 deg at full throttle. Section 5 — Page 69 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 The location of the brake and accelerator pedals shall be determined by the manufacturer, based on space needs, visibility, lower edge of windshield and vertical H -point. TS 45.6.2 PEDAL DIMENSIONS AND POSITION The floor -mounted accelerator pedal shall be 10 to 12 in. long and 3 to 4 in. wide. Clearance around the pedal must allow for no interference precluding operation. The accelerator and brake pedals shall be positioned such that the spacing between them, measured at the heel of the pedals, is between 1 and 2 in. Both pedals should be located approximately on the same plane coincident to the surface of the pedals. TS 45.7 DRIVER FOOT SWITCHES Floor -Mounted Foot Control Platform. The angle of the turn signal platform shall be determined from a horizontal plane, regardless of the slope of the cab floor. The turn signal platform shall be angled at a minimum of 10 deg and a maximum of 37 deg. It shall be located no closer to the seat front than the heel point of the accelerator pedal. The control switches for the turn signals shall be mounted on an inclined, floor -mounted stainless steel enclosure or metal plate mounted to an incline integrated into the driver's platform, located to the left of the steering column. The location and design of this enclosure shall be such that foot room for the operator is not impeded. The inclined mounting surface shall be skid -resistant. All other signals, including high beam and public address system, shall be in approved locations. The foot switches shall be UL -listed, heavy-duty type, of a rugged, corrosion -resistant metal construction. The foot switches for the directionals shall be momentary type, while those for the PA system and the high beam shall be latching type. The spacing of the switches shall be such that inadvertent simultaneous deflection of switches is prevented. Other Floor -Mounted Controls; The following may be floor mounted, momentary or latching, as identified by the Agency: hazard silent alarm PA system TS -46 DRIVER'S AMENITIES TS 46.1 COAT HANGER Coat Hanger; A suitable hanger shall be installed in a convenient, approved location for the driver's coat. Section 5 — Page 70 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 46.2 STORAGE BOX An enclosed driver storage area shall be provided with a positive latching door and/or lock. The minimum size is 2750 in.3. TS -47 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS TS 47.1 WINDSHIELD WIPERS The coach shall be equipped with a windshield wiper for each half of the windshield. At 60 mph, no more than 10 percent of the wiped area shall be lost due to windshield wiper lift. For two-piece windshields, both wipers shall park along the center edges of the windshield glass. For single -piece windshields, wipers shall park along the bottom edge of the windshield. Windshield wiper motors and mechanisms shall be easily accessible for repairs or service. The fastener that secures the wiper arm to the drive mechanism shall be corrosion -resistant. Wipers shall be electric motor driven with two speeds and adjustable intermittent wiper action. TS 47.2 WINDSHIELD WASHERS The windshield washer system, when used with the wipers, shall deposit washing fluid evenly and completely wet the entire wiped area. The windshield washer system shall have a minimum 3 -gallon reservoir, located for easy refilling from outside the coach. Reservoir pumps, lines and fittings shall be corrosion -resistant and must include a means to determine fluid level. Section 5 — Page 71 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -48 DRIVER'S SEAT FIGURE 5 Driver's Seat TS 48.1 DIMENSIONS Head rest Seat back Arm rest Seat belt Seat base The driver's seat shall be comfortable and adjustable so that people ranging in size from a 95th - percentile male to a 5th -percentile female may operate the coach. Contractor to provide make and model numbers of driver seat options available and specifications. TS 48.2 SEAT BELT The belt assembly should be an auto -locking retractor (ALR).All seat belts should be stored in automatic retractors. The belts shall be mounted to the seat frame so that the driver may adjust the seat without resetting the seat belt. The seat and seatbelt assemblies as installed in the coach shall withstand static horizontal forces as required in FMVSS 207 and 210. Lap Belt Length The lap belt assembly shall be 72 in. in length with an 8 in. extension Section 5 — Page 72 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 48.3 SEAT CONTROL LOCATIONS While seated, the driver shall be able to make seat adjustments by hand without complexity, excessive effort or being pinched. Adjustment mechanisms shall hold the adjustments and shall not be subject to inadvertent changes. TS 48.4 SEAT STRUCTURE AND MATERIALS Cushions Cushions shall be fully padded with at least 3 in. of materials in the seating areas at the bottom and back. Cushion Materials Foam and fabric that meets FTA Docket 90A. TS 48.5 PEDESTAL Powder -coated steel. TS 48.6 SEAT OPTIONS The following options shall be made available to the agencies with separate pricing included in the proposal: heated seat seat alarm fabric options seat air vent side bolsters adjustments silicone seat cushion TS 48.7 MIRRORS TS 48.7.1 EXTERIOR MIRRORS The coach shall be equipped with corrosion -resistant, outside rearview mirrors mounted with stable supports to minimize vibration. Mirrors shall be firmly attached to the coach to minimize vibration and to prevent loss of adjustment with a breakaway mounting system. Mirrors shall permit the driver to view the roadway along the sides of the coach, including the rear wheels. Mirrors should be positioned to prevent blind spots. Mirrors shall retract or fold sufficiently to allow coach washing operations but avoid contact with windshield. Section 5 — Page 73 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 Curbside Mirrors The curbside rearview mirror shall be mounted so that its lower edge is no less than 76 in. above the street surface. A lower mount may be required due to mirror configuration requests. Remote Adjustment of Street and Curbside Mirrors The driver shall be able to adjust all four external rear view mirrors remotely while seated in the driving position. The controls for remote positioning of the mirrors can be a single or dual switch or device. Mirrors must be heated and be operated in conjunction with the driver's heater or with separate controls. TS 48.7.2 INTERIOR MIRRORS Mirrors shall be provided for the driver to observe passengers throughout the coach without leaving the seat and without shoulder movement. The driver shall be able to observe passengers in the front/entrance and rear/exit areas (if applicable), anywhere in the aisle, and in the rear seats. WI N DOWS 11&IM16Zr]ALl1:1:7e1I A minimum of 12,000 sq in. of window area, including operator and door windows, shall be required on each side of the standard configuration coach. 11&S191•►i►11Ll1119:11AIC The windshield shall permit an operator's field of view as referenced in SAE Recommended Practice J1050. The vertically upward view shall be a minimum of 14 deg, measured above the horizontal and excluding any shaded band. The vertically downward view shall permit detection of an object 3% ft high no more than 2 ft in front of the coach. The horizontal view shall be a minimum of 90 deg above the line of sight .Any binocular obscuration due to a center divider may be ignored when determining the 90 deg requirement, provided that the divider does not exceed a 3 deg angle in the operator's field of view. Windshield pillars shall not exceed 10 deg of binocular obscuration. The windshield shall be designed and installed to minimize external glare as well as reflections from inside the coach. The windshield shall be easily replaceable by removing zip -locks from the windshield retaining moldings. Bonded -in-place windshields shall not be used. Winglets may be bonded. TS 50.1 GLAZING The windshield glazing material shall have a ^/4 in. nominal thickness laminated safety glass conforming to the requirements of ANSI Z26.1 Test Grouping AS -1 and the recommended practices defined in SAE J673. Section 5 — Page 74 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 Shaded Band The upper portion of the windshield above the driver's field of view shall have a dark, shaded band and marked AS -3, with a minimum luminous transmittance of 5 percent when tested in accordance to ASTM D-1003. TS -51 DRIVER'S SIDE WINDOW The driver's side window shall be the sliding type, requiring only the rear half of the sash to latch upon closing, and shall open sufficiently to permit the seated operator to easily adjust the street -side outside rearview mirror. When in an open position, the window shall not rattle or close during braking. This window section shall slide in tracks or channels designed to last the service life of the coach. The operator's side window shall not be bonded in place and shall be easily replaceable. The glazing material shall have a single -density tint. The driver's view, perpendicular through operator's side window glazing, should extend a minimum of 33 in. (840 mm) to the rear of the heel point on the accelerator, and in any case must accommodate a 95th percentile male operator. The view through the glazing at the front of the assembly should begin not more than 26 in. (560 mm) above the operator's floor to ensure visibility of an under -mounted convex mirror. Driver's window construction shall maximize ability for full opening of the window. The driver's side window glazing material shall have a ^/4 in. nominal thickness laminated safety glass conforming to the requirements of ANSI Z26.1-1996 Test Grouping AS -2 and the recommended practices defined in SAE J673. The design shall prevent sections from freezing closed in the winter. Light transmittance shall be 75 percent on the glass area below 53 in. from the operator platform floor. On the top -fixed -over -bottom -slider configuration, the top fixed area above 53 in. may have a maximum 5 percent light transmittance. Standard Driver's Side Window, Traditional Frame top fixed over bottom slider non -egress TS -52 SIDE WINDOWS TS 52.1 CONFIGURATION Side windows shall not be bonded in place, but shall be easily replaceable without disturbing adjacent windows and shall be mounted so that flexing or vibration from engine operation or normal road excitation is not apparent. All aluminum and steel material will be treated to prevent corrosion. Section 5 — Page 75 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 52.2 EMERGENCY EXIT (EGRESS) CONFIGURATION All side windows shall be fixed in position, except as necessary to meet the emergency escape requirements. Standard Passenger Side Window Configurations Agency to choose from the following options: traditional frame full fixed openable windows with inward -opening transom panels openable windows with sliding transom panels TS 52.3 MATERIALS Safety Glass Glazing Panels Contractor to supply technical specifications on standard glazing used with options listed as line items. All glazing must meet FMVSS, DOT and all other federal and state regulations. Specifications and Options should be listed for solar transmittance and heat absorption. NOTE: All glass treatments must be permanent, within the glass and/or in the center membrane. Surface films are not permitted. SHGC and light transmission performance shall be defined by the National Fenestration Rating Council. HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING TS -53 CAPACITY AND PERFORMANCE The HVAC climate control system shall be capable of controlling the temperature and maintaining the humidity levels of the interior of the coach as defined in the following paragraphs. With the coach running at the design operating profile with corresponding door opening cycle, and carrying a number of passengers equal to 150 percent of the seated load, the HVAC system shall control the average passenger compartment temperature within a range between 60 and 80 °F, while maintaining the relative humidity to a value of 50 percent or less. The system shall maintain these conditions while subjected to any outside ambient temperatures within a range of 10 to 95 °F and at any ambient relative humidity levels between 5 and 50 percent. When the coach is operated in outside ambient temperatures of 95 to 115 °F, the interior temperature of the coach shall be permitted to rise 0.5 °F for each degree of exterior temperature in excess of 95 °F. Section 5 — Page 76 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 When the coach is operated in outside ambient temperatures in the range of -10 to 10 °F, the interior temperature of the coach shall not fall below 55 °F while the coach is running on the design operating profile. System capacity testing, including pull-down/warm-up, stabilization and profile, shall be conducted in accordance to APTA's Recommended Practice "Transit Coach HVAC System Instrumentation and Performance Testing." NOTE: The recommended locations of temperature probes are only guidelines and may require slight modifications to address actual coach design. Care must be taken to avoid placement of sensing devices in the immediate path of an air duct outlet. In general, the locations are intended to accurately represent the interior passenger area. Additional testing shall be performed as necessary to ensure compliance to performance requirements stated herein. Capacity and Performance Requirements The air-conditioning portion of the HVAC system shall be capable of reducing the passenger compartment temperature from 115 to 70 °F ± 3 °F in less than 30 minutes after system engagement. Engine temperature shall be within the normal operating range at the time of start-up of the cool -down test, and the engine speed shall be limited to fast idle, which may be activated by a driver -controlled device. During the cool -down period, the refrigerant pressure shall not exceed safe high -side pressures, and the condenser discharge air temperature, measured 6 in. from the surface of the coil, shall be less than 45 °F above the condenser inlet air temperature. No simulated solar load shall be used. There shall be no passengers on board, and the doors and windows shall be closed. The air conditioning system shall meet these performance requirements using R407C. TS -54 CONTROLS AND TEMPERATURE UNIFORMITY The HVAC system excluding the driver's heater/defroster shall be centrally controlled with an advanced electronic/diagnostic control system with provisions for extracting/reading data. The system shall be compliant with J1939 Communication Protocol for receiving and broadcasting of data. Hot engine coolant water shall be delivered to the HVAC system driver's defroster/heater and other heater cores by means of an auxiliary coolant pump, sized for the required flow, which is brushless and seal less having a minimum maintenance -free service life for both the brushless motor and the pump of at least 40,000 hours at full power. Manually Adjustable Temperature Control Set Point The climate control system shall have the provision to allow the driver to adjust the temperature control set point at a minimum of between 68 and 72 °F. From then on, all interior climate control system requirements shall be attained automatically, unless re -adjusted by the driver. Section 5 — Page 77 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 The driver shall have full control over the defroster and driver's heater. The driver shall be able to adjust the temperature in the driver's area through air distribution and fans. The interior climate control system shall switch automatically to the ventilating mode if the refrigerant compressor or condenser fan fails. Interior temperature distribution shall be uniform to the extent practicable to prevent hot and/or cold spots. After stabilization with doors closed, the temperatures between any two points in the passenger compartment in the same vertical plane, and 6 to 72 in. above the floor, shall not vary by more than 5 °F with doors closed. The interior temperatures, measured at the same height above the floor, shall not vary more than ±5 °F from the front to the rear from the average temperature determined in accordance with APTA's "Recommended Instrumentation and Performance Testing for Transit Coach Air Conditioning System." Variations of greater than ±5 °F will be allowed for limited, localized areas provided that the majority of the measured temperatures fall within the specified requirement. TS 54.1 AUXILIARY HEATER No auxiliary heater. TS -55 AIR FLOW TS 55.1 PASSENGER AREA The cooling mode of the interior climate control system shall introduce air into the coach at or near the ceiling height at a minimum rate of 25 cubic ft per minute (cfm) per passenger based on the standard configuration coach carrying a number of passengers equal to 150 percent of the seated load. Airflow shall be evenly distributed throughout the coach, with air velocity not exceeding 100 ft per minute on any passenger. The ventilating mode shall provide air at a minimum flow rate of 20 cfm per passenger. Airflow may be reduced to 15 cfm per passenger (150 percent of seated load) when operating in the heating mode. The fans shall not activate until the heating element has warmed sufficiently to ensure at least 70 °F air outlet temperature. The heating air outlet temperature shall not exceed 120 °F under any normal operating conditions. The climate control blower motors and fan shall be designed such that their operation complies with the interior noise level requirements. Requirement for 10 Percent "Fresh Air" Mixture The air shall be composed of no less than 10 percent outside air. TS 55.2 DRIVER'S AREA The coach interior climate control system shall deliver at least 100 cfm of air to the driver's area when operating in the ventilating and cooling modes. Adjustable nozzles shall permit variable distribution or shutdown of the airflow. Airflow in the heating mode shall be reduced proportionally to the reduction of airflow into the passenger area. The windshield defroster unit shall meet the requirements of SAE Section 5 — Page 78 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 Recommended Practice J382, "Windshield Defrosting Systems Performance Requirements," and shall have the capability of diverting heated air to the driver's feet and legs. The defroster or interior climate control system shall maintain visibility through the driver's side window. TS 55.3 CONTROLS FOR THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (CCS) The controls for the driver's compartment for heating, ventilation and cooling systems shall be integrated and shall meet the following requirements: • The heat/defrost system fan shall be controlled by a separate switch that has an "off' position and at least two positions for speed control. All switches and controls shall preclude the possibility of clothing becoming entangled, and shields shall be provided, if required. If the fans are approved by the Agency, an "on/off' switch shall be located to the right of or near the main defroster switch. • A manually operated control valve shall control the coolant flow through the heater core. • If a cable -operated manual control valve is used, then the cable length shall be kept to a minimum to reduce cable seizing. Heater water control valves shall be "positive" type, closed or open. The method of operating remote valves shall require the concurrence of the Agency project manager. TS 55.4 DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS A separate heating, ventilation and defroster system for the driver's area shall be provided and shall be controlled by the driver. The system shall meet the following requirements: • The heater and defroster system shall provide heating for the driver and heated air to completely defrost and defog the windshield, driver's side window, and the front door glasses in all operating conditions. Fan(s) shall be able to draw air from the coach body interior and/or exterior through a control device and pass it through the heater core to the defroster system and over the driver's feet A minimum capacity of 100 cfm shall be provided. The driver shall have complete control of the heat and fresh airflow for the driver's area. • The defroster supply outlets shall be located at the lower edge of the windshield. These outlets shall be durable and shall be free of sharp edges that can catch clothes during normal daily cleaning. The system shall be such that foreign objects such as coins or tickets cannot fall into the defroster air outlets. Adjustable ball vents or louvers shall be provided at the left of the driver's position to allow direction of air onto the side windows. A ventilation system shall be provided to ensure driver comfort and shall be capable of providing fresh air in both the foot and head areas. Vents shall be controllable by the driver from the normal driving position. Decals shall be provided, indicating 'operating instructions" and 'open" and "closed" positions. When closed, vents shall be sealed to prevent the migration of water or air into the coach. TS 55.5 DRIVER'S COOLING Separate Dedicated Evaporator; using a separate, dedicated evaporator, the climate control system shall be designed to maintain the driver's compartment temperatures within the range specified for the passenger compartment. The unit shall operate when the climate control switch is in the "Cool' position. It shall have a separate thermostatic control. Section 5 — Page 79 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -56 AIR FILTRATION Air shall be filtered before entering the AC system and being discharged into the passenger compartment. The filter shall meet the ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 requirement for 5 percent or better atmospheric dust spot efficiency, 50 percent weight arrestance, and a minimum dust holding capacity of 120 g per 1000 cfm cell. Air filters shall be easily removable for service. Air filters shall be cleanable. TS -57 ROOF VENTILATORS Each ventilator shall be easily opened and closed manually. When open with the coach in motion, this ventilator shall provide fresh air inside the coach. The ventilator shall cover an opening area no less than 425 sq in. and shall be capable of being positioned as a scoop with either the leading or trailing edge open no less than 4 in., or with all four edges raised simultaneously to a height of no less than 3% in. An escape hatch shall be incorporated into the roof ventilator. Roof ventilator(s) shall be sealed to prevent entry of water when closed. Ill &S•'1:lLVA raILl Ill ralFEW l4Ill VA Manually controlled shut-off valves in the refrigerant lines shall allow isolation of the compressor and dehydrator filter for service. To the extent practicable, self-sealing couplings utilizing O-ring seals shall be used to break and seal the refrigerant lines during removal of major components, such as the refrigerant compressor. Shut-off valves may be provided in lieu of self-sealing couplings. The condenser shall be located to efficiently transfer heat to the atmosphere and shall not ingest air warmed above the ambient temperature by the coach mechanical equipment, or to discharge air into any other system of the coach. The location of the condenser shall preclude its obstruction by wheel splash, road dirt or debris. HVAC components located within 6 in. of floor level shall be constructed to resist damage and corrosion. High and low refrigerant pressure electronic gauges to be located in the return air area. TS -59 ENTRANCE/EXIT AREA HEATING No requirements for entrance/exit area heating. TS -60 FLOOR -LEVEL HEATING Sufficient heaters shall be provided with ducting to blow warm air upward through a cavity in the wall and discharge the warm air at the base of the windows. Control of the warm wall heating shall be through the main heating system electronic control. Section 5 — Page 80 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 EXTERIOR PANELS, FINISHES and Exterior Lighting TS -61 DESIGN The coach shall have a clean, smooth, simple design, primarily derived from coach performance requirements and passenger service criteria. The exterior and body features, including grilles and louvers, shall be shaped to facilitate cleaning by automatic coach washers without snagging washer brushes. Water and dirt shall not be retained in or on any body feature to freeze or bleed out onto the coach after leaving the washer. The body and windows shall be sealed to prevent leaking of air, dust or water under normal operating conditions and during cleaning in automatic coach washers for the service life of the coach. Exterior panels shall be sufficiently stiff to minimize vibration, drumming or flexing while the coach is in service. When panels are lapped, the upper and forward panels shall act as a watershed. However, if entry of moisture into the interior of the vehicle is prevented by other means, then rear cap panels may be lapped otherwise. The windows, hatches and doors shall be able to be sealed. Accumulation of spray and splash generated by the coach's wheels shall be minimized on windows and mirrors. TS 61.1 MATERIALS Body materials shall be selected and the body fabricated to reduce maintenance, extend durability and provide consistency of appearance throughout the service life of the coach. Detailing shall be kept simple, and add-on devices and trim shall be minimized and integrated into the basic design. TS -62 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Exterior protrusions along the side and front of the coach greater than % in. and within 80 in. of the ground shall have a radius no less than the amount of the protrusion. The exterior rearview mirrors, cameras and required lights and reflectors are exempt from the protrusion requirement. Advertising frames shall protrude no more than % in. from the body surface. Grilles, doors, bumpers and other features on the sides and rear of the coach shall be designed to minimize toeholds or handholds. Exterior protrusions shall not cause a line -of -sight blockage for the driver. III &r-NA:14:a1Wil Ll1.1:1:1»iTy:1LVA 1:1Ll III r TS 63.1 SIDE BODY PANELS Structural elements supporting exterior body panels shall allow side body panels below the windows to be repaired. Section 5 — Page 81 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -64 RAIN GUTTERS Rain gutters shall be provided to prevent water flowing from the roof onto the passenger doors and driver's side window. When the coach is decelerated, the gutters shall not drain onto the windshield, driver's side window or door boarding area. Cross sections of the gutters shall be adequate for proper operation. TS -65 LICENSE PLATE PROVISIONS Provisions shall be made to mount standard -size U.S./Canada license plates per SAE J686 on the front and rear of the coach. These provisions shall direct -mount or recess the license plates so that they can be cleaned by automatic coach -washing equipment without being caught by the brushes. The rear license plate provision shall be illuminated per SAE J587. Default Requirement for Rub Rails Rub rails composed of flexible, resilient material shall be provided to protect both sides of the coach body from damage caused by minor sideswipe accidents with automobiles. Rub rails shall have vertical dimensions of no less than 2 in. (50 mm) with the centerline no higher than 35 in. above the ground between the wheel wells. The rub rails shall withstand impacts of 200 ft -lbs of energy from a steel -faced spherical missile no less than 9 in. in diameter and of a 500 Ib load applied anywhere along their length by a rigid plate 1 ft in length, wider than the rub rail, and with a Ya in. end radii, with no visible damage to the rub rail, retainer or supporting structure. The rub rail may be discontinued at doorways, wheel wells and articulated joints if applicable. A damaged portion of the rub rail shall be replaceable without requiring removal or replacement of the entire rub rail. NOTE: Installation of rub rails may preclude the installation and/or size of exterior advertising signs or racks. III &K:%o9:1LlI17:1M01211:4&01 Features to minimize water spray from the coach in wet conditions shall be included in wheel housing design. Any fender skirts shall be easily replaceable. They shall be flexible if they extend beyond the allowable body width. Wheels and tires shall be removable with the fender skirts in place. TS 66.1 SPLASH APRONS Standard Splash Aprons Splash aprons, composed of Ya in. minimum composition or rubberized fabric, shall be installed behind and/or in front of wheels as needed to reduce road splash and to protect under floor components. The splash aprons shall extend downward to within 6 in. off the road surface at static conditions. Apron widths shall be no less than tire widths. Splash aprons shall be bolted to the coach understructure. Section 5 — Page 82 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 Splash aprons and their attachments shall be inherently weaker than the structure to which they are attached. The flexible portions of the splash aprons shall not be included in the road clearance measurements. Splash apron shall be installed as necessary to protect the wheelchair loading device from road splash. Other splash aprons shall be installed where necessary to protect coach equipment. TS -67 SERVICE COMPARTMENTS AND ACCESS DOORS TS 67.1 ACCESS DOORS Conventional doors shall be used for the engine compartment and for all auxiliary equipment compartments including doors for checking the quantity and adding to the engine coolant, engine lubricant and transmission fluid. Access openings shall be sized for easy performance of tasks within the compartment, including tool operating space. Access doors shall be of rugged construction and shall maintain mechanical integrity and function under normal operations throughout the service life of the coach. They shall close flush with the body surface. All doors shall be hinged at the top or on the forward edge and shall be prevented from coming loose or opening during transit service or in coach washing operations. All access doors shall be retained in the open position. Latch handles shall be flush with, or recessed behind, the body contour and shall be sized to provide an adequate grip for opening. Access doors, when opened, shall not restrict access for servicing other components or systems. If precluded by design, the manufacturer shall provide door design information specifying how the requirements are met. TS 67.2 ACCESS DOOR LATCH/LOCKS Requirement for Latches on Access Doors Access doors larger than 100 sq in. in area shall be equipped with corrosion -resistant flush -mounted latches or locks except for coolant and fuel fill access doors. All such access doors that require a tool to open shall be standardized throughout the vehicle. Agencies may define any required locks or latches for access doors and prices should be quoted separately. IILVA IU:IZK TS 68.1 LOCATION Bumpers shall provide impact protection for the front and rear of the coach with the top of the bumper being 27 in., ±2 in., above the ground. Bumper height shall be such that when one coach is parked behind another, a portion of the bumper faces will contact each other. TS 68.2 FRONT BUMPER No part of the coach, including the bumper, shall be damaged as a result of a 5 mph impact of the coach at curb weight with a fixed, flat barrier perpendicular to the coach's longitudinal centerline. The bumper shall return to its pre -impact shape within 10 minutes of the impact. The bumper shall protect the coach Section 5 — Page 83 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 from damage as a result of 6.5 mph impacts at any point by the common carriage with contoured impact surface defined in Figure 2 of FMVSS 301 loaded to 4000 lbs. parallel to the longitudinal centerline of the coach. It shall protect the coach from damage as a result of 5.5 mph impacts into the corners at a 30 deg angle to the longitudinal centerline of the coach. The energy absorption system of the bumper shall be independent of every power system of the coach and shall not require service or maintenance in normal operation during the service life of the coach. The bumper may increase the overall coach length specified by no more than 7 in. TS 68.3 REAR BUMPER No part of the coach, including the bumper, shall be damaged as a result of a 2 mph impact with a fixed, flat barrier perpendicular to the longitudinal centerline of the coach. The bumper shall return to its pre - impact shape within 10 minutes of the impact. When using a yard tug with a smooth, flat plate bumper 2 ft wide contacting the horizontal centerline of the rear bumper, the bumper shall provide protection at speeds up to 5 mph, over pavement discontinuities up to 1 in. high, and at accelerations up to 2 mph/sec. The rear bumper shall protect the coach when impacted anywhere along its width by the common carriage with contoured impact surface defined in Figure 2 of FMVSS 301 loaded to 4000 lbs., at 4 mph parallel to or up to a 30 deg angle to the longitudinal centerline of the coach. The rear bumper shall be shaped to preclude unauthorized riders standing on the bumper. The bumper shall not require service or maintenance in normal operation during the service life of the coach. The bumper may increase the overall coach length specified by no more than 7 in. TS 68.4 BUMPER MATERIAL Bumper material shall be corrosion -resistant and withstand repeated impacts of the specified loads without sustaining damage. These bumper qualities shall be sustained throughout the service life of the coach. TS -69 FINISH AND COLOR TS 69.1 APPEARANCE All exterior surfaces shall be smooth and free of wrinkles and dents. Exterior surfaces to be painted shall be properly prepared as required by the paint system Supplier prior to application of paint to ensure a proper bond between the basic surface and successive coats of original paint for the service life of the coach. Drilled holes and cutouts in exterior surfaces shall be made prior to cleaning, priming and painting, where possible, to prevent corrosion. The coach shall be painted prior to installation of exterior lights, windows, mirrors and other items that are applied to the exterior of the coach. Body filler materials may be used for surface dressing, but not for repair of damaged or improperly fitted panels. Paint shall be applied smoothly and evenly with the finished surface free of visible dirt and the following other imperfections: • blisters or bubbles appearing in the topcoat film Section 5 — Page 84 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 • chips, scratches or gouges of the surface finish • cracks in the paint film • craters where paint failed to cover due to surface contamination • overspray • peeling • runs or sags from excessive flow and failure to adhere uniformly to the surface • chemical stains and water spots • dry patches due to incorrect mixing of paint activators • buffing swirls All exterior finished surfaces shall be impervious to diesel fuel, gasoline and commercial cleaning agents. Finished surfaces shall resist damage by controlled applications of commonly used graffiti - removing chemicals. Proper adhesion between the basic surface and successive coats of the original paint shall be measured using an Elcometer adhesion tester as outlined in ASTM D4541-85. Adhesion shall be a minimum 300 ft -lbs. The coach manufacturer shall supply test samples of the exterior surface for each step of the painting process that may be subject to adhesion testing per ASTM G4541-87 and ASTM D4145-85. ASTM D4541-93 may be used for inspection testing during assembly of the vehicle. Standard Contractor exterior paint finish quality. Agencies will provide approved paints, color scheme and graphics. TS -70 DECALS, NUMBERING AND SIGNING Monograms, numbers and other special signing shall be applied to the inside and outside of the coach as required. Signs shall be durable and fade-, chip- and peel -resistant. They may be painted signs, decals or pressure -sensitive appliques. All decals shall be installed per the decal Supplier recommendations. Signs shall be provided in compliance with the ADA requirements defined in 49 C.F.R. Part 38, Subpart B, 38.27. Agencies will provide a list of signs and/or decals that are required above and beyond those specified in federal, state, and local regulations. TS 70.1 PASSENGER INFORMATION ADA priority seating signs as required and defined by 49 C.F.R. shall be provided to identify the seats designated for passengers with disabilities. Requirements for a public information system in accordance with 49 C.F.R. shall be provided. Section 5 — Page 85 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -71 EXTERIOR LIGHTING All exterior lights shall be LED and designed to prevent entry and accumulation of moisture or dust. Lamps, lenses and fixtures shall be interchangeable to the extent practicable. Two hazard lamps at the rear of the coach shall be visible from behind when the engine service doors are opened. Light lenses shall be designed and located to prevent damage when running the vehicle through an automatic coach washer. Contractor to provide details of exterior lighting system. TS 71.1 BACKUP LIGHT/ALARM Visible and audible warnings shall inform following vehicles or pedestrians of reverse operation. Visible reverse operation warning shall conform to SAE Standard J593. Audible reverse operation warning shall conform to SAE Recommended Practice J994 Type C or D. TS 71.2 DOORWAY LIGHTING Lamps at the front and rear passenger doorways (if applicable) shall comply with ADA requirements and shall activate only when the doors open. These lamps shall illuminate the street surface to a level of no less than 1 foot-candle for a distance of 3 ft outward from the outboard edge of the door threshold. The lights may be positioned above or below the lower daylight opening of the windows and shall be shielded to protect passengers' eyes from glare. Lights to be LED if available that meet ADA requirements. TS 71.3 TURN SIGNALS Standard Turn Signals LED Turn -signal lights shall be provided on the front, rear, curb and street sides of the coach in accordance with federal regulations. TS 71.4 HEADLIGHTS Headlamps shall be designed for ease of replacement. Standard OEM headlight installation shall be provided in accordance with federal regulations and contractor is to supply details of headlight installation. Daytime Running Lights Headlamps shall incorporate a daytime running light feature. LED Headlamps shall be LED/halogen, sealed beam. Section 5 — Page 86 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 71.5 BRAKE LIGHTS LED Brake lights shall be provided in accordance with federal regulations Brake lights shall be provided in accordance with federal regulations. Coach shall include red, high and center mount brake lamp(s) along the backside of the coach in addition to the lower brake lamps required under FMVSS. The high and center mount brake lamp(s) shall illuminate steadily with brake application. TS 71.6 SERVICE AREA LIGHTING (INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR) LED lamps shall be provided in the engine and all other compartments where service may be required to generally illuminate the area for night emergency repairs or adjustments. These service areas shall include, but not be limited to, the engine compartment, the communication box, junction/apparatus panels and passenger door operator compartments. Lighting shall be adequate to light the space of the service areas to levels needed to complete typical emergency repairs and adjustments. The service area lamps shall be suitable for the environment in which they are mounted. Engine compartment lamps shall be controlled by a switch mounted near the rear start controls. All other service area lamps shall be controlled by switches mounted on or convenient to the lamp assemblies. Power to the service area lighting shall be programmable. Power shall latch on with activation of the switch and shall be automatically discontinued (timed out) after 30 minutes to prevent damage caused by inadvertently leaving the service area lighting switch in the "on" position after repairs are made. INTERIOR PANELS AND FINISHES TS -72 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Materials shall be selected on the basis of maintenance, durability, appearance, safety, flammability and tactile qualities. Materials shall be strong enough to resist everyday abuse and be vandalism and corrosion resistant. Trim and attachment details shall be kept simple and unobtrusive. Interior trim shall be secured to avoid resonant vibrations under normal operational conditions. Interior surfaces more than 10 in. below the lower edge of the side windows or windshield shall be shaped so that objects placed on them fall to the floor when the coach is parked on a level surface. Any components and other electrical components within close proximity to these surfaces shall also be resistant to this cleaning method. Section 5 — Page 87 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -73 INTERIOR PANELS Panels shall be easily replaceable and tamper resistant. They shall be reinforced, as necessary, to resist vandalism and other rigors of transit coach service. Individual trim panels and parts shall be interchangeable to the extent practicable. TS -73.1 DRIVER'S BARRIER A barrier or bulkhead between the driver and the street -side front passenger seat shall be provided. The barrier shall minimize glare and reflections in the windshield directly in front of the barrier from interior lighting during night operation. Location and shape must permit full seat travel and reclining possibilities that can accommodate the shoulders of a 95th -percentile male. The partition shall have a side return and stanchion to prevent passengers from reaching the driver by standing behind the driver's seat. The lower area between the seat and panel must be accessible to the driver. The partition must be strong enough in conjunction with the entire partition assembly for mounting of such equipment as flare kits, fire extinguishers (1.2 kg), microcomputer, public address amplifier, etc. The panel should be properly attached to minimize noise and rattles. The driver's barrier shall extend from the floor area to the ceiling and from the coach wall to the first stanchion immediately behind the driver to provide security to the driver and to limit passenger conversation. TS 73.2 MODESTY PANELS Sturdy divider panels constructed of durable, unpainted, corrosion -resistant material complementing the interior shall be provided to act as both a physical and visual barrier for seated passengers. Design and installation of modesty panels located in front of forward -facing seats shall include a handhold or grab handle along its top edge. These dividers shall be mounted on the sidewall and shall project toward the aisle no farther than passenger knee projection in longitudinal seats or the aisle side of the transverse seats. Modesty panels shall extend from at least the window opening of the side windows, and those forward of transverse seats shall extend downward to 1 and 1 % in. above the floor. Panels forward of longitudinal seats shall extend to below the level of the seat cushion. Dividers positioned at the doorways, where applicable, shall provide no less than a 2% in. clearance between the modesty panel and a fully open, inward opening door, or the path of a deploying flip -out ramp to protect passengers from being pinched. Modesty panels installed at doorways shall be equipped with grab rails if passenger assists are not provided by other means. The modesty panel and its mounting shall withstand a static force of 250 lbs applied to a 4 X 4 in. area in the center of the panel without permanent visible deformation. IC101011192101 C The entire front end of the coach shall be sealed to prevent debris accumulation behind the dash and to prevent the driver's feet from kicking or fouling wiring and other equipment. The front end shall be free of protrusions that are hazardous to passengers standing at the front of the standee line area of the coach Section 5 — Page 88 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 during rapid decelerations. Paneling across the front of the coach and any trim around the driver's compartment shall be formed metal or composite material. Composite dash panels shall be reinforced as necessary, vandal -resistant and replaceable. All colored, painted and plated parts forward of the driver's barrier shall be finished with a surface that reduces glare. Any mounted equipment must have provision to support the weight of equipment. TS 73.4 REAR BULKHEAD The rear bulkhead and rear interior surfaces shall be material suitable for exterior skin; painted and finished to exterior quality; or paneled with melamine -type material, composite, scratch -resistant plastic or carpeting and trimmed with stainless steel, aluminum or composite. The rear bulkhead paneling shall be contoured to fit the ceiling, side walls and seat backs so that any litter or trash will tend to fall to the floor or seating surface when the coach is on a level surface. Any air vents in this area shall be louvered to reduce airflow noise and to reduce the probability of trash or liter being thrown or drawn through the grille. If it is necessary to remove the panel to service components located on the rear bulkhead, then the panel shall be hinged or shall be able to be easily removed and replaced. Grilles where access to or adjustment of equipment is required shall be heavy duty and designed to minimize damage and limit unauthorized access. TS 73.5 HEADLINING Ceiling panels shall be made of durable, corrosion resistant, easily cleanable material. Headlining shall be supported to prevent buckling, drumming or flexing and shall be secured without loose edges. Headlining materials shall be treated or insulated to prevent marks due to condensation where panels are in contact with metal members. Moldings and trim strips, as required to make the edges tamperproof, shall be stainless steel, aluminum or plastic, colored to complement the ceiling material. Headlining panels covering operational equipment that is mounted above the ceiling shall be on hinges for ease of service but retained to prevent inadvertent opening. TS 73.6 FASTENING Interior panels shall be attached so that there are no exposed unfinished or rough edges or rough surfaces. Fasteners should be corrosion resistant. Panels and fasteners shall not be easily removable by passengers. Exposed interior fasteners should be minimized, and where required shall be tamper resistant. TS 73.7 INSULATION Any insulation material used between the inner and outer panels shall minimize the entry and/or retention of moisture. Insulation properties shall be unimpaired during the service life of the coach. Any insulation material used inside the engine compartment shall not absorb or retain oils or water and shall be designed to prevent casual damage that may occur during maintenance operations. The combination of inner and outer panels on the sides, roof, wheel wells and ends of the coach, and any material used between these panels, shall provide a thermal insulation sufficient to meet the interior Section 5 — Page 89 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 temperature requirements. The coach body shall be thoroughly sealed so that the driver or passengers cannot feel drafts during normal operations with the passenger doors closed. FTA Docket 90-A All insulation materials shall comply with the Recommended Fire Safety Practices defined in FTA Docket 90-A, dated October 20, 1993. TS 73.8 FLOOR COVERING The floor covering shall have a non-skid walking surface that remains effective in all weather conditions. The floor covering, as well as transitions of flooring material to the main floor and to the entrance and exit area, shall be smooth and present no tripping hazards. Seams shall be sealed/welded per manufacturer's specifications. The standee line shall be approximately 2 in. wide and shall extend across the coach aisle. The color and pattern shall be consistent throughout the floor covering. Any areas on the floor that are not intended for standees, such as areas "swept" during passenger door operation, shall be clearly and permanently marked. The floor shall be easily cleaned and shall be arranged to minimize debris accumulation. A one-piece center strip shall extend from the vertical wall of the rear settee between the aisle sides of transverse seats to the standee line. If the floor is of a bi-level construction, then the center strip shall be one piece at each level. The covering between the center strip and the wheel housings may be separate pieces. At the rear door, however, a separate strip as wide as the door shall extend from the center strip to the outboard edge of the rear/exit area. The floor under the seats shall be covered with smooth surface flooring material. The floor covering shall closely fit the sidewall in a fully sealed butt joint or extend to the top of the cove. TS 73.9 INTERIOR LIGHTING The light source shall be located to minimize windshield glare, with distribution of the light focused primarily on the passengers' reading plane while casting sufficient light onto the advertising display. The lighting system may be designed to form part of or the entire air distribution duct. The lens material shall be translucent polycarbonate. Lenses shall be designed to effectively "mask" the light source. Lenses shall be sealed to inhibit incursion of dust and insects yet be easily removable for service. Access panels shall be provided to allow servicing of components located behind light panels. If necessary, the entire light fixture shall be hinged. TS 73.10 PASSENGER First Row Lights The first light on each side (behind the driver and the front door) is normally turned on only when the front door is opened, in "night run" and "night park." As soon as the door closes, these lights shall go out. These lights shall be turned on at any time if the switch is in the "on" position. Section 5 — Page 90 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 All interior lighting shall be turned off whenever the transmission selector is in reverse and the engine run switch is in the "on" position. The interior lighting design shall require the approval of the Agency. LED lights. TS 73.11 DRIVER'S AREA The driver's area shall have a light to provide general illumination, and it shall illuminate the half of the steering wheel nearest the driver to a level of 5 to 10 foot-candles. TS 73.12 SEATING AREAS A minimum 10 -module parcel rack without dividers and compartment doors shall be furnished over all two -passenger seating positions except in the wheelchair door area. Retention cords shall run the length of the rack housing. The parcel rack edge, running along the full length of the aisle, shall incorporate a handhold for use by standees. Passenger headroom, measured from the rack end to the top of the seat headrest, shall be a minimum 17 in. (432 mm). Interior window post caps shall be ABS, thermo formed plastic, off-white in color to provide a clean finished appearance. The interior of the rack shall be vinyl covered aluminum to complement the interior. Parcel racks shall be supported by polycarbonate glass filled hangers spaced approximately 40 in. (1016 mm) apart. Total capacity shall be a minimum 109 ft3 (3 m3) to allow for ample storage space for carry -on items. Passenger service modules mounted on the underside of the parcel rack shall include individually controlled and adjustable LED passenger reading lights; an exit signal push button, red in color; and individual air distribution outlets. These outlets shall be adjustable from fully closed to fully open position. A minimum of 26 speakers shall also be provided in the cluster panels for the driver -controlled public address system. Speakers shall broadcast, in a clear tone, announcements that are clearly perceived from all seat positions at approximately the same volume level. Passengers utilizing the securement systems shall be provided identical amenities as provided for all other passengers, except that the parcel rack shall be deleted in the area of the wheelchair lift door. Separate and independent notification will be provided on the dashboard indicator panel for stop request notification from securement positions. TS 73.13 VESTIBULES/DOORS Floor surface in the aisles shall be a minimum of 2 foot-candles, and the vestibule area in accordance with ADA requirements. TS 73.14 STEP LIGHTING Step lighting for the intermediate steps between lower and upper floor levels shall be a minimum of 4 foot-candles and shall illuminate in all engine run positions. The step lighting shall be low profile to minimize tripping and snagging hazards for passengers and shall be shielded as necessary to protect passengers' eyes from glare. Section 5 — Page 91 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS 73.15 FAREBOX LIGHTING Farebox Light A light fixture shall be mounted in the ceiling above the farebox location. The fixture shall be capable of projecting a concentrated beam of light on the farebox. This light will automatically come on whenever the front doors are opened and the run switch is in the "night run" or "night park" position. A switch easily accessible to the driver shall be provided to disable farebox light. TS -74 FARE COLLECTION Space and structural provisions shall be made for installation of currently available fare collection devices, which shall be as far forward as practicable. Location of the fare collection device shall not restrict traffic in the vestibule, including wheelchairs if a front door loading device is used, and shall allow the driver to easily reach the farebox controls and to view the fare register. The farebox shall not restrict access to the driver area, shall not restrict operation of driver controls and shall not—either by itself or in combination with stanchions, transfer mounting, cutting and punching equipment, or route destination signs—restrict the driver's field of view per SAE Recommended Practice J1050. The location and mounting of the fare collection device shall allow use, without restriction, by passengers. The farebox location shall permit accessibility to the vault for easy manual removal or attachment of suction devices. Meters and counters on the farebox shall be readable on a daily basis. The floor under the farebox shall be reinforced as necessary to provide a sturdy mounting platform and to prevent shaking of the farebox. Contractor shall provide fare collection installation layout to the Agencies for approval. Transfer mounting, cutting and punching equipment shall be located in a position convenient to the driver. Agency will specify a farebox for Contractor to install. TS -75 INTERIOR ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS Access for maintenance and replacement of equipment shall be provided by panels and doors that appear to be an integral part of the interior. Access doors shall be hinged with gas props or over -center springs, where practical, to hold the doors out of the mechanic's way. Panels shall prevent entry of mechanism lubricant into the coach interior. All fasteners that retain access panels shall be captive in the cover. TS 75.1 FLOOR PANELS Access openings in the floor shall be sealed to prevent entry of fumes and water into the coach interior. Flooring material at or around access openings shall be flush with the floor and shall be edge -bound with stainless steel or another material that is acceptable to the Agency to prevent the edges from coming loose. Access openings shall be asymmetrical so that reinstalled flooring shall be properly aligned. Fasteners shall tighten flush with the floor. The number of special fastener tools required for panel and access door fasteners shall be minimized. Section 5 – Page 92 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 Passenger Accommodations TS -76 PASSENGER SEATING TS 76.1 ARRANGEMENTS AND SEAT STYLE Forward -Facing Seat Configuration Passenger seats shall be arranged in forward -facing configuration with a minimum of 55 reclining and cushioned passenger seats. Contractor to provide seat layout to the Agency once the Agency has provided the seat manufacturer and model number. Minimum 48 of seats with restroom option. Agencies to specify options such as rest room, cup holders, head rests, foot rests, etc. Prices for options should be quoted as separate line items. TS 76.2 HIP -TO -KNEE ROOM Hip -to -knee room measured from the center of the seating position, from the front of one seat back horizontally across the highest part of the seat to a vertical surface immediately in front, shall be a minimum of 26 in. At all seating positions in paired transverse seats immediately behind other seating positions, hip -to -knee room shall be no less than 27 in. TS 76.3 FOOT ROOM Foot room, measured at the floor forward from a point vertically below the front of the seat cushion, shall be no less than 14 in. Seats immediately behind the wheel housings and modesty panels may have foot room reduced. TS 76.4 AISLES The aisle between the seats shall be no less than 14 in. wide at seated passenger hip height. TS 76.5 STRUCTURE AND DESIGN Passenger seats shall be arranged in a transverse, forward -facing configuration. No more than 10 seated positions shall be lost on any coach configuration to accommodate two wheelchair passengers occupying the securement positions. Each transverse, forward -facing seat, except the rear seats, shall accommodate two adult passengers. Floor seat tracks shall be stainless steel and shall be welded to the coach frame and be nearly flush with the finished floor. The wall tracks shall be stainless steel or aluminum and shall be bolted or riveted to the sidewall. Seats shall be commuter coach reclining seats. Seat frames shall be constructed of high-strength, fatigue -resistant, welded steel with a durable powder -coated, corrosion -resistant colored finish that Section 5 — Page 93 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 complements the coach interior. The seat frame shall be wall mounted with heavy gauge steel brackets and shall be attached to the coach floor with a heavy duty stainless steel T pedestal. The seat back shall recline 5 in. (127 mm) maximum with an infinite number of stops. The reclining seat backs shall be provided with a dress -up feature to facilitate coach cleaning. Seat width shall be nominal 40.50 in. (1029 mm). Aisle shall not be less than 14 in. (356 mm) wide. 1 &W&K-4=81010611 W181 Eel 0Ie10I111LTA VA r 21 V /e1 %? Seat cushions shall be supported by steel serpentine springs. Seat covering shall be Holdsworth, Lantal or similar high-quality wool fabric. Typical seat covering weight shall be 24 oz. (680 g)/sq. yd. Overall composition shall typically be 54 percent wool, 9 percent nylon and 37 percent cotton. Pile composition shall typically be 85 percent wool and 15 percent nylon. Backing composition shall typically be 100 percent cotton. Abrasion from a 28 oz. (794 g) loading shall not affect appearance with 60,000 rubs. The front face of the seat upright and side boxing of cushions shall be covered with Holdsworth, Lantal or other similar wool fabric to complement the seat cushion. Backrest fabric shall be rugged carpet material. Seat armrest shall be dark gray in color. Seat foam padding shall be polyurethane. Seat upholstery shall utilize zippers or Velcro that allows them be removed from the seat cushions for cleaning/replacement purposes. Agencies shall select seat fabric TS 76.7.1 FRONT DOOR Forward of the front wheels and under direct observation of the driver TS 76.8 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION Structure of the doors, their attachments, inside and outside trim panels and any mechanism exposed to the elements shall be corrosion resistant. Door panel construction shall be of corrosion -resistant metal or reinforced non-metallic composite materials. When fully opened, the doors shall provide a firm support and shall not be damaged if used as an assist by passengers during ingress or egress. Door edges shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of exterior moisture, noise, dirt and air elements from entering the passenger compartment, to the maximum extent possible based on door types. The closing edge of each door panel shall have no less than 2 in. of soft weather stripping. The doors, when closed, shall be effectively sealed, and the hard surfaces of the doors shall be at least 4 in. apart (not applicable to single doors).The combined weather seal and window glazing elements of the front door shall not exceed 10 degrees of binocular obstruction of the driver's view through the closed door. Minimum doorway width per ADA requirements. TS 76.9 DOOR GLAZING The upper section of both front and rear doors shall be glazed for no less than 45 percent of the respective door opening area of each section. The lower section of the front door shall be glazed for no less than 25 percent of the door opening area of the section. Section 5 — Page 94 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 Door glazing shall be easily replaceable. TS 76.9.1 ACTUATOR The nominal door opening and closing speed shall be in the 3-5 second range. The maximum door opening and closing speeds will be regulated using fixed, maintenance free orifices and airline sizes. If required, door speeds can be decreased with the addition of a flow -restricting device. Actuators and the complete door mechanism shall be concealed from passengers but shall be easily accessible for servicing. TS 76.10 EMERGENCY OPERATION In the event of an emergency, it shall be possible to manually open doors designated as emergency exits from inside the coach using a force of no more than 25 lbs after actuating an unlocking device. The unlocking device shall be clearly marked as an emergency -only device and shall require two distinct actions to actuate. The respective door emergency unlocking device shall be accessible from the doorway area. The unlocking device shall be easily reset by the operator without special tools or opening the door mechanism enclosure. Doors that are required to be classified as "emergency exits" shall meet the requirements of FMVSS 217. TS 76.11 DOOR CONTROL The door control shall be located in the operator's area within the hand reach envelope described in SAE Recommended Practice J287, "Driver Hand Control Reach." The driver's door control shall provide tactile feedback to indicate commanded door position and resist inadvertent door actuation. TS 76.12 DOOR CONTROLLER Doors shall be operated by push-button controls, conveniently located and operable within the driver's reach. The push buttons shall be labeled. A control or valve in the operator's compartment shall shut off the power to, and/or dump the power from, the front door mechanism to permit manual operation of the front door with the coach shut down. TS -77 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS TS -77.1 LIFT A travel lift and two forward -facing mobility device securement areas shall be provided. The lift assembly shall comply with all current ADA and FMVSS 403 and 404 requirements. The lift shall be installed below the floor line at the number 2 right-hand luggage bay on the curbside of the coach. The lift shall be controlled by a dash -mounted toggle switch and a rear lift area toggle switch, and operated by up/down switches on a pendant mounted to the lift support bracket inside the number 2 baggage bay. The lift restraint belt must be buckled before the lift can be raised or lowered. The safety Section 5 — Page 95 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 interlock circuit can be energized to operate the lift only if the transmission is in neutral, the park brake is applied, engine fast idle is on, the dash -mounted master switch is on, the lift secondary switch is on, and the lift restraint belt is buckled. The wheelchair loading system shall provide safe, comfortable and rapid ingress and egress for applicable passengers from the street level or a curb. When not in use, the lift shall stow in the luggage bay. The lift mechanism shall include a threshold warning device to provide "passenger on platform" information and to prevent stowing the lift platform when a passenger is sensed. The outer barrier shall be automatically controlled and shall be such that it cannot be overridden by the loading system operator. A dash -mounted indicator light shall be provided and shall be illuminated when the loading system is activated. The interlock shall apply, the coach shall not move and the engine throttle shall be disabled whenever the wheelchair loading system is activated. If the lift door is open or ajar, the interlock shall remain engaged. Brackets, clamps, screw heads and other fasteners used on the passenger assists shall be anodized aluminum or stainless steel and shall be flush with the surface and free of rough edges. The lift control mounted on the lift structure shall have push button up/down switches. The toggle electrical supply switch shall be located in close proximity to the controller. This toggle switch must be turned on prior to the lift operation. All lift control switches shall be permanently labeled. Decals shall not be permitted. The stow guard switch shall be red in color, and the stow/deploy switch shall be black in color. These switches shall be incorporated in a handheld pendant. The lift shall include a hinged platform to bridge the coach floor to the lift platform. The bridge shall be hinged and locked in an upward position to act as a barrier when the lift is in use. The bridge shall be hinged and locked in an upward position to act as a barrier when the lift is in use. The bridge shall also allow lift passenger ingress/egress easily from the platform. Lift travel speeds and lift operation shall be adjusted to the lift manufacturer's specifications upon completion of the lift installation in to each coach and before coach delivery. The individual handrails shall incorporate a visual aid to ensure that they are folded in the proper order. The lift shall include an emergency system in case of driver operation malfunction. Should an emergency situation occur, the lift operator shall release the push-button switch on the controller to immediately stop the lift cycle. The emergency hand pump handles and pump shall be located in an enclosed box at the rear wall of the number 1 right-hand luggage bay door. The handle shall be stored adjacent to the pump to allow immediate usage. TS -77.2 LIFT DOOR The lift door shall be a single leaf design that operates in a sliding track mounted both above and below the door leaf. The door shall open by sliding to the rear of the coach and shall remain on a horizontal plane throughout the opening and closing process. No pin -hinged doors shall be provided. The transmission must be in neutral and the parking brake activated for the lift to operate. The accelerator shall be automatically disabled and the fast idle system activated when either the lift master switch is turned on or the lift door is open in order to provide maximum safety and security. These features shall be wired to the lift master switch to allow activation only when the transmission is in neutral. The coach directional (hazard) lights will also flash on/off. After the lift operation is completed, the lift shall be Section 5 — Page 96 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 properly stored and secured, with the access door closed and the lift master switch at the dash in the "off' position in order to move the coach. The lift door shall have a window in line with the other passenger windows and shall not detract from the appearance of the coach. The door latch mechanism shall be located in the lower section of the door so that operators in the 5th percentile female range can operate the lift door. The lift storage door shall not block the visual observation to the lift assembly while utilizing the manual override mode of the lift. A lift door design consisting of a horizontally hinged lift platform egress door mounted within a vertical motion pantograph luggage door is a preferred design. TS 77.3 LIFT WIDTH The installation of the lift to the coach structure as well as the installation of the lift door into the sidewall of the coach shall not affect the structural integrity of the coach. The parcel rack module above the wheelchair lift platform area shall be permanently removed to provide additional headroom. The modified rack shall be professionally finished at all ends. A threshold warning module with a red warning light and an acoustic sensor shall be mounted in the ceiling structure above the wheelchair lift entrance doorway. The heating and air ducts shall be rerouted around the lift area to ensure proper interior air conditioning/heating airflow and distribution. A passenger chime tape switch shall be mounted on the sidewall at the two wheelchair securement positions. Each coach shall have adequate information decals installed that detail the proper lift operation in both the normal and manual modes of operation. TS -77.4 LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS Lighting for the lift areas shall be designed to meet Title 13 and ADA and FMVSS 404 standards. Lighting shall be provided to effectively illuminate the lift area. Light shall be wired through the lift master toggle switch on the driver's dash and shall automatically illuminate when this switch is in the "on" position. The lighting design shall minimize the effect of glare on passengers entering the coach through the wheelchair lift door. During lift operation, the street surface shall be illuminated to a minimum of 6 candlepower a distance of 3 ft beyond the external dimensions of the lift platform once deployed and lowered. Additional lighting shall be provided to ensure illumination of the instruction placard and the manual override pump when it is in use. TS -77.5 SECU REM ENT SYSTEM The vehicle interior shall permit the securement of two forward -facing wheelchair passengers in which the primary position shall be on the street side of the coach directly across from the lift. Securement areas shall be a minimum 30 X 48 in. as required by the ADA. Section 5 — Page 97 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 A separate three-point belt securement shall be provided to effectively secure wheelchair passengers. To further secure the passenger during the lift operation, a retractable seat belt strap shall be provided at the ingress/egress area of the lift platform. A minimum 10.5 in. high barrier shall also be provided at the rear of the lift area for additional passenger protection. TS -77.6 ROOF VENTILATION/ESCAPE HATCHES Two roof ventilators shall be provided and designed to perform as escape hatches. One ventilator/escape hatch shall be located in the roof at the front of the coach, another in the roof at the rear of the coach. SIGNAGE AND COMMUNICATION k&W-Al*11111111ILI Fill 9Eel ki69[r]ki6y A destination sign system shall be furnished on the front, and on the right side near the front door. Dash and rear sign should be an available option if requested by an agency. Contractor to provide list of optional signs to be used. All signs shall be controlled via a single human -machine interface (HMI). In the absence of a single mobile data terminal (MDT), the HMI shall be conveniently located for the coach driver within reach of the seated driver. A heavy-duty "stop request' signal button shall be installed at every seat location except the rear cross seat. TS -78.2 SIGNAL CHIME COMMUTER COACH A single "stop requested" chime shall sound when the system is first activated. A double chime shall sound anytime the system is activated from wheelchair passenger areas. Exit signals located in the wheelchair passenger area shall be no higher than 4 ft above the floor. Instructions shall be provided to clearly indicate the function and operation of these signals. TS -79 COMMUNICATIONS TS -79.1 CAMERA SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Provide all wiring and mounting locations for a multi -camera surveillance system for the later provision of and installation of cameras, recorder, microphone, etc. The Procuring Agency to specify the camera system cable to be installed, the locations for pre -wiring and the quantity. Section 5 — Page 98 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 TS -79.2 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM A public address system shall be provided on each coach for facilitating radio system and driver - originated announcements to passengers. TS -79.3 SPEAKERS Sufficient interior loudspeakers shall be provided, semi -flush mounted, on alternate sides of the coach passenger compartment, installed with proper phasing. Total impedance seen at the input connecting end shall be 8 Ohms. Mounting shall be accomplished with riv-nuts and machine screws. TS -79.4 AUTOMATIC PASSENGER COUNTER (APC) An APC system shall be available as an option and priced as a line item. Agency to provide details of APC system, including installation locations and number of coaches to be equipped. TS -79.5 RADIO HANDSET AND CONTROL SYSTEM TS -79.6 DRIVER'S SPEAKER Each coach shall have a recessed speaker in the ceiling panel above the driver. This speaker shall be the same component used for the speakers in the passenger compartment. It shall have 8 Ohms of impedance. TS -79.7 HANDSET Contractor will install a handset for driver use. TS -79.8 DRIVER DISPLAY UNIT (DDU) Contractor shall install a driver display unit as close to the driver's instrument panel as possible. TS -79.9 EMERGENCY ALARM Contractor shall install an emergency alarm that is accessible to the driver but hidden from view. END TECHNICAL PERFORMANCE SECTION Section 5 — Page 99 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated8/29/13 VICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY TECHNICAL PROPOSAL COMMUTER COACHES MCI D4500 Reliability Driven - October 31, 2013 Mr. Kevin Kane Executive Director Victor Valley Transit Authority 17150 Smoketree St. Hesperia, CA 92345-8305 Subject: Request For Proposals (RFP) No. VVTA-2013-04 Dear Mr. Kane: In response to Request For Proposals (RFP) No. VVTA-2013-04 Motor Coach Industries, Inc. (MCI) is pleased to submit its RFP 2013-04 Technical Proposal for Commuter Coaches. This letter and the documents attached hereto constitute MCI's Technical Proposal. Attachment #1 Technical Proposal Attachment #2 References and Non -Priced Information Attachment #3 Forms, excluding Pricing & Warranty Information Attachment #4 Supporting Data Technical Proposal & Product Evaluation (Items A thru P) Attachment # 5 Supporting Data Proposer Qualifications Statement (Items A thru J) We appreciate the opportunity to submit this bid and look forward to being called upon to fulfill your equipment needs. Sincerely, Pat ck Scully Executive Vice !si-Sales and Marketing Motor Coach Industries 1200 East Oakton Street I Des Plaines, Illinois 60018 1847 285 2000 1 866 624 2622 Toll Free www.mcicoach.com IN Reliability Driverf ATTACHMENT # 1 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL 1.1.5.27 OFFER COVER SHEET Proposer shall complete the following form and include same in BOTH the technical and price proposals. By execution below Proposer hereby offers to furnish equipment and services as specified in Victor Valley Transit Authority's Request for Proposals No. RFP 2013-04 at the prices set out in the pricing schedule. Proposer Company Name: Street Address: City, State, Zip: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. 200 East Oakton Street Des Plaines, IL 60018 Signature of Authorized Signer: - Patrick Scully Title: Executive Vice President Sales and Marketing Phone: 847-285-2354 Section 1 — Page 56 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.25 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL Proposer shall complete the following form and include same in the Technical proposal. By execution below Proposer hereby agrees to furnish the Commuter Coaches, related equipment and services as specified in Victor Valley Transit Authority's Request for Proposals No. 2013-04, submitted in response to the technical portion of the solicitation. VVTA - RFP 2013-04 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL PROPOSER COMPANY NAME: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. STREET ADDRESS: 200 East Oakton Street CITY RTATF_ 71P CODE Des Plaines, IL 60018 AUTHORIZED OFFICER: Patrick Scully COMPANY OFFICER TITLE: Executive Vice President Sales and Marketing SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED OFFICER. CONTACT INFORMATION: Dave Dorr OFFICE PHONE NUMBER: 818-519-5032 EMAIL ADDRESS: dave.dorr@mcicoach.com Section 1 — Page 54 VVFA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 5.0 TECHNICAL AND PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS TS- 01 THROUGH TS -79 Section 5 — Page 1 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TECHNICAL AND PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.0 TECHNICAL AND PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................................1 TS -1 SCOPE........................................................................................................................................................................ 10 TS -2 DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................. 10 TS -3 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS..................................................................................................................................... 16 TS -4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................................................. 16 TS -5 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................................................... 17 TS -5.1 WEIGHT ................................................... ............................................... —....................... ___ ............. ........... 17 TS -5.2 CAPACITY..........................................................................................................................................................17 TS -5.3 SERVICE LIFE....................................................................................................................................................._ 17 TS -5.4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ......................................... .................................................. I......................... 17 TS -5.5 INTERCHANGEABILITY....................................................................................................................................... 18 TS -5.6 TRAINING..........................................................................................................................................................18 TS -5.6.1 TECHNICAL/SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES......................................................................................................18 TS -5.7 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT.............................................................................................................................19 TS -5.8 NOISE ....... ..................................................................................... .. .......................................... ........................ 19 TS -5.8.1 INTERIOR NOISE............................................................................................................................................19 TS -5.8.2 EXTERIOR NOISE........................................................................................................................................... 19 TS -5.9 FIRE SAFETY....................................................................................................................................................... 19 TS -5.9.1 MATERIALS................................................................................................................................................... 19 TS -5.10 FIRE SUPPRESSION ......... .................................................................... ......................... ................................ I..... 20 TS -5.11 RESPECT FOR THE ENVIRONMENT....................................................................................................................20 TS -6 PHYSICAL SIZE........ •.......................................................................................................................I.................... 20 TS -6.1 COACH LENGTH.........................................................................................—.....................................................21 TS -6.2 COACH WIDTH........................................................................................................—....................................... 21 TS -6.3 COACH HEIGHT................................................................................................................................................. 21 TS -6.4.1 STEP HEIGHT...............................................................................................................................................- 21 TS -6.5 UNDERBODY CLEARANCE................................................................................................................................. 21 TS -6.6 RAMP CLEARANCES .................................... ..................... .............................................. ............ I ................. ..... 21 TS -6.7 GROUND CLEARANCE.......................................................................................................................................22 TS -6.8 FLOOR HEIGHT..................................................................................................................................................23 TS -6.9 INTERIOR HEADROOM......................................................................................................................................23 TS -7 POWER REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................................ 23 TS7.1 TOP SPEED........................................................................................................................................................23 TS7.2 GRADABILITY......................................................................................................................... ............................24 TS 7.2.1 ACCELERATION ............................ .......... ..................... ............................................ ............. I........................24 TS7.2.2 NON-HYBRID............................................................ ................................... ............ .......... I........................... 24 TS7.3 OPERATING RANGE...........................................................................................................................................24 TS7.3.2 CNG............................................................................................—..................................—........................... 25 Section 5 — Page 2 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -8 FUEL ECONOMY (DESIGN OPERATING PROFILE)....................................................................................................... 25 TS -9 ENGINE......................................................................................................................................................................25 TS9.1 ENGINE (CNG)...............................................................................,................................................................... 26 TS -10 COOLING SYSTEMS................................................................................................................................................ 26 TS10.1 ENGINE COOLING.............................................................................................................................................. 26 TS10.1.1 COOLANT...................................................................................................................................................... 26 TS10.1.2 DRIVE DESIGN...............................................................................................................................................27 TS10.1.3 MOUNTING ............................................... ................................................... ........................... .._......... ...... .... 27 TS10.2 TRANSMISSION COOLING.................................................................................................................................27 TS -11 TRANSMISSION (CONVENTIONAL POWERTRAIN)................................................................................................. 27 TS -12 RETARDER (CNG).............................................................................................................:.................................. 28 TS -13 ENGINE BRAKE (DIESEL)........................................................................................................................................ 28 TS -14 MOUNTING .... ............................... —........................................................................................... ... —................... 28 TS14.1 SERVICE .............................. —................... ..................................................... ..................... ............... ................28 TS -15 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS.............................................................................................................................................29 TS15.1 FLUID LINES.......................................................................................................................................................29 TS15.2 FITTINGS AND CLAMPS . ........................... ................................................................................................ I ...... .. 29 TS15.3 CHARGE AIR PIPING .................... ............................ ....... ,.................................................................................. 30 TS -16 RADIATOR..............................................................................................................................................................30 TS -17 OIL AND HYDRAULIC LINES.................................................................................................................................... 30 TS -18 FUEL.......................................................................................................................................................................30 TS18.1 FUEL LINES........................................................................................................................................................30 TS18.1.1 FUEL LINES, DIESEL....................................................................................................................................... 31 TS18.1.2 FUEL LINES, CNG........................................................................................................................................... 31 TS18.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION........................................................................................................................... 32 TS18.2.1 DIESEL FUEL TANK(S)................................... .............. —................................... ................................... I......... 32 TS 18.2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION, CNG............................................................................................................. 32 TS -19 EMISSIONS AND EXHAUST..................................................................................................................................... 34 TS19.1 EXHAUST EMISSIONS........................................................................................................................................ 34 TS19.2 EXHAUST SYSTEM............................................................................................................................................. 35 TS19.3 EXHAUST AFTER -TREATMENT ............................................................................................................................35 TS 19.4 PARTICULATE AFTER -TREATMENT (DIESEL)......................................................................................................35 TS -20 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................35 TS20.1 DESIGN .................................................. —............................................................................................ .............35 TS -21 ALTOONA TESTING................................................................................................................................................ 35 TS21.1 STRUCTURAL VALIDATION................................................................................................................................ 36 TS -22 DISTORTION...........................................................................................................................................................36 TS -23 RESONANCE AND VIBRATION................................................................................................................................36 TS23.1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT BULKHEADS..............................................................................................................36 Section 5 — Page 3 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS23.2 CRASHWORTHINESS.........................................................................................................................................36 TS -24 CORROSION...........................................................................................................................................................37 TS -25 TOWING................................................................................................................................................................ 37 TS -26 JACKING.................................................................................................................................................................37 TS -27 HOISTING...............................................................................................................................................................38 TS -28 FLOOR....................................................................................................................................................................38 TS28.1 DESIGN.......................................................................................—.1......—.......................................1................38 TS28.2 CONSTRUCTION............................................................:...................................................................................38 TS -29 PLATFORMS...........................................................................................................................................................39 TS29.1 DRIVER'S AREA-......... ............................... 11 ....................... I ................................................. I ............... I ...... 1.11, 39 TS29.2 FAREBOX..............................................................................................................................I............................ 39 TS -30 WHEEL HOUSING...............................................................................................................................I................. 1.39 TS30.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ............................... ..... ................. ...................................................... I............... 39 TS -31 SUSPENSION..........................................................................................................................................................39 TS31.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................ 39 TS31.2 ALIGNMENT......................................................................................................................................................39 TS 31.3 SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS.. ........................... ............................................. ........................................ 40 TS31.3.1 SUSPENSION TRAVEL....................................................................................................................................40 TS31.3.2 DAMPING......................................................................................................................................................40 TS31.3.3 LUBRICATION................................................................................................................................................40 TS31.3.4 KNEELING...................................................................................................................................................... 40 TS -32 WHEELS AND TIRES............................................................................................................................................... 41 TS32.1 WHEELS.............................................................................................................................................................41 TS32.2 TIRES ................................ .... .... ..................................................................... ......... ..... .......... I........................... 41 TS -33 STEERING...............................................................................................................................................................41 TS33.1 STEERING AND TAG AXLES................................................................................................................................41 TS33.2 STEERING WHEEL..............................................................................................................................................42 TS33.2.1 TURNING EFFORT.........................................................................................................................................42 TS33.2.2 STEERING WHEEL, GENERAL......................................................................................................................... 42 TS33.2.3 STEERING COLUMN TILT............................................................................................................................... 42 TS 33.2.4 STEERING WHEEL TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT.............................................................................................. 42 TS -34 DRIVEAXLE............................................................................................................................................................43 TS34.1 NON -DRIVE AXLE ........... ....... ............ ............ ..—................. ........ ...................... -...... ......... . ... .,............ .._.......... . 43 TS -35 TAG AXLES (COMMUTER COACH)......................................................................................................................... 43 TS -36 TURNING RADIUS.................................................................................................................................................. 44 TS -37 BRAKES.................................................................................................................................................................. 45 TS37.1 SERVICE BRAKE.......................................................... ....................... ........................... .................... I................ 45 TS37.2 ACTUATION.......................................................................................................................................................45 TS37.3 FRICTION MATERIAL.........................................................................................................................................45 TS37.4 HUBS AND DISCS............................................................................................................................................... 45 Section 5 — Page 4 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS37.5 PARKING/EMERGENCY BRAKE ................ ...................... I............ I...................................................................... 45 TS -38 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM............................................................................................................................................. 46 TS38.1 GENERAL........................................................................................—................................................................46 TS38.2 AIR COMPRESSOR ..................................... ..... ................................................................. ...................... I ......... .. 46 TS38.3 AIR LINES AND FITTINGS................................................................................................................................... 46 TS38.4 AIR RESERVOIRS................................................................................................................................................ 47 TS38.5 AIR SYSTEM DRYER...........................................................................................................................................47 TS -39 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................................................................47 TS39.1 MODULAR DESIGN ................ ____ ......................... —....................... —, ............ ............................................... 48 TS -40 ENVIRONMENTAL AND MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................... 48 TS40.1 HARDWARE MOUNTING...................................................................................................................................49 TS -41 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................49 TS41.1 BATTERIES.............................................................................................................................................• 49 TS41.1.1 LOW -VOLTAGE BATTERIES (24 V) ................ ................... ........................................................................ ..,...49 TS41.1.2 BATTERY CABLES...........................................................................................................................................50 TS41.1.3 JUMP START ........... ____ ............ ............ ........................ ............ ............ I .................................... 1.1...11.......... 50 TS41.1.4 BATTERY COMPARTMENT............................................................................................................................ 50 TS 41.1.5 AUXILIARY ELECTRONIC POWER SUPPLY...................................................................................................... 52 TS41.1.6 MASTER BATTERY SWITCH... .......................... I. ............................................................................................ 53 TS 41.1.7 LOW -VOLTAGE GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION.......................................................................................53 TS41.1.8 CIRCUIT PROTECTION...................................................................................................................................53 TS41.2 GROUNDS..........................................................................................................................................................54 TS 41.3 LOW VOLTAGE/LOW CURRENT WIRING AND TERMINALS...............................................................................54 TS41.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........... ............ ......... ................................................................. .............................. 55 TS41.5 ELECTRICAL COMPARTMENTS .......................................... —............ .......................................... ....................... 55 TS -42 GENERAL ELECTRONIC REQUIREMENTS ................... ................... —....................................................................... 56 TS42.1 WIRING AND TERMINALS..................................................................................................................................56 TS 42.1.1 DISCRETE 1/0 (INPUTS/OUTPUTS)................................................................................................................ 56 TS42.1.2 SHIELDING .............................................. ,...... ............. .............................................................. ........... ......... 56 TS42.1.3 COMMUNICATIONS...................................................................................................................................... 56 TS42.1.4 RADIO FREQUENCY (RF)............................................................................................................................... 57 TS42.1.5 AUDIO ................................................... ............................................ ................. ............. .............................. 57 TS -43 MULTIPLEXING......................................................................................................................................................57 TS43.1 GENERAL...... ................................................................................................... ................ 57 TS43.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.................................................................................................................................57 43.2.1 1/0 SIGNALS......................................................................................................................................................57 TS -44 DATA COMMUNICATIONS..................................................................................................................................... 58 TS44.1 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................................58 TS44.2 DRIVETRAIN LEVEL............................................................................................................................................58 TS 44.2.1 DIAGNOSTICS, FAULT DETECTION AND DATA ACCESS................................................................................ 58 TS44.2.2 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE)................................................................................................................ 58 TS44.3 MULTIPLEX LEVEL..............................................................................................................................................59 TS44.3.1 DATA ACCESS................................................................................................................................................ 59 Section 5 — Page 5 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 44.3.2 DIAGNOSTICS AND FAULT DETECTION......................................................................................................... 59 TS 44.3.3 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE)................................................................................................................ 59 TS44.4 ELECTRONIC NOISE CONTROL................................................................................................................................ 60 TS -45 DRIVER'S AREA CONTROLS.................................................................................................................................... 60 TS45.1 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................................60 TS45.2 GLARE............................................................................................................................................................. 60 TS45.3 VISORS/SUN SHADES......................................................................................................................... ........... 60 TS45.4 DRIVER'S CONTROLS......................................................................................................................................... 61 TS 45.5 NORMAL COACH OPERATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS.. ............................................................. 61 TS45.6 DRIVER FOOT CONTROLS.................................................................................................................................. 69 TS45.6.1 PEDAL ANGLE................................................................................................................................................ 69 TS 45.6.2 PEDAL DIMENSIONS AND POSITION.............................................................................................................70 TS45.7 DRIVER FOOT SWITCHES...................................................................................................................................70 TS -46 DRIVER'SAMENITIES.............................................................................................................................................70 TS46.1 COAT HANGER.................................................................................................................................................. 70 TS46.2 STORAGE BOX................................................................................................................................................... 71 TS -47 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS................................................................................................................... 71 TS47.1 WINDSHIELD WIPERS........................................................................................................................................71 TS47.2 WINDSHIELD WASHERS....................................................................................................................................71 TS -48 DRIVER'S SEAT....................................................................................................................................................... 72 TS48.1 DIMENSIONS.....................................................................................................................................................72 TS48.2 SEAT BELT......................................................................................................................................................... 72 TS48.3 SEAT CONTROL LOCATIONS ...................... —..................................................................................................... 73 TS 48.4 SEAT STRUCTURE AND MATERIALS...................................................................................................................73 TS48.5 PEDESTAL...................................................—.................,...........................................................................73 TS48.6 SEAT OPTIONS................................................................................................................................................... 73 TS48.7 MIRRORS...........................................................................................................................................................73 TS48.7.1 EXTERIOR MIRRORS...................................................................................................................................... 73 TS48.7.2 INTERIOR MIRRORS.......................................................................................................................—......... 74 TS -49 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................74 TS -50 WINDSHIELD..........................................................................................................................................................74 TS50.1 GLAZING............................................................................................................................................................74 TS -51 DRIVER'S SIDE WINDOW....................................................................................................................................... 75 TS -52 SIDE WINDOWS..................................................................................................................................................... 75 TS52.1 CONFIGURATION.........................................................................................................................................-- 75 TS 52.2 EMERGENCY EXIT (EGRESS) CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................—.......... 76 TS52.3 MATERIALS........................................................................................................................................................ 76 TS -53 CAPACITYAND PERFORMANCE............................................................................................................................. 76 TS -54 CONTROLS AND TEMPERATURE UNIFORMITY...................................................................................................... 77 TS54.1 AUXILIARY HEATER............................................................................................................................................ 78 TS -55 AIR FLOW............................................................................................................................................................... 78 Section 5 — Page 6 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS55.1 PASSENGER AREA..........................,...................................................,........................................................... 78 TS55.2 DRIVER'S AREA.................................................................................................................................................. 78 TS 55.3 CONTROLS FOR THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (CCS)................................................................................... 79 TS 55.4 DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................... 79 TS55.5 DRIVER'S COOLING........................................................................................................................................... 79 TS -56 AIR FILTRATION..................................................................................................................................................... 80 TS -57 ROOF VENTILATORS.............................................................................................................................................. 80 TS -58 MAINTAINABILITY..................................................................................................................................................80 TS -59 ENTRANCE/EXIT AREA HEATING........................................................................................................................... 80 TS -60 FLOOR -LEVEL HEATING......................................................................................................................................... 80 TS 60.1 COMMUTER COACH..............................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. TS -61 DESIGN..............................................................................................................................................................I... 81 TS61.1 MATERIALS........................................................................................................................................................ 81 TS -62 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY.............................................................................................................................................. 81 TS -63 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT.................................................................................................................................. 81 TS63.1 SIDE BODY PANELS .............................................. —.... ..—...................... ......................................... ................... 81 TS -64 RAIN GUTTERS....................................................................................................................................................... 82 TS -65 LICENSE PLATE PROVISIONS.................................................................................................................................. 82 TS -66 FENDER SKIR TS...................................................................................................................................................... 82 TS66.1 SPLASH APRONS................................................................................................................................................ 82 TS -67 SERVICE COMPARTMENTS AND ACCESS DOORS................................................................................................... 83 TS67.1 ACCESS DOORS.................................................................................................................................................. 83 TS67.2 ACCESS DOOR LATCH/LOCKS............................................................................................................................ 83 TS -68 BUMPERS...............................................................................................................................................................83 TS68.1 LOCATION......................................................................................................................................................... 83 TS68.2 FRONT BUMPER................................................................................................................................................ 83 TS68.3 REAR BUMPER................................................................................................................................................... 84 TS68.4 BUMPER MATERIAL.......................................................................................................................................... 84 TS -69 FINISH AND COLOR.................................................................................................................._._........................... 84 TS69.1 APPEARANCE.................................................................................................................................................... 84 TS -70 DECALS, NUMBERING AND SIGNING...................................................................................................................._ 8.5 TS70.1 PASSENGER INFORMATION.............................................................................................................................. 85 TS -71 EXTERIOR LIGHTING.............................................................................................................................................. 86 TS71.1 BACKUP LIGHT/ALARM..................................................................................................................................... 86 TS71.2 DOORWAY LIGHTING...... ................................................. ................................................................................ 86 TS71.3 TURN SIGNALS.................................................................................................................................................. 86 TS71.4 HEADLIGHTS ................ ......... ...................................... ..................................... .................................................. 86 TS71.5 BRAKE LIGHTS................................................................................................................................................... 87 TS 71.6 SERVICE AREA LIGHTING (INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR)....................................................................................... 87 Section 5 — Page 7 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -72 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................................... 93 87 TS -73 INTERIOR PANELS.................................................................................................................................................. 88 TS73.2 MODESTY PANELS.......................................................................................................................................,..... TS76.3 88 TS73.3 FRONT END....................................................................................................................................................... AISLES (COMMUTER COACH)............................................................................................................................93 88 TS73.4 REAR BULKHEAD...............................................................................................................................................89 TS 76.6 TS73.5 HEADLINING......................................................................................................................................................89 TS76.7.1 FRONT DOOR........ ................................... ................................ ............................................... TS73.6 FASTENING........................................................................................................................................................89 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION....................................................................................................................94 TS73.7 INSULATION......................................................................................................................................................89 TS 76.9.1 TS 73.8 FLOOR COVERING .............................. ............. -........ ......... ..... ....... ................. ................................................. 90 TS73.9 INTERIOR LIGHTING ................................ -................. ............. ................. .......... .............. ................ ....... .........90 TS73.10 PASSENGER...................................................................................................................................................90 ................................................... 95 TS73.11 DRIVER'S AREA .... ....... ................... ..... .............. -... ................................. ................ ....................... ........ ......91 TS73.12 SEATING AREAS............................................................................................................................................91 TS73.13 VESTIBULES/DOORS......................................................................................................................................91 TS73.14 STEP LIGHTING..............................................................................................................................................91 TS73.15 FAREBOX LIGHTING......................................................................................................................................92 TS -74 FARE COLLECTION................................................................................................................................................. 92 TS -75 INTERIOR ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS (TRANSIT COACH) ............................................ ..................... I ............. I... 92 TS75.1 FLOOR PANELS..................................................................................................................................................92 TS -76 PASSENGER SEATING............................................................................................................................................. 93 TS 76.1 ARRANGEMENTS AND SEAT STYLE (COMMUTER COACH)...............................................................................93 TS76.2 HIP -TO -KNEE ROOM .................................................. -......................... ........................................................... 93 TS76.3 FOOT ROOM ............................... .......... .......................... ................................ ................. .......,............ I............ 93 TS76.4 AISLES (COMMUTER COACH)............................................................................................................................93 TS 76.5 STRUCTURE AND DESIGN (COMMUTER COACH) ......... --- .............................................................................93 TS 76.6 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS (COMMUTER COACH).................................................................................94 TS76.7.1 FRONT DOOR........ ................................... ................................ ............................................... I......... 94 TS76.8 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION....................................................................................................................94 TS76.9 DOOR GLAZING..........................................................................................................................................1....1.94 TS 76.9.1 ACTUATOR (COMMUTER COACH) ...... ................... -.................................................................................... 95 TS76.10 EMERGENCY OPERATION.............................................................................................................................95 TS76.11 DOOR CONTROL...........................................................................................................................................95 TS76.12 DOOR CONTROLLER ......................... ...................... -................................. ................................................... 95 TS -77 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS (COMMUTER COACH)............................................................................................................ 95 TS -77.1 LIFT ........... .......... -......... .................................. ................................................ ..................... ................... ....... ..95 TS -77.2 LIFT DOOR.........................................................................................................................................................96 TS77.3 LIFT WIDTH.......................................................................................................................................................97 TS -77.4 LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................97 TS -77.5 SECUREMENT SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................97 TS -77.6 ROOF VENTILATION/ESCAPE HATCHES.............................................................................................................98 TS -78 DESTINATION SIGNS..................................................................-.............................................................I........... 98 TS -78.2 SIGNAL CHIME COMMUTER COACH.................................................................................................................98 TS -79 COMMUNICATIONS...............................................................................................................................................98 Section 5 - Page 8 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -79.1 CAMERA SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................98 TS -79.2 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM...............................................................................................................................1.99 TS -79.3 SPEAKERS ......................................................................................................................................................199 TS -79.4 AUTOMATIC PASSENGER COUNTER (APC)........................................................................................................99 TS -79.5 RADIO HANDSETAND CONTROLSYSTEM .........................................................................................................99 TS -79.6 DRIVER'S SPEAKER............................................................................................................................................ 99 TS -79.7 HANDSET ...................... —............ .......................... — ------ ..............................................................................99 TS -79.8 DRIVER DISPLAY UNIT (DDU)............................................................................................................................99 TS -79.9 EMERGENCYALARM.........................................................................................................................................99 Section 5 — Page 9 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 ICTOR VALLEY TRANSIT AUTHORITY 5' COMPRESSEDNATURALGAS and LOW -EMISSION DIESEL COMMUTER COACHES RFP NUMBER: VVTA 2013-04 SECTION 5: TECHNICAL PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS TS -1 SCOPE Technical Performance Specifications define requirements for heavy-duty commuter coaches, which, by the selection of specifically identified alternative configurations, may be used for over the road commuter trips to provide the most comfort possible for trips lasting from 1 to 2 hours. Coaches shall have a minimum expected life of twelve (12) years or 500,000 miles, whichever comes first, and are intended for the widest possible spectrum of passengers, including children, adults, the elderly and people with disabilities. TS -2 DEFINITIONS (1) Alternative: An alternative specification condition to the default coach configuration. The Agency may define alternatives to the default configuration to satisfy local operating requirements. Alternatives for the default configuration will be clearly identified. (2) Ambient Temperature: The temperature of the surrounding air. For testing purposes, ambient temperature must be between 16 °C (50 °F) and 38 °C (100 °F). (3) Analog Signals: A continuously variable signal that is solely dependent upon magnitude to express information content. (4) NOTE: Analog signals are used to represent the state of variable devices such as rheostats, potentiometers, temperature probes, etc. (5) Audible Discrete Frequency: An audible discrete frequency is determined to exist if the sound power level in any 1/3 -octave band exceeds the average of the sound power levels of the two adjacent 1/3 -octave bands by 4 decibels (dB) or more. (6) Battery Compartment: Low -voltage energy storage, i.e. 12/24 VDC batteries. (7) Battery Management System (BMS): Monitors energy, as well as temperature, cell or module voltages, and total pack voltage. The BMS adjusts the control strategy algorithms to maintain the batteries at uniform state of charge and optimal temperatures. (8) Braking Resistor: Device that converts electrical energy into heat, typically used as a retarder to supplement or replace the regenerative braking. Section 5 — Page 10 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 (9) Burst Pressure: The highest pressure reached in a container during a burst test. (10) Capacity (fuel container): The water volume of a container in gallons (liters). (11) Cells: Individual components (i.e., battery or capacitor cells). (12) Code: A legal requirement. (13) Combination Gas Relief Device: A relief device that is activated by a combination of high pressures or high temperatures, acting either independently or together. (14) Composite Container for CNG: A container fabricated of two or more materials that interact to facilitate the container design criteria. (15) Compressed Natural Gas (CNG): Mixtures of hydrocarbon gases and vapors consisting principally of methane in gaseous form that has been compressed for use as a vehicular fuel. (16) Container: A pressure vessel, cylinder or cylinders permanently manifolded together, used to store CNG. (17) Container Appurtenances: Devices connected to container openings for safety, control or operating purposes. (18) Container Valve: A valve connected directly to a container outlet. (19) Curb Weight: Weight of vehicle, including maximum fuel, oil and coolant; and all equipment required for operation and required by this Specification, but without passengers or driver. (20) dBA: Decibels with reference to 0.0002 microbar as measured on the "A" scale. (21) DC to DC Converter: A module that converts a source of direct current from one voltage level to another. (22) Default Configuration Coach: The coach described if no alternatives are selected. Signing, colors, the destination sign reading list and other information must be provided by the Agency. (23) Defueling: The process of removing fuel from a tank. (24) Defueling Port. Device that allows for vehicle defueling, or the point at which this occurs. (25) Destroyed: Physically made permanently unusable. (26) Discrete Signal: A signal that can take only pre -defined values, usually of a binary 0 or 1 nature, where 0 is battery ground potential and 1 is a defined battery positive potential. (27) DPF: Diesel particulate filter. Section 5 — Page 11 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 (28) Driver's Eye Range: The 95th -percentile ellipse defined in SAE Recommended Practice J941, except that the height of the ellipse shall be determined from the seat at its reference height. (29) Energy Density: The relationship between the weight of an energy storage device and its power output in units of watt-hours per kilogram (Wh/kg). (30) Energy Storage System (ESS): A component or system of components that stores energy and for which its supply of energy is rechargeable by the on -vehicle system (engine/regenerative braking/ generator) or an off -vehicle energy source. (31) Fill Pressure for CNG: The pressure attained at the actual time of filling. Fill pressure varies according to the gas temperatures in the container, which are dependent on the charging parameters and the ambient conditions. The maximum dispensed pressure shall not exceed 125 percent of service pressure. (32) Flow Capacity: For natural gas flow, this is the capacity in volume per unit time (normal cubic meters/minute or standard cubic feet per minute) discharged at the required flow rating pressure. (33) Fuel Line: The pipe, tubing or hose on a vehicle, including all related fittings, through which natural gas passes. (34) Fusible Material: A metal, alloy or other material capable of being melted by heat. (35) Fire Resistant: Materials that have a flame spread index less than 150 as measured in a radiant panel flame test per ASTM -E 162-90. (36) Fireproof: Materials that will not burn or melt at temperatures less than 2000 OF. (37) Free Floor Space: Floor area available to standees, excluding the area under seats, area occupied by feet of seated passengers, the vestibule area forward of the standee line, and any floor space indicated by manufacturer as non -standee areas, such as the floor space "swept" by passenger doors during operation. Floor area of 1.5 sq ft shall be allocated for the feet of each seated passenger protruding into the standee area. (38) Fuel Management System: Natural gas fuel system components that control or contribute to engine air fuel mixing and metering, and the ignition and combustion of a given air - fuel mixture. The fuel management system would include, but is not limited to, reducer/regulator valves, fuel metering equipment (e.g. carburetor, injectors), sensors (e.g., main throttle, wastegate). (39) GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rated): The maximum total weight as determined by the axle manufacturer, at which the axle can be safely and reliably operated for its intended purpose. (40) Gross Load: 150 lbs for every designed passenger seating position, for the driver, and for each 1.5 sq ft of free floor space. Section 5 — Page 12 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 (41) GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Curb weight plus gross load. (42) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rated): The maximum total weight as determined by the vehicle manufacturer, at which the vehicle can be safely and reliably operated for its intended purpose. (43) High Pressure: Those portions of the CNG fuel system that sees full container or cylinder pressure. (44) High Voltage (HV): Greater than 50 V (AC and DC). (45) Hose: Flexible line. (46) Hybrid: A vehicle that uses two or more distinct power sources to propel the vehicle. (47) Hybrid System Controller (HSC): Regulates energy flow throughout hybrid system components in order to provide motive performance and accessory loads, as applicable, while maintaining critical system parameters (voltages, currents, temperatures, etc.) within specified operating ranges. (48) Hybrid Drive System (HDS): The mechanical and/or electromechanical components, including the engine, traction motors and energy storage system, which comprise the traction drive portion of the hybrid propulsion system. (49) Intermediate Pressure: The portion of a CNG system after the first pressure regulator, but before the engine pressure regulator. Intermediate pressure on a CNG vehicle is generally from 3.5 to 0.5 MPa (510 to 70 psi). (50) Inverter: A module that converts DC to and from AC. (51) Labeled: Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol or other identifying mark of an organization, which is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, which maintains periodic inspection of production labeled equipment or materials, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner. (52) Leakage: Release of contents through a Defect or a crack. See Rupture. (53) Line: All tubes, flexible and hard, that carry fluids. (54) Liner: Inner gas-tight container or gas container to which the overwrap is applied. (55) Local Regulations: Regulations below the state level. (56) Low -Floor Coach: A coach that, between at least the front (entrance) and rear (exit) doors, has a floor sufficiently low and level so as to remove the need for steps in the aisle between the doors and in the vicinity of these doors. (57) Low Voltage (LV): 50 V or less (AC and DC). Section 5 — Page 13 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 (58) Lower Explosive Limit: The lowest concentration of gas where, given an ignition source, combustion is possible. (59) Maximum Service Temperature: The maximum temperature to which a container/cylinder will be subjected in normal service. (60) Metallic Hose: A hose whose strength depends primarily on the strength of its metallic parts; it can have metallic liners or covers, or both. (61) Metering Valve: A valve intended to control the rate of flow of natural gas. (62) Module: An assembly of individual components (63) Motor (Electric): A device that converts electrical energy into mechanical energy. (64) Motor (Traction): An electric motor used to power the driving wheels of the coach. (65) Operating Pressure: The varying pressure developed in a container during service. (66) Physical Layer: The first layer of the seven -layer International Standards Organization (ISO) Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) reference model. This provides the mechanical, electrical, functional and procedural characteristics required to gain access to the transmission medium (e.g., cable) and is responsible for transporting binary information between computerized systems. (67) Pipe: Nonflexible line. (68) Pressure Relief Device (PRD):A pressure and/or temperature activated device used to vent the container/cylinder contents and thereby prevent rupture of an NGV fuel container/cylinder, when subjected to a standard fire test as required by fuel container/cylinder standards. (69) NOTE: Since this is a pressure -activated device, it may not protect against rupture of the container when the application of heat weakens the container to the point where its rupture pressure is less than the rated burst pressure of the relief device, particularly if the container is partially full. (70) Power: Work or energy divided by time (71) Power Density: Power divided by mass, volume or area. (72) Propulsion System: System that provides propulsion for the vehicle proportional to operator commands. Includes, as applicable, engine, transmission, traction motors, the hybrid drive system, (HDS), energy storage system (ESS), and system controllers including all wiring and converter/inverter. (73) Real -Time Clock (RTC): Computer clock that keeps track of the current time. Section 5 — Page 14 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 (74) Regenerative Braking: Deceleration of the coach by switching motors to act as generators, which return vehicle kinetic energy to the energy storage system. (75) Rejectable Damage: In terms of NGV fuel containers/cylinders, this is damage as outlined in CGA C-6.4, "Methods for External Visual Inspection of Natural Gas Vehicle Fuel Containers and Their Installations," and in agreement with the manufacturer's recommendations. (76) Retarder: Device used to augment or replace some of the functions of primary friction based braking systems of the coach. (77) Rupture: Sudden and unstable damage propagation in the structural components of the container resulting in a loss of contents. See Leakage. (78) Seated Load: 150 lbs for every designed passenger seating position and for the driver. (79) SLW (Seated Load Weight): Curb weight plus seated load. (80) Serial Data Signals. A current loop based representation of ASCII or alphanumeric data used for transferring information between devices by transmitting a sequence of individual bits in a prearranged order of significance. (81) NOTE: An example is the communication that takes place between two or more electronic components with the ability to process and store information. (82) Service Pressure: The settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 21 °C (70 °F) and full gas content. It is the pressure for which the equipment has been constructed, under normal conditions. Also referred to as the nominal service pressure or working pressure. (83) Settled Pressure: The gas pressure when a given settled temperature, usually 21 °C (70 °F), is reached. (84) Settled Temperature: The uniform gas temperature after any change in temperature caused by filling has dissipated. (85) Solid State Alternator: A module that converts high-voltage DC to low -voltage DC (typically 12/24 V systems). (86) Sources of Ignition: Devices or equipment that because of their modes of use or operation, are capable of providing sufficient thermal energy to ignite flammable compressed natural gas -air mixtures when introduced into such a mixture, or when such a mixture comes into contact with them. (87) Special Tools: Tools not normally stocked by the Agency. (88) Specification: A particular or detailed statement, account or listing of the various elements, materials, dimensions, etc. involved in the manufacturing and construction of a product. (89) Standard: A firm guideline from a consensus group. Standards referenced in "Section 6: Technical Specifications" are the latest revisions unless otherwise stated. Section 5 — Page 15 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 (90) Standee Line: A line marked across the coach aisle to designate the forward area that passengers may not occupy when the coach is moving. (91) State of Charge (SOC): Quantity of electric energy remaining in the battery relative to the maximum rated amp -hour (Ah) capacity of the battery expressed in a percentage. This is a dynamic measurement used for the energy storage system. A full SOC indicates that the energy storage system cannot accept further charging from the engine -driven generator or the regenerative braking system. (92) Stress Loops: The "pigtails" commonly used to absorb flexing in piping. (93) Structure: The basic body, including floor deck material and installation, load-bearing external panels, structural components, axle mounting provisions and suspension beams and attachment points. (94) Thermally Activated Gas Relief Device: A relief device that is activated by high temperatures and generally contains a fusible material. (95) NOTE: Since this is a thermally activated device, it does not protect against over -pressure from improper charging practices. (96) Wheelchair: A mobility aid belonging to any class of three- or four -wheeled devices, usable indoors, designed for and used by individuals with mobility impairments, whether operated manually or powered. A "common wheelchair" is such a device that does not exceed 30 in. in width and 48 in. in length measured 2 in. above the ground, and does not weigh more than 600 lbs when occupied. TS -3 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS The documents or portions thereof referenced within this specification shall be considered part of the requirements of the specification. The edition indicated for each referenced document is the current edition, as of the date of the APTA issuance of this specification. TS -4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. These shall include but not be limited to ADA, as well as state and local accessibility, safety and security requirements. Local regulations are defined as those below the state level. Coaches shall meet all applicable FMVSS regulations and shall accommodate all applicable FMCSR regulations in effect at the location of the Agency and the date of manufacture. In the event of any conflict between the requirements of these specifications and any applicable legal requirement, the legal requirement shall prevail. Technical requirements that exceed the legal requirements are not considered to conflict. Section 5 — Page 16 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -5 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall ensure that the application and installation of major coach subcomponents and systems are compliant with all such subcomponent vendors' requirements and recommendations. Contractor and Agency shall identify subcomponent vendors that shall submit installation/application approval documents with the completion of the first CNG and Diesel coach. Components used in the vehicle shall be of heavy-duty design and proven in transit service. TS -5.1 WEIGHT It shall be a design goal to construct each coach as light in weight as possible without degradation of safety, appearance, comfort, traction or performance. Coaches at a capacity load shall not exceed the tire factor limits, brake test criteria or structural design criteria. TS -5.2 CAPACITY The vehicle shall be designed to carry the gross vehicle weight, which shall not exceed the coach GVWR. TS -5.3 SERVICE LIFE The minimum useful design life of the coach in transit service shall be at least twelve (12) years or 500,000 miles. It shall be capable of operating at least 40,000 miles per year, including the 12th year. TS -5.4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Scheduled maintenance tasks shall be related and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended preventative maintenance schedule (along with routine daily service performed during the fueling operations). Test ports, as required, shall be provided for commonly checked functions on the coach, such as air intake, exhaust, hydraulic, pneumatic, charge -air and engine cooling systems. The coach manufacturer shall give prime consideration to the routine problems of maintaining the vehicle. All coach components and systems, both mechanical and electrical, which will require periodic physical work or inspection processes shall be installed so that a minimum of time is consumed in gaining access to the critical repair areas. It shall not be necessary to disassemble portions of the coach structure and/or equipment such as seats and flooring under seats in order to gain access to these areas. Each coach shall be designed to facilitate the disassembly, reassembly, servicing or maintenance, using tools and equipment that are normally available as standard commercial items. Requirements for the use of unique specialized tools will be minimized. The body and structure of the coach shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair. Individual panels or other equipment that may be damaged in normal service shall be repairable or replaceable. Ease of repair shall be related to the vulnerability of the item to damage in service. Section 5 — Page 17 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Contractor shall provide a list of all special tools and pricing required for maintaining this equipment. Said list shall be submitted as a supplement to the Pricing Schedule. NOTE: Tools such as compartment door keys, bellows gauges and other tools that are required for daily maintenance and inspections shall not be included in the special tool list and shall be furnished for each coach. TS -5.5 INTERCHANGEABILITY Unless otherwise agreed, all units and components procured under this Contract, whether provided by Suppliers or manufactured by the Contractor, shall be duplicates in design, manufacture and installation to ensure interchangeability among coaches in each order group in this procurement. This interchangeability shall extend to the individual components as well as to their locations in the coaches. These components shall include, but are not limited to, passenger window hardware, interior trim, lamps, lamp lenses and seat assemblies. Components with non -identical functions shall not be, or appear to be, interchangeable. Any one component or unit used in the construction of these coaches shall be an exact duplicate in design, manufacture and assembly for each coach in each order group in this Contract. Contractor shall identify and secure approval for any changes in components or unit construction provided within a Contract. In the event that the Contractor is unable to comply with the interchangeability requirement, the Contractor must notify the Agency and obtain the Agency's prior written approval, including any changes in pricing. Agency shall review proposed product changes on a case-by-case basis and shall have the right to require extended warranties to ensure that product changes perform at least as well as the originally supplied products. TS -5.6 TRAINING Shall be provided by the proposer at the rate of 40 hours of instruction for each transit agency. Each agency will specify their individual needs with regard to training topics or subjects. Trainers will be available to train at each agencies perspective site at mutually agreed upon dates and times. The specified training must be completed within the 12 month period following the delivery of the first unit at each agency and may be started up to 90 days prior to the first delivery upon mutual agreement. The Contractor also shall provide visual and other teaching aids (such as manuals, slide presentations and literature) for use by the Agency's own training staff, which becomes the property of the Agency. TS -5.6.1 TECH NICAUSERVICE REPRESENTATIVES The Contractor shall, at its own expense, have one or more competent technical service representatives available on request to assist the Agency in the solution of engineering or design problems within the scope of the specifications that may arise during the warranty period. This does not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities under the provisions of "Section 7: Warranty Requirements." Section 5 — Page 18 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -5.7 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT The Coach shall achieve normal operation in ambient temperature ranges of 10 OF to 115 OF, at relative humidity between 5 percent and 100 percent, and at altitudes up to 3000 ft above sea level. Degradation of performance due to atmospheric conditions shall be minimized at temperatures below 10 OF, above 115 OF or at altitudes above 3000 ft. Altitude requirements above 3000 ft will need separate discussions with the engine manufacturer to ensure that performance requirements are not compromised. Speed, gradability and acceleration performance requirements shall be met at, or corrected to, 77 OF, 29.31 in. Hg, dry air per SAE J1995. TS -5.8 NOISE TS -5.8.1 INTERIOR NOISE The combination of inner and outer panels and any material used between them shall provide sufficient sound insulation so that a sound source with a level of 80 dBA measured at the outside skin of the coach shall have a sound level of 65 dBA or less at any point inside the coach. These conditions shall prevail with all openings, including doors and windows, closed and with the engine and accessories switched off. The coach -generated noise level experienced by a passenger at any seat location in the coach shall not exceed 80 dBA. The driver area shall not experience a noise level of more than 75 dBA. Measurements of interior noise levels shall be taken in accordance with ISO 3381. An exception shall be made for the turntable area, which shall be considered a separate environment. TS -5.8.2 EXTERIOR NOISE Airborne noise generated by the coach and measured from either side shall not exceed 80 dBA under full power acceleration when operated at 0 to 35 mph at curb weight. The maximum noise level generated by the coach pulling away from a stop at full power shall not exceed 83 dBA. The coach - generated noise at curb idle shall not exceed 65 dBA. If the noise contains an audible discrete frequency, a penalty of 5 dBA shall be added to the sound level measured. The Contractor shall comply with the exterior noise requirements defined in local laws and ordinances identified by the Agency and SAE J366. TS -5.9 FIRE SAFETY The coach shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with all applicable fire safety and smoke emission regulations. These provisions shall include the use of fire-retardant/low-smoke materials, fire detection systems, bulkheads and facilitation of passenger evacuation. TS -5.9.1 MATERIALS All materials used in the construction of the passenger compartment of the coach shall be in accordance with the Recommended Fire Safety Practices defined in FMVSS 302. Section 5 — Page 19 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -5.10 FIRE SUPPRESSION The coach shall have a fire suppression system installed per manufacturer's recommendations. TS -5.11 RESPECT FOR THE ENVIRONMENT In the design and manufacture of the coach, the Contractor shall make every effort to reduce the amount of potentially hazardous waste. In accordance with Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, the Contractor shall use, whenever possible and allowed by the specifications, recycled materials in the manufacture of the coach. TS -6 PHYSICAL SIZE With exceptions such as exterior mirrors, marker and signal lights, bumpers, fender skirts, washers, wipers, ad frames, cameras, object detection systems, bicycle racks, feelers and rub rails, the coach shall be close to the following overall dimensions as shown in Figure 1 at static conditions and design height. Contractor to provide drawings with dimensions of proposed coach. FIGURE 1 Transit Coach Exterior Dimensions 3 i ■ 0 • REAR OVER' iANG LEV.3TH'OVER BUMPERS BODY LENG f H a WHEEL BASE OVERA_L HErGHT FRONT ' OVEHHANG Section 5 — Page 20 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 WiDn I WIDTH T77 �!r " TS -6.1 COACH LENGTH For ease of use, the following tolerances will be allowable for each given coach length. Coach length is determined as the measurement from bumper to bumper. • 45 ft coach: 45 to 47 ft TS -6.2 COACH WIDTH 102 in. Width Coach Body. Width shall be 102 in. (+0, -1 in.). TS -6.3 COACH HEIGHT Maximum Overall Height: Maximum overall height shall be 140 in., including all rigid, roof -mounted items such as A/C, exhaust, fuel system and cover, etc. TS -6.4.1 STEP HEIGHT The step height shall not exceed 16.5 in. at doorway without kneeling and shall not exceed 15.5 in. at the step. TS -6.5 UNDERBODY CLEARANCE The coach shall maintain the minimum clearance dimensions as defined and shown in Figure 2.of SAE Standard J689, regardless of load up to the gross vehicle weight rating. TS -6.6 RAMP CLEARANCES The approach angle is the angle measured between a line tangent to the front tire static loaded radius arc and the initial point of structural interference forward of the front tire to the ground. The departure angle is the angle measured between a line tangent to the rear tire static loaded radius arc and the initial point of structural interference rearward of the rear tire to the ground. Section 5 — Page 21 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 The breakover angle is the angle measured between two lines tangent to the front and rear tire static loaded radius and intersecting at a point on the underside of the vehicle that defines the largest ramp over which the vehicle can roll. TABLE 2 Default Breakover Angle Angle Approach Front break over Departure TS -6.7 GROUND CLEARANCE 45 ft Coach 8.6 deg (min.) 8 deg (min.) 8.6 deg (min.) Ground clearance shall be no less than 9 in., (8 in. at jacking pad) except within the axle zone and wheel area. Axle zone clearance, which is the projected area between tires and wheels on the same axial centerline, shall be no less than 5.4 in. Wheel area clearance shall be no less than 8 in. for parts fixed to the coach body and 6 in. for parts that move vertically with the axles. — FIGURE 2 Transit Coach Minimum Road Clearance Section 5 — Page 22 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 REAR y, WHEEL BASE '� FRONT I � i i 1 ANGLE TS -6.8 FLOOR HEIGHT Height of the step above the street shall be no more than 16 in. measured at the centerline of the doorway. All floor measurements shall be with the coach at the design running height and on a level surface and with the standard installed tires. TS -6.9 INTERIOR HEADROOM Headroom above the aisle and at the centerline of the aisle seats shall be no less than 78 in. in the forward half of the coach tapering to no less than 74 in. forward of the rear settee. At the centerline of the window seats, headroom shall be no lower than 65 in., except for parcel racks and reading lights, if specified. Headroom at the back of the rear bench seat may be reduced to a minimum of 56 in., but it shall increase to the ceiling height at the front of the seat cushion. In any area of the coach directly over the head of a seated passenger and positioned where a passenger entering or leaving the seat is prone to strike his or her head, padding shall be provided on the overhead paneling. VEHICLE PERFORMANCE TS -7 POWER REQUIREMENTS The propulsion system shall be sized to provide sufficient power to enable the coach to meet the defined acceleration, top speed and gradability requirements, and operate all propulsion -driven accessories using actual road test results and computerized vehicle performance data. Proposer to provide horse power and torques specifications along with transmission and axle gear ratios. TS 7.1 TOP SPEED The coach shall be capable of achieving a top speed of 70 mph on a straight, level road at GVWR with all accessories operating. The coach shall be capable of safely maintaining the vehicle speed according to the recommendations by the tire manufacturer. NOTE: Values are assumed to be sustained. Manufacturer shall supply Agency with data if there is a variance between peak performance and sustained vehicle performance. Section 5 — Page 23 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 7.2 GRADABILITY Gradability requirements shall be met on grades with a dry commercial asphalt or concrete pavement at GVWR with all accessories operating. The propulsion system shall enable the coach to achieve and maintain a speed of 40 mph on a 2'/z percent ascending grade and 15 mph on a 10 percent ascending grade continuous. NOTE: Values are assumed to be sustained. Manufacturer shall supply Agency with data if there is a variance between peak performance and sustained vehicle performance. TS 7.2.1 ACCELERATION TS 7.2.2 NON -HYBRID The acceleration shall meet the requirements in Table 3 below and shall be sufficiently gradual and smooth to prevent throwing standing passengers off-balance. Acceleration measurement shall commence when the accelerator is depressed. TABLE 3 Maximum Start Acceleration Times on a Level Surface' Speed (mph) Maximum time (seconds) 10 5 20 10 30 18 40 30 50 60 Top speed Vehicle weight = GVWR The Contractor shall provide performance scans to the Agency based on the Agency's specific drivetrain configuration. TS 7.3 OPERATING RANGE The operating range of the coach shall be designed to meet the operating profile as stated in the "Design Operating Profile" section. The diesel coach shall have a minimum operating range of 400 miles on a full tank of fuel. Section 5 — Page 24 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 7.3.2 CNG The operating range of the CNG coach shall be at least 400 miles with an initial gas -settled pressure of 3600 psi at 70 OF. TS -8 FUEL ECONOMY (DESIGN OPERATING PROFILE) Test results from the FTA ABD Cycle economy tests or other applicable test procedures shall be provided to the Agency. Results shall include vehicle configuration and test environment information. Fuel economy data shall be provided for each design operating profile. The design operating profile is assumed to be defined by the FTA ABD Cycle. Fuel economy tests shall be run on these four duty cycles: - Manhattan: 6.8 mph - Orange County: 12.7 mph - UDDS: 19 mph - Idle time POWERPLANT TS -9 ENGINE The engine shall comply with applicable local, state and/or federal emissions and useful life requirements. The engine shall have a design life of not less than 300,000 miles without replacement or major service. The lifetime estimate is based on the design operating profile. NOTE: For CNG engines a minimum rating horsepower of 320 and minimum torque rating of 1000 ft. - lbs. shall be installed and a higher horsepower and torque rating is preferred if available. For Diesel engines a minimum rating horsepower of 400 and minimum torque rating of 1400 ft.-Ibs. shall be installed. The engine shall be equipped with an electronically controlled management system, compatible with either 12 or 24 V power distribution. The engine control system shall be capable of transmitting and receiving electronic inputs and data from other drivetrain components and broadcasting that data to other vehicle systems. Communication between electronic drivetrain components and other vehicle systems shall be made using the communications networks. The engine's electronic management system shall monitor operating conditions and provide instantaneous adjustments to optimize both engine and coach performance. The system shall be programmable to allow optimization of programmable features. The engine starting system shall be protected by an interlock that prevents its engagement when the engine is running. Special equipment or procedures may be employed to start the coach when exposed Section 5 — Page 25 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 to temperatures less than 30 °F for a minimum of four hours without the engine in operation. All cold weather starting aids, engine heating devices and procedures shall be of the type recommended by the engine manufacturer and approved by the Agency. The integration of all systems on the vehicle relative to engine idle speed shall be the responsibility of the vehicle manufacturer to meet the requirements of the transit property. The engine control system shall protect the engine against progressive damage. The system shall monitor conditions critical for safe operation and automatically derate power and/or speed and initiate engine shutdown as needed. Automatic Engine Protection/Shutdown Override Feature: A control shall be available to the operator/driver that when constantly depressed and released will delay the engine shutdown or allow the coach to be moved. Override action shall be recorded. This data shall be retrievable by the Agency. TS 9.1 ENGINE (CNG) The engine shall meet all regulatory requirements when operating on fuel equal to CARB Specifications for Compressed Natural Gas #2292.5. The four predominant characteristics that must be met are methane, ethane, butane and propane. TS -10 COOLING SYSTEMS The cooling systems shall be of sufficient size to maintain all engine and transmission fluids and engine intake air at safe, continuous operating temperatures during the most severe operations possible and in accordance with engine and transmission manufacturers' cooling system requirements. The cooling system fan controls should sense the temperatures of the operating fluids and the intake air, and if either is above safe operating conditions, the cooling fan should be engaged. The fan control system shall be designed with a fail-safe mode of "fan on." The cooling system shall meet the requirements stated in the operating environment. TS 10.1 ENGINE COOLING A means of determining satisfactory engine coolant level shall be provided. A spring-loaded, push- button type valve or lever shall be provided to safely release pressure or vacuum in the cooling system with both it and the water filler no more than ±60 in. above the ground. Both shall be accessible through the same access door. The cooling fan shall be temperature controlled, allowing the engine to reach operating temperature quickly. TS 10.1.1 COOLANT The engine cooling system shall be equipped with a properly sized water filter with a spin -on element and an automatic system for releasing supplemental coolant additives as needed to replenish and maintain protection properties. When replacing the water filter, only the water in the filter will be lost. Section 5 — Page 26 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 10.1.2 DRIVE DESIGN The coach shall be equipped with an electric fan drive coach cooling system. A screen guard must be installed on electric motor fans per SAE J1308. TS 10.1.3 MOUNTING Mounting location of radiator and charge air cooler shall be the Contractor's standard design. TS 10.2 TRANSMISSION COOLING The transmission shall be cooled by a dedicated heat exchanger sized to maintain operating fluid within the transmission manufacturer's recommended parameters of flow, pressure and temperature. The transmission cooling system shall be matched to the retarder and engine cooling systems to ensure that all operating fluids remain within recommended temperature limits established by each component manufacturer. The engine cooling system should provide coolant bypass flow to the transmission cooling system with the engine thermostats closed. Unless otherwise noted, the transmission cooler is to be the first component to see cold water from the radiator outlet. In addition, all return water piping, aside from the thermostat bypass line, is to be plumbed in after the transmission cooler. TS -11 TRANSMISSION (CONVENTIONAL POWERTRAIN) The transmission shall be multiple speed, automatic shift with torque converter, retarder and electronic controls. Gross input power, gross input torque and rated input speed shall be compatible with the engine. The transmission shall be designed to operate for not less than 300,000 miles on the design operating profile without replacement or major service. The transmission should be easily removable without disturbing the engine and accessible for service. The electronic controls shall be capable of transmitting and receiving electronic inputs and data from other drivetrain components and of broadcasting that data to other vehicle systems. Communication between electronic drivetrain components and other vehicle systems shall be made using the communications networks. Electronic controls shall be compatible with either 12 or 24 V power distribution, provide consistent shift quality, and compensate for changing conditions, such as variations in vehicle weight and engine power. At a minimum, drivetrain components consisting of the engine, transmission, retarder, ASR, and anti-lock braking systems shall be powered by a dedicated and isolated ignition supply voltage to ensure data communication among components exists when the vehicle ignition is switched to the "on" position. A nominal brake pedal application of 15 to 20 psi shall be required by the driver to engage forward or reverse range from the neutral position to prevent sudden acceleration of the coach from a parked position. The electronically controlled transmission shall have on -board diagnostic capabilities, be able to monitor functions, store and time -stamp out -of -parameter conditions in memory, and communicate faults and vital conditions to service personnel. The transmission shall contain built-in protection software to guard Section 5 — Page 27 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 against severe damage. The on -board diagnostic system shall trigger a visual alarm to the driver when the electronic control unit detects a malfunction. An electronic transmission fluid level monitoring and protection system shall be provided. TS -12 RETARDER (CNG) The powertrain shall be equipped with a retarder designed to extend brake lining service life. The application of the retarder shall cause a smooth blending of both retarder and service brake function and shall not activate the brake lights Actuation of ABS and/or automatic traction control (ATC) shall override the operation of the brake retarder. The retarder shall be adjustable within the limits of the powertrain and activated when the brake pedal is depressed. The Agency will work with the OEM/drive system manufacturer to determine retarder performance settings. The retarder disable switch shall be accessible to the seated driver TS -13 ENGINE BRAKE (DIESEL) The powertrain shall be equipped with an engine brake designed to extend brake lining service life. The application of the engine brake shall cause a smooth blending of both engine brake and service brake function and shall not activate the brake lights The retarder disable switch shall be accessible to the seated driver. TS -14 MOUNTING All powerplant mounting shall be mechanically isolated to minimize transfer of vibration to the body structure and provide a minimum clearance of 0.75 in. Mounts shall control the movement of the powerplant so as not to affect performance of belt -driven accessories or cause strain in piping and wiring connections to the powerplant. TS 14.1 SERVICE The propulsion system shall be arranged for ease of access and maintenance. The Contractor shall list all special tools, fixtures or facility requirements recommended for servicing. The muffler, exhaust system, air cleaner, air compressor, starter, alternator, radiator, all accessories and any other component requiring service or replacement shall be easily removable and independent of the engine and transmission removal. An engine oil pressure gauge and coolant temperature gauge shall be provided in the engine compartment. These gauges shall be easily read during service and mounted in an area where they shall not be damaged during minor or major repairs. An air cleaner with a dry filter element and a graduated air filter restriction indicator shall be provided. The location of the air intake system shall be designed to minimize the entry of dust and debris and to Section 5 — Page 28 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 maximize the life of the air filter. The engine air duct shall be designed to minimize the entry of water into the air intake system. Drainage provisions shall be included to allow any water/moisture to drain prior to entry into the air filter. All fluid fill locations shall be properly labeled to help ensure that correct fluid is added. All fillers shall be easily accessible with standard funnels, pour spouts and automatic dispensing equipment TS -15 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS Hydraulic system service tasks shall be minimized and scheduled no more frequently than those of other major coach systems. All elements of the hydraulic system shall be easily accessible for service or unit replacement. Critical points in the hydraulic system shall be fitted with service ports so that portable diagnostic equipment may be connected or sensors for an off -board diagnostic system permanently attached to monitor system operation when applicable. A tamper -proof priority system shall prevent the loss of power steering during operation of the coach if other devices are also powered by the hydraulic system. The hydraulic system shall operate within the allowable temperature range as specified by the lubricant manufacturer. TS 15.1 FLUID LINES All lines shall be rigidly supported to prevent chafing damage, Fatigue Failures, degradation and tension strain. Lines should be sufficiently flexible to minimize mechanical loads on the components. Lines passing through a panel, frame or bulkhead shall be protected by grommets (or similar devices) that fit snugly to both the line and the perimeter of the hole that the line passes through to prevent chafing and wear. Pipes and fluid hoses shall not be bundled with or used to support electrical wire harnesses. Lines shall be as short as practicable and shall be routed or shielded so that failure of a line shall not allow the contents to spray or drain onto any component operable above the auto -ignition temperature of the fluid. All hoses, pipes, lines and fittings shall be specified and installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. TS 15.2 FITTINGS AND CLAMPS All clamps shall maintain a constant tension at all times, expanding and contracting with the line in response to temperature changes and aging of the line material. The lines shall be designed for use in the environment where they are installed (for example, high-temperature resistant in the engine compartment, resistant to road salts near the road surface, and so on). Compression fittings shall be standardized to prevent the intermixing of components. Compression fitting components from more than one manufacturer shall not be mixed, even if the components are known to be interchangeable. Section 5 — Page 29 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 15.3 CHARGE AIR PIPING Charge air piping and fittings shall be designed to minimize air restrictions and leaks. Piping shall be as short as possible, and the number of bends shall be minimized. Bend radii shall be maximized to meet the pressure drop and temperature rise requirements of the engine manufacturer. The cross section of all charge air piping shall not be less than the cross section of the intake manifold inlet. Any changes in pipe diameter shall be gradual to ensure a smooth passage of air and to minimize restrictions. Piping shall be routed away from heat sources as practicable and shielded as required to meet the temperature rise requirements of the engine manufacturer. Charge air piping shall be constructed of stainless steel, aluminized steel, anodized aluminum or painted steel rated at minimum 1000 hours of salt spray according to ASTM B117, except between the air filter and turbocharger inlet, where piping may be constructed of flexible heat -resistant material. Connections between all charge air piping sections shall be sealed with a short section of reinforced hose and secured with stainless steel constant tension clamps that provide a complete 360 deg seal. TS -16 RADIATOR Radiator piping shall be stainless steel, brass tubing or painted steel rated at 1000 hours of salt spray according to ASTM B117 and where practicable, hoses shall be eliminated, including biodiesel. Necessary hoses shall be impervious to all coach fluids. All hoses shall be secured with stainless steel clamps that provide a complete 360 deg seal. The clamps shall maintain a constant tension at all times, expanding and contracting with the hose in response to temperature changes and aging of the hose material. TS -17 OIL AND HYDRAULIC LINES Oil and hydraulic lines shall be compatible with the substances they carry. The lines shall be designed and intended for use in the environment where they are installed (for example, high-temperature resistant in the engine compartment, resistant to road salts near the road surface and so on). Lines within the engine compartment shall be composed of steel tubing where practicable, except in locations where flexible lines are required. Hydraulic lines of the same size and with the same fittings as those on other piping systems of the coach, but not interchangeable, shall be tagged or marked for use on the hydraulic system only. TS -18 FUEL TS 18.1 FUEL LINES Fuel lines shall be securely mounted, braced and supported as designed by the coach manufacturer to minimize vibration and chafing and shall be protected against damage, corrosion or breakage due to strain or wear. Section 5 — Page 30 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Manifolds connecting fuel containers shall be designed and fabricated to minimize vibration and shall be installed in protected locations to prevent line or manifold damage from unsecured objects or road debris. Fuel hose and hose connections, where permitted, shall be made from materials resistant to corrosion and fuel and protected from fretting and high heat. Fuel hoses shall be accessible for ease of serviceability. TS 18.1.1 FUEL LINES, DIESEL Fuel lines shall be capable of carrying the type of fuel the engine manufacturer recommends. TS 18.1.2 FUEL LINES, CNG Fuel lines shall comply with NFPA-52. All tubing shall be a minimum of seamless Type 304 stainless steel (ASTM A269 or equivalent). Fuel lines and fittings shall not be fabricated from cast iron, galvanized pipe, aluminum, plastic or copper alloy with content exceeding 70 percent copper. Pipe fittings and hoses shall be clear and free from cuttings, burrs or scale. Pipe thread joining material that is impervious to CNG shall be utilized as required. Fuel lines shall be identifiable as fuel lines only. High-pressure CNG lines shall be pressure tested to a minimum of 125 percent of system working pressure prior to fueling. CNG, nitrogen or clean, dry air shall be used to pressure -test the lines/assembly. The coach manufacturer shall have a documented procedure for testing the high- pressure line assembly. Fuel lines shall be securely mounted, braced and supported using "split -block" type or stainless steel P clamps; all mounting clamps shall be mounted to a rigid structure to minimize vibration and shall be protected against damage, corrosion or breakage due to strain, rubbing or wear. "Floating clamps" (not mounted to a rigid structure) shall not be permitted. Fuel lines shall not be used to secure other components (wires, air lines, etc.). Manifolds connecting fuel containers shall be designed and fabricated to minimize vibration and shall be installed in protected location(s) to prevent line or manifold damage from unsecured objects or road debris. Fuel hose connections, where permitted, shall be less than 48 in. in length, made from materials resistant to corrosion and action of natural gas, and protected from fretting and high heat and shall be supported approximately every 12 in. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Section 5 — Page 31 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 18.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TS 18.2.1 DIESEL FUEL TANK(S) The fuel tank(s) shall be securely mounted to the coach to prevent movement during coach maneuvers and be the standard design of the coach manufacturer. Contractor to supply specifics on proposed fuel tanks. The fuel tank(s) shall be equipped with an external, hex head, drain plug. It shall be at least a % in. size and shall be located at the lowest point of the tank(s). The fuel tank(s) shall have an inspection plate or easily removable filler neck to permit cleaning and inspection of the tank(s) without removal from the coach. The tank(s) shall be baffled internally to prevent fuel -sloshing regardless of fill level. The baffles or fuel pickup location shall assure continuous full power operation on a 6 percent upgrade for 15 minutes starting with no more than 25 gal of fuel over the unusable amount in the tank(s).The coach shall operate at idle on a 6 percent downgrade for 30 minutes starting with no more than 10 gal of fuel over the unusable amount in the tank(s). The materials used in mounting shall withstand the adverse effects of road salts, fuel oils and accumulation of ice and snow for the life of the coach. Labeling The capacity, date of manufacture, manufacturer name, location of manufacture, and certification of compliance to federal motor carrier safety regulations shall be permanently marked on the fuel tank(s).The markings shall be readily visible and shall not be covered with an undercoating material. Fuel Filler The fuel filler shall be located 7 to 32 ft behind the centerline of the front door on the curbside of the coach. The filler cap shall be retained to prevent loss and shall be recessed into the body so that spilled fuel will not run onto the outside surface of the coach. The fuel lines forward of the engine bulkhead shall be in conformance to SAE Standards. TS 18.2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION, CNG Fuel Containers/Cylinders CNG fuel containers/cylinders must be designed, constructed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the following: • NFPA 52 -Standard for Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Vehicular Fuel Systems • FMVSS 304 • Any local standard(s) specifically intended for CNG fuel containers The design and construction of the fuel system supplied by the OEM shall comply with federal, state, and local regulations. Section 5 — Page 32 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Installation Fuel cylinders shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/IAS NGV2 - 1998, "Basic Requirements for Compressed Natural Gas Vehicles (NGV) Fuel Containers" and NFPA 52, "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Vehicular Fuel Systems Code," 1998 edition, Section 303. Fuel cylinders, attached valves, pressure relief devices, and mounting brackets should be installed and protected so that their operation is not affected by coach washers and environmental agents such as rain, snow, ice or mud. These components should be protected from significant damage caused by road debris or collision. The roof and area above the engine mounted tanks shall be contained within a skeletal structure resembling a roll cage and contained within an enclosure. The enclosure shall incorporate a hinged clamshell type access. The access panels shall be designed to offer protection from weather and to be sacrificial as a means of providing an escape path to atmosphere upon rapid enclosure pressure rise. The latching method shall utilize quick -release captive hardware that can be demonstrated to last the life of the coach. Additional shielding shall be provided surrounding end fittings and valves as needed. Shields shall be attached to the coach structure hinged in a manner that permits one mechanic to unlatch and swing the shield open for routine inspections. As practical, electrical components shall not be located within the roof enclosure, and if unavoidable, they shall be intrinsically safe. CNG fueled coaches shall be equipped with an active automatic gas detection system, which shall annunciate unsafe levels of methane. The automatic gas detection system shall be integrated with an onboard fire suppression system. Labeling CNG fuel systems shall be labeled in accordance with NFPA 52, "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Vehicular Fuel Systems Code," 1998 edition and all current federal, state, and local regulations. Pressure Relief Devices (PRDs) PRDs must be designed, constructed, manufactured and tested in accordance with ANIS/IAS PRD1 - 1998, "Pressure Relief Devices for Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) Fuel Containers" and ANSI/IAS NGV2- 1998, "Basic Requirements for Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) Fuel Containers." All natural gas fuel system piping, including the PRD vent line, shall be stainless steel. All PRDs must be vented to outside. Valves Valves must be installed in accordance with ANIS/IAS NGV2 - 1998, "Basic Requirements for Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) Fuel Containers" and NFPA 52, "Standard for Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Vehicular Fuel Systems." Fuel Filler Section 5 — Page 33 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 The fuel filler shall be located on the curb side 7 to 38 ft. to the rear of the passenger door opening. The filler cap shall be retained to prevent loss and shall be recessed into the body. The fill and vent receptacles shall be located within an enclosure on the right side of the coach. The access door shall be sized to allow full viewing of gauges, ease of hookups and maneuver of fuel nozzle. The fuel fill receptacle and vent receptacle attachment shall be robust and capable of routine fueling connects/disconnects without deflection or metal fatigue, and capable of withstanding mechanical loads induced by a fueling drive -away incident without attachment failure. Fueling System The CNG fueling port receptacle shall be an ANSI/AGA NGV1 or NGV2 certified receptacle as designated by the Agency. The coach shall be capable of being fueled by a nozzle determined by the Agency. The fueling port receptacle location shall be such that connection by fueling personnel can be performed without physical strain or interference. A dust cap shall be permanently "tethered" to the fueling port receptacle. The fueling port receptacle access door shall be equipped with an interlock sensor that disables the engine starting system and/or fuel system so when the access door is open the engine will not start or run, to prevent drive-aways. The interlock shall be of the type such that if the sensor fails, the coach will not start. Fueling site characteristics such as pressure, flow rate and temperature shall be provided by the Agency if requested. Defueling System The CNG defueling port shall be an NGV-3.1/CGA-12.3 certified receptacle. The CNG defueling port shall be located on the curbside of the coach, in a location that is compatible with the Agency's defueling station operation. The defueling system shall incorporate the following characteristics: • Dust cap permanently "tethered" to the defueling port. • Device(s) to prevent inadvertent defueling. Specifications to be provided by Agency. • Components compatible with Agency's defueling operation. • The piping and fittings onboard the coach shall be sized to allow the fueling station to meet the following operating parameters: TS -19 EMISSIONS AND EXHAUST TS 19.1 EXHAUST EMISSIONS The engine and related systems shall meet all applicable emission and engine design guidelines and standards. Section 5 — Page 34 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 19.2 EXHAUST SYSTEM The exhaust pipe shall be of sufficient height to prevent exhaust gases and waste heat from discoloring or causing heat deformation to the coach. The entire exhaust system shall be adequately shielded to prevent heat damage to any coach component, including the exhaust after -treatment compartment area. The exhaust outlet shall be designed to minimize rain, snow or water generated from high-pressure washing systems from entering into the exhaust pipe and causing damage to the after -treatment. Exhaust gases and waste heat shall be discharged from the roadside rear corner of the roof or rear bumper. TS 19.3 EXHAUST AFTER -TREATMENT An exhaust after -treatment system will be provided to ensure compliance to all applicable EPA regulations in effect if required. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Injection If required by the engine manufacturer to meet NOx level requirements specified by EPA, a DEF injection system will be provided. The DEF system will minimally include a tank, an injector, a pump, an ECM and a selective catalytic converter. The tanks shall be designed to store DEF in the operating environment described in the "Operating Environment' section. TS 19.4 PARTICULATE AFTER -TREATMENT (DIESEL) If required by the engine manufacturer to meet particulate level requirements specified by EPA, a particulate trap will be provided. The particulate trap shall regenerate itself automatically if it senses clogging. Regeneration cycles and conditions will be defined by the engine manufacturer. STRUCTURE TS -20 GENERAL TS 20.1 DESIGN The structure of the coach shall be designed to withstand the commuter road service conditions typical of an over the road coach duty cycle throughout its service life. The vehicle structural frame shall be designed to operate with minimal maintenance throughout the 12 -year design operating profile. The design operating profile specified by the Agency shall be considered for this purpose. TS -21 ALTOONA TESTING Prior to acceptance of first coach, the vehicle must have completed any FTA -required Altoona testing. Any items that required repeated repairs or replacement must undergo the corrective action with Section 5 — Page 35 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 supporting test and analysis. A report clearly describing and explaining the failures and corrective actions taken to ensure that any and all such failures will not occur shall be submitted to the Agency. If available, the Altoona Test Report shall be provided to the Agency with the Proposal submittal. If not available, then the report shall be provided prior to first acceptance of coach. TS 21.1 STRUCTURAL VALIDATION The structure of the coach shall have undergone appropriate structural testing and/or analysis. At minimum, appropriate structural testing and analysis shall include Altoona testing or finite element analysis (FEA). TS -22 DISTORTION The coach, loaded to GVWR and under static conditions, shall not exhibit deflection or deformation that impairs the operation of the steering mechanism, doors, windows, passenger escape mechanisms or service doors. Static conditions shall include the vehicle at rest with any one wheel or dual set of wheels on a 6 in. curb or in a 6 in. deep hole. TS -23 RESONANCE AND VIBRATION All structure, body and panel -bending mode frequencies, including vertical, lateral and torsional modes, shall be sufficiently removed from all primary excitation frequencies to minimize audible, visible or sensible resonant vibrations during normal service. TS 23.1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT BULKHEADS The passenger and engine compartment shall be separated by fire-resistant bulkheads. The engine compartment shall include areas where the engine and exhaust system are housed. This bulkhead shall preclude or retard propagation of an engine compartment fire into the passenger compartment and shall be in accordance with the Recommended Fire Safety Practices defined in FTA Docket 90A, dated October 20, 1993. Only necessary openings shall be allowed in the bulkhead, and these shall be fire- resistant. Any passageways for the climate control system air shall be separated from the engine compartment by fire-resistant material. Piping through the bulkhead shall have fire-resistant fittings sealed at the bulkhead. Wiring may pass through the bulkhead only if connectors or other means are provided to prevent or retard fire propagation through the bulkhead. Engine access panels in the bulkhead shall be fabricated of fire-resistant material and secured with fire-resistant fasteners. These panels, their fasteners and the bulkhead shall be constructed and reinforced to minimize warping of the panels during a fire that will compromise the integrity of the bulkhead. TS 23.2 CRASHWORTHINESS The coach body and roof structure shall withstand a static load equal to 150 percent of the curb weight evenly distributed on the roof with no more than a 6 in. reduction in any interior dimension. Windows shall remain in place and shall not open under such a load. These requirements must be met without the roof -mounted equipment installed. Section 5 — Page 36 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 The coach shall withstand a 25 mph impact by a 4000 Ib automobile at any side, excluding doorways, along either side of the coach and the articulated joint, if applicable, with no more than 3 in. of permanent structural deformation at seated passenger hip height. This impact shall not result in sharp edges or protrusions in the coach interior. Exterior panels below 35 in. from ground level shall withstand a static load of 2000 lbs applied perpendicular to the coach by a pad no larger than 5 sq in. This load shall not result in deformation that prevents installation of new exterior panels to restore the original appearance of the coach. TS -24 CORROSION The coach flooring, sides, roof, understructure and axle suspension components shall be designed to resist corrosion or deterioration from atmospheric conditions and de-icing materials for a period of 12 years or 500,000 miles, whichever comes first. It shall maintain structural integrity and nearly maintain original appearance throughout its service life, with the Agency's use of proper cleaning and neutralizing agents. All materials that are not inherently corrosion resistant shall be protected with corrosion -resistant coatings. All joints and connections of dissimilar metals shall be corrosion resistant and shall be protected from galvanic corrosion. Representative samples of all materials and connections shall withstand a two-week (336 -hour) salt spray test in accordance with ASTM Procedure B-117 with no structural detrimental effects to normally visible surfaces and no weight loss of over 1 percent. TS -25 TOWING Each towing device shall withstand, without permanent deformation, tension loads up to 1.2 times the curb weight of the coach within 20 deg of the longitudinal axis of the coach. If applicable, the rear towing device(s) shall not provide a toehold for unauthorized riders. The method of attaching the towing device shall not require the removal, or disconnection, of front suspension or steering components. Removal of the bike rack is permitted for attachment of towing devices. Shop air connectors shall be provided at the front and rear of the coach and shall be capable of supplying all pneumatic systems of the coach with externally sourced compressed air. The location of these shop air connectors shall facilitate towing operations. Two rear recovery devices/tie downs shall permit lifting and towing of the coach for a short distance, such as in cases of an emergency, to allow access to provisions for front towing of coach. The method of attaching the tow bar or adapter shall require the specific approval of the Agency. Any tow bar or adapter exceeding 50 lbs should have means to maneuver or allow for ease of use and application. Each towing device shall accommodate a crane hook with a 1 in. throat. TS -26 JACKING It shall be possible to safely jack up the coach, at curb weight, with a common 10 -ton floor jack with or without special adapter, when a tire or dual set is completely flat and the coach is on a level, hard surface, without crawling under any portion of the coach. Jacking from a single point shall permit raising Section 5 — Page 37 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 the coach sufficiently high to remove and reinstall a wheel and tire assembly. Jacking pads located on the axle or suspension near the wheels shall permit easy and safe jacking with the flat tire or dual set on a 6 in. high run-up block not wider than a single tire. The coach shall withstand such jacking at any one or any combination of wheel locations without permanent deformation or damage. Jacking pads shall be painted safety yellow and jacking points shall have decals applied identifying their location. TS -27 HOISTING The coach axles or jacking plates shall accommodate the lifting pads of a three -post hoist system. Jacking plates, if used as hoisting pads, shall be designed to prevent the coach from falling off the hoist. Other pads or the coach structure shall support the coach on jack stands independent of the hoist. The vehicle shall be capable of lifting by the wheels, and, as necessary to meet tire load requirements, the proper number for wheel lifts and/or adapters must be used. TS -28 FLOOR TS 28.1 DESIGN The floor shall be essentially a continuous plane, except at the wheel housings and platforms. Where the floor meets the walls of the coach, as well as other vertical surfaces such as platform risers, the surface edges shall be blended with a circular section of radius not less than '/ in. or installed in a fully sealed butt joint. Similarly, a molding or cover shall prevent debris accumulation between the floor and wheel housings. The vehicle floor in the area of the entrance and exit doors shall have a lateral slope not exceeding 2 deg to allow for drainage. The aisle of the coach shall be a sloped floor design and shall not exceed 5.5 deg off the horizontal or include one step not to exceed entrance door step heights. The floor shall be a continuous plane over the wheel housings. Where the floor meets the walls of the coach, as well as other vertical surfaces such as platform risers, the surface edges shall be blended with a circular section of radius not less than '/4 in. or installed in a fully sealed butt joint. TS 28.2 CONSTRUCTION The floor shall consist of the subfloor and the floor covering that will last the life of the coach. The floor as assembled, including the sealer, attachments and covering, shall be waterproof, non -hygroscopic and resistant to mold growth. The subfloor shall be resistant to the effects of moisture, including decay (dry rot). It shall be impervious to wood -destroying insects such as termites. The floor deck may not be integral with the basic structure but shall be mounted on the structure securely to prevent chafing or horizontal movement. Sheet metal screws shall not be used to retain the floor. All floor fasteners shall be secured and protected from corrosion for the service life of the coach. The floor deck shall be reinforced as needed to support passenger loads. At GVWR, the floor shall have an elastic defection of no more than 0.375 in. (10 mm) from the normal plane. The floor shall withstand the application of 3.0 times gross load weight without permanent detrimental deformation. Section 5 — Page 38 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -29 PLATFORMS TS 29.1 DRIVER'S AREA The covering of platform surfaces and risers, except where otherwise indicated, shall be the same material as specified for floor covering. Trim shall be provided along top edges of platforms unless integral nosing is provided. Specific trim required to be specified by each individual Agency. TS 29.2 FAREBOX Farebox placement should minimize impact to passenger access and minimize interference with the driver's line of sight. If the driver's platform is higher than 12 in., then the farebox is to be mounted on a platform of suitable height to provide accessibility for the driver without compromising passengers' access. TS -30 WHEEL HOUSING TS 30.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Sufficient clearance and air circulation shall be provided around the tires, wheels and brakes to preclude overheating when the coach is operating on the design operating profile. Wheel housings shall be constructed of corrosion -resistant and fire-resistant material. Wheel housings, as installed and trimmed, shall withstand impacts of a 2 in. steel ball with at least 200 ft -lbs of energy without penetration. CHASSIS TS -31 SUSPENSION TS 31.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The front, rear and mid (if articulated) suspensions shall be pneumatic type. The basic suspension system shall last the service life of the coach without major overhaul or replacement. Adjustment points shall be minimized and shall not be subject to a loss of adjustment in service. Routine adjustments shall be easily accomplished by limiting the removal or disconnecting the components. TS 31.2 ALIGNMENT All axles should be properly aligned so the vehicle tracks accurately within the size and geometry of the vehicle. Section 5 — Page 39 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 31.3 SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS TS 31.3.1 SUSPENSION TRAVEL The suspension system shall permit a minimum wheel travel of 2.75 in. jounce -upward travel of a wheel when the coach hits a bump (higher than street surface), and 2.75 in. rebound -downward travel when the coach comes off a bump and the wheels fall relative to the body. Elastomeric bumpers shall be provided at the limit of jounce travel. Rebound travel may be limited by elastomeric bumpers or hydraulically within the shock absorbers. Suspensions shall incorporate appropriate devices for automatic height control so that regardless of load the coach height relative to the centerline of the wheels does not change more than 1/2 in. at any point from the height required. The safe operation of a coach cannot be impacted by ride height up to 1 in. from design normal ride height. TS 31.3.2 DAMPING Vertical damping of the suspension system shall be accomplished by hydraulic shock absorbers mounted to the suspension arms or axles and attached to an appropriate location on the chassis. Damping shall be sufficient to control coach motion to three cycles or less after hitting road perturbations. The shock absorber coaching shall be made of elastomeric material that will last the life of the shock absorber. The damper shall incorporate a secondary hydraulic rebound stop. TS 31.3.3 LUBRICATION All elements of steering, suspension and drive systems requiring scheduled lubrication shall be provided with grease fittings conforming to SAE Standard J534. These fittings shall be located for ease of inspection and shall be accessible with a standard grease gun from a pit or with the coach on a hoist. Each element requiring lubrication shall have its own grease fitting with a relief path. The lubricant specified shall be standard for all elements on the coach serviced by standard fittings and shall be required no less than every 6000 miles. TS 31.3.4 KNEELING A kneeling system shall lower the entrance(s) of the coach a minimum of 2 in. during loading or unloading operations regardless of load up to GVWR, measured at the longitudinal centerline of the entrance door(s) by the driver. The kneeling control shall provide the following functions: • Downward control must be held to allow downward kneeling movement. • Release of the control during downward movement must completely stop the lowering motion and hold the height of the coach at that position. • Upward control actuation must allow the coach to return to normal floor height without the driver having to hold the control. The brake and throttle interlock shall prevent movement when the coach is kneeled. The kneeling control shall be disabled when the coach is in motion. The coach shall kneel at a maximum rate of 1.25 in. per second at essentially a constant rate. After kneeling, the coach shall rise within 4 seconds to a Section 5 — Page 40 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 height permitting the coach to resume service and shall rise to the correct operating height within 7 seconds regardless of load up to GVWR. During the lowering and raising operation, the maximum vertical acceleration shall not exceed 0.2 g, and the jerk shall not exceed 0.3 g/second. An indicator visible to the driver shall be illuminated until the coach is raised to a height adequate for safe street travel. An audible warning alarm will sound simultaneously with the operation of the kneeler to alert passengers and bystanders. A warning light mounted near the curbside of the front door, a minimum 2.5 in. diameter amber lens, shall be provided that will blink when the kneel feature is activated. Kneeling shall not be operational while the wheelchair ramp is deployed or in operation. TS -32 WHEELS AND TIRES TS 32.1 WHEELS All wheels shall be interchangeable and shall be removable without a puller. Wheels shall be compatible with tires in size and load -carrying capacity. Front wheels and tires shall be balanced as an assembly per SAE J1986. Wheels quoted shall be brushed aluminum and an option price quoted for agencies that require polished aluminum wheels. Tire -pressure monitoring systems should be quoted as an option. TS 32.2 TIRES Tires shall be suitable for the conditions of transit service and sustained operation at the maximum speed capability of the coach. Load on any tire at GVWR shall not exceed the tire supplier's rating. Sufficient space shall be provided to allow the Agency to carry a spare tire, if required. TS -33 STEERING Hydraulically assisted steering shall be provided. The steering gear shall be an integral type with the number and length of flexible lines minimized or eliminated. Engine -driven hydraulic pump shall be provided for power steering. TS 33.1 STEERING AND TAG AXLES The front and tag axles shall be solid beam, non -driving with a load rating sufficient for the coach loaded to GVWR and shall be equipped with unitized grease type wheel bearings and seals. All friction points on the front axle shall be equipped with replaceable bushings or inserts and, if needed, lubrication fittings easily accessible from a pit or hoist. The steering geometry of the outside (front lock) wheel shall be within 2 deg of true Ackerman up to 50 percent lock measured at the inside (back lock) wheel. The steering geometry shall be within 3 degrees of true Ackerman for the remaining 100 percent lock measured at the inside (back lock) wheel. Section 5 — Page 41 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 33.2 STEERING WHEEL TS 33.2.1 TURNING EFFORT Steering effort shall be measured with the coach at GVWR, stopped with the brakes released and the engine at normal idling speed on clean, dry, level, commercial asphalt pavement and the tires inflated to recommended pressure. Under these conditions, the torque required to turn the steering wheel 10 deg shall be no less than 5 ft - lbs and no more than 10 ft -lbs. Steering torque may increase to 70 ft -lbs when the wheels are approaching the steering stops, as the relief valve activates. Power steering failure shall not result in loss of steering control. With the coach in operation, the steering effort shall not exceed 55 lbs at the steering wheel rim, and perceived free play in the steering system shall not materially increase as a result of power assist failure. Gearing shall require no more than seven turns of the steering wheel lock -to -lock. Caster angle shall be selected to provide a tendency for the return of the front wheels to the straight position with minimal assistance from the driver. TS 33.2.2 STEERING WHEEL, GENERAL The steering wheel diameter shall be approximately 18 to 20 in.; the rim diameter shall be '/e to 1'/4 in. and shaped for firm grip with comfort for long periods of time. Steering wheel spokes and wheel thickness shall ensure visibility of the dashboard so that vital instrumentation is clearly visible at center neutral position (within the range of a 95th -percentile male, as described in SAE 1050a, Sections 4.2.2 and 4.2.3). Placement of steering column must be as far forward as possible, but either in line with or behind the instrument cluster. TS 33.2.3 STEERING COLUMN TILT The steering column shall have full tilt capability with an adjustment range of no less than 40 deg from the vertical and easily adjustable by the driver and shall be accessible by a 5th percentile female and 95th percentile male. TS 33.2.4 STEERING WHEEL TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT The steering wheel shall have full telescoping capability and have a minimum telescopic range of 2 in. and a minimum low-end adjustment of 29 in., measured from the top of the steering wheel rim in the horizontal position to the cab floor at the heel point. Section 5 — Page 42 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TABLE 4 Steering Wheel Height' Relative to Angle of Slope At Minimum Telescopic Height Adjustment - At Maximum Telescopic Height Adjustment (5 (29 in.) in.) Angle of Slope - Height - Angle of Slope Height 0 deg 29 in. 0 deg 34 in. 15 deg 26.2 in. 15 deg 31.2 in. 25 deg 24.6 in. 25 deg 29.6 in. 35 deg 22.5 in. 35 deg 27.5 in. 1. Measured from bottom portion closest to driver. TS -34 DRIVE AXLE The coach shall be driven by a heavy-duty axle with a load rating sufficient for the coach loaded to GVWR. The drive axle shall have a design life to operate for not less than 300,000 miles on the design operating profile without replacement or major repairs. The lubricant drain plug shall be magnetic type. If a planetary gear design is employed, the oil level in the planetary gears shall be easily checked through the plug or sight gauge. The axle and driveshaft components shall be rated for both propulsion and retardation modes with respect to duty cycle. NOTE: The retardation duty cycle can be more aggressive than propulsion. The drive shaft shall be guarded to prevent hitting any critical systems, including brake lines, coach floor or the ground, in the event of a tube or universal joint failure. TS 34.1 NON -DRIVE AXLE The non -drive axle is the drive axle without the drive gear with a load rating sufficient for the load to GVWR. TS -35 TAG AXLES (COMMUTER COACH) A tag axle shall be located behind the drive axle. The tag axle shall be a solid beam type with steering capability. The tag axle shall have single tires the same size as the tires on the front and drive axles. Tag axle weight shall not exceed 14,000 lbs. With full passenger seating capacity, load on any axle shall Section 5 - Page 43 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 not exceed 22,400 lbs. Combined load capacity weight on the drive and tag axles shall not exceed 36,500 lbs. A tag axle unloading feature will allow full or partial unloading, or dumping of air from the tag axle air spring bellows. This feature enables weight to shift to the drive axle for more traction. Manual unloading valves are located inside the RH rear curbside service door. TS -36 TURNING RADIUS TABLE 5 Maximum Turning Radius Coach Length Maximum Turning Radius (approximate) (see Figure 3) 45 ft 49 ft (TRO) FIGURE 3 Turning Radius Agency Requirement Section 5 — Page 44 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -37 BRAKES TS 37.1 SERVICE BRAKE Brakes shall be self-adjusting. Brake wear indicators (visible brake sensors) shall be provided on exposed push rods. Visible stroke indicators may be combined with electronic brake monitoring system and vehicle brake warning system to notify driver and maintenance of unsafe brake conditions. TS 37.2 ACTUATION Service brakes shall be controlled and actuated by a compressed air system. Force to activate the brake pedal control shall be an essentially linear function of the coach deceleration rate and shall not exceed 75 lbs at a point 7 in. above the heel point of the pedal to achieve maximum braking. The heel point is the location of the driver's heel when his or her foot is rested flat on the pedal and the heel is touching the floor or heel pad of the pedal. The ECU for the ABS system shall be protected, yet in an accessible location to allow for ease of service. The total braking effort shall be distributed among all wheels in such a ratio as to ensure equal friction material wear rate at all wheel locations. Manufacturer shall demonstrate compliance by providing a copy of a thermodynamic brake balance test upon request. TS 37.3 FRICTION MATERIAL The brake linings shall be made of non -asbestos material. In order to aid maintenance personnel in determining extent of wear, a provision such as a scribe line or a chamfer indicating the thickness at which replacement becomes necessary shall be provided on each brake lining. The complete brake lining wear indicator shall be clearly visible from the hoist or pit without removing backing plates. TS 37.4 HUBS AND DISCS Replaceable wheel bearing seals shall run on replaceable wear surfaces or be of an integral wear surface sealed design. Wheel bearing and hub seals and unitized hub assemblies shall not leak or weep lubricant when operating on the design operating profile for the duration of the initial manufacturer's warranty. The coach shall be equipped with disc brakes on all axles, and the brake discs shall allow machining of each side of the disc to obtain smooth surfaces per manufacturer's specifications. TS 37.5 PARKING/EMERGENCY BRAKE The parking brake shall be a spring -operated system, actuated by a valve that exhausts compressed air to apply the brakes. The parking brake may be manually enabled when the air pressure is at the operating level per FMVSS 121. Section 5 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -38 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM TS 38.1 GENERAL The coach air system shall operate the air -powered accessories and the braking system with reserve capacity. New coaches shall not leak down more than 5 psi over a 15 -minute period of time as indicated on the dash gauge. Provision shall be made to apply shop air to the coach air systems. A quick disconnect fitting shall be easily accessible and located in the engine compartment and near the front bumper area for towing. Retained caps shall be installed to protect fitting against dirt and moisture when not in use. Air for the compressor shall be filtered. The air system shall be protected per FMVSS 121. TS 38.2 AIR COMPRESSOR An engine -driven air compressor shall be sized to charge the air system from 40 psi to the governor cut- off pressure in less than 4 minutes while not exceeding the fast idle speed setting of the engine. An electrically driven air compressor shall be sized to charge the air system from 40 psi to the governor cut-off pressure in less than 4 minutes while not exceeding the fast idle speed setting of the engine. TS 38.3 AIR LINES AND FITTINGS Air lines, except necessary flexible lines, shall conform to the installation and material requirements of SAE Standard J1149 for copper tubing with standard, brass, flared or ball sleeve fittings, or SAE Standard J844 for nylon tubing if not subject to temperatures over 200 °F. The air on the delivery side of the compressor where it enters nylon housing shall not be above the maximum limits as stated in SAE J844. Nylon tubing shall be installed in accordance with the following color -coding standards: • Green: Indicates primary brakes and supply. • Red: Indicates secondary brakes. • Brown: Indicates parking brake. • Yellow: Indicates compressor governor signal. • Black: Indicates accessories. Line supports shall prevent movement, flexing, tension, strain and vibration. Copper lines shall be supported to prevent the lines from touching one another or any component of the coach. To the extent practicable and before installation, the lines shall be pre-bent on a fixture that prevents tube flattening or excessive local strain. Copper lines shall be bent only once at any point, including pre -bending and installation. Rigid lines shall be supported at no more than 5 ft intervals. Nylon lines may be grouped and shall be supported at 30 in. intervals or less. The compressor discharge line between powerplant and body -mounted equipment shall be flexible convoluted copper or stainless steel line, or may be flexible Teflon hose with a braided stainless steel Section 5 — Page 46 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 jacket. Other lines necessary to maintain system reliability shall be flexible Teflon hose with a braided stainless steel jacket. End fittings shall be standard SAE or JIC brass or steel, flanged, swivel -type fittings. Flexible hoses shall be as short as practicable and individually supported. They shall not touch one another or any part of the coach except for the supporting grommets. Flexible lines shall be supported at 2 ft intervals or less. Air lines shall be clean before installation and shall be installed to minimize air leaks. All air lines shall be routed to prevent water traps to the extent possible. Grommets or insulated clamps shall protect the air lines at all points where they pass through understructure components. TS 38.4 AIR RESERVOIRS All air reservoirs shall meet the requirements of FMVSS Standard 121 and SAE Standard J10 and shall be equipped with drain plugs and guarded or flush type drain valves. Major structural members shall protect these valves and any automatic moisture ejector valves from road hazards. Reservoirs shall be sloped toward the drain valve. All air reservoirs shall have drain valves that discharge below floor level with lines routed to eliminate the possibility of water traps and/or freezing in the drain line. TS 38.5 AIR SYSTEM DRYER An air dryer shall prevent accumulation of moisture and oil in the air system. The air dryer system shall include one or more replaceable desiccant cartridges. ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC AND DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS TS -39 OVERVIEW The electrical system will consist of vehicle battery systems and components that generate, distribute and store power throughout the vehicle. (e.g., generator, voltage regulator, wiring, relays and connectors). Electronic devices are individual systems and components that process and store data, integrate electronic information or perform other specific functions. The data communication system consists of the bi-directional communications networks that electronic devices use to share data with other electronic devices and systems. Communication networks are essential to integrating electronic functions, both on board the vehicle and off. Information level systems that require vehicle information for their operations or provide information shall adhere to J1939 data standard. Data communications systems are divided into three levels to reflect the use of multiple data networks: • Powertrain level: Components related to the powertrain, including the propulsion system components (engine, transmission and hybrid units) and anti-lock braking system (ABS), which may include traction control. At a minimum, powertrain components consisting of the engine, Section 5 — Page 47 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 transmission, retarder, ASR and anti-lock braking systems shall be powered by a dedicated and isolated ignition supply voltage to ensure data communication between components exists when the vehicle ignition is switched to the "on" position. Information level: Components whose primary function is the collection, control or display of data that is not necessary to the safe drivability of the vehicle (i.e., the vehicle will continue to operate when those functions are inoperable). These components typically consist of those required for automatic vehicle location (AVL) systems, destination signs, fareboxes, passenger counters, radio systems, automated voice and signage systems, video surveillance and similar components. Multiplex level: Electrical or electronic devices controlled through input/output signals such as discrete, analog and serial data information (i.e., on/off switch inputs, relay or relay control outputs). Multiplexing is used to control components not typically found on the drivetrain or information levels, such as lights; wheelchair lifts; doors; heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems (if applicable); and gateway devices. FIGURE 4 Data Communications Systems Levels Information level Multiplex level Drivetrain level TS 39.1 MODULAR DESIGN Design of the electrical, electronic and data communication systems shall be modular so that each electronic device, apparatus panel, or wiring bundle is easily separable from its interconnect by means of connectors. Powerplant wiring shall be an independent wiring harness. Replacement of the engine compartment wiring harness(es) shall not require pulling wires through any bulkhead or removing any terminals from the wires. TS -40 ENVIRONMENTAL AND MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS The electrical system and its electronic components shall be capable of operating in the area of the vehicle in which they will be installed, as recommended in SAE J1455. Section 5 — Page 48 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Electrical and electronic equipment shall not be located in an environment that will reduce the performance or shorten the life of the component or electrical system when operating within the design operating profile. As a recommendation, no vehicle component shall generate, or be affected by, electromagnetic interference or radio-frequency interference (EMI/RFI) that can disturb the performance of electrical/electronic equipment as defined in SAE J1113 and UNECE Council Directive 95/54 (R10). The Agency shall follow recommendations from coach manufacturers and subsystem suppliers regarding methods to prevent damage from voltage spikes generated from welding, jump starts, shorts, etc. TS 40.1 HARDWARE MOUNTING The mounting of the hardware shall not be used to provide the sole source ground, and all hardware shall be isolated from potential EMI/RFI, as referenced in SAE J1113. All electrical/electronic hardware mounted in the interior of the vehicle shall be inaccessible to passengers and hidden from view unless intended to be viewed. The hardware shall be mounted in such a manner as to protect it from splash or spray. All electrical/electronic hardware mounted on the exterior of the vehicle that is not designed to be installed in an exposed environment shall be mounted in a sealed enclosure. All electrical/electronic hardware and its mounting shall comply with the shock and vibration requirements of SAE J1455. TS -41 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS TS 41.1 BATTERIES TS 41.1.1 LOW -VOLTAGE BATTERIES (24 V) Manufacturers should quote their standard battery package insuring that the battery compartment must be well -ventilated to prevent hydrogen buildup while protecting the compartment from road spray, water intrusion and de-icing chemicals. Each agency shall have the option of the following: 1. Four Group 31 Series deep -cycling maintenance -free battery units shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 700 cold -cranking amps. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120days from the date of release for shipment to the Agency. 2. Two 8D battery units conforming to SAE Standard J537 shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 1150 cold cranking amps. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120 days from the date of release, and shall be fully maintained prior to shipment to the Agency. 3. Two 8D maintenance -free batteries. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120 days from date of release, and shall be fully maintained prior to shipment to the Agency. 4. Four Group 31 Series deep -cycling sealed non spillable maintenance free absorbed glass mat (AGM) batteries shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 1000 cold cranking Section 5 — Page 49 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 amps (CCA) at 0 OF. The batteries shall be designed and installed to withstand the operating environment. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than one year from the date of release for shipment to the Agency. TS 41.1.2 BATTERY CABLES The battery terminal ends and cable ends shall be color -coded with red for the primary positive, black for negative and another color for any intermediate voltage cables. Positive and negative battery cables shall not cross each other if at all possible, shall be flexible and shall be sufficiently long to reach the batteries with the tray in the extended position without stretching or pulling on any connection and shall not lie directly on top of the batteries. Except as interrupted by the master battery switch, battery and starter wiring shall be continuous cables with connections secured by bolted terminals and shall conform to specification requirements of SAE Standard J1127—Type SGR, SGT, SGX or GXL and SAE Recommended Practice J541, with 2100 strand 4/0 cable or greater recommended. TS 41.1.3 JUMP START A jump-start connector, red for 24 V shall be provided in the engine compartment, equipped with dust cap and adequately protected from moisture, dirt and debris. TS 41.1.4 BATTERY COMPARTMENT The battery compartment shall prevent accumulation of snow, ice and debris on top of the batteries and shall be vented and self -draining. It shall be accessible only from the outside of the vehicle. All components within the battery compartment, and the compartment itself, shall be protected from damage or corrosion from the electrolyte. The inside surface of the battery compartment's access door shall be electrically insulated, as required, to prevent the battery terminals from shorting on the door if the door is damaged in an accident or if a battery comes loose. The battery compartment temperature should not exceed manufacturer's specification. The vehicle shall be equipped with a 12 V DC and 24 V DC quick disconnect switch(es). The battery compartment door shall conveniently accommodate operation of the 12 V DC and 24 V DC quick disconnect switch(es). The battery quick disconnect access door shall be identified with a decal. The decal size shall not be less than 3.5 x 5 in. (8.89 x 12.7 cm). The battery hold-down bracket shall be constructed of a nonconductive and corrosion -resistant material (plastic or fiberglass). This access door shall not require any special locking devices to gain access to the switch, and it shall be accessible without removing or lifting the panel. The door shall be flush -fitting and incorporate a spring tensioner or equal to retain the door in a closed position when not in use. The batteries shall be securely mounted on a stainless steel or equivalent tray that can accommodate the size and weight of the batteries. The battery tray, if applicable, shall pull out easily and properly Section 5 — Page 50 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 support the batteries while they are being serviced. The tray shall allow each battery cell to be easily serviced. A locking device shall retain the battery tray to the stowed position. If not located in the engine compartment, the same fire-resistant properties must apply to the battery compartment. No sparking devices should be located within the battery box. TS Design of the electrical, electronic and data communication systems shall be modular so that each electronic device, apparatus panel, or wiring bundle is easily separable from its interconnect by means of connectors. Powerplant wiring shall be an independent wiring harness. Replacement of the engine compartment wiring harness(es) shall not require pulling wires through any bulkhead or removing any terminals from the wires The mounting of the hardware shall not be used to provide the sole source ground, and all hardware shall be isolated from potential EMI/RFI, as referenced in SAE J1113. All electrical/electronic hardware mounted in the interior of the vehicle shall be inaccessible to passengers and hidden from view unless intended to be viewed. The hardware shall be mounted in such a manner as to protect it from splash or spray. All electrical/electronic hardware mounted on the exterior of the vehicle that is not designed to be installed in an exposed environment shall be mounted in a sealed enclosure. All electrical/electronic hardware and its mounting shall comply with the shock and vibration requirements of Manufacturers should quote their standard battery package insuring that the battery compartment must be well -ventilated to prevent hydrogen buildup while protecting the compartment from road spray, water intrusion and de-icing chemicals. Each agency shall have the option of the following: 5. Four Group 31 Series deep -cycling maintenance -free battery units shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 700 cold -cranking amps. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120days from the date of release for shipment to the Agency. 6. Two 8D battery units conforming to SAE Standard J537 shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 1150 cold cranking amps. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120 days from the date of release, and shall be fully maintained prior to shipment to the Agency. 7. Two 8D maintenance -free batteries. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than 120 days from date of release, and shall be fully maintained prior to shipment to the Agency. 8. Four Group 31 Series deep -cycling sealed non -spillable maintenance free absorbed glass mat (AGM) batteries shall be provided. Each battery shall have a minimum of 1000 cold cranking amps (CCA) at 0 OF. The batteries shall be designed and installed to withstand the operating environment. Each battery shall have a purchase date no more than one year from the date of release Section 5 — Page 51 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 The battery terminal ends and cable ends shall be color -coded with red for the primary positive, black for negative and another color for any intermediate voltage cables. Positive and negative battery cables shall not cross each other if at all possible, shall be flexible and shall be sufficiently long to reach the batteries with the tray in the extended position without stretching or pulling on any connection and shall not lie directly on top of the batteries. Except as interrupted by the master battery switch, battery and starter wiring shall be continuous cables with connections secured by bolted terminals and shall conform to specification requirements of SAE Standard J1127—Type SGR, SGT, SGX or GXL and SAE Recommended Practice A jump-start connector, red for 24 V shall be provided in the engine compartment, equipped with dust cap and TS 41.1.5 AUXILIARY ELECTRONIC POWER SUPPLY If required, gel -pack, or any form of sealed (non -venting) batteries used for auxiliary power are allowed to be mounted on the interior of the vehicle if they are contained in an enclosed, non -airtight compartment and accessible only to maintenance personnel. This compartment shall contain a warning label prohibiting the use of lead -acid batteries. The battery compartment shall prevent accumulation of snow, ice and debris on top of the batteries and shall be vented and self -draining. It shall be accessible only from the outside of the vehicle. All components within the battery compartment, and the compartment itself, shall be protected from damage or corrosion from the electrolyte. The inside surface of the battery compartment's access door shall be electrically insulated, as required, to prevent the battery terminals from shorting on the door if the door is damaged in an accident or if a battery comes loose. The battery compartment temperature should not exceed manufacturer's specification. The vehicle shall be equipped with a 12 V DC and 24 V DC quick disconnect switch(es). The battery compartment door shall conveniently accommodate operation of the 12 V DC and 24 V DC quick disconnect switch(es). The battery quick disconnect access door shall be identified with a decal. The decal size shall not be less than 3.5 X 5 in. (8.89 X 12.7 cm). The battery hold-down bracket shall be constructed of a nonconductive and corrosion -resistant material (plastic or fiberglass). This access door shall not require any special locking devices to gain access to the switch, and it shall be accessible without removing or lifting the panel. The door shall be flush -fitting and incorporate a spring tensioner or equal to retain the door in a closed position when not in use. The batteries shall be securely mounted on a stainless steel or equivalent tray that can accommodate the size and weight of the batteries. The battery tray, if applicable, shall pull out easily and properly support the batteries while they are being serviced. The tray shall allow each battery cell to be easily serviced. A locking device shall retain the battery tray to the stowed position. Section 5 — Page 52 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 If not located in the engine compartment, the same fire-resistant properties must apply to the battery compartment TS 41.1.6 MASTER BATTERY SWITCH The location of the master battery switch shall be clearly identified on the exterior access panel, be accessible in less than 10 seconds for deactivation and prevent corrosion from fumes and battery acid when the batteries are washed off or are in normal service. Turning the master switch off with the powerplant operating, during an emergency, shall shut off the engine and shall not damage any component of the electrical system. The master switch shall be capable of carrying and interrupting the total circuit load. TS 41.1.7 LOW -VOLTAGE GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION The low -voltage generating system shall maintain the charge on fully charged batteries, except when the vehicle is at standard idle with a total low -voltage generator load exceeding 70 percent of the low - voltage generator nameplate rating. Voltage monitoring and over -voltage output protection (recommended at 32 V) shall be provided. Dedicated power and ground shall be provided as specified by the component or system manufacturer. Cabling to the equipment must be sized to supply the current requirements with no greater than a 5 percent volt drop across the length of the cable. TS 41.1.8 CIRCUIT PROTECTION All branch circuits, except battery -to -starting motor and battery-to-generator/alternator circuits, shall be protected by current -limiting devices such as circuit breakers, fuses or solid-state devices sized to the requirements of the circuit. Electronic circuit protection for the cranking motor shall be provided to prevent engaging of the motor for more than 30 seconds at a time to prevent overheating. The circuit breakers or fuses shall be easily accessible for authorized personnel. Fuses shall be used only where it can be demonstrated that circuit breakers are not practicable. This requirement applies to in-line fuses supplied by either the Contractor or a supplier. Fuse holders shall be constructed to be rugged and waterproof. All manual reset circuit breakers critical to the operation of the coach shall be mounted in a location convenient to the Agency mechanic with visible indication of open circuits. The Agency shall consider the application of automatic reset circuit breakers on a case-by-case basis. The Contractor shall show all in-line fuses in the final harness drawings. Any manually resettable circuit breakers shall provide a visible indication of open circuits. Any manually resettable circuit breakers shall provide a visible indication of open circuits. Circuit breakers or fuses shall be sized to a minimum of 15 percent larger than the total circuit load. The current rating for the wire used for each circuit must exceed the size of the circuit protection being used. Section 5 — Page 53 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 41.2 GROUNDS The battery shall be grounded to the vehicle chassis/frame at one location only, as close to the batteries as possible. When using a chassis ground system, the chassis shall be grounded to the frame in multiple locations, evenly distributed throughout the vehicle to eliminate ground loops. No more than five ground ring/spade terminal connections shall be made per ground stud with spacing between studs ensuring contactivity and serviceability. Electronic equipment requiring an isolated ground to the battery (i.e., electronic ground) shall not be grounded through the chassis. TS 41.3 LOW VOLTAGE/LOW CURRENT WIRING AND TERMINALS All power and ground wiring shall conform to specification requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J1127, J1128 and J1292. Double insulation shall be maintained as close to the junction box, electrical compartment or terminals as possible. The requirement for double insulation shall be met by wrapping the harness with plastic electrical tape or by sheathing all wires and harnesses with non-conductive, rigid or flexible conduit. Wiring shall be grouped, numbered and/or color -coded. Wiring harnesses shall not contain wires of different voltage classes unless all wires within the harness are insulated for the highest voltage present in the harness. Kinking, grounding at multiple points, stretching, and exceeding minimum bend radius shall be prevented. Strain -relief fittings shall be provided at all points where wiring enters electrical compartments. Grommets or other protective material shall be installed at points where wiring penetrates metal structures outside of electrical enclosures. Wiring supports shall be protective and non-conductive at areas of wire contact and shall not be damaged by heat, water, solvents or chafing. To the extent practicable, wiring shall not be located in environmentally exposed locations under the vehicle. Wiring and electrical equipment necessarily located under the vehicle shall be insulated from water, heat, corrosion and mechanical damage. Where feasible, front -to -rear electrical harnesses should be installed above the window line of the vehicle. All wiring harnesses over 5 ft long and containing at least five wires shall include 10 percent (minimum one wire) excess wires for spares. This requirement for spare wires does not apply to datalinks and communication cables. Wiring harness length shall allow end terminals to be replaced twice without pulling, stretching or replacing the wire. Terminals shall be crimped to the wiring according to the connector manufacturer's recommendations for techniques and tools. All cable connectors shall be locking type, keyed and sealed, unless enclosed in watertight cabinets or vehicle interior. Pins shall be removable, crimp contact type, of the correct size and rating for the wire being terminated. Unused pin positions shall be sealed with sealing plugs. Adjacent connectors shall use either different inserts or different insert orientations to prevent incorrect connections. Terminals shall be crimped, corrosion -resistant and full ring type or interlocking lugs with insulating ferrules. When using pressure type screw terminal strips, only stranded wire shall be used. Insulation clearance shall ensure that wires have a minimum of "visible clearance" and a maximum of two times the conduct or diameter or 1/16 in., whichever is less. When using shielded or coaxial cable, upon Section 5 — Page 54 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 stripping of the insulation, the metallic braid shall be free from frayed strands that can penetrate the insulation of the inner wires. Ultra -sonic and T -splices may be used with 8 AWG or smaller wire. When a T -splice is used, it shall meet these additional requirements: • It shall include a mechanical clamp in addition to solder on the splice. • The wire shall support no mechanical load in the area of the splice. • The wire shall be supported to prevent flexing. All splicing shall be staggered in the harness so that no two splices are positioned in the same location within the harness. Wiring located in the engine compartment shall be routed away from high -heat sources or shielded and/or insulated from temperatures exceeding the wiring and connector operating requirements. The instrument panel and wiring shall be easily accessible for service from the driver's seat or top of the panel. The instrument panel shall be separately removable and replaceable without damaging the instrument panel or gauges. Wiring shall have sufficient length and be routed to permit service without stretching or chafing the wires. TS 41.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS All electrical components, including switches, relays, flashers and circuit breakers, shall be heavy-duty designs with either a successful history of application in heavy-duty vehicles or design specifications for an equivalent environment. All electric motors shall be heavy-duty brushless type where practical, and have a continuous duty rating of no less than 40,000 hours (except cranking motors, washer pumps, auxiliary heater pumps, defroster and wiper motors). All electric motors shall be easily accessible for servicing. TS 41.5 ELECTRICAL COMPARTMENTS All relays, controllers, flashers, circuit breakers and other electrical components shall be mounted in easily accessible electrical compartments. All compartments exposed to the outside environment shall be corrosion -resistant and sealed. The components and their functions in each electrical compartment shall be identified and their location permanently recorded on a drawing attached to the inside of the access panel or door. The drawing shall be protected from oil, grease, fuel and abrasion. The front compartment shall be completely serviceable from the driver's seat, vestibule or from the outside. "Rear start and run" controls shall be mounted in an accessible location in the engine compartment and shall be protected from the environment. Section 5 — Page 55 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -42 GENERAL ELECTRONIC REQUIREMENTS If an electronic component has an internal real-time clock, it shall provide its own battery backup to monitor time when battery power is disconnected, and/or it may be updated by a network component. If an electronic component has an hour meter, it shall record accumulated service time without relying on battery backup. All electronic component suppliers shall ensure that their equipment is self -protecting in the event of shorts in the cabling, and also in over -voltage (over 32 V DC on a 24 V DC nominal voltage rating with a maximum of 50 V DC) and reverse polarity conditions. If an electronic component is required to interface with other components, it shall not require external pull-up and/or pull-down resistors. Where this is not possible, the use of a pull-up or pull-down resistor shall be limited as much as possible and easily accessible and labeled. TS 42.1 WIRING AND TERMINALS Kinking, grounding at multiple points, stretching and reducing the bend radius below the manufacturer's recommended minimum shall not be permitted. TS 42.1.1 DISCRETE 1/0 (INPUTS/OUTPUTS) All wiring to 1/0 devices, either at the harness level or individual wires, shall be labeled, stamped or color -coded in a fashion that allows unique identification at a spacing not exceeding 4 in. Wiring for each 1/0 device shall be bundled together. If the 1/0 terminals are the same voltages, then jumpers may be used to connect the common nodes of each 1/0 terminal. TS 42.1.2 SHIELDING All wiring that requires shielding shall meet the following minimum requirements. A shield shall be generated by connecting to a ground, which is sourced from a power distribution coach bar or chassis. A shield shall be connected at one location only, typically at one end of the cable. However, certain standards or special requirements, such as SAE J1939 or RF applications, have separate shielding techniques that also shall be used as applicable. When using shielded or coaxial cable, upon stripping of the insulation, the metallic braid shall be free from frayed strands, which can penetrate the insulation of the inner wires. To prevent the introduction of noise, the shield shall not be connected to the common side of a logic circuit. TS 42.1.3 COMMUNICATIONS The data network cabling shall be selected and installed according to the selected protocol requirements. The physical layer of all network communication systems shall not be used for any purpose other than communication between the system components, unless provided for in the network specifications. Communications networks that use powerline carriers (e.g., data modulated on a 24 V powerline) shall meet the most stringent applicable wiring and terminal specifications. Section 5 — Page 56 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13. TS 42.1.4 RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) RF components, such as radios, video devices, cameras, global positioning systems (GPS), etc., shall use coaxial cable to carry the signal. All RF systems require special design consideration for losses along the cable. Connectors shall be minimized, since each connector and crimp has a loss that will attribute to attenuation of the signal. Cabling should allow for the removal of antennas or attached electronics without removing the installed cable between them. If this cannot be done, then a conduit of sufficient size shall be provided for ease of attachment of antenna and cable assembly. The corresponding component vendors shall be consulted for proper application of equipment, including installation of cables. TS 42.1.5 AUDIO Cabling used for microphone level and line level signals shall be 22 AWG minimum with shielded twisted pair. Cabling used for amplifier level signals shall be 18 AWG minimum. TS -43 MULTIPLEXING TS 43.1 GENERAL The primary purpose of the multiplexing system is control of components necessary to operate the vehicle. This is accomplished by processing information from input devices and controlling output devices through the use of an internal logic program. Versatility and future expansion shall be provided for by expandable system architecture. The multiplex system shall be capable of accepting new inputs and outputs through the addition of new modules and/or the utilization of existing spare inputs and outputs. All like components in the multiplex system shall be modular and interchangeable with self-diagnostic capabilities. The modules shall be easily accessible for troubleshooting electrical failures and performing system maintenance. Multiplex input/output modules shall use solid-state devices to provide extended service life and individual circuit protection. TS 43.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Multiplexing may either be distributed or centralized. A distributed system shall process information on multiple control modules within the network. A centralized system shall process the information on a single control module. Either system shall consist of several modules connected to form a control network. 43.2.1 1/0 SIGNALS The input/output for the multiplex system may contain four types of electrical signals: discrete, modulating, analog or serial data. Discrete signals shall reflect the on/off status of switches, levers, limit switches, lights, etc. Analog signals shall reflect numerical data as represented by a voltage signal (0-12 V, 10-24 V, etc.) or current signal (4-20 mA). Both types of analog signals shall represent the status of variable devices such as Section 5 — Page 57 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 rheostats, potentiometers, temperature probes, etc. Serial data signals shall reflect ASCII or alphanumeric data used in the communication between other on -board components. TS -44 DATA COMMUNICATIONS TS 44.1 GENERAL All data communication networks shall be either in accordance with a nationally recognized interface standard, such as those published by SAE, IEEE or ISO, or shall be published to the Agency with the following minimum information: • Protocol requirements for all timing issues (bit, byte, packet, inter -packet timing, idle line timing, etc.) packet sizes, error checking and transport (bulk transfer of data to/from the device). • Data definition requirements that ensure access to diagnostic information and performance characteristics. • The capability and procedures for uploading new application or configuration data. • Access to revision level of data, application software and firmware. • The capability and procedures for uploading new firmware or application software. • Evidence that applicable data shall be broadcast to the network in an efficient manner such that the overall network integrity is not compromised. Any electronic vehicle components used on a network shall be conformance tested to the corresponding network standard. TS 44.2 DRIVETRAIN LEVEL Drivetrain components, consisting of the engine, transmission, retarder, anti-lock braking system and all other related components, shall be integrated and communicate fully with respect to vehicle operation with data using SAE Recommended Communications Protocols such as J1939 and/or J1 708/J1587 with forward and backward compatibilities or other open protocols. At a minimum, drivetrain components consisting of the engine, transmission, retarder ASR, and anti-lock braking systems shall be powered by a dedicated and isolated ignition supply voltage to ensure data communication among components exists when the vehicle ignition is switched to the "on" position. TS 44.2.1 DIAGNOSTICS, FAULT DETECTION AND DATA ACCESS Drivetrain performance, maintenance and diagnostic data, and other electronic messages shall be formatted and transmitted on the communications networks. The drivetrain level shall have the ability to record abnormal events in memory and provide diagnostic codes and other information to service personnel. At a minimum, this network level shall provide live/fail status, current hardware serial number, software/data revisions and uninterrupted timing functions. TS 44.2.2 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE) The drivetrain level components shall be programmable by the Agency with limitations as specified by the subsystem Supplier. Section 5 — Page 58 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 44.3 MULTIPLEX LEVEL TS 44.3.1 DATA ACCESS At a minimum, information shall be made available via a communication port on the multiplex system. The location of the communication port shall be easily accessible. A hardware gateway and/or wireless communications system are options if requested by the Agency. The communication port(s) shall be located as specified by the Agency. TS 44.3.2 DIAGNOSTICS AND FAULT DETECTION The multiplex system shall have a proven method of determining its status (system health and input/output status) and detecting either active (online) or inactive (offline) faults through the use of on- board visual/audible indicators. In addition to the indicators, the system shall employ an advanced diagnostic and fault detection system, which shall be accessible via either a personal computer or a handheld unit. Either unit shall have the ability to check logic function. The diagnostic data can be incorporated into the information level network or the central data access system. An option shall be made available to provide a mock-up board. A mock-up board, where key components of the multiplexing system are replicated on a functional model, shall be provided as a tool for diagnostic, design verification and training purposes, if required by an agency. The mock-up board should be priced separately in the Pricing Schedule. TS 44.3.3 PROGRAMMABILITY (SOFTWARE) The multiplex system shall have security provisions to protect its software from unwanted changes. This shall be achieved through any or all of the following procedures: • Password protection • Limited distribution of the configuration software • Limited access to the programming tools required to change the software • Hardware protection that prevents undesired changes to the software Provisions for programming the multiplex system shall be possible through a PC or laptop. The multiplex system shall have proper revision control to ensure that the hardware and software are identical on each vehicle equipped with the system. Revision control shall be provided by all of the following: • Hardware component identification where labels are included on all multiplex hardware to identify components • Hardware series identification where all multiplex hardware displays the current hardware serial number and firmware revision employed by the module • Software revision identification where all copies of the software in service display the most recent revision number • A method of determining which version of the software is currently in use in the multiplex system Section 5 — Page 59 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 44.4 ELECTRONIC NOISE CONTROL Electrical and electronic subsystems and components on all coaches shall not emit electromagnetic radiation that will interfere with on -board systems, components or equipment, telephone service, radio or TV reception, or violate regulations of the Federal Communications Commission. Electrical and electronic subsystems on the coaches shall not be affected by external sources of RFI/EMI. This includes, but is not limited to, radio and TV transmission, portable electronic devices including computers in the vicinity of or onboard the coaches, AC or DC power lines and RFI/EMI emissions from other vehicles. DRIVER PROVISIONS, Controls and instrumentation TS -45 DRIVER'S AREA CONTROLS TS 45.1 GENERAL In general when designing the driver's area within the Coach, it is recommended that SAE J833, "Human Physical Dimensions," be used. Switches and controls shall be divided into basic groups and assigned to specific areas, in conformance with SAE Recommended Practice J680, Revised 1988, "Location and Operation of Instruments and Controls in Motor Truck Cabs," and be essentially within the hand reach envelope described in SAE Recommended Practice J287, "Driver Hand Control Reach." TS 45.2 GLARE The driver's work area shall be designed to minimize glare to the extent possible. Objects within and adjacent to this area shall be matte black or dark gray in color wherever possible to reduce the reflection of light onto the windshield. The use of polished metal and light-colored surfaces within and adjacent to the driver's area shall be avoided. TS 45.3 VISORS/SUN SHADES Adjustable sun visor(s) shall be provided for the driver's windshield and the driver's side window. Visors shall be shaped to minimize light leakage between the visor and windshield pillars. Visors shall store out of the way and shall not obstruct airflow from the climate control system or interfere with other equipment, such as the radio handset or the destination control. Deployment of the visors shall not restrict vision of the rearview mirrors. Visor adjustments shall be made easily by hand with positive locking and releasing devices and shall not be subject to damage by over -tightening. Sun visor construction and materials shall be strong enough to resist breakage during adjustments. Visors may be transparent but shall not allow a visible light transmittance in excess of 10 percent. Visors, when deployed, shall be effective in the driver's field of view at angles more than 5 deg above the horizontal. Section 5 — Page 60 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 45.4 DRIVER'S CONTROLS Frequently used controls must be in easily accessible locations. These include the door control, kneel control, windshield wiper/washer controls, ramp, and lift and run switch. Any switches and controls necessary for the safe operation of the coach shall be conveniently located and shall provide for ease of operation. They shall be identifiable by shape, touch and permanent markings. Controls also shall be located so that passengers may not easily tamper with control settings. All panel -mounted switches and controls shall be marked with easily read identifiers. Graphic symbols shall conform to SAE Recommended Practice J2402, Road Vehicles — Symbols For Controls, Indicators, and Tell Tales," where available and applicable. Color of switches and controls shall be dark with contrasting typography or symbols. Mechanical switches and controls shall be replaceable, and the wiring at these controls shall be serviceable from a convenient location. Switches, controls and instruments shall be dust- and water- resistant. TS 45.5 NORMAL COACH OPERATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS The following list identifies some common coach controls used to operate the coach. These controls are either frequently used or critical to the operation of the coach. They shall be located within easy reach of the operator. The operator shall not be required to stand or turn to view or actuate these controls unless specified otherwise. Systems or components monitored by onboard diagnostics system shall be displayed in clear view of the operator and provide visual and/or audible indicators. The intensity of indicators shall permit easy determination of on/off status in bright sunlight but shall not cause a distraction or visibility problem at night. All indicators shall be illuminated using backlighting. The indicator panel shall be located in Area 1 or Area 5, within easy view of the operator instrument panel. All indicators shall have a method of momentarily testing their operation. The audible alarm shall be tamper-resistant and shall have an outlet level between 80 and 83 dBA when measured at the location of the operator's ear. On -board displays visible to the operator shall be limited to indicating the status of those functions described herein that are necessary for the operation of the coach. All other indicators needed for diagnostics and their related interface hardware shall be concealed and protected from unauthorized access. Table 6 represents instruments and alarms. The intent of the overall physical layout of the indicators shall be in a logical grouping of systems and severity nature of the fault. Please provide drawings of dash and controls with locations. Consideration shall be provided for future additions of spare indicators as the capability of onboard diagnostic systems improves. Blank spaces shall contain LEDs. Section 5 — Page 61 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Master run Rotary, four -Side console switch position detent Engine start, Approved Side console front momentary switch Engine start, Approved Engine rear momentary switch compartment Engine run, Three -position rear toggle switch Touch panel Drive selector switch Engine compartment Side console HVAC Switch or switches Side console to control HVAC Function Visual/ Audible Master control for coach, off, day run, night run and clearance ID lights Activates engine starter motor Activates engine starter motor Permits running engine from rear start, normal front run position and off Provides selection of propulsion: forward, reverse and neutral Permits selection of passenger ventilation: off, cool, heat, low fan, high fan or full auto with on/off only Permits supplemental Driver's Rotary, three- Side console or ventilation: fan off, low or ventilation position detent dash left wing high i � I Defroster fan Rotary, three- position detent Variable position Side console or Permits defroster: fan ott, dash left wing low, medium or high Side console or Adjusts defroster water dash left wing flow and temperature Defroster temperature One -variable Variable speed control of Windshield rotary position Dash left wing left and right windshield wiper operating both wipers wipers — — Amber light Gear selection Section 5 — Page 62 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Windshield Push button washer Location I Function Activates windshield Dash left wing washers Dash panel Rotary rheostat or Side console or lights I stepping switch dash left wing Provides adjustment for light intensity in night run position [passenger lects mode of Side console compartment lighting: off, on, normal Side console `Selects high idle speed of y engine Visual/ Audible Permits operation of ramp Side console or and kneel operations at Amber light dash right wing each door remote panel Front door remote or dash right wing Front door`Three-position Right side of ramp I momentary switch steering wheel Front kneel Three -position I Front door momentary switch remote Recessed push button, NO and Silent alarm NC contacts Side console momentary Permits ramp and kneel Three-position Interior lights switch _ I Two -position Fast idle switch WC ramp/ Two -position kneel enable switch' door dash indicator; Front Two -position ramp/kneel keyed switch' I enable Provides adjustment for light intensity in night run position [passenger lects mode of Side console compartment lighting: off, on, normal Side console `Selects high idle speed of y engine Visual/ Audible Permits operation of ramp Side console or and kneel operations at Amber light dash right wing each door remote panel Front door remote or dash right wing Front door`Three-position Right side of ramp I momentary switch steering wheel Front kneel Three -position I Front door momentary switch remote Recessed push button, NO and Silent alarm NC contacts Side console momentary Permits ramp and kneel activation from front door Amber light area, key required' Permits deploy and stow Red light of front ramp Permits kneeling Amber or red activation and raise and dash indicator; normal at front door exterior alarm remote location and amber light Activates emergency radio alarm at dispatch and permits covert microphone and/or enables destination sign emergency message L Section 5 — Page 63 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Video system event switch Left remote mirror Right remote mirror Mirror heater Passenger door control Rear door override Engine shutdown override Momentary on/off momentary switch Side console with plastic guard Four -position Side console toggle type Function Visual/ Audible Triggers event equipment, triggers event light on Amber light dash i Permits two -axis adjustment of left exterior mirror Permits two -axis Four -position Side console adjustment of right toggle type exterior mirror Switch or I Permits heating of outside temperature Side console mirrors when required activated Five -position Permits open/close handle type detent Side console, control of front and rear or two momentary forward passenger doors push buttons Two -position Side console, Allows driver to override switch in forward activation of rear door approved location passenger tape switches Momentary switch with operation Side console protection Permits driver to override auto engine shutdown Red light Hazard Two -position Side console or Activates emergency Two green lights flashers switch dash right wing flashers Fire Red push button Dash left wing or Permits driver to override suppression with protective dash center and manually discharge Red light cover fire suppression system Section 5 — Page 64 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Mobile data Facilitates driver LCD display with Mobile data terminal coach Above right interaction with visual status and terminal operator interface dash wing communication system text messages panel and master log -on Farebox Farebox coach Facilitates driver interface operator interface Near farebox interaction with farebox LCD display panel system Facilitates driver Destination Destination sign In approved 'interaction with LCD display sign interface interface panel location destination sign system, manual entry Momentary push button (two Activates left and right Two green lights Turn signals required) raised Left foot panel turn signals and optional from other audible indicator switches Momentary push In approved Permits driver to manually T PA manual button location activate public address microphone Permits driver to make announcements with both Low -profile Low -profile Steering column hands on the wheel and microphone discrete mounting focusing on road conditions Detented push In approved Permits driver to toggle High beam button location between low and high Blue light beam Parking brake Pneumatic PPV Side console or Permits driver to apply Red light dash left wing and release parking brake Section 5 — Page 65 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Vertical side of Permits driver to push and Park brake Pneumatic PPV � the side console release hold to release brakes or dash center Hill holder Two -position Applies brakes to prevent Side console momentary switch coach from rolling Permits technician to raise Remote engine Rotary rheostat Engine and lower engine RPM speed compartment from engine compartment I Permits driver override to Master door/ Multi -pole toggle, Out of operator's disable door and Red light interlock I detented reach brake/throttle interlock Warning v Dash panel Illuminates to warn driver interlocks Red indicator light center that interlocks have been Red light deactivated deactivated I Within reach of Permits driver override to Retarder Multi -pole switch operator or disable brake Red light disable detented approved retardation/regeneration location Permits driver to Alarm Push button Approved acknowledge alarm acknowledge momentary location condition In sign Permits driver to override Rear door Multi -pole toggle, compartment or rear door passenger passenger detented driver's barrier sensingstem sensor disable compartment system Indicator/ Momentary switch Dash center Permits driver to activate All visuals and test of sentry,indicators alarm test or programming' panel audibles button and audible alarms Section 5 — Page 66 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible 110 V power Approved Property to specify what Auxiliary power receptacle location function to supply Speedometer, Visual indication of speed odometer, and and distance traveled, Dash center Speedometer diagnostic accumulated vehicle Visual panel capability, 5 -mile mileage, fault condition increments display Air pressure Primary and seconds secondary, Dash center Visual indication of primary and secondary air Red light and g gauge 5 psi increments panel systems buzzer Coach operator Property specific Indication of fire detection Buzzer and red Fire detection display or dash center activation by zone/location light Door Sensing of door Indication of rear door Red light and obstruction obstruction Dash center sensitive edge activation buzzer Door not properly Property specific Indication of rear door not Buzzer or alarm Door ajar closed or dash center properly closed and red light Sensing low Low system air primary and Indication of low air Buzzer and red pressure secondary air tank Dash center system pressure light pressure Property specific Methane detection Detection of Detects system failure y No start condition, amber system integrity or dash center light function Methane Indication of 20% LED emergency Property specific Detects levels of methane Flashing red at detection or dash center 20 LEL /° light (LEL) Methane Indication of 50% Property specific Detects levels of methane Solid red at 50% detection LEL or dash center LEL Section 5 — Page 67 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function Visual/ Audible Low coolant indicator may be Engine coolant supplied as Within driver's Detects low coolant Amber light indicator audible alert and sight condition visual and/or text message Coolant temperature Hot engine indicator may be Within driver's Detects hot engine supplied as condition and initiates Red light indicator audible alert and sight time delay shutdown visual and/or text message Engine oil pressure indicator Detects low engine oil Low engine oil may be supplied Within driver's pressure condition and Red light pressure as audible alert sight initiates time -delayed indicator and visual and/or shutdown text message ABS indicator Detects system Dash center Displays system failure Amber light status HVAC Detects system Dash center Displays system failure Amber or red indicator status light Detects no charge Charging condition and optionally Red light system Detect charging detects battery high, low, flashing or solid indicator system status Dash center imbalance, no charge based on (12/24 V) condition, and initiates condition time -delayed shutdown Section 5 — Page 68 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TABLE 6 (Commuter Coach) Commuter Coach Instruments and Alarms Device Description Location Function _7Visual/ Audible Bike rack Indication of bike rack not Amber or red deployed Detects bike rack Dash center being in fully stowed light indicator position position Analog gauge, Indication of fuel tank Fuel tank level graduated based Dash center level/pressure on fuel type Displays level of DEF tank DEF gauge Level Indicator Center dash and indicates with warning Red light light when low Active Indication of electric Amber or red regeneration Detects status Dash center regeneration 9 ht light g Audible and Warning indication for amber warning Turntable Detects status Dash center hinge locking and red light if locked Momentarily release Turntable Interlock Side console interlock brakes due to momentary switch overangled condition TS 45.6 DRIVER FOOT CONTROLS Accelerator and brake pedals shall be designed for ankle motion. Foot surfaces of the pedals shall be faced with wear -resistant, nonskid, replaceable material. TS 45.6.1 PEDAL ANGLE The vertical angle of the accelerator and brake pedals shall be determined from a horizontal plane regardless of the slope of the cab floor. The accelerator and brake pedals shall be positioned at an angle of 37 to 50 deg at the point of initiation of contact and extend downward to an angle of 10 to 18 deg at full throttle. Section 5 — Page 69 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 The location of the brake and accelerator pedals shall be determined by the manufacturer, based on space needs, visibility, lower edge of windshield and vertical H -point. TS 45.6.2 PEDAL DIMENSIONS AND POSITION The floor -mounted accelerator pedal shall be 10 to 12 in. long and 3 to 4 in. wide. Clearance around the pedal must allow for no interference precluding operation. The accelerator and brake pedals shall be positioned such that the spacing between them, measured at the heel of the pedals, is between 1 and 2 in. Both pedals should be located approximately on the same plane coincident to the surface of the pedals. TS 45.7 DRIVER FOOT SWITCHES Floor -Mounted Foot Control Platform. The angle of the turn signal platform shall be determined from a horizontal plane, regardless of the slope of the cab floor. The turn signal platform shall be angled at a minimum of 10 deg and a maximum of 37 deg. It shall be located no closer to the seat front than the heel point of the accelerator pedal. The control switches for the turn signals shall be mounted on an inclined, floor -mounted stainless steel enclosure or metal plate mounted to an incline integrated into the driver's platform, located to the left of the steering column. The location and design of this enclosure shall be such that foot room for the operator is not impeded. The inclined mounting surface shall be skid -resistant. All other signals, including high beam and public address system, shall be in approved locations. The foot switches shall be UL -listed, heavy-duty type, of a rugged, corrosion -resistant metal construction. The foot switches for the directionals shall be momentary type, while those for the PA system and the high beam shall be latching type. The spacing of the switches shall be such that inadvertent simultaneous deflection of switches is prevented. Other Floor -Mounted Controls; The following may be floor mounted, momentary or latching, as identified by the Agency: • hazard • silent alarm • PA system TS -46 DRIVER'S AMENITIES TS 46.1 COAT HANGER Coat Hanger; A suitable hanger shall be installed in a convenient, approved location for the driver's coat. Section 5 — Page 70 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 46.2 STORAGE BOX An enclosed driver storage area shall be provided with a positive latching door and/or lock. The minimum size is 2750 in.3. TS -47 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS TS 47.1 WINDSHIELD WIPERS The coach shall be equipped with a windshield wiper for each half of the windshield. At 60 mph, no more than 10 percent of the wiped area shall be lost due to windshield wiper lift. For two-piece windshields, both wipers shall park along the center edges of the windshield glass. For single -piece windshields, wipers shall park along the bottom edge of the windshield. Windshield wiper motors and mechanisms shall be easily accessible for repairs or service. The fastener that secures the wiper arm to the drive mechanism shall be corrosion -resistant. Wipers shall be electric motor driven with two speeds and adjustable intermittent wiper action. TS 47.2 WINDSHIELD WASHERS The windshield washer system, when used with the wipers, shall deposit washing fluid evenly and completely wet the entire wiped area. The windshield washer system shall have a minimum 3 -gallon reservoir, located for easy refilling from outside the coach. Reservoir pumps, lines and fittings shall be corrosion -resistant and must include a means to determine fluid level. Section 5 — Page 71 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -48 DRIVER'S SEAT FIGURE 5 Driver's Seat TS 48.1 DIMENSIONS Head rest Seat back Arm rest Se=belt Seat base The driver's seat shall be comfortable and adjustable so that people ranging in size from a 95th - percentile male to a 5th -percentile female may operate the coach. Contractor to provide make and model numbers of driver seat options available and specifications. TS 48.2 SEAT BELT The belt assembly should be an auto -locking retractor (ALR).All seat belts should be stored in automatic retractors. The belts shall be mounted to the seat frame so that the driver may adjust the seat without resetting the seat belt. The seat and seatbelt assemblies as installed in the coach shall withstand static horizontal forces as required in FMVSS 207 and 210. Lap Belt Length The lap belt assembly shall be 72 in. in length with an 8 in. extension Section 5 — Page 72 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 48.3 SEAT CONTROL LOCATIONS While seated, the driver shall be able to make seat adjustments by hand without complexity, excessive effort or being pinched. Adjustment mechanisms shall hold the adjustments and shall not be subject to inadvertent changes. TS 48.4 SEAT STRUCTURE AND MATERIALS Cushions Cushions shall be fully padded with at least 3 in. of materials in the seating areas at the bottom and back. Cushion Materials Foam and fabric that meets FTA Docket 90A. TS 48.5 PEDESTAL Powder -coated steel. TS 48.6 SEAT OPTIONS The following options shall be made available to the agencies with separate pricing included in the proposal: • heated seat • seat alarm • fabric options • seat air vent • side bolsters adjustments • silicone seat cushion TS 48.7 MIRRORS TS 48.7.1 EXTERIOR MIRRORS The coach shall be equipped with corrosion -resistant, outside rearview mirrors mounted with stable supports to minimize vibration. Mirrors shall be firmly attached to the coach to minimize vibration and to prevent loss of adjustment with a breakaway mounting system. Mirrors shall permit the driver to view the roadway along the sides of the coach, including the rear wheels. Mirrors should be positioned to prevent blind spots. Mirrors shall retract or fold sufficiently to allow coach washing operations but avoid contact with windshield. Section 5 — Page 73 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Curbside Mirrors The curbside rearview mirror shall be mounted so that its lower edge is no less than 76 in. above the street surface. A lower mount may be required due to mirror configuration requests. Remote Adjustment of Street and Curbside Mirrors The driver shall be able to adjust all four external rear view mirrors remotely while seated in the driving position. The controls for remote positioning of the mirrors can be a single or dual switch or device. Mirrors must be heated and be operated in conjunction with the driver's heater or with separate controls. TS 48.7.2 INTERIOR MIRRORS Mirrors shall be provided for the driver to observe passengers throughout the coach without leaving the seat and without shoulder movement. The driver shall be able to observe passengers in the front/entrance and rear/exit areas (if applicable), anywhere in the aisle, and in the rear seats. WINDOWS TS -49 GENERAL A minimum of 12,000 sq in. of window area, including operator and door windows, shall be required on each side of the standard configuration coach. TS -50 WINDSHIELD The windshield shall permit an operator's field of view as referenced in SAE Recommended Practice J1050. The vertically upward view shall be a minimum of 14 deg, measured above the horizontal and excluding any shaded band. The vertically downward view shall permit detection of an object 3'/2 ft high no more than 2 ft in front of the coach. The horizontal view shall be a minimum of 90 deg above the line of sight .Any binocular obscuration due to a center divider may be ignored when determining the 90 deg requirement, provided that the divider does not exceed a 3 deg angle in the operator's field of view. Windshield pillars shall not exceed 10 deg of binocular obscuration. The windshield shall be designed and installed to minimize external glare as well as reflections from inside the coach. The windshield shall be easily replaceable by removing zip -locks from the windshield retaining moldings. Bonded -in-place windshields shall not be used. Winglets may be bonded. TS 50.1 GLAZING The windshield glazing material shall have a'/4 in. nominal thickness laminated safety glass conforming to the requirements of ANSI Z26.1 Test Grouping AS -1 and the recommended practices defined in SAE J673. Section 5 — Page 74 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Shaded Band The upper portion of the windshield above the driver's field of view shall have a dark, shaded band and marked AS -3, with a minimum luminous transmittance of 5 percent when tested in accordance to ASTM D-1003. TS -51 DRIVER'S SIDE WINDOW The driver's side window shall be the sliding type, requiring only the rear half of the sash to latch upon closing, and shall open sufficiently to permit the seated operator to easily adjust the street -side outside rearview mirror. When in an open position, the window shall not rattle or close during braking. This window section shall slide in tracks or channels designed to last the service life of the coach. The operator's side window shall not be bonded in place and shall be easily replaceable. The glazing material shall have a single -density tint. The driver's view, perpendicular through operator's side window glazing, should extend a minimum of 33 in. (840 mm) to the rear of the heel point on the accelerator, and in any case must accommodate a 95th percentile male operator. The view through the glazing at the front of the assembly should begin not more than 26 in. (560 mm) above the operator's floor to ensure visibility of an under -mounted convex mirror. Driver's window construction shall maximize ability for full opening of the window. The driver's side window glazing material shall have a '/4 in. nominal thickness laminated safety glass conforming to the requirements of ANSI Z26.1-1996 Test Grouping AS -2 and the recommended practices defined in SAE J673. The design shall prevent sections from freezing closed in the winter. Light transmittance shall be 75 percent on the glass area below 53 in. from the operator platform floor. On the top -fixed -over -bottom -slider configuration, the top fixed area above 53 in. may have a maximum 5 percent light transmittance. Standard Driver's Side Window, Traditional Frame: • top fixed over bottom slider non -egress TS -52 SIDE WINDOWS TS 52.1 CONFIGURATION Side windows shall not be bonded in place, but shall be easily replaceable without disturbing adjacent windows and shall be mounted so that flexing or vibration from engine operation or normal road excitation is not apparent. All aluminum and steel material will be treated to prevent corrosion. Section 5 — Page 75 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 52.2 EMERGENCY EXIT (EGRESS) CONFIGURATION All side windows shall be fixed in position, except as necessary to meet the emergency escape requirements. Standard Passenger Side Window Configurations Agency to choose from the following options: • traditional frame full fixed • openable windows with inward -opening transom panels openable windows with sliding transom panels TS 52.3 MATERIALS Safety Glass Glazing Panels Contractor to supply technical specifications on standard glazing used with options listed as line items. All glazing must meet FMVSS, DOT and all other federal and state regulations. Specifications and Options should be listed for solar transmittance and heat absorption. NOTE: All glass treatments must be permanent, within the glass and/or in the center membrane. Surface films are not permitted. SHGC and light transmission performance shall be defined by the National Fenestration Rating Council. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING TS -53 CAPACITY AND PERFORMANCE The HVAC climate control system shall be capable of controlling the temperature and maintaining the humidity levels of the interior of the coach as defined in the following paragraphs. With the coach running at the design operating profile with corresponding door opening cycle, and carrying a number of passengers equal to 150 percent of the seated load, the HVAC system shall control the average passenger compartment temperature within a range between 60 and 80 OF, while maintaining the relative humidity to a value of 50 percent or less. The system shall maintain these conditions while subjected to any outside ambient temperatures within a range of 10 to 95 OF and at any ambient relative humidity levels between 5 and 50 percent. When the coach is operated in outside ambient temperatures of 95 to 115 OF, the interior temperature of the coach shall be permitted to rise 0.5 OF for each degree of exterior temperature in excess of 95 OF. Section 5 — Page 76 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 When the coach is operated in outside ambient temperatures in the range of -10 to 10 OF, the interior temperature of the coach shall not fall below 55 OF while the coach is running on the design operating profile. System capacity testing, including pull-down/warm-up, stabilization and profile, shall be conducted in accordance to APTA's Recommended Practice "Transit Coach HVAC System Instrumentation and Performance Testing." NOTE: The recommended locations of temperature probes are only guidelines and may require slight modifications to address actual coach design. Care must be taken to avoid placement of sensing devices in the immediate path of an air duct outlet. In general, the locations are intended to accurately represent the interior passenger area. Additional testing shall be performed as necessary to ensure compliance to performance requirements stated herein. Capacity and Performance Requirements The air-conditioning portion of the HVAC system shall be capable of reducing the passenger compartment temperature from 115 to 70 OF ± 3 OF in less than 30 minutes after system engagement. Engine temperature shall be within the normal operating range at the time of start-up of the cool -down test, and the engine speed shall be limited to fast idle, which may be activated by a driver -controlled device. During the cool -down period, the refrigerant pressure shall not exceed safe high -side pressures, and the condenser discharge air temperature, measured 6 in. from the surface of the coil, shall be less than 45 OF above the condenser inlet air temperature. No simulated solar load shall be used. There shall be no passengers on board, and the doors and windows shall be closed. The air conditioning system shall meet these performance requirements using R407C. TS -54 CONTROLS AND TEMPERATURE UNIFORMITY The HVAC system excluding the driver's heater/defroster shall be centrally controlled with an advanced electronic/diagnostic control system with provisions for extracting/reading data. The system shall be compliant with J1939 Communication Protocol for receiving and broadcasting of data. Hot engine coolant water shall be delivered to the HVAC system driver's defroster/heater and other heater cores by means of an auxiliary coolant pump, sized for the required flow, which is brushless and seal less having a minimum maintenance -free service life for both the brushless motor and the pump of at least 40,000 hours at full power. Manually Adjustable Temperature Control Set Point The climate control system shall have the provision to allow the driver to adjust the temperature control set point at a minimum of between 68 and 72 OF. From then on, all interior climate control system requirements shall be attained automatically, unless re -adjusted by the driver. Section 5 — Page 77 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 The driver shall have full control over the defroster and driver's heater. The driver shall be able to adjust the temperature in the driver's area through air distribution and fans. The interior climate control system shall switch automatically to the ventilating mode if the refrigerant compressor or condenser fan fails. Interior temperature distribution shall be uniform to the extent practicable to prevent hot and/or cold spots. After stabilization with doors closed, the temperatures between any two points in the passenger compartment in the same vertical plane, and 6 to 72 in. above the floor, shall not vary by more than 5 OF with doors closed. The interior temperatures, measured at the same height above the floor, shall not vary more than ±5 OF from the front to the rear from the average temperature determined in accordance with APTA's "Recommended Instrumentation and Performance Testing for Transit Coach Air Conditioning System." Variations of greater than ±5 OF will be allowed for limited, localized areas provided that the majority of the measured temperatures fall within the specified requirement. TS 54.1 AUXILIARY HEATER No auxiliary heater - TS -55 AIR FLOW TS 55.1 PASSENGER AREA The cooling mode of the interior climate control system shall introduce air into the coach at or near the ceiling height at a minimum rate of 25 cubic ft per minute (cfm) per passenger based on the standard configuration coach carrying a number of passengers equal to 150 percent of the seated load. Airflow shall be evenly distributed throughout the coach, with air velocity not exceeding 100 ft per minute on any passenger. The ventilating mode shall provide air at a minimum flow rate of 20 cfm per passenger. Airflow may be reduced to 15 cfm per passenger (150 percent of seated load) when operating in the heating mode. The fans shall not activate until the heating element has warmed sufficiently to ensure at least 70 OF air outlet temperature. The heating air outlet temperature shall not exceed 120 OF under any normal operating conditions. The climate control blower motors and fan shall be designed such that their operation complies with the interior noise level requirements. Requirement for 10 Percent "Fresh Air" Mixture The air shall be composed of no less than 10 percent outside air. TS 55.2 DRIVER'S AREA The coach interior climate control system shall deliver at least 100 cfm of air to the driver's area when operating in the ventilating and cooling modes. Adjustable nozzles shall permit variable distribution or shutdown of the airflow. Airflow in the heating mode shall be reduced proportionally to the reduction of airflow into the passenger area. The windshield defroster unit shall meet the requirements of SAE Section 5 — Page 78 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Recommended Practice J382, "Windshield Defrosting Systems Performance Requirements," and shall have the capability of diverting heated air to the driver's feet and legs. The defroster or interior climate control system shall maintain visibility through the driver's side window. TS 55.3 CONTROLS FOR THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (CCS) The controls for the driver's compartment for heating, ventilation and cooling systems shall be integrated and shall meet the following requirements: The heat/defrost system fan shall be controlled by a separate switch that has an "off' position and at least two positions for speed control. All switches and controls shall preclude the possibility of clothing becoming entangled, and shields shall be provided, if required. If the fans are approved by the Agency, an "on/off ' switch shall be located to the right of or near the main defroster switch. A manually operated control valve shall control the coolant flow through the heater core. If a cable -operated manual control valve is used, then the cable length shall be kept to a minimum to reduce cable seizing. Heater water control valves shall be "positive" type, closed or open. The method of operating remote valves shall require the concurrence of the Agency project manager. TS 55.4 DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS A separate heating, ventilation and defroster system for the driver's area shall be provided and shall be controlled by the driver. The system shall meet the following requirements: The heater and defroster system shall provide heating for the driver and heated air to completely defrost and defog the windshield, driver's side window, and the front door glasses in all operating conditions. Fan(s) shall be able to draw air from the coach body interior and/or exterior through a control device and pass it through the heater core to the defroster system and over the driver's feet. A minimum capacity of 100 cfm shall be provided. The driver shall have complete control of the heat and fresh airflow for the driver's area. The defroster supply outlets shall be located at the lower edge of the windshield. These outlets shall be durable and shall be free of sharp edges that can catch clothes during normal daily cleaning. The system shall be such that foreign objects such as coins or tickets cannot fall into the defroster air outlets. Adjustable ball vents or louvers shall be provided at the left of the driver's position to allow direction of air onto the side windows. A ventilation system shall be provided to ensure driver comfort and shall be capable of providing fresh air in both the foot and head areas. Vents shall be controllable by the driver from the normal driving position. Decals shall be provided, indicating "operating instructions" and "open" and "closed" positions. When closed, vents shall be sealed to prevent the migration of water or air into the coach. TS 55.5 DRIVER'S COOLING Separate Dedicated Evaporator; using a separate, dedicated evaporator, the climate control system shall be designed to maintain the driver's compartment temperatures within the range specified for the passenger compartment. The unit shall operate when the climate control switch is in the "Cool" position. It shall have a separate thermostatic control. Section 5 — Page 79 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -56 AIR FILTRATION Air shall be filtered before entering the AC system and being discharged into the passenger compartment. The filter shall meet the ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 requirement for 5 percent or better atmospheric dust spot efficiency, 50 percent weight arrestance, and a minimum dust holding capacity of 120 g per 1000 cfm cell. Air filters shall be easily removable for service. Air filters shall be cleanable. TS -57 ROOF VENTILATORS Each ventilator shall be easily opened and closed manually. When open with the coach in motion, this ventilator shall provide fresh air inside the coach. The ventilator shall cover an opening area no less than 425 sq in. and shall be capable of being positioned as a scoop with either the leading or trailing edge open no less than 4 in., or with all four edges raised simultaneously to a height of no less than 3'/2 in. An escape hatch shall be incorporated into the roof ventilator. Roof ventilator(s) shall be sealed to prevent entry of water when closed. TS -58 MAINTAINABILITY Manually controlled shut-off valves in the refrigerant lines shall allow isolation of the compressor and dehydrator filter for service. To the extent practicable, self-sealing couplings utilizing O-ring seals shall be used to break and seal the refrigerant lines during removal of major components, such as the refrigerant compressor. Shut-off valves may be provided in lieu of self-sealing couplings. The condenser shall be located to efficiently transfer heat to the atmosphere and shall not ingest air warmed above the ambient temperature by the coach mechanical equipment, or to discharge air into any other system of the coach. The location of the condenser shall preclude its obstruction by wheel splash, road dirt or debris. HVAC components located within 6 in. of floor level shall be constructed to resist damage and corrosion. High and low refrigerant pressure electronic gauges to be located in the return air area. TS -59 ENTRANCE/EXIT AREA HEATING No requirements for entrance/exit area heating. TS -60 FLOOR -LEVEL HEATING Sufficient heaters shall be provided with ducting to blow warm air upward through a cavity in the wall and discharge the warm air at the base of the windows. Control of the warm wall heating shall be through the main heating system electronic control. Section 5 — Page 80 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 EXTERIOR PANELS, FINISHES and Exterior Lighting TS -61 DESIGN The coach shall have a clean, smooth, simple design, primarily derived from coach performance requirements and passenger service criteria. The exterior and body features, including grilles and louvers, shall be shaped to facilitate cleaning by automatic coach washers without snagging washer brushes. Water and dirt shall not be retained in or on any body feature to freeze or bleed out onto the coach after leaving the washer. The body and windows shall be sealed to prevent leaking of air, dust or water under normal operating conditions and during cleaning in automatic coach washers for the service life of the coach. Exterior panels shall be sufficiently stiff to minimize vibration, drumming or flexing while the coach is in service. When panels are lapped, the upper and forward panels shall act as a watershed. However, if entry of moisture into the interior of the vehicle is prevented by other means, then rear cap panels may be lapped otherwise. The windows, hatches and doors shall be able to be sealed. Accumulation of spray and splash generated by the coach's wheels shall be minimized on windows and mirrors. TS 61.1 MATERIALS Body materials shall be selected and the body fabricated to reduce maintenance, extend durability and provide consistency of appearance throughout the service life of the coach. Detailing shall be kept simple, and add-on devices and trim shall be minimized and integrated into the basic design. TS -62 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Exterior protrusions along the side and front of the coach greater than '/2 in. and within 80 in. of the ground shall have a radius no less than the amount of the protrusion. The exterior rearview mirrors, cameras and required lights and reflectors are exempt from the protrusion requirement. Advertising frames shall protrude no more than '/8 in. from the body surface. Grilles, doors, bumpers and other features on the sides and rear of the coach shall be designed to minimize toeholds or handholds. Exterior protrusions shall not cause a line -of -sight blockage for the driver. TS -63 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT TS 63.1 SIDE BODY PANELS Structural elements supporting exterior body panels shall allow side body panels below the windows to be repaired. Section 5 — Page 81 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -64 RAIN GUTTERS Rain gutters shall be provided to prevent water flowing from the roof onto the passenger doors and driver's side window. When the coach is decelerated, the gutters shall not drain onto the windshield, driver's side window or door boarding area. Cross sections of the gutters shall be adequate for proper operation. TS -65 LICENSE PLATE PROVISIONS Provisions shall be made to mount standard -size U.S./Canada license plates per SAE J686 on the front and rear of the coach. These provisions shall direct -mount or recess the license plates so that they can be cleaned by automatic coach -washing equipment without being caught by the brushes. The rear license plate provision shall be illuminated per SAE J587. Default Requirement for Rub Rails Rub rails composed of flexible, resilient material shall be provided to protect both sides of the coach body from damage caused by minor sideswipe accidents with automobiles. Rub rails shall have vertical dimensions of no less than 2 in. (50 mm) with the centerline no higher than 35 in. above the ground between the wheel wells. The rub rails shall withstand impacts of 200 ft -lbs of energy from a steel -faced spherical missile no less than 9 in. in diameter and of a 500 Ib load applied anywhere along their length by a rigid plate 1 ft in length, wider than the rub rail, and with a'/4 in. end radii, with no visible damage to the rub rail, retainer or supporting structure. The rub rail may be discontinued at doorways, wheel wells and articulated joints if applicable. A damaged portion of the rub rail shall be replaceable without requiring removal or replacement of the entire rub rail. NOTE: Installation of rub rails may preclude the installation and/or size of exterior advertising signs or racks. TS -66 FENDER SKIRTS Features to minimize water spray from the coach in wet conditions shall be included in wheel housing design. Any fender skirts shall be easily replaceable. They shall be flexible if they extend beyond the allowable body width. Wheels and tires shall be removable with the fender skirts in place. TS 66.1 SPLASH APRONS Standard Splash Aprons Splash aprons, composed of 1/4 in. minimum composition or rubberized fabric, shall be installed behind and/or in front of wheels as needed to reduce road splash and to protect under floor components. The splash aprons shall extend downward to within 6 in. off the road surface at static conditions. Apron widths shall be no less than tire widths. Splash aprons shall be bolted to the coach understructure. Section 5 — Page 82 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Splash aprons and their attachments shall be inherently weaker than the structure to which they are attached. The flexible portions of the splash aprons shall not be included in the road clearance measurements. Splash apron shall be installed as necessary to protect the wheelchair loading device from road splash. Other splash aprons shall be installed where necessary to protect coach equipment. TS -67 SERVICE COMPARTMENTS AND ACCESS DOORS TS 67.1 ACCESS DOORS Conventional doors shall be used for the engine compartment and for all auxiliary equipment compartments including doors for checking the quantity and adding to the engine coolant, engine lubricant and transmission fluid. Access openings shall be sized for easy performance of tasks within the compartment, including tool operating space. Access doors shall be of rugged construction and shall maintain mechanical integrity and function under normal operations throughout the service life of the coach. They shall close flush with the body surface. All doors shall be hinged at the top or on the forward edge and shall be prevented from coming loose or opening during transit service or in coach washing operations. All access doors shall be retained in the open position. Latch handles shall be flush with, or recessed behind, the body contour and shall be sized to provide an adequate grip for opening. Access doors, when opened, shall not restrict access for servicing other components or systems. If precluded by design, the manufacturer shall provide door design information specifying how the requirements are met. TS 67.2 ACCESS DOOR LATCH/LOCKS Requirement for Latches on Access Doors Access doors larger than 100 sq in. in area shall be equipped with corrosion -resistant flush -mounted latches or locks except for coolant and fuel fill access doors. All such access doors that require a tool to open shall be standardized throughout the vehicle. Agencies may define any required locks or latches for access doors and prices should be quoted separately. TS -68 BUMPERS TS 68.1 LOCATION Bumpers shall provide impact protection for the front and rear of the coach with the top of the bumper being 27 in., ±2 in., above the ground. Bumper height shall be such that when one coach is parked behind another, a portion of the bumper faces will contact each other. TS 68.2 FRONT BUMPER No part of the coach, including the bumper, shall be damaged as a result of a 5 mph impact of the coach at curb weight with a fixed, flat barrier perpendicular to the coach's longitudinal centerline. The bumper shall return to its pre -impact shape within 10 minutes of the impact. The bumper shall protect the coach Section 5 — Page 83 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 from damage as a result of 6.5 mph impacts at any point by the common carriage with contoured impact surface defined in Figure 2 of FMVSS 301 loaded to 4000 lbs. parallel to the longitudinal centerline of the coach. It shall protect the coach from damage as a result of 5.5 mph impacts into the corners at a 30 deg angle to the longitudinal centerline of the coach. The energy absorption system of the bumper shall be independent of every power system of the coach and shall not require service or maintenance in normal operation during the service life of the coach. The bumper may increase the overall coach length specified by no more than 7 in. TS 68.3 REAR BUMPER No part of the coach, including the bumper, shall be damaged as a result of a 2 mph impact with a fixed, flat barrier perpendicular to the longitudinal centerline of the coach. The bumper shall return to its pre - impact shape within 10 minutes of the impact. When using a yard tug with a smooth, flat plate bumper 2 ft wide contacting the horizontal centerline of the rear bumper, the bumper shall provide protection at speeds up to 5 mph, over pavement discontinuities up to 1 in. high, and at accelerations up to 2 mph/sec. The rear bumper shall protect the coach when impacted anywhere along its width by the common carriage with contoured impact surface defined in Figure 2 of FMVSS 301 loaded to 4000 lbs., at 4 mph parallel to or up to a 30 deg angle to the longitudinal centerline of the coach. The rear bumper shall be shaped to preclude unauthorized riders standing on the bumper. The bumper shall not require service or maintenance in normal operation during the service life of the coach. The bumper may increase the overall coach length specified by no more than 7 in. TS 68.4 BUMPER MATERIAL Bumper material shall be corrosion -resistant and withstand repeated impacts of the specified loads without sustaining damage. These bumper qualities shall be sustained throughout the service life of the coach. TS -69 FINISH AND COLOR TS 69.1 APPEARANCE All exterior surfaces shall be smooth and free of wrinkles and dents. Exterior surfaces to be painted shall be properly prepared as required by the paint system Supplier prior to application of paint to ensure a proper bond between the basic surface and successive coats of original paint for the service life of the coach. Drilled holes and cutouts in exterior surfaces shall be made prior to cleaning, priming and painting, where possible, to prevent corrosion. The coach shall be painted prior to installation of exterior lights, windows, mirrors and other items that are applied to the exterior of the coach. Body filler materials may be used for surface dressing, but not for repair of damaged or improperly fitted panels. Paint shall be applied smoothly and evenly with the finished surface free of visible dirt and the following other imperfections: • blisters or bubbles appearing in the topcoat film Section 5 — Page 84 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 • chips, scratches or gouges of the surface finish • cracks in the paint film • craters where paint failed to cover due to surface contamination • overspray • peeling • runs or sags from excessive flow and failure to adhere uniformly to the surface • chemical stains and water spots • dry patches due to incorrect mixing of paint activators • buffing swirls All exterior finished surfaces shall be impervious to diesel fuel, gasoline and commercial cleaning agents. Finished surfaces shall resist damage by controlled applications of commonly used graffiti - removing chemicals. Proper adhesion between the basic surface and successive coats of the original paint shall be measured using an Elcometer adhesion tester as outlined in ASTM D4541-85. Adhesion shall be a minimum 300 ft -lbs. The coach manufacturer shall supply test samples of the exterior surface for each step of the painting process that may be subject to adhesion testing per ASTM G4541-87 and ASTM D4145-85. ASTM D4541-93 may be used for inspection testing during assembly of the vehicle. Standard Contractor exterior paint finish quality. Agencies will provide approved paints, color scheme and graphics. TS -70 DECALS, NUMBERING AND SIGNING Monograms, numbers and other special signing shall be applied to the inside and outside of the coach as required. Signs shall be durable and fade-, chip- and peel -resistant. They may be painted signs, decals or pressure -sensitive appliques. All decals shall be installed per the decal Supplier recommendations. Signs shall be provided in compliance with the ADA requirements defined in 49 C.F.R. Part 38, Subpart B, 38.27. Agencies will provide a list of signs and/or decals that are required above and beyond those specified in federal, state, and local regulations. TS 70.1 PASSENGER INFORMATION ADA priority seating signs as required and defined by 49 C.F.R. shall be provided to identify the seats designated for passengers with disabilities. Requirements for a public information system in accordance with 49 C.F.R. shall be provided. Section 5 — Page 85 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -71 EXTERIOR LIGHTING All exterior lights shall be LED and designed to prevent entry and accumulation of moisture or dust. Lamps, lenses and fixtures shall be interchangeable to the extent practicable. Two hazard lamps at the rear of the coach shall be visible from behind when the engine service doors are opened. Light lenses shall be designed and located to prevent damage when running the vehicle through an automatic coach washer. Contractor to provide details of exterior lighting system. TS 71.1 BACKUP LIGHT/ALARM Visible and audible warnings shall inform following vehicles or pedestrians of reverse operation. Visible reverse operation warning shall conform to SAE Standard J593. Audible reverse operation warning shall conform to SAE Recommended Practice J994 Type C or D. TS 71.2 DOORWAY LIGHTING Lamps at the front and rear passenger doorways (if applicable) shall comply with ADA requirements and shall activate only when the doors open. These lamps shall illuminate the street surface to a level of no less than 1 foot-candle for a distance of 3 ft outward from the outboard edge of the door threshold. The lights may be positioned above or below the lower daylight opening of the windows and shall be shielded to protect passengers' eyes from glare. Lights to be LED if available that meet ADA requirements. TS 71.3 TURN SIGNALS Standard Turn Signals LED Turn -signal lights shall be provided on the front, rear, curb and street sides of the coach in accordance with federal regulations. TS 71.4 HEADLIGHTS Headlamps shall be designed for ease of replacement. Standard OEM headlight installation shall be provided in accordance with federal regulations and contractor is to supply details of headlight installation. Daytime Running Lights Headlamps shall incorporate a daytime running light feature. LED Headlamps shall be LED/halogen, sealed beam. Section 5 — Page 86 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 71.5 BRAKE LIGHTS LED Brake lights shall be provided in accordance with federal regulations. Brake lights shall be provided in accordance with federal regulations. Coach shall include red, high and center mount brake lamp(s) along the backside of the coach in addition to the lower brake lamps required under FMVSS. The high and center mount brake lamp(s) shall illuminate steadily with brake application. TS 71.6 SERVICE AREA LIGHTING (INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR) LED lamps shall be provided in the engine and all other compartments where service may be required to generally illuminate the area for night emergency repairs or adjustments. These service areas shall include, but not be limited to, the engine compartment, the communication box, junction/apparatus panels and passenger door operator compartments. Lighting shall be adequate to light the space of the service areas to levels needed to complete typical emergency repairs and adjustments. The service area lamps shall be suitable for the environment in which they are mounted. Engine compartment lamps shall be controlled by a switch mounted near the rear start controls. All other service area lamps shall be controlled by switches mounted on or convenient to the lamp assemblies. Power to the service area lighting shall be programmable. Power shall latch on with activation of the switch and shall be automatically discontinued (timed out) after 30 minutes to prevent damage caused by inadvertently leaving the service area lighting switch in the "on" position after repairs are made. INTERIOR PANELS AND FINISHES TS -72 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Materials shall be selected on the basis of maintenance, durability, appearance, safety, flammability and tactile qualities. Materials shall be strong enough to resist everyday abuse and be vandalism and corrosion resistant. Trim and attachment details shall be kept simple and unobtrusive. Interior trim shall be secured to avoid resonant vibrations under normal operational conditions. Interior surfaces more than 10 in. below the lower edge of the side windows or windshield shall be shaped so that objects placed on them fall to the floor when the coach is parked on a level surface. Any components and other electrical components within close proximity to these surfaces shall also be resistant to this cleaning method. Section 5 — Page 87 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -73 INTERIOR PANELS Panels shall be easily replaceable and tamper resistant. They shall be reinforced, as necessary, to resist vandalism and other rigors of transit coach service. Individual trim panels and parts shall be interchangeable to the extent practicable. TS -73.1 DRIVER'S BARRIER A barrier or bulkhead between the driver and the street -side front passenger seat shall be provided. The barrier shall minimize glare and reflections in the windshield directly in front of the barrier from interior lighting during night operation. Location and shape must permit full seat travel and reclining possibilities that can accommodate the shoulders of a 95th -percentile male. The partition shall have a side return and stanchion to prevent passengers from reaching the driver by standing behind the driver's seat. The lower area between the seat and panel must be accessible to the driver. The partition must be strong enough in conjunction with the entire partition assembly for mounting of such equipment as flare kits, fire extinguishers (1.2 kg), microcomputer, public address amplifier, etc. The panel should be properly attached to minimize noise and rattles. The driver's barrier shall extend from the floor area to the ceiling and from the coach wall to the first stanchion immediately behind the driver to provide security to the driver and to limit passenger conversation. TS 73.2 MODESTY PANELS Sturdy divider panels constructed of durable, unpainted, corrosion -resistant material complementing the interior shall be provided to act as both a physical and visual barrier for seated passengers. Design and installation of modesty panels located in front of forward -facing seats shall include a handhold or grab handle along its top edge. These dividers shall be mounted on the sidewall and shall project toward the aisle no farther than passenger knee projection in longitudinal seats or the aisle side of the transverse seats. Modesty panels shall extend from at least the window opening of the side windows, and those forward of transverse seats shall extend downward to 1 and 1'/2 in. above the floor. Panels forward of longitudinal seats shall extend to below the level of the seat cushion. Dividers positioned at the doorways, where applicable, shall provide no less than a 2'/2 in. clearance between the modesty panel and a fully open, inward opening door, or the path of a deploying flip -out ramp to protect passengers from being pinched. Modesty panels installed at doorways shall be equipped with grab rails if passenger assists are not provided by other means. The modesty panel and its mounting shall withstand a static force of 250 lbs applied to a 4 x 4 in. area in the center of the panel without permanent visible deformation. TS 73.3 FRONT END The entire front end of the coach shall be sealed to prevent debris accumulation behind the dash and to prevent the driver's feet from kicking or fouling wiring and other equipment. The front end shall be free of protrusions that are hazardous to passengers standing at the front of the standee line area of the coach Section 5 — Page 88 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 during rapid decelerations. Paneling across the front of the coach and any trim around the driver's compartment shall be formed metal or composite material. Composite dash panels shall be reinforced as necessary, vandal -resistant and replaceable. All colored, painted and plated parts forward of the driver's barrier shall be finished with a surface that reduces glare. Any mounted equipment must have provision to support the weight of equipment. TS 73.4 REAR BULKHEAD The rear bulkhead and rear interior surfaces shall be material suitable for exterior skin; painted and finished to exterior quality; or paneled with melamine -type material, composite, scratch -resistant plastic or carpeting and trimmed with stainless steel, aluminum or composite. The rear bulkhead paneling shall be contoured to fit the ceiling, side walls and seat backs so that any litter or trash will tend to fall to the floor or seating surface when the coach is on a level surface. Any air vents in this area shall be louvered to reduce airflow noise and to reduce the probability of trash or liter being thrown or drawn through the grille. If it is necessary to remove the panel to service components located on the rear bulkhead, then the panel shall be hinged or shall be able to be easily removed and replaced. Grilles where access to or adjustment of equipment is required shall be heavy duty and designed to minimize damage and limit unauthorized access. TS 73.5 HEADLINING Ceiling panels shall be made of durable, corrosion resistant, easily cleanable material. Headlining shall be supported to prevent buckling, drumming or flexing and shall be secured without loose edges. Headlining materials shall be treated or insulated to prevent marks due to condensation where panels are in contact with metal members. Moldings and trim strips, as required to make the edges tamperproof, shall be stainless steel, aluminum or plastic, colored to complement the ceiling material. Headlining panels covering operational equipment that is mounted above the ceiling shall be on hinges for ease of service but retained to prevent inadvertent opening. TS 73.6 FASTENING Interior panels shall be attached so that there are no exposed unfinished or rough edges or rough surfaces. Fasteners should be corrosion resistant. Panels and fasteners shall not be easily removable by passengers. Exposed interior fasteners should be minimized, and where required shall be tamper resistant. TS 73.7 INSULATION Any insulation material used between the inner and outer panels shall minimize the entry and/or retention of moisture. Insulation properties shall be unimpaired during the service life of the coach. Any insulation material used inside the engine compartment shall not absorb or retain oils or water and shall be designed to prevent casual damage that may occur during maintenance operations. The combination of inner and outer panels on the sides, roof, wheel wells and ends of the coach, and any material used between these panels, shall provide a thermal insulation sufficient to meet the interior Section 5 — Page 89 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 temperature requirements. The coach body shall be thoroughly sealed so that the driver or passengers cannot feel drafts during normal operations with the passenger doors closed. FTA Docket 90-A All insulation materials shall comply with the Recommended Fire Safety Practices defined in FTA Docket 90-A, dated October 20, 1993. TS 73.8 FLOOR COVERING The floor covering shall have a non-skid walking surface that remains effective in all weather conditions. The floor covering, as well as transitions of flooring material to the main floor and to the entrance and exit area, shall be smooth and present no tripping hazards. Seams shall be sealed/welded per manufacturer's specifications. The standee line shall be approximately 2 in. wide and shall extend across the coach aisle. The color and pattern shall be consistent throughout the floor covering. Any areas on the floor that are not intended for standees, such as areas "swept" during passenger door operation, shall be clearly and permanently marked. The floor shall be easily cleaned and shall be arranged to minimize debris accumulation. A one-piece center strip shall extend from the vertical wall of the rear settee between the aisle sides of transverse seats to the standee line. If the floor is of a bi-level construction, then the center strip shall be one piece at each level. The covering between the center strip and the wheel housings may be separate pieces. At the rear door, however, a separate strip as wide as the door shall extend from the center strip to the outboard edge of the rear/exit area. The floor under the seats shall be covered with smooth surface flooring material. The floor covering shall closely fit the sidewall in a fully sealed butt joint or extend to the top of the cove. TS 73.9 INTERIOR LIGHTING The light source shall be located to minimize windshield glare, with distribution of the light focused primarily on the passengers' reading plane while casting sufficient light onto the advertising display. The lighting system may be designed to form part of or the entire air distribution duct. The lens material shall be translucent polycarbonate. Lenses shall be designed to effectively "mask" the light source. Lenses shall be sealed to inhibit incursion of dust and insects yet be easily removable for service. Access panels shall be provided to allow servicing of components located behind light panels. If necessary, the entire light fixture shall be hinged. TS 73.10 PASSENGER First Row Lights The first light on each side (behind the driver and the front door) is normally turned on only when the front door is opened, in "night run" and "night park." As soon as the door closes, these lights shall go out. These lights shall be turned on at any time if the switch is in the "on" position. Section 5 — Page 90 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 All interior lighting shall be turned off whenever the transmission selector is in reverse and the engine run switch is in the "on" position. The interior lighting design shall require the approval of the Agency. LED lights. TS 73.11 DRIVER'S AREA The driver's area shall have a light to provide general illumination, and it shall illuminate the half of the steering wheel nearest the driver to a level of 5 to 10 foot-candles. TS 73.12 SEATING AREAS A minimum 10 -module parcel rack without dividers and compartment doors shall be furnished over all two -passenger seating positions except in the wheelchair door area. Retention cords shall run the length of the rack housing. The parcel rack edge, running along the full length of the aisle, shall incorporate a handhold for use by standees. Passenger headroom, measured from the rack end to the top of the seat headrest, shall be a minimum 17 in. (432 mm). Interior window post caps shall be ABS, thermo formed plastic, off-white in color to provide a clean finished appearance. The interior of the rack shall be vinyl covered aluminum to complement the interior. Parcel racks shall be supported by polycarbonate glass filled hangers spaced approximately 40 in. (1016 mm) apart. Total capacity shall be a minimum 109 ft3 (3 MI) to allow for ample storage space for carry -on items. Passenger service modules mounted on the underside of the parcel rack shall include individually controlled and adjustable LED passenger reading lights; an exit signal push button, red in color; and individual air distribution outlets. These outlets shall be adjustable from fully closed to fully open position. A minimum of 26 speakers shall also be provided in the cluster panels for the driver -controlled public address system. Speakers shall broadcast, in a clear tone, announcements that are clearly perceived from all seat positions at approximately the same volume level. Passengers utilizing the securement systems shall be provided identical amenities as provided for all other passengers, except that the parcel rack shall be deleted in the area of the wheelchair lift door. Separate and independent notification will be provided on the dashboard indicator panel for stop request notification from securement positions. TS 73.13 VESTIBULES/DOORS Floor surface in the aisles shall be- a minimum of 2 foot-candles, and the vestibule area in accordance with ADA requirements. TS 73.14 STEP LIGHTING Step lighting for the intermediate steps between lower and upper floor levels shall be a minimum of 4 foot-candles and shall illuminate in all engine run positions.. The step lighting shall be low profile to minimize tripping and snagging hazards for passengers and shall be shielded as necessary to protect passengers' eyes from glare. Section 5 — Page 91 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS 73.15 FAREBOX LIGHTING Farebox Light A light fixture shall be mounted in the ceiling above the farebox location. The fixture shall be capable of projecting a concentrated beam of light on the farebox. This light will automatically come on whenever the front doors are opened and the run switch is in the "night run" or "night park" position. A switch easily accessible to the driver shall be provided to disable farebox light. TS -74 FARE COLLECTION Space and structural provisions shall be made for installation of currently available fare collection devices, which shall be as far forward as practicable. Location of the fare collection device shall not restrict traffic in the vestibule, including wheelchairs if a front door loading device is used, and shall allow the driver to easily reach the farebox controls and to view the fare register. The farebox shall not restrict access to the driver area, shall not restrict operation of driver controls and shall not—either by itself or in combination with stanchions, transfer mounting, cutting and punching equipment, or route destination signs—restrict the driver's field of view per SAE Recommended Practice J1050. The location and mounting of the fare collection device shall allow use, without restriction, by passengers. The farebox location shall permit accessibility to the vault for easy manual removal or attachment of suction devices. Meters and counters on the farebox shall be readable on a daily basis. The floor under the farebox shall be reinforced as necessary to provide a sturdy mounting platform and to prevent shaking of the farebox. Contractor shall provide fare collection installation layout to the Agencies for approval. Transfer mounting, cutting and punching equipment shall be located in a position convenient to the driver. Agency will specify a farebox for Contractor to install. TS -75 INTERIOR ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS Access for maintenance and replacement of equipment shall be provided by panels and doors that appear to be an integral part of the interior. Access doors shall be hinged with gas props or over -center springs, where practical, to hold the doors out of the mechanic's way. Panels shall prevent entry of mechanism lubricant into the coach interior. All fasteners that retain access panels shall be captive in the cover. TS 75.1 FLOOR PANELS Access openings in the floor shall be sealed to prevent entry of fumes and water into the coach interior. Flooring material at or around access openings shall be flush with the floor and shall be edge -bound with stainless steel or another material that is acceptable to the Agency to prevent the edges from coming loose. Access openings shall be asymmetrical so that reinstalled flooring shall be properly aligned. Fasteners shall tighten flush with the floor. The number of special fastener tools required for panel and access door fasteners shall be minimized. Section 5 – Page 92 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Passenger Accommodations TS -76 PASSENGER SEATING TS 76.1 ARRANGEMENTS AND SEAT STYLE Forward -Facing Seat Configuration Passenger seats shall be arranged in forward -facing configuration with a minimum of 55 reclining and cushioned passenger seats. Contractor to provide seat layout to the Agency once the Agency has provided the seat manufacturer and model number. Minimum 48 of seats with restroom option. Agencies to specify options such as rest room, cup holders, head rests, foot rests, etc. Prices for options should be quoted as separate line items. TS 76.2 HIP -TO -KNEE ROOM Hip -to -knee room measured from the center of the seating position, from the front of one seat back horizontally across the highest part of the seat to a vertical surface immediately in front, shall be a minimum of 26 in. At all seating positions in paired transverse seats immediately behind other seating positions, hip -to -knee room shall be no less than 27 in. TS 76.3 FOOT ROOM Foot room, measured at the floor forward from a point vertically below the front of the seat cushion, shall be no less than 14 in. Seats immediately behind the wheel housings and modesty panels may have foot room reduced. TS 76.4 AISLES The aisle between the seats shall be no less than 14 in. wide at seated passenger hip height. TS 76.5 STRUCTURE AND DESIGN Passenger seats shall be arranged in a transverse, forward -facing configuration. No more than- 10 seated positions shall be lost on any coach configuration to accommodate two wheelchair passengers occupying the securement positions. Each transverse, forward -facing seat, except the rear seats, shall accommodate two adult passengers. Floor seat tracks shall be stainless steel and shall be welded to the coach frame and be nearly flush with the finished floor. The wall tracks shall be stainless steel or aluminum and shall be bolted or riveted to the sidewall. Seats shall be commuter coach reclining seats. Seat frames shall be constructed of high-strength, fatigue -resistant, welded steel with a durable powder -coated, corrosion -resistant colored finish that Section 5 — Page 93 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 complements the coach interior. The seat frame shall be wall mounted with heavy gauge steel brackets and shall be attached to the coach floor with a heavy duty stainless steel T pedestal. The seat back shall recline 5 in. (127 mm) maximum with an infinite number of stops. The reclining seat backs shall be provided with a dress -up feature to facilitate coach cleaning. Seat width shall be nominal 40.50 in. (1029 mm). Aisle shall not be less than 14 in. (356 mm) wide. TS 76.6 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS Seat cushions shall be supported by steel serpentine springs. Seat covering shall be Holdsworth, Lantal or similar high-quality wool fabric. Typical seat covering weight shall be 24 oz. (680 g)/sq. yd. Overall composition shall typically be 54 percent wool, 9 percent nylon and 37 percent cotton. Pile composition shall typically be 85 percent wool and 15 percent nylon. Backing composition shall typically be 100 percent cotton. Abrasion from a 28 oz. (794 g) loading shall not affect appearance with 60,000 rubs. The front face of the seat upright and side boxing of cushions shall be covered with Holdsworth, Lantal or other similar wool fabric to complement the seat cushion. Backrest fabric shall be rugged carpet material. Seat armrest shall be dark gray in color. Seat foam padding shall be polyurethane. Seat upholstery shall utilize zippers or Velcro that allows them be removed from the seat cushions for cleaning/replacement purposes. Agencies shall select seat fabric. TS 76.7.1 FRONT DOOR Forward of the front wheels and under direct observation of the driver. TS 76.8 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION Structure of the doors, their attachments, inside and outside trim panels and any mechanism exposed to the elements shall be corrosion resistant. Door panel construction shall be of corrosion -resistant metal or reinforced non-metallic composite materials. When fully opened, the doors shall provide a firm support and shall not be damaged if used as an assist by passengers during ingress or egress. Door edges shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of exterior moisture, noise, dirt and air elements from entering the passenger compartment, to the maximum extent possible based on door types. The closing edge of each door panel shall have no less than 2 in. of soft weather stripping. The doors, when closed, shall be effectively sealed, and the hard surfaces of the doors shall be at least 4 in. apart (not applicable to single doors).The combined weather seal and window glazing elements of the front door shall not exceed 10 degrees of binocular obstruction of the driver's view through the closed door. Minimum doorway width per ADA requirements. TS 76.9 DOOR GLAZING The upper section of both front and rear doors shall be glazed for no less than 45 percent of the respective door opening area of each section. The lower section of the front door shall be glazed for no less than 25 percent of the door opening area of the section. Section 5 — Page 94 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Door glazing shall be easily replaceable. TS 76.9.1 ACTUATOR The nominal door opening and closing speed shall be in the 3-5 second range. The maximum door opening and closing speeds will be regulated using fixed, maintenance free orifices and airline sizes. If required, door speeds can be decreased with the addition of a flow -restricting device. Actuators and the complete door mechanism shall be concealed from passengers but shall be easily accessible for servicing. TS 76.10 EMERGENCY OPERATION In the event of an emergency, it shall be possible to manually open doors designated as emergency exits from inside the coach using a force of no more than 25 lbs after actuating an unlocking device. The unlocking device shall be clearly marked as an emergency -only device and shall require two distinct actions to actuate. The respective door emergency unlocking device shall be accessible from the doorway area. The unlocking device shall be easily reset by the operator without special tools or opening the door mechanism enclosure. Doors that are required to be classified as "emergency exits" shall meet the requirements of FMVSS 217. TS 76.11 DOOR CONTROL The door control shall be located in the operator's area within the hand reach envelope described in SAE Recommended Practice J287, "Driver Hand Control Reach." The driver's door control shall provide tactile feedback to indicate commanded door position and resist inadvertent door actuation. TS 76.12 DOOR CONTROLLER Doors shall be operated by push-button controls, conveniently located and operable within the driver's reach. The push buttons shall be labeled. A control or valve in the operator's compartment shall shut off the power to, and/or dump the power from, the front door mechanism to permit manual operation of the front door with the coach shut down. TS -77 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS TS -77.1 LIFT A travel lift and two forward -facing mobility device securement areas shall be provided. The lift assembly shall comply with all current ADA and FMVSS 403 and 404 requirements. The lift shall be installed below the floor line at the number 2 right-hand luggage bay on the curbside of the coach. The lift shall be controlled by a dash -mounted toggle switch and a rear lift area toggle switch, and operated by up/down switches on a pendant mounted to the lift support bracket inside the number 2 baggage bay. The lift restraint belt must be buckled before the lift can be raised or lowered. The safety Section 5 — Page 95 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 interlock circuit can be energized to operate the lift only if the transmission is in neutral, the park brake is applied, engine fast idle is on, the dash -mounted master switch is on, the lift secondary switch is on, and the lift restraint belt is buckled. The wheelchair loading system shall provide safe, comfortable and rapid ingress and egress for applicable passengers from the street level or a curb. When not in use, the lift shall stow in the luggage bay. The lift mechanism shall include a threshold warning device to provide "passenger on platform" information and to prevent stowing the lift platform when a passenger is sensed. The outer barrier shall be automatically controlled and shall be such that it cannot be overridden by the loading system operator. A dash -mounted indicator light shall be provided and shall be illuminated when the loading system is activated. The interlock shall apply, the coach shall not move and the engine throttle shall be disabled whenever the wheelchair loading system is activated. If the lift door is open or ajar, the interlock shall remain engaged. Brackets, clamps, screw heads and other fasteners used on the passenger assists shall be anodized aluminum or stainless steel and shall be flush with the surface and free of rough edges. The lift control mounted on the lift structure shall have push button up/down switches. The toggle electrical supply switch shall be located in close proximity to the controller. This toggle switch must be turned on prior to the lift operation. All lift control switches shall be permanently labeled. Decals shall not be permitted. The stow guard switch shall be red in color, and the stow/deploy switch shall be black in color. These switches shall be incorporated in a handheld pendant. The lift shall include a hinged platform to bridge the coach floor to the lift platform. The bridge shall be hinged and locked in an upward position to act as a barrier when the lift is in use. The bridge shall be hinged and locked in an upward position to act as a barrier when the lift is in use. The bridge shall also allow lift passenger ingress/egress easily from the platform. Lift travel speeds and lift operation shall be adjusted to the lift manufacturer's specifications upon completion of the lift installation in to each coach and before coach delivery. The individual handrails shall incorporate a visual aid to ensure that they are folded in the proper order. The lift shall include an emergency system in case of driver operation malfunction. Should an emergency situation occur, the lift operator shall release the push-button switch on the controller to immediately stop the lift cycle. The emergency hand pump handles and pump shall be located in an enclosed box at the rear wall of the number 1 right-hand luggage bay door. The handle shall be stored adjacent to the pump to allow immediate usage. TS -77.2 LIFT DOOR The lift door shall be a single leaf design that operates in a sliding track mounted both above and below the door leaf. The door shall open by sliding to the rear of the coach and shall remain on a horizontal plane throughout the opening and closing process. No pin -hinged doors shall be provided. The transmission must be in neutral and the parking brake activated for the lift to operate. The accelerator shall be automatically disabled and the fast idle system activated when either the lift master switch is turned on or the lift door is open in order to provide maximum safety and security. These features shall be wired to the lift master switch to allow activation only when the transmission is in neutral. The coach directional (hazard) lights will also flash on/off. After the lift operation is completed, the lift shall be Section 5 — Page 96 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 properly stored and secured, with the access door closed and the lift master switch at the dash in the "off' position in order to move the coach. The lift door shall have a window in line with the other passenger windows and shall not detract from the appearance of the coach. The door latch mechanism shall be located in the lower section of the door so that operators in the 5th percentile female range can operate the lift door. The lift storage door shall not block the visual observation to the lift assembly while utilizing the manual override mode of the lift. A lift door design consisting of a horizontally hinged lift platform egress door mounted within a vertical motion pantograph luggage door is a preferred design. TS 77.3 LIFT WIDTH The installation of the lift to the coach structure as well as the installation of the lift door into the sidewall of the coach shall not affect the structural integrity of the coach. The parcel rack module above the wheelchair lift platform area shall be permanently removed to provide additional headroom. The modified rack shall be professionally finished at all ends. A threshold warning module with a red warning light and an acoustic sensor shall be mounted in the ceiling structure above the wheelchair lift entrance doorway. The heating and air ducts shall be rerouted around the lift area to ensure proper interior air conditioning/heating airflow and distribution. A passenger chime tape switch shall be mounted on the sidewall at the two wheelchair securement positions. Each coach shall have adequate information decals installed that detail the proper lift operation in both the normal and manual modes of operation. TS -77.4 LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS Lighting for the lift areas shall be designed to meet Title 13 and ADA and FMVSS 404 standards. Lighting shall be provided to effectively illuminate the lift area. Light shall be wired through the lift master toggle switch on the driver's dash and shall automatically illuminate when this switch is in the "on" position. The lighting design shall minimize the effect of glare on passengers entering the coach through the wheelchair lift door. During lift operation, the street surface shall be illuminated to a minimum of 6 candlepower a distance of 3 ft beyond the external dimensions of the lift platform once deployed and lowered. Additional lighting shall be provided to ensure illumination of the instruction placard and the manual override pump when it is in use. TS -77.5 SECUREMENT SYSTEM The vehicle interior shall permit the securement of two forward -facing wheelchair passengers in which the primary position shall be on the street side of the coach directly across from the lift. Securement areas shall be a minimum 30 x 48 in. as required by the ADA. Section 5 — Page 97 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 A separate three-point belt securement shall be provided to effectively secure wheelchair passengers. To further secure the passenger during the lift operation, a retractable seat belt strap shall be provided at the ingress/egress area of the lift platform. A minimum 10.5 in. high barrier shall also be provided at the rear of the lift area for additional passenger protection. TS -77.6 ROOF VENTILATION/ESCAPE HATCHES Two roof ventilators shall be provided and designed to perform as escape hatches. One ventilator/escape hatch shall be located in the roof at the front of the coach, another in the roof at the rear of the coach. SIGNAGE AND COMMUNICATION TS -78 DESTINATION SIGNS A destination sign system shall be furnished on the front, and on the right side near the front door. Dash and rear sign should be an available option if requested by an agency. Contractor to provide list of optional signs to be used. All signs shall be controlled via a single human -machine interface (HMI). In the absence of a single mobile data terminal (MDT), the HMI shall be conveniently located for the coach driver within reach of the seated driver. A heavy-duty "stop request' signal button shall be installed at every seat location except the rear cross seat. TS -78.2 SIGNAL CHIME COMMUTER COACH A single "stop requested" chime shall sound when the system is first activated. A double chime shall sound anytime the system is activated from wheelchair passenger areas. Exit signals located in the wheelchair passenger area shall be no higher than 4 ft above the floor. Instructions shall be provided to clearly indicate the function and operation of these signals. TS -79 COMMUNICATIONS TS -79.1 CAMERA SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Provide all wiring and mounting locations for a multi -camera surveillance system for the later provision of and installation of cameras, recorder, microphone, etc. The Procuring Agency to specify the camera system cable to be installed, the locations for pre -wiring and the quantity. Section 5 — Page 98 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 TS -79.2 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM A public address system shall be provided on each coach for facilitating radio system and driver - originated announcements to passengers. TS -79.3 SPEAKERS Sufficient interior loudspeakers shall be provided, semi -flush mounted, on alternate sides of the coach passenger compartment, installed with proper phasing. Total impedance seen at the input connecting end shall be 8 Ohms. Mounting shall be accomplished with riv-nuts and machine screws. TS -79.4 AUTOMATIC PASSENGER COUNTER (APC) An APC system shall be available as an option and priced as a line item. Agency to provide details of APC system, including installation locations and number of coaches to be equipped. TS -79.5 RADIO HANDSET AND CONTROL SYSTEM TS -79.6 DRIVER'S SPEAKER Each coach shall have a recessed speaker in the ceiling panel above the driver. This speaker shall be the same component used for the speakers in the passenger compartment. It shall have 8 Ohms of impedance. TS -79.7 HANDSET Contractor will install a handset for driver use. TS -79.8 DRIVER DISPLAY UNIT (DDU) Contractor shall install a driver display unit as close to the driver's instrument panel as possible. TS -79.9 EMERGENCY ALARM Contractor shall install an emergency alarm that is accessible to the driver but hidden from view. END TECHNICAL PERFORMANCE SECTION Section 5 — Page 99 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: Email Address: Mark. Reuter mcicoach.com e Number: 31 Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 2.3.1.2 Delivery Sched PROPOSED DELIVERY SCHEDULE Cl clarifies that our proposal is based on the following delivery schedule and engine cooling package availability. 15 LED Coaches (Cummins ISX Diesel) with belt driven cooling system 10 CNG Coaches (Cummins ISXG) with belt driven cooling system. 10 CNG Coaches (Cummins ISXG) with electric fan drive cooling LED Coaches (Cummins ISX Diesel) with electric fan drive cooling neine Electrically D Delivered 12 months ARO (after receipt of order) Delivered by June 301h 2015 or 12 months ARO whichever is later Delivered by September 30`h 2015 or 12 month ARO whichever is later Delivered by December 3 1t 2015 or 12 months ARO whichever is later ,ACi does not currently have an available option for an electrically driven engine cooling fan released for production for either an ISX diesel or SXG engine. Contributing to this is the fact that Cummins has not released a mounting location for an alternator of sufficient size on the ISX engine to drive an electric cooling fan system. MCI's engineering work for the ISX engine to incorporate an electric cooling fan will not be :ompleted until Ql 2015 and further we do not have a definitive release date from Cummins for the larger alternator. In the event a suitable liternator is not available in this application, MCI proposes to provide the ISX diesel or ISXG with its standard, belt driven cooling package. t should be noted that MCI has gathered fuel economy data in conjunction with our cooling system partners that indicates limited to no fuel ,conomy benefits with an electric cooling fan in an MCI Commuter coach equipped with a Cummins ISL engine. This is due to the fact that Mi Joes not have a hydraulic drive cooling system but instead a direct belt driven system which has a low parasitic draw. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/ 1.1.5.17FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: Email Address: Mark.Reuter mcicoach.com Page Number: Proposer: Motor Coach Industries. -Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 2 Section: 5 TS -6.6 Ramp Clearances_ Detailed Descriation of Reauested Deviation: IMO wishes to advise that the Departure angle of our coach is 6.2 degrees in lieu of the 8.6 deg (min) requested in the bid. Rationale (Pros and Cons): anging the departure angle would require a complete redesign of our coach which is not feasible. Section 1 — Page 45 WTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION 1.1.5.17 CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 3 Email Address: Mark. Reuter mcicoach.com Page Number: 25 Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 TS -7.3.2 CNG The operating range of the CNG coach shall be at least 400 miles with an initial gas -settled pressure of 3600 psi at 700F." Due to various factors such as road grades, duty cycles and driver's profiles the operating range of 400 miles may or may not be achievable. Rationale (Pros and Cons): PVCf believes that 400 miles may be achievable however as mentioned due to various factors such as road grades, duty cycles and driver's profiles the operating range of 400 miles cannot be assured. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). I i Deviation Number: 4 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries. Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter(a)-mcicoach.com Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Page Number: _ 26 Sections TS -10 1.1 Coolant Detailed Descriation of Requested Deviation: /ICI's proposal is based on providing long life coolant and therefore, supplemental coolant additives are not required. Rationale (Pros and Cons): upplemental coolant additives are not required with long life coolant Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION 1.1.5.17 CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. VVTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 5 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter(cD_mcicoach.com J Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Page Number: 27 Section: 5 TS -11 Transmission Detailed Descriotion of Reauested Deviation: MCI's proposal is based on providing an engine brake for the ISX Diesel engine and a Transmission retarder for the ISL CNG ,ngine. Rationale (Pros and Cons): smission retarder cannot be provided with the ISX Diesel engine due to space limitations of our current design_ Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION 1.1.5.17 CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: Email Address: Mark. Reuter(cD-mcicoach.com e Number: 31 Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: Proposer: Motor Coach Industries. Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 TS 18.1.2 Fuel Lines Igh-pressure CNG lines shall be pressure tested to a minimum of 125 percent of system working pressure prior to fueling. esting to 125 percent of high pressure CNG lines is done by the supplier prior to shipment of components to MCI pon installation MCI pressure tests the fueling lines to 3225 psig. Rationale (Pros and Cons): ji ❑ Comply with MCI's standard process Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. VVTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number 7 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter(a)-mcicoach.com Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Page Number: 32 Section. TS -18.2.1 Diesel Fuel Tank Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: ACI's proposal is based on providing an aluminum fuel tank with 182 US GAL at 95% of capacity, includes baffles, 3/8 NPT drain Plug on lower side of the tank. As a result of the current fuel tank design, the fuel filler neck is not removable Rationale (Pros and Cons): Please refer to item N supporting documentation in our technical proposal for complete details on our proposed aluminum fuel tank Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION 1.1.5.17 CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 8 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter mcicoach.com Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Page Number: 33 _ — Section: 5 TS18.2.2 CNG Installation Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: wishes to clarify that the CNG cylinders are mounted in the baggage bays of the coach and not on the roof. Rationale (Pros and Cons): ase refer to item N supporting documentation in our technical proposal for complete details on our proposed G tank installation Section 1 – Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 9 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries Inc. Email Address: Mark. ReutercD-mcicoach.com Page Number: 36 Detailed Descriotion of Requested Deviation: Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 TS 23.2 Crashworthiness _ MCI wishes to clarify that this requirement is specific to a Transit coach which does not utilize under floor baggage :ompartments. As a result, MCI's proposal is based on deletion of this requirement as it is no applicable for an over the road :ommuter coach. Rationale (Pros and Cons): rashworthiness testing is not applicable to an over the road commuter coach. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION 1.1.5.17 CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. VVTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 10 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Email Address: Mark. ReuterCaD_mcicoach.com e Number: 33 Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 TS 28.1 Desi n _ _ Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: MCI would like to clarify that the floor at the stepwell area and the aisle (with the exception of the entrance ramp) is horizontal nd would not contain a slope. Rationale (Pros and Cons): Ci's standard design and a redesign of our entrance area and stepwell area is not feasible. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION 1.1.5.17 CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 11 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter(aD-mcicoach.com Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Page Number: -42- Section: lumn Tilt Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: MCI's proposal is based on providing our standard steering column tilt of 21 degrees in lieu of 40 degrees. Rationale (Pros and Cons): he 21 degree tilt is based on the orientation of the driver's area and driver's seat. The 21 degree tilt is more applicable to an aver the road commuter coach. Additionally, modification to 40 degrees cannot be accommodated or would not be practical Far ;his type of vehicle. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). F Deviation Number: 12 Email Address' Mark. Reuter(cD-mcicoach.com Page Number: 42-43 Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: 'v o's proposal is based on providing the following: /linimum Telescopic Height Adjustment (Angle of Slope Height 0 deg 32.12 in 17 deg 32 in 14 deg 31 in !23. deg 30 in Rationale (Pros and Cons): Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: Maximum Telescopic Height Adjustment Angle of Slope Height 0 deg 34 in 7 deg 33 in 14 deg 32.5 in 21 deg 32 in above telescopic configuration is standard equipment and provided on all MCI commuter coaches. Redisign of our steering ?m is not feasible and cannot be accommodated. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION 1.1.5.17 CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: Proposer: Motor Coach Industries. Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter(cD-mcicoach.com Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Page Number: 47-48 _ _ Section: 5 ts-39 Overview Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: 00 wishes to clarify that the Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) system as well as the diagnostics will be -ommunicated through the Powertrain Level in lieu of the Multiplex Level. Rationale (Pros and Cons): MCI's air conditioning diagnostics is communicated through the powertrain syi Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION 1.1.5.17 CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. VVTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number 14 Email Address: Mark. Reuter(cD-mcicoach.com , e Number: Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 54 Section: 5 TS 41.3 Low Voltage Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: MCI's proposal is based on providing the 10 percent excess wires for spares as requested with the exception of the harness at Lhe front cap and the parcel rack areas. Rationale (Pros and Cons): 10 percent spares are not provided in the front cap and parcel rack areas due to space limitations in these areas. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: Email Address: Mark. Reuter(a.mcicoach.com e Number: Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 TS 41.4 EI n Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: MCI's wishes to clarify that the parcel rack blowers and the motor in the driver's HVAC unit are permanent magnet motors in lieu of brushless type motors. Evaporator and Condenser motors are brushless. Rationale (Pros and Cons): ACI does not have approved brushless motors for the driver's HVAC and parcel rack blowers. Significant testing would be equired once an approved motor becomes available to ensure performance parameters are not affected. As a result our proposal is based on providing brush type motors in these areas. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 16 Email Address: Mark. Reuter mcicoach.com e Number: Detailed Descrintion of Reauested Deviation: Proposer: Motor Coach Industries Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 TS 45.5 Instrum MCI proposal will be based on providing our standard instruments and alarms (see attached) which includes the following: Engine Run, Rear does not have an Amber light HVAC control unit is located at the right side of the dash on the HVAC control panel Driver's defrost and ventilation combined switch is located at the right side of dash on HVAC control panel The single wiper/washer switch is located at left side of steering column Dash panel light will be the dimmer switch using the digital signal through the Mux system Interior light switch will be located at the left hand dash switch panel Fast idle switch will be located at the left hand dash switch panel WC ramp/kneel enable, Front door ramp/kneel enable and Front door ramp do not apply to MCI's coach Rationale (Pros and Cons): lease refer to the attached diagram for complete Interior layout of our proposed commuter coach- odifying our existing dash area for this procurement is not feasible. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 17 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter(a)mcicoach.com Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Page Number: 64-66 Section: 5 TS 45.5 Instrumentation Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: Cont. MCI proposal will be based on providing our standard instruments and alarms which includes the following: -Video system event switch — specification calls for provisions only and would not include this switch - Passenger door control — is a three position momentary switch - Rear Door override — not applicable to MCI's coach - Fire Suppression — located at rear of driver LH console at B post - Mobile Data Terminal — Clarification of this device is needed to determine mounting Low Profile Microphone — Clarification needed Hill Holder — Not available and cannot be provided Master Door/Interlock — Not available and cannot be provided. To bypass entrance door switch a dump valve is {oca under dash. Rationale (Pros and Cons): Please refer to the attached diagram for complete Interior layout of our proposed commuter coach. Modifying our existing dash area for this procurement is not feasible - Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 1 Email Address: Mark. Reuter(a)-mcicoach.com Paae Number: 56-69 Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: Proposer: Motor Coach Industries Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-21 Section: 5 TS 45.5 Instrumentation J ont. MCI proposal will be based on providing our standard instruments and alarms which includes the following: Warning Interlocks Deactivated — Not available and cannot be provided Retarder Disable — switch and red light are not available, however, a retarder enable and amber light will be provided Rear Door passenger Sensor Disable — Not available on MCI coaches Door Obstruction — Not available on MCI coaches Door Ajar — Not available on MCI coaches Methane Detection —Solid red at 20% and above Turntable — Not available on MCI coaches Rationale (Pros and Cons): lease refer to the attached diagram for complete Interior layout of our proposed commuter coach. odifying our existing dash area for this procurement is not feasible. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. VVTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 19 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter mcicoach.com Page Number: 71 Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: Phone Number: 847-285-21 Section: 5 TS71 Windshield Wipers mc's proposal will be based on providing our standard windshield wiper design that are electric motor driven with two speeds nd single speed intermittent wiper action. Rationale (Pros and Cons): ICI'S current design and a resign of our wiper system would be cost prohibitive. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 20 Email Address: Mark. Reuter(aD-mcicoach.com Page Number: 77 _ Proposer: Motor Coach Industries In Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: MCI's proposal will be based on providing R134 Freon which is the Freon currently used on all MCI coach models. additionally, the air conditioning system is capable of reducing the passenger compartment temperature from 110 to 75 - or - 3 in 30 minutes. ;owever, unlike a transit coach the MCI commuter coach is provided with parcel rack air conditioning vents which allow i r conditioning to be provided directly on to the passenger immediately after coach start up. Rationale (Pros and Cons): 4CI'S proposal is based on providing R134 Freon. Should R407 become mandatory during the 5 year contract MCI will comply Ah this requirement. However, additional testing of R407 would be required to determine the applicable air conditioning ull down parameters . Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 21 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter mcicoach.com Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Page Number: 83 Section: 5 TS 68.2 Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: MCI requests approval to provide our standard energy absorbing front bumper assembly, nominally 20 inches high, which .onsists of three energy absorbing modules that are self -restoring black urethane with minimum 1700 psi tensile strength, 'SD`3 elongation, and 350 psi tear strength. The hollow ribbed black urethane cover has excellent resistance to tears, abrasion, salt, hydro -carbons, detergents, sunlight, and is repairable. An inner support structure constructed of aluminum or high strength steel provides a single, full length structural support for the bumper module. The bumper assembly shall be hinged at the bottom for access to the spare tire, with the bumper release lever located at the top of the front roadside service compartment: Rationale Pros and Cons): US proposal is based on providing our standard front energy absorbing bumper as described above. Redesigning our front imper is not practical and would be cost prohibitive. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). F Deviation Number: 22 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries. Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter(aD-mcicoach.com Page Number: _ _ 84 Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section 68.3 MCI requests approval to provide our standard energy absorbing rear bumper which will be nominally 11 inches high consisting of a rigid steel and aluminum inner support structure with a repairable hollow ribbed black urethane cover. The bumper is shaped to wrap around the coach rear corners to protect the engine compartment doors and also incorporates an anti -ride, or pinning feature to prevent unauthorized riders. he damping system built into the bumper will operate on air at atmospheric pressure to absorb and dissipate impact forces pplied to the bumper in the event of a minor collision. The outer bumper cover will have excellent resistance to tears, abrasion, salt, hydro -carbons, detergents, and sunlight. The complete assembly will be self-contained, self -restoring and maintenance -free. Rationale (Pros and Cons): CI'S proposal is based on providing our standard rear energy absorbing bumper as described above. Redesigning our rear imper is not practical and would be cost prohibitive. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 23 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter(aD-mcicoach.com Phone Number: 847285-2105 Page Number: 90 Section: _5 TS 73.8 Floor Covering Detailed Descriotion of Requested Deviation: ,MCI wishes to clarify that the floor covering is joined at the sidewall and covered with a stainless steel heat duct. This istallation method ensures that the heat duct seals the flooring. Rationale (Pros and Cons): he above installation is based on our current design which has worked very successfully in the manufacture and delivery of ver 10,000 commuter coaches. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 24 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Email Address: Mark. ReutercD-mcicoach.com Page Number: 91 Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 TS 73.14 Step Lighting Ci's proposal is based on providing a minimum 2 foot-candle power measured on the step tread based on ADA requirements. Rationale (Pros and Cons): he above lighting was designed to comply with current ADA requirements. Section 1 — Page 45 WTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 25 Email Address: Mark. ReuterCaD-mcicoach.com Page Number: 99 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 Detailed Description of Requested Deviation: ACT's proposal is based on providing total impedance seen at the input connecting end of 4 ohm speakers in lieu of 8 ohms Ahich is MCI's current speaker design. Rationale (Pros and Cons): 4 ohm speakers have lower impedance and therefore less resistance to electrical currents than 8 ohm speakers. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 -PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 26 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries. -Inc. Email Address: Mark.Reuter@mcicoach.com Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Page Number: 99 Section: 5 TS 79.4 APC Detailed Descriation of Reauested Deviation: Please refer to MCI's optional quotation page included with our price proposal. Rationale (Pros and Cons): Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to "Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: 27 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries Inc. Email Address: Mark. Reuter(cD-mcicoach.com Page Number: _ 99 Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 TS 79.6 Driver's Speaker Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: /ICI proposal is based on providing the driver's speaker located in the driver's modesty panel behind the driver. Also the neaker will have 4 ohms of impedance. Rationale (Pros and Cons): Driver's speaker is located on the driver's modesty panel for optimal sound quality. Additionally, 4 ohm speakers have lower impedance and therefore less resistance to electrical currents than 8 ohm speakers. Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.17 FORM FOR PROPOSAL DEVIATION CERTIFICATION No. 7 - PROPOSAL No. VVTA-RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed for each condition, exception, reservation or understanding (i.e., deviation) in the proposal according to Conditions, Exceptions, Reservations and Understanding" (Section 1.1.2.4). One copy without any price/cost information is to be placed in the technical proposal as specified in "Technical Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.2) and a separate copy with any price/cost information placed in the price proposal as specified in "Price Proposal Requirements" (Section 1.1.3.5). Deviation Number: Email Address: Mark.Reuter@mcicoach.com Paqe Number: 99 Proposer: Motor Coach Industries. Inc. Phone Number: 847-285-2105 Section: 5 Detailed Description of Reauested Deviation: 4Cl's proposal is based on providing our standard driver's display tell-tale cluster located on the front instrument panel as rovided per request # Rationale (Pros and Cons): redesign of MCPS standard tell -Tale cluster would be cost prohibitiv, Section 1 — Page 45 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 Reliability Driven ATTACHMENT # 2 REFERENCES AND NON PRICED INFORMATION 1.1.5.23 REFERENCE FORM CERTIFICATION No. 13 - PROPOSAL No. WTA- RFP 2013-04 Proposer by its signature below certifies that the following references for 45 -foot commuter coaches were sold to other clients over the last seven (7) years (use additional pages as necessary): Agency Name Contact Name/Phone Qty of New 45 -foot Coaches bought Year 1. Go Transit Mr. George Goulas 416-996-9211 104 - D4500 Commuter Coaches, 2011-2013 2. Denver RTD Mr. Lou Ha 303-299-6265 54 - D4500 Commuter Coaches, 2013 3. New York City Mr. Bart Betz 347-643-5143 54 - D4500 Commuter Coaches, 2012 Transit 4. Golden Gate Mr. Steven Millar 415-257-4437 32 - D4500 Commuter Coaches, 2011 Bridge & Transportation District 5. City of Santa Mr. Adrian Augilar 661-295-6305 6 - D4500 Commuter Coaches, 2013 Clarita 6. Loudoun County Ms. Nancy Gourley 703-737-8384 2 - D4500 Commuter Coaches, 2013 7. PRTC Mr. Eric Marx 703-580-6117 5 - D4500 Commuter Coaches, 2012 Signature of the Proposer's Author ec!Nfficial Patrick Scully Executive Vice President Sales and Marketin Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date Section 1 — Page 52 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 i� Reliability Driven ATTACHMENT # 3 FORMS EXCLUDING PRICING AND WARRANTY INFORMATION 1.1.5.11 DEBARRED PROPOSERS CERTIFICATION CERTIFICATION No. 1 - PROPOSAL No. WTA RFP -2013-04 FTA CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION For Contracts and Subcontracts in Excess of $100,000 Instruction for Certification 1. By signing and submitting its bid or proposal, the prospective lower tier participant is providing the signed certification set out below. 2. , The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was entered into; If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, VVTA may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. 3. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to VVTA if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. 4. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," "lower tier covered transaction," "participant," "persons," "principal," "proposal," and "voluntary excluded," as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549 [49 C.F.R. Part 29]. You may contact VVTA for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations. 5. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting its bid or proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized in writing by VVTA. 6. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting its bid or proposal that it will include the clause, set out below, titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion — Lower Tier Covered Transaction," without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions. 7. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that it is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntary excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the eligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the Non -procurement List issued by U.S. General Service Administration. Section 1 — Page 38 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 8. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. 9. Except for transactions authorized under Paragraph 5 of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to all remedies available to the Federal Government, VVTA and the other named procuring agencies may pursue available remedies including suspension and/or debarment. "Certification Re ardin and Voluntary Exclusion — Lower Tier covered Transaction" 1. The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of its bid or proposal, that neither it nor it's "principals" [as defined at 49 C.F.R. §29.105(p) is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by any Federal department or agency. 2. When the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to the statement in this certification, such ' 1 pective�p�articipant shall attach an explanation to its bid or proposal. ,, ,) /r),, Signature of the Proposer's AuproriAN Official Patrick Scully Executive Vice President Sales and Marketing Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date Section 1 — Page 39 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.12 FTA CERTIFICATION OF RESTRICTIONS ON LOBBYING (For Proposals over $100,000) CERTIFICATION No. 2 - PROPOSAL No. WTA RFP 2013-04 1. Patrick Scully Name) that: hereby certify on behalf of Motor Coach Industries, In .(Company 1. No Federal or State appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any State or Federal agency, a Member of the State Legislature or the United States Congress, an officer or employee of the Legislature or Congress, or an employee of a Member of the Legislature or the Congress, in connection with the awarding of any State of Federal contract, the making of any State or Federal grant, the making of any State or Federal loan, the entering into of any State or Federal cooperative agreement and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment or modification of any State or Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. 2. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, or an officer or employee of Congress, in connection with this contract, grant, loan or cooperative agreement, which is funded in whole or in part by Federal funds, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying," Approved pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 1352 0348-0046, in accordance with its instructions. 3. The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for any subcontractor at any tier performing work under this Federal -Aid funded Contract and that all subcontractors of any tier shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance is placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by § 13 52, Title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure. is 31 st day of October Signature of the Proposer's uthor)zed Official Patrick Scully Executive Vice Pre ent Sales and Marketing Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date . 2013. Section 1 — Page 40 WTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.13 DBE APPROVAL CERTIFICATION CERTIFICATION No. 3 - PROPOSAL NO. WTA-RFP 2013-04 I hereby certify that the Proposer has complied with the requirements of 49 C.F.R. Part 26, Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in DOT Programs by submitting an annual DBE goal to the Federal Transit Administration, and that its goals have either been approved or have not been disapproved b the Federal Transit Administration. Signature of the Proposer's Autho k ed 5fficial Patrick Scully Executive Vice President Sales and Marketing Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date Section 1 — Page 41 WTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.14 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH COACHES TESTING REQUIREMENT CERTIFICATION No. 4 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The undersigned certifies that the vehicle offered in this procurement complies and will, when delivered, comply with 49 U.S.C. § 5323 © and FTA's implementing regulation at 49 C.F.R. Part 665 according to the indicated one of the following three alternatives. (Mark one and only one of the three blank spaces with an 'Y') ❑ The Coaches offered herewith have been tested in accordance with 49 C.F.R. Part 665 on the vehicles being sold should have the identical configuration and major components as the vehicle in the test report, which must be submitted with this Offer. If the configuration or components are not identical, the manufacturer shall provide with its Offer a description of the change and the manufacturer's basis for concluding that it is not a major change requiring additional testing. I[X The manufacturer represents that the vehicle is "grandfathered" (has been used in mass transit service in the United States before October 1, 1988, and is currently being produced without a major change in configuration or components), and submits with this Offer the name and address of the recipient of such a vehicle and the details of that vehicle's configuration and major components. ❑ The vehicle is a new model and will be tested and the results will be submitted to Lead Procuring Agency prior to acceptance of the first Coaches. The undersigned understands that misrepresenting the testing status of a vehicle acquired with Federal financial assistance may subject the undersigned to civil penalties as outlined in the Department of Transportation's regulation on Program Fraud Civil Remedies, 49 C.F.R. Part 31. In addition, the undersigned un nds that FTA may suspend or debar a manufacturer under the procedures in 49 C.F.R. Part . a Signature of the Propos r s Author O ial Patrick Scully Executive Vice President Sales and Marketing Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date Section 1 — Page 42 WTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.15 FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS CERTIFICATION No. 5 - PROPOSAL No. WTA-RFP 2013-04 The Proposer hereby certifies that the following statement is true and correct (select one option): ® The vehicle(s) to be supplied is in compliance with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in 49 C.F.R. Part 571. ❑ The vehicle(s) to be supplied is not subject to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in 49 C.F.R. Part 571. ❑ The vehicle(s) to be supplied is subject to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in 49 C.F.R. Part 571 but no FMVSS certification is available at this time because the vehicle is a new model (Federal Register Vol. 56, No. 185, page 48391, September 24, 1991). nature of the Proposer's Authopfed Oficial Patrick Scully Executive Vice President Sales and Marketi Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date Section 1 — Page 43 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.18 PROPOSER SERVICE AND PARTS SUPPORT DATA CERTIFICATION No. 8 -PROPOSAL No. WTA- RFP 2013-04 Location of most Responsive Technical Service Representative to Lead Procuring Agency Name David Bugenig Address Telephone 530-945-9824 Proposer to describe technical services readily available from said representative. Location of most Responsive Parts Distribution Center to Lead Procuring Agency Name MCI Service Parts. Inc. Address 7001 Universal Coach Drive. Louisville, KY 40258 Telephone 1-800-323-1290 Proposer shall describe the extent of parts available at said center. Policy for Delivery of Parts and Components to be Purchased for Service and Maintenance Regular Method of Timely Shipment Pre -Paid Cost to Lead Procuring Agency Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date Only overnight shipments are charged Section 1 — Page 46 WTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.19 BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATION — COACHES CERTIFICATION No. 9 - PROPOSAL No. WTA- RFP 2013-04 Rolling Stock Note: Complete either Alternative A or B ALTERNATIVE A CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH 49 U.S.C. �5323(I)(2)(C) [Former Section 165(b)(3)] The Proposer hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. §53230)(2)(C) and the applic ere ulatio?" 49 C.F.R. § 661.11. 1 . _ , t Signature of the Proposer' Authorised Official Patrick Scully Executive Vice President Sales and Marketing Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date ALTERNATIVE B CERTIFICATE OF NON-COMPLIANCE WITH 49 U.S.C. §5323(i)(2)(c) [Former Section 165(b)(3)] The Proposer hereby certifies that it will not comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. §53230)(2)(C), but it may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. §53230)(2)(B), or (D) and regulations in 49 C.F.R. § 661.7. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date Section 1 — Page 47 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.20 BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATION — SPARE PARTS CERTIFICATION No. 10 - PROPOSAL No. VVTA- RFP 2013-04 Steel, Iron and Manufactured Products Note: Complete either Alternative A or B ALTERNATIVE A CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH 49 U.S.C. §5323(1)(1) [Former Section 165 (a)] The Proposer hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. §5323(j)(1) and the applicable regulations in 49 C.F.R. part 661. Signature of the Proposer's Authorized Official Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Company Name Date ALTERNATIVE B CERTIFICATE OF NON-COMPLIANCE WITH 49 U.S.C. &5323(1)(1) [Former Section 165(a) The Proposer hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. §53230)(1), but it may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. §53230)(2)(B), or (D) and regulations in 49 C.F.R. §661.7. ` Signature of the Proposer's thorized fficial Patrick Scully Executive Vice Pr ales and Marketing Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries. Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date Section 1 — Page 48 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 BUY AMERICA LAW 49 U.S.C.§53230) BUY AMERICA STIPULATIONS: "(1) The Secretary of Transportation may obligate an amount that may be appropriated to carry out this chapter for a project only if steel, iron, and manufactured goods used in the project are produced in the United States. "(2) The Secretary of Transportation may waive paragraph (1) of this subsection if the Secretary finds that — "(A) applying paragraph (1) would be inconsistent with the public interest; "(B) the steel, iron, and goods produced in the United States are not produced in sufficient and reasonably available amount or are not of a satisfactory quality; "(C) when procuring rolling stock (including train control, communication and traction power equipment) under this chapter — "(i) the cost of components and subcomponents produced in the United States is more than 60 percent of the cost of all components of the rolling stock; and "(ii) final assembly of the rolling stock has occurred in the United States; or "(D) including domestic material will increase the cost of the overall project by more than 25 percent. "(3) In this subsection, labor costs involved in the final assembly are not included in calculating the cost of components" Section 1 — Page 49 WTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.21 INTEREST AND GRATUITIES FORM CERTIFICATION No. 11 - PROPOSAL No. WTA- RFP 2013-04 Proposer by its signature below, certifies that except as disclosed below, Proposer, its officers, employees and their immediate families have not offered or given a gratuity in any form including, without limitations, entertainment, favors, loans, gifts or anything of greater than nominal value for any reason including personal, non -business related reasons to any VVTA officer or employee or their immediate families within the preceding twelve (12) months. For the purpose of this section, nominal value means anything: (1) having an aggregate value of $35.00 (thirty-five dollars), or less per year; or (2), any perishable item (flowers or food) of any value, except that prepared meals are subject to the $35.00 limit. A campaign contribution is not a gratuity and is not the subject of this Certification. Proposer further certifies that except as disclosed below, Proposer, its officers, employees and their immediate families presently have no interest nor within the preceding twelve (12) months had any interest including, without limitation, any business or personal relationship that would appear to conflict with the performance of services required to be performed under this Contract. Disclosable interests and relationships are those that may reasonably be viewed as creating a potential or actual conflict of interest. / Signature of the Proposer's Authorized ficial Patrick Scully Executive Vice President Sales and Service Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date Section 1 — Page 50 VVrA Solicitation No, 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 1.1.5.24 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDUM CERTIFICATION No. 14 -PROPOSAL No. WTA- RFP 2013-04 The following form shall be completed and included in the price proposal. Failure to acknowledge receipt of all addenda may cause the proposal to be considered non-responsive to the solicitation. Acknowledged receipt of each addendum must be clearly established and included with the Offer. The undersigned Proposer acknowledges receipt of the following addendum to the documents: Signature of the Proposer's AViorize(NOfficial Patrick Scully Executive Vice Presiftr des and Marketing Name and Title of the Proposer's Authorized Official Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Company Name October 31, 2013 Date Section 1 — Page 53 VVTA Solicitation No. 2013-04 Rev 4 Dated 8/29/13 e Reliability Driven" ATTACHMENT # 4 SUPPORTING DATA TECHNICAL PROPOSAL AND PRODUCT EVALUATION ITEMS A THRU P F A Reliability Driven" ATTACHMENT A VEHICLE CONSTRUCTION Reliability Driven`" MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION For economy in maintenance, it is essential that parts and units be arranged so that rapid assembly and disassembly will be possible for the coach being provided. The dimensions of all parts, unless particularly specified, will be in accordance with current standards of the Society of Automotive Engineers, or the metric equivalents. All units or parts not specified shall be Manufacturer's standard units or parts and shall conform in material, design and workmanship to industry standards and shall meet or exceed all Federal and State motor vehicle safety standards. During the manufacturing of the coaches all parts shall be new and in no case will used, reconditioned or obsolete parts be accepted. No advantages shall be taken by the Manufacturer in the omission of any parts or details that make the coach complete and ready for service, even though such parts or details are not mentioned in these specifications. Workmanship throughout shall conform to the high standard of commercially accepted practice for the class of work and shall result in a neat and finished appearance. All exposed surfaces and edges shall be smooth, free from burrs and other projections, and shall be neatly finished. Exposed metal surfaces, prior to paneling or covering shall be properly prepared and coated with protective material to insure against corrosion or deterioration. All lubrication points, unless otherwise specified, shall be capable of accepting a high pressure grease gun operated on fittings that permit grease to travel into the lubrication point but does not permit the grease to escape and designed so that when the grease gun is withdrawn, there is a positive barrier preventing dirt from entering the fitting. These fittings shall be of one manufacture and shall be accessible for a grease gun while the vehicle is being serviced on either a lift or a pit. BODY DESIGN The coach shall have a clean, smooth, simple design, primarily derived from coach performance requirements and passenger service criteria. Body construction shall not be of a body on chassis type. The exterior and body features, including grilles and louvers, shall be shaped to allow complete and easy cleaning by automatic bus washers without snagging washer brushes. The retention of water and dirt in or on any body feature or the freezing or bleeding out of this dirt and water after leaving the washer shall be minimized. Body and windows shall be sealed to prevent leaking of air, dust, or water under normal operating conditions and during cleaning in automatic bus washers for the service life of the coach. Accumulation of spray and splash on any window of the coach generated by its wheels on a wet road shall be minimized. The undercarriage of the coach shall be sealed off to the maximum extent practicable to significantly reduce the intrusion of road spray. MATERIALS Body materials shall be selected and the body fabricated to reduce maintenance, extend durability, and provide consistency of appearance throughout the life of the coach. Detailing shall be kept simple; add-on devices and trim shall be minimized and, where necessary, integrated into the basic design. The coach shall resist corrosion from atmospheric conditions and road salts. It shall maintain structural integrity and nearly maintain original appearance throughout its service life, provided it is maintained in accordance with the procedures specified in the service manual. All exposed body panels above and below the floor line shall be aluminum or stainless steel except for the front end upper and lower panels, the rear end upper panels and the upper sidewall panel which are made of fiberglass or galvanized steel. Materials exposed to the elements and all joints and connections of dissimilar metals shall be corrosion -resistant and shall be protected from galvanic corrosion. All frame members below the passenger floor that are subject to road splash and are less than 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) shall be stainless steel for maximum corrosion protection. All other frame members exposed to splash are to be High Strength Low Alloy steel and are to be 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) thick minimum and shall be coated with Tectyl undercoating or approved equal, on all surfaces exposed to road splash for maximum corrosion protection. Floor supports in the passenger and drivers area, the sidewall structures and roof structures that are not exposed to road spray shall be High Strength Low Alloy and primed prior to incorporation into the coach assembly. Outer sidewall panels above the passenger floor and below the windows shall be galvanized steel, pre -primed. The roof panels shall be pre -primed aluminum both sides and the front and rear roof caps fiberglass. The upper rear engine door and louvers may be fiberglass panels mounted to stainless steel frames with powder coated aluminum screens. The upper side corner panels may be fiberglass with powder coated aluminum screens. The upper wheelchair lift door may be made of an aluminum frame or other acceptable lightweight material and aluminum exterior panel. Non-structural underbody panels used for baggage bay floors and to retain insulation in other areas, shall be Tectyl or approved equal undercoated aluminum or stainless steel for maximum corrosion protection. In the wheel well areas, non-structural closeout panels shall be stainless steel. Before assembling, all metal body parts must be given a thorough anti -corrosion treatment. Joints between dissimilar metals shall be properly insulated with an inert plastic tape to avoid corrosion due to electrolytic action. All nuts, bolts, clips, washers, clamps, and like parts shall be zinc plated, phosphate coated, black oxide coated, stainless steel, or nylon to prevent corrosion. All exterior joints and seams must be sealed. Dissimilar metals must be separated by a non-conductive barrier. Non -Conductive Barriers may consist of one of the following: • Black elastic compound tape • Mylar tape • Double -sided structural adhesive tape Where tape barriers are not feasible an appropriate sealant shall be used to provide a protective barrier and a water tight seal. This sealer must be used on all panels and assemblies that are susceptible to water leaks. 2 �� — * G e © . B �01 — e�� . -. � © Reliability Driven ATTACHMENT 6 PLEASE SEE ATTACHMENT A AND ATTACHMENT C FOR DETAILS ON MATERIALS AND CORRISION CA Reliability Driven" ATTACHMENT C CORROSION PROTECTION STANDARD CORROSION PROTECTION MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES MODEL 102D3 & 102DL3 COACHES X . INTRODUCTION 2. STRUCTURE 3. EXTERIOR PANELS 4, PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYTIC ACTION gnayh stan&re c«osim&c INTRODUCTION This corrosion standard is designed to enhance the customer's knowledge of Motor Coach Industries commitment to corrosion prevention. 'The information provided shows designated areas of our coach in which corrosion resistant materials and practices are used. Motor Coach Industries extensive use of stainless steel materials in the design and construction of the Model 102D3 and 102DL3 coaches is a result of over thirty-five years experience in the design and construction of intercity/commuter coaches beginning with the MC -5. This extensive use of stainless steel provides the strength and durability necessary for commuter coaches operating throughout all areas of Canada and the USA. Motor Coach Industries has several customers with coaches operating in the high corrosion areas of Eastern United States which operate MC -9 model coaches that are in excess of 1.5 years old. The 102D3 and 102DL3 models use stainless steel more extensively that the MC -9 models we built 15 years ago. Specifically we have increased the use of stainless steel in the rear upper structure, the front upper structure, the front tire compartment and the engine rails. We believe that the 102D3 and 102DL3 model coaches will have a longer corrosion life than the MC -9 models, many of which are still in operation. STRUCTURE Motor Coach Industries utilizes an abundance of stainless steel as depicted on the attached illustrations. The shaded areas are HSLA steel. The non -shaded areas are type 304 stainless steel. All frame members below the passenger floor that are subject to road splash and are less than .100 inch thick are stainless steel for maximum corrosion protection. All other frame members exposed to splash are HSLA steel and are .100 thick minimum. They are also coated with Tectyl 127CG on all surfaces exposed to road splash. Plywood floor supports in the passenger and drivers area, the sidewall structures and roof structures are not exposed to road spray, and have a lower corrosion resistance requirement. These components are HSLA and are primed prior to incorporation into the coach assembly. The floor supports and sidewall components also are painted with a gray finish coat. Please see attached, stainless steel areas are the'non shaded items. ,, guyir standard c«rosiomdoc EXTERIOR PANELS & DOORS Motor Coach Industries uses 304 series stainless steel for all exterior panelling below the passenger floor line. Outer sidewall panels above the passenger floor and below the windows are steel, galvanized inside and preprimed outside. The roof panels are preprimed aluminum both side. The front and rear caps are fiberglass. Stainless steel' panels and door frames are also used on -all service doors and passenger doors except the baggage doors. Baggage compartment door frames are aluminum extrusions, top coated before application of the painted aluminum panel or optional fluted stainless steel skin. Non-structural underbody panels used for baggage bay floors and to retain insulation in other areas, are Tectyl coated aluminum or stainless steel. In the wheelwell areas, non-structural closeout panels are stainless steel. Before assembling, all metal body parts are given a thorough anti corrosion treatment. Joints between dissimilar metals are properly insulated with an inert plastic tape to avoid corrosion due to eletrolytic action. All nuts, bolts, clips, washers, clamps, and like parts are zinc or cadmium plated, phosphate coated, black oxide coated, stainless steel, or nylon to prevent corrosion. All exterior joints and seams are sealed. PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYTIC ACTION It is a policy at Motor Coach Industries, that dissimilar metals must be separated by a non- conductive barrier. Barriers may consist of one of the following: 1) a black elastic compound tape 2) a mylar tape 3) a double sided structural adhesive tape Where tape barriers are not feasible an appropriate sealant is used to provide a protective barrier and a water tight seal. This sealer is used on baggage floors and all panels and assemblies that are susceptible to water leaks. gmylr standard Comoslon.doc 3 I m O BATTERY DO -OR --L FRONT DRAIN HOLES 0 Reliability Driverf ATTACHMENT D EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR ACESS DOORS Reliability Driven' SERVICE COMPARTMENTS AND ACCESS DOORS INTERIOR Access for maintenance and replacement of equipment shall be provided by panels and doors that appear to be an integral part of the interior. Removal of fixtures or equipment unrelated to the repair task to gain access shall be minimized. Access doors, if hinged, shall be hinged with props, as necessary, to hold the doors up and out of the mechanic's way with the exception of the destination sign box door which hinges down and is held by straps in the open position. Panel fasteners shall be standardized so that only two tools are required to service all special fasteners within the coach. These fasteners shall be captive in the panel except for the engine compartment and antenna access hatches. Access doors for the door actuator compartments shall be secured with hand screws or latches, and shall be sealed to prevent entry of mechanism lubricant into the coach interior. All hinges and props must be designed to preclude accidental closure when the panels are opened. PARCEL RACKS A minimum 10 module parcel rack without dividers and compartment doors shall be furnished over all two -passenger seating positions except in the wheelchair door area. Retention cords shall run the length of the rack housing except where air conditioning components are housed. compartments. The parcel rack edge, running along the full length of the aisle, shall incorporate a handhold for use by standees. Passenger headroom measured from the rack end to the top of the seat headrest, shall be a minimum 17 Inches (432 mm). Interior window post caps shall be ABS, thermo formed plastic, off-white in color to provide a clean finished appearance. The interior of the rack shall be vinyl covered aluminum to complement the interior. Parcel racks shall be supported by polycarbonate glass filled hangers spaced approximately 40 inches (1,016 mm) apart. Total capacity shall be a minimum 109 ft.3 (3 m3) to allow for ample storage space for carry -on items. Passenger service modules mounted on the underside of the parcel rack shall include individually controlled and adjustable LED passenger reading lights, and an exit signal push button, red in color and individual air distribution outlets receiving air from the parcel rack HVAC system. These outlets shall be adjustable from fully closed to full open position. A minimum of fifteen speakers shall also be provided along the window side of the parcel rack for the driver controlled public address system. Speakers shall broadcast, in a clear tone, announcements that are clearly perceived from all seat positions at approximately the same volume level. Passengers utilizing the securement systems shall be provided identical amenities as provided for all other passengers except that the parcel rack shall be deleted in the area of the wheelchair lift door. Separate and independent notification will be provided on the dashboard indicator panel for stop request notification from securement positions. EXTERIOR Vertically hinged doors shall be used for the engine compartment and for all auxiliary equipment compartments including doors for checking the quantity and adding to the engine coolant, engine lubricant, transmission fluid and the windshield washer reservoir. The upper engine radiator/C.A.C. compartment door shall be vertically hinged with a locking latch located behind the engine compartment doors. Access to these compartments shall be from outside the coach. Access openings shall be sized for easy performance of tasks within the compartment including tool operating space. Access doors shall be of rugged construction and shall be capable of withstanding severe abuse throughout the life of the coach. They shall close flush with the body surface. All service/maintenance doors, excluding baggage compartment doors, shall be hinged at the top or on the forward edge and shall be prevented from coming loose or opening during transit service or in coach washing operations. Doors with top hinges shall have props stored behind the door or on the door frame. All access doors (except vertically hinged access doors) shall be sufficiently retained in the open position by props or counterbalancing, as with baggage compartment doors. Springs and hinges shall be corrosion -resistant and shall last throughout the service life of the coach. Latch handles shall be sized to provide an adequate grip for opening. Large access doors shall hinge up and out of the way or fold flat against the coach body and shall be easily operable by one person. These doors, when opened, shall not restrict access for servicing other components or systems. Retention devices utilized to hold the engine compartment access doors in the open position shall be heavy duty and designed to last the service life of the coach. UNDERFLOOR BAGGAGE COMPARTMENTS Full width under floor baggage compartments shall be provided between the front and rear axles. Each compartment shall be separated by an aluminum panel except the front and rear bulkheads shall be stainless steel. The compartment doors shall be a two part with the joint at or below the rubrail, fully sealed vertical lift pantograph type. Each door shall include an aluminum or composite frame with an aluminum outer panel. Doors shall be spring counter balanced for ease of operation. The no. 1 right hand, curbside baggage door shall have a key lock. All other baggage doors shall be equipped with air locks. Each baggage door shall have a 4.0 x 10 inch (102 x 254 mm) flush mounted breakaway type latch handle located with a center point approximately 38 inches (965 mm) off the ground. Each under floor compartment shall be pressurized and illuminated with two LED lamps when the doors are opened. The lamp fixtures shall be sealed to preclude the intrusion of dust and moisture into the fixture. The floor of the baggage compartments shall be composite material. PASSENGER ENTRANCE DOOR An electrically controlled, air -operated, power bi-fold door with keyed lock, will be located forward of the right front wheel. The non -symmetrical door will have a clear opening width of 30 inches (762 mm) up to a height of 44 inches (1117 mm). The clear door opening height will be 84.5 inches (2,146.3 mm). The door shall be of composite material construction with a stainless steel kick panel for the lower portion. A molded fiberglass -reinforced panel shall be on the interior of the door. Upper and lower hinge assemblies shall be cast, with a stainless steel lower hinge pin pivoting inside a spherical bearing An upper — primary and lower — secondary window shall be installed in the entrance door. The primary double -glazed window in the upper half of the door shall be of AS -2 laminated heat - absorbing safety glass. The secondary window, located in the lower section of the door, shall be of 0.5 -inch (12.7 mm) acrylic. Door control shall be provided by a momentary switch, located to the left of the steering wheel. An exterior remote external control switch shall also be located in a side-wall pocket by the entrance door,. The door shall have positive automatic air lock with overrule. The air lock will be automatically actuated by a micro switch when the door is in the closed position. An entrance door key lock shall be provided on each coach along with two spare keys. Operation of, and power to, the passenger door shall be completely controlled by a switch located in close proximity to the driver to the left of the steering wheel. A control or valve in the driver's compartment shall shut off the power to, and/or dump the air from the front door mechanism to permit manual operation of the front door with the coach shut down. A toggle switch on the exterior of the coach shall permit opening of the front door. The switch shall be concealed behind an unmarked flip up cover. The door switch cover shall be spring loaded so as to be held in the closed position and be located rearward of the entrance door. ACTUATORS The nominal door opening and closing speed shall be in the 3-5 second range. The maximum door opening and closing speeds will be regulated using fixed, maintenance free orifices and airline sizes. If required, door speeds can be decreased with the addition of a flow -restricting device. Actuators and the complete door mechanism shall be concealed from passengers, but shall be easily accessible for servicing. MANUAL OPERATION In the event of an emergency, it shall be possible to open the door manually from inside the coach after actuating an unlocking device. The nameplate for the entrance door air dump valve shall say: ``Emergency Only — To manually open entrance door push knob." All references shall detail the "manual" operation of the door. 1O -SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE ,erwicc &Access Doors Tl -e exterior view on the fLll+cwirg page identr5es all ser4ce compartments and exterior access doors for the $O►rie components maybe located and D4500 series coal ( Figure 4 1. Thele locations. ccriponents corrtained w�ithn, and accessed through ether cc�rnpartrtrerit methods of Dpening are as follows: service doers. E 17 rrliuHt 14 - U4UVV F-Amnur t•Ui�iNu�t��it3 04505 Exterior Components (, Figure ; 4 ) 1, Entrarce Door ,' Sedan ) 2. Entrarce Door Exterior Switch 3. Fuel Compartment Coir 4. Battery Com part rert 5. GEF Compartment Door 6. Hear Side Serr-ca Cornpartrnert Docir 7. A,C Cordenser 8. Electrical Parel Frort Jurctior Bare 9. Radiator Compartment `�rr� 10 112 9 10. Air Gleaner 5err-ce Door 11 . A C Compressor Serr�;e G'Dor 12- Engire & ,Ooolirg Compartmert Door L.atd es. 11 10 M.a*er Eight—High Mourted 14. 131 -rake Light—High Mounted 15. Hear Tail Light Cluster 16. Back—up Lights 17. Bumper and Spare Tire CcrnparGment 18. Gitectio —al Light Date September 2013 RellabllityyDrlvenf D Series Maintenance Manual Page 3D4-1 SECTION 3D4 BAGGAGE & SERVICE COMPARTMENT DOORS, EMERGENCY ESCAPE HATCHES CONTENTS OF THIS SECTION SUBJECT PAGE BAGGAGE AND SERVICE COMPARTMENT DOORS ....................... 3D4-3 General Description ............................................... 3134-3 MAINTENANCE 3D4-7 ..................................................... Inspection.......................................................3134-7 Adjustment......................................................3D4-7 Removal........................................................3D4-8 Installation...................................................... 3D4-9 EMERGENCY ESCAPE HATCHES ...................................... 3134-10 General Description ............................................... 3D4-10 MAINTENANCE..................................................... 3D4-10 Inspection.......................................................3D4-10 Adjustment......................................................3134-10 Removal........................................................3D4-10 Installation...................................................... 3134-11 SPECIFICATIONS................................................... 3D4-13 SERVICETOOLS .................................................... 3134-13 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 3D4-2 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 ReliabilitvDriven' D Series Maintenance Manual Page 3D4-3 BAGGAGE AND SERVICE COMPARTMENT DOORS General Description The coach is constructed with three baggage bays, numerous service compartments, and two roof escape hatches. All baggage bay doors, service compartment doors, and emergency exit ways are hinged. 1 All baggage bay doors, lower service compartment doors as well as the sedan style entrance door and wheelchair lift cassette door on the RH side are fitted with black rubber rub rails. The condenser compart- ment door on the LH side has a formed metal rub -rail section. Keyed -alike locks are used on baggage and service doors. The baggage and service compartment compo- nents locations are shown in LH (Roadside) View and RH (Curbside) View. All compartments and doors are in the same locations, but may be cosmetically differ- ent. f 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 1. LH (Roadside) View Item Description 1 2 Front J -Box Front Side Service Door 3 4 Baggage Bay #1 Baggage Bay #2 5 Condenser Compartment 6 7 Baggage Bay #3 Rear Side Service Door Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 3D4-4 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" 16 8 17 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Figure 2. RH (Curbside) View 45013 Item Description 8 9 Rear Side Service Door Baggage Bay #3 10 Battery Compartment 11 Fuel Tank Filler Door 12 Wheelchair Lift Cassette Door (with LED lights) 13 Baggage Bay #2 14 Baggage Bay #1 15 *Sedan Style Entrance Door (Bi -Part Style Entrance Door Not Shown) 16 **WCL Sliding Door 17 DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid) Filler Door *Refer to section 3131 of this manual Tor seaan Style tntrance uoor maintenance toeciwn ouc iui Bi -Part Style Entrance Door maintenance). **Refer to section 3D3 of this manual for WCL Sliding Door maintenance. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability en D Series Maintenance Manual 77 777c ` 1 2 �El 11l]❑ d - "I 11285 Figure 3. Rear View Item Description 1 1 Radiator Compartment 2 3 A/C Compressor Service Door Engine Service Doors 4 LH Access Door The engine cooling compartment (radiator) doors are located above the rear engine access doors. To open the engine cooling compartment doors, open the curbside rear engine access door and pull the lever down, disengaging the lever from the curbside engine cooling compartment door. Locate the door latch and pull outward. Pull doors outwards until the doors are fully open and secured. NOTICE Ensure that the lever is always engaged when the engine cooling compartment doors are closed to prevent inadvertent opening due to high internal compartment pressures. Components Date September 2013 Page 3D4-5 Front Junction Box Door The electrical junction box (J -box) service door is located below the driver's window, see LH (Roadside) View. The door is fitted with a piano type front hinge and held closed by two quarter -turn Dzus fasteners. A prop rod holds the door open. This door provides ac- cess to the audio amplifiers, entrance door overrule knob, various circuit breakers and relays, warning buzzer, speed switch, electrical modules, and power converter 110 VAC receptacle. Front Side Service Door A left front side service door, see LH (Roadside) View, located below the J -box service door, is front - hinged and held closed by two quarter -turn Dzus fas- teners. This door provides access to the front -bumper release handle, accessory air reservoir, emergency fill valves, steering components, windshield washer, and horns. Condenser Compartment Door The condenser compartment door is located to the rear of the #2 LH baggage door, see LH (Roadside) View. The door is fitted with a piano -type front hinge, and is held closed by fasteners. A prop rod is provided to hold the door when fully opened. This door provides access to the condenser fan and motor, receiver tank, inspection panels, and other air conditioning compo- nents. Battery Compartment Door The battery compartment door see, RH (Curbside) View is top -hinged and held closed by a flush -mounted paddle handle latch. A prop rod is provided to hold the door open while providing access to batteries, air con- ditioning filter, and battery disconnect switch. This door is fitted with a small hinged door for quick access to the disconnect switch. NOTICE When the battery compartment door is fully opened, it will interfere with operation of the WCL Sliding Door. To prevent interference when opening the sliding door, either close the battery compartment door or prop it open to the first position only. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 3134-6 Rear Side Service Doors D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' The engine compartment is accessible through LH and RH rear side service doors, see LH (Roadside) View and RH (Curbside) View. The doors are front - hinged and held closed by a flush -mounted paddle - handle latch. A prop rod is provided to hold the doors in the open position. Engine Service Doors The rear, engine -compartment service doors are side hinged. A flush -mounted, paddle -handle latch is installed on the right door which overlaps the edge of the left door. Prop rods are provided on both doors to hold them in the open position. Radiator Compartment Door The radiator compartment doors are side -hinged and held closed by two spring-loaded latches. Gas - charged springs hold the door when fully opened. Ac- cess is provided to the radiator, charge air cooler, surge tank, fan belts, and fan controls. Fuel -Tank Filler Door 11286 Figure 4. Fuel Tank Filler Door The fuel -tank fill access door is a side -hinged spring -assisted panel. The main, fuel -door panel, is re- tained at the top by two bolts and at the bottom by pins. This allows access to the fuel tank assembly and drain plug removal if necessary when servicing the coach. DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid) Filler Door The DEF fill access door is a side -hinged spring - assisted panel with a keylock located to the rear of the curbside baggage bay #3. LH Rear Access Door The door is side -hinged and held closed by two quarter -turn Dzus fasteners. A/C Compressor Service Door The air conditioner compressor is accessible through the service door mounting near the RH backup light. The door is side -hinged and held closed by two quarter -turn Dzus fasteners. Baggage Compartment Doors 11287 Figure 5. Baggage Compartment Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 RelLV6i n D Series Maintenance Manual Page 3D4-7 Wheelchair -Lift (WCL) Cassette Door Figure 6. Baggage Door Hinge and Cable Baggage compartment doors have a clear 33 x 54 in. (840 x 1380 mm) opening provided to each compartment on both sides of the coach (see LH (Roadside) View and RH (Curbside) View). All com- partment doors (except #2 RH) are fully sealed, vertical lift type, and each has a flush -mounted, breakaway type, safety, hold -open catch with provision for padlock and customs seals (see Baggage Door Hinge and Cable). The #2 RH (curbside) baggage door is side - hinged. Doors are counterbalanced with springs for ease of operation. To open, insert fingers under latch, then pull outward and up. To close, hold latch in open position, pull downward on door and push down on latch to secure door. Rubber bumpers prevent the door from contacting the body when opened. The wheelchair -lift (WCL) cassette door is located in the lower portion of the #2 RH (curbside) baggage door. It has keyed access, incorporating a safety inter- lock switch and a power switch. The door is bottom - hinged and held closed by two top spring -bolt latches operated by a flush -mounted paddle handle. Spare Tire Compartment The spare tire compartment is accessed by lower- ing the front bumper. The bumper release handle is ac- cessed from the front -side service door. The bumper is bottom hinged and is provided with an over -center an- gle latch to hold the bumper in the down position. The bumper is counter -balanced (to assist in opening and closing) and is retained by two spring bolt latches. MAINTENANCE Inspection 1. Inspect the pulley cables for fraying. Replace the cables if necessary. 2. Check the pulleys for wear and cracks. Re- place them if either of these conditions ex- ists. Adjustment NOTICE When adjusting baggage doors for proper locking and/or sealing, always check that the handle and locking -rod mechanism is adjusted for maximum contact with locking lugs and/or catches. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 3D4-8 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" Removal Baggage Door (Except #2 RH Swing Out Door) Baggage door removal should be performed by 2 two persons. 1. Set park brake and turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position. 3 2. Fully open baggage door and support it to prevent falling when cables are removed. 0 0 0 11289 Figure 7. Rear View Item Description 1 Cotter Pin 2 Door Handle 3 Pivot Pin 4 Jamnut 5 Yoke 1. Remove cotter pin (on inside of door handle) retaining the yoke pivot pin. 2. Slide out yoke pivot pin. Loosen jamnut and turn threaded yoke to desired length. 3. Tighten jamnut and reassemble in reverse order. NOTICE If baggage door locks too tightly and pinches seal at either top or bottom, or locks too loosely, adjust the upper or lower catches on the inside edges of the baggage compartment. 4. Loosen retaining capscrews and slide upper or lower catches to desired position and re - tighten. i7 Figure 8. Rear View Item Description 1 Pulley 2 Spring 3 Spring Retainer 4 Lower Catch 5 Upper Catch 6 7 Cable Assembly Stabilizer Tube 8 Clevis Pin 3. Using baggage -door -cable pulling tool (20-46), pull the cable back to allow removal of the clevis pins that attach the pulley ca- bles to the stabilizer tube. } The baggage door opening mechanism cable assembly is under tension. Exercise extreme caution during removal and installation. 4. Remove the stabilizer tube from mounting brackets. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliabil n' D Series Maintenance Manual Page 3134-9 F1 ff-1 M1 Z I I Z 21 NOTICE Baggage door must be supported at this stage to To remove the battery -door, small, disconnect prevent it from falling during final removal switch door, the inner plastic panel must be procedures. removed to access fasteners. 5. Remove the screws that secure the hinge panel to the coach body and remove door, stabilizer tube, and hinge panel as an as- sembly. To remove the rest of the cable and spring assem- bly, follow these additional steps. 6. Remove the cable end/spring plug from the spring by rotating the plug. 7. Remove the four capscrews that mount the spring retainer to the upper -compartment ceiling channel. 8. Rotate the spring to remove it from the spring retainer. #2 RH Swing Out Door 1. Set park brake and turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position. 2. Open door and remove screws from hinge and remove door. Fuel Door 1. Set park brake and turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position. 2. Fully open the small filler door to gain ac- cess to the main door/panel capscrews. 3. Remove capscrews from the top mounting brackets and lift the door (with lower retain- ing pins) out of the frame holes. Hinged Service Doors 1. Set park brake and turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position. 2. Fully open door and support it to prevent falling when hinges are removed. 3. Remove all prop rods or spring clip assem- blies from door. 4. Remove all hinge fasteners and remove door from coach. Installation Baggage Door 1. Reassemble springs and cables, following the above steps in reverse order. 2. Position and support the baggage door in the fully open position and install door in re- verse order of the Removal procedure. #2 RH Swing Out Door Position door and secure hinge with screws. Fuel Door Position door/panel lower retaining pins into frame holes and tighten capscrews. Hinged Service Doors Position and support the door in the fully open po- sition, and reinstall prop rod, spring clips, and hinge fasteners. Lubrication Lock Cylinders Apply dry graphite compound, powdered graphite, or graphite oil to lock cylinders. Do not use spray grease on the lock cylinders. Refer to Section 10 for lu- brication intervals. NOTICE To prevent gumming and sticking, never apply spray grease to the lock cylinders. Latches 1. Open the door as wide as possible. 2. Apply spray grease to the inside of the latch mechanism. 3. Assure that the lubricant is worked into the latch by opening and closing the door sever- al times. Clean any excess lubricant from the door with a clean shop rag. Refer to Section 10 for lubrication intervals. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Pae 3D4-10 D Series Maintenance Manual Page Reliability Driven' EMERGENCY ESCAPE HATCHES General Description Two 22.75 x 22.75 in. (578 x 578 mm) escape hatches are located in the roof. The hatches are used for emergency evacuation of the coach. Turn knob from LATCHED to TO EXIT position and push to open hatch. MAINTENANCE Inspection Examine the surface of the rubber seal surround- ing the hatch opening. An impression should be visible in the seal where the hatch has made contact. If the im- pression is a continuous unbroken line, the seal is good and requires no adjustment. Inspect the handle and locking rod mechanism for maximum contact with locking lugs and/or catches. Adjustment 1. Open the hatch cover. 2. Apply chalk to the lip of the hatch opening. 3. Close and reopen hatch. Inspect seal to de- termine hatch position (chalk marks indicate hatch position). 4. Adjust the catches up, down, front, or back as required to position the hatch cover. 5. Re -apply chalk to lip of hatch opening; clean the seal surface. Close and reopen hatch. Inspect the seal to determine hatch position; readjust as necessary. NOTICE if additional forward or rearward adjustment is required, remove the catches and elongate the slotted holes. Removal 1. Set park brake and turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position. 2. Unfasten hinge mountings and remove ac- cess cover. 3. Remove seal material from mount ring trough and drill out mounting rivets to re- move mounting ring. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliability n D Series Maintenance Manual Page 3134-11 Installation 3 2 45937 Figure 9. Transpec Roof Hatch Item Description 1 Transpec Roof Hatch 2 Tapping Screws 3 Trim Molding 4 1 White Sikaflex 1. Clean mating surface of exterior roof skin 7. Clean away excess butyl squeezed out from with isopropyl alcohol. Allow 10 minutes to hatch clamping. flash off. 8. Install interior trim molding flush with ceiling 2. Align hatches with hinged side to front and panels at specified locations. centered in the frame opening. Arrow fea- 9. Attach hatch lid with hardware provided. ture on the roof hatch to be pointing to the Torque bolts to 45-55 in -Ib (5.1-6.2 Nm). front of the coach. 10. Complete the installation of the roof hatches 3. Clean the roof adjacent to the hatch using by repeating the Inspection and Adjustment sika cleaner and a lint free cloth. Allow 5 to procedures as necessary. 10 minutes to flash off. 4. Apply Sika primer within one hour of the cleaner, using a brush or roller. Allow 10 minutes to flash off. 5. Apply white Sikaflex to the perimeter of the hatch within one hour of the primer. 6. Clamp roof hatch for 20 seconds using 10 1 b (44.5 N). Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 WIM Page 3D4-12 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven - 17 r1. -' MIN r 484 Figure 10. Transpec Roof Hatch Breakdown Item Description 1 link and Plunger Assembly 2 Gasket Kit -Standard 3 Inner Release Handle 4 Release Handle Assembly 5 Release Handle Shield Assembly 6 Frame 7 DPSV III Cover 8 Vent Adhesive/Sealant 9 Shoulder Bolt -Torque to 75 in -Ib (8.47 Nm) Max. 10 Plunger Vent Coil Spring 11 Hinge Cover 12 Fixed Hinge 13 Release Hinge 14 Handle Base 15 Torx Screw 16 Flat Head Screw 17 Hinge Pin 18 Decal 19Decal 20 Decal Opening a Transpec Hatch 1. Rotate the red knob 90 degrees in either direction. 2. Push the red knob into the lid. 3. Continue to push the lid to the fully open po- sition. Closing a Transpec Hatch 1. If the hatch was opened with the lid in the fully closed position, the release hinge will still be in the down position. 2. Push the release hinge upward. 3. Lower the lid into position. 4. Guide the release hinge into the handle base on the lid. 5. Pull down on the top of the lid to force the release hinge and the lid together until you hear it click into place. This will be the spring loaded handle setting in place. 6. Grasp both sides of the lid and pull down to fully close the hatch. 7. Rotate the red knob back into the LATCHED position. 8. The red knob should be in the LATCHED position during normal operation of the vehi- cle. A CA UTION Ensure the escape hatches are fully closed and latched before operating the coach. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries InYI, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 ReliabllityDriven' D Series Maintenance Manual Page 3D4-13 SPECIFICATIONS BAGGAGE DOOR ASSEMBLY Manufacturer.........................................................................................................................:.................................. MCI PADDLE LATCHING HANDLE Manufacturer.................................................,............................................................................................................. MCI ROOF HATCH Manufacturer............. ................................ ,.......... .................... .................................... .................................. ....Transpec SERVICE TOOLS SOME OF THE TOOLS USED FOR MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION ARE NONSTANDARD. THEY ARE, HOWEVER, AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE THROUGH MCI SERVICE PARTS. WHERE PRACTICAL, THEY MAY BE FABRICATED AT THE SERVICE FACILITY. L:� Baggage Door Cable Puller Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driver - ATTACHMENT E DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS [Type text] The following notes are applicable where indicated. All dimensions provided are nominal. I. Includes front bumper and rear bumper rub rail II. Excludes fenders, splash guards, mirrors and side turn lights 1111. Dimensions are based on coach in a normal operating position using 315/80R x 22.5 tubeless tires IV. Departure angle takes into account installed rear skid V. Dimension is based on a door to door frame measurement, below the upper door hinge cover VI. Vehicle weight could vary from coach to coach, depending on equipment specified LENGTH ft/in m Over body 44'9" 13.64 Over bumpers, basic' 451511 13.84 Over optional rear help bumper 45-61' 13.87 WIDTH in mm Overall - body' 102 2,590.80 HEIGHT Ill in mm Overall: over roof hatches 137.00 3,479.80 over roof 135.00 3,429.00 WHEEL -BASE in mm Center front axle to center drive axle 318.00 8,077.20 Center drive axle to center trailing axle 48.00 1,219.20 OVERHANG in mm Front body 74.50 1,892.30 Over front bumper 75.90 1,927.86 Rear body 149.41 3,795.01 Over rear bumper with rubber cushion pad 153.13 3,889.50 Over optional rear help bumper 154.13 3,914.90 [Type text] [Type text] TRACK Front Driving (center of duals) Trailing TURNING RADIUS (With locked Tag axle) Front tire: right-hand turn left-hand turn Front bumper: right-hand turn left-hand turn Steering wheel turns, lock -to -lock Turning angle: right-hand or left-hand in mm 85.60 2,174.24 76.50 1,943.10 85.60 2,174.24 Win m 45' 8' 13.93 45'&' 13.93 50' 8" 15.4 50' 10" 15.5 6 360 - Outer, 420 - Inner BUMPER CLEARANCE III in mm Ground to center line: front (apex) 22.25 565.15 rear 24.00 609.60 GROUND CLEARANCE in mm Ground to body at center 10.00 254.00 Approach angle 9.50 Departure angle 'v 8.20 Breakover angle ENTRANCE STEP HEIGHT in mm Ground to first step: coach in normal operating 15.50 :393.70 position coach in kneeled position 12.50 317.50 FLOOR HEIGHT FROM GROUND (at axle) in mm Front (first row of seats only) 51.00 1,295.40 Rear 54.00 1,371.60 HEADROOM in mm Aisle to ceiling: front (at front of first seat) 87.25 2,216.15 rear 78.25 1,987.55 Floor to parcel front (at front of first seat) 63.62 1,615.95 rack: front(at rear of first seat) 60.56 1,538.22 rear 60.56 1,538.22 [Type text [Type text] PASSENGER, SIDE WINDOW ELEVATION in mm Floor surface to glass Top (front of first seat) 63.80 1,620.52 line: Bottom (front of first seat) 31.62 803.15 Top (remainder of coach) 60.80 1,544.32 Bottom (remainder of coach) 28.62 726.95 ENTRANCE DOOR in mm Clear opening width (at door frame) 27.00 685.80 Height of clear opening 84.63 2,149.60 EMERGENCY ESCAPE ROOF HATCHES in mm Length of opening, each 22.75 578.60 Width of opening, each 22.75 578.60 Total Clear Opening Area 518.00 int 3,342.00 cm2 center of front hatch to front bumper 89.50 2,273.30 center of rear hatch to center of front hatch 289.87 7,362.70 AISLE Center aisle ramps Width, between seats in mm 14.5 x 96.0 x 9.0 368 x 2,438 x 229 14.00 355.60 VEHICLE WEIGHT V1 lbs kg Net basic 37,700 17,100 Payload capacity 10,300 4,672 Gross vehicle weight 48,000 21,772 Gross vehicle weight — After January, 2009 50,000 22,678 text] [Type text] 3 - CAPACITIES NOTES: The following notes are applicable where indicated, all dimensions provided are nominal: VII. Volume provided excludes the provision of the following: • Kneeling system control module • ATEC, DDEC junction box • 110 -volt inverter (option) Wheelchair lift control module (option) • ABS control box (option) VII. Volumes exclude provision of parcel rack mounted air conditioning, wheelchair lift, and audio/video options. Total volume and curbside parcel rack volume are reduced nominally 5.80 ft3 (0.16 m') when the optional wheelchair lift is installed BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT VOLUME (underfloor) "il M3 Front 127.00 3.59 Center 116.00 3.28 Rear 157.00 4.44 Total Volume 400.00 11.31 PARCEL RACK COMPARTMENT VOLUME Vile ft3 m3 Road -side 57.62 1.63 Curb -side: with lavatory (basic) 51.38 1.45 without lavatory (optional) 57.62 1.63 Total Volume with Lavatory V1° 109.00 3.08 LAVATORY TANK CAPACITY US gal L Lavatory Chemical Tank 18.5 70.0 WINDSHIELD WASHER US gal L Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir 3.9 15.0 1C. t [Type text] AIR COMPRESSOR RESERVOIR CAPACITY Ina Cm3 Wet Tank 2,059 33,747 Front Brake Service Dry Tank 2,059 33,747 Rear Brake Service Dry Tank 2,059 33,747 Parking Brake Release Tank 2,059 33,747 Accessory Air Tank 1,180 19,340 ENGINE US gal L Engine Cooling System (with surge tank and coolant recovery) 29.5 111.7 Engine Lubricating Oil — Total Capacity S-60— 9.5 36.0 C-13 —10.6 40.0 ISM —10.3 39.0 FUEL TANK CAPACITIES US gal L Aluminum Tank Main Tank Fuel Capacity — Total Volume 192.0 727.0 Useable Volume — 95% of total volume 182.0 689.0 Polyethylene Tank (after January 5, 2009) Main Tank Fuel Capacity — Total Volume 173.0 655.0 Useable Volume — 95% of total volume 164.0 621.0 TRANSMISSION OIL CAPACITY US gal L ZF-ASTronic Model 12 AS 2301 3.2 12.0 ALLISON B500 Gen IV — No Retarder (reference only) Initial fill — factory (excluding external circuits) 10.75 41.0 AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT CAPACITY lbs kg R 134a 37.0 16.8 [Type text] [Type text] 4 - DIAGRAMS Body, Door Clearance & Major Dimensions Diagram s• - 21.00 in. (533 mm)y 36.00 in. 1l\i rc 1-74*- '�I (914 mm) Baggage Bay Door cc C12 Battery Compartment Service Door 102.00 in. 102.00 in. 591 ft.) (2.59m} (2581 mm) REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW 13" 34.54 in. (877 mm) ar Front Roof Hatch Rear Roof Hatch Height From � Roof line �� S� I, to Ground +� 11 29 ft 38 in (11.8 m) (3.44 m) � _ • 9.5:-- �� ROADSIDE VIEW 31.25 in 26.5 ft. (8.1 m) 48.00 in. (794 mm) (1219 mm) i— 6.2 ft. (1.89 m) 45.3 ft. (13.8 m) 24.15 ft. Distance Between Hatch Centers --► (7.36 m) Height From Top of Roof Hatch to Ground (3.48 m) k kk • l 125 ft. (3.80 m) 12.8 ft. (3.89 m) 10-00 in. Ji CURBSIDE VIEW + NOTE: All vertical dimensions are at normal ride height. Optional Wheelchair Lift is shown for reference. 7.50 ft. (2.28 m) 38.50 in. (978 mm) 828 in. (413 mm) 13.50 in. {343 mm) r 27.00 in. (686 mm) ,. 6.2 ft. (1-89 m) [Type text] Turning Radius and Door Clearance Diagram 74.25" (1885 mm) FRONT OVERHANG (Over Bumper) 318" (8077 mm) WHEELBASE 45' 5" (13.85 m) Overall text -- 115_66- 2175 mm TRACK Turning Radius Configurations 48.0" 1 1219 mm 153.13" 50.63 ft. (15.43 m) RH Turn (3889 mm) 50.84 ft. (15.49 m) LH Turn REAR OVERHANG (Over Bumper) TAG AXLE text -- 115_66- 2175 mm TRACK Turning Radius Configurations BASIC CONFIGURATION With Locked Tag Axle 50.63 ft. (15.43 m) RH Turn 50.84 ft. (15.49 m) LH Turn OPTIONAL CONFIGURATION With Steering Tag Axle 47.88 ft. (14.59 m) RH Turn 47.90 ft. (14.60 m) LH Turn 1 36' 42' 917 1917 mm SPINDLE STEERING ANGLES INTERSECTION COACH CENTERLINE 76.5' 1943 rnm —+ TRACK I �— 85.66" w! 2175 mm TRACK 102" 2590 mitt Overall DRIVE AXLE TAG AXLE CENTER REAR DRIVE AXLE CENTER 18 in. (457 mm) THEORETICAL TURNING CENTER D4505 - Steering Angle & Turning Radius Maintenance Manual GENERAL DESCRIPTION The bi-part entrance door has two door leaf panels that move out and away from each other as the door opens, providing a 27 x 83 In. (609.6 x 2108 mm) open- ing. The door is operated pneumatically. Two air cylin- ders move the door leaf panels. The door is electroni- cally controlled. Vertical shaft assemblies are installed at each side of the door opening. Each shaft is attached to a door leaf panel and to an air cylinder that rotates the shaft. Shaft rotation opens and closes the doors. A toggle switch on the control panel actuates the air cylinders. The shaft bearings and linkages are contained in a bearing box assembly below the stepwell. Components Bi -Part Door Leaf Panels The door leaf panels are attached to the rotary shaft assemblies. The door leaf panels have double - glazed tempered -glass windows and Lucite sashes. For safety, the meeting edges of the leaves incorporate wide flexible rubber cushions. BI -Part Door Bearing Box The bearing box assembly contains the lower sta- bilizing rod assembly. This rod connects the lever arms of each shaft assembly to help coordinate movement between both door leaf panels. The box provides front and rear cut-outs for actuating shaft bearing mount- ings. Solenoid Valve A four-way, two -position, 24 volt, dual solenoid valve controls the flow of air to the cylinder ports. One valve portion is normally -open, while the other is nor- mally -closed. The valve is located in the pocket below the RH dash. Date October 2011 Page 3131-3 Bi -Part Door Shaft Assemblies The vertical shaft assemblies are installed at each side of the door opening. The shaft rotates in bearing blocks attached to the coach body, and on bearing as- semblies mounted on the bearing box. The control arm assembly is attached to the bottom arm of each shaft assembly to assure unison in movement. A stabilizing tube assembly is attached to the top bearing block arm and door leaf panels to retain the glide path. Bi -Part Door Air Cylinders Door actuation is provided by two dual acting air cylinders. The air cylinders are attached to each of the actuating shafts by control arms. The front leaf's cylin- der is located in the pocket below the RH dash. The rear leaf's cylinder is located in the pocket below the modesty panel. The extend position closes the door and the retract position opens the door. Door Switches The momentary -on type door switches are located on the right-hand switch panel and adjacent the kneel switch in the exterior switch pocket. The exterior switch must be in the open position in order for the interior switch to open and close the doors. Operation With the interior door control switch closed, the four-way solenoid valve is energized. The normally - open portion closes supply air to the retract ports of the air cylinders. The normally -closed portion opens supply air to the extend ports of the cylinders. Simultaneously, air is allowed to exhaust from retract ports of the cylin- ders. The extended cylinders push the shaft arms out- ward, and cause the shaft to rotate. The rotating shafts pulls the door arms in, moving the door leaf panels in- ward and toward each other at entrance opening cen- ter. Copyright 2011 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-15-9323 Date October 2011 Page 3131-4 1 Maintenance Manual Figure 1. Bi -Part door Pneumatic Diagram Item Description 4 -Way Valve 1 2 Air Supply 3 Air Dump Valve 4 Air Exhaust 5 Front Air Cylinder 6 Rear Air Cylinder When the switch is open, the solenoid valve is de - energized. The normally -open portion opens supply air to the retract ports of the air cylinders, and the normal- ly -closed portion closes supply to the extend ports of the air cylinders allowing air to exhaust from the extend ports of the cylinders. The retracted cylinders pull the shaft arms inward, cause the shaft to rotate, pushing the door arms out and move the door leaf panels out- ward and away from each other. Supply air is routed through the manual dump valve. In emergencies, the valve exhausts air from the door operating cylinder, and allows manual opening of the doors. MAINTENANCE Adjustments NOTICE After performing any of the following adjustments, lubricate all bearing and pivots with Multi -Purpose Grease (lubrication specification S-16 through S-19). Wipe excess grease from all components. After lubrication, manually move shafts and linkage through full travel. Check for smooth movement without any binding. Action should be stiff but not excessively hard to move manually. Shaft Bearing Blocks Check fore and aft dimension between shaft cen- ters. Remove shims between brackets and spacers if short. Add shim pack to the underside of standard spacer if long. Ensure that both brackets are shimmed equally. NOTICE Doors should open to a clear opening of approximately 27 in. (609.6 mm). 1. Turn disconnect switch OFF. Actuate the door manual air dump valve. 2. Loosen the bearing block mountings. Install or remove shims as required. 3. Tighten the bearing block mountings. Re- check dimensions. Copyright 2011 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-15-9323 Maintenance Manual Shaft Bumper Stops Shaft Arm Rod Ends 7 n 3 Figure 2. Shaft Bumper Stops Item Description I Rubber Bumper 2 Jam Nut 3 Shaft Arm 1. Turn disconnect switch OFF, and actuate the door's manual air dump valve. 2. Unfasten jamnut and adjust rubber bumper stops on both shafts to 5/8 in. (15.875 mm) 3. Tighten jamnut to lock bumper in position. Date October 2011 Page 3131-5 NOTICE This adjustment Is critical in attaining correct door operation. 2 � 1 t 3 f Figure 3. Shaft Arm Rod Ends Item Description 1 Socket Assembly 2 1-1/2 in. Top and Bottom Arm 3 Jam Nut Copyright 2011 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. PIN 03-15-9323 Date October 2011 Page 3D1-6 Maintenance Manual SID i 5 I Figure 4. Bi -Part Entrance Door Control Mechanism Item Description 1 Solenoid Valve 2 Air Cylinder 3 Shaft 4 Upper Hinge Cover 5 Steering Arm 6 Timing Link 7 Bearing 8 Shaft Seal Boot 9 Bearing Block 10 Front Of Coach Copyright 2011 — Motor Coach Industries int'l, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-15-9323 Maintenance Manual Check rod end stick -out, and adjust for minimum door movement. 1. Turn disconnect switch OFF. Actuate the door's manual air dump valve. 2. Loosen jamnut and adjust rod ends on both shaft arms to 1-1/2 in. (38.1 mm). 3. Tighten jamnut to lock the rod end in posi- tion. Door Leaf Panel Removal NOTICE The removal procedure may require two technicians. 1, Turn battery disconnect switch OFF 2. Actuate the entrance door switch to open doors, and dump all air via the manual over- ride dump valve. 3. Unfasten and remove the top shaft arm cov- ers. 4. Unfasten the upper front and rear door leaf panel -to -shaft arm mounting bracket cap - screws. 5. Unfasten the lower door leaf panel -to -shaft arm mounting bracket capscrews and re- move the doors. Door Control Mechanism Removal 1. Turn battery disconnect switch OFF. 2. Actuate the entrance door switch to open doors. Dump all air via the manual override dump valve. 3. Remove the air cylinder access panels. 4. Remove the bearing box access panel. 5. Remove the front and rear control arm clamp bolts. Remove clamps and control arm assembly from the shafts. 6. Loosen stop collar set -screws. Remove col- lars from bottom of shafts. 7. Remove bottom bearing assemblies from bearing box studs and slide rubber boot off shafts. 8. Remove the top shaft locknut retaining the upper shaft bearing block. Date October 2011 Page 3131-7 9. Remove the upper stabilizer tube assem- blies from upper shaft bearing block mount- ing arm. Remove the upper bearing block. 10. Remove the lower bearing block from shafts. 11. Rotate shafts to the air cylinder extend posi- tions. Loosen cylinder rod ends from shaft arms. 12. Lift shafts with brackets out of bottom bear- ing assemblies and remove for disassembly. 13. Tag and disconnect all air line to the air cyl- inders. 14. Remove the air cylinders from their mount- ings. Door Leaf Panel Installation Reinstall the door controls and door leaf panels in reverse order of Door Leaf Panel Removal. Check door adjustments after installation is complete (see Door Leaf Panel Opera- tional Check). NOTICE Install air cylinder rod assemblies with lubrication Wings facing stepwell. NOTICE Check position of upper and lower hanger brackets on each door leaf. Ensure that brackets are positioned correctly. Door Leaf Panel Operational Check 1. Move both door panels manually through full open and closed positions. Check for interference between front door panel and body panels, right-hand exterior rear view mirror, etc. 2. Move door panels to closed position. Check for door to body clearances. 3. Place battery switch in ON position. Place manual air valve at driver's position to air ON position. 4. Check both the interior and exterior opera- tor's door control switch to cycle door from both positions. Copyright 2011 — Motor Coach Industries Int'l, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-15-9323 Date October 2011 Page 3D1-8 Maintenance Manual NOTICE To check door operation, the coach air system should have a minimum of 85 psi (586 kPa). 5. With air on and door closed, ensure the fol- lowing: a. A proper seal exists between both door panels. Condition too hiah or Door panel on angle. b. Clearance between doors and body is 1/4 in. (6.35 mm) minimum from top to bottom. At top of doors, clear- ance should be 1/8 in. (3.175 mm). If these clearances are not correct, re- fer to TROUBLESHOOTING. C. Inner feather body seal fits snug to sides and top of doors. d. Door panel contours follow contour of coach body from top to bottom. TROUBLESHOOTING B€ -Part Door Door control arms binding. (Center of control arms should move up and down slightly with doors fully closed.) Insufficient travel of shaft and arm. Too much travel of shaft and arm. Insufficient tens€on at the top of the door. Insufficient tension at the bottom of the door. Correction Loosen capscrews in upper and lower hanger brackets. Move door panel up or down as required. Tighten capscrew in brackets. _ Loosen capscrews in top or bottom bracket. Move door panel in direction required to correct clearance between door and body. Release air with the air dump valve. Disconnect one rod end from the end of the tight arm, close doors manually, and reapply air. With doors closed, adjust rod end until it can be easily reinstalled. Replace and tighten nut. Loosen jamnuts on master cylinder linkage rod. Turn rod required number of turns to increase length of rod. Tighten jamnuts. Loosen jamnuts on master cylinder linkage rod. Turn rod required number of turns to decrease length of rod. Tighten jamnuts. Loosen the locknut at the outer end of the lower arm and screw bolt out until pressure is equalized from top to bottom. Retighten the locknut. Loosen the locknut at the outer end of the lower arm and screw bolt in until pressure is equalized from top to bottom. Retighten the locknut. Copyright 2011 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-15-9323 - IC'�, •1 1 �� ,_, �� �QIaS+� ' I�E� � E � �� Ig�'R� ! r as g � � � - � � zto 3 ,� � �� i�r'1� IIr sg - tl■ '961-EI-11 �- +{^+ -_�_ •rr� ': En -v 'y 1 1 X X= a r- I M I 1 1• - 6F10->I -lL N 1 1 { 1 I l e-^+ I I I 1 1-• 1 1 1• f - �� F ZSZf-EI-1G R11 1111 IZSS^-�1 t l^ l^-I I - 3 >NUI•H-!e - 1 I 1 1 1 - f 1 - - 111 � � - ��z - L.I r� LSg o a3a� R N o f . o � i a _ u = I i 0 O � � i u o m i`zow ¢IW °�¢w w zo-z a o< N Wo Qo m mw¢< rz FN mz < .1- Z o NZ ° am Na jw < ol IM , °Lam z oo No m. `z o ~o°¢ <J l ° o °m o wuwi <o 0o J Kiwi S r2 I¢ o> rcrc z Wo W °JR 1w To we 01 1. <TNN = <1 < Jo_ W wam O NF f" ,Qh t Ld It N U CO to CO I� Z 3 N. u uy oz � Elo 11, 1 t J iW N I �I J 'E a CFR F Z z [ Raa ^cu H n 1! Sl -y WLn < Jo_ W wam O NF f" r fT^C4�. ! LI T C L LU LU l J ¢ N 1. O ro w<00 ~ _ _0 Ow O UI�� OP N¢�2IW:-m¢W ~O D2 Sow<¢ • OW NO Nw.R<3.FZOJ N JN OmZOQQU Do, WW w. a NSDzz W.— w olio- S W>~ I.- �oz' WWZ=ow -o< JJ O 6.13;,O ~Z❑ Qof` ¢<ma`002 Ff0 NZ T zio d;w�tl1D- - s ol-lo Zf- O- U ❑pI UE aRI 2 o -v oW WI��RQDQWOZw OJ- 2F zo❑rc NJ❑ro3 .1ca�N Nim ¢3 NQNWNQOEUa"UQ OOJW OR-< ~oWJ❑32¢ QW so O NO J Z <WQW-� O•J WQ w- wo- OWZWawI mooZU ❑�O N wIa« o<os Q `zl�¢ 'zi N wNJ~ <a-<w.,-oQW,- U1W< zu oo z¢o �s�nw�w¢-� ANN -F z z ¢ o�aw¢ ¢wJwzs OZ❑❑ —wywwm U - ZUO ON OZ --ow a¢•-2ti tim -`2 - c2ZN - Z<c �N N3 —w NZo¢wO<J~W3N❑ IWfiO< N~ 2Q "WNWol¢< OW HO U 2'216-IIIZO WW IQ �?WW ~N 00QwNJmZN �a0 NN 1.s2Fs O�~<Z20DZgo UIP Ow wl --N-N-2<NW rwZ W OJJ f30 N<�UdUN«Elafid� 3Ua [J9� oz 11 owl 7 n :7 1 Ll Reliability Driven" ATTACHMENT F VEHICLE AND AXLE WEIGHTS Reliability Driven VEHICLE CURB WEIGHT AND GVWR LBS CURB WEIGHT 39,700 GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT 50,000 FRONT AXLE 16,000 DRIVE AXLE 22,500 TRAILING AXLE 14,000 Reliability Driven" ATTACHMENT G WINDOWS Reliability Drivers" WINDOWS WINDSHIELD The windshield shall be designed an installed to minimize external glare as well as reflections from inside the coach. When the coach is operated at night with the passenger interior lighting on, essentially no reflections shall be visible in the windshield immediately forward of the driver's barrier. Reflections in the remainder of the windshield shall be minimized, and no reflection of any part of the coach interior behind the driver's barrier shall be visible in the windshield. The windshield shall be easily replaceable by removing zip -locks from the windshield retaining moldings. Bonded windshields shall not be used. The glazing material shall have single density tint. DRIVER'S SIDE WINDOW The driver's side window section shall be divided vertically and the rearward section shall slide fore and aft in tracks or channels designed to last the service life of the coach. The driver's side window shall not be bonded in place and shall be easily replaceable. The glazing material shall be nominal 0.25 inch (6 mm) laminated, tempered glass with single density tint, the same as the windshield. The side window shall be rated AS -2. PASSENGER SIDE WINDOWS Eight large frameless rectangular passenger side windows shall be provided on each side of the 45 foot coaches. The glazed panel outside dimension size will be 36.125 x 57.625 inch (918 x 1466.5 mm) x .188 -inch (4.76 -mm) thick. The windows will have a nominal 32 x 52 -inch (813- x 1,321 -mm) clear opening within the inner support frame structure. The side passenger windows will be double -glazed construction, hermetically sealed, AS -3 laminated float, 76% heat -absorbing laminated safety glass with light and solar transmittance of 24%. A painted aluminum sash molding will be installed along the bottom length of the passenger side windows. All windows shall be top hinged with push out at the bottom, with the exception of the wheelchair lift door and lavatory windows which do not open. All top -hinged windows shall be emergency escape type and include a single motion release bar running the entire width of the window at the lower edge to permit emergency egress. Emergency operating instructions shall be provided at each seat position for operating the push -out window. Date September 2013 IlMiliIIIIIIII Reliability Driveri D Series Maintenance Manual Page 3E2-3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Figure 1. Front Windshields The coaches are fitted with extra large LH and RH front windshield. The driver's side sash and passenger sash are installed along the sidewalls of the coach. En- trance door upper and lower window glazings are also incorporated. Passenger driver's and upper entrance door sash have black anodized aluminum frames. Components Windshield The LH/RH AS -1 laminated safety glass windshield halves are identical, with the exception of tinting. The windshield is laced to a flange around the openings by means of a one-piece black rubber extrusion and rub- ber locking strips. Driver's Window 2 11291 Figure 2. Driver's Window Item Description I Black Anodized Aluminum Frame 2 Slider Glass The driver's double or single -glazed side window is mounted to the sidewall opening by an inner retaining frame. This window incorporates a slider -type window section at the lower front corner for tolls, signaling, or mirror adjustment. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Pae 3E2-4 D Series Maintenance Manual Page Reliability Driven" Entrance Door Sash & Transom r. 2. k�A. a , 4' 10611 Figure 3. Entrance Door Item Description 1 Transom 2 Upper Sash 3 Entrance Door 4 Lower Sash The entrance door, double -glazed upper sash, is mounted to the upper door panel by an inner retaining frame. The lower door panel has Lucite glazing. An up- per transom window is fitted above the door. Passenger Sash The passenger sash consists of double -glazed, fra- meless glass (the inner pane is laminated, the outer pane is tempered). Each window may be pushed out for emergency escape by lifting the release bar at the lower edge of the window to disengage the safety latches. Emergency operating instructions on metal plates are attached to the release bars at each seat lo- cation. Windows directly behind the sliding wheelchair door cannot be opened. NOTICE Emergency operating instructions on metal plates are attached to the release bars at each seat location. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 i D Series Maintenance Manual Page 3E2-5 Reliability Driven' Windshield Blind Assemblies 1= 3 i Figure 4. Windshield Blind Assemblies 3 44654 Item Description 1 Bracket 2 Guide Rod 3 Bottom Guide Rod Support Bracket 4 5 Motorized Blind Assembly Wiring Harness 6 Manual Blind Assembly w/Cord 7 Up/Down Blind Rocker Switch Assembly Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 3E2-6 MAINTENANCE Window Cleaning D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' Wash and rinse water must be free of solids. Recir- culating auto -washing systems must be properly de- signed, maintained, and monitored for efficiency. Brush pressure should be as low as possible. The coach should never be stopped while in contact with the brushes. Conventional techniques may be used to clean windows. Use a clean, soft, unsized cloth. Wet the sur- face with cleaning solution before wiping. To remove paint, ink marks, and graffiti that is re- sistant to cleaners, use a soft cloth saturated with iso- propanol or an aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Avoid using razor blades or oth- er sharp instruments that might gouge the surface. Windshield Inspection The following procedure has been provided to check windshield glass, windshield openings, and cen- ter post for proper curvatures. The windshields are installed into a flange around the opening and held in place with a one-piece rubber molding. Proper installation is necessary to reduce or pre- vent stress. Glass from different manufacturers may vary in size and shape. Check non -MCI windshields for proper size and curvature. The rubber seal allows for a 5/16 in. (8 mm) difference in windshield curvature. Windshield Curvature Inspection Place 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) spacers (rubber or wood) in the bottom of the windshield opening. Place windshield in the opening. There should be a 3/8 in. gap all the way around, between the windshield and the body chan- nel. The glass must be square in the open- ing. If there is not a 3/8 in. space around the glass, remove material from the body flange to obtain the proper clearance. If the glass is not square in the opening, place the other glass in its opening to be sure the openings have the same degree of distortion. 11292 Figure 5. Checking Windshield Curvature Item Description 1 Windshield Center Post Edge 2 Measure Midpoint Curvature 3 Cardboard 4 Chalkline 3. The center post should have the same bow as the curvature of the glass. This can be checked by carefully placing the glass (cen- ter post edge down) on a piece of card- board. With a chalk line, strike a line across from edge to edge on the cardboard. At the mid -point, measure the distance from the line to the glass. Both windshields should have the same bow. 11293 Figure 6. Checking the Bow of the Windshield Center Post Item Description 1 Chalkline 2 Measure Midpoint Curvature Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven- _ 4. Hold the line at the top of the post (interior of the coach) and pull tightly to the bottom of the post (at the same points that the glass reaches). At several midway points, mea- sure the distance from the line to the post. 5. If the measurements are the same, replace the rubber. If the measurements are differ- ent, reshape the post to fit the glass. The post can be corrected by placing a solid wood block against the center of the post (inside or out) and using a heavy sledge hammer, striking the block to form the bow. NOTICE If all of the above checks and corrective actions have been taken, and it appears that the windshield(s) cannot be installed properly, further recommendations can be obtained from the MCI Service Control Center. Wheelchair Access Door Frameless Window Inspection 10816 Figure 7. Frameless Window Apply moderate pressure to each of the 4 interior corners of the glass. Ensure that the wheelchair access door fra- meless window installation is secure. ACAUTION Date September 2013 Page 3E2-7 If any section of the wheelchair door window shows any movement, contact MCI Service Center immediately at 1-500-241-2947 for further instructions. Failure to follow this procedure may result in damage or loss of the window. 3. If window is secure, it must be inspected on a regular basis. Refer to Section 10 for in- tervals. Glass Removal and Installation Windshield Removal and Installation Proper installation of the windshield is necessary to reduce or prevent stress during coach operation. Since glass from manufacturer to manufacturer may vary in size and shape, windshields from a source other than MCI should be checked for proper size and curvature using the Windshield Curvature Inspection proce- dure. Read the entire procedure before starting. Windshield removal and installation must be performed by more than one person. To avoid personal injury, wear protective gloves when handling the windshield or windscreen glass. NOTICE The tear -resistant windshield rubber seal (fence) allows for a maximum 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) difference in windshield curvature. Remove the windshield wiper arm(s) and blade(s). Remove the fascia molding to expose the lower windshield rubber seal. NOTICE Locking strips need to be removed from only around the windshield, unless there have been repeated problems with stress cracking the windshield(s). Then both the right-hand and left- hand windshields and the windscreen must be removed. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 3E2-8 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven 3. Remove the rubber locking strips from the bottom, side, center post, and across the top of the windshield. 4. From inside the coach, one person should push out at the top of the windshield, until clear of the seal. A person on the outside then lifts the windshield up and out of the bottom of the windshield seal. NOTICE Before proceeding with the installation of a new windshield glass, especially after a front end collision has occurred, it is recommended that the Windshield Curvature Inspection procedure be reviewed. If the opening(s) have at least a 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) gap all around square with the glass edges and the bow of the post is the same as the new glass's curve as checked, then proceed. 5. If collision damage has occurred, remove the seal and make an inspection. Gently clean and inspect all surfaces of the opening before reinstalling the rubber seal material. 6. Soak rubber seal (fence) in warm soapy wa- ter and reinstall into the opening. 7. When driving the rubber onto the center post, support the post from the opposite side to prevent changing the shape of the post. 8. Be sure the rubber seats onto the center post. All the grooves should be seated in the U -channel. 9. Using a liquid lanolin hand soap, lubricate the groove and install the glass into the rub- ber seal. 10. Carefully place the glass, bottom first, into the rubber seal groove. With the windshield installed, check to see if the lacing tool will slide through the lacing channel. If the lac- ing tool binds, shift the windshield until it does not bind. NOTICE Do not use Glass Slip. Glass Slip will swell and soften windshield rubber. Place 2 in. (50.8 mm) pieces of locking strip in the bottom center and both bottom corners. Place 2 in. pieces in the center of both sides. These strips will keep the glass centered as it is installed. 11. Lubricate the groove in which the locking strip sits to help the lacing tool move through the groove. Do not stretch the lock- ing strip. NOTICE In extreme cases, the upper windscreen glass may need to be removed in order for the windshield to be properly reinstalled. If the top LH and RH corners of windshield glass bind at installation, grind the bottom of the windscreen glass to allow for needed clearance. Destination Sign Removal 1. Turn main battery disconnect switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cables from sign. 3. Unfasten bracket -to -sign mounting hard- ware and free sign from front upper frame mountings. 4. Push the sign forward and maneuver one end out through the sign access door. Driver's Window Frame Removal and Installation Remove all screws from the interior retaining frame. Gently pry mounting frame out of opening with proper tools. NOTICE Further disassembly of the window frame may be necessary to replace slider units. 3. Reinstall in reverse order. 4. Install seal to outer skin panel. Press the seal into place in an alternating pattern, starting at diagonally opposed corners. En- sure seal is properly mounted against outer skin panel to prevent leakage. Driver's Window Glass Removal and Installation 1. Find the spot where the two ends of the retaining rubber meet and pry one end out. 2. Pull inner rubber retainer away from glass unit. 3. Loosen the glass unit from the outer rubber seal and remove the glass. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 3E2-9 Reliability Driven- _ 4. Soak retainer rubber in warm soapy water and install glass in reverse order. Use rub- ber mallet as necessary. Entrance Door Upper Sash Removal and Installation 1. Remove the inner screw covering rubber. 2. Remove the screws retaining the inner frame to the outer locking frame and re- move. 3. Remove the outer locking frame with glass unit. 4. Reinstall sash frame and window in reverse order. Ensure proper placement of seal to outer door panel to prevent leakage. Entrance Door Lower Lucite Window Removal and Installation 1. Remove the inner door panel to access locking strip. 2. Removing locking strip from inner rubber seal. 3. Gently push window out of rubber seal to- ward inside of coach. 4. Install window into seal rubber. 5. Lubricate locking strip groove and reinstall strip. 6. Reinstall panel in reverse order. Entrance Door Transom Window Removal and Installation 1. Insert small flat -bladed tool into outer locking seal and gently work locking seal apart all around window. 2. Unfold the locking rubber seal to remove window. 3. Install window into seal -and refold the lock- ing rubber seal. 4. Apply warm soapy water to the locking rub- ber and reseal using rubber mallet. Passenger Side Sash Frame Removal and Installation } Passenger sash frame removals and installations must be performed by more than one person. 1. Remove all screws from the interior retaining frame. 2. Gently pry mounting frame out of opening with egress frame attached. 3. Reinstall sash frame in reverse order. En- sure proper placement of seal to outer skin panel to prevent leakage. Passenger Side Sash Egress Frame Removal and Installation 1. Remove the screws and retainer clips from the hinges. 2. Swing the window out far enough to disen- gage the frame extrusions and remove. 3. Reinstall in reverse order. Passenger Side Sash Glass Removal and Installation 1. Find the spot where the two ends of the retaining rubber meet and pry one end out. 2. Pull inner rubber retainer away from glass unit. 3. Loosen the glass unit from the outer rubber seal and remove the glass. 4. Soak retainer rubber in warm soapy water and reinstall glass in reverse order. NOTICE All side window glass units on a given coach are Interchangeable with one another. Single and double -glazed glass use different interior retaining rubber seals. Passenger Side Sash Egress Release Bar Removal and Installation 1. Drill out rivets attaching release bar to egress frame hinge assemblies. 2. Mount new release bar to hinge and rivet to- gether. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 3E2-10 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" SPECIFICATIONS DRIVER'S WINDOW ASSEMBLY Manufacturer.............................................................................................................................................Atwood Mobile PASSENGER SASH ASSEMBLY Manufacturer............................................................................................................................................. Atwood Mobile SERVICE TOOLS SOME OF THE TOOLS USED FOR MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION ARE NONSTANDARD. THEY ARE, HOWEVER, AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE THROUGH MCI SERVICE PARTS. WHERE PRACTICAL, THEY MAY BE FABRICATED AT THE SERVICE FACILITY. 20 - NPN1703: Lacing Tool, 9/16 -in. Eye Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 I� Reliability Driven'" ATTACHMENT H AXLE INFORMATION Reliability Driven- VEHICLE riven VEHICLE CURB WEIGHT AND GVWR LBS CURB WEIGHT 39,700 GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT 50,000 FRONT AXLE 16,000 DRIVE AXLE 22,500 TRAILING AXLE 14,000 Date September 2013 Reliability Driven" D Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-1 SECTION 1A FRONT AXLE CONTENTS OF THIS SECTION SUBJECT PAGE GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................. 1A-4 Components..................................................... 1A-4 PartsCleaning ................................................... 1A-5 Inspections and Measurements ..................................... 1A-5 Steering Knuckle ................................................. 1A-5 Installation...................................................... 1A-14 Adjusting the Toe -In .............................................. 1A-14 Removing the Tie Rod Assembly .................................... 1A-15 Corrosion Protection for New Parts .................................. 1A-16 Unitized Wheel End (UWE) Inspection ................................ 1A-16 Lubrication......................................................1A-17 Adjustments.....................................................1A-18 Alignment.......................................................1A-19 TROUBLESHOOTING................................................ 1 A-22 SPECIFICATIONS................................................... 1A-22 TORQUECHART .................................................... 1 A-23 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date Page September 2013 1A-2 D Series Maintenance Manual ReliabilityDriveri THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliability Driven - 43634 Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-3 Figure 1. Front Axle Assembly with Disc Brakes 43634 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 1 A-4 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven - GENERAL DESCRIPTION NOTICE Generic illustrations used in this section show maintenance procedures for axle components; other components are representational, and may differ from actual configuration. The D series coach uses the Meritor Easy Steer type front axle assembly. This section addresses the general and specific maintenance requirements for the front axle steering related components. Front end alignment specifica- tions and procedures are included in this section. Refer to applicable sections of this maintenance manual for information on brake assemblies, hubs, and other wheel end components. FH 941 EX 2 25 1 2 3 42144 Figure 2. Axle Identification Plate Item Description 1 Axle Model Number 2 Brake Type 3 Variation Components The front axle assembly is complete with steering arm, tie rod assembly, brake assembly, hubs, discs, wheel end bearings, and bearing/bushing seal compo- nents. Axle The front axle is a forged steel, reversed Elliott style, straight -axle design. Front axles have nonadjust- able zero (neutral) camber, caster, and knuckle pin in- clination angles. Do not repair the axle beam or knuckles. These components are heat-treated and tempered. Failure to replace damaged or out -of - specification components is unsafe and voids the warranty. Always wear eye protection when performing vehicle maintenance or service. Do not weld any steering or axle components. Do not bend knuckles or any steering or axle components. Do not drill out the king pin holes. Do not drill out draw key holes. Do not spray weld bearing or bores. Always follow manufacturer's instructions when using cleaning solvents, hot solution tanks, and alkaline solutions. Do not use gasoline to clean parts: gasoline can explode. Do not attempt straightening of the axle. Any manipulation of or alteration to the axle could severely affect load rating and drive ability. Tie Rod Assembly The tie rod assembly connects the steering knuck- les through tie rod mounting arms, threaded tie rod ends, and clamps which provide and maintain correct axle steering geometry. The tie rod assembly has a center section and sealed replaceable ends. Adjust- ments to toe -in are made by turning the center section of the tie rod assembly. Steering Knuckles Steering knuckles are attached to the axle ends with straight king pins and retained by a set of draw keys. Knuckles are fitted with special king pin bush- ings. King pin bushing covers, spacers, and seals pre- vent dust and moisture from entering bushings. Stop screws installed on each knuckle assembly limit turning angle of the front wheels. Knuckles mount all steering and wheel end components (i.e., tie rod arms, drag link steering arm, brakes, hubs, bearings). Steering knuck- le spindles are tapered and are equipped with the Unit- ized Wheel End (UWE) and Pro -Torg® nut. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliabilen D Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-5 Parts Cleaning Axle Inspection Cleaning Ground or Polished Parts Periodically inspect all mounting fasteners to as- sure proper torques as listed in the specification at the Use cleaning solvent to clean ground or polished end of this and other sections. Conduct visual axle in - parts and surfaces. Kerosene and diesel fuel can be spections to check for any obvious damage, distortion, used for this purpose. Do not use gasoline. of fatigue cracks. Cleaning Rough Parts Rough parts can be cleaned with the same sol- vents as ground and polished parts. Rough parts can also be cleaned in hot solution tanks with weak alkaline solution. The parts must stay in the hot solution tanks until they are completely cleaned and heated. Drying Cleaned Parts Parts must be dried immediately after cleaning. Dry the parts with clean paper towels, rags, or compressed air. Do not dry bearings with compressed air. Corrosion Prevention on Cleaned Parts Apply light oil to undamaged, cleaned and dried parts that are to be assembled immediately. DO NOT apply oil to pads. If parts are to be stored, apply a cor- rosion inhibitor to all surfaces. Do not apply corrosion inhibitor to pads. Store parts in paper or other corro- sion -preventive material. NOTICE Ensure that all tapered parts are clean and dry, with no lubricant or corrosion preventive applied to mating surfaces. Inspections and Measurements General and Routine Inspections (Refer to Section 10 for intervals.) 1. Replace worn or damaged fasteners. 2. Ensure that all fasteners are tightened to correct specifications. (See TORQUE CHART in this section.) 3. Inspect the axle and axle parts for wear or damage. 4. Check for any bent or cracked parts. 5. Inspect the tires for wear patterns that indi- cate suspension damage or misalignment. 6. Replace all worn or damaged parts. 7. Ensure there is no excessive play or binding in any pivot point. Any damaged axles or axles with cracks should be immediately removed from service and replaced. NOTICE Magnetic particle (magnaflux) examinations or dye penetrant inspections can be performed to check for nonvisual cracks. Steering Knuckle Figure 3. Steering Knuckle Components Item Description 1 Spindle 2 Upper Draw Key 3 King Pin 4 King Pin Caps 5 Steering Arm 6 Axle 7 Lower Draw Key 8 Tie Rod 9 Tie Rod End Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. PIN 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 1 A-6 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' Steering knuckles, king pins, and bushings may be serviced or replaced without removing the axle from the coach. The axle to steering knuckle pivot joint utiliz- es straight knuckle king pins. NOTICE These measurements are made with the wheel bearings tightened on the spindle. bushings installed, the range of side-to-side tire move- ment should not exceed 0.01 (0.25 mm) maximum. End play is the free movement of the steering knuckle up and down along the axis of the king pin. Some end play is required to prevent binding of the knuckle while turning and to provide a passage for grease to purge during bushing lubrication. Excessive end play can cause interference between the king pin and end caps or retainers. Shims are used to limit the vertical movement of the knuckle with respect to the axle center and king pin. Carefully inspect shims, new or used, to be sure none are kinked, bent, or torn. Dis- card any that are damaged. Select a quantity of shims to obtain as little vertical end play as possible. FAIN -3 ;16 11 k 3 Wear gloves when holding shims. Shims have sharp edges. Inspection O Knuckle end play can be measured without hubs, brake spiders, wheels and tires during rebuild as out- lined in Procedure 1, or with the axle in service as in 10784 Procedure 2. Figure 4. Side -To -Side Tire Movements with New and Worn King Pin Bushings A. New Bushings B. Worn Bushings Item I Description 1 Max. Side-to-side i Movement 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) 2 Bushing 3 1 Tire 4 Max. Side -to -Side Tire I Movement 0.030 in. (0.762 mm) A loose steering linkage under normal steering loads is sufficient cause to immediately check all pivot points for wear. Special attention should also be given to the condition of the steering knuckle kin pins and bushings. The axle manufacturer recommends that the Easy Steer king pin bushings be replaced when the range of side-to-side tire movement reaches 0.030 in. (0.762 mm), or when the bushings are worn to a maxi- mum of 0.01 in (0.25 mm) on their diameter. With new NOTICE The use of shim gauges (feeler gauges) for measurement of clearance tolerances on steering knuckles is not recommended. These will not give an accurate reading of end play. Use only a dial indicator. Procedure 1 (Wheel and Tire Assembly Removed) Figure 5. Loosening Knuckle Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 17Uppowl I Iw LI bushings installed, the range of side-to-side tire move- ment should not exceed 0.01 (0.25 mm) maximum. End play is the free movement of the steering knuckle up and down along the axis of the king pin. Some end play is required to prevent binding of the knuckle while turning and to provide a passage for grease to purge during bushing lubrication. Excessive end play can cause interference between the king pin and end caps or retainers. Shims are used to limit the vertical movement of the knuckle with respect to the axle center and king pin. Carefully inspect shims, new or used, to be sure none are kinked, bent, or torn. Dis- card any that are damaged. Select a quantity of shims to obtain as little vertical end play as possible. FAIN -3 ;16 11 k 3 Wear gloves when holding shims. Shims have sharp edges. Inspection O Knuckle end play can be measured without hubs, brake spiders, wheels and tires during rebuild as out- lined in Procedure 1, or with the axle in service as in 10784 Procedure 2. Figure 4. Side -To -Side Tire Movements with New and Worn King Pin Bushings A. New Bushings B. Worn Bushings Item I Description 1 Max. Side-to-side i Movement 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) 2 Bushing 3 1 Tire 4 Max. Side -to -Side Tire I Movement 0.030 in. (0.762 mm) A loose steering linkage under normal steering loads is sufficient cause to immediately check all pivot points for wear. Special attention should also be given to the condition of the steering knuckle kin pins and bushings. The axle manufacturer recommends that the Easy Steer king pin bushings be replaced when the range of side-to-side tire movement reaches 0.030 in. (0.762 mm), or when the bushings are worn to a maxi- mum of 0.01 in (0.25 mm) on their diameter. With new NOTICE The use of shim gauges (feeler gauges) for measurement of clearance tolerances on steering knuckles is not recommended. These will not give an accurate reading of end play. Use only a dial indicator. Procedure 1 (Wheel and Tire Assembly Removed) Figure 5. Loosening Knuckle Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-7 Reli abildy Driven" With king pin caps removed, turn the knuckle to the straight -ahead position. Take a rubber mallet and repeatedly strike the top pin boss of the knuckle. This will shift all of the components down and remove grease layers so an accurate reading may be taken. NOTICE Attach the dial indicator with a C-clamp or magnetic base to the knuckle spindle such that the knuckle can be turned freely. Figure 6. Dial Indicator Setup Item Description 1 Diallndicator 2 Linkage 3 Magnetic Base 4 Spindle Place the dial indicator plunger on the ex- posed end of the king pin so that its line of action is approximately parallel to the king pin center line. Now, zero the dial indicator 42120 Figure 7. Measuring End Play Measure the knuckle clearance (end play) by using a suitable lever to lift the knuckle while observing the dial indicator. Make a note of the measurement. 42121 Figure 8. Lifting the Knuckle } When using a hydraulic jack, be sure the axle is supported by two jack stands. Raising the end in this manner may causes an axle supported only in the center to tip and fall, causing personal injury. NOTICE A small hydraulic jack under a block of wood can be used beneath the knuckle to provide the necessary lift. Keep lifting the knuckle until the dial indicator reading levels off. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 1 A-8 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" 4. Repeat steps 1-4 with the knuckle in the full right and left turn positions. This is nec- essary to ensure no binding or excessive play is present during turns. Procedure 2 (Wheel and Tire Assembly Installed) 1. Securely block vehicle to prevent rolling. 2. Place a jack under the axle beam as close as possible to the knuckle end being checked and jack the vehicle up until the tire is clear of the floor. NOTICE Attach a dial indicator to the axle beam with a C-clamp or magnetic base. 42122 Figure 9. Dial Indicator in Position 3. Place the dial indicator plunger on top of the knuckle pin cap or knuckle forging so that its line of action is approximately parallel to the king pin center line, and zero the dial indica- tor. 4. Measure the knuckle clearance (end play) by using a suitable lever to lift the knuckle while observing the dial indicator. Make a note of the measurement. NOTICE If binding exists or zero end play is measured anywhere in the full travel of the knuckle, remove shims as required to obtain end play of 0.001-0.025 in. (0.025-0.635 mm). After measuring knuckle clearance (end play) of over 0.025 in. (0.635 mm), add shims between upper king pin boss and axle center end, as required, to obtain an end play of 0.001-0.025 in. (0.025-0.635 mm) through full range of turn. Normal seating of the bearing, seal, and shims will increase the end play reading after a short time In service. Inservice axle end play may increase to a maximum of 0.065 in. (1.651 mm) at which time it will be necessary to re - shim end play back to 0.001-0.025 in. (0.025-0.635 mm). NOTICE If a reading over 0.065 in. (1.651 mm) is taken, remove the tire and king pin cap and remeasure as in first procedure. If the reading is still over 0.065 in. (1.651 mm), shim the knuckle to within the specifications. If one bushing requires replacement, replace both knuckle bushings. Axle Beam Inner Bore 3 4"___ 43 Figure 10. Axle Beam Inner Bore Measurement Item Description I 1 Micrometer and Telescoping Gauge 2 Axle 3 Measuring Point 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) from Bottom 4 Measuring Point 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) from Top Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven 1. With wheel assembly, tie rod assembly, and steering knuckles removed, measure the inner bore of the axle beam using an inside diameter caliper. 2. Due to surface rounding at the top and bot- tom of the beam (due to normal wear), mea- sure the axle beam bore at two specific depths: 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) below the top of the bore and 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) above the bottom of the bore and at four radial posi- tions. 3. Average the measurements. If the average exceeds the axle beam bore maximum di- ameter given in Axle Wear Limit Specifica- tions, the entire axle beam requires re- placement. 4. Inspect the tie rod arm taper for wear or damage as well as the hole for the taper in the knuckle. If the knuckle hole is worn or damaged, replace the knuckle and arm. If only the taper on the arm is damaged, re- place the arm. 5. If the king pin has worn through the bushing and into the knuckle, replace the knuckle. NOTICE If any part of the steering linkage is loose, check all the pivot points. Check the pivot points when the linkage is lubricated. 6. Make sure all steering linkage pivot points are tight. 7. Inspect the thrust bearing and seal for wear or damage. Replace any worn or damaged parts. Axle Wear Limit Specifications Maximum Diameter Knuckle Bore 1.922 in. (48.82 mm) Axle Beam Bore 1.798 in. (45.67 mm) King Pin Bushing Bore 1.795 in. (45.59 mm) King Pin Bushings Date September 2013 Page 1 A-9 T 2 3 42141 Figure 11. Measuring King Pin Bushing Inner Diameter Item Description 1 Micrometer and Telescoping Gauge 2 Upper Bore Measurement Point 3 Lower Bore Measurement Point 1. Measure the king pin bushing inside diameter with a micrometer and a telescoping gauge at the points indicated. 2. Make a note of the measurement. 3. Rotate the gauge 90 degrees and measure again at both points. 4. Average the measurements. 5. If the average inside diameter measurement exceeds the king pin bushing maximum in- ner diameter (Axle Wear Limits Specifica- tions), install new bushings. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 1A-10 Upper Knuckle Bore D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven - Remove the old bushing from the knuckle. NOTICE Measurement procedures for the knuckle bores are very similar to the procedures for bushing inner diameter measurement. 42142 Figure 12. Measuring Knuckle Bore Inner Diameter Item Description 1 Micrometer and Telescoping Gauge 2 Upper Bore Measuring Point 1 Upper Bore Measuring 3 Point 2 4 Knuckle 5 Lower Bore Measuring Point 1 6 Lower Bore Measuring Point 2 2. Measure the upper knuckle bore inside di- ameter in four positions and at two loca- tions. The two locations must be 90 degrees opposed from each other. Always use a mi- crometer and a telescoping gauge when measuring knuckle bore inside diameter. Rounding at the top and bottom of the beam (due to normal wear) is acceptable. If the average measurement exceeds the knuckle bore maximum diameter specifica- tions (Axle Wear Limits Specifications), replace the knuckle. Lower Knuckle Bore The method to measure the lower knuckle bore is identical to measuring the upper knuckle bore. Follow the steps given above for upper knuckle bore inspec- tion and use the same table for reference data. Tie Rod and Tie Rod Ends Tie rod end inspection and replacement is neces- sary to maintain vehicle alignment. Failure to replace worn tie rod ends will cause premature wear of steering and suspension components, and will affect steering. Lift the front end of the coach and install safety stands. Do not work under a vehicle supported only by jacks. Always inspect the tie rod ends before lubrication. After lubrication, the tie rod end inspection will be compromised. ACAUTION Replace the entire tie rod end if the boot is torn or missing. Do not replace only the boot. Block the rear wheels of the coach. Lift the front end of the coach and install safety stands. Turn the wheels to full left, then full right, then straight ahead. NOTICE The boot may be missing completely or may not completely cover the ball joint. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Relic 11111 n' D Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-11 �' �r q 1� �4 Figure 13. Tie Rod End Boot Item Description 1 Cracked or Torn Boot 4. Check for secure tie rod end nuts and cotter pins. If a pin is missing, torque the nut to specification and install a new pin. Never loosen a tie rod end nut to install a cotter pin. } A cotter pin must be installed through the tie rod end with the tie rod end nut tightened to torque specification to securely attach the tie rod. Loss of the cotter pin will allow the tie rod end nut to become loose and affect vehicle steering and possibly result in total loss of steering control. Figure 14. Missing Cotter Pin Item Description 1 Steering Knuckle 2 Missing Cotter Pin 5. Check that the tie rod nut is installed and se- cured with a cotter pin. If a pin is missing, check the nut torque specification and then install a new cotter pin. Always tighten tie rod nut to specified torque when setting the cotter pin. Never back off a nut to install a pin. A missing cotter pin indicates unsafe condition and requires immediate replace- ment. ACAUTION The tie rod ends must be at the end of the cross tube slot to ensure adequate thread engagement. NOTICE Check the tie rod end play by hand. Do not use a pry bar; the readings from the dial indicator will not be accurate and it could damage the tie rod end or give a false indication of wear. Always inspect the tie rod ends before lubrication. After lubrication, the tie rod end inspection will be compromised. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 1A-12 3 2 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' Figure 15. Tie Rod and Cross Tube Item Description 1 Engaged Properly 2 Tie Rod Threads Visible 3 Tie Rod Cross Tube Slot End 6. Mark the position of the tie rod. Check that the tie rod end is threaded correctly into the cross tube and engaged deeper than the end of the cross tube slot. The tie rod end must be visible the entire length of the cross tube slot. 7. Check that the zerk fittings are installed. Re- place a damaged zerk fitting with a new one. Some tie rod ends are non-greaseable and will not have zerk fittings. Do not install fit- ting if tie rod end is non-greaseable type. ACAUTION Do not use the following items or methods to check for movement of the tie rod assembly. Damage to the components can result if. • A crow bar, pickle fork or a 2x4 is used. • A tool instead of your hands is used to grasp the cross tube assembly that results in cross tube damage. • Pressure or force is applied to the ends or the joints of the assembly. • The tires are rocked either with the vehicle on the ground or with the wheels raised. NOTICE If replacement is necessary, replace both tie rod ends at the same time. If any movement is detected at either tie rod end, replace both ends. Roadside Tie Rod Assembly Replacement According to D.O.T., any detectable movement when checking by hand of 1/8 in. (3 mm) or more, re- quires the vehicle is immediately taken out of service for replacement of the tie rod ends. When the roadside check indicates tie rod end movement of less than 1 /8 in. (3 mm), the vehicle does not need to be immediately removed. The vehicle should be scheduled a major out -of -service inspection and maintenance as soon as possible. Shop Inspection Check the tie rod boot for cracks, tears or other damage. All tie rod ends with a damaged boot require that the entire tie rod end be replaced. By hand or using a pipe wrench, with jaw protectors to avoid gouging the cross tube, rotate the cross tube toward the front of the vehicle and then toward the rear. Item Description 1 Push Up 2 Pull Down Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 2 Figure 16. Tie Rod Inspection Item Description 1 Push Up 2 Pull Down Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliability Driven - 3. Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-13 3. From directly below the tie rod end, with both hands, grab the tie rod as close to the end as possible, no more than 6 in. (152.4 mm). Apply hand pressure [approxi- mately 100 lbs (45.4 kg)] up and down sev- eral times. Check for any movement or looseness at both tie rod end locations. }IlL If any movement is detected by hand, replace the worn components with new components before releasing the vehicle back into service. 4. If any movement is detected at one tie rod end, replace both tie rod ends. Always re- place tie rod ends in pairs, even if only one tie rod is found damaged. Do not attempt to straighten a bent cross tube. Damage to the axle can result. Be certain to replace any cross tube with an original equipment cross tube (with the same length, diameter, and threads). 2 Figure 17. Cross Tube and Clamps Item Description 1 Cross Tube Clamp 2 Crack Damage 5. Inspect the cross tube and clamps for dam- age. • Replace the cross tube if it is cracked or bent. • Replace the clamps if any are damaged. • Replaced the entire cross tube assembly if either clamp is welded onto it. 10256 Figure 18. Tie Rod and Cross -Tube Item Description 1 Engaged Properly 2 Tie Rod Threads Visible 3 Tie Rod Cross -Tube Slot End 6. Check for proper installation if the tie rod end clamp to the cross tube. Be certain that tie rod ends are threaded in the cross tube past the clamps and the slots at the cross tube ends. 7. Check that zerk fittings are installed. Re- place damaged zerk fittings. Some tie rod ends have no zerk fittings be- cause they are not greaseable. Do not in- stall a zerk fitting on a non-greaseable de- sign tie rod end. 8. Check that the cotter pin is in place, replace if missing. Tighten the tie rod end nut to the specified torque and then insert the cotter pin through the castellated nut and the hole in the tire rod end. Zerk Fittings Figure 19. Zerk Fitting Item Description 1 Alternate Zerk Fitting Locations Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 1A-14 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' 1 If a zerk fitting is missing, install a new one. Do not attempt to install a fitting if the tie rod end is a non-greaseable design. 2. Tighten all zerk fittings to the specified torque. Installation Installing the Tie Rod Ends into the Cross Tube To prevent serious eye injury, always wear safe eye protection when you perform vehicle maintenance or service. Do•not bend, weld, or heat front axle components. NOTICE The cross tube has right-hand threads on the right side of vehicle and left-hand threads on left side of vehicle. Make sure the tie rod end threads are correctly installed into the tube deeper than the cross tube slot. If you are only replacing the cross tube: When replacing the cross tube, be certain that the replacement cross tube is properly specified from OE manufacturing standards. The replacement tube should have the same length and diameter as the original (removed) tube that couples with the tie rod ends. Use the thread count as a guide and install the tie rod ends into the threaded cross tube ends to the approximate depth marked during the tie rod assembly removal. Both tie rod ends must be installed into the cross tube deeper than the end of the cross tube slot. 4. Ensure the tab on the clamp is firmly seated against the end of the cross tube. Installing the Tie Rod and Cross Tube Assembly onto the Axle 1. Clean and dry the tie rod end taper and the tie rod arm taper hole. Connect the tie rod ends into the cross tube beyond the end of the slot. 2. Push the threaded tie rod end through the knuckle tie rod arm hole. 3. Loosely install both tie rod end nuts to se- cure the tire rod end and cross tube assem- bly linkage to the tie rod arm. 4. Tighten the tie rod end to the specified torque. (See TORQUE CHART in this sec- tion.) NOTICE Do not loosen the nut to install the cotter pin. Install the cotter pins. If necessary, tighten the lock nut until the holes area aligned. Check and adjust the toe -in. See Adjusting the Toe -In in this section. Adjusting the Toe -In Numerous methods are available to check and ad- just toe such as lasers and electronic measuring devic- es. the following is a simple system, when used proper- ly, will result in satisfactory toe adjustment. i .1jj;J 11 10 To prevent serious eye injury, always wear safe eye protection when you perform vehicle maintenance or service. "Toe" is the relationship of the distance measured between the front centerline of the front tires and the rear centerline of the front tires. 2. If you are installing new tie rod ends: When the front distance is less than the rear dis- Thread the tie rod ends to the approximate tance, the wheels are "toed -in". Toe -in is designed into original depth in side the cross tube. the vehicle to counteract the tendency of the tires to Both tie rod ends must be installed into the toe -out when the vehicle is driven. cross tube deeper than the end of the Incorrect toe adjustment will result in uneven and cross tube slot. 3. Install the nuts and bolts in the clamps. excessive inner or outer tread wear. Tighten to the specified torque. (See TORQUE CHART in this section.) Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-15 NOTICE Do not measure toe -in with the front axle in the raised position. The weight of the vehicle must be on the front axle when toe -in is measured. Toe -In Specification Incorrect toe settings affect tire wear. Do not change camber or caster settings to correct tire wear problems. If the axle assembly is bent to change caster or camber, the strength of the axle is reduced and the warranty is voided. An axle will be damaged by bending and may cause a vehicle accident resulting in serious personal injury. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Support the vehicle with safety stands. Do not work under a vehicle supported only by jacks. Jacks can slip and fall over. Serious personal injury can result. 1. The vehicle must be on a level surface. Place blocks behind the rear wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. 2. Use jacks to raise the vehicle so that front tires are off the ground. Support the front axle with safety stands. 3. Use paint or chalk to mark the center area of both front tires around the complete outer tread surface of the tire. 4. Place the pointers of a trammel bar on the marks of each tire. rotate the tires. Make sure a straight line is marked on the outer surface of the tire. 5. Before lowering the vehicle to the ground, place turn plates (slip plates) directly under the front tires to relieve any bind in the steer- ing system and ensure correct readings/ad- justment. if turn plates are not available, plastic wrap for packaging can be placed between tires and ground surface. Lower the vehicle. 6. Place the trammel bar at the back of the tires. Raise the pointers so the pointers are level with the spindles. Align the pointers with the marks on the tires. Measure and re- cord the distance between the pointers. 7. Place the trammel bar at the front of the tires. Raise the pointers so the pointers are level with the spindles. Align the pointers with the marks on the tires. Measure and re- cord the distance between the pointers. 8. To obtain the toe measurement, subtract the distance reading between the front of the tires from the distance reading between the back of the tires. 9. If the toe measurement is not at the speci- fied distance, perform the following proce- dure: a. Loosen the tube clamp nut and bolt on each end of the cross tube. b. Turn the cross tube until the specified toe -in distance is obtained. C. Check that both tie rod ends are threaded correctly into the cross tube and engaged deeper than the end of the cross tube slot. The tie rod threads must be visible the entire length of the cross tube slot. d. Tighten the nut and bolt on each end of the cross tube to the specified torque. Refer to Tie rod Assembly Torque Specifications. 10. Repeat steps 1-8 to check the toe -in di- mension. Removing The Tie Rod Assembly To prevent serious eye injury, always wear safe eye protection when you perform vehicle maintenance or service. Remove the cotter pins and the nuts on both sides of the axle that fasten each tie rod end to the tie rod arms. Disconnect the cross tube assembly from the tie rod arms. The use of a tie rod end puller is recommended, if available. If necessary, tap on the tie rod end with a leather or plastic mallet to loosen the tie rod end from the tie rod arm. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 1A-16 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven 2. If any parts will be stored, apply a corrosion- } • preventive material to all surfaces. Store Always support the tie rod assembly so it does parts inside special paper or other material that will prevent corrosion during storage. not fall and become damaged or cause personal injury when separated from the steering knuckles. Inspecting Parts Tie Rod End Removal from Cross Tube Remove the tie rod ends from the cross tube using the following procedure: Remove the bolts and the nuts from the clamp on the cross tube. If replacing only the cross tube, mark the in- stalled position of each tie rod end. Count and record the number of threads that ap- pear outside of the cross tube. A CAUTION Do not remove clamps that are welded to the cross tube. Removing welded clamps will damage the cross tube. 3. Remove the threaded tie rod ends from the cross tube 4. Inspect the parts for damage. 5. When replacing the cross tube, be certain the replacement cross tube is properly spec- ified from OE manufacturing standards. The replacement tube should have the same length and diameter as the original (re- moved) tube that couples with the tie rod ends. f To prevent serious eye injury, always wear safe eye protection when you perform vehicle maintenance or service. Corrosion Protection for New Parts Carefully inspect the disassembled tie rod ends and cross tube before assembly. Replace any parts that are worn, cracked, or damaged. NOTICE If necessary, use dye penetrant, magnetic flux, or fluorescent testing methods to check the cross tube for cracks. Replace the cross tube if cracks are detected. If replacement is necessary, replace both tie rod ends at the same time. Unitized Wheel End (UWE) Inspection The Unitized Wheel End (UWE) is a non -service- able, complete hub assembly that uses a prelubricated and sealed bearing assembly. However, it needs to be checked regularly for bearing condition. Refer to Sec- tion 15 - Wheels, Hubs, and Tires for UWE Inspection procedures. The hub assembly is composed of a wheelend adapter, rotor, and unitized hub bearing mounted to the spindle. The bearing assembly requires no maintenance and is not adjustable. Periodic inspec- tion is required to maintain performance. Refer to Sec- tion 15 - Unitized Hubs (UWE) for more information regarding inspection. Inspection As with all other bearing assemblies, rotate the hub assembly while checking for noise or rough operation. Check end play of the bearing assembly as described above. Any roughness, noise, or end play will require that the bearing assembly be serviced. Adjustment NOTICE NOTICE Do not apply lubrication or a corrosion -preventive material to the tie rod taper mating surface. Always consult the appropriate maintenance manual for your coach for exact specifications and 1. Apply a light oil to cleaned parts that will be procedures. immediately assembled. Taper must be clean and dry when assembled. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven" Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-17 The UWE wheel end is a nonadjustable bearing assembly. Any end play of the bearing requires that the bearing be serviced. Once the assembled UWE bearing is mounted to the spindle, the spindle nut is torqued to 600 ft -Ib. (813 Nm). Service The UWE wheel bearing assembly is a non -ser- viceable unit. Any roughness, noise or end play re- quires that the bearing assembly be replaced. Always consult your MCI Maintenance Manual or ArvinMeritor manual MM -0409 for specific information, procedures and specifications. The ArvinMeritor manu- al is available by calling MCI Customer Service at 800-323-1290. Lubrication Lubrication of the steering knuckle king pin bush- ings and tie rod ends is recommended periodically. Use lubrication specification S-16 as noted in Section 10 - Lubrication. NOTICE Inspect the boot seal periodically. Refer to Section 10 for intervals. King Pin Bushings Steering knuckles are bushed in the upper and lower pin bosses so that they may turn freely about the pins. Bushings are grooved on the inside to allow grease to flow uniformly to high-pressure areas. Grease fittings are installed at both upper and lower king pin bosses. 1. Make sure that the tires touch the ground. DO NOT RAISE THE COACH. 2. Wipe dirt and foreign material off grease fit- ting. 1 Y 42128 Figure 20. King Pin Lubrication Item I Description 1 5teenng r%nucKie 2 Top Grease Fitting 3 Axle 4 Bottom Grease Fitting 5 Grease Should Appear Here 3. Lubricate the pins through the grease fit- tings on the top and bottom king pin covers. 4. Apply lubricant until new grease oozes out between the seal of the thrust bearing and the upper shim pack. Tie Rod Ends The tie rod ends have a grease fitting located be- low the tie rod assembly. 1. Make certain the tires are touching the ground. 2. Wipe dirt and foreign material off grease fit- ting. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 1A-18 1 D Series Maintenance Manual 5 42123 Figure 21. Tie Rod Lubrication Item Description 1 1 Axle 2 Tie Rod Arm 3 Tie Rod Ends 4 Grease Should Appear Here 5 Tie Rod Apply grease through the grease fittings on the as- sembly until new lubricant oozes out from the boot. Adjustments Steering Stop Adjustment The steering stop adjustment controls the vehicle's maximum turn angle. 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Loosen the jam nut on the axle's stop bolts. 3. Turn in the stop bolts. 4. Turn the wheels to the right until there is 1 in. (25 mm) of clearance between the in- side front edge of the left-hand front tire and the drag link. Reliability Driven' 1 2 4 3 42129 Figure 22. Steering Stop Bolt Item Description 1 Steering Knuckle 2 Axle Beam Boss 3 Steering Stop Bolt 4 Stop Bolt Lock Nut 5. Turn the right-hand knuckle stop bolt out un- til it contacts the boss on the axle beam. 6. Torque the jam nut on the stop bolt to 50-65 ft -Ib (68-88 Nm). ACAUTION Do not increase the vehicle's maximum specified turn angle. If the angle is increased, the steering arm, tie rod, and tie rod ends will be damaged. The hydraulic steering pressure should relieve (drop off) at the end of the steering stroke. If the pressure does not relieve, the axle components will be damaged. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reluhb n D Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-19 Pressure Relief Adjustment The pressure relief adjustment in the power steer- ing system stops or reduces the force applied to the steering arm when the wheel approaches full turn posi- tion. The power steering gear pressure relief valves set themselves to the steering stops the first time the coach is steered from stop to stop. Check the pressure relief if the steering arm is damaged or the power steer- ing gear is serviced. Start the engine and allow it to operate at idle speed. Full weight of the vehicle must be on the wheels. Turn steering wheel one direction until a high pressure hiss is heard or the axle stop makes contact. Turn the relief valve in or out until a high-pressure hiss is heard when there is 1/8 in. clearance between the axle stops. Repeat the procedure steering in the oppo- site direction adjusting the valve on the opposite end of the steering gear. Turning the adjusting screws in in- creases the clearance between the axle stops. Turning the adjusting screws out decreases the clearance. Re- fer to Section 11 - Steering. Alignment Correct front end alignment must be maintained for ease of steering and satisfactory tire life. Road shock, vibrations and normal stresses that are set up in the front end under average operation can result in loss of front end alignment. Refer to the following alignment data and specifications for correct adjustments. Caster, camber, and knuckle inclination are all nonadjustable on all coaches. If incorrect front end alignment is suspected, refer to the inspection proce- dure under Wheel Shimmy later in this section. Front wheel balance should first be checked to make sure that the difficulties are not originating from out -of -bal- ance front wheels or tires. Wheel installation and run out, wheel bearing adjustment, tie rod, and draglink end wear should also be considered. Correct front end alignment can be obtained and maintained only when steering knuckles are in satisfactory condition. Termi- nology and explanations for front end alignment terms are listed below: 1 �2 42124 Figure 23. Camber Item Description 1 Vertical Axis 2 Positive Camber 3 Negative Camber 4 Zero or Neutral Camber (with Load) Front Wheel Camber: The amount the wheel leans outward (positive camber) or inward (negative camber) from the vertical plane, usually measured in degrees. All coach axles, when loaded, have Zero (Neutral) camber. NOTICE Axles are 1/4 degree positive camber in the unloaded condition, but may exhibit negative camber in some loaded conditions. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date Page September 2013 1A-20 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' rii 42125 Figure 24. Toe -in Item Description 1 Front of Tire (Pictured from Above) 2 Axle 3 Rear of Tire (Pictured from Above) Front Wheel Toe -in: The distance between the wheels in the front is closer than the distance between rear. The dis- tance between the tires at the rear, minus the distance between the tires at the front is the toe -in measurement (see Adjusting Toe -In for details). Axle Caster: The fore and aft inclination from vertical of the steering knuckle. Positive caster is indicated with the top of the steering knuckle tilted toward the rear of the vehicle. Negative caster is indicated with the top of the steering knuckle tilted toward the front of the vehicle. Zero caster means no inclina- tion of the steering knuckle. All axles used on coaches have nonadjustable positive caster. Knuckle Wheel Inclination: The amount knuckle pins are inclined inward at the top. King pin inclination is nonad- justable. Steering Geometry: The specific loca- tion and/or movement of the mechanical links that maintain correct wheel align- ment in relationship to the axle. Any manipulation or alteration to these axle characteristics could severely affect the axle's steering geometry. NOTICE All axles used on coaches have nonadjustable camber, caster, and king pin inclination angles. NOTICE Camber, caster, and toe -in settings can be found under Alignment Specifications at the end of this section. Wheel Shimmy For a variety of reasons a coach may develop a wheel shimmy at the front end. The following inspec- tion procedure is provided to help assist maintenance personnel in determining the cause of this condition. NOTICE Due to the large number of variables involved and the equipment needed to diagnose these variables, it is recommended that a reputable front end alignment shop perform the inspection and any corrections. Read and understand all steps prior to starting step one. Observe all standard and applicable safety stan- dards. 1. Check that all bolts and nuts are tight (i.e., suspension support stud nuts, U -bolt nuts, tie rod arm, steering arm nuts, etc.) and that no damage or distortion has taken place. 2. Check the steering gear for looseness and gear backlash. 3. Check the wheel balance or tires for out -of - round. 4. Check the tie rod ends for wear. 5. Check the radius rod bushings for wear. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven" Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-21 6. Check for correct toe -in adjustment. 7. Check the king pin end play or king pin bushings for wear. If the bushings have 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) or more of play, they should be replaced. 8. Check for correct caster. NOTICE Excessive caster, in combination with some of the previous items and/or in combination with road conditions, can cause wheel shimmy. A recommended 3.0 degree caster angle is achieved with the lower radius rod mounting brackets. The brackets have eyes in line with the axle center. If caster angle is less than 2.0 degrees or more than 4.0 degrees contact customer service for further instructions. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 UM 1. Tighten the drag link fasteners to specified D Series Maintenance Manual Driven' Page 1A-22 torque only 2. Follow correct lubrication procedures and Reliability lubricant 3. Wheel stops or relief pressure settings out of TROUBLESHOOTING Condition Cause Correction Tires wear quickly 1. Incorrect tire pressure 2. Tires and wheels not properly balanced 1. Inflate tires to specified pressure 2. Balance or replace tires and wheels or exhibit uneven tread wear 3. Incorrect tag axle alignment 3. Align the tag axle tandems 4. Incorrect toe -in setting 4. Adjust toe -in to the proper setting 5. Incorrect steering arm geometry 5. Service the steering system as needed 6. Excessive wheel end play 6. Adjust the wheel bearings Coach is hard to 1. Low power steering system pressure 2. Steering gear incorrectly assembled 1. Repair the power steering system 2. Assemble the steering gear correctly steer 3. Lack of steering linkage lubrication 13. Lubricate the steering linkage 4. King pins are binding 4. Replace the king pins 5. Incorrect steering arm geometry 5. Service the steering system as needed 6. Tie rod ends are stiff 6. Replace the tie rod ends 7. Worn thrust bearing 7. Replace the thrust bearing Tie rod ends are 1. The tie rod ends need lubrication 1. Follow tie rod lubrication schedule worn 2. Damaged boot on the tie rod end 2. Replace the tie rod end Bent or broken tie 1, Adjust the power steering system to the rod, ball stud, 1. Excessive pressure in the power steering specified pressure. Verify power steering system relief pressure. Replace pump relief steering arm, or tie system rod arm valve if necessary Worn or broken steering ball stud Worn king pins or bushings Vibration or shimmy in SPECIFICATIONS FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY Manufacturer...................... ••................................................................................................. Meritor ALIGNMENT DATA (LOADED)* Camber ........ ............ ........... ..........................................................................Acceptable Range:0.19 to +0.68 Degrees ... Caster......................... ..............................................3.0 Degrees Positive Toe -In (Adjustable).......................................................................................0.03 in. 0.03 inch (0.794 mm ±.0794 mm) Track................................................................................. 101.82 in. (2586 mm) Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 1. Drag link fasteners torqued beyond specified 1. Tighten the drag link fasteners to specified maximum 2. Lack of lubrication or use of incorrect torque only 2. Follow correct lubrication procedures and lubricant 3. Wheel stops or relief pressure settings out of specifications 3. Adjust the stops, or pressure relief settings, adjustment to specifications 1. Worn or missing seals and gaskets 1. Replace any missing seals and gaskets 2. Incorrect lubricant 2. Lubricate with the proper lubricant 3. Axle lubrication schedule not followed 3. Follow proper axle lubrication schedule 4. Incorrect lubricating procedures 4. Follow proper lubrication procedures 5. Lubrication schedule not frequent enough 5. Increase the lubrication schedule to match for operating conditions operating conditions 1. Wheels and/or tires are out of balance 1. Balance or replace tires and wheels 2. Worn shock absorbers 2. Replace the shock absorbers 3. Worn radius rod bushings 3. Replace the bushings SPECIFICATIONS FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY Manufacturer...................... ••................................................................................................. Meritor ALIGNMENT DATA (LOADED)* Camber ........ ............ ........... ..........................................................................Acceptable Range:0.19 to +0.68 Degrees ... Caster......................... ..............................................3.0 Degrees Positive Toe -In (Adjustable).......................................................................................0.03 in. 0.03 inch (0.794 mm ±.0794 mm) Track................................................................................. 101.82 in. (2586 mm) Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliability Driven' D Series Maintenance Manual Page 1A-23 2� 1 Figure 25. Front Axle TORQUE CHART Item Description Ft -Lb Nm 1 Draw Key Nuts 30-45 41-61 2 Threaded King Pin Caps 100-120 136-163 3 Steering Arm Nuts 775-1450 1051-1966 4 Stop Screw Locknut 50-65 68-88 5 Tie Rod Arm Nuts 550-1025 746-1390 6 Tie Rod End Clamp Locknuts 40-60 54-81 7 Tie Rod End Nuts 160-300 217-407 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven' Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 2A-1 SECTION 2A DRIVE AXLE CONTENTS OF THIS SECTION SUBJECT PAGE GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................. 2A-3 Components.....................................................2A-3 MAINTENANCE..................................................... 2A-4 Inspection.......................................................2A-4 AxleRepair......................................................2A-4 Lubrication......................................................2A-4 TORQUECHART .................................................... 2A-6 SPECIFICATIONS................................................... 2A-11 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date Page September 2013 2A-2 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 2A-3 Reliability Driven' GENERAL DESCRIPTION Components The drive axle is a Meritor Automotive full floating type with pressed steel housing, fitted with replaceable pressed -in steel sleeves. A magnetic drain plug is in- stalled in the bottom of the housing. The single reduction final drive employs a heavy duty hypoid drive pinion and ring gear. The differential and gear assembly is mounted on tapered roller bear- ings and lubricated by the differential oil. The straddle -mounted pinion has two tapered roller bearings in front of the pinion teeth which take the for- ward and reverse thrust, and a third bearing behind the pinion teeth to carry the radial load. Available drive axle ratios are 3.07, 3.21, 3.42, 3.73, 4.10, 4.30, and 4.56:1. NOTICE All MCI coach differentials are factory -filled with synthetic oil. Axle Housing The hot formed rectangular axle housing is de- signed with full corner sections for strength and rigidity. The other axle components assemble to this part. Differential Carrier The single reduction carrier is front mounted into the axle housing. The carrier has a hypoid drive pinion and ring gear set, and bevel gears in the differential as- sembly. The drain plug is magnetic to catch particles that would otherwise accelerate wear. Wheel Bearings The axle shafts are fitted with oil -lubricated wheel bearings. Figure 1. Drive Axle with Disc Brakes 44293 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 2A-4 MAINTENANCE Inspection D Series Maintenance Manual Refer to Section 10 for intervals. Fasteners 1. Replace worn or damaged fasteners. 2. Ensure that all fasteners are torqued to specification. (See TORQUE CHART in this section.) Wear and Damage 1. Inspect the axle and axle parts for wear or damage. 2. Look for bent or damaged parts. 3. Inspect the tires for wear patterns that indi- cate suspension damage or misalignment. 4. Replace all worn or damaged parts. Axle Housing Repair Certain weld repairs may be made to the axle housing. Do not bend or straighten the axle housing. Damaged drive axle housings should be replaced. NOTICE Refer to the welding caution in the introductory pages of this manual before starting any welding operation. Weld repairs are only allowed on existing axle housing welds of the following types: Cover welds. Housing seam welds between the suspen- sion attaching brackets. a. The differential carrier and axle shafts must be removed before weld- ing to the axle housing. Refer to ArvinMeritor publication number TP -9421 before welding. Lubrication Reliability Driven' NOTICE Also refer to Section 10 - Lubrication. Lubrication intervals are given for intercity coaches. For higher use coaches, gear oil must be checked and changed more frequently. Drive axle wheel bearings can be either oiled or grease lubricated dependent on coach specifications. Oil lubricated wheel bearings are lubricated by the ax- le's gear oil. For grease lubricated wheel bearings, see Hub Bearing Grease -Lubrication Intervals. Lubrication recommendations are found in Section 10 of this manual. During initial stages of normal operation, tiny metal particles are freed from mating surfaces of moving parts. These metal particles are carried by the lubricant through the assembly and act as lapping compound which accelerates wear of all parts. To ensure maximum life of the differential and pre- vent premature failure, the original factory fill lubricant should be drained. This also prevents lubricant con- tamination by differences in factory fill and lubricant used by the operator when topping up. ACAUTION Change break-in oil periodically. Refer to Section 10 for intervals. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven' Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 2A-5 Fill the Axle with Lubricant 43633 Figure 2. Drive Axle Housing Item Description 1 Fill and Oil Level Plug 2 Drain Fill and drain plugs are located in the axle housing. Magnetic drain plugs perform the vital function of trap- ping small metallic particles that circulate in the lubri- cant, through the gears and bearings. They prevent rapid wear and premature failure. The magnet must be strong enough to firmly hold the particles under service conditions. We recommend plugs with elements having a minimum pick-up capacity of 2.0 Ib (0.91 kg) of low carbon steel in plate or flat bar form. Clean all magnetic drain plugs prior to reinstalla- 4. Install the fill plug and tighten to a minimum torque of 35 ft -Ib (47 Nm). 5. Drive the coach, unloaded, for one to two miles at speeds not to exceed 25 mph to thoroughly circulate the lubricant throughout the assembly. Recheck the lubricant levels and all of the fasteners. For reconditioned axles, follow the same proce- dures as above, after overhaul. Correct lubrication is critical to bearing life. If oil level is found to be low, determine the cause and correct immediately. Lack of lubrication will result in premature bearing failure resulting in dragging brakes, wheel loss, or fire. Oil Change Intervals Gear oil should be changed periodically. Use lubri- cation specification S -11A or S-1 2A as noted in Sec- tion 10. The Meritor axle drive unit employs the gravity feed (splash) system of distributing lubricant throughout the assembly. As the coach is initially driven in service, a short period of time is required for the lubricant to reach all areas of the drive units. Hub Bearing Grease -Lubrication Intervals Check periodically. (Refer to Section 10 for inter- vals.) a. Change whenever seals are replaced, b. When brakes relined, or periodically (Refer to Section 10 for intervals. tion. If the drive axle shafts are removed for any mainte- 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Block nance or service, it is essential that the grease in the the wheels to prevent the vehicle from hubs be replaced in the proper quantity. To ensure that moving. The axle lubricant capacity the grease lubricated drive axle hub bearings are lubri- changes when the drive pinion angle cated after servicing and before the coach is put back changes. into service, the following is required: Remove the fill plug from the side of the axle housing bowl cover. Add the axle lubricant through the fill plug hole. Fill the axle with the lubricant until the lubricant level is even with the bottom of the fill plug hole. Use full synthetic oil 75W-140 above -40°F (-40°C) or 75W-90 above -40°F (-40°C). Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 2A-6 D Series Maintenance Manual NOTICE Use safe shop service practices at all times. At rebuild, before installing the wheel bearings onto the spindle, coat the bearing journals with a film of grease to deter fretting corrosion. Pack bearing with a pressure packer, if pos- sible. If a packer is not available, pack the bearing by hand, forcing the grease in the cavities between the rollers and cage from the large end of the cone. 11251 Figure 3. Drive Axle Hub Assembly Grease Level Item Description 1 Lube Pack the hub between the two bearing cups with grease to the level of the cups' smallest diameter. Use lubrication specification S-16 as noted in Section 10. TORQUE CHART Reliability Driven' 1. The torque values in the fastener Torque Chart are for fasteners that have a light application of oil on the threads. 2. If the fasteners are dry, increase the torque values by 10%. 3. If the fasteners have a heavy application of oil on the threads, decrease the torque val- ues by 10%. 4. If you do not know the size of the fastener that is being installed, measure the fastener. Use the following procedure. American Standard Fasteners 1 2 X 11252 Figure 4. Determining Size of American Standard Fastener Item Description 1 Amount of Threads in One In 2 X Dimension = (Example 1/2 in.) a. Measure the diameter of the threads in inches, dimension X. b. Count the amount of threads there are in one inch. Example of an Amer- ican Standard Size fastener is 0.50 in. -13. The 0.50 is the diameter of the fastener in inches (dimension X). The 13 is the number of threads in one inch. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven' Metric Fasteners Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 2A-7 3—r--- y—.1 11253 Figure 5. Determining Size of Metric Fastener I item I Description 2 X Dimension = (Example 8M or 8 mm) 3 Y Dimension = Distance of 10 Threads a. Measure the diameter of the threads in millimeters (dimension X). b. Measure the distance of 10 threads, point to point in millimeters (mm), di- mension Y. Make a note of dimen- sion Y. C. Divide dimension Y by 10. The result will be the distance between two threads or pitch. Example of a Metric size fastener is M8 x 1.25. The M8 is the diameter of the fastener in milli- meters (mm) (dimension X). The 1.25 is the distance between two threads or pitch. d. Compare the size of fastener mea- sured in Step 4 to the list of fasteners in the following chart to find the cor- rect torque value. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Infl, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 2A-8 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" 11254 Figure 6. Torque Callouts Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 aeliability en D Series Maintenance Manual Page 2A-9 Torque Values Copyright 2013 – Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Torque Value Fasteners Thread Size Ft -Lb Nm 1 Capscrew, Axle Shaft 5/16-24 18-24 24 33 1/2-13 85-115 115-156 Nut, Axle Shaft Stud Plain Nut 2 7/16-30 50-75 68-102 1/2-20 75-115 102-156 5/16-18 110-165 149-224 5/8-18 150-230 203-312 Locknut 7/16-20 40-65 54-88 1/2-20 65-100 88-136 5/16-18 100-145 136-197 5/8-18 130-190 176-258 3 Breather 3/8-18 F-20 min. 35 min. 27 min. 4 Plug, oil Filter (Housing) 3/4-14 47.5 min. 5 Plug, Heat Indicator 1/2-14 25 min. 34 min. 6 Plug, Oil Drain 1/2-14 25 min. 34 min. 7 Capscrew, Differential Case Flange Head 3/8-16 35-50 48-68 Standard Hex Head 7/16-14 60-75 81-102 1/2-13 85-115 115-156 9/16-12 130-165 176-224 5/8-11 180-230 244-312 M12 x 1.75 85-103 115-140 M12 x 1.75 75-95 100-130 M16 x 2 203-251 275-340 8 Nut Differential Case Bolt 1/2-13 75-100 102-136 1/2-20 85-115 115-156 5/8-11 150-190 203-258 5/8-18 180-230 244-312 M12 x 1.75 74-96 100-130 9 Nut, Ring Gear Bolt Flange Head 1/2-13 75-100 102-136 Standard Hex Head 1/2-20 85-115 115-156 5/8-11 150-190 203-258 5/8-18 180-230 244-312 M12 x 1.25 66-81 90-110 M12 x 1.75 77-85 104-115 M16 x 1.5 192-214 260-290 M16 x 1.5 190-225 260-305 10 Capscrew, Bearing Cap 9/16-12 110-145 149-197 5/8-11 150-190 203-258 3/4-10 270-350 366-475 7/8-14 360-470 488-637 7/8-9 425-550 576-746 M 16 x 2 181-221 245-300 M20 x 2.5 347-431 470-585 M22 x 2.5 479-597 650-810 11 Nut, Housing to Carrier Stud 7/16-20 50-75 68-102 1/2-20 75-115 102-156 9/16-18 110-165 149-224 5/8-18 1 150-230 203-312 Copyright 2013 – Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date Page September 2013 2A-10 D Series Maintenance Manual Torque Values (Continued) Reliability Driven' Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Torque Value Fasteners Thread Size — f` Ft -Lb Nm 12 Capscrew, Carrier to Housing 7/16-14 50-75 68-102 1/2-13 75-115 102-156 9/16-12 110-165 149-224 5/8-11 150-230 203-312 3/4-10 270-400 366-542 M12 x 1.75 74-89 100-120 M 16 x 2 181-221 245-300 13 Jamnut, Thrust Screw 3/4-16 150-190 203-258 7/8-14 150-300 203-407 1.12-16 150-190 203-258 M22 x 1.5 148-210 200-285 M30 x 1.5 236-295 320-400 14 Nut, Drive Pinion 7/8-20 200-275 271-373 1.0-20 300-400 407-542 1.25-12 700-900 949-1220 1.25-18 700-900 949-1220 1.50-12 800-1100 1085-1491 1.50-18 800-1100 1085-1491 1.75-12 900-1200 1220-1627 M32 x 1.5 738-918 1000-1245 M39 x 1.5 922-1132 1250-1535 M45 x 1.5 996-1232 1350-1670 15 Capscrew, Bearing Cage 3/8-16 30-50 41-68 7/16-14 50-75 68-102 1/2-13 75-115 102-156 9/16-12 110-165 149-224 5/8-11 150-230 203-312 M12 x 1.75 74-96 100-130 Plug, Oil Filter (Carrier) 3/4-14 25 min. 34 min. r17 1.5-11.5 120 min. 163 min. M24 x 1.5 35 min. 47 min. Capscrew, Lock Plate 27-41 5/16-18 20-30 M8 x 1.25 21-26 28-35 Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliabil�rtyDriiven' D Series Maintenance Manual Page 2A-11 SPECIFICATIONS DRIVE AXLE ASSEMBLY Manufacturer....................................................................................................................................... Meritor Automotive Wheel Track (Center of Dual Wheels).............................................................................................. 76.62 in. (1946 mm) GearType..................................................................................................................................... ...................... Hypoid AxleType...................................................................................................................................... Pressed Steel Housing RearAxle Lube Capacity................................................................................................................... 20 Qts. (19.4 liters) CLEARANCE Differential Bearing End Play.......................................................................................................... 0.000 in. (0.000 mm) Differential Gear Run -Out Max........................................................................................................ 0.008 in. (0.203 mm) Hypoid Gear Backlash (New)...................................................................................... ............... 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) Hypoid Gear Backlash Limits.............................................................................. 0.005-0.015 in. (0.127 mm -0.381 mm) Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 RellabllityDriven- D Series Maintenance Manual Page 21912-1 SECTION 2132 TAG AXLE - PIVOTING ARM (D4000 ONLY) CONTENTS OF THIS SECTION SUBJECT PAGE GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................. 2132-3 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Components.....................................................262-3 MAINTENANCE..................................................... 2132-4 Inspection.......................................................2132-4 Alignment.......................................................2132-4 Lubrication......................................................2132-4 SPECIFICATIONS................................................... 2132-5 SERVICETOOLS .................................................... 2132-5 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 2s2-2 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliability Driven D Series Maintenance Manual Page 2B2-3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The liftable arm tag axle is independently mounted at the rear of the drive axle. The tag axle trunnion arm pivots in two sets of oil lubricated (or grease lubricated) roller bearings inside each of their respective mounts. The pivot action allows tag axle wheels to track while traveling forward or backing. The bearing boxes are bolted to the rear bogie leg mounting plate. Components Each tag axle assembly has a welded axle arm with machined spindle and trunnion attached, bogie leg bearing box mount, and heavy roller bearing assembly. Tag axle brakes and hubs are attached to complete the assembly. The bearing box mounts are grease filled and sealed by the axle arm at one end, and a flange cover at the other end. The trunnion spindle is machined to accept bearing assemblies, and welded to the axle arm at the other end. The axle arm trunnion and bearings are held in the bearing box mount by a spanner locknut and tongue washer. 5 Figure 1. Tag Axle Assembly 3632 Item Description Item Description Item Description 1 Ring - Wear 9 Washer - Tongue 17 Lockwasher, 1/4 2 Spindle Assembly 10 Cone - Bearing, Inner 18 Cone- Bearing 3 Arm Assembly, Welded 11 Breather - Crenco No. 12758 19 Seal 4 5 6 Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/4 Plate O -Ring 12 13 14 Fitting - Bushing, 1/4 Male, 1/8 Female Box Assembly - Bearing Shield - Slinger 20 21 22 Nut - Nylock, 1/2-13, Zn PI Washer - Flat 1/2 Plug - Magnetic 7 Locknut 15 Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/4 23 Fitting, 45 Degree Elbow, 3/8 NPT 8 Lockwasher 16 Washer - Flat, 9/32 ID Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Pae 2132-4 D Series Maintenance Manual Page Reliability Driven - MAINTENANCE Inspection Excessive bearing end play could result in premature seal or bearing failure. Periodically inspection of all tag axle arm seals and bearings. (Refer to Section 10 for intervals.) If there is excessive tag axle arm end play, retorque the trunnion bearing locknut as specified. Torque Setting Procedure Seat bearing with locknut and torque nut to 100 ft -Ib (136 Nm). Loosen locknut and retorque to 30 ft -Ib (41 Nm) in steps while rotating the axle arm to seat the rollers. Oil Level Check With the axle on a level surface, remove fill plug from hub cap assembly and add lubricant to the hub to the level indicated on the sight glass. Alignment When installation is completed, align the tag axle arms in accordance with Section 1 - Alignment Pro- cedure. Lubrication Tag axle trunnion bearings are splash fed. Check oil levels periodically. (Refer to Section 10 for inter- vals.) Change the oil when contaminated or when the seals are replaced. Lubricate the tag axle trunnion bearings using lubrication specification S-9 thru S-12 (Multi -Purpose Gear Oil). Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliabil n D Series Maintenance Manual Page 262-5 2 46253 Figure 2. Bearing Box Assembly Item Description 1 Bearing Box Assembly 2 Arm Assembly 3 Nylock Nut - Torque to 72-86 ft -Ib (98-117 Nm) 4 Lube Fitting SPECIFICATIONS TAG AXLE ARM Manufacturer............................................................................................................................................................... MCI Type.............................................................................................................................................................. Pivoting Arm CamberAngle.........................................................................,.....................,................................... (.255 positive ±.445) Toe-In..........................................................................,........................................................................_ (0.6 in. ±.06 in.) BEARING BOX Manufacturer............................................................................................................................................................... MCI Type(Effective with 12758).........................................................................................................................Grease Lubed SERVICE TOOLS SPANNER WRENCH SOCKET FOR BEARING BOX RETAINER NUT Manufacturer......................................................................................................................................................... BAS -13 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Application Approval Form r✓ Created by Jesse Mar Fallorin on 03/07/13 Status: Commod Mgr Commodity Manager Information fomm M r Name: on Williams m M r Phone: 204) 287-4885 m Mgr Email: on.Willlamsomcicoach.cam m Mor Comments Supplier Information : lier Name: IIVABCO Her Number : Tier Email: lier Phone: t Address : tate/€'rovi nce : iD or Postal Code: Part Information: Supplier Part Number: 4008646020 up liar Part Description NBS WABCO ECU W/O ESC CI Part Number: 7-08-5021 CI Part Description : BS WABCO ECU W/O ESC Cl Drawing umber: 7-08.5021 rawing Revision: CI Installation Number: 7-14-9530 CI Product Spec Number: uct Spec Revision : MCI Application Information : on Coach Models: All D4500 Comm J4500 D4000 Comm ® D4505 ❑ J4500 Conv D4005 ❑ D-ISTV ❑ E4500 icadon Descripti List of MCI Drawings and Documents Reviewed : ,awing / Spec Number Ilevision VCU scription -14-9530 INSTL - ABS, D40/D45, FIXED/STEERABLE TAG -08-5021 CU - ABS WABCO W/O ESC MCI Attachments for Supplier : Cj ,�; ,Tit %> 07-14-9530_dwg.pdf 07-08-5021_dwg.pdf Supplier Declaration : affirm that the product described in this document has been approved for the installation ana appucanon detailed on this form. Whereas MCI has provided general vehicle application guidelines for the suppliers product, the supplier, as the expert in their product, remains responsible for all aspects of the design integrity , quality and performance of their sub -suppliers component contribution to the product described in this document. Having approved MCI's application of the product and approved the installation, the supplier agrees to warrant their product within the guidelines of the official warranty policy between MCI and the supplier. Supplier Comments: Supplier Request for Equivalent Application Approval Document : Supplier Attachments : Supplier Approval: Supplier Name: Supplier Contact Name: Supplier Contact Title : Supplier Approval Date: Approval History 03/12/13 11:45:57 AM - Jesse Mar Fallorin submitted application to Michael Mi (Mgr App 1). COMMENTS: 03/12/13 11:52:40 AM - Michael Mi forwarded application to CN=Denise Borys/OU=Winnipeg/O=MotorCoach (Commod Mgr). COMMENTS: 03/12/13 12:37:29 PM - Denise Borys assigned application to Jon Williams COMMENTS: Application Approval Form �✓✓ Created by Jorge Alarcon on 04/15/13 Status: Originator 1 Originator: orge Alarcon ate: 4/15/13 Cl Engineering: awrence Ramsay ate: ngineering Comments: n Guard system on D model units (GLI) lication A proval #: 00310 ICl ori Code : riority 1 o'ect Number: 490703 Ilcation T e : it System - ABS/Traction Control N #: 7096 -line Date: 8/16/2013 Commodity Manager Information : omm Mgr Name: omm Mgr Phone: omm Mgr Email: omm Mgr Comments: Supplier Information upplier Name: VVABCO up liar Number: upplier Email: upplier Phone: treet Address: ity s tate/Province: ip or Postal Code: Part Information : upplier Part Number: 00 871 2510, 400 871 800 0, 400 878 200 0 u plier Part Description : n Guard system Cl Part Number: 4-31-118, 04-31-1119, 04-31-1120 14-31-1121 Cl Part Description : n Guard system Cl Drawing Number: rawing Revision Cl Installation Number : 4-31-1121 Cl Product Spec Number: roduct Spec Revision : MCI Application Information : Used on Coach Models: All ❑ D4500 Comm ❑ J4500 ] D4000 Comm N D4505 ❑ J4500 Conv ] D4005 ❑ D-ISTV ❑ E4500 Application Description On Guard System on GLI units List of MCI Drawings and Documents Reviewed : wing / Spec Number 1-1118 1-1119 1-1120 1-1121 MCI Attachments for Supplier : MCI Internal Use Only Attachments : Supplier Declaration : affirm that the product described in this document has been approved for the installation and application detailed on this form. Whereas MCI has provided general vehicle application guidelines for the suppliers product, the supplier. as the expert in their product, remains responsible for all aspects of the design integrity. juality and performance of their sub -suppliers component contribution to the product described in this document. Having approved MCI's application of the product and approved the installation, the supplier agrees :o warrant their product within the guidelines of the official warranty policy between MCI and the supplier. Supplier Comments: Supplier Request for Equivalent Application Approval Document : lupplier Document Number: evision -.escription Cl Engineering Approval ate: CI Engineering Comments Supplier Attachments: Supplier Approval : m Reliability Driverf ATTACHMENT BRAKE SYSTEM Date September 2013 ReliabilityDriven' D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4A-1 SECTION 4A AIR SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONTENTS OF THIS SECTION SUBJECT PAGE GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................. 4A-3 Air Supply Components ........................................... 4A-4 Reservoirs and Related Components ................................ 4A-4 Brake Systems...................................................4A-5 Brake System Operational Checks ................................... 4A-8 Suspension...................................................... 4A-10 Accessory Air System ............................................. 4A-11 MAINTENANCE..................................................... 4A-11 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................... • • • • .. 4A-14 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4A-2 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliabii,en D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4A-3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The pressurized air system operates and maintains several vital systems and components such as service, emergency and park brakes, suspension, and entrance door control. Refer to the Air and Electrical Schematics for more information on the interrelation of the air com- ponents. This subsection provides an overview of the air system and related components. Sections 4B to 4F contain detailed information on the operation and main- tenance of the air system and related components. Air system components are discussed under five catego- ries: • Air Dryer/Oil Separator • Brakes/Air Springs • Air Control Components • Air Compressor/Governor • Antilock Brakes System (ABS) To avoid personal injury when working on or around the air system and its components, the following precautions must be observed: Always chock vehicle wheels. Stop engine when working under a vehicle. Venting vehicle air system pressure may cause vehicle to roll and/or settle. Avoid accessing the suspension components from outside coach wheel well areas. Unintentional actuation of the height control valves with fully inflated air springs could result in serious injury. Always block the coach body adequately during any inspections and/or repairs in these areas. Vent all air pressure from system before disconnecting component hoses. Never connect or disconnect hoses or lines containing air pressure as they will tend to whip while air escapes. Never remove a component or pipe plug unless you are certain all system pressure has been vented. Never exceed recommended air pressure and always wear safety glasses when working on the air system and components. Never look into air jets or direct them toward anyone. Never attempt to disassemble a component until you have read and understand the recommended procedures. Some suspension components contain powerful springs. Injury can result if not properly disassembled. Use only proper tools and observe all precautions pertaining to use of those tools. Disabling the LOW TAG AIR telltale will void structural warranties. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4A-4 Air Supply Components NOTICE D Series Maintenance Manual One or more of the components described below may not be on specific coach configurations. Refer to the Air and Electrical schematics to verify component list. NOTICE Effective with coach 13051, the Low Air Pressure Switch is located on the Front Accessories Tank on all 0 models. Air Compressor The air compressor provides compressed air for all air powered components of the coach. Located at the curbside -rear of the coach, the compressor receives air from the intake manifold. The system's pressure is then built up and maintained by the compressor. The com- pressor is driven by and mounted to the engine's front auxiliary drive. Governor The integrated governor, mounted on the air dryer, monitors pressure in the accessory reservoir and loads the compressor when pressure drops to approximately 105 psi (724 kPa). When pressure rises to approxi- mately 125 psi (862 kPa), the governor unloads the compressor and signals the air dryer to purge. Discharge Air Muffler (Ping Tank) The discharge muffler, located in the engine com- partment, receives air from the air compressor dis- charge hose. The muffler removes some of the noise and contaminants from the air prior to its delivery to the air dryer. The muffler has a drain cock and tube for reg- ular draining. Drain daily. Air Dryer The air dryer (located on the front bulkhead in the front axle area) removes water and contaminants from the compressed air prior to delivery to the reservoir tanks. The dryer has two cycles: charge and purge. During the charge cycle, air is cleaned. During the purge cycle, water and contaminants are expelled. The air dryer operates in charge mode when the compres- sor is loaded (compressing air); it operates in purge mode when the compressor is unloaded. Oil Separator Reliability Driven' The oil separator follows the air dryer in the sys- tem. In high -air -use vehicles, the compressor dis- charge temperatures can allow oil vapor to pass through the dryer. The oil separator removes approxi- mately 95 percent of oil aerosols from the air. Reservoirs and Related Components Supply Reservoir (Wet Tank) The supply reservoir is located to the roadside of center on the rear bulkhead in the front axle area. The auto -draining supply reservoir receives air from the oil separator and supplies air to the remainder of the res- ervoirs. The supply reservoir also supplies air directly to the front -axle kneeling feature. A one-way check valve, located in the supply port of the reservoir, pre- vents backflow of air to the oil separator. Secondary Brake Reservoir (Front Service) The secondary brake reservoir is located curbside of center on the rear bulkhead in the front axle area. The secondary brake reservoir receives air from the supply reservoir and supplies air to the lower portion of the dual service brake valve. Pressure is protected by a one-way check valve in the supply port. Primary Brake Reservoir (Rear Service) The primary brake reservoir is located roadside of center on the front bulkhead in the drive axle area. The primary brake reservoir receives air from the supply reservoir and supplies air to the upper portion of the dual service brake valve and to the rear relay valve. Pressure is protected by a one-way check valve in the supply port. Park Brake Reservoir (Emergency) The park brake reservoir is located curbside of center on the front bulkhead in the drive axle area. The park brake reservoir receives air from the pressure pro- tection valve in the central heat compartment and sup- plies air to the spring brake valve. Pressure is protect- ed by a one-way check valve in the supply port. Rear Rise Reservoir The rear rise reservoir, located on the engine com- partment floor to the rear of the RH tag axle wheel housing, receives supply air from the air/fuel junction block and delivers control air to the rear rise relay valve. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliobilit'yr Driven - Accessory Series Maintenance Manual Page 4A-5 Accessory Reservoir (Suspension) The accessory reservoir is located on the floor of the front roadside service compartment. The accessory reservoir receives air from the front accessory/suspen- sion air junction block and supplies air to various ac- cessory components either directly or through the front accessory/suspension air junction block and rear ac- cessory/suspension junction block. In -Line Air Filter The in-line air filter, located in one of the delivery ports of the supply reservoir, filters air before delivery to the pressure protection valve. This is a serviceable item and is easily replaced. Pressure Protection Valve The pressure protection valve is located on the right side of the central heat compartment immediately above the central heat core. Access the valve through the central heat door in the front of the #3 baggage bay. The pressure protection valve receives air from the supply reservoir and supplies air to the central heat water valve, park brake reservoir, accessory reservoir, rear accessory/suspension junction block, and front ac- cessory/suspension junction block. Rear Accessory/Suspension Air Junction Block The rear accessory/suspension air junction block is located on the crossmember immediately to the rear of and above the drive axle. This junction block receives air from the pressure protection valve of the park brake reservoir and delivers air to the rear axle suspension leveling valves and to the air/fuel junction block. Air/Fuel Junction Block The air/fuel junction block is located in the engine compartment. This junction block receives air from the rear accessory/suspension junction block and delivers air to components located toward the rear of the coach. Front Accessory/Suspension Air Junction Block The front accessory/suspension air junction block is located centrally in the spare tire compartment im- mediately below the entrance area frame. This junction block receives air from the pressure protection valve in the central heat compartment and delivers air to the front axle suspension leveling valve, accessory air res- ervoir, and air components located toward the front of the coach. Emergency Fill Valves Three emergency fill valves are located at the rear of the front side service compartment. Quick connect valves allow charging the primary, secondary and park reservoirs from an external source. 11300 Figure 1. Air System Fill Connections Item Description 1 Rear Air Connection 2 Front Air Connection 3 Service Brake Connection 4 Whole Coach Air Connection Gladhands Air Couplings Gladhands air couplings (if equipped) are located at the front roadside of the coach, behind the front bumper. Gladhands permit air to the supply reservoir and primary service brakes from an outside source during towing. (Refer to Section 3 - Body for mainte- nance information.) Brake Systems Dual Service Brake Valve The dual service brake valve is located on the rear bulkhead of the spare tire compartment below the driv- er's floor frame. Access this valve using the front bumper release lever, located in the front side service compartment. The primary (upper) portion of dual brake valve receives air from the primary service brake reservoir and supplies air to the following components: The relay valve control port (rear axle brakes) The primary stop lamp switch The secondary (lower) portion of the dual brake valve receives air from the secondary service brake reservoir and supplies air to the following components: Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4A-6 D Series Maintenance Manual • The front -axle brake quick -release valve Air Pressure Gauges • The secondary stop -lamp switch • The supply port of the emergency standby valve (see Emergency Brake System) • The relay valve secondary control port (rear axle brakes). The dual brake valve is also connected to the spring brake valve. Relay Valve The relay valve, located on the crossmember im- mediately to the rear and above the drive axle, re- ceives control air pressure from the service brake valve primary portion and supply air from the primary service brake reservoir. The relay valve supplies air to the drive -tag -axle rear service -brake diaphragms. Upon brake pedal release, air exhausts through the exhaust port at the bottom of the relay valve, minimizing brake release time. NOTICE Either control signal from the primary and secondary brake valve delivery ports can actuate (modulate) the relay valve by way of a double check valve integral in the relay valve. Stop Lamp Switches The stop lamp switches (primary and secondary) are located on the rear bulkhead of the spare tire com- partment. These switches close at brake application pressures of 3-5 psi (21-34 kPa) received from the pri- mary or secondary service brake valve delivery ports. This activates the stop lights. Low Air Telltale The low air telltale lamp, located in the left-hand, instrument panel telltale cluster, and the low air buzzer located in the front junction box, activate when the air pressure in the primary or secondary supply reservoirs drops to below 68 +/- 5 psi (469 +/- 34 kPa) and deacti- vate when both these pressures rise above 95 +/- 5 psi (655 +/- 34 kPa). Electrical power for the telltale and buzzer comes from pressure switches located in the rear supply ports (primary and secondary) of the dual, service -brake application valve. Instrument Panel 4 -int Gauge Reliability Driven' 10151 Figure 2. 4 -in -1 Gauge Two air pressure gauges (front/rear) are located within the 4 -in -1 gauge on the driver instrument panel. The left, lower gauge indicates the air pressure in the front brake system (primary) and the right, lower gauge indicates air pressure in the rear brake system (sec- ondary). Linear Air Pressure Scales Figure 3. Air Pressure Scales 25 PSI Graduations Antilock Brake System (ABS) The antilock brake system (ABS) consists of wheel speed sensors, an electronic controller, modulator valves, an ABS telltale, and diagnostic components. ABS affects the service brake system only. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliabil DA D Series Maintenance Manual ABS Wheel -Speed Sensors ABS wheel -speed sensors monitor the rotational speeds of the front and drive axle wheels. The sensors send wheel -speed information to the electronic control- ler unit. ABS Electronic Controller Unit (ECU) The ABS electronic controller unit (ECU) receives signals from the wheel sensors and sends control sig- nals to the appropriate air -brake modulator valve(s) to prevent wheel lockup. Front -Axle, ABS, Modulator Valves The front -axle, ABS, modulator valves, located in the front -axle area to the left and right of the front -brake quick -release valve, receive supply air from the quick - release valve and supply air to the front -axle brake chambers. The modulator valves will reduce or hold delivery air pressure to the brake chamber(s) in re- sponse to signals from the electronic controller when the controller determines a pending wheel lockup situa- tion exists. Rear -Axle ABS, Modulator Valves The drive -axle modulator valves, located on the crossmember to the left and right of the rear -axle relay valve, receive air from the rear -brake relay valve and deliver air to the drive and tag axle service brake cham- bers. The modulator valves will release or hold delivery air pressure to the brake chamber(s) in response to signals from the electronic controller when the control- ler determines a pending drive -axle wheel lockup situa- tion exits. ABS Telltale The ABS telltale is located in the right telltale clus- ter. When the ABS is operating normally, the lamp comes on at ignition and then goes out. If there is a fault in the ABS system, the ABS telltale lights. } If an ABS malfunction is indicated by the ABS telltale lamp, the driver must safely stop the coach and safely check all six wheel ends for an overheat condition. If an overheat condition exists, the coach must NOT be driven until inspected by a qualified technician. NOTICE Date September 2013 Page 4A-7 In the event of an ABS malfunction, the braking system will default to a normal braking system. Exercise caution to avoid potential wheel -lock conditions. Emergency Brake System If the secondary brake system (front) air pressure is lost, the primary brake system (rear) will continue to function normally. The air gauge will indicate second- ary air pressure loss and the low air buzzer will sound. If the primary brake system (rear) air pressure is lost, the secondary brake system (front) will continue to operate normally. The air gauge will indicate the loss of air pressure in the primary air system and the low air buzzer will sound. The loss of air pressure in the primary reservoir will result in the loss of air pressure in the reservoir port of the spring valve (SR -1). Under this condition and with pressure at the control port from the brake service valve secondary delivery port, the spring valve will ex- haust air pressure going from the delivery port to the control port at the relay parking brake valve. At the same time, the relay valve will exhaust air going to the parking brake compartment emergency port in the drive axle dual brake chambers. The dual chamber power springs will then apply the emergency brakes. As soon as the brake service valve is released, the signal to the spring valve control port will re-establish, and the relay valve will deliver air to the brake chamber emergency port, compressing the power spring and re- leasing the emergency brakes. Park Brake The park brake is used when parking the coach. Pull the push/pull park brake control valve to apply the park brakes. To release the park brakes, push the valve and apply a full service brake application. The push/pull is located to the driver's right. If park reservoir pressure drops below approxi- mately 40 psi (276 kPa), the park brake applies auto- matically. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Pae 4A-8 D Series Maintenance Manual Page Reliability Driven' Emergency Park Brake Release An emergency park brake release valve is a manu- ally operated on-off control. The valve is spring loaded and remains in the exhaust position unless constant manual force is applied. The emergency park brake re- lease is located on the floor to the operator's left. Brake System Operational Checks NOTICE Coaches are equipped with an emergency park brake air tank that is isolated from the service brake air tanks. The primary and secondary air gauges monitor only the service brake air tanks. In addition to the park brake valve (located in the driver's area), some coaches may also have an emergency park brake release valve. Operational Check for Coaches Without Emer- gency Park Brake Release Valve NOTICE This configuration can be identified by a singular park brake valve used to apply/release the park brake. 1. Apply park brake. 2. Chock both sides of the tires. 3. Using the service brake foot valve, make several applications until the air pressure gauge on the dash reads below 80 psi. 4. Start the coach. Allow the air system pres- sure to reach governor cutout. Turn the igni- tion OFF. 5. Turn ignition to the RUN position, but do not engage the starter. 6. Monitor the pressure gauges on the dash for any air system leakage. Repair any leaks. 7. Push in the parking brake push/pull knob to release the park brakes. The brake calipers on the drive axle will release. 8. Apply service brake valve. The brake cali- pers on all axles will engage. 9 Exhaust the primary service air tank located just in front of the drive axle. The air pres- sure of the primary gauge in the driver's ar- ea will indicate the loss of air pressure. 10. Apply the service brake valve. The front and drive axle brakes will engage. 11. With the primary service air tank still without air pressure, exhaust the secondary air tank mounted behind the front axle. Loss of air brake pressure in the secondary brake tank will be indicated by the secondary air pres- sure gauge in the driver's instrument panel. When the air pressure in the secondary brake system drops below a nominal 45 psi, the park brake valve will not automatically actuate and the brakes on the drive axle will not engage. 12. With the primary and secondary service res- ervoirs empty, apply the park brake valve. The brakes on the drive axle Will engage. Release the park brake valve and the drive axle brakes will disengage. This can be re- peated approximately three times until the park brake reservoir located on the right hand side in the drive axle area is below 45 psi air pressure. When the air pressure drops below 45 psi in the park brake reser- voir, the park brake valve will automatically actuate, but the drive axle brakes will not re- lease. 13. Exhaust the park brake tank. The drive axle brakes will remain applied. 14. To check the secondary brake system, start the coach and build up the air pressure to air governor cutout. Turn the ignition OFF. 15. Turn ignition to the RUN position, but do not engage the starter. 16. Release the park brakes. 17. Drain the secondary service reservoir. 18. Apply the service brake valve. The brake calipers on the drive and tag axles will en - 09—e. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4A-9 Reliability Driven Operational Check for Coaches With Emergen- cy Park Brake Release Valve NOTICE This configuration can be identified by both a park brake valve and an emergency park brake release valve. The park brake valve is used to apply/ release the park brake under normal operating conditions. The emergency park brake release valve (clearly labeled) is used in the event there is a sudden loss of air in the service brake air system below 45 psi, which would actuate the park brake system. If the emergency park brake release valve is pressed and held by the driver, the system applies air to the park brake system, allowing the operator to move the coach to the side of the road, if required. 1. Apply park brake. 2. Chock both sides of the tires. 3. Using the service brake foot valve, make several applications until the air pressure gauge on the dash reads below 80 psi. 4. Start the coach. Allow the air system pres- sure to reach governor cutout. Turn the igni- tion OFF. 5. Turn ignition to the RUN position, but do not engage the starter. 6. Monitor the pressure gauges on the dash for any air system leakage. Repair any leaks. 7. Release the park brake. The brakes on the drive axle will release. 8. Apply the service brake. The brakes on all axles will engage. 9. Exhaust the primary service air tank located just in front of the drive axle. The air pres- sure of the primary gauge in the driver's ar- ea will indicate the loss of air pressure. 10. Apply the service brake valve. The front and drive axle brakes will engage. 11. With the primary service air tank still without air pressure, exhaust the secondary air tank mounted behind the front axle. When the air pressure in the brake system drops below a nominal 45 psi, the park brake valve will au- tomatically actuate and the brakes on the drive axle will engage. 12. With still no air pressure in the primary and secondary air tanks from Step 11, apply and hold down the emergency park brake re- lease valve. The brakes on the drive axle will release. When the force holding down the emergency park break release valve is re- moved, the air in the system will exhaust, and the ddia axle brakes will engage. NOTICE There should be enough air to allow three park brake overrides before the system is exhausted. 13. To check the secondary brake system, start the coach and build up the air pressure to air governor cutout. 14. Turn the ignition OFF. Brake Chambers Single -diaphragm MGM service chambers are used on the front and tag axle brakes. MGM spring brakes, which have independent service and spring chambers, are used on the drive axle brakes. Brake Interlock Systems There are three interlock systems employed in the brake system. Two relate to the parking brake release and the other pertains to the drive and tag axle service brake application. Service Brake Interlock: This system requires a 25 psi (172 kPa) application of the service brakes to release the parking brake once the push/pull (PP -1) has been applied. Wheelchair Interlock: The wheelchair lift master switch located on the left side operator panel must be turned off in order to release the parking brakes. Entrance Door Interlock: The entrance door must be closed in order to release the pressure signal to the drive and tag axle relay valve control port (which is applying the service brakes at these axles). Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Pae 4A-10 D Series Maintenance Manual Page Reliability Driven" Suspension The suspension system automatically maintains ride height using leveling valves, air springs, and vari- ous suspension components. Leveling valves adjust air spring pressure. A pressure protection valve prevents over pressurizing the air springs. Tag axle air springs also have manual control valves. NOTICE Refer to Section 12 for suspension system maintenance information. Air Springs Air springs used at each axle optimize load -carry- ing capacity and ride quality. Leveling Valves One leveling valve is located at the center of the front axle and two are located on either side of the drive axle suspension. These valves receive air pres- sure from the suspension/accessory air blocks, re- sponding to maintain air -spring ride -height at the front and drive axles. The front leveling valve controls only ride height, while the drive axle leveling valves control both ride height and side-to-side leveling. The tag axle air springs receive air pressure from the drive axle leveling valves to provide a roughly two to one load sharing on the drive and tag axles. The lev- eling valves are damped to respond to changes in stat- ic load (payload) but to not respond to dynamic chang- es (road irregularities) and so consume little or no air over the road. Rear Rise The rear rise feature prevents rear bumper scuffing in off-highway situations by increasing air pressure to the drive and tag axle air springs. This raises the rear bumper approximately 3 in. (76 mm) above normal ride height. The control valves are mounted on the rear rise air tank in the engine compartment near the RH wheel housing. Check valves and a relay valve are mounted above the drive axle. The rear rise switch is on the op- erator's switch panel. When the coach is in rise mode, a telltale lights and an alarm sounds. Kneeling The kneeling control, located in the front of the #1 roadside baggage compartment, optimizes kneel and recovery air pressures to the front axle air springs and controls a remote mounted relay valve to minimize kneel and recovery times. Air is supplied from the sup- ply reservoir. The kneeling feature is activated by a switch on the driver's console. When the coach is in the rise mode, a telltale lights and an alarm sounds. Tag Axle Unload Tag axle unloading valves, located in the engine compartment forward of the curbside rear service door, provide for short term unloading of the tag axle air sus- pension for tire changing or hoisting. A pressure switch downstream of the unloading valves senses the low air when the tag axle is unloaded and activates the low tag air telltale in the driver's area. NOTICE Driving with the tag axle unloaded can result in structural damage to the coach. Disabling the LOW TAG AIR telltale voids structural warranties. Double Check Valves Double check valves are used where it is neces- sary to supply air from, or exhaust air to, two different components used to control a third component. They have two supply ports and one delivery port and, under normal conditions, when one supply port is open to the delivery port, the other supply port is closed. Location and function of double check valves is as follows: On the delivery port of the front axle lev- eling valve to control air pressure in the front axle suspension bellows using air supplied either from (or exhausted by) the leveling valve to maintain ride height or, to provide for quick recovery from or quick kneeling during a kneeling cycle using air supplied from (or exhausted by) the kneeling feature relay valve. On the delivery line of the drive axle lev- eling valves to control air pressure in the rear axle suspension bellows using air supplied either from (or exhausted by) the leveling valves to maintain ride height or, to provide for quick rising or quick recovery during a high-rise cycle using air supplied from (or exhausted by) the rear high-rise feature relay valve. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 �W! D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven - Tag Axle Caster Control Valve The self -steering tag axle solenoid control valve automatically operates the air cylinders of the latching and locking mechanism of the castering system in con- junction with the speed switch. The tag axle caster con- trol valve is mounted to the right of the rear junction box. Accessory Air System Hot Water Valve An electrically -controlled, air -actuated, on-off type hot water valve is used on this coach. The main valve is mounted adjacent to the pressure protection valve in the central heat compartment. Air Cylinders Various air cylinder actuators are fitted throughout the coach, such as the entrance door lock overrule valve and the wheelchair lift sliding door overrule valve. The bi-part door is air -actuated and the wheelchair passenger door is air -assist. MAINTENANCE Maintenance procedures for specific components can be found in Sections 4B -4F and in other sections in this manual. Follow the maintenance intervals speci- fied in these sections or those given in the Preventive Maintenance Schedule for the air system in Section 10. To avoid personal injury when working on or around the air system and its components, the following precautions must be observed. Always block the vehicle wheels. Stop engine when working under a vehicle. Venting vehicle air system pressure may cause the vehicle to roll or settle. Avoid accessing the suspension components from outside coach wheel well areas. Unintentional actuation of the height control valves with fully inflated air springs could result in serious injury. Always block the coach body adequately during inspections or repairs in these areas. Date September 2013 Page 4A-11 Vent all air pressure from the system before disconnecting component hoses. Never connect or disconnect hoses or lines containing air pressure as they can whip when air escapes. Never remove a component or pipe plug unless you are certain that system pressure has been vented. Never exceed recommended air pressure and always wear safety glasses when working on the air system and components. Never look into air jets or direct them toward anyone. Never remove, install, or disassemble a component until you have read and understood the recommended procedures. Some components contain powerful springs and injury can result if not properly handled. Use only correct tools and observe all precautions pertaining to use of those tools. Disabling the LOW TAG AIR telltale voids structural warranties. Brake linings contain non -asbestos fibers that may be harmful. Read the cautions pertaining to servicing brake linings before beginning work. Service Intervals If component part does not pass the service in- spection/check, perform the required preventive main- tenance as prescribed per service literature. Warranty Policy Preventive maintenance or component servicing is not warrantable. Haldex warranty will be void if preven- tive maintenance is not conducted. When working on air system components the following precautions should be observed. 1. Stop the engine when working under a vehicle. Always block the vehicle wheels to prevent a fore or aft roll. Bleeding off system pressure may cause the vehicle to roll. Keep hands away from brake chamber push rods and brake adjusters; they may apply as system pressure drops. 2. Never connect or disconnect a hose or line containing air pressure. It may whip as air escapes. Never remove a component or a pipe plug unless you are certain all system air pressure has been exhausted. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4A-12 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven - 3. Never exceed recommended working air pressure and always wear safety glasses when working with pressurized air. Never look directly into component ports or direct a pressurized air flow at anyone. 4. Never attempt to disassemble a component until you have read and understood all recommended procedures. Some components contain powerful springs and injury can result if not properly disassembled. Use only proper tools and observe all precautions pertaining to the use of those tools. Air Compressors For detailed information on the air compressor, re- fer to the appropriate section in this manual. NOTICE Applications may vary, consult your engine manufacturer's service manuals for specifics. Check Compressor Build -Up Time: a. With the engine shut off, open the air tank drain valve (wet, primary and secondary) and allow all of the air pressure to escape prior to closing the valve. NOTICE If the vehicle air gauges are not easily read (5 psi increments), install a pressure gauge in the wet tank or in the governor line to the wet tank. b. Start the engine and run it at maxi- mum governed speed. C. Using a stop watch, record the pres- sure build-up time from 85 to 100 psi. If necessary, repeat the test several times to verity the accuracy of the re- sults. 1. 25 seconds or less no service is required. 2. 26 seconds or more require un - loader servicing. NOTICE The best way to evaluate a compressor's performance is to compare today's build-up time to what it was originally. If the build-up time has increased more than 30 percent, service the unloaders. For example, if original buildup time was 10 seconds, then today's was at 13 seconds, service the unloaders. If build-up time remains slow after servicing the unloaders, check for blocked or restricted discharge line, air dryer or inlet air filter (if used). 2. Compressor Air Filter Inspection: a. Hold a strong light next to the air fil- ter. If the light passes through the fil- ter, consider it suitable. If any dark spots are noticed, replace the filter. Haldex does not recommend clean- ing the filter with compressed air or solvents. NOTICE When checking unloader operations, it will be necessary to purchase a new unloader gasket for that particular model of compressor. Brake Actuators Actuators Mounting Nut Torques Stud Size Torque Torque Found On Ft -Lb Nm 7/16-14 40-59 54-67 T-9, T-12, T-16 1/2-13 60-75 81-101 T-16 T16, T-20, T-24, T-30, 5/8-11 100-145 136-197 T-36, Maxi -I, Maxi -R -Series HRPT, Camtite, 5/8-18 100-145 136-197 N34000, N36000 3/4-16 110-150 149-203 T 50 Non -U.S. MI6 x 1.5 100-155 136-210 Applications Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 W D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4A-13 Reliabil NOTICE NOTICE All tests should be done with the engine off, If the vehicle fails this test, it should be wheels blocked and at full system pressure (120 immediately placed in "Dead Line Status". psi). If the vehicle air pressure decreases rapidly 5. Parking Brake during this inspection, we recommend the use of a. With the parking brake applied, start shop air to maintain vehicle air pressure only. the engine. 2. Air Leakage Test (Parking/Emergency b. Apply the service brakes and place Brakes Released) the vehicle in drive. a. Have the driver release the parking C. Slowly release the service brakes. If brake and emergency brakes. the vehicle starts moving, the vehicle b. With a stethoscope, listen to each has failed the test. Immediately place spring brake actuator for the sound the vehicle in "Dead Line Status". Do of air leakage. If needed, apply liquid not exceed idle speed. soap to all air line connections and at the seam between actuator housing and the diaphragm cover. Air Dryers NOTICE NOTICE Minor air leaks in the seam area around the To perform the test properly, completely drain the diaphragm may be corrected by tightening the wet tank prior to a day in service. Allow the vehicle assembly clamp band. to complete it's normal daily route. At the end of 3. Air Leakage Test (Brakes Applied) the day, perform the performance inspection test a. With parking brake released, have outlined below. the driver make a hard drive appli- 1, Air Dryer Performance Inspection: cation. a. With a container under the wet tank b. With a stethoscope, listen to each drain valve (petcock), open the drain brake actuator and service chamber valve and collect the moisture that for the sound of air leakage. If need- has accumulated in the wet tank, ed, apply liquid soap to all air line (for the one day of service). connections and at the seam be- b. Measure the amount of moisture in tween actuator housing and the dia- the container: phragm cover. 2 ounces or under - 4. Parking Brake/Emergency Brake Test (Air) ctio cates the dryer is function - a. Have the driver release and apply ing properly. the parking brake/emergency 0 3 ounces or more - Verify brakes several times. the purge time is greater b. Look at the brake adjuster as the than 17 seconds. If so, parking brake valve is being applied replace the coalescent filter and released. Every time you hear and desiccant canister. the exhaust of air, the brake adjust- ers should move and apply the park- ing brake/emergency brake. Dryer purge time is the time in seconds that it takes to drop the purge volume pressure from 120 psi to 5 psi. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Intl, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4A-14 D Series Maintenance Manual TROUBLESHOOTING Reliability Driven" Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Condition Air pressure drops quickly with engine stopped and brakes released. Possible Cause 1 Leaking brake valve tubing or hose line. Leaking elsewhere in the air brake system. 2 Air pressure does not rise to normal. Defective air gauge (registering incorrectly). Excessive leakage. Reservoir drain cock open. Governor out of adjustment or defective. Defective compressor. 3 Air pressure rises to normal too slowly. Excessive leakage. Clogged air cleaner. Engine speed too low. Worn compressor. _ Excessive carbon in compressor cylinder head or discharge line. 4 Air pressure rises above normal. Defective air gauge (registering incorrectly). Governor out of adjustment or defective. Unloading valve cavities or unloading passage in compressor cylinder head blocked with carbon. Compressor unloading valves stuck closed. 5 System pressure not maintained. Restriction in compressor inlet or discharge lines or cavities. Leaking or broken discharge valves. Inlet valves worn excessively or stuck open. Excessive air system leakage. Excessive wear on piston rings and/or cylinders. 6 Noisy compressor operation. Excessively worn drive coupling. Worn or burned out bearings. Excessive wear (improper lubrication to the compressor). Restrictions in the cylinder head or discharge line. 7 Compressor passes excessive oil. Oil supply lines to compressor or return lines flooded. Back pressure from engine crankcase. Excessive engine oil pressure. Defective oil seal or oil seal ring in end cover. Piston rings improperly installed. Excessive ring or cylinder wear. 8 Compressor knocks continuously or intermittently. Loose drive coupling. Worn or burnt out bearings. Excessive carbon deposits in compressor cylinder head. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliahi±e� D Series Maintenance Manual TROUBLESHOOTING (CONTINUED) Date September 2013 Page 4A-15 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries InYI, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Condition Possible Cause 9 Compressor fails to unload. Dryer is constantly cycling or purging. Defective or worn unloader pistons or bores. Inlet cavity restrictions. Defective governor. Cavity beneath the unloader pistons restricted. Unloader mechanism binding. 10 Excessive system leakage. Defective check valve between air dryer and wet reservoir or at air dryer outlet. Defective governor, Leakage at purge valve in air dryer end cover (control side). Compressor unloader mechanism leaking excessively. 11 Water in air system reservoirs. Desiccant requires replacement leakage (see Condition #10). Air system was charged from outside air source, bypassing dryer. Air dryer not purging (see Condition #15). Purge (air exhaust) time insufficient due to excessive system. 12 Air dryer safety valve popping off or exhausting air. Desiccant cartridge plugged or saturated Defective check valve, fittings, hose, or tubing between air dryer and supply reservoir, Safety valve out of adjustment. Air pressure in the air brake system above normal. Frozen or blocked air line. 13 Constant exhaust of air at air dryer purge valve exhaust or unable to build system. Air dryer purge valve leaking excessively pressure. Air dryer purge valve leaking excessively pressure. Defective governor. Purge valve frozen open, faulty heater or thermostat, faulty wiring, blown fuse. Inlet and outlet connections reversed Defective check valve between air dryer and wet reservoir. Kinked or blocked (plugged) discharge line. Excessive system leakage. 14 Air dryer does not purge or exhaust air, Broken, kinked, frozen, plugged, or disconnected purge control line. Faulty air dryer purge valve. Desiccant material being expelled from air dryer purge 15 valve exhaust (may look like whitish liquid, paste, or small beads). This condition is almost always accompanied by one or more of the Conditions 11-16; see related causes for these condition above. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries InYI, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4A-16 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' TROUBLESHOOTING (CONTINUED) Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Condition Possible Cause Defective cloth covered perforated plate in air dryer desiccant cartridge or improperly rebuilt desiccant cartridge. 16 Unsatisfactory desiccant life. Compressor passing excessive oil. Faulty heater and thermostat, wiring, fuse not allowing purge (cold weather operation only). Excessive system pressure built up within air dryer, 17 Air dryer end cover separates from air dryer housing during operation. caused by either plugged desiccant, check valve failure, frozen or obstructed discharge line (between air dryer and wet reservoir) or governor failure in conjunction with safety valve failure. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 lbi D Series Maintenance Manual Page 41131-1 Reliability Driven SECTION 413 AIR DRYER - WABCO CONTENTS OF THIS SECTION SUBJECT PAGE GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................. 413-3 Components.....................................................4B-3 Operation.......................................................4B-4 MAINTENANCE..................................................... 413-4 Inspection.......................................................4B-4 Desiccant Cartridge Replacement ................................... 413-6 AIR DRYER TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 4B-7 SPECIFICATIONS................................................... 413-9 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date Page September 2013 4113-2 D Series Maintenance Manual THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Reliability Driven Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 UUM Reliability Driven D Series Maintenance Manual Page 46-3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The coach may be equipped with the Meritor Wab- co System Saver 1200 Plus single cartridge air dryer with integrated governor. It includes a pressure relief safety valve, replaceable coalescing spin -on cartridge, built-in heater, and a muffler for noise suppression.The spin -on cartridge allows for simplified maintenance and requires less than 5 minutes to replace. Components System Saver Air Dryer 5 4 45295 Figure 1. Wabco System Saver Air Dryer Item Description 1 Desiccant Cartridge 2 Air Dryer Supply Hose 3 Airline to Reservoir Assembly 4 Heater Electrical Connection 5 Muffler 6 Air Dryer Assembly The air dryer includes a desiccant cartridge, heat- er, outlet check valve, pressure relief valve, purge valve, turbo cut-off valve, heater power harness, and a purge silencer (muffler). • Desiccant Cartridge: A cylindrical steel housing containing the filter elements and desiccant needed to filter and dry system air. Spin-on/spin-off design allows quick and easy maintenance. • Heater: Located in the air dryer base, the heater prevents water that collects in the air dryer from freezing. It consists of a cylindri- cal resistive -type heating element and a small circular thermostat. • Outlet Check Valve: A valve located in the outlet port (port 21) of the air dryer. It pre- vents air from flowing back through the air dryer and escaping out the purge valve during a compressor unload cycle. • Pressure Relief Valve: An attached valve that protects the air dryer from over -pres- surization. • Purge Valve: A valve located on the bottom of the air dryer base that remains open during a compressor unload cycle. It allows collected moisture, condensation, and con- tamination to be expelled from the air dryer during a purge cycle. • Turbo Cut-off Valve: A valve located in the inlet port of the air dryer. It closes the path between the air compressor and the air dryer purge valve during compressor unload. This prevents a loss of turbo- charger boost pressure during a compres- sor unload cycle, thereby maintaining boost pressure for maximum engine horsepower. • Heater Power Harness: Twelve -inch cable with Metri-Pack plug provides electrical connection to air dryer heating unit. • Purge Silencer (Muffler): Used to reduce the noise level of an air dryer purge. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4113-4 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven Operation MAINTENANCE During system pressure build-up, compressed air Inspection passes into the air dryer where the filter system re- moves contaminants and passes the air into the drying Periodically inspect the air dryer (refer to Section stage. 10 for intervals): Moisture -laden air passes through the desiccant bed in the air dryer cartridge and moisture is retained by the desiccant. Moisture that condenses out also col- lects in the base of the dryer. When the compressor unloads, the water is expelled and dried air flows back through the dryer, drying the desiccant for the next cy- cle. Air Dryer Cycle 1. The governor turns the compressor on when supply tank pressure drops below cut- in pressure, between 100 psi and 110 psi (689-758 kPa) depending on governor settings. 2. Compressed air passes into the air dryer at the inlet port. • Moisture -laden air and contami- nants pass through the desiccant. • Moisture is retained by the desic- cant and also collects in the base of the dryer. • Contaminants are removed as air passes through the desiccant bed. 3. The governor turns the compressor off when system reaches cut-out pressure, between 120 psi and 130 psi (827-896 kPa) depend- ing on governor settings. 4. When the compressor unloads, the purge valve opens: • Dry air flows from the integrated purge tank back through the air dryer. Air can be felt and heard flow- ing from the purge valve for an extended period of time. • Dry system air flows back through the air dryer to regenerate the des- iccant. 10 psi (69 kPa) is taken from the supply and secondary tanks for the regeneration. Check for moisture in the air system by opening reservoirs, drain cocks, and drain valves. If water is present, the desiccant cartridge may require replacement, but first verify that one of the following conditions is not at fault: a. An outside air source that bypassed the drying bed has been used to charge the system. b. Air usage is exceptionally high due to accessory air demands or an unusu- al requirement that does not allow the compressor to load and unload normally. Check for high air system leakage. C. The vehicle has been operated in a climate where the daily temperature range exceeds 30°, resulting in water condensing in the air brake system. NOTICE During inspection for water, a small amount of oil may be detected. This should not be considered a reason to replace the desiccant. 2. Check the mounting bolts for tightness. Torque to 22-30 ft -Ib (30-40 Nm) if neces- sary. 3. Perform the Heater Resistance, Leak, and Operation Tests described below. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven" Heater Resistance Test Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4B-5 To avoid damaging components, Meritor WABCO recommends performing this resistance check with the heater in place. NOTICE NOTE. The dryer temperature must be in thermostat closed range (below 45°F) in order to check heater resistance. 1. Set volt -ohmmeter to ohms. 2. Disconnect vehicle harness at the heater. 3. Remove the two screws holding the heater body in place. 4. With wires connected and correctly secured, touch one probe to each heater element lead. 5. Measure the resistance. Acceptable resis- tance is 5.0-7.0 ohms for the 24 Volt unit. 6. If resistance is less than 5.0 ohms, replace the heater. 7. Reinstall components and vehicle harness. Leak Test 1. Drain air from all system tanks. 2. Close reservoir draincocks. 3. Start the vehicle. Allow air system pressure to build while engine idles. 4. When the system reaches cut-out pressure there will be a purge, or strong blast of air, followed by a mild flow which will last 10--25 seconds. 5. Shut off the engine. 6. Apply a soap solution to each connection that contains pressurized air. Check the connections to see if soap solution bubbles. 7. If no soap bubbles appear, the connections are sealed properly. 8. If soap bubbles do appear, the connections are NOT sealed properly. Repair Leaking Connections 1. Drain all reservoirs. 2. Remove leaking connection. 3. Inspect the connectors and ports for dam- aged threads or cracks. Replace if neces- sary. 4. Apply pipe sealant to the connection. 5. Repeat leak test until all connections are sealed. Operation Test 1. Check compressor loaded and unloaded cycle. When the compressor is in the loaded cycle, air pressure will build to approximately 120 psi (827 kPa) (cut-out pressure). When the compressor reaches the unloaded cycle, the air dryer will purge, initiating regeneration of the air dryer. 2. During the regeneration cycle, which lasts from 10-25 seconds on regeneration style air dryers, the supply and secondary tanks will drop approximately 10 psi (69 kPa) in pressure. Check the secondary air gauge on the vehicle dash panel to verify this drop. NOTICE A 10 psi (69 kPa) drop in pressure in the secondary air system is normal for Meritor WABCO System Saver Series regeneration style air dryers. On purge -tank style air dryers, the regeneration cycle time is dependent on the size of the tank. There should be no visible pressure drop during regeneration. If there is a visible pressure drop, perform a check valve leak test on the system check valves. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4113-6 D Series Maintenance Manual Desiccant Cartridge Replacement Air Dryer Removal PIU -1W, ;1 1111 To prevent serious eye injury, always wear safe eye protection when you perform vehicle maintenance or service. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Support the vehicle with safety stands. Do not work under a vehicle supported only by jacks. Jacks can slip and fall over. Serious personal injury can result. Remove all air from the air system before you service any air system component. Pressurized air can cause serious personal injury. 1. A replacement kit contains one cartridge and one O-ring. 2. Loosen and remove the old cartridge. Use a strap wrench if necessary. NOTICE NOTE: If seats do not ensure a tight seal, replace the air dryer. 3. Remove and discard O-ring from dryer base. 4. Inspect and clean seal seats. Repair any mi- nor damage. 5. Lubricate and install the new O-ring on stem. 6. Thread the replacement cartridge onto the air dryer base until the seal touches the base. Tighten the cartridge clockwise one additional turn. Do not overtighten. Reliability Driven' 1. Drain all pressure from the air system. Disconnect all air lines. Use markers to label the lines for proper reinstallation. 2. Disconnect the heater electrical plug from the heater receptacle. 3. Remove the three mounting bolts. Remove the air dryer from its mounting location. Air Dryer Installation 1. Attach the new unit to the frame or mounting bracket with new mounting capscrews and washers. 2. Torque mounting bolts to 22-30 ft -Ib (30-40 Nm). 3. Connect heater electrical plug to heater re- ceptacle. 4. Reconnect all system air lines. 5. Test the installation for correct operation. Refer to the procedure in this section. Integrated Governor Replacement 1. Remove the two mounting bolts, governor and gasket. Discard the gasket. 2. Install the governor and a new gasket in po- sition on the air dryer. 3. Install the mounting bolts and tighten to 14.75 ft -Ib (20 Nm). Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven - Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4B-7 AIR DRYER TROUBLESHOOTING Condition Possible Cause Drycr leaks from purge Purge valve frozen open (cold weather valve during compressor operation). loaded cycle. The leak may cause excessive compressor cycling or prevent the system from building air pressure. Debris under purge valve seat, such as particles from fittings or air inlet line. Regeneration cycle too long (more than 30 seconds), accompanied by loss of pressure in the supply tank. Regeneration cycle too short (less than 10 seconds). Water in purge tank. No regeneration cycle. No airflow from purge valve after initial purge blast (dryer decompression). Air dryer does not purge when compressor unloads (no blast of air from purge valve). Purge valve washer installed upside-down Wrong air line connected to dryer port 4 (unloader port). Purge valve snap ring not fully seated in groove. Outlet check valve not seating High air system demands during compressor unloaded cycle. Pressure -controlled check valve not installed in system or not working properly. Air governor not working properly Block in purge tank line. Solution Check heater. Repair/replace i€ necessary. Make sure governor to dryer port 4 line is free of water/oil. Remove and inspect purge valve and clean water/oil from top of piston. Disassemble and clean purge valve. Remove cartridge and clean dryer sump area. Ensure lip on aluminum washer faces 1 DOWN, away from dryer. Verify correct air line installation and correct as needed. Seat snap ring fully into groove. Inspect and replace outlet check valve as needed. Increase air system capacity or reduce air demands. Check and replace pressure-controiiea check valve as needed. Inspect air governor. Repair/replace per manufacturer's instructions. Clear blockage. Replace desiccant cartridge. Blocked line/pinched line from purge tank. I Clear/repair line. Air line between governor and air dryer port 4 kinked or plugged. Purge valve stuck closed. Air governor not working properly. Cut-out pressure never achieved by air compressor. Repair air line. Replace purge valve. Inspect air governor. Repair/replace per manufacturer's instructions. _ Check for air leaks in system and repair as needed. If no leaks in system, check compressor output. Repair/replace per manufacturer's instructions. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date Page September 2013 4B-8 D Series Maintenance Manual AIR DRYER TROUBLESHOOTING (Continued) Condition Possible Cause Air dryer purges too often, Leak in line between supply tan perhaps as frequently as governor. every 15 seconds, Leaks in the air system., accompanied by excessive Excessive air system demands. cycling of the compressor. Outlet check valve not seating. Air governor has less than 16 psi (110 kPa) range. Leaking air compressor unloader(s). Air flows out of purge valve Turbo cut-off valve not sealing. entire time compressor is Outlet check valve not seating. unloaded. Rapid "spitting" of air from Compressor not completely unloading when purge valve in small cut-out pressure is reached. amounts. Frequency varies with engine speed. Air leak at turbo cut-off Temperature of air coming into dryer is too valve vent. Rubber seal high — not enough cooling takes place damaged or missing. before dryer inlet. Valve bore worn excessively. Piston is broken. Air dryer frozen (water No electrical power to heater connector. collecting in base of dryer is freezing). Low voltage to heater connector. Heater assembly not working. Wrong voltage air dryer used; i.e., 12 -volt air dryer used in a 24 -volt system. Solution r air line. neliabilify Driven" Repair leaks. Increase air system capacity or reduce air demand. Inspect and replace outlet check valve as needed. Replace air governor. Inspect compressor. Repair/replace per manufacturer's instructions. Replace turbo cut-off valve. Replace outlet check valve. Inspect compressor. Repair/replace per manufacturer's instructions. Move dryer farther from compressor. Add additional compressor discharge line before air dryer. Add cooling coil or heat exchanger before air dryer. NOTE: Inlet air temperature must not exceed 175°F (80°C). Inspect valve bore for wear. If a new turbo cut-off valve does not seal in a clean, lubricated bore, replace the air dryer. Replace the turbo cut-off valve. Check for a blown fuse. Repair heater circuit. NOTE: There must be power to the heater connector the entire time the vehicle's ignition is ON. Repair cause of low voltage, such as poor electrical ground, bad connections, corroded wire splices, etc. Replace heater assembly. Replace with correct voltage air dryer. Copyright 2013 – Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliability Driven - AIR Series Maintenance Manual Page 4B-9 AIR DRYER TROUBLESHOOTING (Continued) Condition Possible Cause Solution No air pressure build-up in system. Air dryer not plumbed correctly (connections reversed). Ensure compressor discharge line is plumbed to air dryer port 1, and air dryer port 21 is connected to vehicle's supply tank. Wrong air line connected to dryer port 4. Ensure dryer port 4 line is connected to the "UNL' port of the air governor. Air governor not working properly. Inspect governor per manufacturer's instructions. Repair or replace as needed. Air system leaks, such as compressor Locate leak(s) and repair. discharge line, air dryer, reservoirs, brake or suspension valves, etc. Air dryer leaks from purge valve. Refer to purge valve conditions listed in this chart. Water, oil, or sludge in air system tanks. Desiccant contaminated with oil. Replace desiccant. Inspect compressor per manufacturer's instructions. Water in system tanks. Desiccant saturated. Maintenance interval not followed. Replace desiccant cartridge. SPECIFICATIONS AIR DRYER Manufacturer............................:...............................................................,........................................I...... Meritor WABCO Type......................................................................................................................................... System Saver 1200 Plus Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4B-10 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Relllll l!�en D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-1 SECTION 4C BRAKES, DISC - EX225 CONTENTS OF THIS SECTION SUBJECT PAGE General Description...............................................4C-3 Caliper Assembly ................................................. Components.....................................................4C-7 4C-21 Operation.......................................................4C-8 MAINTENANCE..................................................... 4C-12 Inspection....................................................... LfLf-10 Caliper Assembly ................................................. 4C-21 Brake Pads ......................................................4C-23 PistonBoots .....................................................4C-29 Caliper Bridge....................................................4C-30 TESTING...........................................................4C-34 TROUBLESHOOTING................................................ 4C-38 CHART 4C-40 TORQUE .................................................... Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4c-2 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliability Driven' D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The EX225 air -actuated disc brakes are basic equipment on the front, drive, and tag axles. The brake can be installed on any axle can be used for vehicle parking when equipped with a service spring brake chamber. The basic operation of the caliper is simple, but it is important that the features of the load insensitive auto- matic adjuster are fully understood. It is essential that the correct service procedures be observed to ensure that the brake gives satisfactory service throughout its working life. MORE 43908 Figure 1. Hub and Rotor, EX225 Disc Brakes with Unitized Wheel Ends and Pro-Torq® Nut For Front Axles (Assembly) Item 1 2 Description Hub Assembly (With Studs, Nuts, and Plug) Stud - Wheel 3 Plug - End Play Port 4 Wheel Nut 5 Rotor 6 Bearing Assembly - Complete with Tone Ring 7 Kit, Fasteners, UWE HUB (12 pcs. Capscrew and Washer)* 8 Washer, Hardened 9 Nut - Pro-Torq 3-1/2 in. Hex with Keeper 10 Keeper - Pro-Torq Nut Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-4 D Series Maintenance Manual 11 12 Reliability Driven' 1S 43909 Figure 2. Hub and Rotor, EX225 Disc Brakes With Preset® Hubs For Drive Axles (Assembly) Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliability Driven" D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-5 OS 43908 Figure 3. Hub and Rotor, EX225 Disc Brakes with Unitized Wheel Ends and Pro-Torq® Nut For Tag Axles (Assembly) Item Description 1 Huh Assembly (With Studs, Nuts, and Plug) 2 Stud - Wheel 3 Plug - End Play Port 4 Wheel Nut 5 Rotor 6 Bearing Assembly - Complete with Tone Ring 7 Kit, Fasteners, UWE HUB (12 pcs. Capscrew and Washer) 8 Washer, Hardened Nut - Pro-Torq 3-1/2 in. Hex with Keeper F109 Keeper - Pro-Torq Nut Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries InYI, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4c-6 D Series Maintenance Manual ReliabilityDriveri 10 12 . 11 6 9 Q 4 ti 10714 Figure 4. Hub and Rotor, EX225 Disc Brakes With Preset® Hubs For Tag Axles (Assembly) Item Description 1 capscrew 2 Hubcap 3 Pro-Torq Spindle Nut 4 Rotor -to -Hub Capscrew 5 Wheel Stud 6 Preset. Hub 7 Rotor 8 EX225 Disc Brake 9 Torque Plate -to -Spindle Capscrew 10 Torque Plate -to -Caliper Capscrew 11 Torque Plate 12 1 Spindle Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven' Components Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-7 The Meritor EX225 Air Disc Brake assembly con- tains several major components. These components and other related parts will be discussed below and in the MAINTENANCE portion of this section. Lining Assemblies The brake linings (pads) are the components most likely to require servicing. Two bonded lining assem- blies are required for each brake caliper. The brake lin- ing assemblies are located on the inner and outer rotor surfaces and supported by the carrier. Torque Plate The torque plate holds the carrier in position at all times and is the only brake component rigidly attached to the axle. The torque plate provides mounting holes for carrier and axle attaching bolts. Carrier The carrier is a heavy casting that straddles the ro- tor. It is mounted rigidly to the axle via the torque plate. The carrier locates the caliper via the caliper slide pins, which are fully enclosed. The carrier also provides the abutment surfaces for the brake lining assemblies, which transfer the braking load directly to the axle, rather than through the caliper slide pins. The slide pins guide only the squeezing ac- tion of the caliper. 43312 Figure 5. Dust Shield Item Description 1 Screw l 2 Blue Loctite Adhesive Washer 4 Dust Shield All brakes are fitted with dust shields. Shown is an example of a common dust shield installation. All dust shields install in a similar way. Apply Loctite to threads and torque to 20-25 ft -Ib (27-34 Nm). Caliper The disc brake caliper houses the internal actuat- ing components and the caliper mechanism. The cali- per maintains the correct brake shoe contact with the rotor. The caliper rides on two slide pin assemblies. Air Chamber The EX225 air -actuated disc brake has a direct - mounted air chamber attached to the caliper housing. The air chamber operates directly onto the internal op- erating shaft assembly. NOTICE Replace both LHRH air chambers (on any axle) at the same time. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-8 Hub and Rotor Assembly D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' The disc brake rotor is bolted to a machined flange on the wheel hub. The vented rotors are designed to al- low the brake shoe linings to ride against the inner and outer surfaces while being actuated. 79 Jul Figure 6. DiscPlus EX225 Air Disc Brake and bridge pulls the outboard pad against the brake ro- tor. The forces created by the friction of the brake pads on the brake rotor are transferred at the ends of the pads onto the carrier, which is rigidly mounted to the axle. The brakes are released by reducing the input force on the operating shaft, thus reducing the clamp force of the brake. The return spring then returns the clamping mechanism and the operating shaft back to their starting position, leaving the pads with a defined running clearance to the rotor. The small runout of the brake rotor and hub -bearing clearances will then gen- erate a small clearance for the outboard pad through only a few revolutions of the rotor. Automatic Adjustment The automatic adjuster adjusts the brake pad clearance to compensate for pad wear. Each time the brake is applied, the system senses whether adjust- ment is required or whether running clearance between the pads and rotor is within the built-in tolerance. When the running clearance is greater than the built-in toler- ance as a result of pad or rotor wear, adjustment is re- quired. The automatic adjuster maintains a total nomi- nal pad -to -rotor clearance of 0.030 in. (0.75 mm). Operation Without Adjustment Item Description From the rest position, the air chamber push rod 1 Rotor moves forward, rotating the operating shaft. When the 2 Caliper Housing Assembly pistons move forward through the built-in running clear- ance, the ball -ended drive pin starts to control the driv- ing side of the fork on the end of the adjuster shaft. 4 Bridoe 5 Carrier 6 Hub Assembly Operation The air chamber is attached to the caliper housing and operates directly onto the internal operating shaft assembly. As the pads wear, adjustment takes place automatically and independently of the load. Load in- dependent means adjustment takes place under very small clamping forces, preventing over adjustment and minimizing air consumption. The force introduced from the air chamber is ampli- fied by the geometry of the operating shaft. The clamp- ing force is transferred to the inboard pad through the half -bearings, rollers, tappets, pistons and pistons heads. Once the inboard pad is applied, the force of re- action through the floating caliper housing assembly Further movement of the air chamber push rod ro- tates the operating shaft, causing the adjuster shaft to rotate because the built-in clearance has been taken up. The outer drive sleeve, fixed to the adjuster shaft, rotates the inner drive sleeve through the clutch pack. The inner drive sleeve is linked to the intermediate gear by a unidirectional friction spring, which tries to ro- tate the tappets. However, the friction in the threads of the tappets and pistons increases due to he clamping force of the pads. This prevents the pistons and tappets from rotat- ing relative to one another. The pistons cannot rotate in the adjuster housing, and due to the high torque to turn the tappets, the clutch pack slips, preventing adjust- ment of the mechanism below the correct running clearance. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliabilr�en" D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-9 11 12 13 Figure 7. Caliper Sectional View 11302 Item Description 1 1 Short Slide Pin Oval Bushing 2 Housing Seal 3 Operating Shaft 4 Return Spring 5 Piston 6 Piston Head 7 Chamber Piston 8 Adjuster Shaft 9 Half Bearing 10 Roller 11 Tappet 12 Adjuster Stem 13 1 Long Slide Pin Bushing Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-10 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' Operation With Adjustment When the running clearance is greater than the built-in tolerance as a result of pad or rotor wear, ad- justment is required. From the rest position, the push rod of the air chamber moves forward, rotating the op- erating shaft. As the pistons move forward beyond the built-in running clearance, the ball -ended drive pin starts to contact the diving side of the fork on the end of the adjuster shaft. Further operating shaft movement causes rotation of the adjuster shaft through the ball - ended drive pin. Driving through the clutch plates and the unidirec- tional friction spring, the intermediate spring rotates. Due to the excessive running clearance, the tappets now rotate in the pistons. The pistons cannot rotate and are wound out of their housing. When the pads contact the rotor, the clamping force increases the thread friction in the tappets and pistons. The torque to turn the tappets increases and the clutch pack during the intermediate gear starts to slip, preventing further adjustment. The adjustment is not wound back during the return of the actuation mechanism. As the operating shaft returns to the brake's off position, the ball -ended drive pin travels back through the clearance in the fork on the end of the adjuster shaft. Once the clearance is taken up, the adjuster shaft rotates in the reverse direction, rotating the inner drive sleeve through the clutch pack. However, in this direc- tion, the unidirectional friction spring cannot drive the intermediate gear, leaving the tappets and intermediate gear in the adjusted state. The system is then in the starting position. Manual Adjustment and De -adjustment ACAUTION Manual adjustment of the brake must only be made when changing the pads. No manual adjustments are required between pad changes. A manual adjuster stem runs in constant mesh with the gear form on the outside of the tappets. The end of the stem protrudes through a brake housing seal and is protected by an adjuster cover. (Refer to Caliper As- sembly in this section for adjustment and de -adjust- ment procedures.) Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" 6 Date September 2013 Page 4C-11 22 Figure 8. Exploded View 18 11303 Item Description Item Description 1 Air Chamber 13 Long Slide Pin 2 Slide Pin Cap 14 Piston Boot 3 Short Slide Pin Bolt 15 Air Chamber Washer Jj 4 Short Slide Pin 16 Air Chamber Nut 5 Bridge Bolt 17 Visual Wear Indicator 6 Caliper Housing Assembly 18 Bridge 7 Slide Pin boot 19 Carrier Bolt 8 Visual Wear Indicator Spring 20 Washer 9 Pad Retainer 21 Torque Plate 10 Pad Retainer Bolt 22 Carrier 11 Adjuster Gear 23 Brake Pad 12 Long Slide Pin Bolt 24 Pad Spring Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Pae 4C-12 D Series Maintenance Manual Page Reliability Driven' MAINTENANCE 5. If it is necessary to grind or machine brake linings, additional precautions should be taken Maintenance Schedule because contact with fiber dust is higher during A schedule for inspection, cleaning and adjustment these operations. In addition to wearing an of brake components must be established based on approved respirator, such work should be done in the specific coach use and brake wear characteristics. an area with exhaust ventilation. Non -asbestos brake linings may contain glass, mineral wool, aramid, ceramic or carbon fibers. Long-term exposure may cause pneumoconiosis, fibrosis or cancer. Avoid creating and breathing the dust from the non -asbestos brake linings. Use the following guidelines listed below should be followed to minimize exposure to non -asbestos brake lining dust and particles. 1. Whenever possible, work on brakes in a separate area away from other operations. 2. Always wear a respirator approved by NIOSH or MSHA during all brake service procedures. Wear the respirator from the removal of the wheels through assembly. 3. Never use compressed air or dry brushing to clean brake parts or assemblies. OSHA recommends using cylinders that enclose the brake. These cylinders have vacuums with high - efficiency (NEPA) filters with arm sleeves. If such equipment is not available, carefully clean parts and assemblies in the open air. 4. Clean brake parts and assemblies in the open air. During disassembly, carefully place all parts on the floor to avoid getting dust into the air. Use an industrial vacuum cleaner with a HEPA filter system to clean dust from brake parts. After using the vacuum, remove any remaining dust with a rag soaked in water and wrung nearly dry. 6. When cleaning the work area, never use compressed air or dry sweeping. Use an industrial vacuum cleaner with a HEPA filter and rags soaked in water and wrung nearly dry. Used rags should be disposed of with care to avoid getting dust into the air. Use an approved respirator while emptying vacuum cleaners and handling used rags. 7. After working on the brake system, workers should wash their hands before eating or drinking. Work clothes should not be worn home. Work clothes should be vacuumed after use and then laundered separately, without shaking, to prevent getting fiber dust into the air. To prevent serious eye injury, always wear eye protection when performing vehicle maintenance or service. Before inspecting or performing maintenance on the coach, observe the following conditions: 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. 3. Support the vehicle with safety stands. Do not work under a vehicle supported only by jacks. Jacks can slip and fall over. Serious personal injury and damage to components can result. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Ali D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-13 Reliability Driven - Inspection Rotor Inspection When inspecting or relining the brakes, the rotor thickness should be measured and both surfaces in- spected for the following conditions. Cracks 11304 Figure 9. Rotor with Cracks A crack can extend through a section of the rotor, and, when heated through normal braking, they can open and separate. This may cause rapid lining wear. Replace the rotor. Heat Checking Jf� Figure 10. Rotor with Heat Checking Heat checking is caused by heat and appears as cracks in the surface of the rotor. There are two cate- gories of heat checking, light and heavy. Light heat checking is very fine, tight cracks. Light heat checking is normal. A rotor with light heat check- ing can continue to be used. Heavy heat checking is evident by surface cracks that have width and depth and extend some distance. Replace the rotor if heavy heat checking is observed. Grooves or Scores 11306 Figure 11. Rotor Showing Grooves or Scores Check both sides of the rotor for deep grooves or scores. If the grooves or scores are not too deep, (max- imum depth not to exceed 0.02 in. (.5 mm)] the rotor may continue to be used. If the grooves or scores are deep, or when installing a new lining, refinish the rotor [or replace it if the thickness is less 1.46 in. (37.1 mm)]. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-14 Bluing D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' 11307 Figure 12. Rotor with Blue Bands and Marks Blue marks or bands indicate that the rotor had be- come very hot. If blue marks or bands are present, use the troubleshooting guide to find and correct the cause of the problem. Rotor Thickness Measurement The rotor must be replaced if the thickness falls be- low the minimum of 1.46 in. (37.1 mm). Take the mea- surements at 0, 120, and 240 degrees. Damage to components can result if not replaced. If 1.46 in. (37 mm) 11308 Figure 13. Rotor Thickness Measurement A. Vented Rotor Item Description 1 Minimum Thickness 2 Micrometer 1. Use a micrometer to measure the rotor thickness. If pads are being replaced, the rotor should also be replaced if the thickness is less than 1.46 in. (37.1 mm). 2. Check for uneven rotor wear. Use the pad retainer as a gauge and place it between the rotor surface and the carrier pad abutment. Check both the inboard and outboard sides of the rotor. If the pad retainer fits into the gap on either side, replace the rotor. Rotor Runout Measurement 1. Attach a dial indicator to the caliper or axle frame. NOTICE The runout measurement should be taken from the center of the rotor braking surface. The end play of the hubs should not be included in this measurement. 2. Check the internal runout of the rotor brak- ing surface. the runout should not exceed 0.02 in. (0.5 mm) through one full revolution of the rotor. 3. If the runout exceeds 0.02 in. (0.5 mm), check the wheel bearings for correct adjust- ment. Refer to Section 1 or Section 2 for adjustment procedure. Rotor Removal and Installation — Front and Tag Axle Removal 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Block the rear wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. 2. Raise the vehicle so the axle is off the ground. Support the vehicle with safety stands. Do not use a jack to support the ve- hicle. 3. Remove the brake caliper assembly. Refer to Section 4 - Brakes and Air System. 4. Remove the wheel adapter. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'l, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven" Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-15 5. Remove the keeper from the PRO-TORQTM nut. Use a screwdriver to pry out the keeper arm from the groove on each side of the nut until the keeper is released. Meritor recom- mends replacing the keeper with a new one each time the PRO-TORQTm nut is removed to maintain the integrity of the locking mech- anism. 6. Use a 3.5 in. (89 mm) socket wrench to re- move the PRO-TORQTm nut. 7. Remove the thick washer. 8. Remove the rotor and unitized bearing as an assembly. Installation Install in reverse order of removal. Removing a UWE with a Meritor Rotor Seized to the Hub 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Block the rear wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. 2. Raise the vehicle so the axle is off the ground. Support the vehicle with safety stands. Do not use a jack to support the ve- hicle. 3. Remove the brake caliper assembly. Refer to Section 4 - Brakes and Air System. 4. Remove the wheel adapter. 5. Remove the keeper from the PRO-TORQTM nut. Use a screwdriver to pry out the keeper arm from the groove on each side of the nut until the keeper is released. Meritor recom- mends replacing the keeper with a new one each time the PRO-TORQTm nut is removed to maintain the integrity of the locking mech- anism. 6. Use a 3.5 in. (89 mm) socket wrench to re- move the PRO-TORQTm nut. 7. Remove the thick washer. 8. Remove the rotor and unitized bearing as an assembly. 9. Place the rotor and hub assembly flange face down on a bench or the floor. 1 10876 Figure 14. Inner Portion of Hub Item Description 1 Rotor 2 Hub 3 Saturate with penetrating oil 10. Apply and saturate the inner portion of the hub barrel with penetrating oil. AeroKroil is preferred. Let the oil soak for at least 30 minutes. Lylh�%l 111 Observe all warnings and cautions provided by the press manufacturer to avoid damage to components and serious personal injury. 11. Once the soak is complete, place the rotor into an arbor press with the back face of the rotor facing down and supported correctly. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-16 D Series Maintenance Manual 10877 Figure 15. Tool Position Item Description 1 Press 2 Tool 12. Place the tool on top of the rotor and hub as- sembly. (Refer to Service Tools) 13. Apply pressure until the hub assembly is free from the rotor. 14. Apply Loctite® 620 retaining compound to the new hub -to -rotor bolts. 15. Use the new hub -to -rotor bolts and washers to attach the new rotor to the hub. Be careful not to damage or move the hub -mounted tone rings during new rotor installation. Reliability Driven' 10879 Figure 16. 10 -Bolt Pattern 10880 Figure 17. 8 -Bolt Pattern 16. Tighten the hub -to -rotor bolts in a crisscross patten to the correct torque. (Refer to Hub and Rotor Torque Chart.) 17. Ensure that all bolt heads do not protrude past the wheel -to -hub mounting surface. 18. Install the hub and rotor assembly to the ax- le. Ensure the rotor braking surfaces are free of oil, grease, and other contaminants. 19. Install the caliper assembly and brake pads. Adjust the brake pad -to -rotor clearance. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven" Action Check for heat checking Check for uneven rotor wear Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-17 Minimum pad thickness = 0.12 in (3.0 mm) Minimum rotor thickness = 1.46 in. (37.1 mm) When replacing pads, minimum rotor thickness - 1.54 in. (39.1 mm) to allow for wear during pad life Maximum rotor groove depth = 0.02 in (.5 mm) Minimum rotor thickness measured across any groove(s) =1.46 in. (37.1 mm) regardless of pad replacement Maximum runout = 0.02 in. (.5 mm) through one full revolution Specification ng requires the rotor grooving. Use the pad retainer. Place it between the rotor surface and the carrier pad abutment. Check both the inboard and outboard sides of the rotor. If the pad retainer fits into the gap on either side, replace the rotor. Use a micrometer or vernier caliper. This is measured at the center of the pad near the gap. It is best to take at least two measurements. Subtract the thickness of the pad backing plate. This is normally 0.319 in. (8.1 mm). Use a micrometer or vernier caliper. Take three measurements at 0 degrees, 120 degrees, and 240 degrees. Use a micrometer or vernier caliper. Take three measurements at 0 degrees, 120 degrees, and 240 degrees. Use the long (pointed) end of a dial caliper. Place it in the radial direction across the rotor surface and measure how far the point protrudes. If a groove is found to be deeper than 0.02 in. (.5 mm), and the rotor is of sufficient thickness, have the rotor turned. Subtract the measurement of the deepest groove from the minimum rotor thickness. If this groove is aligned with another deep groove on the opposite side, subtract the sum of the groove depths from the minimum rotor thickness. Usa a dial indicator. Attach the magnet to the axle frame. Turn the rotor one full revolution and note the lateral runout. Do not include the end play of the hub bearings in this measurement. If the runout is greater than 0.02 in. (.5 mm). check the wheel bearings for correct adjustment. Item 2 j Replace F Figure 18. Check for Uneven Rotor Wear Description 42873 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-18 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' Disc Brake Pad Contact Surface Inspection NOTICE Meritor WABCO recommends that the attached inspection be conducted at the following intervals; brake pad change, when significant corrosion build-up occurs and when brake drag is felt or experienced. ACAUTION Refer to Section 3, Lifting, in the MCI Maintenance Manual, for the basic procedures and safety precautions that must be followed before a coach is lifted. Refer to Meritor WABCO DiscPlus EX225 Air Disc Brake Maintenance Manual (MM- 0467) available at www.meritorwabco.com. This document applies to all vehicles fitted with DiscPlus EX225 Brakes. Vehicles operating in areas where road salts or de-icing materials are used are particularly subject to the conditions described in this document. The following reinforces procedures avail- able in MM -0467, DiscPlus EX225 Air Disc Brake Maintenance Manual. In normal operating conditions the brake assembly will slide freely with even pad wear. It is possible that damaged or corroded brake components could restrict free movement of the brake pads. Meritor WABCO recommends that an inspection of the disc brake pad contact surfaces is conducted at the following intervals: Pad change When significant corrosion build up occurs When concern of residual brake drag is present Procedure Park the vehicle on hard ground and chock the road wheels. Where necessary, to gain access, jack up the axle and fit suitable axle stands securely. To prevent serious eye injury, always wear safe eye protection when you perform vehicle maintenance or service. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Support the vehicle with safety stands. Do not work under a vehicle supported only by jacks. Jacks can slip and fall over. Serious personal injury and damage to components can result. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliabilrty�Driven" D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-19 1 2' 44072 Figure 19. Pad Abutment Corrosion (Before and After Clean Up) 2. Remove the brake pads. Never use an air line to blow dust from the brake disc area. If inhaled any form of dust can irritate the throat and lungs or result in injury. When ever possible remove dry brake dust with a vacuum brush. Alternatively wipe the areas with a damp cloth; never try to accelerate drying time by using an air line. 3. Use a vacuum brush or damp cloth to re- move the dirt and dust from the carrier brake pad contact surfaces. 4. Inspect the carrier for signs of damage, wear or surface corrosion. Pay particular at- tention to the pad abutment surfaces. If there is excessive wear or damage to the abutments, it may be necessary to replace the caliper assembly. 1 2 44U/;J Figure 20. Surface Cleaning (Before and After Clean Up) S. While wearing suitable eye protection re- These may restrict free movement of the move all traces of scale, dirt, etc from the pads. A scraper or old screwdriver supported pad apertures/abutment faces and around on the brake body while the rotor is rotated the edge of the rotor, particularly any that will remove most of the corrosion. Finish off if encroach onto the braking area. necessary with emery cloth. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-20 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven 6. Inspect the pad retainer as follows: a. Inspect the pad retainer for defor- mation by resting a straight edge against it. A deformed pad retainer (more than 0.5 mm gap) could result in incorrect pad spring loading. Re- place a deformed pad retainer with service kit. b. Inspect the pad retainer for corrosion buildup where the pad spring con- tacts it. An excessively corroded re- tainer could restrict free pad movement. Scrape clean or replace a severely corroded pad retainer. 7. Refit brake pads. Caliper 11309 Figure 21. Caliper Adjustment 1. Park the coach on a level surface and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. 2. Apply air pressure to release the parking brake. 3. Remove all air from the system. Cage and lock the spring brake. 4. Attach a dial indicator to the torque plate or axle frame. Take the dial reading from the slide pin cap. 5. Check brake adjustment by sliding the cali- per back and forth along the slide pins. If the caliper moves more than 0.08 in. (2.0 mm), the brake is out of adjustment, requiring ad- ditional inspection or replacement. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven Lining Wear Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-21 11310 Figure 22. Visual Wear Indicator Item Description 7 1 Visual Wear Indicator The visual wear indicator shows approximately how much lining material remains. If the indicator pro- trudes less than 0.16 in. (4.0 mm) from the casting, the pads may require replacement. Rotor Visually inspect the rotor for signs of cracks, deep grooves, blue marks, and heat checking. Refer to Rotor in this section for additional information. Air Chamber inspect air chamber to verify that caliper mounting bolts and air lines are securely fastened and not dam- aged. Caliper Assembly Removal j Never disassemble the spring brake chamber. Serious personal injury or death could result. Wear eye protection. During parts of this inspection, one person will be in the cab and the other will be performing tests at the chamber. Ensure that there is a reliable communication system established. TAKE EXTREME CARE to avoid personal injury. Before working on or around a spring chamber, Inspect the chamber for structural damage. If damage is suspected, do not attempt to cage the brake. The unit will have to be removed from the vehicle and disarmed following MGM's recommended procedures. Never disconnect a pressurized air line. Never remove a component or plug unless system pressure has been depleted. Do not exceed recommended air pressures. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-22 D Series Maintenance Manual 1 2. 3. 4. 5. Cage the spring chambers. 11312 Figure 23. Air Chamber Removal Carefully remove the air hoses from the air chamber. Remove the air chamber nuts and washers. Remove the air chamber assembly from the brake caliper and inspect the air chamber. Cover the exposed air chamber mounting aperture with tape to prevent debris from entering the caliper housing assembly. Reliability Driven' 6. De -adjust the caliper and remove the brake pads. Refer to Brake Pad Removal in this section. 311 Figure 24. Carrier Bolt Removal 7. Remove the carrier bolts and washers. Carefully remove the caliper assembly from the axle. Installation 1. Locate the caliper assembly over the rotor. (NOTICE The caliper mounting bolts on the front and tag axles should be the same. 2. Align the carrier bolt holes and assemble the caliper to the torque plate with the carri- er bolts. Tighten the carrier bolts and torque to 400-500 ft -Ib (543-677 Nm). Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'(, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-23 Figure 25. Perforated Transit Tab Removal Item Description 1 �TabRemoved 2 ACAUTION If applicable, before installing air chamber onto the caliper assembly, ensure the perforated transit plug is removed from the caliper chamber seal by pulling the tab. 3. Check caliper assembly to verify it slides by hand. 4. Install the air chamber on the caliper assem- bly. Refer to Air Chamber Installation in this section. 5. 5. Install the brake pads and set the initial brake pad -to -rotor clearance. Refer to Brake Pad Installation in this section. Brake Pads Brake De -Adjustment NOTICE It Is important to note that manual adjustment of the brake must only be made when changing the pads. No manual adjustments are required between pad changes. 1 11313 11314 Figure 26. Adjuster Cover Item Description 1 Adjuster Cover 1. Remove the adjuster cover. ACAUTION Always use a suitable wrench to de -adjust and adjust the brake. Never use air or power tools. Damage to brake components will result. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-24 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven- 3. riven 3. If the manual adjuster does not rotate in ei- ther direction, replace the caliper assembly and chamber assembly. Adjustment Check ACAUTION Before checking for correct brake adjustment, verify that the wrench movement will not be obstructed by the air chamber, hoses or other components. Damage to the brake can result. ® 1. De -adjust the brake using a 10 mm wrench. Rotate the adjuster stem one quarter turn counterclockwise. © ` 11315 Figure 27. Brake Adjustment A. De -Adjust B. Adjust Figure 28. Adjuster Stem 11316 Item Description 1 Adjuster Stem 2. De -adjust the brake using a 10 mm wrench. Rotate the adjuster counterclockwise until the adjuster stem stops. NOTICE De -adjustment requires more force than adjustment; 30 ft -lb (40 Nm) must not be exceeded in either direction. 11317 Figure 29. Adjustment Check 2. With the wrench in place on the stem, actu- ate the brake one time. a. If the wrench rotates clockwise when the brake is actuated, the ad- juster mechanism is working cor- rectly. b. If the wrench does not rotate clock- wise when the brake is actuated, the adjuster mechanism is not working correctly. Replace the caliper assem- bly. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven' Removal Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-25 Figure 30. Pad Retainer Removal r Item Description 1 Pad Retainer ACAUTION Replace pads on both brakes of a single axle. 1. Remove the pad retainer bolt and the pad retainer. 2. Inspect the pad retainer. If the retainer is bent or damaged, replace the pad retainer. 3. Remove the pad springs. 11319 Figure 31. Outboard Pad Removal 4. Remove the outboard brake pad for the cali- per assembly and mark the pad as out- board. 5. Remove the inboard brake pad for the cali- per assembly and mark the pad as inboard. Remove dry brake dust with a vacuum brush or wipe the areas with a damp cloth. Never use an air line to blow dust from the brake and rotor area. Never try to accelerate drying time by using an air line. Serious personal injury and damage to components can result. 6. Use a vacuum brush or a damp cloth to re- move the dirt and dust from the carrier brake pad contact surfaces. Figure 32. Pad Abutment Location Item Description 1 Pad Abutment 7. Inspect the carrier for signs of damage or wear. If there is excessive wear or damage to the pad abutments, caliper assembly re- placement may be necessary. 8 Inspect brake pads for excessive grooving or cracked friction material. Check friction material for looseness or detachment from backing plate. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-26 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" 0.12 in. (3 mm)— r 1 2 3 11321 Figure 33. Brake Pad Measurement Item Description 1 Minimum Lining Thickness, 0.12 in. (3 mm) 2 Measurement Location 3 Measurement Location 9. Measure the lining thickness from the center of the pad. Replace brake pad assemblies before the lining thickness wears to 0.12 in. (3 mm). NOTICE The minimum thickness is 0.12 in. (3.0 mm), measured at the center of the pad near the gap, less the thickness of the backing plate. This measurement is normally 0.32 in. (8.1 mm). 10. Inspect pad springs and replace if bent, cracked or broken. 11322 Figure 34. Slide Pin Boot Fit A. Correct 11. Verify the caliper slides freely on the slide pins. Be careful not to trap fingers while checking the sliding action. If the caliper does not slide, check the slide pin boots for damage and verify they are seated correctly. O 11323 Figure 35. Piston Boot Fit A. Correct 12. Inspect the piston boots. Boots must be free of damage and correctly seated. 13. If any of the caliper slide pin boots or piston boots are damaged or unseated, they must both be replaced. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven' Slide Pin Bushings NOTICE Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-27 The following procedure should be performed with the brake assembly installed on the vehicle and the pads removed. Tangential Test 1 2 1 4 11324 Figure 36. Slide Pin Bushing Tangential Test Item Description 1 Hold The Caliper Here 2 Dial Indicator 3 Short Slide Pin Centerline 4 Swivel The Caliper Pull the caliper housing outward toward the wheel flange. Attach a dial indicator to the hub in line with the centerline of the short slide pin. Hold the caliper to prevent movement. Swiv- el the caliper until it stops in one direction. Set the gauge to zero. Figure 37. Caliper Housing Movement 3. Move housing into the opposite direction un- til it stops. The maximum acceptable read- ing is 0.118 in. (3 mm). If the reading is more than 0.118 in. (3 mm), replace the cal- iper assembly. Radial Test 0.6 in. 1 (20 mm)�+-. I 5-T _ I 1 �-,2 11326 Figure 38. Slide Pin Bushing Radial Test Item Description 1 ]Dalilndicator 2 Caliper 3 Hold The Caliper Here 1. Attach a dial indicator to the vehicle hub and set it against the caliper. 2 Position the brake in the half -worn pad posi- tion. This position is set when a gap of ap- proximately 0.8 in. (20 mm) exists between the rotor and bridge. Hold the caliper at the outboard pad edge and by the air chamber. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-28 D Series Maintenance Manual ReliabiliityDriven 11327 Figure 39. Gauge Adjustment 3. Push the brake down by hand as far as pos- sible and set the gauge to zero. 4. Pull the caliper up as far as possible to allow the caliper to slide. The maximum accept- able reading is 0.078 in. (2 mm). If the read- ing is greater, replace the caliper assembly. Installation 11328 Figure 40. Outboard Pad Installation ACAUTION Ensure the pads are installed with the friction material is facing the rotor. Installing them improperly can result in damage to the components. 1. Slide the caliper outward. Install the outboard pad and spring into the outboard side of the caliper. 2. Slide the caliper inward. Install the inboard pad and spring into the inboard side of the caliper. 1 11329 Figure 41. Pad Retainer Installation Item Description 1 Pad Retainer 3. Install the pad retainer and pad retainer bolt. Tighten the bolt and torque to 25-30 ft -Ib (34-40 Nm). NOTICE If the pad retainer is being replaced, do not reuse the original pad retainer bolt. Instead, use the bolt supplied with the kit. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven" ACAUTION Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-29 The initial brake to pad -to -rotor clearance must be adjusted or an inefficient, dragging brake can occur, resulting in damage to components. Always set the initial brake pad -to -rotor running clearance with the air chamber installed to prevent damage to components. 4. Set the initial pad -to -rotor running clear- ance. a. Remove the adjuster cover. b. Use a 10 mm wrench to rotate the manual adjuster stem clockwise so that the brake pad -to -rotor clearance is zero. C. De -adjust the manual adjuster stem one half turn counterclockwise to set the initial running clearance. Rein- stall the adjuster cover. Piston Boots 1. Cage the spring chambers. 2. De -adjust the caliper and remove the brake pads. Refer to Brake Pad Removal in this section. 3. Rotate the manual adjuster stem clockwise until the piston assemblies are extended ap- proximately 2 in (50 mm). Figure 42. Piston Boot Removal Item Description 1 Piston Boot 2 Piston Head D 4. Remove the piston boots. Do not remove piston heads from the assembly. 5. Clean the piston heads and housing with a suitable brake cleaner. 6. Check condition of the piston shafts. If ex- cessive corrosion or wear is present, re- place the caliper. Installation ACAUTION When installing new piston boots, do not use grease to aid assembly. Using grease may result in damage to the piston boots. Lightly lubricate the piston shafts. Use only the grease supplied with the replacement components and kits. Figure 43. Piston Boot Installation Item Description 1 Piston Head 2 Tab 2. Install piston boots: a. Carefully install a new piston boot over a piston head. The larger seal diameter with the tab goes over the piston head first. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date Page September 2013 4C-30 D Series Maintenance Manual 11332 Figure 44. Piston Head Groove Item Description 1 1 Piston Head Groove b. Carefully install piston boot into the piston head groove. 11333 Figure 45. Piston Retainer Groove ItemDescription 1 Piston Head Groove c. Stretch the piston boot and pull it over the housing assembly retainer groove. d. Rotate the piston boot to ensure the boot beads are correctly seated in the retainer groove. Reliability Driven' 3. Repeat the procedure and install the second piston boot. 4. Rotate the manual adjuster stem counter- clockwise and de -adjust the piston assem- blies. NOTICE It may be necessary to lift the piston boot tab and release air inflating the boot. 5. Install the brake pads and set the initial brake pad -to -rotor clearance. Refer to Brake Pad Installation in this section. NOTICE If other caliper components must be replaced, replace the components before installing the pads. Refer to the appropriate procedures in this section. Caliper Bridge The following procedure involves the removal and disassembly of the caliper bridge and its components. if complete disassembly is not required, proceed to the appropriate assembly sequence and continue from there. Caliper components replaced in this procedure: • Housing assembly • Slide pin boots • Slide pins Caliper Bridge Removal Remove the caliper assembly from the axle. Refer to Caliper Assembly Removal in this section. NOTICE Removal of the caliper assembly is unnecessary if there is adequate room in the wheel well to service the assembly. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Intl, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliabil• n' D Series Maintenance Manual 4 %�- I 1 f 11334 Figure 46. Bridge Bolt Removal 2. Remove the four bridge bolts. Discard the bolts; they must be replaced when removed Figure 47. Bridge Removal 3. Carefully remove the bridge. Caliper Housing Removal Figure 48. Housing Removal 16 Remove the caliper housing from the slide pins. Date September 2013 Page 4C-31 Slide Pin Boots Removal Figure 49. Carrier Inspection Points Item Description J 1 fide Pins 2 Pad Abutment 1. Remove the slide pin boots from the housing assembly. Discard the boots. 2. Clean and inspect the carrier for damage and wear with special attention to the abut- ment areas and the slide pins. a. If there is damage or excessive wear to the slide pins, replace the slide pins. Refer to Slide Pin Boots Installation. b. If there is damage or excessive wear to the carrier, replace the carrier as- sembly. Refer to Carrier Assembly Installation. 11338 Figure 50. Slide Pin Removal Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-32 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' NOTICE Note locations of the long and short slide pins before removal. 3. Remove the slide pin bolts. If necessary, tap the slide pins with a rubber or soft metal hammer lightly to break the seal. Slide Pin Installation 1. Clean the slide pin contact areas and threaded holes in the carrier and check for wear. NOTICE To ensure the caliper functions correctly, the long and short pins must be installed correctly on the carrier. Once installed, the slide pins require no adjustment. 2. Install new slide pins and secure with the correct slide pin bolts. Tighten the bolts and torque to 310-332 ft -Ib (420-450 Nm). Slide Pin Boots Installation 1. Lightly lubricate the slide pins and the inside of the new slide pin boots. Use only the grease supplied with the replacement components and kits. 11339 Figure 51. Slide Pin Boot Installation Item Description 1 Retainer Groove Figure 52. Slide Pin Boot Installation 2. Slide the new slide pin boots over the slide pins. Ensure the slide pin boot bead is seat- ed correctly in the slide pin retainer groove. Caliper Housing Installation 1 11341 Figure 53. Slide Bore Locations 1. Lubricate the slide pin boots and the slide bores in the housing assembly. Use only the grease supplied with the replacement components and kits. It I ' 11342 Figure 54. Caliper Housing Installation Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Reliability Driven Date September 2013 D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-33 2. Carefully slide the housing assembly onto the slide pins. Be careful not to damage the slide pin boots during installation. 3. Install the slide pin boot beads into the housing retainer grooves. 4. Ensure the slide pin boots are correctly in- stalled on both the carrier and housing re- tainers. Use a brass or synthetic mallet for assembly and procedures. Do not hit steel parts with a steel hammer. Pieces of a part can break off. Serious personal injury and damage to components can result. 5. If installing a new housing, carefully tap one of the new end caps into the caliper housing assembly until it retains itself. NOTICE Use the correct tool size to tap the end cap into the bore, 0.069-0.088 in. (1.75-2.25 mm) for the short slide pin side; 0.228-0.251 in. (5.79-6.38 mm) for the long slide pin side. The caps must be installed to the correct depth. If either cap is pressed into the bore below the minimum dimension, the full movement of the housing assembly will be restricted. 11343 Figure 55. Short Slide Pin End Cap Clearance 0.251" (6.4 MM) 0.228" (5.8 MM) 11344 Figure 56. Long Slide Pin End Cap Clearance 6. Check the housing assembly to ensure it slides by hand on the slide pins. Slide the assembly back and forth several times to check for smooth movement. NOTICE The boots are correctly installed if they collapse from the changes within the slide pin mechanism. Caliper Bridge Installation Figure 57. Bridge Installation Position the bridge against the caliper housing assembly and install four new bridge bolts. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-34 D Series Maintenance Manual Figure 58. Bridge Bolt Installation 2. Tighten M16 bolts to 221-253 ft -Ib (300-350 Nm). TESTING Test procedure to periodically check actuators fitted to DiscPlus EX225 air disc brakes. The following steps applies to all vehicles fitted with DiscPlus 225 Brakes and more specifically, vehi- cles which operate in areas where road salts or de-icing materials are used. Meritor WABCO recommends that an inspection of the internal condition of the brake and brake actuator be conducted on a regular basis. The frequency of this inspection is based on fleet experience. Reliability Driven Although the brake and brake actuator are sealed corrosion in the air chamber seal area could lead to corrosion of the brake mechanism. Meritor WABCO has developed the following procedure to inspect for such damage without the need to remove the brake ac- tuator. Park the vehicle on hard ground and chock the road wheels. Where necessary, to gain access, jack up the axle and fit suitable axle stands securely. } To prevent serious eye injury, always wear safe eye protection when you perform vehicle maintenance or service. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Support the vehicle with safety stands. Do not work under a vehicle supported only by jacks. Jacks can slip and fall over. Serious personal injury and damage to components can result. .5 44128 Figure 59. Disassemble Brake Assembly 4, 44129 Figure 60. Disassemble Brake Assembly Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliabil 1111�1� n D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-35 Never Never use an air line to blow dust from the brake/ disc area. If inhaled any form of dust can irritate the throat and lungs or result in injury. When ever possible remove dry brake dust with a vacuum brush. Alternatively wipe the areas with a damp cloth; never try to accelerate drying time by using an air line. 2. Remove any dirt from the brake assembly; ensure the rubber dust excluders are not damaged. 44130 Figure 61. Remove Wear Sensor Plug 3. Remove the wear sensor plug retaining bolt. Carefully lever out the sensor plug and place to one side with the bolt for refitment later. 44131 Figure 62. Clean Sensor Access Hole 44132 Figure 63. Inspect Sensor Access Hole E112219911 Figure 64. Vacuum Test Adapter Plug and Grease 4. Clean the sensor/switch access hole and mounting face on the housing with a clean cloth and ensure no debris is allowed to fall into the exposed aperture in the housing. Lightly grease the O-ring seals on the vacu- um test adapter plug. Fit the adapter plug in- to the housing and press into place. Fit the retaining screw and tighten down, 24.3-29.5 ft -Ib (33-40 Nm). ACA UTION Use only the grease supplied with replacement components/kits, or that is specified by the vehicle manufacturer. Under no circumstance should any other type of grease be used. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-36 D Series Maintenance Manual NOTICE Ensure the adjuster cover retaining strap is not trapped under the adapter plug. 44134 Figure 65. Conical Connectors 0 N 44135 Figure 66. Adapter and Connector Fitted 5 Using a suitable vacuum tester, such as a Mityvac, select the conical connector from the test kit that fits the hole in the adapter plug and insert it in the adapter plug. Reliability Driven' 44136 Figure 67. Vacuum Tester in Position 6. Connect the vacuum tester to the connector using the tubing supplied with the vacuum tester. 7 Hold the conical connector firmly in place in the test adapter plug to ensure a good seal is made between the connector and the plug. 8. While holding the connector, actuate the tester, observing whether a vacuum is gen- erated. If a vacuum is generated, do not ex- ceed a value of -5 in. Hg. Stop pumping and observe whether the vacuum is held or starts to decay. If a vacuum is generated and held, proceed to Section A. If a vacuum decays or no vacuum is gener- ated, then proceed to Section B. Section A If a vacuum is generated and held, then no further investigation needs to be made. Le- ver out the test adapter. Lightly grease the O-ring seal on the wear sensor plug, and refit to housing. NOTICE Ensure the adjuster cover retaining strap is not trapped under the adapter plug. Fit the retaining screw and tighten to a torque value of 24.3-29.5 ft -lb (33-40 Nm). Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 SII D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-37 Driven' 44137 Figure 68. Corrosion on Ball End of Actuator and Liner Part of Seal r•. -f 44138 Figure 69. Corrosion Inside the Brake Housing Section B If no vacuum is generated or the vacuum decays, then this indicates the air chamber internal boot is compromised the air actua- tor may be removed from the brake for fur- ther inspection. In these circumstances, the actuator must be replaced. Visually inspect the actuator -mounting ap- erture on the caliper housing assembly. If there are signs of water entry and corro- sion, replace both the caliper housing and air actuator. When fitting a service replacement caliper housing and air actuator, refer to the MM -0467 for the detailed procedure. 9. After conducting steps described in either Section A or Section B, under the previous Step 8, ensure that the brake and air actua- tor are working correctly by performing a brake adjustment inspection. Brake Adjustment Inspection ACAUTION Before you check for correct brake adjustment, verify that the wrench will not be obstructed by the air chamber, hoses or other brake or axle components. Damage to the brake can result. 11317 Figure 70. Rotate Clockwise 1. To check for correct brake adjustment, de - adjust the brake by using a 10 mm wrench to rotate the adjuster stem one-quarter turn COUNTERCLOCKWISE. 2. With the 10 mm wrench on the adjuster stem, actuate the brake one time. If the wrench rotates CLOCKWISE when you actuate the brake, the adjuster mech- anism is working correctly. If the wrench does not rotate CLOCK- WISE when you actuate the brake, the adjuster mechanism is not working correct- ly. Replace the caliper housing assembly per procedure outlined in maintenance manual MM -0467. 3. Once completed, charge the system with air.. Refit the road wheels, remove the axle stands, and lower the vehicle to the ground. NOTICE Before driving the vehicle or applying the park brake, apply the service brake five times at low pressure to ensure correct adjustment of the pads. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-38 D Series Maintenance Manual TROUBLESHOOTING Reliability Driven' Condition Cause Correction Brake drag. Incorrect initial adjustment. Readjust to set the record pad -to -rotor clearance. Incorrect pad -to -rotor clearance. Spring or service brake not releasing Vehicle air system malfunction. Check for correct operation of air system or air chamber. Repair or replace parts as required. Check for damaged slide pin boots. If the caliper will not move back and forth by hand with the Brakes not releasing. linings removed, replace the caliper assembly. Check for water entry or a seized operation shaft. Replace the caliper assembly and air chamber. Air line too short. Replace the air line. Short brake pad lining life. Brake drag. Refer to Brake Drag condition above. Caliper seized or sticking on slide pins. Check for damaged slide pin boots. If the caliper will not move back and forth by hand with the linings removed, replace the caliper assembly. Damaged rotor surface. Check for cracks or heavy heat checking. Refer to inspection procedure for rotor in this section. Replace rotor if damage exceeds specification. Vehicle overload. Do not exceed the weight limitations specified on vehicle identification plate. Companion brakes do not work correctly. Inspect companion brakes and air system. Adjust or repair as required. Smoking brakes. High brake temperature. Refer to Brake Drag and Short Brake Pad Lining Life conditions above. This can be a temporary situation new or low mileage brakes. Contamination such as oil, grease, Inspect the hub seal and replace as required. undercoating, paint, etc. on the linings Clean the rotor and caliper assembly. or rotor. Replace the pads. Poor stopping power: Long stopping distances. Poor driving feel. Vehicle air system malfunction. Correct the air pressure at the chamber inlet. If necessary, have the system evaluated by a brake system specialist. High brake pressure. Contamination such as oil, grease, Inspect the hub seal and replace as required. Vehicle pulls to one side. undercoating, paint, etc. on the linings Clean the rotor and caliper assembly. or rotor. Replace the pads. Brakes out of adjustment. Readjust the set and correct pad -to -rotor clearance. Vehicle overload. Do not exceed the weight limitations specified on vehicle identification plate. Incorrect brake pads installed. Replace the brake pads. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'l, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Reliability Driven - D Series Maintenance Manual Page 4C-39 TROUBLESHOOTING (CONTINUED) Cause Correction ` Incorrect pad installation. Correct the pad installation. If necessary, replace the pads and rotor. Brake pads not free to move in the Check for corrosion or debris on the pads or caliper. carrier abutments. Clean or replace the pads and abutments if necessary. Check lining thickness and replace the pads if Worn brake pads. necessary. Brake component attachments are not Check for loose connections and fasteners. installed to specification. Tighten the connections and fasteners to the specified torque. Rotor cracks or excessive runout. Refer to inspection procedure for rotor in this section. Replace rotor if damage exceeds specifications. Pad spring damaged or not installed. Replace pad spring if damaged, or install if missing. Incorrect pads installed. Replace the pads. Bent or loose pad retainer. Replace or tighten the pad retainer, Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Date September 2013 Page 4C-40 D Series Maintenance Manual TORQUE CHART f r � r► _ / f Figure 71. Torque Callouts Reliability Driven' Item Description Torque Value Range Ft -Lb Nm 1 2 Pad Retainer Bolt Carrier Bolt 25-30 34-40 400-500 543-677 3 Bridge Bolt 221-253 300-350 4 Slide Pin Bolts 310-332 420-450 5 Hub -to -Rotor Bolt, Drive (not shown) 155-195 210-264 6 Hub -to -Rotor Bolt, Front, Tag (not shown) 165-190 224-257 7 Air Chamber Nut, Initial 59-75 80-100 8 Air Chamber Nut, Final 133-155 180-210 9 Chamber Release Tool Bolt (not shown) 5-11 7-15 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'l, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 Ej Reliability Driven`" ATTACHMENT DIESEL ENGINE/TRANSMISSION INFORMATION Reliability Driven" POWERPLANT CUMMINS ISX 2013 EPA CERTIFIED ENGINE The Cummins ISX 11.9 liter engine, or approved equal will be four-cycle, six -cylinder, turbo- charged with an operating range of 700 rpm to 2100 rpm. The engine power rating will be 425 HP (317 kW) with a maximum torque curve of 1450 lb. -ft (1,968 Nm) at 1,200 rpm. The patented Variable Geometry Turbocharger (VG Turbo), with only one moving part in the exhaust stream, constantly adjusts to deliver the precise amount of air for optimal performance at every rpm, resulting in improved throttle response. The ISX meets 2013 EPA emissions requirements. The Cummins ISX engine shall have Idle Control that manages idling time and improves fuel economy. The engine shall also have a starter Lockout system that provides additional engine/starter protection by preventing the starter to engage when the engine is running. The Cummins ISX engine shall use an engine brake to turn the energy -producing engine into an energy -absorbing compressor, extending service brakes and tire life. This engine brake shall be controlled by an ergonomically accessible switch. The engine will have built-in diagnostics to ensure that all components are operating properly. If a system component fails, the operator will be alerted to the condition via a dashboard mounted "Check Engine" and/or "Stop Engine" light. The Engine Protection system shall regulate engine rpm to reduce the risk of progressive damage when a severe fault code is logged. The electronic hardware and software on the ISX shall use a common architecture with all the latest diagnostics, maintenance monitoring and engine protection features with customer selectable shutdown. The entire system shall be capable of communicating with the electronically controlled transmission. The primary objective of the system is to provide the capability for the electronic engine controls to reduce power by command of the transmission in the event of transmission malfunction (low oil level/pressure; coolant temperature, etc.). The engine electronic control module shall be constructed as a weatherproof enclosure on the engine that is protected from the environment. Engine mounted components (excluding wiring connectors) may be exposed to steam cleaning and pressure washing. The engine shall be equipped with fast idle (950 RPM) and be driver controlled. The devices shall activate only with the transmission in neutral and parking brake applied. This device may be used to help meet the requirements of coach air conditioning cool down. The engine starter shall be protected by an interlock that prevents its engagement when the engine is running. The starter shall be prevented from engaging when the transmission selector is in any position other than neutral. Reliability Driverf POWER REQUIREMENTS The propulsion system and drive train shall provide power to enable the coach to meet the defined acceleration, top speed, and gradability requirements. Sufficient excess power shall be available to operate all accessories without jeopardizing coach performance or safety parameters. TOP SPEED The coach shall be governed at 72 mph (116 kph) road speed, for emergency and passing maneuvers, on a straight, level road at SLW. GRADABILITY Gradability requirements shall be met on grades with a surface friction coefficient of 0.3 and above at SLW with all accessories operating. The standard configuration power plant shall enable the coach to maintain a speed of 44 mph (71 kph) on a 2 -percent grade and 7 mph (11 kph) on a 16 -percent grade. ACCELERATION Vehicle shall accelerate from 0 to 15 mph (0 — 24 kph) in five seconds, with the coach at S.L.W. OPERATING RANGE The operating range of the coach run on the design operating profile shall be at least 450 miles (724 km) on a single fill -up of diesel fuel. OPERATING PERFORMANCE Speed, gradability, and acceleration performance requirements shall be met at, or corrected to, 85 degrees F (29° C), 29.00 inches (74 cm) Hg, dry air. Performance degradation at conditions other than the test standard shall not exceed 1 % for each 3 degrees F/C and 4 % for 1,000 feet (305 m) of altitude above the standard. POWERPLANT MOUNTING AND ACCESSORIES MOUNTING The powerplant shall be mounted in a compartment in the rear of the coach. All powerplant mountings shall be mechanically isolated to minimize transfer of vibration to the body structure. Clamps required for securing or supporting lines shall be rubber or plastic coated and properly sized for the line being clamped. Reliability Driverl" TRANSMISSION The transmission shall be an Allison B500 six speed transmission, equipped with Allison Transmission Electronic Controls (Gen. IV) or approved equal. Maximum input horsepower shall be 550 horsepower. Maximum input torque capability shall be 1650 pound feet of torque. The transmission shall have a one stage, three element, polyphase torque converter and a lock up clutch with a torsional damper. The transmission shall be fully automatic with six forward gear ratios. Shift calibration shall be set so that shifts shall be smooth under all operating conditions. The transmission shall only have one maintenance dipstick, and no other secondary service lane dipsticks. The transmission will also include a Probalyzer, or approved equal, brass Mini -gauge plug to permit transmission fluid analysis sampling. The Allison B500 Gen IV transmission shall be filled with synthetic transmission fluids that meet Allison TES -295 specification and have a TES -295 approval number and the Allison approval logo. Mobil Delvac Synthetic Automatic Transmission Fluid can be used or Allison TES -295 approved equals such as Castrol Transynd. Allison Transmission extended warranty plans require synthetic transmission fluids meeting the TES -295 specification with an approval number and the Allison approval logo to be used. The gearing shall be of the constant mesh, helical, planetary type with the following ratios: RANGE RATIO First 3.51:1 Second 1.91:1 Third 1.43:1 Fourth 1.00:1 Fifth 0.74:1 Sixth 0.64:1 Reverse 4.80:1 A function of the electronic controls shall be provided to prevent premature engagement and operation of the automatic transmission reverse gear. The transmission shall be governed by electronic controls, which contain a programmable read- only memory (PROM) that will provide basic transmission control functions. All cabling and electronic devices utilized by the electronic transmission control system shall be adequately shielded against interference. The transmission electronic module shall be capable of communicating with the engine electronic module to maintain maximum efficiency. The control module shall be equipped with a self-diagnostic system. A failure shall be retained by the control module for evaluation by garage personnel using a Allison DOC software and J1939 / RS232 translation device. Modified diagnostics shall provide timely information on transmission oil and filter change requirements and transmission rebuild timeframes. The electronic controls shall be completely sealed from the environment. The transmission electronic control unit shall be located in a weatherproof box that is protected from environment or potential damage from under floor baggage. Page l of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION INPUT SUMMARY VEHICLE PARAMETERS nd User (and Region, Sub Re( anufacturer (and Region, Sub ower Packs Standard Wind Resistance Coefficient ( No Deflector ] User Defined Resistance Coefficient ( No Deflector j Wei ht, Rated ( No Trailer, GVW) Weight on Drive Wheels Weight on Drive Wheels Motor Coach Industries LTD (North America. Canadian) Motor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian) D4500 com D4500 Commuter 1 11.40 (f 8.50 (f1) 0.00 50000 42.00 21000 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.al lisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/201-3) Page 2 of 21 E5500IES P t e ed s eed n✓v� ower a OV m Standard (hp) User (hp) Fan (clutch fan) 57.36 65.00 Alt/Generator 8.50 12.00 Air Compressor 2.48 1.50 Steer Pump 12.48 11.50 Air Conditioning 10.00 122.00 I fCl-11VJIVIIJJIVIV Manufacturer Allison Configuration 13500 (1-6) (1-500-3) Converter TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED - Smoke Control) (1-541-1) Retarder T[resANheels (estimated) Shift Calibration 2100 rpm S1/S5 Perr, Std Preselects, (1-8) (1-500-2100-103) Rating lintercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls (1-500-4) DRIVELINE Propshaft DriveAxles Std Efficiency 98.60(%) Axle 6x2 On Hwy Single Red Manufacturer Description T[resANheels (estimated) Ratio Description Single Ratio 3.730 Std Efficiency Overall Driveline 97.00(%) Ratio Std Efficiency 13.730 195.64 (°I GRADES Std Acceleration Engine (estimated) 2.7672 (Ib-ft-sec^2) T[resANheels (estimated) 180.4717 (Ib-ft-see2) ENGINE DETAIL - Standard Accessories (AC On where applicable) Low And High Power Fan On/AC On Fan On/AC On Fan Off/AC On Fan Off/AC On Speed Power (rpm) (hp) Torque (Ib -ft) Net Power (hp) Net Torque (Ib -ft) Net Power (hp) Net Torque (Ib -ft) 1100 303.7 1450.0 284.4 1357.8 292.6 1397.2 Peak Torque 1200 331.3 1450.0 309.3 1353.7 320.0 1400.5 1300 358.9 1450.0 333.8 1348.5 347.4 1403.4 1400 386.5 1450.0 1357.8 1342.1 374.8 1405.9 1500 414.1 1450.0 1381.2 1334.8 402.1 1408.0 1600 429.6 1410.0 1392.0 1286.6 417.3 1369.8 1700 430.5 1330.0 1387.6 1197.5 418.0 1291.5 1800 425.0 1240.0 1376.2 1097.6 412.3 1202.9 Peak Power 1900 419.6 1160.0 364.3 1006.9 406.7 1124.2 2000 411.3 1080.0 348.6 915.4 398.1 1045.4 2100 397.8 995.0 327.1 818.1 384.4 961.5 Governed 2300 0.0 0.0 -89.2 -203.6 -13.9 -31.7 No Load Governed Peak Power point has been defined for the purposes of assessing Accessory Losses This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 3 of 21 ENGINE DETAIL - User Defined Accessories (AC On where applicable) Low And Hr h Power Fan On/AC On Fan On/AC On Fan Off/AC On Fan Off/AC On Speed Power Torque Net Power Net Torque Net Power Net Torque (rprn) (hp) (Ib -ft) (hp) (Ib -ft) (hp) (Ib -ft) 1100 303.7 1450.0 269.3 1285.6 278.6 1330.2 Peak Torque 1200 331.3 1450.0 292.9 1281.9 305.0 1335.0 1300 358.9 1450.0 1316.0 1276.7 331.4 1339.0 1400 386.5 1450.0 1338.6 1270.2 357.9 1342.5 1500 414.1 1450.0 1360.6 1262.5 384.3 1345.5 1600 429.6 1410.0 1369.8 1213.7 398.5 1308.1 1700 430.5 1330.0 1363.8 1123.9 398.3 1230.4 1800 425.0 1240.0 350.6 1023.0391.6 1142.5 Peak Power 1900 419.6 1160.0 336.9 931.2 85.0 1064.3 2000 411.3 1080.0 319.3 838.5 75.5 986.0 2100 397.8 995.0 295.8 739.9111-39.4 360.8 902.5 Governed 2300 0.0 0.0 -124.8 -284.9 -89.9 No Load Governed Peak Power point has been defined for the purposes of assessing Accessory Losses This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.al li sontransm ission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 4 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION SCAAN SUMMARY Based On Standard Parameters Vocation: Bus, Intercity Bus, Straight Vehicle End User: Motor Coach Industries LTD (North America, Canadian) Manufacturer: Motor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian) Model: D4500 com, D4500 Commuter Engine: Cummins ISX12 EPA13 425hp / 14501bft / 2100rpm Engine Certification Year: 2013 Transmission: 8500 (1-6) Rating: Intercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls Converter: TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED - Smoke Control) Retarder: Transmission+ Check Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Min/ Actual Overall Max Max Status Status T1 Transmission/Vocation Compatibility 35.5 V13 OK percent Transmission Compatible with High Torque Rise Diesel 23.9 V14 1 st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Gradeability 18.0 OK T2 Engines OK Maximum Geared Vehicle Speed At Engine Governed mph T20 Torque Limiting: Engine & Transm SEM/LRTP Reqd V17 Speed OK Transmission Permitted in End User/Chassis Mfg Maximum Speed on 0.50% Grade 65.0 mph Min 89.4 OK T17 Locations Btu/min 5259 V44 T15 Input Power(Gross) 550 hp Max 431 OK T14 Input Torque(Gross) 1700 Ib -ft Max 1450 OK T3 Input Speed (Engine Governed Speed) 1700/2300 rpm 2100 OK T4 Transmission Output Speed rpm 3286 Check Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Min/ Actual Overall Max Status V21 1 st Range Converter Stall Gradeability percent 35.5 V13 1 st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Net Gradeability percent 23.9 V14 1 st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Gradeability 18.0 percent Min 20.5 OK Maximum Geared Vehicle Speed At Engine Governed mph 107.9 V17 Speed V18 Maximum Speed on 0.50% Grade 65.0 mph Min 89.4 OK V43 Heat Generated in 1 st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Btu/min 5259 V44 Heat Generated in 1 st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Btu/min 3684 Check Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Min/ Actual Overall Max I I Status V51 Maximum Driveline Ratio for optimum Engine Speed 4.039 1 Max 3.730 I OK V59 Gradeability at 65.0 mph Cruise Velocity 0.50 percent I Min 2.65 1 OK https:Hiscaan.al lisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct2820 l 3_144... 10/28/20 1') V60A lGradeability at 2C -2L Shift 7.0 percent Min V61 lVehicle Speed at 5L -6L Shift 60.0 mph Max OK: Acceptable OK -1: OK based on pre -acceptance by Engineering OK -2: OK based on Accepted Application Review C: Consider- manufacturer to assess XX: Questionable - may not be acceptable XXX: Not Acceptable - rating or usage violation This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. 9.7 91.3 Page 5 of 21 OK C https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 6 of 21 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_ 144... 10/28/20 Page 7 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION SCAAN SUMMARY Based On User Defined Parameters Vocation: Bus, Intercity Bus, Straight Vehicle End User: Motor Coach Industries LTD (North America, Canadian) Manufacturer: Motor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian) Model: D4500 com, D4500 Commuter Engine: Cummins ISX12 EPA13 425hp / 14501bft / 2100rpm Engine Certification Year: 2013 Transmission: 8500 (1-6) Rating: Intercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls Converter: TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED - Smoke Control) Retarder: Check Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Min/ Actual Max V21 1 st Range Converter Stall Gradeability percent Max 34.0 V13 1 st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Net Gradeability percent Min 23.0 V14 1 st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Gradeability 18.0 percent Min 19.7 V17 Maximum Geared Vehicle speed At Engine Governed Speed mph Max 107.9 V18 Maximum Speed on 0.50% Grade 65.0 mph Min 87.5 V43 Heat Generated in 1st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Btu/min 5187 V44 Heat Generated in 1 st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Btu/min 3632 Check Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Min/ I Actual Max V51 Maximum Driveline Ratio for Optimum Engine Speed 4.039 Max 3.730 V59 Gradeability at 65.0 mph Cruise Velocity 0.50 percent Min 2.40 V60A Gradeability at 2C -2L Shift 7.0 percent Min 9.1 V61 lVehicle Speed at 5L -6L Shift 60.0 m In Max 91.3 OK: Acceptable OK -1: OK based on pre -acceptance by Engineering OK -2: OK based on Accepted Application Review C: Consider - manufacturer to assess XX: Questionable - may not be acceptable XXX: Not Acceptable - rating or usage violation This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.al I isontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 8 of 21 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.al I i sontrans mission.com/extranet/i scaan/SCAANRepo rts?f=Oct2 820 13_144... 10/28/2013 Page 9 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION CUSTOMER PERFORMANCE SUMMARY Based on Standard Parameters Vocation: Bus, Intercity Bus, Straight Vehicle End User: Motor Coach Industries LTD (North America, Canadian) Manufacturer: Motor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian) Model: D4500 com, D4500 Commuter Engine: Cummins ISX12 EPA13 425hp / 14501bft / 2100rpm Engine Certification Year: 2013 Transmission: B500 (1-6) Rating: Intercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls Converter: TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED - Smoke Control) Retarder: Weight: 50000 (lb) (GVW) Driveline Ratio : 3.730 Tires: Standard Radial Tire, 490.0 (revs/mi) Geared Speed: 107.9 (mph) 6L Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Air Conditioning Status : No AC iration 0011 throttle, brakes locked start And Distance To Speed, 0(%) Grade 0-20 (mph) in 5.5(sec) 98(ft) 0-30 (mph) in 10.8(sec) 293(1 0-40 (mph) {n 18.0(sec) 666(' 0-50 (mph) in 28.4(sec) 1352 0.60 (mph) in 41.6(sec) 2431 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.al lisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/201 3 Page 10 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION CUSTOMER PERFORMANCE SUMMARY Based on User Defined Parameters Vocation: Bus, Intercity Bus, Straight Vehicle End User: Motor Coach Industries LTD (North America, Canadian) Manufacturer: Motor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian) Model: D4500 com, D4500 Commuter Engine: Cummins ISX12 EPA13 425hp / 14501bft / 2100rpm Engine Certification Year: 2013 Transmission: 8500 (1-6) Rating: Intercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls Converter: TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED - Smoke Control) Retarder: Weight: 50000 (lb) (GVW) Driveline Ratio : 3.730 Tires: Standard Radial Tire, 490.0 (revs/mi) Geared Speed: 107.9 (mph) 6L Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Air Conditioning Status : On ?fetation full throttle, brakes locked start e And Distance To Speed, 0(%) Grade 0-20 (mph) lin 5.8(sec) 103(ft) In -'.in (mohl lin 11.4(sec) 312(ft) (mph) in 19.2(sec) 714(ft) (mph) in 30.5(sec) 1462(ft) (mph) lin 45.1 (sec) 2646(ft) This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.aIIisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page l 1 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION VEHICLE FULL THROTTLE PERFORMANCE Based on Standard Parameters Transmission Input Ratio : 1.0000 Power Packs: 1 Transmission Input Efficiency (%): 100.00 Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Speed Axle Ratio: 3.730 Effort Pull Power Air Conditioning Status : No AC Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 (Ib) (lb) Reverse RIC M (Btu/min) 1 C 0.0 1628 16955 16743 Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm 13939 Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej 11637 (-ph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) (%) (Btu/min) 11479 RIC 0.0 1628 22626 22414 0.0 50.1 16575 ' 10047 RIC 4.0 1719 17802 17579 189.9 37.6 7927 ' 8908 RIC 5.7 1759 15904 15674 241.01 33.0 5466 70Percent RIC 7.4 1806 13789 13553 270.41 28.2 3934 8OPercent RIC 8.0 1825 13006 12768 277,51 26.4 3525 6105 RIC 8.7 1841 12279 12037 284.0 24.8 3154 85Percent RIC 12.0 1973 8614 8357 275.7 17.0 2740 5006 RIC 13.21 21001 75311 7269 264.2 14.7 2157 Governed R1C 15.3 2253 0 -274 0.0 -0.5 692 4219 Automatic IC -2C -2L -3L -4L -5L -6L Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (Ib) (lb) (hp) M (Btu/min) 1 C 0.0 1628 16955 16743 0.0 35.5 16575 ' 1C 4.0 1690 14162 13939 151.1 29.0 9761 lCl 7.8 1759 11874 11637 246.1 23.9 5239 70Percent ICI 8.0 1763 11718 11479 250.0 23.6 5048 1CI 10.1 1806 10295 10047 276.1 20.5 3680 80Percent 1CI 11.9 1841 9164 8908 289.9 18.1 2893 85Percent 1CI 12.0 1843 9084 8827 290.7 17.9 2848 Icl 14.7 1909 7454 71831 293.0 14.5 2396 2CI 14.7 1763 6376 6105 250.6 12.3 5019 2CI 16.0 1777 6116 5838 261.0 11.8 4494 2CI 20.0 1823 5309 5006 283.2 10.1 3280 2CI 24.0 1867 4594 4263 294.0 8.6 2576 2C 24.2 1871 4552 4219 294.1 8.5 2557 2L 24.2 1407 5149 4816 332.7 9.7 488 2L 28.0 1626 4840 4477 361.4 9.0 552 2L 32.0 1858 3974 3576 339.1 7.2 624 2L 34.0 1975 3549 3133 321.9 6.3 677 31- 34.0 1480 3850 3434 349.2 6.9 487 31- 36.0 1567 3750 3314 360.0 6.6 510 31- 40.0 1741 3317 2840 353.9 5.7 549 31- 44.0 1915 2832 2310 332.3 4.6 611 31- 46.0 2000 2600 2054 318.7 4.1 649 41- 46.0 1400 2721 2175 333.5 4.4 384 41- 48.0 1462 2715 2144 347.5 4.3 381 4L 52.0 1584 2628 2005 364.4 4.0 392 4L 56.0 1706 2415 1737 360.6 3.5 421 4L 60.0 1828 2165 14291 346.4 2.91 455 https://iscaan.allisontransm iss ion.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct2820l 3_144... 10/28/2013 Page 12 of 21 4LI 64.0 1950 19321 1135 329.8 2.3 495 4L 66.5 2025 17841 947 316.3 1.9 529 5L 66.5 1493 1972 1135 349.6 2.3 593 5L 68.0 1527 1951 1089 353.8 2.2 602 5L 72.0 1617 1874 944 359.8 1.9 637 5L 76.0 1706 1751 749 354.8 1.51 674 5LI 80.0 1796 1614 537 3442 1.1 707 5LI 84.0 1886 14881 333 333.4 0.7 737 5LI 88.0 1976 13621 125 319.6 0.3 770 5LI 91.3 2050 1253 -53 305.2 -0.1 798 6LI 91.3 1777 14011 95 341.2 0.2 937 6L 92.0 1791 1383 61 339.3 0.1 953 6L 96.0 1869 1287 -123 329.4 -0.2 999 6L 100.0 1946 1191 -310 317.6 -0.6 1055 6L 104.0 2024 1093 -503 303.2 -1.0 1118 6L 107.9 21001 994 -698 286.0 -1.4 1193 Governed 6L 108.0 2102 979 -716 282.0 -1.4 1193 6L 112.0 2180 453 -13431 135.3 -2.7 1206 6L 115.4 2247 0 -18861 0.0 -3.8 1215 St Lockup Hold [1G-1Zj Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net% Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) M (Btu/min) 1 C 0.0 1628 16955 16743 0.0 35.5 16575 ' 1 C 4.0 1690 14162 13939 151.1 29.0 9761 1 C 7.8 1759 11874 11637 246.1 23.9 5239 1 70Percent ici 8.0 1763 11718 11479 250.0 23.6 5048 icl 10.1 1806 10295 10047 276.1 20.5 3680 80Perceni ICI 11.9 1841 9164 8908 289.9 18.1 2893 85Percent 1 C 12.0 1843 9084 8827 290.7 17.9 2848 1 C 12.8 1860 8609 8349 293.2 16.9 2652 1 L 12.8 1365 9480 9220 322.8 18.8 506 1 L 16.0 1711 8323 8045 355.1 16.3 639 1L 19.6 2100 5631 5330 294.9 10.7 796 Governed 1 L 20.0 2139 4209 3906 224.5 7.8 778 1 L 21.1 2252 0 -310 0.0 -0.61 715 Note : ' Tractive Effort exceeds vehicle traction limit (wheelslip possible) using On -Road Traction Limit Coefficient = 0.70 Note: Requested AC On Report is not included because AC Loss is 0.0 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 13 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status: Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION VEHICLE FULL THROTTLE PERFORMANCE Based on User Defined Parameters Transmission Input Ratio : 1.0000 Power Packs: 1 Transmission Input Efficiency (%): 100.00 Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net% Transm Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Speed Speed Axle Ratio: 3.730 Power Grade Heat Rej Air Conditioning Status : Off (mph) (rpm) Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 (hp) (%) Reverse (RIC) 1CI 0.0 1621 16802 16590 0.0 35.2 Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net% Transm 28.7 Speed Speed Effort Pull Power I Grade Heat Rej 23.7 (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) M) (Btu/min) 23.3 RIC 0.0 1621 22422 22210 0.01 49.6 16353 " 20.3 RIC 4.0 1711 17622 17399 188.01 37.1 7791 " 17.9 RIC 5.7 1751 15751 15522 '237-61 8950 32.7 5390 70Percent R1Cj 7.3 1797 13650 13414 266.31 27.8 3878 80Percent R1 Cl8.0 1815 12823 12584 273.51 26.0 3458 12.1 R1 Cl8.6 1831 12150 11909 279.5 24.5 3109 85Percent RIC 12.0 1968 8447 8190 270.3 16.6 2670 9.9 RIC 13.21 21001 73091 7046 257.2 14.21 2077 Governed RIC 15.21 2248 0 -274 0.0 -0.51 686 8.3 Automatic 1G -2C -2L -3L -4L -5L -6L Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net% Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (Ib) (lb) (hp) (%) (Btu/min) 1CI 0.0 1621 16802 16590 0.0 35.2 16353 " 1CI 4.0 1683 14018 13795 149.5 28.7 9591 1C1 77 1751 11760 115221 242.6 23.7 5166 70Percent 1 cl 8.0 1756 11578 11339 247.0 23.3 4946 Ict 10.0 1797 10190 9943 271.9 20.3 3629 80Percent ICI 11.8 1831 9067 8812 285.3 17.9 2852 85Percent 1CI 12.0 1834 8950 8693 286.4 17.7 2787 1C1 14.7 1901 7322 7051 287.8 14.2 2365 2CI 14.7 1756 6300 6029 247.6 12.1 4917 2CI 16.0 1769 6040 5762 257.7 11.6 4400 2CI 20.0 1814 5234 4931 279.2 9.9 3217 2CI 24.0 1859 4519 4187 289.2 8.4 2527 2CI 24.2 1862 4479 4146 289.4 8.3 2504 21- 24.2 1407 5083 4750 328.4 9.5 487 21- 28.0 1626 4768 4405 356.0 8.8 550 21- 32.0 1858 3894 3496 332.3 7.0 622 21- 34.0 1975 3465 3048 314.2 6.1 674 31- 34.0 1480 3800 3383 344.6 6.8 485 31- 36.0 1567 3697 3261 355.0 6.5 509 31- 40.0 1741 3261 2784 347.9 5.6 547 31- 44.0 1915 2771 2248 325.1 4.5 609 31- 46.0 2000 2536 1990 310.8 4.0 647 41- 46.0 1400 2686 2140 329.2 4.3 384 41- 48.0 1462 2679 2109 343.0 4.2 381 4L 52.0 1584 2591 1968 359.3 3.9 392 4L 56.0 1706 2376 1698 354.8 3.4 421 4L 60.0 1828 2124 1388 339.8 2.8 454 https://iscaan.alIisontransm ission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 14 of 21 4LI 64.0 1950 18881 1091 322.2 2.2 495 41- 66.5 2025 1738 901 308.2 1.8 528 51- 66.5 1493 1946 1109 344.9 2.2 592 51-. 68.0 1527 1925 1062 349.0 2.1 600 51- 72.0 1617 1847 916 354.6 1.8 635 51- 76.0 1706 1722 7201 349.1 1.4 672 5L.1 80.0 1796 1584 507 337.9 1.0 705 5L.1 84.0 1886 1457 302 326.4 0.6 734 5L 88.0 1976 1329 93 311.9 0.2 767 5L 91.3 2050 1219 -87 296.8 -0.2 795 6L. 91.3 1777 1376 69 335.01 0.1 935 6L 92.0 1791 1357 36 333.0 0.1 951 6L 96.0 1869 1260 -150 322.6 -0.3 996 61- 100.0 1946 1163 -338 310.2 -0.7 1051 61- 104.0 2024 1064 -532 295.1 -1.1 1115 6L 107.9 2100 963 -728 277.2 -1,51-1189 Governed 6L 108.0 2102 948 -746 273.1 -1.5 11901 1 6L 112.0 2180 421 -1375 125.7 -2.8 12021 1 6L 115.2 2242 0 -1880 0.0 -3.81_12101 1 1st Lockup Hold {IC -IL) Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) M) (Btu/min) 1CI 0.0 1621 16802 16590 0.0 35.2 16353 1CI 4.0 1683 14018 13795 149.5 28.7 9591 1CI 7.7 1751 11760 11522 242.61 23.7 5166 1 70Percent 1c] 8.0 1756 11578 11339 247.01 23.3 4946 1C1 10.0 1797 10190 9943 271.9 20.3 3629 1 80Percenl 1CI 11.8 1831 9067 8812 285.3 17.9 2852 1 85Percent 1CI 12.0 1834 8950 8693 286.4 17.7 2787 1CI 12.8 1852 8472 8211 288.5 16.6 2599 1LI 12.8 1365 9358 9098 318.7 18.5 504 11-1 16.0 1711 8188 7910 349.41 16.0 636 1 L 19.6 2100 5463 5163 286.1 10.4 792 Governed 1 L 20.0 2139 4038 3734215.3 7.5 774 1 L 21.01 2248 0 -310 0.0 -0.61 713 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Axle Ratio: 3.730 Air Conditioning Status : On Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Reverse (RIC) Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (Ib) (hp) (%) (Btu/min) R1C 0.0 1596 21787 21575 0.0 47.8 15671 ' R1C 4.0 1689 17061 16837 182.0 35.8 7388 ' RlCl 5.6 1726 15320 15091 227.8 31.7 5181 1 70Percent R1Cj 7.2 1772 13258 13023 255.2 27.0 3711 80Percent R1Cj 8.0 1793 12326 12088 263.01 24.9 3251 RICI 8.5 1803 11802 11561 267.4 23.8 2995 85Percent R1C 12.0 1958 8045 7789 257.4 15.8 2443 R1C 13.3 21001 67801 6517 240.3 13.1 1893 Governed R1C 15.11 2237 0 -273 0.0 -0.51 684 Automatic IC -2C -2L -3L 4L 5L 6L Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Speed I Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej https://iscaan.al lisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct2820 l 3_ 144... 10/28/20 1 3 Page 15 of 21 1 st Lockup (mph) (rpm) (lb) I (lb) (hp) [°/ai (Btulmin) 1 C 0.0 1596 163271 16115 0.0 34.0 15671 Speed 1 C 4.0 1660 13580 13357 144.9 27.7 9107 (rpm) 1C 7.6 1726 11437 11200 232.6 23.0 4968 70Percent 1 C 8.0 1733 11180 10942 238.5 22.4 4666 13357 1 C 9.9 1772 9897 9650 260.5 19.7 3474 80Percent 1CI 11.6 1803 8807 8552 272.9 17.4 2751 85Percent 1 C 12.0 1810 8583 8326 274.7 16.9 2634 SOPercent 1 C 14.7 1879 6972 6701 274.0 13.5 2261 2C 14.7 1734 6084 5812 239.1 11.7 4639 2C 16.0 1747 5826 5547 248.6 11.2 4142 2C 20.0 1791 5031 4728 268.3 9.5 3021 2C 24.0 1836 4322 3991 276.6 8.0 2392 2C 24.2 1839 4284 3951 276.6 7.9 2369 2L 24.2 1407 4866 4533 314.4 9.1 481 2L 28.0 1626 45521 4189 339.91 8.4 544 2L 32.0 1858 3678 3280 313.81 6.6 615 2LI 34.0 1975 3248 2831 294.61 5.7 667 3L 34.0 1480 3637 3220 329.9 6.5 481 3L 36.0 1567 3535 3099 339.4 6.2 505 3L 40.0 1741 3099 2621 330.5 5.2 543 3L 44.0 1915 2608 2086 306.0 4.2 604 3L 46.0 2000 2373 18271 290.8 3.7 642 4L 46.0 1400 2572 2026 315.2 4.1 384 4L 48.0 1462 2565 1994 328.3 4.0 381 4L 52.0 1584 2476 1854 343.4 3.7 392 4L 56.0 1706 2261 1584 337.7 3.2 421 4L60.0 1828 2009 1273 321.5 2.5 454 4L 64.0 1950 1774 977 302.7 2.0 495 4L 66.5 2025 1624 787 287.9 1.6 528 5L 66.5 1493 1862 1025 330.1 2.1 587 5L 68.0 1527 1841 979 333.8 2.0 595 5L 72.0 1617 1763 833 338.5 1.7 630 5L 76.0 1706 1639 637 332.1 1.3 666 5L 80.0 1796 1500 423 320.1 0.8 699 5L 84.0 1886 1373 218 307.6 0.4 728 5L 88.0 1976 1246 9 292.3 0.0 760 5L 91.3 2050 1135 -171 276.4 -0.3 788 6L;I 91.3 1777 1303 -3 317.3 -0.0 928 6L 92.0 1791 1285 -37 315.2 -0.1 944 6L 96.0 1869 1188 -222 304.0 -0.4 989 6L 100.0 1946 1091 -411 290.9 -0.8 1044 6L 104.0 2024 991 -605 275.0 -1.2 1107 6L 107.9 2100 891 -801 256.3 -1.6 1181 Governed 6L 108.0 2102 876 -819 252.3 -1.6 1181 6L 112.0 2180 349 -1448 104.1 -2.9 1194 6L 114.6 2231 0 -1865 0.0 -3.7 1200 1 st Lockup Mold 1 C-1 L Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net% Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) M (Btulmin) ICI 0.0 1596 16327 16115 0.0 34.0 15671 1 C 4.0 1660 13580 13357 144.9 27.7 9107 1 C 7.6 1726 11437 11200 232.6 23.0 70Percent 1 C 8.0 1733 11180 10942 238.5 22.4 �3474 1 C, 9.9 1772 9897 9650 260.5 19.7 SOPercent https://iscaan.al I isontransm ission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_ 144... 10/28/2013) Page 16 of 21 ICI 11.6 1803 88071 8552 272.9 17.4 2751 1 85Percent 1 C 12.0 1810 8583 8326 274.7 16.9 2634 1 C 12.8 1830 8100 7839 275.8 15.9 2468 1L 12.8 1365 8961 8700 305.2 17.7 498 1 L 16.0 1711 7791 7512 332.4 15.2 628 1 L 19.6 21001 5066 47651 265.31 9.61 782 Governed 1 L 1 20.0 21391 36401 33371 194.1 b. (1 764 1LI 20.9 2237 0 -309 0,0[_-0.61 709 Note : " Tractive Effort exceeds vehicle traction limit (wheelslip possible) using On -Road Traction Limit Coefficient = 0.70 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.al l isontransm ission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports9f=0ct282013_144... 10/28/20 13 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION VEHICLE ACCELERATION PERFORMANCE Brakes Locked Start Based on Standard Parameters Transmission Input Ratio : 1.0000 Transmission Input Efficiency (%): 100.00 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Air Conditioning Status : No AC Grade: 0.0 percent Axle Ratio: 3.730 Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Power Packs: 1 Page 17 of 21 /'SV[VIIIQ[fVL Vehicle Accel Engine Distance (ft) Speed Time Distance Rate Speed (mph) (sec) (ft) (mph/sec) (rpm) RIC 4.0 0.5 1.6 6.968 1719 RIC 8.0 1.2 7.6 5.038 1825 RIC 12.01 2.21 22 5 3.027 1973 /'SV[VIIIQ[fVL - - - Vehicle Speed (mph) - Time (sec) Distance (ft) Accel Rate (mph/sec) Engine Speed (rpm) 1 C 4.0 0.6 1.9 5.678 1690 1C 8.0 1.4 8.8 4.683 1763 1C 12.0 2.4 23.3 3.615 1843 1C 14.7 32 40.1 2.903 1909 2C 16.0 3.7 51.3 2.481 1777 2C 20.0 5.5 97.5 2.128 1823 2C 24.0 7.5 163.5 1.806 1867 2C 24.2 7.7 167.9 1.789 1871 2L 28.0 9.6 243.0 1.839 1626 2L 32.0 12.0 350.3 1.470 1858 2L 34.0 13.5 420.9 1.290 1974 3L 36.0 14.9 493.5 1.389 1567 3L 40.0 18.0 666.0 1.192 1741 3L 44.0 21.7 896.2 0.970 1915 3L 46.0 23.9 1038.0 0.862 2000 4L 48.0 26.1 1191.4 0.910 1462 4L 52.0 30.6 1523.0 0.852 1584 4L 56.0 35.7 1921.7 0.739 1706 4L 60.0 41.6 2430.8 0.608 1828 41- 64.0 49.0 3102.9 0.484 1950 41- 66.5 54.6 3640.5 0.404 2025 51- 68.0 57.8 3956.2 0.466 1527 5L 72.0 67.0 4899.7 0.405 1617 5L 76.0 78.1 6105.6 0.321 1706 5L 80.0 92.8 7788.4 0.231 1796 5L 84.0 114.7 10430.4 0.144 1886 5L 88.0 158.71 15995.41 0.055 1976 1st Lockup Hold IIC-i Vehicle Speed I Time Distance AccelI Engine Rate Speed https://iscaan.al I i sontransm iss ion.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oet282013144... 10/28/2013 Page 18 of 21 Note:. Indicates acceleration limited by wheel slip (wheelslip possible) using On -Road Traction Limit Coefficient = 0.70 Note: Requested AC On Report is not included because AC Loss is 0.0 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_ 144... 10/28/2013 {mph) (sec) (ft) (mph/sec) (rpm) 1C] 4.0 0.6 1.9 5.678 1690 1 C 8.0 1.4 8.8 4.683 1763 1 C 12.0 2.4 23.3 3.615 1843 1 C 12.8 2.6 27.3 3.365 1860 1 L 16.01 3.61 4851 2.951 1711 1L 20.01 5.31_94,61 1.514 2139 Note:. Indicates acceleration limited by wheel slip (wheelslip possible) using On -Road Traction Limit Coefficient = 0.70 Note: Requested AC On Report is not included because AC Loss is 0.0 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_ 144... 10/28/2013 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION VEHICLE ACCELERATION PERFORMANCE Brakes Locked Start Based on User Defined Parameters Transmission Input Ratio : 1.0000 Transmission Input Efficiency (%): 100.00 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Air Conditioning Status : Off Grade: 0.0 percent Axle Ratio: 3.730 Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Power Packs: 1 Page 19 of 21 ncvvrx +�. Vehicle Accel Engine Accel Rate (mph/sec) Speed Time Distance Rate Speed 1 C (mph) (sec) (ft) (mph/sec) (rpm) R1C 4.0 0.5 1.6 6.898 1711 R1 C 8.0 1.2 7.7 4.971 1815 R1 C 12.01 2.2 22.9 2.888 1968 Vehicle Speed (mph) Time (sec) Distance (ft) Accel Rate (mph/sec) Engine Speed (rpm) 1 C 4.0 0.7 2.0 5.620 1683 1 C 8.0 1.4 8.9 4.626 1756 1CI 12.0 2.4 23.6 3.557 1834 1CI 14.7 3.3 40.7 2.851 1901 2CI 16.0 3.8 52.0 2.448 1769 2C 20.0 5.6 98.9 2.097 1814 2C 24.0 7.6 165.9 1.775 1859 2C 24.2 7.8 170.5 1.759 1862 2L 28.0 9.8 246.6 1.810 1626 2L 32.0 12.2 356.1 1.438 1858 2L 34.0 13.7 428.4 1.255 1974 3L 36.0 15.2 502.1 1.367 1567 3L 40.0 18.3 677.7 1.169 1741 3L 44.0 22.1 913.4 0.945 1915 3L 46.0 24.3 1059.4 0.835 2000 4L 48.0 26.6 1215.4 0.895 1462 41- 52.0 31.2 1552.9 0.836 1584 41- 56.0 36.3 1959.8 0.723 1706 41- 60.0 42.5 2482.2 0.591 1828 41- 64.0 50.1 3177.8 0.465 1950 41- 66.5 56.0 3740.0 0.384 2025 51- 68.0 59.3 4063.3 0.455 1527 51- 72.0 68.7 5032.5 0.393 1617 5LI 76.0 80.2 6280.0 0.309 1706 5L 80.0 95.6 8044.5 0.218 1796 5L 84.0 119.2 10895.3 0.130 1886 5L 88.0 172.0 17577.7 0.041 1976 1sr Lockup Hold (IC -10 Vehicle Speed I Time Distance Accel Engine Rate I Speed https://iscaan.atIisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oet282013_144... 10/28/20 13 Page 20 of 21 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Axle Ratio: 3.730 Air Conditioning Status : On Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Grade: 0.0 percent ,o4 r'1 i (mph) (sec) (ft) (mphlsec) (rpm) 1 C 4.0 0.7 2.0 5.620 1683 1 C 8.0 1.4 8.9 4.626 1756 1 C 12.0 2.4 23.6 3.557 1834 1 C 12.8 2.7 27.7 3.306 1852 1LI 16.01 3.71 2.9021 1711 1LI 20.01 5.41 96.51 1.4521 2139 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Axle Ratio: 3.730 Air Conditioning Status : On Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Grade: 0.0 percent ,o4 r'1 i Vehicle Speed Time Distance (mph) (sec) (ft) Accel Engine Rate Speed (mph/sec) (rpm) R1C 4.0 0.5 1.6 6.684 1689 R1Cj 8.0 1.2 8.0 4.801 1793 R1Cj 12.01 2.31 24.1 2.669 1958 _71 _dl -41 _F? I https://iscaan.al lisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/20 13 v Vehicle Speed (mph) Time (sec) Time (sec) Distance (ft) Accel Rate (mph/sec) Engine Speed (rpm) 1 C 1CI 0.7 4.0 0.7 2.0 5.438 1CI 1660 1CI 9.2 8.0 1.5 9.2 4.462 1733 1CI 12.0 2.5 24.5 3.395 1810 1 C 14.7 3.4 42.4 2.709 1879 2C 16.0 3.9 54.2 2.357 1747 2C 20.0 5.8 103.0 2.012 1791 2C 24.0 8.0 173.1 1.694 1836 2C 24.2 8.1 177.9 1.676 1839 2LI 28.0 10.2 257.7 1.721 1626 2LI 32.0 12.8 373.6 1.349 1858 2 L 34.0 14.4 451.1 1.166 1974 3LI 36.0 15.9 528.6 1.299 1567 31_ 40.0 19.2 714.2 1.101 1741 3LI 44.0 23.3 966.3 0.876 1915 31_ 46.0 25.7 1124.5 0.767 2000 4LI 48.0 28.1 1289.4 0.846 1462 4LI 52.0 33.0 1646.8 0.788 1584 4LI 56.0 38.5 2080.9 0.674 1706 4LI 60.0 45.1 2645.6 0.542 1828 4LI 64.0 53.5 3412.8 0.416 1950 4LI 66.5 60.1 4048.4 0.336 2025 5LI 68.0 63.7 4398.7 0.419 1527 5LI 72.0 74.0 5457.5 0.357 1617 5LI 76.0 86.8 6848.8 0.274 1706 5L 80.0 104.7 8899.6 0.182 1796 5L 84.0 134.9 12545.6 0.095 18861 1 5L 88.01 276.51 30594.91 0.005 19761 1 https://iscaan.al lisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/20 13 Vehicle Speed (mph) Time (sec) Distance (ft) Accel Rate (mphlsec) Engine Speed (rpm) 1 C 4.0 0.7 2.0 5.438 1660 1CI 8.0 1.5 9.2 4.462 1733 https://iscaan.al lisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/20 13 Page 21 of 21 1C1 12.0 2.5 24.5 3.395 18101 J 1 C 12.81 2.71 28.8 3.147 1830 1 L 16.01 3.81 51.3 2.757 1711 1 L 20.01 5.71 102.0 1.307 2139 Note: ' Indicates acceleration limited by wheel slip (wheelslip possible) using On -Road Traction Limit Coefficient = 0.70 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https:Hiscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Reliability Driven" ATTACHMENT CNG ENGINE INFORMATION to 1• 1• ■ Cooled Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) ■ XPI Fuel _ System ' f �i• it }� ■ VGT Turbocharger t r 0 ■ Cummins �► - Aftertreatment r r System b � I I ■ Single High -Capacity: ® ' ■ Fleetguard Fuel Filters, V! Electronic Control Lube Filters and Diesel �' ' Module (ECM) Exhaust Fluid (DEF) f Better. Where It Counts. ISL9. Where it counts in the motorcoach industry is on the bottom line. The 2013 ISL9 reduces operating costs with up to 2 percent better fuel economy than the 2012 model, thanks to modifications to the turbocharger and to the addition of an air intake throttle that makes the EGR system more efficient. Lower fuel use results in less carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions. As a result, the ISL9 meets 2013 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations as well as 2014 EPA greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions standards and U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) fuel -efficiency standards — a full year ahead of schedule. Better Integration. Better Performance. Cummins is the only engine manufacturer to design, develop and support every component from the air intake to the exhaust aftertreatment to work as a totally integrated system. The high-pressure XPI fuel system, with multiple injection events per cycle, is coordinated with the Cummins Aftertreatment System through a single, robust ECM that optimizes everything from throttle response to combustion efficiency to exhaust control. The Cummins Aftertreatment System utilizes proven Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) technology, which requires the use of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) at a rate of approximately 3 percent to 4 percent of diesel fuel consumption. For more information, see the fuel and DEF usage calculator at cumminsengines.com. Fleetguard fuel filters from Cummins Filtration protect against corrosion and contaminants, with proprietary technology such as NanoNet" media, which provides 10 times better protection than conventional fuel filters. No major hardware changes are needed for 2013, just continuous improvements to our proven technology. The result is a cleaner, more powerful ISL9 engine for every motorcoach. Better Value. All Cummins products for the motorcoach market, including diesel and natural gas -fueled engines, are Buy America -compliant. The Cummins ISL9 is manufactured in the United States. Better In The Long Run. Cummins ISL9 has the highest power -to -weight ratio of any engine in its class, and shares common technology with the Heavy -Duty ISX15 and ISM 2. Heavy-duty roller followers, bypass oil filtration and targeted piston cooling all contribute to longer service, making an ISL9-powered motorcoach a better value in the long run. Better Warranty Coverage. Base engine warranty coverage for Cummins ISL9 engines used in motorcoach applications is 2 years with unlimited miles. It includes 100 percent of all parts and labor on warrantable failures* travel or towing when a vehicle is disabled, plus any consumables not reusable due to the repair — all with no deductible. "Covers defects in Cummins materials or factory workmanship Every Confidence. For added peace of mind and financial security, Cummins offers an extended coverage plan for the ISL9. Engine coverage includes EGR components, excluding all maintenance components and accessories that bear the name of another company, for terms ranging from 5 years/200,000 miles (321,869 km) to 5 years/500,000 miles (804,672 km). Better Customer Care. Cummins -powered 1 � motorcoaches are backed by the largest and most capable parts and service network in North America, with over 3,500 locations. Our authorized service technicians are trained and certified, and have the necessary equipment and Genuine Cummins Parts to promptly handle any service issue. Plus, Cummins Care representatives are on call 24/7/365 to help you locate the nearest available and authorized facility to service your motorcoach. Cummins Care representatives can also answer questions about your engine, aftertreatment system and related technology. For assistance, just call 1 -800 -DIESELS" (1-800-343-7357). ISL9 Ratings Engine Advertised HP (KW) Model Peak Torque LB -FT (N -M) @ RPM ISL9 380 380 (283) 1250(1695)@ 1400 ISL9 Specifications Governed Speed 2100 RPM Clutch Engagement Torque 575 LB -FT 780 N•M Number of Cylinders 6 System Weight 1,912 La 867 KG Engine (Dry) 1,695 LB 769 KG Aftertreatment System' 217 LB 98 KG 'Increase over standard muffler; does not include chassis OEM -supplied components Better. Where It Counts. Cummins ISL9 delivers better performance, increased fuel economy, exceptional reliability and durability and unexcelled service capability. No matter what counts most to you, you can count on Cummins ISL9. For additional details, visit cumminsengines.com or contact your local Cummins distributor or dealer. Cummins Inc. Box min 3005 Columbus, IN 47202-3005 U.S.A. Phone: 1 -800 -DIESELS- (1-800-343-7357) Fax: 1-800-232-6393 Internet: cumminsengines.com Twitteccom/CumminsEngines YouTube.com/CumminsEngines Bulletin 4971406 Panted -n U.S A. 1/13 02013 Cummins Inc. SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION INPUT SUMMARY VOCATION Service Application Configuration Vocation Number VEHICLE PARAMETERS )escn tion End User (and Region, Sub Rec Manufacturer (and Region, Sub Model Descriolion Area and We+ hl Power Packs Height Width Standard Wind Resistance Coefficient ( No Deflector ] User Defined Resistance Coefficient ( No Deflector) Weight, Rated ( No Trailer, GVW) Weight on Drive Wheels Weioht on Drive Wheels Intercity Bus Straight Vehicle 44-25-14 otor Coach Industries LTD (North America, Cans otor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian u4bw com D4500 Commuter 1 11.40 8.50( 0.45 50000 (Ib) 42.00 (°%) 21000 0b) Pagel of 21 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.aI l isontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/20 1 3 Page 2 of 21 ACCESSORIES Power at governed speed) Standard User (hp) (hp) Fan (clutch fan) 57.36 65.00 Alt/Generator 8.50 12.00 Air Compressor 2.48 1.50 Steer Pump 2.48 11.50 Air Conditioning 10.00 122.00 TRANSMISSION Manufacturer Allison Configuration 8500 (1-6) (1-500-3) TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED -Smoke Control) (1-541-1 Converter 12.7672 (Ib-ft-sec^2) Retarder Shift Calibration 2100 rpm S1/S5 Perf, Std Preselects, (1.6) (1-500-21007, Intercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls (1-500-4) GRADES Std Acceleration 10,00(%) INERTIA Engine (estimated) 12.7672 (Ib-ft-sec^2) Tire~eels (estimated) 180.4717 (Ib-ft-see2) ENGINE DETAIL - Standard Accessories (AC On where applicable) tow And High Power Fan On/AC On Fan On/AC On Fan Off/AC On Fan OffIAC On Speed Power Torque Net Power Net Torque Net Power Net Torque (rpm) (hp) (Ib -ft) (hp) (Ib -ft) (hp) (Ib -ft) 1100 303.7 1450.0 284.4 1357.8 292.6 1397.2 Peak Torque 1200 331.3 1450.0 309.3 1353.7 320.0 1400.5 1300 1358.9 1450.0 333.8 1348.5 347.4 1403.4 1400 1386.5 1450.0 1357.8 1342.1 374.8 1405.9 1500 1414.1 1450.0 1381.2 1334.8 402.1 1408.0 1600 1429.6 1410.0 1392.0 1286.6 417.3 1369.8 1700 1430.5 1330.0 1387.6 1197.5 418.0 1291.5 1800 1425.0 1240.0 376.2 1097.6 412.3 1202.9 Peak Power 1900 419.6 1160.0 364.3 1006.9 406.7 1124.2 2000 411.3 1080.0 348.6 915.4 398.1 1045.4 2100 397.8 995.0 327.1 818.1 384.4 961.5 Governed 2300 0.0 0.0 -89.2 -203.6 -13.9 -31.7 No Load Governed Peak Power point has been defined for the purposes of assessing Accessory Losses This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere https://iscaan.alI isontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 3 of 21 ENGINE DETAIL - User Defined Accessories (AC On where applicable) Low And N+ah Power Peak Power point has been defined for the purposes of assessing Accessory Losses This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere https://iscaan.aI I isontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/201 Fan On/AC On Fan On/AC On Fan Off/AC On Fan Off/AC On Speed Power Torque Net Power Net Torque Net Power Net Torque (rpm) (hp) (Ib -ft) (hp) (lb -ft) (hp) (Ib -ft) 1100 303.7 1450.0 269.3 1285.6 278.6 1330.2 Peak Torque 1200 331.3 1450.0 292.9 1281.9 305.0 1335.0 1300 358.9 1450.0 316.0 1276.7 331.4 1339.0 1400 386.5 1450.0 1338.6 1270.2 357.9 1342.5 1500 414.1 1450.0 1360.6 1262.5 384.3 1345.5 1600 429.6 1410.0 1369.8 1213.7 398.5 1308.1 1700 430.5 1330.0 1363.8 1123.9 398.3 1230.4 1800 425.0 1240.0 350.6 1023.0 391.6 1142.5 Peak Power 1900 419.6 1160.0 336.9 931.2 385.0 1064.3 2000 411.3 1080.0 319.3 838.5 375.5 986.0 2100 397.8 995.0 295.8 739.9 1360.8 902.5 Governed 2300 0.0 0.0 -124.8 -284.9 -39.4 -89.9 No Load Governed Peak Power point has been defined for the purposes of assessing Accessory Losses This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere https://iscaan.aI I isontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/201 Page 4 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION SCAAN SUMMARY Based On Standard Parameters Vocation: Bus, Intercity Bus, Straight Vehicle End User: Motor Coach Industries LTD (North America, Canadian) Manufacturer: Motor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian) Model: D4500 com, D4500 Commuter Engine: Cummins ISX12 EPA13 425hp / 14501bft / 2100rpm Engine Certification Year: 2013 Transmission: 8500 (1-6) Rating: Intercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls Converter: TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED - Smoke Control) Retarder: VCheck Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Min/ Max Actual Overall Status C1 'Transmission/Converter Compatibility 35.5 Max 1 st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Net Gradeability OK C2 Engine/Converter Compatibility V14 11st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Gradeability 18.0 percent OK C4 Engine Speed At Converter Stall V17 rpm mph 1628 OK C9 jEngine Speed At Converter Stall, Smoke Control 1825 rpm Min 1628 XX C5 IMinimurn Engine Speed 1200 rpm Min 1628 OK C7 Turbine Torque At Stall 2450 Ib -ft Max 2347 OK C8 Converter Speed Ratio at 2100 rpm 0.800 Min 0.916 OK C3 Converter Stall Torque Ratio 550 hp Max 1.897 OK Check J V Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Mini Actual Overall percent 35.5 Max 1 st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Net Gradeability Status T1 ITransmissionlVocation Compatibility V14 11st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Gradeability 18.0 percent OK 20.5 Transmission Compatible with High Torque Rise Diesel V17 Maximum Geared Vehicle Speed At Engine Governed Speed mph OK T2 Engines Maximum Speed on 0.50% Grade 65.0 mph Min 89.4 OK T20 ITorque Limiting: Engine & Transm SEM/LRTP Reqd Btu/min 5259 OK Heat Generated in 1 st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Transmission Permitted in End User/Chassis Mfg Transmission 3684 OK T17 T15 Input Power(Gross) 550 hp Max 431 OK T14 Input Torque(Gross) 1700 Ib -ft Max 1450 OK T3 Input Speed (Engine Governed Speed) 1700/2300 rpm 2100 OK T4 Transmission Output Speed rpm 1 3286 vvrc,c.Yrrvo�wiv Check Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Min/ Max Actual Overall Status V21 1 st Range Converter Stall Gradeability percent 35.5 V13 1 st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Net Gradeability percent 23.9 V14 11st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Gradeability 18.0 percent Min 20.5 OK V17 Maximum Geared Vehicle Speed At Engine Governed Speed mph 107.9 V18 Maximum Speed on 0.50% Grade 65.0 mph Min 89.4 OK V43 lHeat Generated in 1 st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Btu/min 5259 V44 Heat Generated in 1 st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Btu/min 3684 ehrc/s1DfiveLine/Fue/ t eonom Check Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Min/ Actual Overall Max Status V51 Maximum Driveline Ratio for Optimum Engine Speed 4.039 Max 3.730 OK V59 Gradeability at 65.0 mph Cruise Velocity 0.50 percent Min 2.65 OK https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/201' V60A lGradeabifity at 2C -2L Shift 7.0 percent Min V61 lVehicle Sneed at 5L -6L Shift 60.0 mph Max OK: Acceptable OK -1: OK based on pre -acceptance by Engineering OK -2: OK based on Accepted Application Review C: Consider- manufacturer to assess XX: Questionable - may not be acceptable XXX: Not Acceptable - rating or usage violation This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. 9.7 91.3 Page 5 of 21 OK haps: //iscaan.aI l isontransm i ss ion.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 6 of 21 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.al l isontransm ission.com/extranet/i scaan/SCAANReports?f--Oct2820l 3_ 144... 10/28/20 13 Page 7 of 21 SCAAN No. :203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION SCAAN SUMMARY Based On User Defined Parameters Vocation: Bus, Intercity Bus, Straight Vehicle End User: Motor Coach Industries LTD (North America, Canadian) Manufacturer: Motor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian) Model: D4500 com, D4500 Commuter Engine: Cummins ISX12 EPA13 425hp / 14501bft / 2100rpm Engine Certification Year: 2013 Transmission: 8500 (1-6) Rating: Intercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls Converter: TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED - Smoke Control) Retarder: Vehlc/e,,VnveDr)a Check Check Name Recomm/Rating Units Min/ Actual Max V21 11st Range Converter Stall Gradeabilily percent 34.0 V13 11 st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Net Gradeabdity percent 23.0 V14 11 st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Gradeability 18.0 percent Min 19.7 V17 IMaximurn Geared Vehicle Speed At Engine Governed Speed mph 107.9 V18 Maximum Speed on 0.50% Grade 65.0 mph Min 87.5 V43 Heat Generated in 1 st Range 70% Converter Efficiency Btu/min 5187 V44 Heat Generated in 1 st Range 80% Converter Efficiency Btu/min 3632 Vehlc1e1DrjveLinevFae1 Economy Check Check Name RecommlRating Units Min/ Actual Max V51 Maximum Driveline Ratio for Optimum Engine Speed 4.039 Max 3.730 V59 Gradeability at 65.0 mph Cruise Velocity 0.50 percent Min 2.40 V60A Gradeability at 2C -2L Shift 7.0 percent Min 9.1 V61 Vehicle Speed at 5L -6L Shift 60.0 mph Max 91.3 OK: Acceptable OK -1: OK based on pre -acceptance by Engineering OK -2: OK based on Accepted Application Review C: Consider - manufacturer to assess XX: Questionable - may not be acceptable XXX: Not Acceptable - rating or usage violation This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https.//iscaan.aIIisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_l44— 10/28/2013 Page 8 of 21 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.al lisontransm ission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 9 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION CUSTOMER PERFORMANCE SUMMARY Based on Standard Parameters Vocation: Bus, Intercity Bus, Straight Vehicle End User: Motor Coach Industries LTD (North America, Canadian) Manufacturer: Motor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian) Model: D4500 com, D4500 Commuter Engine: Cummins ISX12 EPA13 425hp / 14501bft / 2100rpm Engine Certification Year: 2013 Transmission: 6500 (1-6) Rating: Intercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls Converter: TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED - Smoke Control) Retarder: Weight: 50000 (lb) (GVW) Driveline Ratio : 3.730 Tires: Standard Radial Tire, 490.0 (revs/mi) Geared Speed: 107.9 (mph) 6L Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Air Conditioning Status: No AC Acceleration (full throttle. brakes locked start) Tlme And Distance To Speed, 0(%) Grade 0-20 (mph) in 5-6(sec)983(a) 0-30 (mph) in 10.8(sec) 293(1 0-40 (mph) in 18.0(sec) 666(1 0-50 (mph) in 28.4(sec) 1352 0-60 (mph) in 41.6(sec) 2431 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144.,, 10/28/2013 Page 10 of 2 l SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION CUSTOMER PERFORMANCE SUMMARY Based on User Defined Parameters Vocation: Bus, Intercity Bus, Straight Vehicle End User: Motor Coach Industries LTD (North America, Canadian) Manufacturer: Motor Coach Industries (North America, Canadian) Model: D4500 com, D4500 Commuter Engine: Cummins ISX12 EPA13 425hp / 14501bft / 2100rpm Engine Certification Year: 2013 Transmission: 8500 (1-6) Rating: Intercity Coach w/4th & 5th Gen Controls Converter: TC541 (NOT RECOMMENDED - Smoke Control) Retarder: Weight: 50000 (lb) (GVW) Driveline Ratio : 3.730 Tires: Standard Radial Tire, 490.0 (revs/mi) Geared Speed: 107.9 (mph) 6L Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Air Conditioning Status : On urdueWr+rr Launch Gradeability 32.0(°%) Low Speed Gradeability 19.7(%) at 9.9(mph), 80(%) Conv Eff Grade Maximum Speed On Grade 0.00(°%) at 88.2(mph), 5L, Road Load Speed Q.25(%) at 85.8(mph), 5L 0.50(%) at 83.4(mph), 5L 1.00(%) at 78.6(mph), 5L 2.00(%) at 67.3(mph), 5L 3.00(%) at 57.2(mph), 4L 4.00(36) at 47.7(mph), 4L 5.00(%) at 41.0(mph), 3L 6.00(%) at 37.4(mph), 3L 7.00(°%) at 31.8(mph). 2L 8.00(°%) at 29.6(mph), 2L 9.00(°%) at 24.9(mph), 2L 10.00(°%) at 18.8(mph). 2C Acceleration tfull throttle, brakes locked start Time And Distance To Speed, 0(%) Grade 0-20 (mph) In 5,8(sec) 103(ft) 0-30 (mph) In 11.4(sec) 312(ft) 0-40 (mph) in 19.2(sec) 714(ft) 0-50 (mph) in 30.5(sec) 1462(ft) 0-60 (mph) in 45.1 (Sep) 2646(ft) This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere https://iscaan.al lisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?t'---Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 11 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION VEHICLE FULL THROTTLE PERFORMANCE Based on Standard Parameters Transmission Input Ratio : 1.0000 Power Packs: 1 Vehicle Transmission Input Efficiency (%): 100.00 Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Speed Axle Ratio: 3.730 Power Grade Heat Rej Air Conditioning Status : No AC (rpm) Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 (%) (Btu/min) Reverse (RIC) 0.0 1628 16955 16743 0.0 35.5 16575 ' Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm 9761 Speed Speed Effort Pull Power I Grade Heat Rej 5239 70Percent (mph) (rpm) (lb) (Ib) (hp) N (Btu/min) 5048 RICI 0.0 1628 22626 22414 0.01 50.1 16575 ' 3680 80Percenl RICI 4.0 1719 17802 17579 189.9 37.6 7927 ' 2893 85Percent. R1C 5.7 1759 15904 15674 241.0 33.0 5466 70Percent R1 C 7.4 1806 13789 13553 270.4 28.2 3934 80Percent R1 C 8.0 1825 13006 12768 277.5 26.4 3525 5019 R1 C 8.7 1841 12279 12037 284.0 24.8 3154 85Percent R1 C 12.0 1973 8614 8357 275.71 17.0 2740 3280 R1Cj 13.21 21001 7531 7269 264.21 14.71 2157 Governed R1Cj 15.31 2253 0 -274 0.0 -0.51 6921 1 2557 Automatic 0 C -2C -2L -3L -4L -5L -5L Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) (%) (Btu/min) 1 C 0.0 1628 16955 16743 0.0 35.5 16575 ' 1 C 4.0 1690 14162 13939 151.1 29.0 9761 1 C 7.8 1759 11874 11637 246.1 23.9 5239 70Percent 1 C 8.0 1763 11718 11479 250.0 23.6 5048 1CI 10.1 1806 10295 10047 276.1 20.5 3680 80Percenl 1CI 11.9 1841 9164 8908 289.9 18.1 2893 85Percent. ICI 12.0 1843 9084 8827 290.7 17.9 2848 1CI 14.7 1909 7454 7183 293.01 14.5 2396 2C 14.7 1763 6376 6105 250.6 12.3 5019 2Cj 16.0 1777 6116 5838 261.01 11.8 4494 2CI 20.0 1823 5309 5006 283.21 10.1 3280 2CI 24.0 1867 4594 4263 294.01 8.6 2576 2CI 24.2 1871 4552 4219 294.11 8.5 2557 21- 24.2 1407 51494816 332.71 9.7 488 21- 28.0 1626 4840 4477 361.4 9.0 552 21- 32.0 1858 3974 3576 339.1 7.2 624 21- 34.0 1975 3549 3133 321.9 6.3 677 31- 34.0 1480 3850 3434 349.2 6.9 487 31- 36.0 1567 3750 33141 360.0 6.6 510 31-1 40.0 1741 3317 2840 353.9 5.7 549 31- 44.0 1915 2832 2310 332.3 4.6 611 31- 46.0 2000 2600 2054 318.7 4.1 649 41- 46.0 1400 2721 2175 333.5 4.4 384 41- 48.0 1462 2715 2144 347.5 4.3 381 4L 52.0 1584 26281 2005 364.4 4.0 392 4L 56.0 1706 24151 1737 360.6 3.5 421 4L 60.0 1828 21651 1429 346.4 2.9 455 https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 12 of 2 t 4LI 64.0 1950 19321 1135 329.8 2.3 495 41. 66.5 2025 17841 947 316.3 1.9 529 5LI 66.5 1493 19721 1135 349.6 2.3 593 51- 68.0 1527 19511 1089 353.8 2.2 602 5LI 72.0 1617 18741 944 359.8 1.9 637 5LI 76.0 1706 1751 749 354.8 1.5 674 5LI 80.0 1796 1614 537 344.2 1.1 707 5LI 84.0 1886 1488 333 333.4 0.7 737 51_ 88.0 1976 1362 125 319.6 0.3 770 5LI 91.3 2050 1253 -53 305.2 -0.1 798 6LI 91.3 1777 1401 95 341.2 0.2 937 6LI 92.0 1791 1383 61 339.3 0.1 953 6LI 96.0 1869 1287 -123 329.4 -0.2 999 6LI 100.0 1946 1191 -310 317.6 -0.6 1055 6LI 104.0 2024 1093 -503 303.2 -1.0 1118 6LI 107.9 2100 994 -698 286.0 -1.41 1193 Governed 6L 108.0 2102 979 -716 282.0 -1.4 11193 6L 112.0 2180 453 -1343 135.3 -2.71 1206 6L 115.4 2247 0 -1886 0.0 -3.81 1215 1st Lockup Hold 7G-'ILj Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) M (Btulmin) 1 C 0.0 1628 16955 16743 0.0 35.5 16575 ' 1 C 4.0 1690 14162 13939 151.1 29.0 9761 ICI 7.8 1759 11874 11637 246.1 23.9 5239 70Percent ICI 8.0 1763 11718 11479 250.0 23.6 5048 1CI 10.1 1806 10295 10047 276.1 20.5 3680 80Percenl 1 C 11.9 1841 9164 8908 289.9 18.1 2893 Wercenl ICI 12.0 1843 9084 8827 290.7 17.9 2848 1CI 12.8 1860 8609 83491 293.2 16.9 2652 1LI 12.8 1365 9480 9220 322.8 18.8 506 11_ 16.0 1711 8323 8045 355.1 16.3 639 1 L 19.6 2100 5631 5330 294.9 10.7 796 Governed 1 L 20.0 21391 4209 3906 224.5 7.8 778 1L. 21.11 2252 0 -310 0.0 -0.61 715 Note : * Tractive Effort exceeds vehicle traction limit (wheelslip possible) using On -Road Traction Limit Coefficient = 0.70 Note: Requested AC On Report is not included because AC Loss is 0.0 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.alIisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 13 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION VEHICLE FULL THROTTLE PERFORMANCE Based on User Defined Parameters Transmission Input Ratio : 1.0000 Power Packs: 1 Transmission Input Efficiency (%): 100.00 Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Speed Speed Axle Ratio: 3.730 Pull Power Grade Air Conditioning Status : Off (mph) Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 (lb) (hp) Reverse R1 (Btu/min) icl 0.0 1621 16802 16590 0.0 Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm 149.5 Speed Speed Effort Pull Power I Grade Heat Rej 242.6 (mph) (rpm) (lb) (Ib) (hp) (%) (Btu/min) 247.0 R1C 0.0 1621 22422 22210 0.01 49.6 16353 ' 271.9 R1C 4.0 1711 17622 17399 188.01 37.1 7791 ' 285.3 R1 C 5.7 1751 15751 15522 237.61 32.7 5390 70Percent R1 Ci 7.3 1797 13650 13414 266-31 27.8 3878 80Percent R1C 8.0 1815 12823 12584 273.5 26.0 3458 247.61 R1C 8.6 1831 12150 11909 279.5 24.5 3109 85Percenl R1C 12.0 1968 8447 8190 270.3 16.6 2670 279.21 R1C 13.21 2100 73091 7046 257.2 14.21 2077 Governed R1Cj 15.21 2248 0 -274 0.0 -0.51 686 289.4 Automatic (iC-2C-2L-3L-4L-5L-6Q Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) (%) (Btu/min) icl 0.0 1621 16802 16590 0.0 35.2 16353 ' icl 4.0 1683 14018 13795 149.5 28.7 9591 1CI 7.7 1751 11760 11522 242.6 23.7 5166 70Percent icl 8.0 1756 11578 11339 247.0 23.3 4946 1CI 10.0 1797 10190 9943 271.9 20.3 3629 80Percenl. 1CI 11.8 1831 9067 8812 285.3 17.9 2852 85Percent id 12.0 1834 8950 8693 286.4 17.7 2787 1cl 14.7 1901 7322 7051 287.81 14.2 2365 2CI 14.7 1756 6300 6029 247.61 12.1 4917 2CI 16.0 1769 6040 5762 257.71 11.6 4400 2CI 20.0 1814 5234 4931 279.21 9.9 3217 2CI 24.0 1859 4519 4187 289.2 8.4 2527 2CI 24.2 1862 4479 4146 289.4 8.3 2504 21- 24.2 1407 5083 4750 328.4 9.5 487 21- 28.0 1626 4768 4405 356.0 8.8 550 21- 32.0 1858 3894 3496 332.3 7.0 622 2LI 34.0 1975 3465 3048 314.21 6.1 674 31-1 34.0 1480 3800 3383 344.6 6.8 485 31- 36.0 1567 3697 3261 355.0 6.5 509 31- 40.0 1741 3261 2784 347.9 5.6 547 31- 44.0 1915 2771 2248 325.1 4.5 609 31- 46.0 2000 2536 1990 310.8 4.0 647 41- 46.0 1400 2686 2140 329.2 4.3 384 41- 48.0 1462 2679 2109 343.0 4.2 381 4L 52.0 1584 2591 1968 359.3 3.9 392 4L 56.0 1706 2376 1698 354.8 3.4 421 4L 60-01 18281 2124 13881 339.8 2.8 454 https://iscaan.al Iiso ntrans miss ion.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 14 of 21 4LI 64.0 1950 18aal 1091 322.2 2.2 4y5 4L 66.5 2025 17381 901 308.2 1.8 528 5L 66.5 1493 19461 1109 344.9 2.2 592 5L 68.0 1527 1925 1062 349.0 2.1 600 5L 72.0 1617 1847 916 354.6 1.8 635 5L 76.0 1706 1722 720 349.11 1.4 672 5L. 80.0 1796 1584 507 337.91 1.0 705 5L 84.0 1886 1457 302 326.4 0.6 734 5L. 88.0 1976 1329 93 311.9 0.2 767 5L 91.3 2050 1219 -87 296.8 -0.2 795 6L 91.3 1777 1376 69 335.0 0.1 935 6L 92.0 1791 1357 36 333.0 0.1 951 6L 96.0 1869 1260 -150 322.6 -0.3 996 6L 100.0 1946 11 63 -338 310.2 0.7 1051 6L 104.0 2024 1064 -532 295.1 -1.1 1115 6L 107.9 2100 963 -728 277.2 -1.5 1189 Governed 6L 108.0 2102 948 -746 273.1 -1.5 1190 61- 112.0 2180 421 -1375 125.7 -2.8 1202 6L 115.2 2242 0 -1880 0.0 -3.8 1210 1st Lockup Hold IC -1L) Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) N (Btu/min) 1 C 0.0 1621 16802 16590 0.0 35.2 16353 ' 1 C 4.0 1683 140181 13795 149.5 28.7 9591 1 C 7.7 1751 117601 11522 242.6 23.7 5166 70Percent 1 C 8.0 1756 115781 11339 247.0 23.3 4946 1 C 10.0 1797 101901 9943 271.9 20.3 3629 80Percent ICI 11.8 1831 90671 8812 285.3 17.9 2852 85Percent 1CI 12.0 1834 8950 8693 286.4 17.7 2787 1CI 12.8 1852 8472 8211 288.5 16.61 2599 ILI 12.8 1365 9358 9098 318.7 18.51 504 ILI 16.0 1711 8188 7910 349.4 16.0 636 IL 19.6 2100 5463 5163 286.1 10.4 792 Governed ILI 20.0 21391 4038 3734 215.3 7.5 774 1L 21.0 2248 01 -310 0.0 -0.6 713 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Axle Ratio: 3.730 Air Conditioning Status : On Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Reverse FtIC) Vehicle Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net% Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) M (Btu/min) R1CI 0.0 1596 21787 21575 0.0 47.8 15671 ' R1 CI 4.0 1689 17061 16837 182.0 35.8 7388 ' R1CI 5.6 1726 15320 15091 227.8 31.7 5181 70Percent R1CI 7.2 1772 13258 13023 255.21 27.0 3711 80Percent RICI 8.0 1793 12326 12088 263.01 24.9 3251 R1 C 8.5 1803 11802 11561 267.4 23.8 2995 85Percent RIC 12.0 1958 8045 7789 257.4 15.8 2443 RIC 13.3 2100 6780 6517 240.3 13.1 1893 Governed RIC 15.11 2237 0 -27 31 0.0 -0.51 684 Automatic (1C -2C -2L -3L -4L -5L -6L) Vehicle I Engine I Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net% Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej https://iscaan-al lisontransm ission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/20 1 3 Page 15 of 21 Hold 0C -7L (mph) (rpm) (Ib) (lb) (hp) (°Io) (Btu/min) Engine 1CI 0.0 1596 16327 16115 0.0 34.0 15671 ' Pull ICI 4.0 1660 13580 13357 144.9 27.7 9107 M ICI 7.6 1726 11437 11200 232.6 23.0 4968 1 70Percent 1 C 8.0 1733 11180 10942 238.5 22.4 4666 114371 1 C 9.9 1772 9897 96501 260.5 19.7 3474 80Percent 1 C 11.6 1803 8807 8552 272.9 17.4 2751 85Percent 1 C 12.0 1810 8583 8326 274.7 16.9 2634 1 C 14.7 1879 6972 6701 274.0 13.5 2261 2CI 14.7 1734 6084 5812 239.1 11.7 4639 2CI 16.0 1747 5826 5547 248.6 11.2 4142 2CI 20.0 1791 5031 4728 268.3 9.5 3021 2CI 24.0 1836 4322 3991 276.6 8.0 2392 2CI 24.2 1839 4284 3951 276.8 7.9 2369 2LI 24.2 1407 4866 4533 314.4 9.1 481 2LI 28.0 1626 4552 4189 339.9 8.41 544 2LI 32.0 1858 3678 3280 313.8 6.6 615 2LI 34.0 1975 3248 2831 294.6 5.7 667 3LI 34.0 1480 3637 3220 329.9 6.5 481 3L 36.0 1567 3535 3099 339.4 6.2 505 3L 40.0 1741 3099 2621 330.5 5.2 543 3L 44.0 1915 2608 2086 306.0 4.2 604 3L 46.0 2000 2373 1827 290.8 3.7 642 4L 46.0 1400 2572 2026 315.2 4.1 384 4LI 48.0 1462 2565 1994 328.3 4.0 381 4LI 52.0 1584 2476 1854 343.4 3.7 392 4LI 56.0 1706 2261 1584 337.7 3.2 421 4LI 60.0 1828 2009 1273 321.5 2.5 454 4LI 64.0 1950 1774 977 302.7 2.0 495 4L 66.5 2025 1624 787 287.9 1.6 528 5L 66.5 1493 1862 1025 330.1 2.1 587 5L 68.0 1527 1841 979 333.8 2.0 595 5L 72.0 1617 1763 833 338.5 1.7 630 5L 76.0 1706 1639 637 332.1 1.3 666 5LJ 80.0 1796 1500 423 320.1 0.8 699 5LI 84.0 1886 1373 218 307.61 0.4 728 5LI 88.0 1976 1246 9 292.31 0.0 760 5LI 91.3 2050 1135 -171 276.4 -0.3 788 6LI 91.3 1777 1303 -3 317.3 -0.0 928 6LI 92.0 1791 1285 -37 315.2 -0.1 944 6LI 96.0 1869 1188 -222 304.0 -0.4 989 6LI 100.0 1946 1091 -411 290.9 -0.8 1044 6LI 104.0 2024 991 -605 275.0 -1.2 1107 6LI 107.9 2100 891 -801 256.3 -1.6 1181 Governed 6L 108.0 2102 876 -819 252.3 -1.6 1181 6L 112.0 21801 349 -1448 104.1 -2.91 11941 1 6L 114.6 2231 0 -1865 0.0 -3.71 12001 1 Hold 0C -7L Vehicle I Engine Tractive Drawbar Wheel Net % Transm Speed Speed Effort Pull Power Grade Heat Rej (mph) (rpm) (lb) (lb) (hp) M (Btu/min) 0.0 1596 16327 16115 0.0 34.0 15671 ' 4.0 1660 13580 13357 144.9 27.7 9107 7.6 17261 114371 112001 232.61 23.01 4968 70Percent 8.01 17331 111801 109421 238.51 22.41 4666 9.91 17721 98971 96501 260.51 19.71 3474 80Perceni https://iscaan.al Iisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 16 of 21 1 C 11-6 1803 88071 8552 272.9 17.4 2751 85Percent 1 C 12.0 1810 8583 8326 274.7 16.9 2634 1 C 12.8 1830 8100 7839 275.8 15.9 2468 1 L 12.8 1365 8961 8700 305.2 17.7 498 1 L 16.0 1711 7791 7512 332.4 15.2 628 1 L 19.61 21001 5066 4765 265.31 9.61 782 Governed 1 L 20.01 21391 36401 3337 194.11 6.71 764 1 L 20.91 2237 0 -309 0.0 -0.617091 1 Note : " Tractive Effort exceeds vehicle traction limit (wheelslip possible) using On -Road Traction Limit Coefficient = 0.70 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144.., 10/28/2013 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION VEHICLE ACCELERATION PERFORMANCE Brakes Locked Start Based on Standard Parameters Transmission Input Ratio : 1.0000 Transmission Input Efficiency (%): 100.00 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Axle Ratio: 3.730 Air Conditioning Status : No AC Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Grade: 0.0 percent Power Packs: 1 Page 17 of 21 ('CCVC/JC 1l l V Vehicle Accel Engine Accel Rate (mph/sec) Speed Time Distance Rate Speed (mph) (sec) (ft) (mph/sec) (rpm) R1 Cl4.0 0.5 1.6 6.968 1719 R1 C1 8.0 1.2 7.6 5.038 1825 R1 Cl12.0 2-21 22.5 3.027 1973 h utumauc rU-cv-c�-a c--+w�-�� Vehicle Speed (mph) Time (sec) Distance (ft) Accel Rate (mph/sec) Engine Speed (rpm) icl 4.0 0.6 1.9 5.678 1690 icl 8.0 1.4 8.8 4.683 1763 icl 12.0 2.4 23.3 3.615 1843 icl 14.7 3.2 40.1 2.903 1909 2CI 16.0 3.7 51.3 2.481 1777 2CI 20.0 5-5 97.5 2.128 1823 2CI 24.0 7.5 163.5 1.806 1867 2CI 21- 24.2 28.0 7.7 9.6 167.9 243.0 1.789 1.839 1871 1626 21- 32.0 12.0 350.3 1.470 1858 21- 34.0 13.5 420.9 1-290 1974 31- 36.0 14.9 493.5 1.389 1567 31- 40.0 18.0 666.0 1.192 1741 31- 31- 44.0 46.0 21.7 23.9 896.2 1038.0 0.970 0.862 1915 2000 41- 48.0 26.1 1191.4 0.910 1462 41- 52.0 30.6 1523.0 0.852 1584 41- 41-1 56.0 60.0 35.7 41.6 1921.7 2430.8 0.739 0.608 1706 1828 41-1 64.0 49.0 3102.9 0.484 1950 41-1 51-1 66.5 68.0 54.6 57.8 3640.5 3956.2 0.404 0.466 2025 1527 51-1 72.0 67.0 4899.7 0.405 1617 51- 76.0 78.1 6105.6 0.321 1706 5L 5L 80.0 84.0 92.8 114.71 7788.4 10430.4 0.231 0.144 1796 1886 5L 88.0 158.71 15995.4 0.055 1976 1st Lockup Hold 0C-1 Vehicle Accel Engine Speed I Time Distance I Rate I Speed https://iscaan.al lisontransm ission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 18 of 21 (mph) (sec) (ttj tmpn(sec) v w«v 1 C 4.0 0.6 1.9 5.678 1690 1 C 8.0 1.4 8.8 4.683 1763 1 C 12.0 2.4 23.3 3.615 1843 1 C 12.8 2.6 27.3 3.365 1860 1 L 16.01 3.61 48.5 2.951 1711 1 L 20.01 5.31 94.61 1.5141 2130 Note: " Indicates acceleration limited by wheel slip (wheelslip possible) using On -Road Traction Limit Coefficient = 0.70 Note: Requested AC On Report is not included because AC Loss is 0.0 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. https://iscaan.allisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013-144... 10/28/2013) Page 19 of 21 SCAAN No.: 203744 Description : d4500_ISX12_EPA2013_425HP_373_TC541 Date : 1/30/2013 User: Alvaro Lazcano, MCI/NAC Application Review Status Output Units : US ALLISON TRANSMISSION VEHICLE ACCELERATION PERFORMANCE Brakes Locked Start Based on User Defined Parameters Transmission Input Ratio : 1.0000 Power Packs: 1 Transmission Input Efficiency (%): 100.00 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Axle Ratio: 3.730 Air Conditioning Status : Off Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Grade: 0.0 percent Reverse R'1C Vehicle Accel Engine Speed Time Distance Rate Speed (Mph) (sec) (ft) (mph/sec) (rpm) R1C 4.0 0.5 1.6 6.898 1711 R1 C 8.0 1.2 7.7 4.971 1815 R1 C 12.0 2-21 22.91 28881 19681 1 Automatic PC -2C -2L -3L -4L -5L -5L) Vehicle Accel Engine Speed Time Distance Rate Speed (-Ph) (sec) (ft) (mph/sec) (rpm) 1C1 4.0 0.7 2.0 5.620 1683 1CI 8.0 1.4 8.9 4.626 1756 icl 12.0 2.4 23.6 3.557 1834 1C 14.7 3.3 40.7 2.851 1901 2C 16.0 3.8 52.0 2.448 1769 2C 20.0 5.6 98.9 2.097 1814 2C 24.0 7.6 165.9 1.775 1859 2C 24.2 7.8 170.5 1.759 1862 2L 28.0 9.8 246.6 1.810 1626 2L 32.0 12.2 356.1 1.438 1858 2L 34.0 13.7 428.4 1.255 1974 3L 36.0 15.2 502.1 1.367 1567 3L 40.0 18.3 677.7 1.169 1741 3L 44.0 22.1 913.4 0.945 1915 3L 46.0 24.3 1059.4 0.835 2000 4L 48.0 26.6 1215.4 0.895 1462 4L 52.0 31.2 1552.9 0.836 1584 4L 56.0 36.3 1959.8 0.723 1706 41- 60.0 42.5 2482.2 0.591 1828 41- 64.0 50.1 3177.8 0.465 1950 41- 66.5 56.0 3740.0 0.384 2025 51- 68.0 59.3 4063.3 0.455 1527 5L.1 72.0 68.7 5032.5 0.393 1617 51- 76.0 80.2 6280.0 0.309 1706 5L 80.0 95.6 8044.5 0.218 1796 5L 84.0 119.2 10895.3 0.130 1886 5L 88 01 172.0 17577.7 0.041 1976 is( Lpcku Hold f C-1LJ Vehicle Accel Engine Speed Time Distance Rate Speed https://iscaan.alI isontransm ission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 20 of 21 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Axle Ratio: 3.730 Air Conditioning Status : On Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Grade: 0.0 percent RCvvz+ v Vehicle (mph) {sec) (ft) (mphlsec) (rpm) icl 4.0 0.7 2.0 5.620 1683 icl 8.0 1.4 8.9 4.626 1756 icl 1 C 12.0 12.8 2.4 2.7 23.6 27.7 3.557 3.306 1834 1852 1 L 16.01,_3.7 2.0 49.2 2.9021 1711 1 L 20.01 5.41 96.51 1.4521 2139 Clutch Fan Status : Fan On Axle Ratio: 3.730 Air Conditioning Status : On Auxiliary Gearing Ratio: 1.000 Grade: 0.0 percent RCvvz+ v Vehicle rPup u i +4-eW Accel Engine Speed Time Distance Rate Speed (mph) (sec) (ft) (mph/sec) (rpm) R1 Cl4.0 0.5 1.6 6.684 1689 R1 C 8.0 1.2 8.0 4.801 1793 R1 Cl12.01 2.31 24.11 2.6691 19581 1 2L 31 4L 5L SL nue�.+rr+r+trC 9C -2C- - - Vehicle rPup u i +4-eW Accel Engine Engine Speed Vehicle Speed Time Distance Rate Speed (mph) (sec) (sec) (ft) (mph/sec) (rpm) 1 C 1c] 0.7 4.0 0.7 2.0 5.438 ICI 1660 icl 9.2 8.0 1.5 9.2 4.462 1733 icl 12.0 2.5 24.5 3.395 1810 icl 14.7 3.4 42.4 2.709 1879 2C 16.0 3.9 54.2 2.357 1747 2C 20.0 5.8 103.0 2.012 1791 2C 24.0 8.0 173.1 1.694 1836 2C 24.2 8.1 177.9 1.676 1839 2L 28.0 10.2 257.7 1.721 1626 2L 32.0 12.8 373.6 1.349 1858 2L 34.0 14.4 451.1 1.166 1974 3L 36.0 15.9 528.6 1.299 1567 3L 40.0 19.2 714.2 1.101 1741 3L. 44.0 23.3 966.3 0.876 1915 3L.1 46.0 25.7 1124.5 0.767 2000 4L 48.0 28.1 1289.4 0.846 1462 4L 52.0 33.0 1646.8 0.788 1584 4L 56.0 38.5 2080.9 0.674 1706 4L 60.0 45.1 2645.6 0.542 1828 4L 64.0 53.5 3412.8 0.416 1950 41- 66.5 60.1 4048.4 0.336 2025 5LJ 68.0 63.7 4398.7 0.419 1527 51- 72.0 74.0 5457.5 0.357 1617 51- 76.0 86.8 6848.8 0.274 1706 5L 80.0 104.7 8899.6 0.182 1796 5L 84.0 134.9 12545.6 0.095 1886 5L 88.0 276.5 30594.9 0.005 1976 .! od Ibt L utnup rPup u i +4-eW Accel Engine Vehicle Speed Time Distance Rate Speed (mph) (sec) (ft) (mph/sec) (rpm) 1 C 4.0 0.7 2.0 5.438 1660 ICI 8.0 1.5 9.2 4.462 1733 https:lliscaan.al lisontransmission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 Page 2 l of 21 1C izol 2,51 24.5 3.395 1810 1C 12.81 2.71 28.8 3.147 1830 1 L 16.01 3.81 51.3 2.757 1711 1L 20.01 5.7 102.0 1.307 2139 Note: ` Indicates acceleration limited by wheel slip (wheelslip possible) using On -Road Traction Limit Coefficient = 0.70 This SCAAN information is subject to the SCAAN Disclaimer set forth elsewhere. haps: //iscaan.aI l isontransm ission.com/extranet/iscaan/SCAANReports?f=Oct282013_144... 10/28/2013 F7K Reliability Driven" ATTACHMENT K WHEELCHAIR LIFT AND TIE DOWNS THE BRAUR (QRPORATIOR , ff-A mobility products CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC I r f+ A ' , ff THE BRAUR (QRPORATIOR , ff-A mobility products CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC NUVL855RM24 I v Usable Platform Length 51" Usahte Platform ✓ Width 30" Bridge Plate Vehicle Floor Level �LLi;orm26.50"sition)Up Max 63.00" ShownMax"36.50" Down Maxrmition) Ground Level SIDE VIEW -TRAVEL LIMITS Overall Width with Mounting Brackets - 45.875" Overall Front Barrier Width - 42.5" 8375 FRONT VIEW L Overall Cassette Width - 43.5" SIDE VIEW 8.375" r 72.25° 43.50" TOP VIEW L — _j 34678 , 2008 V* a" Capo-AM Al Illustrad", dealpl ws and spedficabons in this Ixodm are band On the la#est produel irfoiTnAco at M time of publication. The Braun C,a pm,91 n resames the nghl to n*a d at arty time without notice. • NHTSA 403 Compliant • Automatic Inboard /Outboard Barriers • 750# Lifting Capacity • Scissor Arm Design Provides Smooth Straight Up and Down Motion • Interlocking Handrail Belt • Handrail Covers for Safety R THE BRAUA JIAT�= CORP ORATion. www.br.Ftunrrtobility.corn )1:\UF IYI \\It:klC:A,\ �-SOD-T/5/E L/FT For The Oea1e� Nearest 1'ou International Corporate Hdqrs: PO Box 310 Winamac, IN 46996 USA 1-800-843-5438 15 74) 946-6153 FAX. i574i 946-4670 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Reliability Driven SUBJECT D Series Maintenance Manual SECTION 22B Date Page BRAUN WHEELCHAIR LIFT CONTENTS OF THIS SECTION August 2013 2213-1 PAGE GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................. 2213-3 Components...................................... ............... 2213-3 Lift Operating Instructions ......................................... 2213-5 Control Switch Functions .......................................... 226-6 Open Door(s) and Secure .......................................... 2213-6 Manual Operating Instructions ...................................... 22B-7 MAINTENANCE and LUBRICATION ..................................... 226-10 TROUBLESHOOTING................................................ 2213-16 CONTACT REMOVAL ................................................ 2213-19 CALIBRATION...................................................... 2213-19 NHTSA OPERATIONS CHECKLIST ..................................... 2213-20 SPECIFICATIONS................................................... 2213-20 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC Date August 2013 Page 228-2 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC Date August 2013 RAM Reliability Driven' D Series Maintenance Manual Page 22B-3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Components The Braun wheelchair lift, located in the #2 curb- side baggage bay, provides wheelchair access to the coach. The lift is powered by an electrically -operated hydraulic pump, with manual backup, and operated with a control pendant. Keyed access and a safety in- terlock prevent unsafe deployment. Wheelchair Lift The wheelchair lift is located in the curbside of the #2 baggage bay and is accessed through a separate, hinged door. For maintenance, it is accessed through the full-size baggage bay doors. The lift platform has a non-skid surface with a front roll stop and a rear bridge plate. The roll stop and bridge plates lower to serve as ramps when boarding passengers, and act as barriers when the lift is in motion. The platform has two hinged handrails that lock upright. A safety belt is attached to the handrails. The platform cannot be raised or lowered unless the safety belt is buckled. Figure 1. Components Item Description Item Description 1 Control Pendant (Not Shown) 6 Two -Stage Outer Barrier 2 Inner Roll Stop 7 Lifting Arms 3 Horizontal Arms 8 Torque Tube 4 Shield Handrail with Stop 9 Hydraulic Cylinders 5 Outer Barrier Actuator 10 Manual Platform Release 43760 Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Date August 2013 Page 22113-4 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' A carriage assembly is mounted to the rear of the platform. The carriage assembly includes gear motor, components that extend/retract the lift, and a hydraulic cylinder that raises/lowers the lift. The carriage assem- bly is housed in the traveling frame, which moves on guide rails. The entire lift is housed in a cassette, which is mounted to the coach. Control Box The control box is located in the #1 curbside bag- gage bay. The alarm is mounted on top of the control box. Inside, the control box holds the hydraulic pump with electric motor, the manual pump with release valve and detached pump handle, the hydraulic fluid reservoir, and the solenoid and circuit breakers. Wheelchair Lift Master Switch The wheelchair lift master switch is either a key switch or toggle switch located on the upper left of the driver's instrument panel. The master switch must be on to enable lift operation and energize the safety inter- lock circuits. Lift Housing The lift housing is the metal structure (casing) mounted under the vehicle which contains and protects the platform carriage assembly. The housing contains all lift components except the power (pump) module when the lift is in the stowed position. Platform Carriage Assembly The platform carriage assembly includes the plat- form assembly, the lifting arms, and the rolling horizon- tal arms that carry the platform assembly in and out of the housing and the electrical/hydraulic drive compo- nents that power the lift. Platform Assembly The lift platform assembly consists of the flat alumi- num plate upon which the wheelchair is positioned, the outer barriers, the inner roll stop, and shield handrails. Hand-held Pendant Control FOE R STOW 0 DOWN UP 10 0 �wroiurwn 11237 Figure 2, Hand-held Pendant Control The hand-held attendant's pendant control is equipped with four push button switches (DOOR, STOW, DOWN, and UP). The momentary switches ac- tivate the automatic lift functions. Simply press the switch labeled for the intended function. When there is power to the lift, the lift function labels illuminate to identify the functions. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Date Reliability Driven' D Series Maintenance Manual Page Threshold Warning System Lift Operating Instructions 1 2 3 4 5 44874 Threshold Warning Module Item Description 1 Light Switch Pushbutton 2 Light 3 Air Vent 4 Sensor 5Threshold Hold Light 6 Stop Pushbutton 7 Speaker The threshold warning system module is installed at the top of the doorway above the lift compartment. The module is turned on when the lift is powered, illu- minating the status indicator. The acoustic sensors are enabled when the door is open and the coach interlock system requirements are met. Acoustic sensors monitor the doorway threshold area for the presence of a passenger or object, such as a wheelchair. The audible buzzer and flashing red light are actuated if someone is detected in the threshold ar- ea when the platform is 1 in. (25 mm) or more below the floor. This system warns lift passengers when the platform is below floor level. The platform must be at floor level when a passenger is boarding or exiting the platform. August 2013 226-5 Before lift operation, park the vehicle on a level surface, away from vehicular traffic. Place the vehicle transmission in Park and engage the parking brake. Open manual doors fully, being certain the doors are secured in the fully open position. It is the responsibility of the lift operator (attendant) to properly open, secure and close the vehicle lift doors, to activate any auxiliary interlock (if equipped), to load and unload the wheel- chair passenger (or standee) on and off the lift plat- form, and to properly activate all lift functions. In event of power or equipment failure, refer to the Manual Operating Instructions section. Handrails and Outer Barrier The folding handrails and tall outer barrier are manually operated. The spring-loaded outer barrier (tall barrier) and the handrails rest on the platform when the lift is not in use. The outer barrier must be raised to the vertical position and the handrails must be lifted to the vertical position whenever a passenger is on the plat- form. The tall outer barrier and the handrails must be folded down to the platform (horizontal) position before stowing the lift. The handrails fold down onto the outer barrier to secure the barrier in the horizontal position. Each handrail is secured with a latch handle. The latch handle must be lifted before the handrails can be fold- ed or unfolded and must be lowered after folding or un- folding the handrails. Interlocking Handrail Belt The lift is equipped with an interlocking handrail belt. Once the lift platform has extended fully from the stowed position, the belt must be latched in order to raise or lower the platform. During the stow function, the belt must be unfastened after the platform raises or lowers to stow level and stops. With the belt unlatched, pressing the STOW switch then retracts the platform fully. Whenever a passenger is on the platform the: • Passenger must be positioned fully inside yellow boundaries. • Wheelchair brakes must be locked. • Inner roll stop and outer barrier must be up. • Handrail belt must be latched. Failure to do so may result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Date August 2013 Page 2213-6 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driveri Control Switch Functions NOTICE Door The lift can be interfaced for fully automatic opera- The lift will not stow with weight on the platform tion of the power door system. Press the DOOR switch (built-in safety feature). to open and close door(s) if applicable. NOTICE Up From the stowed position, pressing the UP switch deploys (extends) the platform fully. The handrail belt must then be latched before the platform will raise. With the belt latched, pressing the UP switch then rais- es the platform to floor level height. Lift the handrail latch handles and lift the handrails to the vertical posi- tion. Lower the latch handle after each handrail is raised. Lift the outer barrier to the vertical position and latch the handrail belt. Press the UP switch until the platform stops (raises to floor level) and the inner roll stop unfolds to floor level. From ground level, the UP function will first automatically raise (rotate) the outer barriers to the upright (vertical) position. The platform then rises to floor level position. NOTICE The lift will not rise if the outer barrier is not in the UP position or the handrail belt is not latched (built-in safety features). Down The DOWN function lowers the platform to ground level and then unfolds the outer barriers to the ramp (horizontal) position. NOTICE The handrail belt must be latched to activate the DOWN function.. From the stowed position, the lift will extend fully and stop. The handrail belt must then be latched before the platform will lower. Stow When the STOW switch is pressed, the platform first raises or lowers to stow level, starts to retract, and then stops. The handrail belt must then be unlatched before the platform will stow (retract) fully. The tall out- er barrier and the handrails must be folded down to the platform (horizontal) position before stowing (retract- ing) the platform. The handrail latch handles must be lowered before stowing the platform also. If any of these functions do not occur as described, discontinue lift use immediately and contact your sales representative or call The Braun Corporation at 1 -800 -THE LIFT. One of our national Product Support representatives will direct you to an authorized service repairman who will inspect your lift. Open Door(s) and Secure To Deploy Platform 1. Stand clear and press the UP switch until the platform extends fully. Release switch. 2. Lift handrail latch handles, deploy (lift) hand- rails up to vertical position, and lower hand- rail latch handles fully. 3. Lift outer barrier to vertical position. 4. Latch handrail belt. 5. Press the UP switch until the platform stops (raises to floor level) and inner roll stop un- folds to floor level. Release switch. To Unload Passenger NOTICE Passenger must be positioned fully inside yellow boundaries, outer barrier must be UP and handrail belt must be latched. 1. Load passenger onto platform and lock wheelchair brakes. 2. Press DOWN switch until the entire platform reaches ground level and the outer barrier unfolds fully (ramp position). Release switch. 3. Unlatch handrail belt, unlock wheelchair brakes, and unload passenger from plat- form. NOTICE Outer barrier must be fully unfolded (ramp position) until the entire wheelchair (or standee) has crossed the outer barrier. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC Date August 2013 Reliability _Dn�veri D Series Maintenance Manual Page 228-7 To Load Passenger Manual Operating Instructions In event of power or equipment failure, refer to the NOTICE Manual Operating Instructions to manually operate the lift. Refer to the Lift Operating Instructions for all normal Outer barrier must be fully unfolded (ramp lift operation procedures (such as loading and unload - position) until the entire wheelchair (or standee) ing passengers). Follow all Lift Operation Safety Pre - has crossed the outer barrier. cautions at all times. NOTICE Passenger must be positioned fully inside yellow boundaries. Load passenger onto platform, lock wheelchair brakes, and latch handrail belt. Press UP switch to fold outer barrier UP fully (vertical), raise the platform to floor level, and unfold inner roll stop to floor level. Re- lease switch. Unlock wheelchair brakes and unload pas- senger from platform. To Stow Platform 1. Latch handrail belt. 2. Press STOW switch until platform stops at stow level. Release switch. 3. Unlatch handrail belt. 4. Fold outer barrier down to platform (horizon- tal) position. 5. Lift handrail latch handles, stow (fold) hand- rails down to platform (horizontal) position, and lower handrail latch handles fully. 6. Press STOW switch until platform stops (re- tracts fully). Release switch. CLOSE DOOR(S). Cable -Activated Platform Manual Release System A cable -activated manual release system releases and engages the platform carriage assembly drive chain to allow the platform carriage assembly to be manually moved out (extended) or moved in (retracted) as needed. A T -handle is provided on the release cable for ac- tivation of the manual release system (details follow). After manually moving the platform in or out, it is ex- tremely important that the cable -activated manual re- lease is positively re-engaged to secure (lock) the plat- form carriage assembly before loading a passenger on the platform or before driving the vehicle. Grasp the outer barrier and move the platform in and out until the platform locks (chain release assem- bly engages), securing the platform carriage assembly within the housing. You will feel the release mechanism engage. Failure to manually lock the platform carriage assembly (re-engage the carriage assembly drive chain) after manual deployment will allow the platform to roll in or out of housing unhindered during vehicle movement. Failure to lock the platform will also allow the platform to roll in or out of housing unhindered during hand pump raising and lowering procedures. After manually releasing platform, push manual re- lease T -handle in fully and ensure platform is locked before driving lift vehicle. Uncontrolled and unintention- al platform deployment (inadvertent platform ejection) may result in serious bodily injury and/or property dam- age. NOTICE The lift platform must be pushed back into its carriage compartment all the way before reverting back to normal (powered) operation. When the lift is fully extended manually, it does not activate the proper switches for normal operation. Returning (moving) the lift in fully allows for proper switch activation. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Date August 2013 Page 2213-8 D Series Maintenance Manual Push T -handle in fully and manually move platform in and out to engage platform lock before driving vehicle. Failure to lock platform may result in unintended platform deployment. Unintended platform deployment may result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage. Manual Operating Instructions �j 43759 Figure 3. Out (To Extend Platform) 1. Pull T -Handle. 2. Turn T -Handle to lock platform in released position. 3. Pull platform out. 4. Turn T -Handle. 5. Push T -Handle in. 6. Turn T -Handle to lock platform in engaged position. 2 3 4 Reliability Driven' 43764 Figure 4. Down (To Unfold Outer Barrier) 1. Remove hairpin cotter from detent pin. 2. Remove detent pin. 3. Unfold (rotate) barrier down. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC Item Component 1 1 Platform 2 Actuator 3 Hairpin Cotter 4 Detent Pin 5 Outer Barrier 1. Remove hairpin cotter from detent pin. 2. Remove detent pin. 3. Unfold (rotate) barrier down. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC Reliabi l n D Series Maintenance Manual 2 3 _�'• 4 43764 Figure 5. Up (To Fold Outer Barrier) Item Component 1 Platform 2 Actuator 3 Hairpin Cotter 4 Detent Pin 5 Outer Barrier 1. Fold (rotate) barrier up. 2. Insert detent pin. 3. Insert hairpin cotter in detent pin. Date August 2013 Page 22B-9 3759 Figure 6. In (To Stow Platform) 1. Raise or lower platform to stow level (follow UP or DOWN procedures). 2. Pull T -Handle. 3. Turn T -Handle to lock platform in released position. 4. Pull platform in. 5. Turn T -Handle. 6. Push T -Handle in. 7. Turn T -Handle to lock platform in engaged position. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Date August 2013 Page 228-10 D Series Maintenance Manual MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION Maintenance Indicator Proper maintenance is necessary to ensure safe, trouble free operation. Inspecting the lift for any wear, damage or other abnormal conditions should be a part of all transit agencies' daily service program. Simple in- spections can detect potential problems. The mainte- nance and lubrication procedures specified in the fol- lowing schedule must be performed by a Braun authorized service representative at the scheduled in- tervals according to the number of cycles. NHTSA NUVL Series lifts are equipped with a cycle counter (digital display built into the electronic control board). NUVL Series lifts are equipped with hardened pins and self-lubricating bushings to decrease wear, provide smooth operation, and extend the service life of the lift. When servicing the lift at the recommended inter- vals, inspection and lubrication procedures specified in the previous sections should be repeated. Clean the components and the surrounding area before applying lubricants. LPS2 General Purpose Penetrating Oil is recom- mended where Light Oil is called out. Use of improper lubricants can attract dirt or other contaminants which could result in wear or damage to the components. Platform components exposed to contaminants when lowered to the ground may require extra attention. Lift components requiring grease are lubricated during as- sembly procedures. When replacing these compo- nents, be sure to apply grease during installation pro- cedures. Specified lubricants are available from The Braun Corporation. All listed inspection, lubrication, and maintenance procedures should be repeated at 750 Cycle intervals following the scheduled 4500 Cy- cles maintenance. These intervals are a general guide- line for scheduling maintenance procedures and will vary according to lift use and conditions. Lifts exposed to severe conditions (weather, environment, contami- nation, heavy usage, etc.) may require inspection and maintenance procedures to be performed more often than specified. Reliability Driven } Maintenance and lubrication procedures must be preformed as specified by an authorized service technician. Failure to do so may result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage. A Lift Ready green LED is mounted on the hand- held pendant storage bracket. The green LED will change color to yellow after every 750 cycles. The yel- low LED will not affect the functions of the lift, but is a reminder to perform necessary maintenance and lubri- cation procedures. Once the lift has been serviced, press the CYCLE button (located below LCD display on the control board) until the Lift Ready LED changes back to green. The CYCLE button also clears the lift cycle count (since last service) but not the lifetime cy- cle count. Discontinue lift use immediately if maintenance and lubrication procedures are not properly performed, or if there is any sign of wear, damage, or improper op- eration. Contact your sales representative or call The Braun Corporation at 1 -800 -THE LIFT. One of our na- tional Product Support representatives will direct you to an authorized service technician who will inspect your lift. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC Reliability Driven- Lubrication riven Lubrication Diagram Date D Series Maintenance Manual Page Figure 7. Lubrication Diagram August 2013 22B-11 43761 Item Component Item Component 1 Torque Tube Pivot Points 11 Inner Roil Stop Linkage Pivot Points 2 Lifting Arm Pivot Points 12 Lifting Arm Pivot Points 3 Rolling Horizontal Carriage Tube 13 Torque Tube Pivot Points 4 Eccentric Shaft and Carriage Rollers 14 Hydraulic Cylinder Pivot Points 5 Outer Barrier Pivot Points (Tall) 15 Drive Chain and Rollers 6 Outer Barrier Detent Pin 16 Drive Train Release Latch 7 Outer Barrier Pivot Point (Short) 17 Hydraulic Cylinder Pivot Points 8 Lower Closure Pivot Points 18 Eccentric Shaft Rollers 9 Eccentric Shaft and Carriage Rollers 19 Platform Manual Release Cable 10 Inner Roll Stop Hinge Pivot Points and Inner Roll Stop Catch Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Date August 2013 Page 22B-12 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven" Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Specified Lubricant Type (Recommended) Available Amount Lubricant Lo -Light Oil Light Penetrating Oil (30 Weight or equivalent) LPS2, General Purpose p Penetrating Oil 11 oz Aerosol can 1.68 oz DE - Door -Ease Stainless Stick Style (tube) Door -Ease Stick (tube) SG - Synthetic Grease Synthetic Grease (Multipurpose) Mobitemp SCHC32 12.5 oz Tube Outer barrier and lower closure pivot points (2). Apply Light Oil - See LubricationDiagram. Outer barrier detent pin pivot points (2). Apply Light Oil - See Lubrication Diagram. Inner roll stop hinge pivot points. Apply Light Oil - See LubricationDiagram. Inner roll stop linkage pivot points. Apply Light Oil - See LubricationDiagram. Lifting arm center and platform pivot points Apply Light Oil - See Lubrication (bearings at all points). Diagram. Inspect outer barrier and lower closure for Correct or replace damaged parts. proper operation.. Inspect outer barrier seal and lower closure Resecure, replace, or correct as gasket. needed. _ Ensure hairpin cotter is present and Inspect outer barrier detent pin hairpin cotter. can be removed and inserted easily. Resecure, replace, or correct as needed. 750 Cycles Inspect lift for wear, damage, or any abnormal condition. Correct as needed. Correct as needed. Inspect lift for rattles. Pull out and lock manual release Check drive chain tension. cable. Adjust chain tension as needed. Inspect inner roll stop (bridge plate) and linkage for proper operation. Roll stop should rest solidly on floor providing smooth transition. • Positive securement Resecure, replace, or correct as needed. • Wear or damage Check carriage ride height in housing Adjust as needed Lifting arms should be horizontal, Check slow height/lifting arm alignment. aligned with each other and aligned with carriage. Adjust as needed. Inspect wiring harnesses for securement, wear, Resecure, replace, or correct as or other damage. needed. Check lower pan securement. Resecure, replace damaged parts, or correct as needed. Torque tube pivot bearings (4 places). Apply Light Oil - See Lubrication Diagram. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven - Date August 2013 Page 228-13 Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'l, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC Specified Lubricant Type (Recommended) Available Amount Lubricant Carriage and eccentric shall rollers (bearings). Apply Light Oil - See Lubrication Diagram. Apply Door Ease - See Lubrication Lifting arm slots in rolling horizontal carriage arm tubes. Diagram. Apply to the surface area around both slots and wipe off excess. Hydraulic cylinder pivot points (4 per cylinder). Apply Light Oil - See Lubrication Diagram. Drive chain and chain rollers. Apply Light Oil - See Lubrication Diagram. Drive chain release latch mechanism. Apply synthetic grease - See Lubrication Diagram. Use compressor and nozzle to Deploy lift, remove inboard and outboard lower pans, and blow out housing. Blow off platform remove all debris from housing. Clean outboard lower pan slot and also. apply antiseize to slot before reinstalling pan. Use clean cloth and solvent to clean Deploy lift, remove inboard and outboard lower tracks. Clean lower pan slot and pans, and clean housing tracks. apply antiseize to slot before reinstalling pan. Check drive chain tensioner, jam nuts, and Check drive chain tensioner, jam 1500 Cycles connecting link for securement and/or misalignment. nuts, and connecting link for securement and/or misalignment. Inspect drive chain release latch mechanism for proper operation, positive securement, wear, or other damage. Correct or replace damaged parts and/or relubricate. Ensure T -handle release and cable Inspect platform cable -activated manual assembly operate properly (see release system (T-handle/cable assembly and Manual Operation). Ensure carriage carriage movement). can be manually extended and retracted freely. Inspect limit switches for securement and Resecure, replace, or adjust as proper adjustment. needed. Inspect carriage, lifting arm and eccentric shaft rollers (bearings) for wear or damage, positive securement, and proper operation. Correct, replace damaged parts, and/ or relubricate. Inspect external snap rings (e -clips): • Carriage roller bearings (4) • Lower lifting arm pins (5) • Upper lifting arm pins (2) Resecure, replace, or correct as needed. • Outer race bearings (2) • Inner roll stop shaft (2) Inspect lower lifting arm pins for wear or damage, positive securement, and proper adjustment. Resecure, replace damaged parts, lubricate, or correct as needed. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'l, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC Date August 2013 Page 2213-14 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven - Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Specified Lubricant Type (Recommended) Available Amount Lubricant Inspect eccentric shaft pins, bearing mounting screw, washers, and securement hardware for Resecure, replace damaged parts, wear or damage, positive securement, and lubricate, or correct as needed. proper operation. Inspect torque tube cams for securement, wear, Resecure, replace, or correct as 1500 Cycles or damage. needed. Inspect housing cam brackets for securement, Resecure, replace, or correct as wear, or damage. needed. Inspect cylinder(s), hoses, liftings, and hydraulic connections for wear, damage, or Tighten, repair, or replace if needed. leaks. Inspect power cable. Tighten, repair, or replace if needed Hydraulic Fluid (Pump) - Check level. Use 5606 aviation fluid only. Check NOTE: Fluid should be changed if there is fluid level with platform lowered visible contamination. Inspect the hydraulic fully. Fill to within 1-1/2 in. (38.1 mm) system (cylinder, hoses, fittings, seals, etc.) for of the bottom of the fill tube (neck). leaks if fluid level is low. Inspect lifting arm bushings and pivot pins for visible wear or damage. Replace if needed. Inspect outer barrier pivot pin mounting bolts (2). Tighten or replace if needed. 4500 Cycles Check to see that the lift is securely Mounting anchored to the vehicle and there are no loose bolts, broken welds, or stress fractures. Replace decals if worn, missing, or Decals and Antiskid illegible. Replace antiskid if worn or missing. Consecutive Repeat all previously listed inspection, 750 Cycle lubrication, and maintenance procedures at Intervals 750 cycle intervals. Copyright 2013 - Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Date August 2013 Reliability Driven D Series Maintenance Manual Page 22B-15 Safety Interlock System To lower the lift, the sliding door must be open until the lift reaches The wheelchair lift safety interlock system prevents its automatic -stop position, unsafe and unauthorized lift operation. The wheelchair approximately 9 in. (228.6 mm) lift will not operate unless the following conditions are from the sliding door. Then, the met, in the following order: door must be fully closed to 1. The coach must be running. enable the lift to lower the remain - 2. The transmission must be in neutral. ing distance to stow height. • To open the sliding door, the lift 3. The parking brake must be applied. must be positioned approximately 4. The master switch must be on. 9 in. (228.6 mm) from the sliding At this point, the interlock system disables the door. Opening is a combination of transmission shift and throttle, sets the park brake sole- manual and automatic movement. noid, and begins engine fast idle. The interlock circuit also activates the telltale, hazard lights, audible alarm, ACA UTION and the wheelchair lift boarding area lights. 5. The lift cassette door must be open. If the lift is not positioned correctly, the motor will not engage. It is extremely important to fully close 6. The secondary switch must be on. and latch the sliding door before resuming travel. 7. The wheelchair lift safety belt must be buck- If the door slides open, the parking brake will still led. be applied. 8. The appropriate sliding door/wheelchair lift To close the sliding door, the lift interaction must be met: must be positioned approximately • To raise the lift, the sliding door 9 in. (228.6 mm) from the sliding must be closed until the lift door. Closing is a combination of reaches its automatic -stop posi- manual, automatic and manual tion, approximately 9 in. movement. If the lift is not posi- (228.6 mm) from the sliding door. tioned correctly, the motor will not Then, the door must be fully open engage. to enable the lift to rise the remaining distance to floor level. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. PIN 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Date August 2013 Page 22B-16 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven' TROUBLESHOOTING Function Possible Cause Remedy Check for power on pump black Low Battery Check vehicle battery. Check for good ground between down manual override switches at See No Operation. Bad Ground vehicle chassis and 3/8 in. bolt on back of power pack. Poor Plug Connections Check all plugs for proper contact. No Operation Blown Fuse Check all plugs for proper contact. Check fuses on printed circuit Not Lift Platform — board. Circuit Sentry Reset circuit breaker. Check for voltage on red wire with platform lowered fully. Fill to within Defective Interlock gray stripes in interlock plug connected to printed circuit board. Function Possible Cause Remedy Check for power on pump black Up Solenoid Run With Flush valve by operating up and Override Switch down manual override switches at See No Operation. Hydraulic Down Valve Open same time for 4 to 5 seconds several times. Power pack must be mountedvertically. Pump Runs But Pump Mounted Horizontal Not Lift Platform — Check fluid level. Use 5606 aviation fluid only. Check fluid level with No Oil (Low) platform lowered fully. Fill to within 1-1/2 in. (38.1 mm) of the bottom of the fill tube (neck). Function Possible Cause Remedy Pump Does Not Check for power on pump black Up Solenoid Run With wire going from solenoid to motor. Override Switch Or Hand-held Bad Power and Ground See No Operation. Pendant Copyright 2013 – Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. PIN 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. �111111 D Series Maintenance Manual Rellobility Driven - Date August 2013 Page 221131-17 Function Possible Cause Remedy Check for power on red valve wire from printed Outer Barrier Switch Is Out Of Check diagnostic LCD for Outer Barrier switch Lift Will Go Up Adjustment or Defective status. Adjust or replace switch as necessary. With Override Full Out Switch Is Not Activated or Check diagnostic LCD for Full Out switch status. Switch But Not Defective Adjust or replace switch as necessary. With Hand-held Slowly or Drifts Check for hand-held pendant illumination and Pendant Hand-held Pendant Not Working continuity of the switches. Verify SW1 and Door J Properly Open switches are functioning correctly. Function Possible Cause Remedy Lift Will Not Go Check for power on red valve wire from printed Down With circuit board to Down solenoid when pushing Override Switch Hydraulic Down Valve Bad override switch or hand-held pendant button. or With Hand- Replace if necessary. held Pendant, Defective Flush valve by operating up and down manual Goes Down Dirty Down Valve (Clogged) override switches at same time for 4 to 5 seconds Slowly or Drifts Check switches for proper operation/adjustment. several limes. Down by Itself D Adjust or replace switch as necessary. J Function I Possible Cause Remedy Check diagnostic LCD for Full Out swii Adjust or replace switch as necessary. Check switches for proper operation/adjustment. Adjust or replace switch as necessary. Function Possible Cause Remedy Lift Will Not Poor Plug Connections Check harness connections A1, A2, B1, and B2. Extend With Check power at motor. Replace motor if Override or Bad In/Out Motor necessary. Hand-held Pendant Bad Power and Ground See No Operation, Function Full Out Switch Out Of Adjustment or Lift Will Go Down Defective With Override But Check diagnostic LCD for Stow Level switch Not With Hand- SWO and/or Door Full Closed held Pendant Switches Out Of Adjustment or Platform Is Occupied or Out Of Defective Remedy Check diagnostic LCD for Full Out swii Adjust or replace switch as necessary. Check switches for proper operation/adjustment. Adjust or replace switch as necessary. Function Possible Cause Remedy Lift Will Not Poor Plug Connections Check harness connections A1, A2, B1, and B2. Extend With Check power at motor. Replace motor if Override or Bad In/Out Motor necessary. Hand-held Pendant Bad Power and Ground See No Operation, Function Possible Cause Remedy Stow Level Switch Out Of Adjustment Check diagnostic LCD for Stow Level switch Or Defective status. Adjust or replace switch as necessary. Platform Is Occupied or Out Of Remove weight from platform. See Platform Lift Will Not Stow Calibration Sense Calibration. With Hand-held SWO And/Or Door Full Closed Check switches for proper operation/adjustment. Pendant Switches Out Of Adjustment or Adjust or replace switch as necessary. Defective Belt must be latched until platform is at stow level Handrail Belt and must be unlatched before platform will stow. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC Date August 2013 Page 22B -1s D Series Maintenance Manual ReliabilityDrivenf Function Possible Cause Barrier Will No Poor Plug Connections Operate Up or Check diagnostic LCD for Outer Barrier switch Down with Faulty Outer Barrier Switch Override Barrier Actuator Motor Or Actuator Switches or Out Of Adjustment or Faulty Hand-held switch status. Adjust or replace switch as Pendant Bad Power and Ground Remedy connectors Al, A2, E1, N1, F1, and F2. Check power at motor. Slightly lengthen rod end if release pin is difficult to remove or replace actuator if necessary. See No Operation. Function Possible Cause Remedy Check diagnostic LCD for Outer Barrier switch Barrier Operates Faulty Outer Barrier Switch status. Adjust or replace switch as necessary. with Override Check diagnostic LCD for Below Stow Level Switch But Will Switch But Will switch status. Adjust or replace switch as Remove weight from barrier. See Barrier Not Go Up With Barrier Occupied Occupied Calibration. Hand-held Handrail Belt Unlatched or Faulty Latch handrail belt. Check connectors F1, F2, Pendant Harness Connections. N1, and N2. Function Possible Cause Remedy Check Pressure Transducer. Adjust or replace as Barrier Operates Faulty Pressure Transducer necessary. See Ground Sense Calibration. with Override Check diagnostic LCD for Below Stow Level Switch But Will Below Stow Level Switch Out Of switch status. Adjust or replace switch as Not Go Up With Adjustment or Defective necessary. Hand-held Pendant Full Out Switch Out Of Adjustment or Check diagnostic LCD for Full Out switch status. I Defective Adjust or replace switch as necessary. Function I Possible Cause No Power Going To Switches Switches Do Not Faulty Wiring Change State in Diagnostic Mode Faulty Connections Remedy Check power on connector Al, pins 1 and 2. Check continuity of wires from switches to connector A2. Check for proper connections on each switch and on each connector on the harness. Replace contact if necessary. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven - CONTACT REMOVAL Date August 2013 Page 226-19 1 2 3 11238 Figure 8. Contact Removal 1 Remove orange wedge using needle nose Ground Sense Calibration pliers or a hook shaped wire to pull wedge 1. Press hand-held pendant DOWN switch to straight out. lower platform fully to ground level. 2. To remove the contacts, gently pull wire 2. While continuing to press the pendant backwards, while at the same time releasing DOWN switch, press and then release con - the locking finger by moving it away from the trol board mounted O_BAR button. contact with a screwdriver. 3. Release the pendant DOWN switch. 3. Hold the rear seal in place, as removing the 4. After calibration, the LCD screen should contact will displace the seal. read GND LVL 1 (in diagnostic mode) when - CALIBRATION ever the platform is at ground level. Outer Barrier Occupied Calibration Calibration Procedures 1. Press hand-held pendant DOWN switch to Platform Sense Calibration lower platform fully to ground level. 1. There must be no weight on platform. 2. Once outer barrier is fully unfolded (ramp 2. Press hand held -pendant UP switch to raise position), release the pendant DOWN platform a minimum 3 in. (76.2 mm) above switch. stow level. 3. Press and hold the control board mounted 3. Press and hold control board mounted 50# O_BAR button. While holding O_BAR but - CAL button. While pressing the 50# CAL ton, press handheld pendant UP switch to raise the outer barrier. Be sure to release button, press and hold the hand-held pen- O. BAR button when outer barrier reaches dant STOW switch (button). The platform approximately half full up (vertical) position. will lower to stow level (begin stow function), and then start to raise. Release 50# CAL 4. After calibration, the LCD screen should button immediately when platform starts to read OUTBAR OCCUPIED whenever there raise from stow level. is weight present on the outer barrier. 4. After calibration, the LCD screen should read PF OCCUPIED whenever there are 50 lbs (23 kg) or more present on the plat- form. Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved. P/N 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC. Date August 2013 Page 22B-20 D Series Maintenance Manual Reliability Driven- NHTSA OPERATIONS CHECKLIST The following operations have been verified upon installation. This operational checklist can be used at any time to verify the lift is fully functional. Verified: • Vehicle movement is prevented unless the lift door is closed, ensuring the lift is stowed. • Lift operation shall be prevented unless the vehicle is stopped and vehicle move- ment is prevented. • The platform will not fold/stow if occu- pied. • The inner roll stop will not rise if occu- pied. • Verify platform lighting when lift is deployed and pendant illumination when lift is powered. DESCRIPTION • The outer barrier will not rise if occu- pied. • A visual and audible warning will acti- vate if the threshold area is occupied when the platform is at least 1 in. (25 mm) below floor level. • Platform movement is prohibited beyond the position where the inner roll stop is fully deployed (up). • Lift platform movement shall be inter- rupted unless the outer barrier is deployed (up). Discontinue lift use immediately if any lift or vehicle interlock does not operate properly. Failure to do so may result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage. SPECIFICATIONS Manufacturer.................................................:.......................................................................................................... Braun ServiceManual........................................................................................................................................ NUVL855RM24 Voltage.........................................;........................................................................................................................24 VDC Copyright 2013 — Motor Coach Industries Int'I, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved, PIN 03-26-0219 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL, INC i � } (� 7 . | | � w- \ §) r- z� •.w -a §r� :s o | { } - i ,*A,L §pi - _ / AL , C. Reliability Driven" ATTACHMENT L DIAGRAM AND INFORMATION ON PROPOSED SEATING r An ■► iAR L 1 "I'll" tttltt t 1111111111{11111111,, I1i1111t1,1111►,fi 1/ f ill 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 / 111 1 1 1 1 11111 I f l 1111 11f41Il►Ill//x111111 R I 1 1 f l l/ I/, t 1/ I 1/ 1[ 1 1 t 1 t 1 t r Y t t L 1 i 1 t 1► t a 1 t 7111/1S`\Y►t\l�\L11If 11[11111111111111111 s t 1 1 1 1 l t I I l t t 1 l{ l l l l l 1• 1. y t 1 a 1 t 1 L t l r 1 1 1 1 1 It rI 11i11ltttf1111t•I1 11111{Il111t111111 Y1r j 111111[[ 11!111\tla11yy1111111t11t/ft1 >, l 1 t1 11I f e 111111 f 11� {l{yt ttlf11/111{111a1 �• Ill � t y\\ t l \ 1 1\\ S\ 1 1 e t 1t111111//IlffIf 111 t1 l•••t IllttlaLl•' t\ t l l t 1 1 t{ f t t 1• t t 1 1 t♦ t\• 1 l y 1 l\\ 1• a t lk 1 t i t\ tl \ 1••• 1 1 y 1 IL• t\ t t l\{ L 1{ 1 • l 1 t a\ t t • a \!111 t 11 ► 1 • \t••l 1 1 l 1 I 1 1 1 • \ I 1 1 1 t t\ 1• • l 1 ♦ t f t 1 111tt /;1 t1a1 1•a\111\1 t111y 11 \l\I1L1{t/•' 111 a •a{•t\�tllll;;t1 /t111t11a a l 111 t y t 1 1 r l 1{{{ a 1 t 1 1 •Igtlttl t X111 1 y 11 y 1 t• t a t L l l l{ l io' r t{11.1•••llt• 111• IIi\t 1l 111t1rs-r y 1 .11 1 L.:r1�1111It;� rj1 11 r 1 11 1 I t y 1 t 1/• 1' 1 t t i s�� `I ;; j 1 r r t 1 i /! r r 111 1 _ - � �_ �ttrzi 1rLc`r�♦R �a1111�11l1r+[t�;fir+j' }`RIS ri o Tr i FEATURES • The `Torino Transit' seat has been developed with a thin high backrest providing extra hip -to -knee room and includes the well known ergonomic design provided in all the Amaya-Astron seat models. • Fold down aisle armrest. • Stationary window armrest. • Mechanical recliner mechanism. • The frame incorporates steel tube box construction and steel interior back plate, all metal components are powder coated. • Cushion, back and headrest made from fire retardant and high resilient polyurethane foam. • Cord carpet on the back of the seat. • Steel powder coated pedestal. • The 'Torino Transit' seat can be installed in 96" and 102" coaches. OPTIONS • Square type grab handle mounted on top of backrest. • Round type grab handle mounted on top of backrest. • Classic type grab handle mounted on aisle side of backrest. • Plastic manual footrest, "Boomer' model. • Sliding and stationary flip up seats for handicap seating configuration. Torino Transit IAMAYA - - MEXICO SMALL & MEDIUM BUS SALES FOR TRANSIT SALES Roberto Fulton 6, Fraccionamiento Ind. San Nicolas Tlalnepantla, Estado de Mexico, 54030` Phone: + 52 (55) 5311-5000 (773) 524-2440 (610) 265-3610 donovan@asientosamaya.com.mx info@freedmanseating.com www freedmanseating.com info@4one.com www.40NE.com www.amaya-astronxom.mx F -W, I Reliability Driven ATTACHMENT M SUSPENSION SUSPENSION The front and rear axle suspension shall be pneumatic and equipped with straight side lobe air suspension bellows. Four suspension bellows shall be provided on the drive axle and two suspension bellows on the front axle. The tag axle shall be equipped with two straight side lobe type air springs, 9.5 inch (241 mm) nominal in diameter. Pressure in the tag axle suspension shall be automatically adjusted as required by the load -sharing system. Manual air dump valves for unloading the tag axle air suspension bellows shall also be provided in the engine compartment. The basic suspension system exclusive of bellows, height control valves, bushings and shock absorbers, shall last the life of the coach without major overhaul or replacement. Four (4) heavy-duty rubber bushed silent block sleeve type radius rods shall be provided at both the front and rear drive axles to control lateral, longitudinal, and torsional movement. Radius rod bushings shall be Clevite or approved equal. One transverse stabilizing rod shall be provided on front axle for additional support during coach lane changing or turning of corners. The coach shall be equipped with a sway bar designed to reduce body lean and increase bushing life. Items such as bushings and air springs shall be easily and quickly replaceable. Adjustment points shall be minimized and shall not be subject to a loss of adjustment in service. Necessary adjustments shall be easily accomplished without removing or disconnecting the components. SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS TRAVEL The suspension system shall permit a minimum wheel travel of 3.5 inches (89 mm) in jounce and 3 inches (76 mm) in rebound. Elastomeric bumpers shall be provided at the limit of jounce travel. Rebound travel may be limited by elastomeric bumpers or hydraulically within the shock absorbers. KNEELING A driver -actuated kneeling device shall lower the coach floor 3.0 to 6.0 inches during loading or unloading operations regardless of load to a floor height of 42 inches (1.07 m) measured at the longitudinal centerline of the front door. The park brake shall prevent movement when the coach is kneeled. The coach shall kneel and rise at a maximum rate of 1.5 inches per second at essentially a constant rate. A flashing indicator visible to the driver shall be illuminated until the coach is raised to a height adequate for safe street travel. An audible warning device that operates with the kneeling system shall be provided. A visual indicator meeting ADA requirements shall be provided on the curbside of the coach and shall activate during the kneeling operation. This indicator shall be appropriately marked and visible to the boarding passenger. DAMPING Vertical damping of the suspension system shall be accomplished by hydraulic shock absorbers mounted to the suspension arms or axles and attached to an appropriate location on the chassis. Damping shall be sufficient to control coach motion to 4 cycles or less after hitting road perturbations. Shock absorbers shall maintain their effectiveness for at least 50,000 miles (80,467 km) in normal service. The coach shall be equipped with four shock absorbers on the drive axle and two on each side of the front axle and one on each end of the tag. Shock absorbers shall be interchangeable on each axle, side to side. Reliability Driverf ATTACHMENT N CNG FUEL STORAGE INFORMATION Reliability Driven FUEL SYSTEM DIESEL FUEL TANK An aluminum fuel tank shall be provided and securely mounted to the coach to prevent movement during coach maneuvers, and shall be easily removable for cleaning or replacement. Fuel tank capacity shall be 182 useable gallons. The fuel tank shall be equipped with an external, hex head, brass drain plug. The drain plug shall be at least 3/8 inch size and shall be located at the lowest point of the fuel tank. Access covers shall not be provided. The tank shall be baffled internally to prevent fuel sloshing noise regardless of fill level. Baffles shall run the full height and length of the tank. The baffles and fuel pickup location shall assure continuous full power operation on a 6 -percent upgrade for 15 minutes starting with no more than 25 gallons of fuel over the unusable amount in the tank. The fuel pickup tube shall be perforated and mounted to the bottom face of the tank to insure the pickup screen stays at the bottom of the tank. Fuel shall be drawn through the fuel tank pickup tube fitted with a screen that will prevent debris from entering the fuel line. The fuel tank shall have a permanently affixed plaque stating manufacturer, certification, capacity and date of manufacture. The plaque shall be clean and legible after the undercoating process, and shall comply with FPA requirements. The plaque shall be substantially visible when the fuel fill door is opened. A non -heated Fuel ProTm fuel filter shall also be provided. A clear cover will allow visual inspection of filter and fuel condition and fuel flow. FUEL FILLER The fuel filler shall be designed to fill the fuel tank to the fill point, shall automatically shut off when fueling is complete, and shall eliminate foaming and blow back. The filler cap shall be recessed into the body so that spilled fuel will not run onto the outside surface of the coach. The filler shall accommodate a fill rate of forty (40) gallons per minute of foam -free fuel without causing the nozzle to shut off before the tank is full. An audible signal shall indicate when the tank is essentially full. V Z Z U QEAo cl 0 cmcl W W _ U OC > �..- w W Cl) W ° > > D Q p O Z W J e O V W O " ° V > O CD U— o z � _.; °� o 0 0 0 0 N E� 0� �� 0 C 0 U 0 U 4-0 C� MCU E - CL C - (D C/) U O U N co a) W co -0 0 L O - 0 �U�° �J U)4--p�' C: � O > �+ r s- O O `'"' LO m CU N N = 5 U) � — N (� O O EE E O -+-j 1 1 Z m (aCL M N m Z M U � O E Q E U O cnm e 9-01 L- 0 O CO G o 0-0 c �-C U C (u O -0U 0 U P. L- 0 O O U O C O N C L- E E 0-0 � C c U m CO �U O U 4 fJ �J CL E 0 U V 0 > E .�e y_ C 0 -1--+ 0 Z U) U� 0 i i� W W E 0 U 0 m O O o� c - O E� L O C -i5 X-- ZZU C m O �U C: O U C :3 0) mo 00 L i ca }� L a) LL j U 4-0 0 0 a� W W nn ■ L CL c W co U O 0 o � LL 0 W O L CL C A O ; U r O , U � V) c co co O 0 C/) O v, m c� I 0 O U O c c O a m L- :3c c U c � O -0 U c O U 0 0 0 L. a) 4—j ._ 0 U CL .— cn E cn a) .0 -1--+ cm C: cn N C: c6 >ON Ln a) cu 4-0 C/) a) �- cn a) E LL 0 � .0 z o E 4-J -: Z c� o a) U L4— CU CL cu C/) 0 U) ;_ U X cn a) a) a) W cn :3 > o E 0. Ll --0 LU a) E 0 o� o i 0� U j 0.. > Q cn cn N T- Cummins Westport ISX12 G Heavy -Duty Naturai Gas Truck Engine The Natural Choice. ISX12 G Heavy -Duty Natural Gas Truck Engine. The Cummins Westport ISX12 G natural gas engine delivers the strong pulling power and heavy-duty durability required for regional -haul truck/tractor, vocational and refuse applications. It features Stoichiometric cooled Exhaust Gas Recirculation (SEGR) combustion technology, which allows the use of a maintenance -free Three -Way Catalyst (TWC). Ratings range from 320 hp to 400 hp (239-298 kW) with 1450 Ib -ft (11966 Nem) of peak torque. The inherent efficiency of this engine and an abundant supply of natural gas reduce operating costs, making the ISX12 G the natural choice for your fleet. Dedicated Factory -Built Natural Gas Engine. The ISM 2 G is a dedicated, factory -built natural gas engine khat is based on the Cummins ISX12 diesel engine. The 1SX12 G shares many of the same parts and components as its diesel counterpart, and it operates on 100 percent clean -burning, low-cost natural gas. The ISX'12 G meets current U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and California Air Resource Board (ARB) emissions standards, and 2014 EPA greenhouse gas (GHG) and U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) fuel - economy regulations. The ISX12 G is a great choice for mixer, dump truck and refuse applications, with a high power -to -weight ratio and 700 Ib -ft (949 Nem) of clutch engagement torque. Four refuse ratings, as well as Front Engine Power Take - Off (FEPTO) and Rear Engine Power Take -Off (REPTO) options, offer power and flexibility for a wide variety of vehicles. The ISX12 G is also the natural choice for regional -haul and LTL distribution operation trucks and tractors. Five ratings from 320 hp to 400 hp (239-298 kW), engine braking, and manual or automatic transmission capability provide trucking customers with the performance to meet fleet requirements, and the flexibility of using either compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquefied natural gas (LNG). Advanced Combustion Technology. The ISX12 G uses SEGR combustion with spark ignition to create a high-performance, heavy-duty natural gas engine. The cooled-EGR system takes a measured quantity of exhaust gas and passes it through a cooler to reduce temperatures before mixing it with fuel and the incoming air charge to the cylinder. SEGR results in improved power density and fuel economy versus traditional stoichiometric or lean -burn natural gas engines. This technology also enables the use of a TWC for emissions control. Maintenance -Free Aftertreatment. TWCs are effective, simple, passive devices packaged as part of the muffler. They provide consistent emissions control performance, are maintenance -free and can be mounted vertically or horizontally on the vehicle. The ISX12 G requires no active aftertreatment such as a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) or Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR). Natural Gas — The Fuel Choice Is Yours. The ISX12 G operates on 100 percent natural gas, which can be carried on the 40011111. vehicle in either compressed or liquefied form (CNG or LNIG, respectively). The ISX12 G can also run on renewable natural gas (RNG) made from biogas or landfill gas that has been upgraded to vehicle fuel -quality. A variety of CNG and LNG tank configurations are available to meet range requirements. Consult your vehicle manufacturer for details. IASX)A� Design Architecture. Wastegate Turbocharger 4 -Valve Cylinder Head 0 .0 AM- 0� Scan the OR Code to v+ew the ISX12 G technology walkaround video Coil -On -Plug Ignition Features And Benefits. > Advanced Air Handling - Electronic control for precise air handling. > Proven Wastegate Turbocharger - A small -frame, fixed - geometry, wastegate-style turbocharger is used. A water- cooled bearing housing adds durability. Engine Control Module (ECM) - Constantly monitors and controls engine sensors, fuel system and ignition system. Drive -by -wire throttle control. Provides OEM and end- users with the ability to tailor performance of the engine to fit the vehicle's mission. Full interface capability to Cummins INSITET" and Cummins QuickCheck diagnostic service tools. > High -Energy Ignition System - Provides getter performance and longer service intervals, improved spark plug and coil durability and self -diagnostics. The ignition module and fuel module are controlled by a full -authority CM2180A ECM with programmable features, which is compatible with Cummins diagnostic tools. -- EGR Valve �— - Fuel Module -Energy Ignition System ,ontrol Module (ECM) > Accessory Belt Drive System - Self -tensioning serpentine polyvee belt accessory drive system for water pump, engine -mounted fan hub and most alternators. > Air Intake System - Charge -air cooling reduces emissions by lowering intake manifold air temperatures. > High -Efficiency Lube Cooler - Lowers oil temperatures, for longer engine life. > Crankshaft -The eight -counterweight, fully balanced, high -tensile -strength steel forging has induction -hardened fillets and journals, for outstanding durability. > Optional Engine Braking - 240 hp (180 kW) at 2100 rpm. > Transmission - Automatic and manual options available. > Front- and Rear Engine Power Take -Off (FEPTO and REPTO) - Options provide additional torque, for a variety of vocational applications. ISX12 G Ratings Engine Advertised Model hp (kW) III Torque)@rpm Governed d ) � Line Haul Truck Applications 6 ISX12 G 400 400 (298) 1450(1966)@ 1200 2100 RPM ISX12 G 385 385 (287) 1350 (1830) @ 1200 2100 RPM ISX12 G 350 350 (261) 1450 (1966) @ 1200 2100 RPM ISX12 G 330 330 (246) 1250 (1695) @ 1200 2100 RPM ISX12 G 320 320 (239) 1150 (1559) @ 1200 2100 RPM Refuse Truck Applications ISX12 G 35OR 350 (261) 1350 (1830) @ 1200 2100 RPM ISM2 G 350R 350 (261) 1450 (1966) @ 1200 2100 RPM ISX12 G 3308 330 (246) 1250(1695)@ 1200 2100 RPM ISX12 G 320R 320 (239) 1150 (1559) @ 1200 2100 RPM ISX12 G Specifications Maximum Horsepower 400 HP 298 kW Peak Torque 1450 LB -FT 1966 4•m Governed Speed 2100 RPM Clutch Engagement Torque Type 700 LB -FT 919 N•m 4 -cycle, spark -ignited, in-line 6 -cylinder, turbocharged, CAC Engine Displacement 726.2 CU IN 11.9 LITERS Bore and Stroke 5.11 IN x 5.91 IN 130 MM -� 150 MM Operating Cycles 4 Oil System Capacity 12 U.S. GALLONS 45.4 LITERS Coolant Capacity 26.5 U.S. QUARTS 25.1 LITERS System Voltage 12V Net Weight (Dry) 2,650 LB 1,202 KG Fuel Type CNG/LNG/RNG Aftertreatment Three -Way Catalyst (TWC) ISX12 G Maintenance Intervals Maintenance Item Miles/Kilometers Hours Months Oil And Filter`A 18,000 MI 400 6 30,000 KM Coolant Filter— 67,500 MI 1,500 12 108,500 KM Spin -On Fuel Filter' 45,000 MI 1,000 12 72,300 KM Spark Plugs 67,500 MI 1,500 12 108,500 KM Overhead 67,500 MI 1,500 12 Adjustment- 108,500 KM Engine Brake 270,000 MI 6,000 24 Adjustment 435,000 KM Standard Coolant 270,000 MI 6,000 24 435,000 KM Air Cleaner/Element Follow vehicle manufacturers published recommendations "Assuming normal duty cycle/based on 45 mph (72.4 kph) average speed Spark plug interval and oveiiead adjustment must be reduced for slower speed applications- -Do not change if SCA above 3. ARequres natural gas engine oil (CES20074). > Intervals for normal duty -- must be reduced for lover average speeds/duty cycles > Default inter/al Is the hours stated Interval s whichever comes first - hours, miles or months. > Refer to Owners Manual for complete details on maintenance intervals ISX12 G Torque Curves. 400 300 200 00 �r I � ISX12 G 320/1150 000 �• ISX120=11Y50 900 ISA 12 G 365! 1050 1SX12 G 050/1450 600 ISX12 G 400/1450 600 600 1000 1200 1400 1600 1600 2000 2200 Engine Speed (RPM) With torque cures similar to those of the ISM 2 diesel within the 1 150 ib -ft -to -+450 ib -ft (1559-1966 Nem) range. the ISX12 G offers comparable vehicle performance and drivability. fearing Recommendations. For best reliability and durability, the recommended maximum GVW for the ISM2 G in line -haul applications is 80,000 Ib (36,287 kg). Recommended gearing is 1400 rpm to 1450 rpm at cruise speed, to optimize fuel economy. Optimizing Performance With PowerSpec. Cummins PowerSpec helps you find the ideal gearing specs for engine performance or fuel economy, making it possible to tailor the operation of Cummins Westport engines to fit every customer's application. PowerSpec can also read fault codes, and can be programmed to collect trip information for multiple drivers. PowerSpec works on both the ISL G and the ISX12 G. See powerspec.cummins.com for more information. Base Warranty. The automotive base warranty for the Cummins Westport ISX12 G natural gas engine is the same as for the Cummins diesel base platform. Base warranty covers 2 years/250,000 miles (402,336 km) and 100 percent parts and labor on warrantable failures.* '4Varrantaoie falures are t4ose dus to defects r Cur-av^s materal or `actor/ workmans'nm.. Extended Coverage. For additional peace of mind, Cummins Westport offers a variety of extended coverage plans to meet every customer's need. For details on extended coverage options, contact your local Cummins distributor or Cummins Westport representative. Better Customer Care. Cummins Westport -powered vehicles are supported by Cummins service network, the largest and most capable in North America. Cummins authorized technicians are fully trained on Cummins Westport natural gas engines, with ready access to Genuine Cummins Parts and warranty support. For questions regarding your Cummins Westport engine, or for assistance in finding a repair facility in the United States or Canada, call Cummins Care at 1 -800 -DIESELS'" (1-800-343-7357). Cummins Westport — The Natural Choice. Cummins Westport Inc. designs, engineers and markets 6- to 12 -liter spark -ignited natural gas engines for commercial transportation applications such as trucks and buses. Our dedicated 100 percent natural gas engines are manufactured by Cummins, and are available as a factory -direct option from leading truck and bus manufacturers. To learn more about Cummins Westport and natural gas as a transportation fuel, visit the Cummins Westport Natural Gas Academy for information, resources, videos and more — at cumminswestport.com/natural-gas-academy. 50 West 75th P 6G2 Westport Phone 7604-718-6100 A Fax 604.718-83558 nfo@cumm nswestport.com cumminswestport.com Bulletin 4971420 Printed in U.S.A. 3/13 02013 Cummins Westport Inc. _0 CIOE 4-1 co W 3 U) o 0 0000000000 O CD U C V0 CD O U � (D Y C a) O O C O O > OOa) O Zp O 7a C) o OUc LO Op O OO Q U O (aL) J a) ci cd cn U3 a)_Y N N Ld O - 00 N O O't O '4' 21 C' C) C) U) o N ti (� O CO 0C ro - O OE ai O ti CO O Ln LO UUc O �aic �om O � O O Na) O L) f` O U a Q (0 N O J O ca CA W ro LD Lo O O C7 OO a) >: � a o� ca a N N O 7 O-0 LO C) N L O Ctl 7 w C aai _7 LO N N N co w i C OC - D Oj L6 O F- UOL�QOca) (6 CO O C) -0 U CO Y O _0 CIOE 4-1 co W Y U 7 a) Q T m Cl U) m O (n a) 7 c� O1 C d c 0 0000000000 O CD O V0 O Cl) (D N O O - O (D O 7 O C) C) f- LO 0 O OO O O r-I O LO O cd ')') N N Ld O - 00 COD O O't O '4' 10 C' C) C) V N ti (� O CO O O O O O ti CO O C) LO O Cl) O LO OO O - O (D N O L) f` O O O C) O rl-i W O LD Lo CA O C7 OO ti 0 LO O CO N O O) O LO C) IT LO IT N N co N N N N N Cl) - O O 1- O CO O C) O I� O O O O O LO O CO O 1- O f` N O LO O O O 00 LO (h O N O O V O P -- O CD O N I� C) p f- LO CJ LO O CO 0 O O LO Ln C) O0 Cl) N N N N N r N co O r-�_ r O OD O f- CO O r- f` LO O 0 0000 LD f` O N C) M LO O N O O N � O fl- 00 N W O (fl O O p Ls f` LO N0 O O T (D LO O H LO N C) 0 N N NN In co O C\ N LO O O C) Q O N O N ti LO (D Cl) O L O O Cl) ti O N O 00 O O CO CO O - O C) LO O N O (O C) Cl! C) Ln - O Co 00 LU N O 00 (D LC)T O T - V C) N N N N O O N O L O O O O O O O O O - O O m O ti O O O O V O LO C\l OOV O O O CO OIj_O~ P- co O CO 0 C) O O O O O = . r r r - p r C LO O N N LO O r O N O f� LO N O ti LC) N • ON _ O^ F- N f O r N Cl) V LO O - O COO L 0 s O 0 (Ov) (D O - O (D 7 N r O O W fz N (D CO O O N O OO O O O O O O O O O O 00 O LO O LO O In O Ln O Ln O O LO CD CDCp N - O co - O p � C,) 'T LO ('7 ti O CO ti O LO LO "4 -;f ('7 C) C) co O - O O O O C0 O f_ O w C) O LO O O O 00 LO co O N O O r-� 0 r - LO O O N f� C) O ti LO (Y) co O co CV (c) LO ,T M C) C) N N N N N r CO O Cl) r_ O N O O N co O (1) O O C) LO O N O 0 (D CO N C) LO 0 O C) 00 LO N O O (Q LO V C) N O 'T C) N N N N r r r r r O O Lo O LO O 0 O LO O LC) O LO 0 O L6 N C) N 4'i 6 Ln (6 CO ti P--! O Y U 7 a) Q T m Cl U) m O (n a) 7 c� O1 C d c 0 0000000000 0 - O O O O O O OO OO O O O O LO O O O Ln O 0 O LO O Or O 0 O C) V O ti (� r r O O O O 0 - O O O O O O O O LO O LO O LO LD Lo O N ti LO N O N O 0 O N V � O N O Cl) r O W r O O O O O O O O 0 O p O O 0 O O O O O O LO 0 0 O LO O Ln (q LO N N co O O r Or N r O 0000 r O O O O p O O O O O O O O Ln O O H O N O r O N In co O C\ N LO O N Q LO r N V 00 r- O T C) CN) LOC) CO GT r O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O OV O O O O C\l COO O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O O O - p LO LO LO LO O - O O N O f� LO N O ti LC) N • _ O^ F- O r N Cl) V LO O CC) W 0 s O O O O O O O O O O OO O O O O O O O O O O 00 O LO O LO O In O Ln O Ln O O cc N N O C,) 'T LO COO ti ONO - O O O O O O O O O O O O O LO O LO O Lo O Ln O LO O O LO f` O N In r-� O N LO O N f -z co O (0 CV co LO CD r N (') C) V LO LO CO O f` o '+ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O L6 O Ld O O L6 d N N O C) W V LO 0 O O 0 O O O O O - OtiOOO N O LO N O fl- LO N O Or C) r- r NN N C) CJ - - O 0O 0O 0OOOOOO N LO ti T r r NO N N N O O O O O O O 0 O O 00 O LO O LO 0 LO 0 O LO O N LO N O N LO Ln N C) LC) O f� O r0 T r r O LO O LL> 0 LO O LO O LO O O M N O N N Oo0 O r r- O CD 00 O r r N C) C) � LO LO (D O ti CW) O O Co N NOS0 CD ti 00 OTti N O O LO V C) CO O r r r N N N CO CO CO LO O LO O LO O LO O LO O Lo O N LO fl O N Ln f` O N LO f- O 0 0 0 r r r r- N N N N M N G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O O O N O CO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOOOOOO 0 co O O O co ti O 6 O ON0O OO� O O O O O O O O O O O LO ti O d 0 C) _ � � O r r O) 0 CO Cl) NN -O O O O O O O O O OOo O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O C) cr) O N 0 0r— O O O O O O O O O O O O O CD 0 O O 00 N CD O� O 7 O COO O O CO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O � O O 0 CO L O CO Ln p Cj (O t-: N O O 'tm LO c0 I- N W OO T r O 0 M 00 ti 1.6 O C) N N r O O O O O O O OO O O O O O O O p O H CO N CD O� 00 N (.O O� O O O O O C0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 (DD L J ') 0 O co N N C) O C) O O CO OJ O O O) C) 6) V O O co O O c0 N LO O O O O O O O O O 0 0 O O O O O O p co O O O � T r W 000 � O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 00 O 0 N O Lf) O Lo O O O LS) O Lf) O Lo LO O r r N N N C) :F f LO LO (O O r,7 � O O O O O O O O O O O - O O O O O N O 0 O Lo O 0 O Lo O O O r 0 O C0 N Ln 0LO N O I— U) N 0 N 00000 0 N O N LQ I� O) N LO OD Cl) LO I� O � O 0 pp N LO h p00 LO O LO O LO O U) N 0 r- 0 0 O C) W - 00 O N OO O N O O O O O CC? LO O p o0 O N N 00 N p O N N ()) 00 ti d C) N r O co O(0 O O (`00 000 00 O N O O CO O O C) N O 00 O ti CO Lo 5 0 00 O � 0 COO O (D C07 p ao W r- COO O Ln 't N N r O C) O O I- O O (0 C) CO O a LI co CD O O Lb O C) C) � O O ) O O c O O r- O (O C) 00 O 0� coN O O r- p C) O C) O 0 T ' 00 I- I` (D LO O LO C) N r O O O OO O LO O O O O O p C~p 0 O O O O O O O O O LD O 00 O O O O O LD LO O O � O O N O O LO N O 00 I- (O co LO LO ZT C) N r r r - O O O 0 LO (D O 0 O OCO N O In O LO c0 p O Cl O co V LO Ln O 31 (D l f O 0 O O C) N LO O LD O to LOCO N O 00 I- c0 LO Lf) d V C7 N CO CD -;0T - O CO O 0 coO V O CCO COO ti O co O OCO O d O C) C) I� O O C) O O O t` p O co C) O 00 O Cl) N 0 O O LO LO 't V C) co C) O O p O O I- O CO O Cl) O I-- O O O O p O LO O co O I- O ti N O O O O p 00 LO C7 O N O O " 00 CD 0 N 0 N CO 0 V C) co C') N N N O I- O O co O N O N-- O - O O O O co I� O N O CO O 00 w Q CO O O c0 O O N O CO CO N O C6 co N 00 CO T d O COO 't co NN N N O co O O I- (0 O CJ N C) O Cl) O O (0 00 O O C O O O N) U) r O O N � � p � N O O V N r O Cr 00 I` ti LO 0 0 0 0 O O 0 0 CO 0 LOC) a0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 p V O (Q N O O T T 0 Op I� O O U) L() CO N O C) O p I- O -1- O co co I� t` O V O Oco C07 0 c00 ti O (00 007 O 000 - O r 0 00 (.O LO In r -;IC) co co N s N { O Lt) O LO O O 0 0 0 LO O O O LS) r--: O N LO 1- O N LO I- O N O 0 r ,- r r N CV N N C) C6 C) O G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 p 0 0 0 0 0 0 g p N ('0 V O O 0 T CO N CO d ti O N co � o In o CO r T T O OO O O O O O O OOOOOOO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 0 C OV O O 6 O O 0O OO O O O O O O O O OO O p O O O O O O O O O O O O O O LO ti O d p _ � � O r r G7 N co O (D t CO O) W 0 r -O O O O O O O O O OOo O O O O O O 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O OO d N O M p Nd 06 O�pN O N co LO c0 r r O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O o_ c N O O� O N NN C) ;4- d LO CO r- 00 m d1 r O O O O O O O O O O O O O O � O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O CD p O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 O O O 00 r- r- (O N a0 N O O O r r CO V t U) O CO ` O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O OO O O O O O O 00000000 O O O O O LO O L1) O In O LO O LO O LO O 1.6 LO r N N C) co V O LO O CO N I` co r O O O O O O O O OO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O p O H CO N CD O� 00 N (.O O� O T O N N N CO CO - U) 0 O co n O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 0 0 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O - C) cd N N co C0') CO co "zl-' O O r r N O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O OO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0c O O O O O O O N O O W O N f (D 6 0 r'tf (N0 N N N i O O O O O O O O O 0 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O r "i 0 N C' V Ln (.O r --:W 00 r T r r O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 00 O 0 O Lf) O Lo O O O LS) O Lf) O Lo LO O r r N N N C) :F f LO LO (O O r,7 � O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O LO 00 m LO p N 0 O N O U) N U) I- O N p LO I� r r r r N N N N C) 0 C) C) d Lo O 0 O Lo O O O r 0 N Ln 0LO N O I— U) N 0 N 0 N O N LQ I� O) N LO OD Cl) LO I� O � 0 pp N LO h LO O LO O LO O U) N 0 r- 0 0 - 00 O N OO O N i N CO coti 000 r r r r r r - N O LO O LO O LO O O O LO O O O LO O LO N N co co d L!) U) co O � ti O ' p ` O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O a = LL a t a a ° - 5 a w ° ° m g u 0 z u ��I = i f m ® O m c u 0 $ a m T a O o m H b a a z O aa+ I a LL Q LL a = LL a t a a ° - 5 a w ° ° m g u 0 z u ��I C T a f a v O u U w v 3 m N a �o a = m 0 $ a m T _ m � o m b a a aa+ I a Q a = LL a t a a ° - 5 a w ° ° m g u 0 z u a v a O a v a a y v a s u � u U a = LL a t a a ° - 5 a w ° ° m g u 0 z u a N a O a v a a y v a s u � u U a 1 x a �o a = m = 'm m a> m I m _ m � a Y o x � o aa+ I a Q a N v oa O a v a a y v a c u° > — x _ o m a c y U tr 70 Reliability Driverf ATTACHMENT 0 MCI's proposal is based on providing the specification requirements as specified in the "request for proposals" technical documents except as noted on Certification No. 7 form for proposal deviation included with Attachment # 3 of our Technical Proposal. Additionally, we have also provided a list of available options with Attachment # 4 of our Price Proposal. 77 Reliability Driverf ATTACHMENT P Please find attached Carb Certification for the Cummins ISX diesel engine. Carb Certification for the Cummins ISX CNG engine has not yet been provided. MCI will provide the applicable Carb Certification once it becomes available. Celilornis Environmental ProteCGon Agency EXECUTIVE ORDER A-021-0580 CUMMINS INC. New On -Road Heavy -Duty Engines 6t� EWAir Resources erdL Page 1 of 2 Pages Pursuant to the authority vested in the Air Resources Board by Health and Safety Code Division 26, Part 5, Chapter 2; and pursuant to the authority vested in the undersigned by Health and Safety Code Sections 39515 and 39516 and Executive Order G-02-003; IT IS ORDERED AND RESOLVED: The engine and emission control systems produced by the manufacturer are certified as described below for use in on -road motor vehicles with a manufacturer's GVWR over 14,000 pounds. Production engines shall be in all material respects the same as those for which certification is granted. STANDARDS '^^"�" ECS 8 SPECIAL FEATURES - DIAGNOSTIC MODEL ENGINE FUEL TYPE 8 TEST SERVICE YEAR ENGINE FAMILY SIZES (L) Z PROCEDURE CLASS D01-1 I, TC, CAC, ECM, EGR, OC, OBD($) 2013 DCEXH0729XAF 11.9 Diesel Diesel UB PTOx, SCR -U PRIMARY ENGIN19T IDL ADDITIONAL IDLE EMISSIONS CONTROL 5 EMISSIONS CONTROL Exempt N/A ENGINE Li ENGINE MODELS I CODES (rated power, In hp) 11.9 ISX12 385 / 3712;FR20434 (379) =not applicable. =gross vehic}e rreignl Pat nq, CCR xyx=Tale 13. California Cate oI Regaal+ons. "'Mon xyz, au ur•n eu.aoc= I lug W. � wv u w �w n,. -.•. �•�, w - 1 zliter, hprtwrsepowar kwr-Idlowan, Xhcur. CWGILNG.carnpresseVNglwfred neural gas. LPO-hqueW petroFaurn gas; ES5=e5% ath" fuel MFmsulh fuel a N BF=bi fuel, OF=dual fuel_ FF=AexrAla `uM. r UMM HDD-lighUrrlgdlumlheevy heavy-0uty dtosnL Ue=u0an bus, HDO=heavy aury Oho; s ECS=emlas�on rAnlrgi syelem, TWC10C=It+ree-wayloxldiz caiarysl. HAC=NOx adsorptcon eemtyst: 8CR-U / SCR•N=solectwa ralelylls+exWchnn -urea + -ammonia. WU (prellx)-rermr up GatefylY. DPFQdiesel panlwlale RRar- PTOX=per,omG Trap oxidizer, 1iO2SIO2S-heetodfoxygar, s A$&, HAFBIAFS-heamd7air4uol-rano soilw (a.k,a , urnver3al or linear oxygen svnsar}, 41=IhrbtlVe body fuel injacllon; SFIIMF4=9avuanueUmuhi pat Wel InjeGi On; DGiadrect gasoline tole'*". OCAR8-gaseous Garburelor lDI1DDI=mduecUd loci rkasel �my�oadion, TCIS0.1wod Pcharger, CAC=dlarge air Gaoler; EGR 1 EGR =exhaust gas rscJrCulahpn +cooled EGR PAIRlAIR=puiaedlsecondary liar inectron, SPL=srncke pull lirndor; ECMIPCM=engrnelpowerUem &olnlrci module: EM�r+gine a+odlficaflan: i (pralfx}=parallel, (21 [lrulllxl=in sanea. ESS�englna sFa !down syelem [per t3 GCR 1956.8{ay(6y[Aj(tj, 3ega30 gnu NOx iper T3 CCR ?95G.5{a)iBhCl: APS =Inlemal mmbustPdn auaaiary Aiwa syslenl; ALT=allametive morbid aper 13 CCR t a5a.a[all8}[DY: ExempT exernptad per t3 CCR X956 a{al[81{al a for CNGJLNG fuek systems, NIA=not applicable {e.g., Dila anginas and vehicles!. ounronnine mnn�RnrMimr dlaonoffiie suitor" [� 3 CCR 7871]: 09DiFl1IPI+ t:l=full I pallial I�al1_lel_wkh a Sine+ orrbvard di slit: . Following are: 1) the FTP exhaust emission standards, or family emission limit(s) as applicable, under 13 CCR 1956.8; 2) the EURO and NTE limits under the applicable California exhaust emission standards and test procedures for heavy- duty diesel enggines and vehicles (Test Procedures); and 3) the corresponding certification levels, for this engine family. "Diesel" CO, EURO and NTE certification compliance may have been demonstrated by the manufacturer as provided under the applicable Test Procedures in lieu of testing. (For flexible- and dual•fueted engines, the CERT values in brackets [ I are those when tested on jonventional test fuel. For multi -fueled engines, the STO and CERT values for defautt operation permitted in 13 CCR 1956.8 are in parentheses.). in EURO NMHC EURO NOx NMHC+NOx g/bhp-hr FTP EURO FTP EURO FTP EURO STD 0.140.14 0.20 0.20 " FEL CERT 0.03 0.01 0.12 0.07 NTE 0.21 0.30 CO t PM HCHO FTP EURO FTP I EURO 15.5 15.5 0.01 1 0.01 1.1 0.5 0.002 1 0.001 19.4 t 0.02 FTP I EURO glbhp•h"grems per brake horsepowerhour; FTP=Federal Test Procedure; EURO=Euro III European Sleady-Stale Cycle, including RMCSET=ram mode cycle supplemental emissions testing: NTE=Nil-IG-Exneed; STD=slandard or emission test cap. FEL --family emission limit; CERT=certification level; NMHCIHC=non-metheneArydrocarbon; NOx= oxides of nlVooW, nnyan.,,n mnnrw,Aa pp=oadltulaln mailer. HCHOrformaidarryde; tRev.i BE IT FURTHER RESOLVED: Certification to the FEL(s) listed above, as applicable, is subject to the following terms, limitations and conditions, The FEL(s) is the emission level declared by the manufacturer and serves in lieu of an emission standard for certification purposes In any averaging, banking, or trading (ABT) programs. It will be used for determining compliance of any engine in this family and compliance with such ABT programs. BE IT FURTHER RESOLVED: The listed engine models are conditionally certified in accordance with 13 CCR Section 1971A (k) (deficiency and fines provisions for certification of malfunction and diagnostic system) because the heavy-duty on -board diagnostic (HD OBD) system of the listed engine models has been determined to have five deficiencies. The listed engine models are approved subject to the manufacturer paying a fine of $75 per engine for the third through fifth deficiencies in the listed engine family that is produced and delivered for sale in California. On a quarterly basis, the manufacturer shall submit to the Air Resources Board reports of the number of engines produced and delivered for sale in California and pay the full fine owed for that quarter pursuant to this conditional certification. Payment shall be made payable to the State Treasurer for deposit in the Air Pollution Control Fund no later than thirty (30) days after the end of each calendar quarter during the 2013 model -year production period. Failure to pay the quarterly fine, in full, in the time provided, may be cause for the Executive Officer to rescind this conditional certification, effective from the start of the quarter in question, in which case all engines covered under this conditional certification for that quarter and all future quarters would be deemed uncertified and subject to a civil penalty of up to $5000 per engine pursuant to HSC Section 43134. Calitomis Envimmr a at Prateatm Apancy Y EXECUTIVE ORDER A421-0580 ®Air Resources board CUMMINS INC. — f New On Road Heavy -Duty Engines Page es BE IT FURTHER RESOLVED: Except in vehicle applications exempted per 13 CCR 1956.8(a)(6)(B), engines in this enggine family certified under 13 CCR 1956.8(a)(6)(Cj [30 9/hr N0xj and section 35.13.4 of the incorporated "California ExF�aust Emissions Standards and Test Procedures ffor 2004 and Subsequent Model Heavy -Duty Diesel Engines and Vehicles" �HDDE Test Procedures) adopted Dec. 12, 2002, as last amended Oct. 12, 201't, shall be provided with an approved ' Certified Clean Idle" label that shall be affixed to the vehicle into which the engine is installed. BE IT FURTHER RESOLVED: For the listed engine models the manufacturer has submitted the materials to demonstrate certification compliance with 13 CCR 1965 (emission control labels), 13 CCR 1971.1 (on -board diagnostic, full or partial compliance) and 13 CCR 2035 et seq. (emission control warranty). Engines certified under this Executive Order must conform to all applicable California emission regulations. The Bureau of Automotive Repair will be notified by copy of this Executive Order. Executed at EI Monte, California on this day of October 2012 Annette Hebert, Chief Mobile Source Operations Division D Reliability Driven' ATTACHMENT # 5 SUPPORTING DATA PROPOSER QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT ITEMS A THRU J m , n Bead) i S U R E T Y G R ti� O F 77 Water Street, 17th Floor New York, NY 10005 onebeacon.com October 30, 2013 Victor Valley Transit Authority 17150 Smoketree St. Hesperia, CA 92345-8305 2 Broadway, Room B19.130 New York, NY 10004 Re: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. RFP VVTA-2013-04 Furnishing and Delivering CNG powered Commuter Coaches and Low Emission Diesel Commuter Coaches Performance Bond This letter is to advise you that Motor Coach Industries, Inc. ("MCI") is a valued surety client of Atlantic Specialty Insurance Company. MCI remains in good standing and is afforded surety capacity of $20 million dollars for a single project and $30 million dollars in the aggregate. It is our opinion that MCI is qualified to perform the above captioned project ("Contract"), and we are prepared to favorably consider the performance bond required under the Contract for 5% of the award price schedule and otherwise in accordance with the Contract's Terms and Conditions. This letter is not an assumption of liability, nor is it a bid bond or a performance bond. It is issued only as a bonding reference requested from us by our client. Atlantic Specialty Insurance Company's decision to issue surety bonds on behalf of MCI will be subject to our standard underwriting including but not limited to acceptance of the financial condition of our client, contract terms and conditions, bonds forms and project financing. Atlantic Specialty Insurance Company is A rated by A.M. Best with a financial size category of XII and is included in The Department of the Treasury's Listing of Certified Companies. Sincerely, Atlantic Specialty Insurance Company "Lopez,Att NSU RANCE G R O U P One Beacon Power of Attorney NO. 2005110 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that ATLANTIC SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, a New York corporation with its principal office in Minnetonka, Minnesota, does hereby constitute and appoint: Barry A Binger Jr., Jeannelte Dominguez-Porrini, Aiza Lopez, Marisol Mojica, Rosalie A Moresco, David Moskowitz, Stacy Rivera, Ann Marie Tinerino, each individually if there be more than one named, its true and lawful Attomey-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its bchalfas surety, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and all other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,, provided that no bond or undertaking executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of twenty-five million t10112rs(S25,000,000) and the execution of such bonds, recognizanccs, contracts of indemnity, and all other writings obligatory in the nature thereof in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Company as if they had been fully signed by an authorized officer of the Company and scaled with the Company seal. This Power of Attorney is made and executed by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of ATLANTIC SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY on the twenty-fifth day of September, 2012: Resolved: That the President, any Senior Vice President or Vice -President (each an "Authurizod Officer"). may execute for and in behalf of the Company any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and all other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and affix the seal of the Company thereto; and that the Authorized Officer may appoint and authorize an Attomey-in-Fact to execute on behalf of the Company any and all such instruments and to affix the Company seal thereto; and that the Authorized Officer may at any time remove any such Attorney -in -Fact and rovoke all power and authority given to any such Attomey-in- Fact. Resolved: That the Attorney -in -Fact may be given full power and authority to execute for and in the name and on behalf of the Company any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity. and all other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed and scaled by an Authorized Officer and, further, the Attomey-in-Fact is hereby authorized to verify any affidavit required to be attached to bonds, recognizariecs. contracts.of indemnity, and all other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. This power of attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of .ATLANTIC SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY on the twenty-fifth day of September, 2012: Resolved: That the signature of an Authorized Officer and the Company seal may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing an Attomey.-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and sealing any bond, undertaking, recognizance or other written obligation in the nature thereof, and any such signature and seal where so used, being hereby adopted by the Company as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the 'N WITNESS WHEREOF, ATLANTIC SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by an Authorized Officer and the seal of the Company affixed this ninth day of October, 2012. fL COAf•11R4pF9� PaidV `/, =y. SEAL f^Y 1986 0 By STATE OF MINNESOTA yew v0'?m 'ab,$ Paul H. McDonough, Senior Vice President HENNIPEN COUNTY On this ninth day of October, 2012, before me personally came Paul H. McDonough, Senior Vice President of ONEBEACON INSURANCE COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individual and officer described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and he acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly swom, that he is the said officer of the Company aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the seal of said Company and that the said seal and the signature as such officer was duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and at the direction of the Company. TARA JANELLE STAFFORD P s ,T NOTARY PUBLIC MINNESO 0 5 .� My Commission Expires Jan. 31, Notary Public I, the undersigned, Secretary of ONEBEACON INSURANCE COMPANY, a New York Corporation, do hereby certify that the foregoing power of attorney is in full force and has not been revoked, and the resolutions set forth above are now in force. Signed and sealed. Dated 30th day of 0: t� , 2013 This Power of Attorney expires October 1, 2014 AN S� tnigU ryr,. a SEAL. L ``= 1986 v power £ #Yora eV :._. Ali.! svi'tneu+ i irse Virginia McCarthy, Secretary E- �� Telephone: 212-915-8146 Fax: 212-519-5447 Website: www Willis com Email: Chdstopher.Fletcher@Williscom October 30, 2013 Victor Valley Transit Authority 17150 Smoketree Street Hesperia, California 92345 Attn: Mr. Ron Zirges, (COTR) RE: Insured: Motor Coach Industries, Inc. Project No. VVTA-2013-04 Dear Mr. Zirges: This letter is to confirm that Motor Coach Industries, Inc. ("MCI") currently has insurance in place that meets the requirements of Section 2.7.2 INSURANCE. Willis and MCI acknowledge that a contract will not be awarded by the Authority prior to the issuance and Authority's acceptance of the required certificate of insurance. Please note the attached certificate of insurance is issued as a matter of information only at this time, and confers no rights upon you. If you have any questions, please feel free to contact me at (212) 915-8146. Christopher Fletcher Assistant Vice President / Client Advocate Willis Risk Solutions Willis of NY Inc. One World Financial Center 200 Liberty street, 6" floor New York, NY 10281 C October 30, 2013 Victor Valley Transit Authority 17150 Smoketree Street Hesperia, CA 92345 Attention: Mr. Kevin Kane, Executive Director Subject: Parent Guaranty — RFP No. VVTA-2013-04 Dear Mr. Kane: Please allow this letter to confirm that in the event that Motor Coach Industries, Inc. is the successful proposer and is awarded a contract pursuant to the referenced RFP, its parent company, Motor Coach Industries International, Inc., will guarantee the performance of Motor Coach Industries, Inc. for all work to be performed and obligations undertaken in connection with such contract. MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES INTERXATIQN4L, INC. Approved Signature: Name: Patrick Scully Title: Executive Vice President Sales and Marketing E7 Reliability Driven' ATTACHMENT F ENGINEERING AND SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS Reliability Driven' COACH SERVICE ENGINEERING ORGANIZATION MCI supports its customers with a Fleet Support organization consisting of a Technical Solutions Manager, five (5) Fleet Support Co-ordinators operating from our Louisville Kentucky facility and nineteen (19) Fleet Support Managers strategically located throughout the U.S. These Fleet Support Managers are highly qualified by education, experience in manufacturing, quality control and/or actual on -property coach maintenance operations. They are able to call on each operator on a regular basis, providing technical support. They are also fully qualified to aid the operator in processing warranty claims. Mr. David Bugenig, Technical Solutions Manager, will be assigned to your area to handle service support, warranty claims, etc, and can be reached at the following number Mr. David Bugenig Technical Solutions Manager Motor Coach Industries Limited. Phone(281)460-2849 Mr. Bugenig will make regular visits to your property based on a pre -determined schedule, to offer advise, assistance and new service information. The Fleet Support Managers are supplemented when needed by qualified personnel operating from the factory, including a Fleet Support co-ordinator to provide the communication link between the Field and Manufacturing, Quality Control and Engineering. In addition, technical writers continually update our Service publications including technical bulletins, maintenance and operating manuals. These individuals work closely with our product -engineering department to provide the latest information to the field. In addition to the Fleet Support Organization available to assist you, MCI carries a full line of parts and parts service through our strategically placed Service Parts Department to service your coaches along with the many thousands of our coaches operating throughout the U.S and Canada. To further provide factory support, MCI has now implemented a 24-hour Toll Free number to provide all MCI operators with emergency assistance as may be required. 1-800-241-2947 Motor Coach Industries, Limited takes pride in providing full after market support to all our valued customers. 0� k / E ¥ LU2 c § 2 � j E (\f 2C 2 m \ �# L §� I p / \ u k c �7� in r2 w 2$ e :2 II 2CA &a §£ t� {uj § —b / �u kLU Ln 0 p �E -CtE d o M ° 0 .0 �L. © k u / 2 Ur �tn � \0 U CU 2q £ 2 $ k to 2 2� 2§ utj Ln ƒ � Ln § cn $� cn \2 `2�c \, �■ Eh Jfc alc D E © § © m - _ r 8 ;/ §§ m�� .§ . r! §S[ ¢ � � C, :m 0 L. ■ 2 L. 2U. ■{( X22 I E=p �)j e�� - /ED { § ( # °LU ) \� �4 I p / \ u 0 N 75 O N Y v Y 0 U o OR O N _A 75 19 O N N �L a -J (A U f0 0 U L 0 0 ai C: J pS, 0 L Z Y t::� u m En 7 v c C to J D o C m ' t o � U LL U LO OL d J L v � Q. 7 � � I I E rn w c 1tn L Q uv u E L 7 U- C, Ln 1O d � I � C N L � 10 � o C7 l 0 u� yI 7 LL > o f.I � D L 0 N Z - a/ C, J J N J � a E VI � In ¢ u w u E L 7 U- 0 O J O 7 � a7 7 CL -4 L C m o U w 7 IOL U aL F- J L 0 (A .L a) d J 7 .14 Aa� OE uU m0, X W Ln O U) O1 C I N aNi a� O c 3inw D; L m t] cu C Y m 3 E a a a N N d U Of c V 10 � U 2 u L 9 - Ln Ln N a N V y} C Ul y �! O N c i > N Y d 7 to 0 J C J 3 x W L O u i) N 0 u� E rn C U/ to N t! c m rna c W Y Y 10 E L O Q V V1 M w t0 O (iI rn H W 3 d u J d w u V 7 V OL n L O d Y N U Q U ia� O N 75 Y 41 C 0 U. n c Q n Z 2 a E o U) a � � � a +� v U U uw �uai.�. x L W L M c O n LA a ` r+ E _v ate. to c d N L 0 O N C7 c V L w U v �p Ln L to tf O a U1 wN O Ln U Ln Ln U F ia� O N 75 Y 41 C 0 U. Ic Reliability Driven' ATTACHMENT G MANUFACTURING FACILITIES Reliability Driven" MCI is regarded as the most capable manufacturer of coaches and commuter buses in North America given its history, depth and resources. MCI has been manufacturing coaches since 1933 and is the largest manufacturer of coaches in North America today. MCI has led the industry by building more than 25,000 coaches with over 6,600 of them in service with transit properties in the U.S. and Canada including 1,176 with NYCT. MCI has traditionally been the only Buy America compliant and Altoona tested Commuter coach manufacturer and has honed its vehicle offering to the specific needs of transit operators like NYCT. The precision to which MCI has developed its product for the transit Commuter market has resulted in the industry's lowest total cost of ownership product including acquisition, operating and support costs. MCI's D4500 product has over 6,000 units in active revenue service with some well over the 12 year FTA funded lifespan. The D4500's ability to extend beyond the 12 year benchmark can allow MassDot to extend capital dollars by allowing buses to stay in service longer. Several thousand employees are involved in every aspect of coach production including engineering, manufacturing, warehousing, quality control, administration, and after -delivery parts and service. Substantial investments have been made to provide the latest computer - controlled equipment, sophisticated machinery and modern manufacturing techniques. The MCI is preceded by a number of models through which continuous refinement and development has resulted in the proven systems that are the foundation of the MCI. These models developed a reputation for quality, performance, and reliability that have earned MCI coaches the highest resale value of any intercity coach available today. The reliability and acceptance of these coaches are also evident by the estimate that two-thirds of the intercity coaches currently on the highway in North America were made by MCI 1oMCI: A HERITAGE OF RELIABILITY W LV v%iiir • mcl Reliability Driven Reliability, comfort and low cost of operation are just as important today at Motor Coach Industries as when Harry Zoltok founded Fort Garry Motor Body and Paint Works Ltd. in Winnipeg and designed his first 11 -passenger motor coach .. ` on a Packard chassis in 1933. MCI was right there at the dawn of modern mass 2 transportation on North American roads.The company's ~' +' earliest models had to go where passenger cars were few and far between and where rail lines were virtually nonexistent. That's an enormous responsibility for a manufacturer, and 80 years later, MCI remains Reliability Driven. CELEBRATING HISTORY 1930s Harry Zoltok Incorporated the Fort Garry Motor Body and Paint Works Limited in Winnipeg, Manitoba, and built the company's first motor coach, an 11 -passenger body on a Packard passenger car chassis. Later he designed his own chassis and manufactured the first complete coach for Grey Goose Bus Lines.The Model 150, a new transit -type coach with the windshield over the radiator, was introduced. 1940s On January 7,1941, the company changed its name to Motor Coach Industries Limited (MCI) and introduced the Model 50, a 33 -passenger coach. 1950s MCI developed more sophisticated models, including the MC -1, a revolutionary new coach design with many unique features including a heating system powered by engine cooling fans and a translucent roof providing a light, airy interior. 1960s MCI entered the U.S. market by establishing Motor Coach Industries, Inc. in North Dakota.The MC -6 Super Cruiser, which became known as the "Queen of the Highways: was developed for Greyhound Lines. 1970s MCI opened a parts distribution center named Universal Coach Parts to support U.S. customers' growing needs and for the first time exported coaches internationally to Mexico, Australia, Saudi Arabia and Taiwan.The MC -9 Crusader II was developed and became the best-selling coach in North America. 1980s MCI entered a new era of passenger comfort with the introduction of the 102C3 tour coach, featuring a higher roof, more spacious interior, fully paintable exterior surfaces and raised parcel Peliability Driven racks that provided greater visibility. Another new coach, the 102C3SS tour coach, featured durable stainless steel below the belt line. In 1989, Greyhound bought Hausman Bus Sales, which had been the sales arm of MCI new and pre -owned coaches in the U.S., along with Custom Coach, a coach converter in Ohio. 1990s With the passage of the landmark Americans with Disabilities Act, MCI produced a fully accessible coach including a rt=, new design wheelchair lift and accessible lavatory. MCI also introduced the 102EL3 Renaissance,'-� model, a completely redesigned coach that set new industry standards for luxury and offered a three-year warranty, the most extensive in the industry. 2000s MCI began its second century by strengthening its brand. In early 2000, the company unveiled a new logo and incorporated the MCI brand name into all of its business segments, establishing MCI Sales and Service as well as MCI Service Parts. Large public transportation agencies placed orders for MCI Commuter Coaches, totaling approximately 2,800 units in early 2000s, which included the largest -ever procurements of public transit vehicles.These milestones inspired several other important MCI innovations as well. MCI introduced the very first CNG Commuter Coach, delivering 77 units 1999 and 2000. In 2002, MCI also built the first hybrid -electric Commuter Coach, featuring a Cummins/ISL engine and an Allison EP 50 electric -drive hybrid propulsion system.Those coaches are still in operation. In 2001, MCI launched its MCI J4500 model and renamed its existing model lineup; the Renaissance became the E4500 and the D -Series 45 -foot and 40 -foot models became known as the D4500 and D4000, respectively. By the first quarter of 2004, the MCI J4500, - celebrated for its ease of maintenance, stylish good looks and • spiral entryway borrowed from the E4500, took its place as the industry's bestseller. In 2005, the restyled D4500 became the D4505 elevating its appeal in the tour and charter market. MCI accelerated its efforts in green transportation. In 2007, MCI unveiled models with the first generation of EPA -mandated clean -diesel engine technology that virtually eliminated particulate matter for a smoke-free exhaust. At the same time, the company began to publicize the environmental benefits of motor coach travel with its "Go Green, Go Coach, Go MCI" campaign. 2010s At the close of the new millennium's first decade, MCI's J4500 model continued as the industry's best-selling coach and its Buy America -compliant D4500 Commuter Coach and D4505 took the second and third top-selling spots in the industry's annual trend survey.The next generation of EPA -compliant 2010 clean -diesel engines arrived, promising near -zero emissions and fuel savings. As technology improvements to the coach models continued, MCI was upgrading its customer service technology as well, instituting online parts ordering, customer training webinars and Emergency Roadside Assistance customer support. Reliability Driven In 2011, MCI marked the 6,000th unit off its EIJ assembly line and a first-ever order from the City of Los Angeles for 95 compressed natural gas (CNG) Commuter Coach vehicles. MCI has a long history serving public transit, and the data confirm how well the MCI Commuter Coach performs in both reliability and total cost of ownership. It offers 42 percent greater seating capacity than a comparable transit bus at a cost that's 15 percent lower per seat. Additionally, in recent independent testing, the MCI Commuter Coach proved itself to be 10 times more reliable than the closest competitor. MCI Today Growing Strategically, Growing Smart: On July 2, 2012, MCI announced the completion of its acquisition of Setra's U.S. and Canadian operations and established a strategic partnership with Daimler Buses (Daimler).These important moves gave MCI responsibility for sales and service support of Setra S 417 and Setra S 407 motor coach models and its pre- owned coach inventory; the distribution of Setra and related genuine Daimler Buses parts; and operation of Setra's Orlando -based service center. Daimler also acquired a minority ownership position in MCI, forming an engineering, technology and manufacturing alliance as part of the transaction. Reliability Driven": Marking its 80th birthday, MCI, which has made the majority of the 55,000 coaches on the road today, has rededicated itself to building the most reliable coaches in North America,The MCI — Reliability DrivenTM philosophy reflects the company's promise to design, build and deliver expertly engineered coaches with top-quality components, the latest safety and security features and unsurpassed parts availability and service. it's a philosophy that drives MCI's factories and offices,alike. There's a new corporate culture at MCI where our multi -facility ISO 9001:2008 certification assures that all plants share best practices OF RfUABIUW , to consistently turn out world-class products and marketplace innovations. We are working every day to make this company better. Reliable Coaches New Standards of Accessibility, Convenience and Comfort: The economy and environment are redefining the way people travel.That's good for MCI.Today's municipal and private transportation systems are looking to coach transport a flexible, affordable and green option for passengers who want to make the most of their money and time.That's why MCI is investing in the latest onboard amenities that turn riders into lifetime customers: Wi-Fi, power outlets and flat - screen monitors to keep riders engaged, entertained and working. State -of -the art wheelchair lifts make accessibility and alternate transportation options possible for all. Renowned for their durability, dependability and curb appeal, the coaches ride on front -axle Koni shocks for a smoother, more responsive ride.The models feature an ACTIA multiplex system, brushless motors and stainless coolant tubes to maximize performance while delivering on the model's lowest -cost -of -operation ranking. Reliable Safety Safety First Safety Always: MCI continues to lead the market in important safety and performance features. In addition to our strong and safe semi-monocoque stainless structure, MCI coaches feature Electronic Stability Control, SmartWave( Tire Pressure monitoring system and a fire suppression system. Popular safety options include three-point passenger seatbelts Reliability Driven and reverse sensing. Reliable Parts and Service Aftermarket Support That's Second to None: MCI is there around the clock, whether it's an emergency on the road, a question in the garage or online. While our presence is widespread, our services are focused. MCI provides one of the best networks of aftermarket support in the industry, with expert technical help, onsite training and the largest inventory of OEM parts for all makes of motor coach makes and transit buses. And they're all backed by MCI's commitment to quality and reliability. Coaches That are Cleaner and Greener. One fully occupied motor coach can displace as many as 56 passenger cars from crowded highways and when it comes to carbon dioxide (Co2) per passenger mile, coaches pollute far less than trains, planes or cars. But that's only where the good news starts. MCI's new coach _ models are powered by the next generation of clean -diesel =' `� engine technology that promises near -zero emissions and increased fuel savings. MCI is the only manufacturer to offer an intercity model, the MCI Commuter Coach, in diesel - MCI is that 1 electric hybrid and CNG configurations. proud these low -emissions coaches are helping to reduce highway congestion and protect air quality. Coaches That Serve Virtually Every Customer and Purpose: No matter what the need, MCI has the coach. We serve the following markets: • Tour and charter • Scheduled and curbside service • Public transit • Pre -owned • Conversion/ Entertainer Looks and Longevity: At MCI, being Reliability DrivenTm also means knowing how to refine a good thing. Customers have made the MCI J4500 a bestseller for nine years running and now MCI is giving operators new reasons to add the 2013 J4500 to fleets — including ` some eye-catching style changes. Working with BMW Group Designworks USA — the team that gave the market -leading J4500 its unprecedented curb appeal — MCI is refining and improving the look and feel of our luxury coaches in 2013 and beyond. f `' The MCI Commuter Coach, in 45 -foot and 40 -foot versions, offers a comfortable, safe ride with ease of maintenance and low total cost of operation over many years.Today, MCI has options for clean commuting and offers the amenities that get people out of their cars and riding public transit. Some of the largest transit agencies in the country put the Commuter Coach model through millions of demanding miles. MCI is proud that the Commuter Coach continually stands up to the challenge. Quality for thelong distance commute; It's what makes MCI Reliability Driven. Reliability Driven 1• r 10' w Reliability Driven I I1 Y 1 I C I R R N w K a R Y K . a 4 ¢ " K ■ % 9' !t Cl 11 11 0 ♦ 1 t 1 I I r r � ie se x ez zc u. r a r u ez v x ¢ Ir a ct ' I O e W y .j,F i Y ZLY O F K H J �I WZ l] LL i--I N M d O = o Z Q IL CL O H Z rill' � o LL Z � � 9 C))� 13MUS H19 H1f10S �o V o z — — — Z#4weov 4— � I.�Pwe od - - i 1 Eg WAGS 1W1 ARM U L � W LLI Z ! � •� �2 9e46Moo �zz. Jnozd' co ' $ m i ; . 33NYN3LNrVW a o lrdm w 11+0 z Yo o a f� y < 5 ri N M LPI lD 1, 00 Q1 _j e q �N-I m-I _1 e q a�-I � 1 -4 N N N N N 13MUS H19 H1f10S 0 Reliability Driven'" ATTACHMENT H SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Reliability Driven" MOTOR COACH INDUSTRIES, INC. SERVICE PARTS AVAILABILITY MCI SERVICE PARTS, Inc. is the only authorized distributor of Motor Coach Industries, Inc. (MCII) original equipment service parts in the United State. MCI SERVICE PARTS, the largest supplier of aftermarket bus parts in the U.S., has been in the OEM coach replacement parts business since 1967. MCI SERVICE PARTS is staffed with knowledgeable field sales representatives, strategically located across North American, as well as an international staff of twenty professional customer service representatives, to assist with your coach parts needs; from on-line price & availability information to application assistance. Their Technical Service and on-site Engineering departments have computer access to, and maintain on file all of MCI's part number releases, change notices, drawings and bill of materials, to insure you receive the most current parts information. Also on staff is a trained Accident Coach Coordinator, responsible to insure timely receipt of body parts for damaged vehicles. Customer Service lines are open from 7 am to 7 pm CST Monday through Friday, and 8 am to 12 pm CST on Saturdays. A 24 hour toll-free fax line is available for order and other correspondence. Emergency 24 hour order service is also available for a nominal charge. MCI SERVICE PARTS maintains a large inventory of over 40,000 OEM bus parts - everything from rivets to front end frames. Along with their network of over 1,000 top quality vendors, MCI SERVICE PARTS offers the widest variety of parts for MCI as well as most other coach models. MCI SERVICE PARTS is also the exclusive distributor of COACHGUARDTM aftermarket parts. COACHGUARDTM parts are designed to meet the needs of bus operators who are looking for parts at affordable prices, while maintaining original equipment product quality. COACHGUARDTM products are value priced, quality engineered alternative that meet or exceed OEM performance specifications. MCI SERVICE PARTS has five strategically located distribution centers across the U.S. and Canada, to insure the timely processing of your orders. Most orders are shipped with 48 hours of receipt - freight prepaid. New parts purchased from MCI SERVICE PARTS and installed on the operator's coach after the prescribed vehicle warranty period will be covered by the parts manufacturer's standard warranty or six month after date of purchase, whichever is greater. For more information regarding MCI SERVICE PARTS, Inc. and the services available, please contact them directly at 1-800-323-12382 or write: MCI SERVICE PARTS, Inc. Attention: Customer Service Department 7001 Universal Coach Drive Louisville KY 40258 Orders are shipped prepaid via the least expensive method. Air freight or other special routings will be shipped collect. m Reliability Driven' ATTACHMENT QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS Reliability Driven - Quality at the Source (QAS) MCI is currently implementing a revised quality system at its production facilities in Winnipeg and Pembina called "Quality at the Source" (QAS) which has been primarily used at the Toyota car company. QAS is an initiative building on our "Reliability Driven" theme. The key elements of QAS are: o The "voice of the customer" becomes the primary driving force. o Relationships with suppliers become closer. o Responsiveness to changing market conditions is enhanced. o The organizational structure decision making shifts from a vertical to a horizontal focus o The workforce is empowered. o Improved organization flexibility MCI's QAS model utilizes the following principles: o The quality standards for each operation must be ensured before parts are passed to the next operation o The line is stopped in the event of a defect o The reason for the defect is determined and the condition causing the defect is eliminated before continuing The above promotes the organization to go to all necessary lengths to correct conditions that cause production errors. The expected benefits to Victor Valley of MCI's implementation of QAS include: o The number of defects reaching the field drops due to improved first pass quality o Factory -floor organization is improved resulting in higher quality and more efficient assembly operations o Production flow times are optimized assuring more precise delivery timing Additional benefits to both Victor Valley and MCI include: o Workstations are well organized and neat, no idle parts or carts clutter the workspace o Fewer expeditors are needed o Storage racks for work -in -process are largely eliminated o Material handling is simplified, often with manual methods replacing automation Motor Coach Industries 11700 East Golf Road, Suite 300 1 Schaumburg, Illinois 60173 1847 285 2000 1 866 624 2622 Toll Free www.mcicoach.com Reliability Driven'" o Re -work stations are reduced o Scrap is significantly reduced, and the factory floor is much cleaner The Toyota Motor Company is credited with initiating the next production paradigm shift, originally referred to as the "Toyota Production System" (TPS). With later refinements and modifications, many by non -Toyota people and companies, this system has come to be known as "Lean Production." First and foremost, it is important to understand that "Lean Production" is not merely a set of practices usually found on the factory floor, but rather a fundamental change in how the people within an organization think and what they value, thus transforming how they behave. Within a "Lead' organization, everyone is focused on identifying and eliminating sources of waste and inefficiency. The six (6) strategic concepts of "Lead' (4) Near Perfect Product Quality Near Perfect Quality (3) Flow and Pull Motor Coach Industries 11700 East Golf Road, Suite 300 1 Schaumburg, Illinois 60173 1847 285 2000 1 866 624 2622 Toll Free www.mcicoach.com (6) Relationships Based on Mutual Customer (1) Customer Value and Value Tri -nd Commitment Value Relationship Waste _ Building Minimization (2) Waste Minimization a Lean Continuous Improvemei Horizontal Flow and Pull 5) Horizontal Organizational Organization ocus (4) Near Perfect Product Quality Near Perfect Quality (3) Flow and Pull Motor Coach Industries 11700 East Golf Road, Suite 300 1 Schaumburg, Illinois 60173 1847 285 2000 1 866 624 2622 Toll Free www.mcicoach.com F71 Reliability Driver" ATTACHMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS MCI WILL SUBMIT SAMPLE CD's OF OUR MANUALS WITH THE HARD COPIES OF OUR PROPOSAL. November 2015 MCI Bus Purchase Unit Costs Vehicle base cost $ 691,636.90 Taxable amount $ 655,040.79 Tax $ 59,189.97 tire fees $ 15.75 Bikeracks $ 1,299.76 Farebox prewire $ 909.83 Camera prewire $ 415.92 Spare Apollo cameras and Hard drives $ 2,500.00 AVL Installation Costs $ 4,500.00 Total Cost per Vehicle $ 760,468.14 One-time costs Travel and inspection fees $ 10,000.00 *Diagnostic equipment/spare parts $ 32,659.31 Total Project Cost $ 3,845,000.00 * To purchase equipment needed for new CNG engine type